Old Town Arts Center (OTAC)-CN181114
CONTRACT CONDITIONS
AND SPECIFICATIONS
for the general construction of
OLD TOWN ARTS CENTER
For City of Coppell, TX
Project Manual
Issue for Construction
CORGAN ASSOCIATES, INC.
401 North Houston Street
Dallas, TX 75202
(214) 748-2000
18 September 2018
Project 17008.0000
18 September 2018 000003 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
2
3
4
Section Title Pages 5
6
Title Sheet ......................................................................................................................... 1 7
Table of Contents ......................................................................................... 7 8
Table of Contents, Landscape ....................................................................................... 1 9
10
11
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 12
13
General Requirements Subgroup 14
15
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16
17
01 11 00 Summary of Work ........................................................................................................... 3 18
01 23 00 Alternates ...................................................................................................... 2 19
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures .................................................................................................. 6 20
01 29 00 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................ 7 21
01 31 00 Project Coordination ....................................................................................................... 5 22
01 31 19 Project Meetings............................................................................................................... 4 23
01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedules .................................................................................. 2 24
01 32 33 Photographic Documentation ....................................................................................... 2 25
01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ................................................................ 9 26
01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements ................................................................................................ 2 27
01 42 00 References ....................................................................................................................... 10 28
01 45 16 Contractor’s Quality Control ......................................................................................... 5 29
01 45 29 Testing Agency Services.................................................................................................. 6 30
01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls ........................................................ 9 31
01 58 00 Project Identification and Signs ..................................................................................... 2 32
01 60 00 Product Requirements ..................................................................................................... 7 33
01 71 23 Field Engineering ............................................................................................................. 2 34
01 73 29 Cutting and Patching ....................................................................................................... 3 35
01 74 13 Construction Cleaning .................................................................................................... 2 36
01 74 23 Final Cleaning ................................................................................................................... 2 37
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ........................................................................................................ 4 38
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................................................. 4 39
01 78 30 Warranties and Bonds ..................................................................................................... 3 40
01 78 39 Project Record Documents ............................................................................................ 5 41
01 78 46 Extra Materials ................................................................................................................. 2 42
01 79 00 Systems Demonstrations and Training ......................................................................... 5 43
01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements .......................................................................... 44
45
46
Facility Construction Subgroup 47
48
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 49
50
Not Used. 51
52
18 September 2018 000003 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 1
2
03 11 00 Structural Concrete Formwork ...................................................................................... 7 3
03 11 15 Expanded Polystyrene Foam Block Formwork .......................................................... 2 4
03 15 00 Embedded Metal Assemblies and Inserts .................................................................... 5 5
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing ...................................................................................................... 5 6
03 30 01 Cast in Place Concrete for Landscaping ..................................................................... 12 7
03 31 00 Structural Concrete ........................................................................................................ 15 8
03 35 73 Concrete Floor Polishing ................................................................................................ 4 9
03 39 00 Concrete Sealing ............................................................................................................... 3 10
03 62 14 Grouting Steel Base Plates .............................................................................................. 4 11
12
13
14
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 15
16
04 05 13 Masonry Mortar and Grout ............................................................................................ 5 17
04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage, Reinforcement, and Accessories .............................................. 5 18
04 21 13 Brick Masonry .................................................................................................................. 7 19
04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry ................................................................................................... 7 20
04 73 13 Calcium Silicate Masonry Units ..................................................................................... 6 21
22
23
DIVISION 05 – METALS 24
25
05 12 00 Structural Steel ................................................................................................................ 12 26
05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel ...................................................................... 7 27
05 21 00 Steel Joists ......................................................................................................................... 5 28
05 31 13 Composite Metal Floor Deck and Field Welded Shear Studs ................................... 6 29
05 31 23 Metal Roof Deck .............................................................................................................. 5 30
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ......................................................................................... 7 31
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ......................................................................................................... 17 32
05 51 00 Metal Stairs ........................................................................................................................ 5 33
05 52 13 Steel Handrails and Railings ........................................................................................... 5 34
05 55 00 Stair Nosings ..................................................................................................................... 2 35
36
37
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 38
39
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry – Structural ........................................................................................ 5 40
06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry .................................................................................... 5 41
06 16 63 Moisture Resistant Sheathing ......................................................................................... 4 42
06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry ................................................................................................ 4 43
06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork.................................................................................. 9 44
06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets ........................................................... 8 45
06 42 16 Wood-Veneer Paneling ................................................................................................... 5 46
47
48
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 49
50
07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing .............................................................................. 9 51
07 21 13 Board Insulation ............................................................................................................... 5 52
18 September 2018 000003 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
07 21 16 Batt Insulation .................................................................................................................. 3 1
07 26 00 Sheet Vapor Retarders [and Barriers] (Slab-on-Grade) .............................................. 4 2
07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers ........................................................................ 10 3
07 41 13 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels .............................................................................. 16 4
07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing ............................................................................. 18 5
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim .................................................................................... 11 6
07 71 00 Roof Specialties .............................................................................................................. 10 7
07 72 00 Roof Accessories ............................................................................................................ 11 8
07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping ................................................................................................ 8 9
07 84 46 Fire Resistive Joint Systems ............................................................................................ 7 10
07 92 00 Joint Sealers ...................................................................................................................... 9 11
12
13
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 14
15
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ................................................................................ 11 16
08 14 16 Veneer Faced Wood Doors ........................................................................................... 8 17
08 31 13 Access Doors .................................................................................................................... 4 18
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors .............................................................................................. 10 19
08 34 72 Acoustically Gasketed Doors ......................................................................................... 3 20
08 34 73 Metal Sound Control Doors .......................................................................................... 4 21
08 44 50 Glazed Wood Framed Curtain Walls and Entrances ............................................... 14 22
08 56 73 Sound Control Windows ................................................................................................ 4 23
08 70 11 Door Hardware .............................................................................................................. 29 24
08 80 00 Glazing ........................................................................................................ 15 25
08 90 00 Metal Wall Louvers .......................................................................................................... 4 26
27
28
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 29
30
09 29 50 Gypsum Board Systems ................................................................................................ 14 31
09 30 00 Tiling .................................................................................................................................. 7 32
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ................................................................................................ 6 33
09 54 26 Linear Wood Ceilings ...................................................................................................... 4 34
09 61 05 Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Control for Concrete Slabs .................... 6 35
09 64 53 Resilient Wood Flooring Systems ................................................................................. 7 36
09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring ..................................................................................................... 6 37
09 68 13 Tile Carpeting .................................................................................................................. 5 38
09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting ................................................................................................................ 6 39
09 77 23 Acoustic Panels ................................................................................................................ 5 40
09 77 50 Sanitary Wall Panels ......................................................................................................... 3 41
09 91 13 Exterior Painting .............................................................................................................. 7 42
09 91 23 Interior Painting ............................................................................................................. 12 43
44
45
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 46
47
10 14 00 Signage ............................................................................................................................... 4 48
10 14 53 Site Signage ....................................................................................................................... 3 49
10 21 13 Metal Toilet Compartments ........................................................................................... 5 50
10 28 13 Toilet and Bath Accessories ........................................................................................... 5 51
10 44 13 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, & Accessories ............................................................... 3 52
18 September 2018 000003 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
10 51 13 Metal Lockers ................................................................................................................... 6 1
10 73 26 Walkway Cover ................................................................................................................ 4 2
10 90 99 Miscellaneous Specialties ................................................................................................ 4 3
4
5
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 6
7
11 30 00 Appliances ......................................................................................................................... 3 8
11 61 13 Concert Enclosure System .......................................................................... 10 9
11 61 23 Portable Platform System ............................................................................................... 8 10
11 61 33 Stage Rigging and Curtain Systems ........................................................... 37 11
11 61 53 Stage Lighting Instruments and Portable Equipment ............................... 10 12
11 61 63 Stage Lighting Control and Dimming and Power System ....................................... 21 13
14
15
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 16
17
12 24 13 Roller Window Shades .................................................................................................... 7 18
12 36 63 Solid Surface Fabrications .............................................................................................. 3 19
12 36 66 Quartz Agglomerate Countertops ................................................................................. 3 20
12 48 13 Entrance Mats .................................................................................................................. 2 21
12 60 10 Fixed Auditorium Seating .......................................................................... 10 22
12 62 16 Portable Audience Seating .............................................................................................. 6 23
12 93 00 Site Furnishings ................................................................................................................ 2 24
25
26
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 27
28
Not Used. 29
30
31
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 32
33
Not Used. 34
35
36
Facility Services Subgroup 37
38
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 39
40
21 00 00 Fire Suppression – Table of Contents .......................................................................... 1 41
21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression ............................................................. 7 42
23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping ................................................ 3 43
23 05 18 Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping .................................................................... 2 44
21 05 48 Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment ............................ 3 45
21 05 53 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment ...................................... 3 46
21 10 00 Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems ..................................................................... 16 47
21 12 00 Fire Suppression Standpipes ........................................................................................ 11 48
21 32 13 Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps .............................................................. 6 49
21 34 00 Pressure-Maintenance Pumps ........................................................................................ 3 50
21 39 00 Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers ............................................................................... 8 51
52
53
18 September 2018 000003 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 1
2
22 00 00 Plumbing – Table of Contents ....................................................................................... 1 3
22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment ........................................ 3 4
22 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping .................................................. 4 5
22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals and Plumbing Piping ............................................................ 3 6
22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping ................................................................................. 2 7
22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping ....................................................................... 5 8
22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping .................................................................. 9 9
22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ................................... 7 10
22 05 48 Vibration Controls and Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........................................ 4 11
22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ................................................... 3 12
22 07 16 Plumbing Equipment Insulation ................................................................................. 10 13
22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation .......................................................................................... 12 14
22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping ................................................................................................. 12 15
22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties ................................................................................ 9 16
22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ..................................................................................... 7 17
22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties ................................................................................... 6 18
19
20
DIVISION 23 –HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 21
22
23 00 00 Mechanical – Table of Contents .................................................................................... 1 23
23 00 10 Basic Mechanical Requirements .................................................................................. 16 24
23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment ............................................ 3 25
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ........................................ 7 26
23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment .............................................. 5 27
23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment ....................................................... 4 28
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC ............................................................. 9 29
23 07 13 Duct Insulation .............................................................................................................. 11 30
23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation .............................................................................................. 12 31
23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC ................................................................... 16 32
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping ............................................................................................................ 9 33
23 31 13 Metal Ducts ..................................................................................................................... 11 34
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories ..................................................................................................... 10 35
23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators ............................................................................................... 6 36
23 36 00 Air Terminal Units ........................................................................................................... 6 37
23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles .................................................................................... 3 38
23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration ................................................................................................. 3 39
23 62 00 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units .............................................................. 3 40
23 73 13 Modular Indoor Central-station Air Handling Units ................................................. 6 41
23 81 26 Split-System Air-Conditioners ....................................................................................... 4 42
43
44
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 45
46
Not Used. 47
48
49
50
18 September 2018 000003 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 1
2
26 00 00 Electrical – Table of Contents ....................................................................................... 1 3
26 00 10 Basic Electrical Requirements ...................................................................................... 13 4
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ............................................. 4 5
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ......................................................... 6 6
26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems .............................................................. 5 7
26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems ................................................................. 9 8
26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling .................................. 4 9
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems ............................................................................. 6 10
26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices ............................................................................................... 7 11
26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers ............................................................................................ 4 12
26 24 16 Panelboards ....................................................................................................................... 7 13
26 27 26 Wiring Devices ................................................................................................................. 7 14
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ...................................................................... 3 15
26 32 13 Engine Generators ......................................................................................................... 14 16
26 36 00 Transfer Switches ............................................................................................................. 8 17
26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits ......... 5 18
19
20
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 21
22
27 00 00 Technology Table of Contents ...................................................................................... 1 23
27 00 10 Division 27 and 28 Systems General Provisions ....................................................... 15 24
27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Systems ..................................... 3 25
27 05 27 Raceways for Sound Video Communications (SVC) Systems .................................. 9 26
27 05 28 Raceways for Technology ............................................................................................. 16 27
27 05 29 Combined Low Voltage/Power Floor Boxes ............................................................. 5 28
27 10 00 Structured Cabling System ............................................................................................ 24 29
27 41 00 Audio/Video Systems ................................................................................................... 31 30
27 41 00 Audio/Video Systems – Appendix B ............................................................ 7 31
32
33
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 34
35
28 05 13 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security ....................................... 7 36
28 10 00 Security Systems ............................................................................................................. 39 37
28 20 00 Closed Circuit Television System ............................................................... 21 38
28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System ..................................................................... 14 39
40
41
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup 42
43
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 44
45
31 00 00 Earthwork ......................................................................................................................... 2 46
31 23 00 Excavation and Fill .......................................................................................................... 2 47
31 23 03 Building Pad Preparation ................................................................................................ 6 48
31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls............................................................................ 1 49
31 31 16 Soil Treatment .................................................................................................................. 3 50
31 32 13.19 Lime Treated Base Courses ............................................................................................ 1 51
31 63 29 Drilled Piers ...................................................................................................................... 5 52
18 September 2018 000003 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
1
2
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 3
4
32 13 13 Portland Cement Concrete Paving ................................................................................ 2 5
32 13 14 Concrete Paving for Landscape ..................................................................................... 6 6
32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants ...................................................................................... 4 7
32 14 50 Decorative Stone .............................................................................................................. 3 8
32 17 13 Parking Bumpers .............................................................................................................. 2 9
32 17 23 Pavement Marking ........................................................................................................... 2 10
32 35 19 Integrally Colored Concrete Finishing .......................................................................... 5 11
32 84 00 Planting Irrigation ............................................................................................................ 4 12
32 92 00 Turf and Grasses .............................................................................................................. 4 13
32 93 00 Plants ................................................................................................................................. 4 14
15
16
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 17
18
33 10 00 Water Utilities ................................................................................................................... 2 19
33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities .............................................................................................. 2 20
33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities ................................................................................................. 2 21
33 46 00 Subdrainage ....................................................................................................................... 6 22
23
24
END OF DOCUMENT 25
- i -
COPPELL ARTS CENTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
This project shall be constructed to the technical specifications indexed below. Where not specifically
addressed by the technical specifications, the Contractor shall utilize the North Central Texas Council
of Governments Specifications for Public Works Construction, October 2004 Edition. Any
permissible deviation from those standard specifications will be noted in the section of Special
Provisions to the NCTCOG Standard Specifications, Special Contract Requirements, Plans and/or
these Specifications.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO NCTCOG: GENERAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
03 30 01 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FOR LANDSCAPE WORK
12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS
32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANT
32 14 50 DECORATIVE STONE
32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING FOR LANDSCAPE WORK
32 35 19 INTEGRAL COLORED CONCRETE
32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION
32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES
32 93 00 PLANTS
01 May 2018 01 11 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 11 00
2
3 SUMMARY OF WORK
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Project; Work covered by Contract Documents.
12 2. Contracts.
13 3. Work by Owner.
14 4. Owner furnished Documents.
15 5. Owner furnished products.
16 6. Contractor use of site and premises.
17 7. Owner occupancy.
18
19 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
20
21 A. Work of this Contract comprises general construction including mechanical and electrical of
22 The Old Town Arts Center, Travis Street, Coppell, Texas 75019 for the City of Coppell,
23 Owner.
24
25 1.3 CONTRACT METHOD
26
27 A. Construct Work under single lump sum segregated contract. Project is tax exempt and
28 Contract will be executed with separate contract sums for materials and services to comply
29 with requirements of 1991 Texas House Bill 11.
30
31 B. Contract for this Project will be on form provided by Owner.
32
33 C. Items noted "NIC" (Not in Contract) will be furnished and installed by Owner.
34
35 1.4 OWNER FURNISHED DOCUMENTS
36
37 A. These documents are not part of the Contract Documents and are included by reference
38 only. Contract may include other Owner-Furnished Documents not herein listed.
39
40 B. By offering a Proposal, Contractor accepts responsibility for conclusions drawn from Owner-
41 furnished documents. By executing the Agreement, Contractor accepts responsibility for
42 subsequent action taken based upon his conclusions.
43
44 C. These documents take precedence over the Contract Documents Specifications with regard
45 to existing above-ground and subsurface conditions.
46
47 D. Following are those responsible for Owner-furnished documents:
48 1. Soils report:
49 a. Compiled By: Alpha Testing
50 b. Dated: January 19, 2017
51 2. Legal Description:
52 a. Compiled By: Pacheco Koch
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 11 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Dated: January 16, 2017
2 3. Boundary Survey:
3 a. Compiled By: Pacheco Koch
4 b. Dated: January 16, 2017
5 4. Topographic Survey:
6 a. Compiled By: Pacheco Koch
7 b. Dated: January 16, 2017
8 5. Preliminary Earthwork Rough Grading Diagram:
9 a. Compiled By: Core Construction
10 b. Dated: March 03, 2018
11
12
13 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE and PREMISES
14
15 A. Contractor shall have complete and exclusive use of immediate premises of Project site.
16
17 B. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract,
18 stored on project site. Store materials and products only in those areas indicated for staging.
19
20 C. Move stored products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of Owner
21 or as required by Architect. Do not unnecessarily encumber project site with materials and
22 equipment.
23
24 D. Staging and material storage shall be limited to areas indicated by Architect. Obtain specific
25 permission from Architect for use of other areas for storage and staging.
26
27 E. Do not overload existing or new structures with weight that would compromise safety.
28 Verify design loads for structure if necessary prior to loading structure.
29
30 F. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.
31
32 G. Protect existing lawns, sidewalks, pavements, curbs and utilities subject to damage by work
33 under this Contract. Repair or replace existing work damaged by Contractor. Replace
34 existing lawns damaged by Contractor's activities with hydromulched lawn seed to provide
35 full stand of replacement grass.
36
37 H. Parking areas for Contractor's personnel shall be as indicated by Architect and shall be
38 acceptable to Owner.
39
40 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS
41
42 A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
43 entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
44
45
46 PART 2 PRODUCTS
47
48 2.1 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS - ASBESTOS
49
50 A. Owner requires, under terms of this Contract, that products and materials used meet the
51 following requirements:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 11 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. The Texas Asbestos Health Protection Act, Texas Civil Statutes, Article 4477-3a, as
2 amended.
3 2. Contain not more than 1.0% of any kind or combination of asbestos, as determined by
4 the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) recommended test methods as listed in
5 EPA/600R-93/116 July 1993 “Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk
6 Building Materials”. This means one material component or a structure or layer of a
7 material sample. Composite sample analysis is not allowed.
8
9 B. Contractor, by executing this Contract, accepts responsibility for prohibiting materials or
10 products containing asbestos from being used on this Project.
11
12 C. Should Contractor furnish, use, or install products or materials containing asbestos,
13 knowingly or otherwise, he has not met the requirements of this Contract.
14
15 D. Asbestos Survey: Provide an asbestos survey, meeting the same criteria as required for new
16 building permits, by an inspector licensed by the Texas Department of Health as required by
17 the Texas Health Protection Act, Texas Civil Statutes, Article 4477-3a, as amended.
18 1. Preliminary Survey: Contractor shall submit preliminary survey of materials installed at
19 time of Substantial Completion with request for Substantial Completion to the Architect.
20 2. Final Survey: Contractor shall submit revised survey reflecting materials install after
21 Substantial Completion to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner prior to release of
22 Retainage.
23
24 2.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS – MOLD
25
26 A. If mold is present on the inside of the building; determine source of moisture and correct
27 prior to performing the following:
28 1. Non-porous Surfaces: Mold growing on steel, aluminum or other non-porous materials
29 may be cleaned using methods recommended by an Environmental Inspector licensed by
30 the Texas Department of Health.
31 2. Porous Surfaces: Entire mold-contaminated surface must be removed and disposed of
32 using methods recommended by an Environmental Inspector licensed by the Texas
33 Department of Health.
34 3. Following elimination of mold provide a report prepared by an Environmental Inspector
35 licensed by the Texas Department of Health that the building is free from mold
36 contamination.
37
38
39 PART 3 EXECUTION
40
41 Not Used.
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 01 23 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
SECTION 01 23 00 1
2
ALTERNATES 3
4
PART 1 GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. Section Includes: 9
1. Identification of each Alternate by number, and description of basic changes to be 10
incorporated into Work. 11
2. Submission procedures. 12
3. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time. 13
14
1.2 REQUIREMENTS 15
16
A. Submit Alternates with full description of proposed Alternative and effect on adjacent or 17
related components. 18
19
B. Alternates quoted on Bid Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. 20
Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. 21
22
C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate Work of each Alternative. 23
24
1.3 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATIVES 25
26
A. State the amount to be added to or to be deducted from the Base Bid for Alternates 27
described below and list in Bid Form document or supplement to it, which requests a 28
difference in Bid Price by adding to or deducting from Base Bid price. 29
30
B. Bid will be evaluated on Base Bid price. After determination of preferred lowest bidder, 31
consideration will be given to Alternates and Bid Price adjustments. 32
33
34
PART 2 PRODUCTS 35
36
Not Used. 37
38
39
PART 3 EXECUTION 40
41
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 42
43
A. Alternate No. 1: West Public Parking Lot: Deleted. 44
45
B. Alternate No. 2: West Garden: RE: Architectural (1/A00-01, 5/A00-02, 3/A05-04, A05-30), 46
Civil (C2.1, C3.1, C5.1, C6.1, C7.1, C8.1), Landscape (L1.00, L1.03, L2.00, L2.03), Irrigation 47
(L3.00, L3.03), Electrical (E01-01, E06-1, E06-4), Structural (S06-01, S06-11, S-6-33, S06-48
42), Technology (T01-01), with associated details and specification sections. 49
Excavation and subgrade preparation 50
18 September 2018 01 23 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
Grading 1
Concrete paving and drainage 2
Site Lighting and utilities 3
Planting and irrigation 4
Site improvements 5
Parking lot entrances 6
Erosion control 7
Masonry 8
Concrete Foundation 9
Wood fencing 10
11
C. Alternate No. 3: Grove Gazebo: RE: Architectural (1/A00-01, 4/A00-02, 3/A05-04), Civil 12
(C2.1, C3.1, C5.1, C6.1, C7.1, C8.1), Landscape (L1.00, L1.03, L2.00, L2.03), Irrigation 13
(L3.00, L3.03), Electrical (E01-01, E06-1, E06-4), with associated details and specification 14
sections. 15
Concrete Foundation 16
Wood frame shell 17
Electrical power and lighting 18
19
D. Alternate No. 4: Hall Foundation System: Deleted 20
21
E. Alternate No. 5: Hall Adjustable Acoustic Treatment: Substitute acoustic banners 22
for acoustic velour curtain assembly. Delete acoustic curtain pocket, curtain, track, 23
and associated structural steel assembly. Provide motorized acoustic rolling 24
banners. RE: Architectural (1/A03-03, 2/A04-11, 1/A04-12, 1/A05-12), Theatre (TVA 25
101), with associated details and specification sections. 26
27
28
END OF SECTION 29
01 May 2018 01 25 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 25 00
2
3 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
4
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6
7 A. Section Includes:
8 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
9
10 1.2 DEFINITIONS
11
12 A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
13 from those required by the Contract Documents, and proposed by Contractor, prior to
14 award of Contract.
15 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
16 changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
17 unavailability of required warranty terms.
18 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are
19 not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage
20 to Contractor or Owner.
21
22 B. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award
23 of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents, and are not subject to
24 requirements specified in this Section.
25
26 1.3 SUBMITTALS
27
28 A. Substitution Requests: Architect will consider only written requests from Contractor for
29 any substitution of products in place of those specified, using form provided at the end of
30 this Section.
31 1. Submit one PDF copy of each request for consideration. Identify product or
32 fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
33 number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
34 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
35 following, as applicable:
36 a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation
37 cannot be provided, if applicable.
38 b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to
39 other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and
40 separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
41 substitution.
42 c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with
43 those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
44 Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
45 performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
46 characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated.
47 Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 25 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
2 fabrication and installation procedures.
3 e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
4 f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
5 g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
6 addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
7 h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and
8 interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
9 i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
10 Project, from ICC-ES or other applicable code organization.
11 j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
12 substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
13 overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction
14 cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from
15 manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of
16 purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
17 k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
18 l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
19 requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution
20 request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for
21 applications indicated.
22 m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
23 subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to
24 produce indicated results.
25 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
26 documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
27 substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
28 proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt
29 of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
30 a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
31 Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
32 b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
33 proposed substitution within time allocated.
34
35 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
36
37 A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
38 substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
39 perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
40
41 1.5 PROCEDURES
42
43 A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the
44 approved substitutions.
45
46 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
47
48 A. In making formal request for substitution Contractor represents that:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 25 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or
2 superior in respects to that specified.
3 2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified.
4 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and will make
5 such changes as may be required for Work to be complete.
6 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may
7 subsequently become apparent.
8 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not costs
9 under separate contracts.
10
11 1.7 ARCHITECT DUTIES
12
13 A. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions.
14
15 B. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
16
17 C. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.
18
19
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
22 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS, GENERAL
23
24 A. Properties including, but not limited to following, will be considered as applicable:
25 1. Physical dimension requirements to satisfy space limitations.
26 2. Static and dynamic weight limitations, structural properties.
27 3. Audible noise levels.
28 4. Vibration generation.
29 5. Interchangeability of parts or components.
30 6. Accessibility for maintenance, possible removal or replacement.
31 7. Colors, textures and compatibility with other materials, products, assemblies and
32 components.
33 8. Equipment capacities and performance characteristics.
34
35 B. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:
36 1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings, Product Data Submittals, or
37 Requests for Information (RFIs).
38 2. They are requested directly by subcontractor or supplier.
39 3. Acceptance would require substantial revisions to Contract Documents or Contract
40 time.
41 4. Additional cost to Owner is involved.
42
43 C. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of
44 Architect. If proposed substitution is not accepted, provide specified product or
45 materials.
46
47 D. Burden of proof for merits of proposed substitute is upon proposer. Architect's decision
48 of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution will be final.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 25 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 E. Review of Architect, acceptance or failure to take exceptions to substitutions or other
3 review documents, shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for compliance with
4 performance or other requirements of Contract Documents.
5
6 F. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any expenses incurred by Owner or
7 Architect for changes to Contract Documents ultimately required by accepted Contractor
8 requests for substitutions.
9
10 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
11
12 A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of
13 need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and
14 review of related submittals.
15 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
16 following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
17 Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
18 these requirements:
19 a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
20 produce indicated results.
21 b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
22 c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
23 schedule.
24 d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
25 jurisdiction.
26 e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
27 f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
28 Work.
29 g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
30 h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
31 substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
32 uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable
33 to all contractors involved.
34 B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if
35 received within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that
36 time may be considered or rejected at sole discretion of Architect.
37 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
38 following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
39 Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
40 these requirements:
41 a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,
42 energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
43 responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may
44 include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services,
45 increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
46 b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
47 Documents.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 25 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
2 produce indicated results.
3 d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
4 e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
5 schedule.
6 f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
7 jurisdiction.
8 g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
9 h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
10 Work.
11 i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
12 j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
13 substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
14 uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable
15 to all contractors involved.
16
17
18 PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
20 Not Used.
21
22 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 25 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
2
To Architect:
Project Name:
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section Page Paragraph Description
The undersigned Contractor requests consideration of the following:
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
1.Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance
and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly
identified, both on the proposed substitution and the original specified product.
2.Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents, which proposed
Substitution will require for its proper installation.
The undersigned Contractor states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct.
1.The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions on Drawings.
2.The undersigned Contractor will pay for changes to the building design, including architectural or
engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
3.The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades, the construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
4.Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
The Contractor further states that the function, appearance and quality of the Proposed Substitution are
equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. The Contractor further warrants that the intent of
specification section 01 25 00, Article 1.6 has been met.
1.Cost Reduction to the Owner: $
ACCEPTANCES:
1.Contractor Acceptance:Representing:
Date:
2.Owner Acceptance:Representing
Date:
3.Architect Acceptance:Representing
Date:Corgan
Accepted as Noted
Not Accepted
Received too late
Resubmit with complete information
3
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 29 00
2
3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL7
8
9 1.1 SUMMARY
10
11 A. Section Includes:
12 1. Applications for Payment to Architect in accordance with schedule established by
13 Conditions of Contract, and Agreement Between Owner and Contractor.
14 2. Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of Work in accordance with schedule
15 established in this Section. Upon request of Architect, support values with data which
16 substantiate correctness.
17 3. Unit Prices.
18 4. Change Order Procedures.
19
20 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
21
22 A. Preparation:
23 1. Coordinate preparation of Schedule of Values with preparation of Construction Progress
24 Schedule.
25 2. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules
26 and forms, including following:
27 a. Construction Progress Schedule, in CPM or bar chart format.
28 b. Application for Payment form.
29 c. List of subcontractors.
30 d. Schedule of alternates.
31 e. List of products.
32 f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
33 g. Schedule of submittals.
34 3. Submit initial Schedule of Values to Architect within 14 days of Notice to Proceed.
35 4. Submit revised Schedule of Values at earliest possible date, but no later than minimum of
36 20 days before scheduled date of Initial Application for Payment.
37
38 B. Form and Content:
39 1. Arrange Schedule of Values on 8-1/2" x 11" tabular form on white paper in format
40 acceptable to Architect.
41 2. Use bar chart or CPM chart as guide to establish format; compile information based on
42 completed tasks.
43 3. Project Identification:
44 a. Project name and location.
45 b. Name of Architect.
46 c. Project number.
47 d. Contractor's name and address.
48 e. Date of submittal.
49 f. Owner's contract designation.
50 4. Provide columns to indicate following for each item listed:
51 a. Generic name.
52 b. Specific task description.
53 c. Change Orders numbers that have affected value.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. Dollar value.
2 e. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100
3 percent.
4 5. Follow table of contents of Project Manual as format for listing component items;
5 identify each line item with number and title of respective major section of specifications.
6 6. Provide breakdown of Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation
7 of Applications for Payment and progress reports.
8 7. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items by completed task in
9 various locations.
10 8. For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under item.
11 9. Round amounts off to nearest whole dollar, total of listed values shall equal total Contract
12 Sum.
13 10. For each part of Work where Application for Payment includes materials or equipment
14 purchased, fabricated, and stored, but not yet installed, include separate line items on
15 Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion,
16 and for total installed value of that part of Work.
17
18 C. Margins of Cost:
19 1. Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to extent that such
20 items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment.
21 2. Each item in Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete,
22 including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin.
23 3. At Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct
24 costs of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in Schedule of Values.
25 4. Furnish line item cost for each of following general cost items:
26 a. Bonds.
27 b. Insurance.
28 c. Field supervision and layout.
29 d. Temporary facilities and controls.
30 e. Testing.
31
32 D. Resubmittal:
33 1. After review by Architect, revise and resubmit schedule as necessary.
34 2. Resubmit revised schedule monthly in same manner.
35
36 E. Subschedule of Unit Material Values:
37 1. Submit subschedule of unit costs and quantities for following:
38 a. Products specified under unit cost allowance specified in Section 01 21 00.
39 b. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products.
40 2. Form and Content:
41 a. Form of submittal shall parallel that of Schedule of Values, with each item identified
42 same as line item in Schedule of Values.
43 b. Unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste.
44 3. Unit values for materials shall be broken down as follows:
45 a. Cost of material, delivered and unloaded at Project Site, with taxes paid.
46 b. Installation costs, including overhead and profit.
47 4. Installed unit value multiplied by quantity listed shall equal cost of that item in Schedule
48 of Values.
49 5. After review by Architect, revise and resubmit subschedules as necessary.
50 6. Resubmit revised subschedules monthly in same manner.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
2
3 A. Progress payments shall be made as Work proceeds at intervals stated in Contract.
4
5 B. Work covered by Progress Payments shall, at time of payment, become property of Owner.
6
7 C. Form of Application for Payment will be notarized AIA Document G702 - Application and
8 Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet,
9 submitted in quadruplicate.
10
11 D. Contractor shall submit to Architect within 15 days of execution of Owner -Contractor
12 Agreement proposed sample of Lien Waiver and Bills Paid Affidavit forms for review and
13 acceptance by Architect for use on this Contract.
14
15 E. Conditions governing regular schedule for applications, payment, and retainage are as stated
16 in Contract.
17
18 F. Monthly Applications for Payment shall include Waivers of Liens for Work included in
19 previous months' Application for Payment. Waiver of Liens for subcontractors and
20 materialmen shall be total amount paid prior to previous month's Application for Payment.
21
22 G. With each Application for Payment, Contractor shall certify that such Application for
23 Payment represents just estimate of cost reimbursable to Contractor under terms of Contract,
24 and shall also certify that there are no Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens outstanding at date
25 of Application for Payment, that due and payable bills with respect to Work have been paid
26 to date or shall be paid from proceeds of Application for Payment, and that there is no
27 known basis for filing of Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens against surety in connection with
28 Work, and that Waivers and Bills Paid Affidavit forms from subcontractors and materialmen
29 have been, or will be, obtained in form specified in Contract.
30
31 H. Preparation of Application:
32 1. Format and data required:
33 a. Submit itemized applications on AIA Document G702 - Application and
34 Certification for Payment Form, with AIA Document G703 Continuation Forms.
35 b. Provide itemized data on continuation sheets with format, schedules, line items, and
36 values stipulated in Schedule of Values and acceptable to Architect.
37 2. Application Form:
38 a. Fill in required information, including Change Orders executed prior to date of
39 submittal of applications.
40 b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on
41 continuation sheets.
42 c. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of Contract firm.
43 3. Continuation Sheets:
44 a. Fill in total list of scheduled component items of Work with item number and
45 scheduled dollar value for each item.
46 b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when Work has been
47 performed or products stored.
48 c. Round off values to nearest dollar or as specified for Schedule of Values.
49 d. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation
50 sheets.
51 e. List by Change Order number and description as for original component item of
52 Work.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 I. Initial (First) Application for Payment:
3 1. Contractor to submit to Architect within 15 days of execution of Owner-Contractor
4 Agreement proposed sample of Lien Waiver and Bills Paid Affidavit forms for review
5 and acceptance by Owner for use on this Contract.
6 2. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of
7 first Application for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following:
8 3. List of subcontractors, with indications of MBE or WBE Owner firms.
9 a. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
10 b. Schedule of Values.
11 c. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
12 d. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
13 e. Copies of building permits.
14 f. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of
15 Work.
16 g. Initial progress report.
17 h. Report of Pre-Construction meeting.
18 i. Certificates of Insurance and insurance policies.
19 j. Additional items as required in General Conditions.
20
21 J. Typical Monthly Application for Payment:
22 1. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous Applications for
23 Payments reviewed by Architect and paid by Owner.
24 2. Review pencil copy of Application for Payment with Architect at last scheduled job
25 meeting each month, or at other agreeable time as can be scheduled.
26 3. Submit monthly Application for Payment on 15th day of each month.
27 4. Period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is period ending
28 15 days prior to date for each progress payment and starting day following end of
29 proceeding period.
30 5. Work covered by Progress Payments shall, at time of payment, become property of
31 Owner.
32 6. Form of Application for Payment will be on specified forms, submitted in quadruplicate.
33 7. Complete each entry on forms, including notarization and execution by person
34 authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.
35 8. Incomplete Applications for Payment will be returned without action.
36 9. Entries shall match data of Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
37 10. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made.
38 11. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to
39 last day of construction period covered by application.
40 12. Transmit executed copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by means
41 ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
42 13. Transmit each copy with complete transmittal form listing attachments, and recording
43 appropriate information related to Application in acceptable manner.
44 14. Waiver of Liens:
45 a. With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from each
46 contractor, subcontractor and materialman who may be lawfully entitled to file
47 mechanics lien arising out of Contract, and related to Work covered by payment
48 application.
49 b. Submit waivers of lien on forms, and in manner, acceptable to Architect.
50 c. Waiver of liens shall be total paid prior to previous month's Application for Payment.
51 15. With each Application for Payment, Contractor certifies the following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Application for Payment represents just estimate of cost reimbursable to Contractor
2 under terms of Contract.
3 b. That there are no Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens outstanding at date of this
4 Application for Payment.
5 c. That due and payable bills with respect to the Work have been paid to date or shall be
6 paid from proceeds of that Application for Payment.
7 d. That there is no known basis for filing of Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens against
8 surety in connection with Work, and that Waivers and Bills Paid Affidavit forms from
9 subcontractors and materialmen have been, or will be, obtained in form specified in
10 Contract.
11 16. Progress payments will be made in accordance with General Conditions.
12
13 K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion:
14 1. Following issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit Application for
15 Payment with following administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
16 coincide with application:
17 2. Proper training of Owner's personnel.
18 3. Occupancy permits and similar required approvals.
19 4. Warranties and maintenance agreements.
20 5. Test, adjust, and balance records.
21 6. Maintenance instructions.
22 7. Start-up performance reports.
23 8. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
24 9. Final cleaning.
25 10. Application for reduction of retainage, and Consent of Surety.
26 11. Advise on shifting insurance coverage.
27 12. [Final progress photographs.]
28 13. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of
29 Substantial Completion.
30 14. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner.
31 15. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
32 16. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
33 17. Additional items as required by General Conditions.
34
35 1.4 UNIT PRICES
36
37 A. Unit price is defined as amount stated in construction Contract as price for each unit of
38 measurement for materials or services.
39
40 B. Pier and Temporary Casing:
41 1. Provide unit pricing for each size pier and temporary casing for each lineal foot of depth
42 in excess of those shown on Drawings.
43 2. Unit price shall include excavation, materials, reinforcing, labor, overhead, profit, and
44 insurance.
45 3. Pier Depths: Following systems shall be used in figuring pier changes:
46 a. Pier depth is difference between bid depth indicated on Drawings and actual depth
47 drilled.
48 b. Measure actual depth from top of bearing material to elevations indicated on
49 Drawings.
50 c. Dimension will be compared with bid depth for purpose of adjusting Contract Price.
51 4. Make adjustments on total length for each pier size:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. When ten 20" diameter piers are drilled to one foot extra depth each (10 extra
2 feet/total) and ten 20" diameter piers are drilled to one foot less depth each (10 less
3 feet/total), then there will be no adjustment of Contract Sum.
4 b. When ten 20" diameter piers are drilled to one foot extra depth each (10 extra
5 feet/total) and nine 20" diameter piers are drilled to one foot less depth each (9 less
6 feet/total), then there will be adjustment to Contract Sum for one extra foot of depth.
7 5. Casings: Length of temporary casings shall be actual length from bottom of casing to
8 grade elevation at time casing is used.
9
10 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
11
12 A. Submit to Architect within 15 days of execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement name of
13 individual authorized to accept changes on behalf of Contractor, and shall be responsible for
14 informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in Work.
15
16 B. Change Order forms will be furnished and issued by Architect.
17
18 C. Contractor Documentation of Changes:
19 1. Maintain detailed records of Work done on accounting basis acceptable to Architect and
20 Owner.
21 2. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes.
22 3. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow
23 evaluation of quotation.
24 4. On request, provide additional data to support computations:
25 a. Quantities of products, labor and equipment.
26 b. Insurance and bonds.
27 c. Overhead and profit.
28 d. Justification for change in Contract Time.
29 e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
30 5. Support each request for additional costs, and for Work proposed on time and material
31 basis, with description of products, equipment, cost of labor and subcontracts,
32 completely documented.
33 6. Computation for changes in Work will be computed in one of manners described in
34 Conditions of the Contract.
35
36 D. Initiation of Changes:
37 1. Architect may submit Proposal Request which includes detailed description of change
38 with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
39 2. Contractor may initiate proposed change by submittal of request to Architect describing
40 proposed change with statement of reason for change, and proposed effect on Contract
41 Sum and Contract Time with full documentation, and statement of effect on Work of
42 separate contractors.
43 3. Document requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
44 4. Submission of such requests and receipt of same by Architect does not mean acceptance
45 or approval of proposed change.
46
47 E. Authorization:
48 1. Owner may request, through Architect, Construction Change Directive, in writing,
49 instructing Contractor to proceed with changes in Work, for subsequent inclusion in
50 Change Order that is pending.
51 2. Directive will propose basis for necessary adjustments, to Contract Sum or Time.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 29 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Changes that affect Contract Sum or Contract Time will require Change Order signed by
2 Owner and Architect.
3 4. Contractor's signature indicates agreement.
4 5. Orders, written or oral, by Owner through Architect or by Architect shall be treated as
5 Change Order only if Contractor gives Owner proper written notice as described in
6 Conditions of Contract.
7 6. Promptly execute change in Work only upon receipt of approved Change Order or
8 Owner's written Construction Change Directive.
9
10 F. Execution:
11 1. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of
12 Contract.
13 2. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each
14 authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum as shown on
15 Change Order.
16 3. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise
17 subschedules to adjust times for other items of Work affected by Change, and resubmit
18 Schedule.
19 4. Promptly enter Changes in Project Record Documents.
20
21
22 PART 2 PRODUCTS
23
24 Not Used.
25
26
27 PART 3 EXECUTION
28
29 Not Used.
30
31
32 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 31 00
2
3 PROJECT COORDINATION
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,
12 but not limited to, the following:
13 a. General coordination procedures.
14 b. Digital project management procedures.
15 c. Coordination of Submittals.
16 d. Requests for Information (RFIs).
17 e. Coordination of space and installation.
18 f. Coordination of finishes.
19 g. Coordination of Contract closeout.
20
21 B. Related Work:
22 1. Section 01 31 19 “Project Meetings”
23
24 1.2 DEFINITIONS
25
26 A. BIM: Building Information Modeling.
27
28 B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking
29 information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
30
31 1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION
32
33 A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of various Sections of Specifications to assure
34 efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements with provisions for
35 accommodating items furnished by Owner to be installed by Contractor.
36
37 B. Coordinate construction operations included under different sections of Project Manual that
38 are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
39
40 C. Contractor shall review and coordinate requirements of Divisions 21, 23 and 26 in Project
41 Manual and MEP&FP drawings with other Work. Report discrepancies to Architect.
42
43 D. Contractor shall maintain services of major subcontractors throughout duration of Contract,
44 except as required by provisions of Conditions of Contract. Contractor shall notify Architect
45 in writing of intention to replace subcontractors, outlining reasons for action and naming
46 proposed replacement subcontractor.
47
48 E. Each subcontractor shall ensure that devices and equipment installed under their subcontract
49 is operational. Subcontractor shall inform Contractor when completion and operation of
50 their system is dependent on Work of other trades. Arbitrate and resolve coordination
51 conflicts between subcontractors to ensure complete and operational systems.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of Work of subcontractors, and for
2 recording subcontractor installation data on Project Record Documents in accordance with
3 Section 01 78 39.
4
5 G. Communications to Owner from Contractor regarding Contract requirements shall be
6 through Architect.
7
8 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS
9
10 A. Refer to Section 01 31 19 “Project Meeting.”
11
12 1.5 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
13
14 A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's BIM model are available
15 from the Architect for the express purpose of preparing coordination drawings, Shop
16 Drawings, and Project record drawings.
17 1. Digital Data Software Program: The Drawings are available in Revit RVT format,
18 operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
19 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files
20 as they relate to the Drawings.
21 3. Execution of the Architect's Release Form is required to obtain the digital data files of the
22 Drawings. Provision of the digital data files is subject to both the terms described herein
23 and on the Release Form. It is offered at the Architect's sole discretion, and may be
24 withheld by the Architect for reasons deemed appropriate.
25 a. A copy of the Architect's Release Form is available upon request.
26
27 B. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's web-based Project software site for purposes
28 of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion.
29
30 C. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common
31 desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked
32 format to prevent further changes.
33
34 D. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare
35 as follows:
36 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
37 requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
38 navigation to each item.
39 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
40 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,
41 provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.
42
43 1.6 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
44
45 A. Schedule and coordinate submittals.
46
47 B. Coordinate Work of various trades having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
48 connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
49
50 C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements,
51 effect on Work of other trades, and on Work scheduled for early completion.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
2
3 A. Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
4 Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
5 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
6 Contractor with no response.
7 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
8 work or work of subcontractors.
9
10 B. RFIs will be accepted and processed by the Architect only on Contract Documents prepared
11 by the Architect or its consultants that are sealed and have been issued for construction.
12 1. Requests for information or interpretation of preliminary Drawings or Specifications shall
13 be made by normal correspondences, not by RFI. Architect's responses to such requests
14 do not constitute Contract requirements of the Work.
15
16 C. Submission of an RFI constitutes representation that the Contractor requires additional
17 information about the Contract Documents after having made careful study and comparison
18 of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner provided information, Contractor
19 prepared coordination drawings, and prior project correspondence or documentation.
20 1. Architect will not respond to requests where information is conveyed or contained in the
21 Contract Documents or other documents and/or methods as outlined in paragraph
22 above.
23
24 D. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
25 interpretation and the following:
26 1. Project name.
27 2. Project number.
28 3. Date.
29 4. Name of Contractor.
30 5. Name of Architect.
31 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
32 7. RFI subject.
33 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
34 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
35 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
36 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
37 or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
38 12. Contractor's signature.
39 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
40 Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
41 needing interpretation.
42 a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
43 materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
44
45 E. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
46 acceptable to Architect.
47
48 F. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
49 Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect
50 after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
51 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
52 a. Requests for approval of submittals.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
2 c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
3 d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
4 e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
5 f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
6 g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
7 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
8 Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
9 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
10 Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
11 Section 01 29 00.
12 a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
13 Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
14 response.
15
16 G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI
17 response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if
18 Contractor disagrees with response.
19
20 H. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
21 Submit log weekly. Include the following:
22 1. Project name.
23 2. Name and address of Contractor.
24 3. Name and address of Architect.
25 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
26 5. RFI description.
27 6. Date the RFI was submitted.
28 7. Date Architect's response was received.
29 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
30 Proposal Request, as appropriate.
31 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
32 appropriate.
33
34 1.8 COORDINATION OF SPACE AND INSTALLATION SEQUENCE
35
36 A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of equipment, elevators,
37 escalators, walks, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or other Work that is indicated
38 diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routings shown for tubes, pipes, ducts, conduits, and
39 other items as closely as practical, with due allowance for available physical space. Make runs
40 parallel with lines of building, except where not feasible by construction. Utilize space
41 efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for Owner maintenance, and for
42 repairs.
43
44 B. Except as otherwise indicated in finished areas, conceal ducts, pipes, wiring, and other non-
45 finish items within construction. Coordinate locations of concealed and exposed items with
46 finish elements.
47
48 C. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
49 ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plans exact location and dimensioning of
2 exposed items and items which occur within hung ceilings. In event of conflict, request
3 clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with fabrication or installation.
4
5 E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of Work. Each subcontractor shall be
6 responsible for coordination of their respective Work with the Work of the Contractor and
7 other trades. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with this Section.
8
9 F. Where installation of one part of Work is dependent on installation of other components,
10 either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in sequence
11 required to obtain best results.
12
13 G. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation, including
14 accepted Bid alternates, Owner-supplied Contractor-installed items, work by others, and
15 installation of products purchased with allowances.
16
17 1.9 COORDINATION OF FINISHES
18
19 A. Identify each room by name and number as it appears on Finish Schedules by posting room
20 identification sign outside each room at main entry to each room. Identification shall be
21 clearly visible, legible, and attached without damaging surface.
22
23 B. Post accepted finishes scheduled for each room on each door or frame in manner that does
24 not damage or stain surface. Use copy of accepted finish schedule that clearly identifies each
25 finish and location of finishes for that particular room or area.
26
27 C. Room identification signs and finish schedules shall remain posted until permanent interior
28 signage has been installed and finishes have been reviewed by Architect, unless otherwise
29 directed.
30
31 D. Where mounting heights are not indicated, refer decisions to Architect prior to installation.
32
33 1.10 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
34
35 A. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by requirements of individual
36 Specification Sections regarding correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance
37 with Contract Documents. Minimize disruption of Owner's operations.
38
39 B. Assemble and coordinate Closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
40
41
42 PART 2 PRODUCTS
43
44 Not Used.
45
46
47 PART 3 EXECUTION
48
49 Not Used.
50
51
52 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 19 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 31 19
2
3 PROJECT MEETINGS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Preconstruction meeting.
12 2. Progress meetings.
13 3. Pre-roofing meetings.
14
15 1.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
16
17 A. Contractor shall schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress
18 meetings, and specially called meetings and conferences throughout progress of Work.
19 Contractor shall:
20 1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
21 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four working days minimum in advance of
22 meeting date.
23 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
24 4. Preside at meetings.
25
26 B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be
27 qualified and authorized to act on behalf of each represents.
28
29 C. Architect will attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited consistent with Contract
30 Documents and construction schedules.
31
32 D. Contractor will record attendees and minutes of meetings, including significant proceedings
33 and decisions. Contractor will reproduce and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting
34 to attendees and to parties affected by decisions made at meeting.
35
36 1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
37
38 A. Pre-construction meeting will be held at construction job site prior to beginning of work at
39 time designated by Architect, but not later than 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.
40
41 B. Representatives of Owner, Architect and Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major
42 subcontractors shall be present.
43
44 C. Minimum Agenda:
45 1. Major subcontractors and suppliers.
46 2. Tentative construction schedule.
47 3. Critical work sequencing and phasing of construction.
48 4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
49 5. Designation of responsible personnel.
50 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, proposal requests, submittals, color
51 coordination, change orders and applications for payment.
52 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 19 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.
2 9. Review of Shop Drawings.
3 10. Use of premises.
4 11. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.
5 12. Temporary utilities.
6 13. Security procedures.
7 14. Housekeeping procedures.
8 15. Discussion of project quality control procedures and requirements.
9
10 1.4 PROJECT PROGRESS MEETINGS
11
12 A. Schedule regular periodic progress meetings at project field office, as required.
13
14 B. Hold additional meetings as necessary by progress of construction activity.
15
16 C. Representatives of Architect and his consultants as needed, Owner's project representative as
17 needed, Contractor's Superintendent and major subcontractors as appropriate to agenda, shall
18 be present.
19
20 D. Minimum Agenda:
21 1. Review and accept memorandum of previous meeting.
22 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
23 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts.
24 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.
25 5. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
26 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
27 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule.
28 8. Progress schedule for succeeding work period.
29 9. Coordination of schedules.
30 10. Review submittal schedules and status of submittals.
31 11. Maintenance of quality standards.
32 12. Pending changes and substitutions.
33 13. Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule, on completion, date and
34 effect on other contracts of Project.
35 14. Other applicable business.
36
37 E. Additional progress meetings shall be held by Contractor at project field office as required.
38
39 1.5 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCES
40
41 A. Schedule minimum of two scheduled roofing system conferences prior to commencement of
42 installation.
43
44 B. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Not less than eight weeks prior to scheduled
45 commencement of roofing application, convene preliminary roofing conference at Project
46 site.
47 1. Attendance is required by Architect, Contractor, roofing installer, [roof consultant,] and
48 every party who is concerned with work, required to coordinate with work or to protect
49 work including mechanical and sheet metal trades.
50 2. Architect shall provide each party in attendance with copy of meeting minutes from
51 conference.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 19 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Review requirements for work and conditions which could possibly interfere with
2 successful performance of work.
3 4. Minimum Agenda:
4 a. Review Project Manual and Drawings.
5 b. Establish installation schedules and sequence.
6 c. Coordinate work with in-place and subsequent construction.
7 d. Review weather and working conditions.
8 e. Review material storage locations and equipment set-up locations.
9 f. Review status of roofing submittals.
10 g. Review installation procedures:
11 1) Substrate requirements.
12 2) Insulation installation.
13 3) Membrane installation.
14 4) Surfacing requirements, including phasing, water cutoffs, and walkway pads.
15 5) Roof terminations, flashings, and roof drain requirements.
16 6) Review mechanical equipment placement, supports and height requirements.
17 7) Review examination, testing and quality control procedures.
18 8) Review protection requirements for construction period beyond roofing
19 installation.
20 9) Window washing procedures.
21 5. Conduct tour of roof deck and report on possible problem areas.
22
23 C. Pre-Application Roofing Conference: Not less than one week or more than three weeks
24 prior to scheduled commencement of roofing application, convene pre-application roofing
25 conference at Project site.
26 1. Attendance is required by Architect, Contractor, roofing installer, and every party who is
27 concerned with work, required to coordinate with work or to protect work including
28 mechanical and sheet metal trades.
29 2. Architect will provide each party in attendance with copy of meeting minutes from
30 conference.
31 3. Minimum Agenda:
32 a. Review accepted submittals.
33 b. Review outstanding material problems.
34 c. Review minutes of Preliminary Roofing Conference.
35 d. Discuss installation schedules and sequence, and revisions that have occurred.
36 e. Review equipment set-up and on-site storage.
37 f. Review readiness of deck for application:
38 1) Certification in place.
39 2) Examination of substrate by people in attendance.
40 3) Drains installed.
41 4) Curbs, nailers, penetrations, perimeter, equipment.
42 g. Review system installation, discuss each component and requirements.
43 h. Review weather and working conditions, and procedures for daily or inclement
44 weather cut-offs.
45 i. Review protection requirements after installation.
46 j. Review testing requirements and procedures involved.
47 k. Discuss requirements for warranties and bonds.
48 4. Conduct tour of roof deck, if necessary, to review remaining problems and to verify
49 readiness.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 31 19 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2
3 Not Used.
4
5
6 PART 3 EXECUTION
7
8 Not Used.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
12
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 32 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 32 00
2
3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for schedules required for
11 proper performance of the Work.
12
13 1.2 FORMAT
14
15 A. Prepare Schedules as horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of Work
16 or operation, identifying first work day of each week, or prepare network analysis system
17 using critical path method, as outlined in The Associated General Contractors of America
18 (AGC) publication "The Use of CPM in Construction - A Manual for General Contractors".
19
20 B. Sequence of Listings: Chronological order of start of each item of Work according to Table
21 of Contents of this Project Manual.
22
23 C. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.
24
25 D. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2" x 11".
26
27 1.3 CONTENT
28
29 A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and
30 completion of each element of construction.
31
32 B. Identify each item by specification Section number.
33
34 C. Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01 11 00.
35
36 D. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire Schedule.
37
38 E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work
39 completed, as of first day of each month.
40
41 F. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples,
42 and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision data for
43 selection of finishes.
44
45 G. Coordinate content with Schedule of Values.
46
47 1.4 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES
48
49 A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each
50 activity.
51
52 B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 32 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 identifiable changes.
2
3 C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule.
4 Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.
5
6 1.5 SUBMITTALS
7
8 A. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After
9 review, resubmit required revised data within 10 days.
10
11 B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.
12
13 C. Submit number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which
14 will be retained by Architect.
15
16 1.6 DISTRIBUTION
17
18 A. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to project site file, Subcontractors, suppliers, and
19 other concerned parties.
20
21 B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections
22 indicated in Schedules.
23
24
25 PART 2 PRODUCTS
26
27 Not Used.
28
29
30 PART 3 EXECUTION
31
32 Not Used.
33
34
35 END OF SECTION
36
37
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 32 33 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 32 33
2
3 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Photography.
12 2. Views and Techniques
13 3. Images
14
15 1.2 PHOTOGRAPHY
16
17 A. Employ and pay photographer to take construction record photographs periodically during
18 course of Work.
19
20 B. Furnish construction photographs taken on commencement of Work and at monthly
21 intervals.
22
23 C. Submit prints and digital media monthly with each pay application.
24
25 D. Photos may be incorporated into monthly construction report which should include schedule,
26 progress of work, etc.
27
28 E. Do not display photographs in publications, contests or other public or private forum
29 without written consent of Owner and Architect.
30
31 F. Parties requiring additional copies of digital images prints will order from and pay
32 photographer directly.
33
34 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
35
36 A. Qualifications - Photographer: Qualified as commercial photographer, engaged as
37 professional in photography business for minimum period of three years.
38 1. Employ photographer only after review of his qualifications by Architect prior to
39 commencing construction.
40 2. Employ photographer that Architect and Owner have no objections to. Should Architect
41 or Owner object to photographer selected by Contractor, Contractor shall immediately
42 select another photographer, without delay to Project Schedule.
43
44 1.4 SUBMITTALS
45
46 A. Submit qualifications and experience record of photographer prior to receipt of written
47 Notice to Proceed.
48
49 B. Submit examples of photographer's work similar to that required prior to written Notice to
50 Proceed.
51
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 32 33 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 DIGITAL IMAGES
4
5 A. Provide color digital images, taken at 1028 x 768 minimum resolution.
6
7 B. Size: Print images on 8.5" x 11" photograph quality paper, full resolution. Maximum two
8 images per sheet.
9
10 C. Bindings: 2" margin, placed on left hand of 11" side.
11
12 D. Identify each print on back, listing time and date of exposure, location and orientation of
13 view, project name and address of photographer, and photographer's numbered identification
14 of exposure.
15
16 2.2 DIGITAL MEDIA
17
18 A. Digital/media (CD Rom) images will become property of Owner.
19
20 B. Catalog and index digital images in chronological sequence. Provide typed table of contents.
21 Place negatives in archive negative sheets and compiled in three-ring commercial quality
22 binder.
23
24
25 PART 3 - EXECUTION
26
27 3.1 VIEWS REQUIRED
28
29 A. Consult with Architect for instructions concerning views required at each specified visit to
30 site.
31
32 B. Photograph from locations to adequately illustrate condition of construction and state of
33 progress.
34
35 C. Minimum views and quantities required:
36 1. At each specified time, take photographs from 12 different views.
37 2. Furnish six digital image prints of each view.
38
39 D. Architect will have right to request fewer photographs be taken at certain intervals so that
40 more photographs may be taken at other times, providing that total number of photographs
41 remains unchanged.
42
43 3.2 DELIVERY OF DIGITAL IMAGES
44
45 A. Deliver digital images prints with each monthly pay application.
46
47 B. Deliver one set of digital images to Architect, one to Owner, and place one set of digital
48 images in Project Record file as specified in Section 01 78 39.
49
50
51 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 33 23
2
3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Submittal schedule requirements.
12 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for Submittals.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
15
16 A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
17 required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
18 fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
19 corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
20 reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
21 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
22 Contractor's construction schedule.
23 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
24 submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
25 to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
26 time for manufacture or fabrication.
27 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
28 construction schedule.
29 a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for
30 submittals.
31 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
32 a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
33 b. Specification Section number and title.
34 c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
35 d. Name of subcontractor.
36 e. Description of the Work covered.
37 f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
38 g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
39 h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
40 i. Scheduled dates for installation.
41 j. Activity or event number.
42
43 1.3 SUBMITTAL FORMATS
44
45 A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:
46 1. Project name.
47 2. Date.
48 3. Name of Architect.
49 4. Name of Contractor.
50 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
51 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
52 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals.
2 8. Category and type of submittal.
3 9. Submittal purpose and description.
4 10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for
5 each of multiple items.
6 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
7 12. Indication of full or partial submittal.
8 13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
9 14. Other necessary identification.
10 15. Remarks.
11 16. Signature of review and transmitter.
12
13 B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
14
15 C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from
16 requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include
17 relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on
18 previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate
19 sheet.
20 1. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in Submittals from requirements of Contract
21 Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of Submittals unless Architect gives
22 specific written acceptance for each specific deviation.
23
24 D. Electronic Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF files.
25 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed PDF file incorporating
26 submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with internal
27 bookmark links enabling navigation to each item.
28 2. Name file with submittal number, including revision identifier, and any other unique
29 identifiers at Contractor’s discretion.
30 a. File name and submittal number shall use the Specification Section number, with
31 spaces, followed by a dash and then a sequential 3-digit submittal number (e.g., 06 10
32 53 – 001). File name and submittal shall also include a 2-digit revision identifier suffix
33 after another dash, starting with “00” on the initial submission (e.g., 06 10 53 – 001 –
34 00).
35 3. Provide electronic stamp to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
36 markings and space for electronic stamp for action taken by Architect and Consultants as
37 needed.
38 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from
39 electronic project management software acceptable to Project team, containing the
40 following information:
41 a. Project name.
42 b. Date.
43 c. File name and submittal number.
44 d. Name and address of Architect.
45 e. Name of Construction Manager.
46 f. Name of Contractor.
47 g. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
48 h. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
49 i. Type of submittal.
50 j. Specification Section number and title.
51 k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
52 multiple items.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
2 m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
3 n. Related physical samples submitted directly.
4 o. Indication of full or partial submittal.
5 p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
6 q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
7 r. Remarks.
8 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
9 metadata:
10 a. Project name.
11 b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
12 c. Manufacturer name.
13 d. Product name.
14 6. Post electronic submittals in Adobe PDF format directly to Newforma Info
15 Exchange at https://projects.corgan.com/.
16 7. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
17 Project record document file.
18
19 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
20
21 A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of
22 submittals required are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
23 1. Email Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect
24 by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email
25 subject line as requested by Architect.
26 a.Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a
27 digital Project Record Document file.
28 2. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based
29 Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify
30 submittal.
31
32 B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
33 construction activities.
34 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
35 and related activities that require sequential activity.
36 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
37 partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
38 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
39 Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
40 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different
41 Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
42 concurrently for coordination.
43 a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
44 with other submittals until related submittals are received.
45
46 C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
47 Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
48 Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance
49 of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
50 1. Initial Review: Allow seven days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
51 time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise
52 Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
2 initial submittal.
3 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow seven days for review of each resubmittal.
4 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
5 Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal.
6 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
7 may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow [six]
8 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being
9 returned to Contractor.
10
11 D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
12 1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
13 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
14 revision.
15 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
16 stamp.
17
18 E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final Submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
19 fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance
20 of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
21 1. Distribute accepted samples as directed by Architect.
22
23 F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
24 Submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's review stamp.
25
26 1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
27
28 A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction
29 and type of product or equipment.
30 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
31 are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
32 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
33 3. Include the following information, as applicable:
34 a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
35 b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
36 c. Standard color charts.
37 d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
38 e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
39 f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
40 g. Notation of coordination requirements.
41 h. Availability and delivery time information.
42 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
43 a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.
44 b. Printed performance curves.
45 c. Operational range diagrams.
46 d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
47 Drawings.
48 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.
49
50 B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
51 Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
52 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 following information, as applicable:
2 a. Identification of products.
3 b. Schedules.
4 c. Compliance with specified standards.
5 d. Notation of coordination requirements.
6 e. Notation of dimensions established or confirmed by field measurement.
7 f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
8 g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
9
10 C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
11 characteristics with other materials.
12 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
13 in one submittal package.
14 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
15 following:
16 a. Project name and submittal number.
17 b. Generic description of Sample.
18 c. Product name and name of manufacturer.
19 d. Sample source.
20 e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
21 f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
22 3. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information
23 indicated.
24 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
25 control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
26 used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
27 a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
28 Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of
29 use.
30 b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
31 property, are the property of Contractor.
32 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
33 sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
34 a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,
35 texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
36 product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
37 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
38 from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
39 physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
40 color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
41 following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
42 containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
43 color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
44 testing and inspection.
45 a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample
46 set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a
47 project record Sample.
48 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
49 techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
50 demonstrated.
51 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material
52 or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 show approximate limits of variations.
2
3 D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
4 summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
5 Include the following information in tabular form:
6 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
7 Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
8 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
9 3. Number and name of room or space.
10 4. Location within room or space.
11
12 E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
13 of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
14 contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
15
16 F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with
17 indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of
18 assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and
19 version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.
20
21 G. Certificates:
22 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of
23 entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
24 by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
25 Provide a notarized signature where indicated.
26 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
27 that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where
28 required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
29 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
30 certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
31 Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
32 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
33 that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
34 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
35 that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
36 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
37 comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding
38 Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include
39 names of firms and personnel certified.
40
41 H. Test and Research Reports:
42 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
43 testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
44 performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers
45 and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
46 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
47 performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
48 location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
49 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
50 agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance
51 with requirements in the Contract Documents.
52 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
2 before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
3 Contract Documents.
4 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
5 manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
6 evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
7 agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
8 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable
9 to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for
10 Project. Include the following information:
11 a. Name of evaluation organization.
12 b. Date of evaluation.
13 c. Time period when report is in effect.
14 d. Product and manufacturers' names.
15 e. Description of product.
16 f. Test procedures and results.
17 g. Limitations of use.
18
19 1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES
20
21 A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
22 design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
23 provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
24 indicated.
25 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
26 written request for additional information to Architect.
27
28 B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
29 other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and one paper copy of certificate,
30 signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system
31 specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
32 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
33 Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
34 these services.
35 2. BIM Incorporation: If so established, incorporate delegated-design drawing and data files
36 into BIM established for Project.
37
38 C. Prepare delegated-design drawings in same digital data software program, version, and
39 operating system as original Drawings.
40
41 1.7 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW
42
43 A. Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the
44 Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
45 dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
46 1. Submittals without Contractor's stamp and Submittals which, in the opinion of the
47 Architect or Owner, are incomplete, contain numerous errors, have not been reviewed, or
48 have only been reviewed superficially, will be returned without Architect’s review or
49 comments. Resultant schedule delays incurred are Contractor's responsibility.
50
51 B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's review and approval for each submittal with a
52 uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance
2 with the Contract Documents.
3 1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have
4 Contractor's review and approval.
5
6 1.8 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW
7
8 A. Architect’s review of Submittals is for general design conformance and compliance with
9 information provided in Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting
10 requirements and characteristics of products and systems specified; dimensions and quantities
11 to be confirmed and correlated at the Project site; and information that pertains solely to
12 fabrication processes, installation techniques, and coordination of work required by other
13 trades. Architect’s review and indication of action to be taken shall not relieve Contractor of
14 responsibility for deviation from requirements of Contract Documents.
15
16 B. Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it
17 to Contractor.
18
19 C. Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action as follows:
20 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When submittal is marked "No Exception Taken”, that part
21 of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with
22 requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that
23 compliance.
24 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittal is marked "Comments Included", that part
25 of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the
26 Architect’s notations and comments on the submittal and requirements of the Contract
27 Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.
28 3. Submit Specified Item: When submittal is marked "Rejected" do not proceed with that
29 part of the work as submission does not conform to requirements of Contract
30 Documents. Resubmission of the same product will not be considered. Prepare and
31 submit new submittal meeting requirements of Contract Documents.
32 4. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Revise and Submit", do not
33 proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,
34 fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance
35 with the Architects notations or corrections; resubmit without delay.
36 a. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Submit” to be used at the project site
37 or elsewhere where construction is in progress.
38 5. Other Action: When submittal is marked "Not Reviewed" it has not been reviewed
39 because the submittal was neither requested nor required by Contract Documents.
40
41 D. Partial Submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
42 Submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
43
44 E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
45 returned for resubmittal without review.
46
47 F. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
48
49 G. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without
50 action.
51
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 33 23 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2
3 Not Used.
4
5
6 PART 3 EXECUTION
7
8 Not Used.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 41 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 41 00
2
3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: General regulatory requirements.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. ASTM International
15 1. ASTM E 119: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
16
17 B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
18 1. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
19
20 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
21
22 A. General: Additional information with legal implications regarding applicable governing
23 laws and jurisdictions can be found in Conditions of Contract.
24
25 B. Codes:
26 1. Where references are made on Drawings or Specifications to codes, they shall be
27 considered an integral part of the Contract Documents as minimum standards.
28 Nothing contained in Contract Documents shall be so construed as to be in
29 conflict with law, bylaw or regulation of municipal, State, Federal or other
30 authorities having jurisdiction.
31
32 C. Contractor shall, without additional expense to Owner, obtain necessary licenses and
33 permits, and be responsible for complying with Federal, state, county, and municipal
34 laws, codes, and regulations applicable to performance of Work, including, but not
35 limited to, laws or regulations requiring use of licensed contractors to perform parts of
36 Work.
37
38 D. Environmental Requirements: Contractor shall comply with applicable local, state, and
39 federal air and water quality standards with pollution control laws; and with such rules,
40 regulations and directives as may be lawfully issued for the protection of the
41 environment in the areas surrounding the confines of this contract.
42
43 E. Occupancy Permit: The General Contractor shall be responsible for securing a
44 Certificate of Occupancy permit at completion of project and shall deliver such permit
45 to Owner. Final Payment shall be retained until permit has been received by Owner.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 41 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.4 FIRE-RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS
2
3 A. Fire Resistance Ratings and Fire Tests: Fire-resistance ratings of building elements,
4 components, and assemblies shall be determined only in accordance with the test
5 procedures set forth in ASTM E 119 or UL 263, or by alternative methods approved by
6 applicable authorities having jurisdiction.
7 1. Fire-resistance ratings shall be determined or listed based on fire tests performed
8 by one of the following testing agencies, or other agencies acceptable to governing
9 authorities having jurisdiction.
10 a. Factory Mutual Laboratories.
11 b. Intertek
12 c. Southwest Research Institute.
13 d. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
14 2. Where reference is made to only one testing authority, equivalent fire ratings as
15 determined or listed by another testing agency are acceptable if approved by
16 applicable authorities having jurisdiction.
17
18 B. Marking and Identification: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers, and
19 smoke partitions, or any other walls required to have protected openings or
20 penetrations, shall be permanently identified with signage or stenciling. Such
21 identification shall:
22 1. Be located in accessible floor plenums, ceiling plenums, or attic spaces.
23 2. Be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet o.c., measured horizontally along the
24 partition or wall.
25 3. Include lettering not less than 0.5- inch in height, worded as follows: “FIRE
26 AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS AND
27 PENETRATIONS.”
28
29
30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31
32 Not Used.
33
34
35 PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
37 Not Used.
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 42 00
2
3 REFERENCES
4
5
6 PART 1 – GENERAL
7
8 1.1 DEFINITIONS
9
10 A. "Acceptance", "acceptable", or words of similar import: Acceptance, acceptable or similar
11 words shall be as determined by Architect.
12
13 B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,
14 applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities
15 as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Approval does not release Contractor from
16 responsibility to fulfill Contract Document requirements.
17
18 C. "At no extra cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Contractor", "At
19 Contractor's own expense", or words of similar import: Terms shall be understood to
20 mean that Contractor shall perform or provide specified operation of Work at no increase
21 to Contract Sum stated in executed Contract.
22
23 D. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
24 "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
25
26 E. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
27 installation, and similar operations.
28
29 F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
30 Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including
31 "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." No
32 limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted.
33
34 G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
35 assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
36 protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
37
38 H. "Installer" is entity engaged by Contractor, either as employee, subcontractor or sub-
39 subcontractor for performance of particular construction activity, including installation,
40 erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in
41 operations they are engaged to perform. Term "experienced", when used with term
42 "installer", means having minimum five previous projects similar in size and scope to this
43 Project, and familiar with precautions required, and has complied with requirements of
44 authority having jurisdiction.
45
46 I. "NIC": Work of this Project which is not being performed or provided as part of
47 Contract; term shall mean "Not in This Contract" or "Not Part of Work to be Performed
48 or Provided by Contractor". "NIC" work is indicated as aid to Contractor in scheduling
49 amount of time and materials necessary for completion of Contract.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 J. "Other acceptable manufacturer", "equal", "acceptable equal", "equivalent", or words of
2 similar import: It shall be understood that words are followed by expression "at sole
3 discretion of Architect" even though words may not appear in print.
4
5 K. "Perform": Contractor, at his own expense, shall perform operations necessary to
6 complete Work, including furnishing of necessary labor, tools and equipment, and further
7 including and installing of materials indicated, specified or required to complete
8 performance.
9
10 L. "Project Site" is space available to Contractor for performance of Work, either exclusively
11 or in conjunction with others performing construction as part of Project. Extent of
12 Project Site is shown on Contract Drawings, and may or may not be identical with
13 description of land upon which Project is to be built.
14
15 M. "Provide": Contractor, at his own expense, shall furnish and install Work complete in
16 place and ready for use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment
17 and transportation. Definitions apply same to future, present and past tenses, except word
18 "provided" may mean "contingent upon" where context is apparent.
19
20 N. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
21 jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that
22 control performance of the Work.
23
24 O. "Require" and words of similar import: As required to complete Work and as required by
25 Architect.
26
27 P. "Testing Laboratory" is independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or
28 tests, either at Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on, and if required, to interpret
29 results of those inspections or tests.
30
31 1.2 SPECIFICATION SENTENCE STRUCTURE
32
33 A. Specifications are written in modified brief style. In general, words "the", "a", "an",
34 "shall", "shall be", and "all" are not used. Requirements indicated and specified apply to
35 work of same kind, class, and type even though word "all" is not stated.
36
37 B. Simple imperative mood of sentence structure is used in Specification Sections which
38 places verb as first word in sentence. Where "perform", "provide", "install", "erect",
39 "furnish", "connect", "test", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood
40 that words include meanings of phrase "Contractor Shall..." before words.
41
42 C. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in Specifications are
43 intended as aid in locating and recognizing various requirements in Specifications. Titles
44 do not define, limit or otherwise restrict Specifications text. Capitalizing of words in text
45 does not signify or mean that words convey special or unique meanings having precedence
46 over other parts of Contract Documents. Specification text shall govern over titling and
47 shall be understood to be interpreted as a whole.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION
2
3 A. Organization of Project Manual and Contract Drawings are not intended to control or to
4 lessen responsibility of Contractor in dividing Work among his subcontractors, or in
5 establishing extent of Work to be performed by each trade.
6
7 1.4 SYMBOLS
8
9 A. Graphic symbols used in Contract Documents are those symbols recognized in
10 construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted, symbols are
11 those defined in "Architectural Graphics Standards", published by John Wiley & Sons,
12 Inc., Eighth Edition.
13
14 B. Graphic symbols used on mechanical and electrical drawings are generally aligned with
15 symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where appropriate, mechanical and electrical
16 symbols are supplemented by more specific symbols recommended by technical
17 associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE, and similar organizations. Request
18 clarification from Architect if symbols are unfamiliar.
19
20 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
21
22 A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
23 requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as
24 if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
25 standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
26 1. When conflict exists between requirements of reference standards and Contract
27 Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
28
29 B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
30 unless otherwise indicated.
31
32 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar
33 with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable
34 standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
35 1. Make reference standards available as requested or required by Architect or Owner.
36 Maintain copies of standard at project site throughout construction period.
37 2. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,
38 obtain copies directly from publication source.
39
40 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
41
42 A. Language used on Drawings and in Specifications is of the abbreviated type in certain
43 instances and implies abbreviations listed on the Drawings.
44
45 B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
46 other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
47 following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the
48 date of the Contract Documents.
49 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
50 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
51 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
2 www.transportation.org.
3 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
4 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.
5 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.
6 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com.
7 9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
8 10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
9 11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
10 12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
11 13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
12 14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The);
13 www.ahrinet.org.
14 15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
15 16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
16 17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
17 18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
18 19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
19 20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
20 21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
21 22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
22 23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
23 24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
24 25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
25 26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
26 27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
28 29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
29 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute;
30 (See ASCE).
31 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
32 Engineers; www.ashrae.org.
33 32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
34 www.asme.org.
35 33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
36 34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
37 35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.
38 36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
39 37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
40 38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
41 39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;
42 www.awmac.com.
43 40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.
44 41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
45 42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
46 43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association;
47 www.buildershardware.com.
48 44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
2 46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
3 Association); www.bifma.org.
4 47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
5 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton
6 Federation); www.bissc.org.
7 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
8 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
9 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
10 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.;
11 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
12 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
13 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
14 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
15 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
16 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
17 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
18 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
19 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
20 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
21 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
22 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
23 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services);
24 www.csa-international.org.
25 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
26 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
27 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute);
28 www.cti.org.
29 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
30 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
31 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
32 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
33 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).
34 73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.
35 74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
36 75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
37 76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
38 77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
39 78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
40 79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
41 80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.
42 81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball
43 Federation); www.fiba.com.
44 82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball
45 Federation); www.fivb.org.
46 83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
47 84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association,
2 Inc.; www.floridaroof.com.
3 86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
4 87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
5 88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
6 89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
7 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
8 91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
9 92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See
10 AHRI).
11 93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
12 94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
13 95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
14 96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants;
15 www.iapsc.org.
16 97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
17 98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
18 99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
19 100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
20 101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
21 102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
22 103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
23 104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
24 105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
25 106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society
26 of North America); www.ies.org.
27 107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
28 108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
29 109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
30 110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;
31 www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
32 111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
33 112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
34 www.intertek.com.
35 113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation,
36 Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org.
37 114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
38 115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid
39 Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
40 116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
41 117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
42 118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
43 119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
44 120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
45 121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
46 122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
47 123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
48 124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.;
2 www.metalframingmfg.org.
3 126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
4 127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
5 128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.
6 129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
7 130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry
8 Inc.; www.mss-hq.org.
9 131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;
10 www.naamm.org.
11 132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers
12 International); www.nace.org.
13 133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
14 134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
15 135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
16 136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.
17 137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
18 138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
19 139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
20 140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
21 141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
22 142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
23 143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
24 144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
25 145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.
26 146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
27 147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
28 148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
29 149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
30 150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
31 151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association;
32 www.nomma.org.
33 152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
34 153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
35 154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.
36 155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
37 156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
38 157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
39 158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
40 159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
41 160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
42 161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
43 Association); www.plasa.org.
44 162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
45 163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
46 164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
47 165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.
48 166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
2 168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
3 169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com.
4 170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers;
5 (See ASCE).
6 171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
7 172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
8 173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
9 174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
10 www.smacna.org.
11 175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
12 176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
13 177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
14 178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
15 179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
16 180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
17 181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
18 182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
19 183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
20 184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
21 185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
22 186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.
23 187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
24 188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA -
25 Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);
26 www.tiaonline.org.
27 189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
28 Alliance; (See TIA).
29 190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
30 191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
31 192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
32 193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.
33 194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
34 195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
35 196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
36 197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
37 198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
38 199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
39 200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
40 201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
41 202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
42 203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.
43 204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
44 205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
45
46 C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
47 Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
48 list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
3 www.iapmo.org.
4 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
5 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
6
7 D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
8 Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the
9 entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the
10 date of the Contract Documents.
11 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
12 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
13 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;
14 www.nist.gov.
15 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
16 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
17 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
18 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
19 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
20 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
21 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
22 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies
23 Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.
24 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
25 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
26 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
27 Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org.
28 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
29 Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
30 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
31 17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of
32 Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
33 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.
34 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
35
36 E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
37 or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
38 regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be
39 accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
40 1. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA); Architectural Barriers Act
41 (ABA); Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Available from U.S.
42 Access Board; www.access-board.gov
43 2. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;
44 www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
45 3. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available
46 from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
47 4. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
48 5. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 42 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;
2 www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
3 7. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
4 8. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
5 9. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design
6 Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
7 10. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
8 11. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
9 12. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See
10 USAB).
11
12 F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
13 or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
14 following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the
15 date of the Contract Documents.
16 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic
17 and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation;
18 www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
19 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title
20 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
21 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
22 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program;
23 www.cal-iaq.org.
24 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
25 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
26 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;
27 www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.
28
29
30 PART 2 PRODUCTS
31
32 Not Used.
33
34
35 PART 3 EXECUTION
36
37 Not Used.
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 45 16
2
3 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section includes Contractor’s administrative and procedural requirements for quality
11 assurance and quality control.
12
13 B. Related Requirements:
14 1. Section 01 45 29 "Testing Agency Services" for testing and inspecting requirements.
15
16 1.2 DEFINITIONS
17
18 A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and
19 during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate
20 that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
21
22 B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and
23 after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work
24 and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
25 enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.
26
27 C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are
28 constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic
29 effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination,
30 testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate
31 compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless
32 otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be
33 judged.
34
35 D. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
36 employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
37 operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
38 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require
39 that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized
40 individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
41
42 E. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having
43 successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and
44 extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having
45 complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
46
47 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
2 standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
3 levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are
4 different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
5
6 B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
7 shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
8 with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
9 reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
10 minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
11 uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
12
13 1.4 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Shop Drawings: For mockups.
16 1. Provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup
17 construction.
18 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
19 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two
20 dimensions.
21
22 B. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
23 responsibilities.
24
25 C. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
26
27 D. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
28 submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction
29 before starting work on the following systems:
30 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
31 designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
32 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-
33 force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
34
35 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
36
37 A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to
38 Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format
39 acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests,
40 records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-
41 control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
42
43 B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
44 experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
45 similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
46 1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements
2 through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel
3 responsible for submittal review.
4
5 D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of
6 Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
7 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests
8 and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests
9 and inspections.
10 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
11 "Statement of Special Inspections."
12 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.
13
14 E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection
15 during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to
16 testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring
17 work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract
18 requirements and approved mockups.
19
20 F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
21 approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
22 defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance
23 with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
24
25 1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
26
27 A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
28 documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in
29 other Sections. Include the following:
30 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
31 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
32 product.
33 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
34 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
35 requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
36 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
37 performance complies with requirements.
38 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
39 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
40
41 B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information
42 documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and
43 inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
44 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
45 making report.
46 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
47 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
48 performance complies with requirements.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 16 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
2 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
3
4 C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
5 licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
6 receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents,
7 established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the
8 Work.
9
10 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
12 A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
13 required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
14
15 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems
16 similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
17 performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
18
19 C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those
20 indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
21 sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
22
23 D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or
24 assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
25 whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
26 performance.
27
28 E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
29 practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
30 engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
31 performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material,
32 design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
33
34 F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall
35 be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
36 satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
37 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
38 specialists.
39
40 G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
41 manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect
42 installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
43 those indicated for this Project.
44
45 H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
46 manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
47 manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated
48 for this Project.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 16 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for
3 each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,
4 using materials indicated for the completed Work:
5 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
6 Architect.
7 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
8 constructed.
9 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ
10 workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.
11 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
12 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
13 construction.
14 a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
15 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
16 judging the completed Work.
17 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
18
19 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
20
21 A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
22 representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
23 service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 23 "Shop
24 Drawings, Product Data, and Samples."
25
26 B. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
27 representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
28 services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
29 conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of
30 completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
31
32 C. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required testing, quality-
33 assurance, and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of
34 removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
35 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
36
37
38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
40 Not Used
41
42
43 PART 3 - EXECUTION
44
45 Not Used
46
47
48 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 29 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 45 29
2
3 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
11 specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
12 compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
13 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction
14 activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in
15 those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
16 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
17 quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
18 Contract Document requirements.
19 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide testing or inspections services required by
20 Architect, Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
21 provisions of this Section.
22 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
23
24 B. Related Requirements:
25 1. Section 01 45 16 "Contactor’s Quality Control" for Contractor quality assurance and
26 quality control requirements.
27
28 1.2 REFERENCES
29
30 A. ASTM International
31 1. ASTM E 329: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
32 Inspection and/or Testing
33
34 1.3 DEFINITIONS
35
36 A. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
37 products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or
38 compliance with specified criteria.
39
40 B. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a
41 testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having
42 jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
43
44 C. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source,
45 e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
46
47 D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
48 installation of the Work and for completed Work.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 29 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 E. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
3 laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
4
5 1.4 SUBMITTALS
6
7 A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"
8 Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in
9 the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
10 authority.
11
12 B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
13 1. Specification Section number and title.
14 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
15 3. Description of test and inspection.
16 4. Identification of applicable standards.
17 5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
18 6. Number of tests and inspections required.
19 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
20 8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
21 9. Unique characteristics of each testing service.
22
23 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
24
25 A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
26 other Sections. Include the following:
27 1. Date of issue.
28 2. Project title and number.
29 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
30 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
31 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
32 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
33 7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
34 8. Complete test or inspection data.
35 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
36 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing
37 and inspecting.
38 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
39 with the Contract Document requirements.
40 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
41 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
42
43 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44
45 A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
46 required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 29 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
2 experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented
3 according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual
4 Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
5 authorities.
6 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
7 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
8 Laboratory Accreditation Program.
9
10 C. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction
11 testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
12 comply with the following:
13 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
14 a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
15 b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
16 analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
17 c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, and mockups to
18 adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance
19 requirements.
20 d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
21 perform same tasks for Project.
22 e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
23 methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
24 f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups;
25 do not reuse products on Project.
26 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
27 inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Engineer, with copy
28 to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
29 and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
30
31 1.7 TESTING SERVICES
32
33 A. Owner Responsibilities: Where testing services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
34 Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
35 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
36 testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are
37 engaged to perform.
38 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by
39 work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
40 Contractor.
41
42 B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
43 Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional testing activities required to verify that the
44 Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
45 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide testing services specified and those required by
46 authorities having jurisdiction. Perform testing services required of Contractor by
47 authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 29 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
2 agency to perform these testing services.
3 a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to
4 in writing by Owner.
5 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
6 testing or inspecting will be performed.
7 4. Where testing services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified
8 written report, in duplicate, of each testing service.
9 5. Engagement of Testing Agency and specified tests, inspections and related actions
10 are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality-control procedures and in no way
11 relieves his obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract
12 Documents.
13 6. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
14 Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
15 7. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
16 jurisdiction, when they so direct.
17
18 C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were
19 Contractor's responsibility, provide testing services, including retesting and reinspecting,
20 for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents at
21 no additional cost to Owner.
22
23 D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Engineer, and Contractor in
24 performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
25 inspections.
26 1. Notify Architect, Engineer, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies
27 observed in the Work during performance of its services.
28 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ
29 tests are conducted.
30 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
31 and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
32 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
33 testing service through Contractor.
34 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
35 approve or accept any portion of the Work.
36 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
37 7. Do not stop the Work.
38
39 E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
40 similar testing services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
41 agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide
42 the following:
43 1. Access to the Work.
44 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
45 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
46 inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
47 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
48 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 29 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
2 testing agency.
3 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
4 Project site.
5
6 F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required testing, quality-
7 assurance, and testing services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing
8 and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
9 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
10
11 G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
12 quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of
13 Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's
14 construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
15 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Engineer, testing agencies,
16 and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and
17 inspections are required.
18
19 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
20
21 A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to
22 conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the
23 responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
24 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
25 procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to
26 perform the Work.
27 2. Notifying Architect, Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
28 deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
29 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
30 control service to Architect and Engineer, with copy to Contractor and to authorities
31 having jurisdiction.
32 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
33 which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
34 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and
35 inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
36 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
37
38
39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
40
41 Not Used.
42
43
44 PART 3 - EXECUTION
45
46 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
47
48 A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 45 29 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
5
6 B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to
7 test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
8
9 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
10
11 A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
12 damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
13 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
14 Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
15 areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as
16 invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting
17 and patching in Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching."
18
19 B. Protect construction exposed by or for testing service activities.
20
21 C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
22 responsibility for testing services.
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 50 00
2
3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Requirements for temporary services and facilities including but not limited
11 to the following:
12 1. Temporary Utilities:
13 a. Water service and distribution.
14 b. Lighting.
15 c. Electrical power service and distribution.
16 d. Telephone and facsimile service.
17 e. Computer Internet service
18 f. Storm and sanitary sewers.
19 2. Temporary construction and support facilities:
20 a. Temporary heat.
21 b. Field offices and storage sheds.
22 c. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
23 d. Temporary enclosures.
24 3. Security and protection facilities:
25 a. Temporary fire protection.
26 b. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
27 c. Webcam
28 d. Enclosure fence.
29
30 1.2 REFERENCE
31
32 A. National Fire Protection Association:
33 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical.
34 2. NFPA 70E - Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
35 3. NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations.
36
37 1.3 USE OF PERMANENT FACILITIES
38
39 A. Permanent facilities shall not be used for field office or for storage.
40
41
42 PART 2 PRODUCTS
43
44 2.1 MATERIALS
45
46 A. Materials may be new or used, adequate in capacity for required usage, must not create unsafe
47 conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
48
49 B. Provide warning signs to help prevent damage and injury.
50
51 C. Should it become necessary to temporarily remove safety items, replace item immediately, in
52 conformance with applicable regulations.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Wood materials used in barricades and barriers within building and in material storage areas
3 shall be fire-retardant.
4
5 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
6
7 A. Contractor shall pay for temporary power used during construction. Arrange with utility
8 company to provide service required for power and lighting of construction trailers, facilities
9 and for construction operations.
10
11 B. Install circuit and branch wiring, with weather-resistant area distribution boxes located so that
12 power and lighting is available throughout construction by use of construction-type power
13 cords.
14
15 C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for areas of work when natural light is not adequate for
16 work, and for areas accessible to public.
17
18 D. Provide construction lighting throughout construction areas as necessary to maintain safety
19 and security. Maintain lighting on daily basis, including weekends, holidays, and foul-weather
20 days so construction site is adequately lighted.
21
22 2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
23
24 A. Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental
25 conditions to facilitate progress of Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for
26 installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to
27 temperature or humidity.
28
29 B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials, to
30 disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases.
31 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substance.
32
33 C. Portable heaters shall be standard units complete with controls.
34
35 D. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal, and for fuel consumed.
36
37 E. Open flame heating equipment is not permissible.
38
39 2.4 TEMPORARY WATER
40
41 A. Contractor shall pay for temporary water used for construction purposes. Arrange with
42 utility company to provide services required for water used during construction.
43
44 B. Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal.
45
46 C. Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available throughout construction by
47 use of hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.5 COMMUNICATION SERVICES
2
3 A. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by
4 all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
5 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
6 a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
7 b. Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use.
8 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
9 a. Police and fire departments.
10 b. Ambulance service.
11 c. Contractor's home office.
12 d. Architect's office.
13 e. Engineers' offices.
14 f. Owner's office.
15 g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
16 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
17 away from field office.
18
19 B. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office
20 adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and
21 maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:
22 1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed.
23 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.
24 3. Disk storage: 300 gigabyte hard disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.
25 4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM.
26 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse.
27 6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet.
28 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista
29 Business.
30 8. Productivity Software:
31 a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.
32 b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.
33 c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.
34 9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
35 photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these 3 functions.
36 10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router, Wi-Fi network, and ISP, equipped with
37 hardware firewall, providing minimum 1 Mbps upload and 2 Mbps download speeds at
38 each computer.
39 11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,
40 phishing and spam protection in a combined application.
41 12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software
42 providing daily backups.
43
44 C. Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for local calls. Toll
45 charges shall be paid by party who places call.
46
47 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
48
49 A. Provide temporary sanitary facilities outside [of existing] building for use of Contractor's
50 employees.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Provide chemical-type sanitary facilities in compliance with applicable health laws, and State
2 and local regulations and ordinances.
3
4 C. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
5
6 2.7 TEMPORARY SEWER AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
7
8 A. When existing sewers have to be taken up or removed, provide and maintain temporary
9 outlets and connections for public or private drains and sewers.
10
11 B. Take care of sewage and drainage which will be received from these drains and sewers.
12 Provide and maintain, adequate pumping facilities and temporary outlets or diversions.
13
14 C. Construct troughs, pipes, or other structures necessary. Dispose of drainage and sewage
15 received from temporary connections until permanent connections are built and in service.
16
17 D. Keep existing sewers and connections in service and maintained under Contract, except
18 where specified or ordered to be abandoned by Owner.
19
20 E. Dispose of water or sewage in satisfactory manner so that no nuisance is created and that
21 Work under construction will adequately be protected.
22
23 2.8 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
24
25 A. During construction, provide temporary fire protection in accordance with local Fire
26 Department Protection Code and applicable governing authorities.
27
28 B. Take necessary precautions in welding or cutting operations to keep work area free of
29 combustible materials. Do not use welding equipment around flammable liquids or vapors.
30
31 C. Keep welding and cutting equipment outdoors wherever possible. Remove welding and
32 cutting equipment wherever practical from building daily.
33
34 D. At completion of work operations, examine work and adjacent area for hazards. When work
35 operation is near building opening, examine areas above, below or adjacent to work area for
36 hazards.
37
38 E. Do not open, turn off, interfere with, attach pipe or hose to, or connect to existing fire
39 hydrant, stop valves, or stop clock, or tap water main without prior written permission of
40 proper authority or owner.
41
42 2.9 SCAFFOLDING
43
44 A. Provide scaffolding, ramps, runways, platforms, guardrails, stairs and ladders as required by
45 job conditions.
46
47 2.10 LIFTING AND HOISTING
48
49 A. Provide hoists, cranes or other lifts as required for material handling.
50
51 B. Determine need, provide appropriate equipment, coordinate installation and location with
52 Architect and Owner.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.11 CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION AIDS
3
4 A. Provide construction aids, inspection aids, and equipment required by Contractor’s personnel
5 to facilitate execution of Work.
6
7 B. Provide Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for use by Architect’s personnel while on
8 jobsite that meets or exceeds Contractor’s jobsite safety program and local OSHA
9 requirements.
10
11 2.12 BARRICADES
12
13 A. Provide barriers to prevent public entry, to protect existing trees and plants, to provide for
14 Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage.
15
16 B. Cover trenches and holes when not in use. Erect barriers at sharp changes in plane of more
17 than 3 feet.
18
19 2.13 CONSTRUCTION FENCE
20
21 A. Prior to start of Work at Project site, install enclosure fence with locked entrance gates.
22
23 B. Provide construction fence around material storage and construction areas to prevent
24 unauthorized access.
25 1. Construct [6'] [8'] -0" high chain link fence of 2" x 2" mesh maximum; galvanized steel
26 angle iron or pipe post; securely anchored line, corner and gate posts.
27 2. Provide lockable gates, padlocked during nonworking hours.
28 3. Locate personnel gates, as necessary, to provide controlled entry from construction
29 parking to construction area.
30
31 2.14 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
32
33 A. Provide temporary weathertight enclosures of exterior walls for successive areas of building
34 as work progresses as necessary to maintain acceptable working conditions.
35
36 B. Provide weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and
37 to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
38
39 C. Provide temporary exterior doors with hardware and padlocks. Other enclosures shall be
40 removable as necessary for work and handling of materials.
41
42 2.15 FIELD OFFICES
43
44 A. Provide and maintain temporary field office during entire construction period for use of
45 Contractor, and periodic use of Owner's Representative and Architect.
46
47 B. Field office shall be structurally sound, weathertight, with floors raised above ground. At
48 Contractor's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. Do not use mobile buildings
49 for living quarters. Size as required for Contractor's needs and to provide space for project
50 meetings.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Field office shall have operable, screened windows with locks. Secure entrance door with one
2 key for each occupant.
3
4 D. Sanitary Facilities: Furnish private lavatory-toilet facilities with soap and towel dispensers and
5 trash can.
6
7 E. Heating and Air Conditioning: Provide as dictated by outside temperature.
8
9 F. Fire Extinguisher: Furnish appropriate type at each office and each storage area.
10
11 G. Office for Architect and Owner's Representatives:
12 1. Furnish self-contained space for use of Architect and Owner's representatives within
13 Contractor's field office.
14 2. Furnishings: Provide two standard size desks, with drawers, two swivel chairs, one
15 drafting table and stool, two lockable four-drawer legal metal file cabinets, two visitor
16 chairs, and one plan rack.
17
18 2.16 STORAGE SHEDS
19
20 A. Construct to protect products stored within. Size for storage requirements of products in
21 individual Sections. Allow for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for
22 examination of products.
23
24 B. Heat and ventilate as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents.
25 Light adequately for maintenance and examination of products.
26
27 C. Store products that could be damaged by environmental conditions. Replace if damaged by
28 storage conditions.
29
30 2.17 DRINKING WATER
31
32 A. Furnish potable water for personnel connected with Work.
33
34 B. Pipe or transport to keep clean and fresh.
35
36 C. Provide drinking water in suitable containers or dispensers and paper cups located in close
37 proximity to where work is in progress.
38
39 D. Provide field offices with bottled drinking water, dispenser and cooling apparatus.
40 Contractor shall pay for service; maintain daily and remove when offices are removed.
41
42 2.18 TEMPORARY SECURITY
43
44 A. Provide temporary security as necessary to protect project site, existing building, and
45 Contractor's staging areas during construction.
46
47 B. Provide 24 hour temporary webcam service for remote security to protect project site and
48 materials during construction.
49
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Examine site and review conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and
6 construction facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be
7 affected by execution of Work.
8
9 3.2 PREPARATION
10
11 A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.
12
13 3.3 INSTALLATION
14
15 A. Comply with applicable requirements of each Specification Section.
16
17 B. Install facilities of neat and reasonable, uniform appearance, structurally adequate for required
18 purposes. Maintain during entire construction period.
19
20 C. Prior to start of Work at project site, install enclosure fence with locked entrance gates.
21
22 D. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed.
23 Construct or locate construction offices and sheds on proper foundation, with utility
24 connections, provide steps and landing at entrances. Locate construction offices and sheds
25 as directed by Architect.
26
27 E. Locate thermometer in convenient location, out of direct sunlight.
28
29 F. Keep working and storage areas free from standing water. Do not pump or drain water onto
30 adjacent property. Distribute discharge to prevent erosion.
31
32 3.4 MAINTENANCE
33
34 A. Maintain and clean construction office, sheds, furnishings, and equipment as required.
35 Periodically clean storage sheds.
36
37 B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.
38
39 C. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as
40 work progress requires.
41
42 3.5 DEBRIS CONTROL
43
44 A. Maintain areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris and litter.
45
46 B. Initiate and maintain specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction site,
47 storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes.
48 1. Furnish on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
49 2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes.
50 3. Periodically examine traffic areas to enforce requirements.
51 4. Remove waste material, debris and rubbish from site daily.
52 5. Do not drop or throw materials from heights.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Lower waste materials in controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
2
3 C. Hazards Control:
4 1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers.
5 2. Remove containers from premises daily.
6 3. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
7 4. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
8
9 D. Conduct disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
10
11 E. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on Project site. Do not dispose of wastes
12 into streams or waterways. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or
13 paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
14
15 3.6 DUST CONTROL
16
17 A. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from
18 construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from
19 dispersing into atmosphere.
20
21 B. Wet down materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust.
22
23 3.7 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
24
25 A. Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage from
26 cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and
27 sedimentation.
28
29 B. Hold areas of bare soil exposed at one time to minimum. Provide temporary control
30 measures such as berms, dikes, and drains.
31
32 C. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which
33 will erode.
34
35 D. Periodically examine earthwork to detect evidence of start of erosion, apply corrective
36 measures as required by erosion control.
37
38 3.8 POLLUTION CONTROL
39
40 A. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or
41 atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
42
43 B. Perform emergency measures required to contain spillage and to remove contaminated soil or
44 liquids. Excavate and dispose of contaminated earth off site and replace with suitable
45 compacted fill and topsoil.
46
47 C. Prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. Prevent disposal of wastes,
48 effluence, chemicals or other substances adjacent to streams or in sanitary or storm sewers.
49
50 D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of
51 chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 50 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.9 REMOVAL
2
3 A. Remove temporary materials and equipment when no longer required and when acceptable to
4 Architect.
5
6 B. Remove construction office, sheds, and barriers including foundations and contents at
7 completion of project.
8
9 C. Grade site to required elevation and clean area.
10
11 3.10 CLEANING
12
13 A. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or temporary facilities.
14
15 3.11 ADJUSTING
16
17 A. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or original condition.
18
19 B. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition.
20
21 C. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 58 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 58 00
2
3 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Furnish, install and maintain project identification signs.
12 2. Furnish, install and maintain temporary on-site informational signs to identify key
13 elements of construction facilities.
14 3. Remove signs on completion of construction.
15 4. Allow no other signs to be displayed.
16 5. Submit Shop Drawings of proposed Project Identification and Signs within 15 days of
17 written Notice to Proceed.
18
19 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
20
21 A. Performance Requirements:
22 1. Design sign and structure to withstand [50] [70] miles/hr. wind velocity.
23 2. Finishes/Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration
24 of Construction.
25
26 1.3 SUBMITTALS
27
28 A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of proposed project signs within 30 days of written
29 Notice to Proceed showing content, layout, lettering, color, foundation details, structural
30 materials, sizes and grades of members.
31
32 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
34 A. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional for a minimum of three years in type of work
35 required.
36
37 1.5 MAINTENANCE
38
39 A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damages to structure, framing
40 or finish of sign.
41
42
43 PART 2 PRODUCTS
44
45 2.1 SIGN MATERIALS
46
47 A. Structure and Framing: May be new or used, wood or metal, in sound condition, structurally
48 adequate and suitable for specified finish.
49
50 B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior softwood plywood with medium density overlay, standard large sizes
51 to minimize joints; 3/4" thick exterior grade A/D face veneers.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 58 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.
2
3 D. Paint:
4 1. Sign Background: Exterior quality, two coats, one coat of primer and one finish coat.
5 2. Lettering: Exterior quality, one coat.
6 3. Colors: As selected by Architect.
7
8 2.2 SIGNAGE
9
10 A. Informational Signs:
11 1. Painted signs with painted lettering, or standard products.
12 2. Size of signs and lettering to be as required by regulatory agencies, or as appropriate to
13 usage.
14 3. Colors to be as required by applicable regulatory agencies, or otherwise of uniform colors
15 throughout job as selected by Architect.
16 4. Erect informational signs at locations necessary to provide required information.
17 5. Graphics in styles and sizes as selected by Architect.
18 6. Install at height for optimum visibility, on ground-mounted poles or as attached to
19 temporary structural surfaces.
20
21 B. Project Identification Sign:
22 1. Painted sign of size, lettering and construction shown on drawing provided by Architect.
23 2. Location and number on site as indicated by Architect.
24 3. Paint graphics in styles and sizes as selected by Architect.
25
26
27 PART 3 EXECUTION
28
29 3.1 PREPARATION
30
31 A. Construct and erect project signs at locations selected by Architect or as required by
32 governing authority.
33
34 3.2 INSTALLATION
35
36 A. Install project identification signs within 30 of written Notice to Proceed.
37
38 B. Install informational signs as required by regulatory agencies or as appropriate to usage.
39
40 C. Erect sign at designated locations approved by Architect, Owner and regulatory agencies.
41
42 3.3 RELOCATION/REMOVAL
43
44 A. Remove signs, framing, supports and foundations at completion of Project.
45
46 B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of work.
47
48
49 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 60 00
2
3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the selection of products for use
12 in the project.
13 2. Product delivery, storage, and handling.
14 3. Manufacturers' standard and special warranties on products.
15 4. Manufacturers' instructions and certifications.
16
17 1.2 DEFINITIONS
18
19 A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
20 taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
21 "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
22 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
23 model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
24 literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
25 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
26 facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
27 products.
28 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
29 process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
30 performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
31 exceed those of specified product.
32
33 B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
34 product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make
35 or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
36 function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
37 characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
38 named in the specification.
39
40 C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with
41 requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section,
42 provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named
43 product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the
44 specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer
45 that does meet the requirements of the specifications.
46
47 1.3 SUBMITTALS
48
49 A. Proposed Products List: Within period of 30 days after award of Contract, submit to
50 Architect five (5) copies of complete list of major Products, which are proposed for
51 installation.
52 1. Tabulate products by Specification Section number, title, and Article number.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
2 a. Name and address of manufacturer.
3 b. Trade name.
4 c. Model or catalogue designation.
5 d. Manufacturer's Data including reference standards and performance test data.
6 3. Architect will reply promptly in writing stating whether there is reasonable objection to
7 any listed items. Failure to object to a listed item shall not constitute waiver of
8 requirements of Contract Documents.
9
10 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
12 A. Materials specified are to a define standard of quality or performance and to establish basis
13 for evaluation of proposals and substitutions.
14
15 B. Comply with individual Specification Sections and referenced standards as minimum
16 requirements.
17
18 C. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
19 products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected,
20 even if previously selected products were also options.
21 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
22 compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
23 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
24 products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
25
26 D. Source Limitations: Components required to be supplied in quantity within Specification
27 Section shall be of same manufacturer and shall be interchangeable.
28
29 E. Nameplates and Labels: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or
30 imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trade marks on surfaces of products
31 which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces[, including elevators,] or on the exterior:
32 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where
33 required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface approved by Architect
34 and governing authorities.
35 2. Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or
36 power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is
37 inconspicuous in occupied spaces.
38
39 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
40
41 A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
42 deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
43 instructions.
44
45 B. Delivery and Handling:
46 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
47 overcrowding of construction spaces.
48 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
49 are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
50 losses.
51 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
52 sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
2 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
3 to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
4
5 C. Storage:
6 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
7 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
8 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
9 enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
10 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
11 installation and concealment.
12 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
13 ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
14 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
15 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
16 equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
17
18 1.6 INSTRUCTIONS
19
20 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturers
21 printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of instructions to parties involved in
22 installation, including two copies to Architect, prior to commencing work.
23 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until
24 complete.
25 2. Maintain one set of complete instructions for Project Record Documents.
26
27 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with
28 manufacturer's instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
29 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions,
30 notify Architect in writing for further instructions.
31 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
32
33 C. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit preparatory
34 steps of installation procedures unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract
35 Documents.
36
37 1.7 CERTIFICATION
38
39 A. Prior to Final Acceptance of Work, for items designated in Specification Sections, an
40 authorized representative of each manufacturer of materials or equipment installed under
41 work of that Section shall examine installation and operation of his materials, system and
42 equipment to determine they are correctly installed and operating properly.
43
44 B. Examination and testing shall be accomplished for work which will be concealed during
45 execution of Work, after completion of installation and prior to concealment and for Work
46 which will not be concealed, at completion of Work.
47
48 C. Each representative shall submit signed statement to Owner, through Contractor, certifying
49 to his examination and to correct installation and proper operation of materials, systems or
50 equipment. Certification shall list items included.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Contractor shall transmit certifications to Architect at or prior to Final Acceptance
2 Inspection. Transmittal shall include list of certifications included.
3
4 E. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service
5 instructions shown on exterior of package.
6
7 F. Service equipment on a regular basis as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain log of
8 maintenance services. Submit log as Project Record Document in accordance with
9 requirements of Section 01 78 39.
10
11 1.8 WARRANTIES
12
13 A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
14 warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations
15 on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the
16 Contract Documents.
17 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
18 particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
19 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
20 specific rights for Owner.
21
22 B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
23 identification, ready for execution.
24 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
25 properly executed.
26 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
27 written document using indicated form properly executed.
28 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
29 submitting special warranties.
30
31 C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
32
33
34 PART 2 PRODUCTS
35
36 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
37
38 A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
39 Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
40 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
41 needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
42 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
43 specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
44 successfully in similar situations on other projects.
45 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict
46 with requirements of the Contract Documents.
47 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
48 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
49 establish salient characteristics of products.
50 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or
51 "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable
52 Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents
3 and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience.
4 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
5 named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
6 for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
7 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
8 provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
9 Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
10 considered.
11 3. Products:
12 a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers
13 and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
14 Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
15 considered unless Section 01 25 00 – “Substitutions” is referenced.
16 b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
17 manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
18 product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
19 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
20 4. Manufacturers:
21 a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide
22 a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
23 Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
24 considered unless Section 01 25 00 – “Substitutions” is referenced.
25 b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
26 provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
27 manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
28 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
29 product.
30 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
31 indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
32 indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
33 Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
34 that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
35 Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
36 manufacturers.
37
38 C. Performance Specifications Requirements: Where specifications require compliance with
39 performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are
40 recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
41
42 D. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where specifications require
43 compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with
44 the code, standard or regulations specified.
45
46 E. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",
47 provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
48 Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
49 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
50 specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution
51 Procedures" for proposal of product.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
2 Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies
3 with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from
4 manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
5
6 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
7
8 A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
9 product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
10 satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
11 these requirements:
12 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
13 Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
14 indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
15 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
16 Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
17 durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
18 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
19 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
20 names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
21 5. Samples, if requested.
22
23 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
24
25 A. Refer to Section 01 25 00 – “Substitution Procedures.”
26
27
28 PART 3 EXECUTION
29
30 3.1 EXAMINATION
31
32 A. Make periodic examinations of stored materials to verify that products are maintained under
33 specified conditions and are free from damage or deterioration.
34
35 B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements.
36
37 C. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.
38
39 D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected and that
40 weathering of finishes is within acceptable tolerances under requirements of Contract
41 Documents.
42
43 3.2 PROTECTION
44
45 A. Furnish protection against weather. Cover building openings to protect interior of building
46 from weather.
47
48 B. Maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from damage.
49
50 C. Protect items having factory finish to prevent damage to finish and equipment.
51
52 D. At end of day's work, cover new work likely to be damaged or otherwise protect as necessary.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 60 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 E. After installation, secure substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from
3 damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations.
4
5 F. Remove protection when no longer needed. Upon completion of work, remove storage
6 facilities from site.
7
8 3.3 ADJUSTING
9
10 A. Do not use materials in work which have deteriorated, become damaged or are otherwise
11 unfit for use.
12
13 B. Replace stored items damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls.
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 71 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 71 23
2
3 FIELD ENGINEERING
4
5 PART 1 GENERAL
6
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Section Includes: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field
10 engineering services, including, but not limited to the following:
11 1. Land Survey Work.
12 2. Civil Engineering Services.
13 3. Structural Engineering Services.
14
15 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
16
17 A. Land Surveyor: Registered in the State of Texas and acceptable to Architect.
18
19 1.3 SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Submit name, address, and telephone number of Land Surveyor before starting survey work.
22
23 B. On request of Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of survey.
24
25 C. Submit certificate signed by Land Surveyor that elevations and locations of Work are in
26 conformance with Contract Documents.
27
28 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
29
30 A. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
31
32 B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey
33 showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.
34
35 C. Record data on Project Record Documents in accordance with requirements of Section
36 01 78 39.
37
38 D. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Advise Architect when deviations that
39 exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected.
40
41
42 PART 2 PRODUCTS
43
44 Not Used.
45
46
47 PART 3 EXECUTION
48
49 3.1 EXAMINATION
50
51 A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 71 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Verify grades, lines, levels, and dimensions indicated.
2
3 C. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
4
5 3.2 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
6
7 A.Owner will locate and protect survey control and reference points.
8
9 B. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.
10
11 C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference
12 points during construction.
13
14 D. Promptly report to Architect loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required
15 because of changes in grades or other reasons.
16
17 E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
18 without prior written notice to Architect.
19
20 3.3 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
21
22 A. Provide field engineering services. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
23
24 B. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established
25 control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
26 Documents.
27
28 C. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
29 appropriate means:
30 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, pier stakes and numbers,
31 fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
32 2. Grid or axis for structures.
33 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
34
35 D. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
36
37 3.4 SURVEYS FOR MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
38
39 A. Perform surveys to determine quantities of unit cost work, including control surveys to
40 establish measurement reference lines. Notify Architect prior to starting work.
41
42 B. Contractor's Engineer shall sign surveyor's field notes or keep duplicate field notes.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 73 29 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 73 29
2
3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Requirements and limitations of cutting and patching of Work.
12 2. Execute cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill,
13 required to complete Work or to:
14 a. Make its several parts fit together properly.
15 b. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
16 c. Remove and replace defective work.
17 d. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
18 e. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
19 f. Make routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of mechanical,
20 electrical and plumbing Work.
21 g. Uncover work that has been covered prior to Architect's required observation.
22
23 1.2 SUBMITTALS
24
25 A. Submit written request to Architect in advance of executing cutting or alteration, other than
26 required by Contract Documents, which affects:
27 1. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
28 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project.
29 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems.
30 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.
31 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
32
33 B. Request shall include:
34 1. Identification of Project.
35 2. Location and description of affected work.
36 3. Necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation.
37 4. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof
38 integrity of Project.
39 5. Description of proposed work:
40 a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
41 b. Trades who will execute work.
42 c. Products proposed to be used.
43 d. Extent of refinishing to be done.
44 e. Cost proposal when applicable.
45 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
46 7. Written permission of separate contractor whose work will be affected.
47
48 C. Should conditions of Work or schedule indicate change of products from original
49 installation, Contractor shall submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00.
50
51 D. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be uncovered or
52 altered.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 73 29 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 1.3 COORDINATION
3
4 A. Where warranties are in force for existing work, coordinate cutting and patching work with
5 manufacturer and installer of warranted product to avoid voiding warranty.
6
7
8 PART 2 PRODUCTS
9
10 2.1 MATERIALS
11
12 A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved.
13 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
14 procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.
15
16 B. Should conditions of work or schedule indicate change of products from original
17 installation, submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00.
18
19
20 PART 3 EXECUTION
21
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23
24 A. Examine existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to
25 movement during cutting, patching, excavating, and backfilling.
26
27 B. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of Products, or
28 performance of work.
29
30 C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing. Do not proceed
31 with work until Architect has provided further instructions.
32
33 3.2 PREPARATION
34
35 A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of
36 affected portion of Work.
37
38 B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
39
40 C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by
41 cutting and patching work.
42
43 D. Maintain excavations free from water.
44
45 3.3 DUST CONTROL
46
47 A. Provide positive methods of dust control and apply dust control materials to minimize
48 raising dust from cutting and patching operations.
49
50 B. Conform to requirements for temporary barriers, enclosures and controls described in
51 Section 01 50 00 “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.”
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 73 29 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 PERFORMANCE
2
3 A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and
4 will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
5
6 B. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with
7 specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
8
9 C. Restore work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide Work in
10 accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
11
12 D. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.
13 Where fire-rated separations are penetrated, fill space around pipe or insert with material
14 with physical characteristics equivalent to fire-resistance requirement of penetrated surface.
15
16 E. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes:
17 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
18 2. For assembly, refinish entire unit.
19
20 F. Employ original installer or fabricator of work performed under this Contract to perform
21 cutting and patching for:
22 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
23 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
24
25
26 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 74 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 74 13
2
3 CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Cleaning and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during
11 construction.
12
13 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15 A. Regulatory Requirements:
16 1. Hazard Control: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from
17 premises daily.
18 2. Pollution Control: Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local codes,
19 ordinances, and anti-pollution laws.
20
21
22 PART 2 PRODUCTS
23
24 2.1 EQUIPMENT
25
26 A. Provide acceptable covered containers for deposit of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
27
28 B. Use only cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health and property, and which
29 will not damage surfaces.
30
31 C. Use only those cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
32
33 D. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
34
35
36 PART 3 EXECUTION
37
38 3.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
39
40 A. Execute daily "broom-clean" construction cleaning to keep Work, site and adjacent properties
41 free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and debris. Maintain site in a clean and
42 orderly condition including the following:
43 1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, [crawl spaces], and other
44 closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
45 2. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue
46 cleaning to eliminate conditions that could affect final finishing.
47 3. Provide on-site dump containers for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris.
48 4. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly
49 and hazardous condition. Provide additional collection and dispose of debris whenever
50 periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent accumulation.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 74 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. At not less than every week during progress of Work, clean up site and access, and legally
2 dispose of waste materials, rubbish, and debris away from site.
3
4 C. Do not overload trucks to prevent spillage on access and haul routes. Periodically examine
5 traffic areas and maintain clear routes.
6
7 3.2 DUST CONTROL
8
9 A. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
10
11 B. Vacuum clean interior building areas, including floors, ledges, pipes, ducts, and other places
12 where dust can accumulate, in conjunction with gypsum board installation and sanding
13 operations, and when ready to receive finish painting.
14
15 C. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for acceptance or
16 occupancy.
17
18 D. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will
19 not fall on wet and newly painted surfaces.
20
21 E. Clean floors prior to installation of final floor coverings.
22
23 3.3 DISPOSAL
24
25 A. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily and dispose off-site.
26
27 B. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or
28 sanitary sewer. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste
29 material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly.
30
31 C. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when temperature
32 is expected to rise above 80 degrees F.
33
34 D. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by
35 containerizing properly. Dispose of material in lawful manner.
36
37 E. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste
38 material on Project site.
39
40 F. Disposal of waste in Owner's containers on site is not permitted.
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 74 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 74 23
2
3 FINAL CLEANING
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at
11 Substantial Completion.
12
13 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
14
15 A. Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste disposal operations in full
16 compliance with federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations, ordinances
17 and laws.
18 1. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or
19 sanitary drains.
20 2. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the premises will not be
21 permitted.
22
23
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
26 2.1 MATERIALS
27
28 A. Cleaning Agents:
29 1. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of
30 surface to be cleaned.
31 2. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that
32 might damage finished surfaces.
33
34
35 PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
37 3.1 FINAL CLEANING AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
38
39 A. General:
40 1. Complying with manufacturer's instructions, clean each surface or unit of Work to the
41 condition expected from a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program using
42 experienced workers or professional cleaners.
43 2. Complete cleaning operations and conduct an examination of Work areas with Owner
44 and Architect before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion
45 for the entire Project or a portion of the Project.
46
47 B. Remove grease, petro-chemical spills, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels,
48 and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces.
49
50 C. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including plenums, shafts,
51 trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces.
52
01 May 2018 01 74 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces.
2
3 E. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors.
4
5 F. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
6
7 G. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains.
8
9 H. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
10
11 I. Clean resilient flooring, paver flooring, ceramic tile flooring, and carpeting as recommended
12 by manufacturers.
13
14 J. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. Replace broken or
15 scratched glass.
16
17 K. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
18
19 L. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems:
20 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during
21 construction.
22 2. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills.
23 3. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
24 4. Clean exposed ductwork after other cleaning has been completed.
25
26 M. Clean light fixtures, lamps, reflectors and replace burned out bulbs and defective starters.
27
28 N. Clean food service equipment to a sanitary condition, ready and acceptable for its intended
29 use.
30
31 O. Clean roof areas of debris; flush roof drainage system with water until clear.
32
33 P. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
34
35
36 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018 01 77 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 77 00
2
3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL7
8
9 1.1 SUMMARY
10
11 A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including
12 but not limited to:
13 1. Substantial Completion.
14 2. Inspection procedures.
15 3. Closeout submittals.
16 4. Payments and release of liens.
17 5. Post construction examinations.
18
19 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
20
21 A. When Contractor considers Work is substantially complete, submit to Architect:
22 1. Written certification that Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete.
23 2. List of items to be completed or corrected, value of incomplete construction and reasons
24 the Work is not complete.
25
26 B. Within seven calendar days after receipt of such certificate, Architect will make examination
27 to determine status of completion.
28
29 C. Should Architect determine that Work is not substantially complete:
30 1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, giving reasons.
31 2. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies in Work, and send second written notice of
32 substantial completion to Architect.
33 3. Architect will re-examine Work.
34
35 D. When Architect concurs that Work is substantially complete, he will:
36 1. Prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA Form G704, accompanied by
37 Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by
38 Architect.
39 2. Submit Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of
40 responsibilities assigned to them in Certificate.
41
42 E. After Work is substantially complete, Contractor shall:
43 1. Allow Owner occupancy of Project under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial
44 Completion.
45 2. Obtain and submit Certificate of Occupancy, operating certificates and similar releases
46 enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work.
47 3. Complete work listed for completion or correction within designated form.
48 4. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.
49 5. Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 74 23 “Final Cleaning.”
50 6. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. [Advise
51 Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions.]
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 77 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 FINAL INSPECTION
2
3 A. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification that:
4 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
5 2. Work has been examined for compliance and completed in accordance with Contract
6 Documents.
7 3. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are
8 operational.
9 4. Work is completed and ready for final examination.
10
11 B. Architect will make examination to verify status of completion within seven calendar days
12 after receipt of such certification.
13
14 C. Should Architect consider that Work is incomplete or defective:
15 1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective work.
16 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy stated deficiencies, and send second
17 written certification to Architect that Work is complete.
18 3. Architect will re-examine Work.
19
20 D. When Architect finds that Work is acceptable under Contract Documents, he shall request
21 Contractor to make closeout submittals.
22
23 1.4 REINSPECTION FEES
24
25 A. Should Architect perform re-examinations due to failure of Work to comply with claims of
26 status of completion made by Contractor:
27 1. Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services.
28 2. Owner will deduct amount of such compensation from final payment to Contractor.
29
30 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
31
32 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
33 1. Certificate of Occupancy.
34 2. Certificates of Inspection: Mechanical and Electrical systems as required by respective
35 sections.
36
37 B. Project Record Documents: Comply with Section 01 78 39.
38
39 C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Comply with Section 01 78 23.
40
41 D. Warranties and Bonds: Comply with Section 01 78 30.
42
43 E. Spare Parts and Maintenance Material:
44 1. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each
45 specification section in addition to that required for completion of Work.
46 2. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to Project site, store properly, and obtain receipt prior to
47 final payment.
48
49 F. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 77 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.6 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS
2
3 A. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: AIA G706.
4
5 B. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA G706A.
6
7 C. Attachment to Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens:
8 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA G707.
9 2. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens.
10 3. Separate releases of waivers of liens from subcontractors, suppliers and others with lien
11 rights against property of Owner, together with list of those parties.
12
13 D. Submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to Owner.
14
15 1.7 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
16
17 A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect.
18
19 B. Statement shall reflect adjustments to Contract Sum:
20 1. Original Contract Sum.
21 2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
22 a. Previous Change Orders.
23 b. Allowances.
24 c. Unit Prices.
25 d. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
26 e. Penalties and Bonuses.
27 f. Deductions for liquidated damages.
28 g. Deductions for re-examination payments.
29 h. Other adjustments.
30 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
31 4. Previous payments.
32 5. Sum remaining due.
33
34 C. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum
35 which were not previously made by Change Orders.
36
37 1.8 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
38
39 A. Contractor shall submit final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and
40 requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract.
41
42 1.9 ADDITIONAL ADJUSTMENT
43
44 A. No adjustments to Contract requested by Contractor will be allowed if asserted after
45 execution of Final Payment of Contract.
46
47 1.10 POST-CONSTRUCTION EXAMINATION
48
49 A. Prior to expiration of one year from Date of Substantial Completion, Owner will make visual
50 examination of Project in company of Contractor to determine whether further correction of
51 Work is required in accordance with provisions of Contract.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 77 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Owner will promptly notify Contractor, in writing, of observed deficiencies.
2
3 C. Contractor will contact Owner to arrange time and establish schedule for correction of
4 deficiencies.
5
6
7 PART 2 PRODUCTS
8
9 Not Used.
10
11
12 PART 3 EXECUTION
13
14 Not Used.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
18
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 78 23
2
3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements the preparation and submittal
11 for operating and maintenance manuals including the following:
12 1. Operating and maintenance manuals for building systems or equipment.
13 2. Instruction manual covering the care, preservation and maintenance of architectural
14 products and finishes.
15 3. Instruction of Owner's operating personnel in operation and maintenance of building
16 systems and equipment.
17
18 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
19
20 A. Prepare instructional manuals and data bound in commercial quality 3-ring binders:
21 1. Organize with index tabs according to sequence of Specification Sections.
22 2. Identify each volume with type or printed title as instructed by Architect.
23
24 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUALS
25
26 A. Arrange typewritten table of contents for each volume, in systematic order:
27 1. List of each product required to be included with name, address, and telephone number
28 of:
29 a. Subcontractor or installer.
30 b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
31 c. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
32 2. Identifying each product by product name and other identifying symbols.
33
34 B. Product Data:
35 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product with product clearly
36 identified.
37 2. Delete references to inapplicable information.
38 3. Annotate each sheet to clearly identify specific product or part installed, and data
39 applicable to installation.
40
41 C. Drawings:
42 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate relations of
43 component parts of equipment and systems and control and flow diagrams.
44 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct
45 illustration of completed installation.
46
47 D. Written Text: As required to supplement product data for particular installation to provide
48 logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, organized in a consistent format and in
49 logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Recommended Spare Parts: Furnish a list of recommended spare parts for each equipment
2 item that will be needed to support that item of equipment for a 12 month period. Spare
3 parts list shall contain the following information:
4 1. Parts Descriptions.
5 2. Manufacturer's Part Number.
6 3. Shelf Life.
7 4. Recommended Quantity.
8 5. Unit Price.
9 6. Name and address of the part manufacturer.
10 7. Name and address of a local supplier for the part.
11
12 1.4 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MANUAL REQUIREMENTS
13
14 A. Submit three copies of completed manuals in final form.
15
16 B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
17 1. Description of unit and component parts.
18 a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
19 b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
20 c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
21 2. Operating procedures:
22 a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
23 b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions.
24 c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
25 d. Special operating instructions.
26 3. Maintenance Procedures:
27 a. Routine operations.
28 b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
29 c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
30 d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
31 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule, including list of lubricants required.
32 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
33 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
34 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, price lists, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
35 required for maintenance, predicted life of parts subject to wear and items recommended
36 to be stocked as spare parts.
37 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
38 9. Each subcontractor's coordination drawings including as-installed color coded piping
39 diagrams.
40 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve.
41 11. Water treatment procedures and tests.
42 12. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems.
43 13. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
44 recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
45 14. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
46
47 C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
48 1. Description of system and component parts.
49 a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
50 b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
51 c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
52 2. Circuit directories of panelboards.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Electrical service.
2 b. Controls.
3 c. Communications.
4 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
5 4. Operating procedures:
6 a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
7 b. Sequences required.
8 c. Special operating instructions.
9 5. Maintenance procedures:
10 a. Routine operations.
11 b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
12 c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
13 d. Adjustment and checking.
14 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
15 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
16 recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
17 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
18
19 D. Include warnings of detrimental maintenance practices.
20
21 E. Prepare and include additional data when need for such data becomes apparent during
22 instruction of Owner's personnel or as required under pertinent Specification Section.
23
24 F. Refer to individual Sections of Project Manual for additional requirements for operating and
25 maintenance data.
26
27 G. Provide complete information for products and equipment specified in:
28 1. Division 14: Conveying Systems.
29 2. Division 21: Fire Suppression
30 3. Division 22: Plumbing
31 4. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)
32 5. Division 26: Electrical Systems.
33 6. Division 27: Communications
34 7. Division 28: Electronic Safety and Security
35
36 1.5 ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS MANUAL REQUIREMENTS
37
38 A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form.
39
40 B. Refer to individual Sections of Project Manual for submittal requirements.
41
42 C. Content: Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products, catalog numbers, sizes,
43 and composition; and finish designations.
44
45 D. Information required for re-ordering.
46
47 E. Instructions for care and maintenance.
48 1. Manufacturer's recommended lubricants.
49 2. Manufacturer's recommendations for types of cleaning agents and methods.
50 3. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product.
51 4. Recommended maintenance and cleaning schedule.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended
2 quantities to be maintained in storage.
3
4 1.6 ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES MANUAL REQUIREMENTS
5
6 A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form.
7
8 B. Contractor is to provide finish information and samples of actual materials installed in
9 Project. Provide separate line item for each type of finish installed. Attach small sample of
10 each finish that matches finish installed. Provide information on manufacturer, catalog
11 number, finish designation, or other information necessary for Owner to match finish in the
12 future.
13
14 C. Refer to individual Sections of Project Manual for submittal requirements.
15
16 D. Contractor will provide heavy, cardboard pages printed in required page format, approved by
17 Architect, to attach samples and information to for assembly into notebook format.
18
19 E. Contractor shall compile information and samples for Manual on Architectural Finishes
20 throughout construction period to simplify assembly at Project close-out.
21
22 1.7 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
23
24 A. Submit one copy of completed data in final form 30 days prior to demonstrations of
25 equipment.
26
27 B. Copy will be returned approved or with comments for revisions.
28
29 C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form within 10 days prior to
30 equipment demonstrations and prior to final inspection or acceptance.
31
32 1.8 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
33
34 A. Prior to final inspection, instruct the Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and
35 maintenance of products equipment and systems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed
36 upon times.
37 1. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction during other
38 seasons.
39 2. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or system as the
40 basis of instruction. Review contents in detail to explain aspects of operation and
41 maintenance.
42
43
44 PART 2 PRODUCTS
45
46 Not Used.
47
48 PART 3 EXECUTION
49
50 Not Used.
51
52 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 30 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 78 30
2
3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: General administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and
11 bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard warranties on
12 products and special warranties.
13 1. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
14 2. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
15 3. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
16 4. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
17 5. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.
18
19 1.2 DEFINITIONS
20
21 A. Standard Product Warranties: Reprinted written warranties published by individual
22 manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
23 the Owner.
24
25 B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by the Contract Documents, either to extend
26 time limits provided standard product warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
27
28 C. Emergency Repairs: Owner reserves right to make emergency repairs as required to keep
29 equipment or materials in operation or to prevent damage to persons or property without
30 voiding Contractor's warranty or bond, or relieving Contractor of his responsibilities during
31 contract, warranty or bond periods.
32
33 1.3 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
34
35 A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and
36 replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed
37 and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
38
39 B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty by written endorsement.
40 1. Reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment
41 for depreciation but not less than 50% of the original warranty period of time.
42
43 C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace
44 or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract
45 Documents.
46 1. Cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has
47 benefited from use of the Work through its anticipated useful service life is the
48 Contractor's responsibility.
49
50 D. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections
51 to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 30 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Acceptance of Work: Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project
2 where a special warranty is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is
3 presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
4
5 1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
6
7 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, service contracts and maintenance contracts, executed by each
8 of respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors.
9
10 B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each.
11
12 C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence and provide complete information for
13 each item.
14 1. Product or work item.
15 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
16 3. Scope.
17 4. Date of beginning of each warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
18 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
19 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
20 a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
21 b. Instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond.
22 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
23
24 1.5 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Prepare in duplicate packets.
27
28 B. Format:
29 1. Size 8-½" x 11", punch sheets for standard 3-ring binder.
30 2. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders.
31 3. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS".
32 4. List:
33 a. Title of Project.
34 b. Name of Contractor.
35
36 C. Binders: Commercial quality, 3-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
37
38 1.6 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
39
40 A. Submit warranties to Architect prior to date certified for Substantial Completion or on date
41 specified in Architect Certificate of Substantial Completion:
42 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner
43 submit properly executed warranties to Architect within fifteen days of completion of
44 that designated portion of the Work.
45 2. For items of work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial
46 Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of
47 acceptance as start of warranty period.
48
49 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
50
51 A. Submit warranties, bonds, service contracts and maintenance contracts as specified in each
52 respective Specification Section.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 30 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Refer to each individual Section of Project Manual for specific warranty and bond submittal
3 requirements.
4
5
6 PART 2 PRODUCTS
7
8 Not Used.
9
10
11 PART 3 EXECUTION
12
13 Not Used.
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 39 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 78 39
2
3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
11 Documents including but not limited to the following:
12 1. Marked-up copies of Contract Documents including field records for variable and
13 concealed conditions.
14 2. Marked-up copies of submittals, shop drawings, product data, and samples.
15 3. Newly prepared drawings.
16
17 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
18
19 A. For duration of Project, maintain at job site following:
20 1. One copy of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, shop drawings, product data,
21 miscellaneous requested submittal data, change orders and other modifications to
22 Contract, field orders, field tests or written instructions.
23 2. One copy of transmittal letters.
24 3. One set of samples.
25
26 B. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for
27 construction.
28 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
29 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.
30 3. Do not permit record documents to be used for construction purposes.
31
32 C. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI 50-division format.
33
34 D. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record
35 documents for construction purposes.
36
37 E. Make documents and samples available for examination by Architect.
38
39 F. Incomplete or out of order documents and samples will be grounds for not approving
40 application for payment.
41
42 G. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in color code designated by
43 Architect.
44
45 H. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. Keep record
46 documents current. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not
47 conceal any work until required information is recorded.
48 1. Prior to creation of paper or electronic copies of record documents, remove Architect’s
49 and Engineer’s seals from all documents.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 39 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
2
3 A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
4 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
5 a. Initial Submittal: Submit one paper copy set of marked-up record prints.
6 Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
7 information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
8 b. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set and one PDF electronic files of
9 marked-up record prints. Print/PDF each Drawing file, whether or not
10 changes and additional information were recorded.
11
12 B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of
13 Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
14
15 C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and
16 directories of each submittal.
17 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance
18 manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
19
20 D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
21 record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction
22 activities. Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of
23 each submittal.
24
25 E. Reports: Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated in Project record
26 documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed
27 conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
28
29 1.4 BURDEN OF ACCURACY
30
31 A. Contractor shall bear costs of damages incurred by Owner due to inaccuracies or
32 incompleteness of submitted Record Documents for a period of time following Substantial
33 Completion as defined by Conditions of the Contract.
34
35
36 PART 2 PRODUCTS
37
38 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
39
40 A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and
41 Shop Drawings.
42 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
43 from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
44 whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
45 information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
46 a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult
47 to identify or measure and record later.
48 b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
49 c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 39 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2 e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
3 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
4 a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
5 b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
6 c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
7 d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
8 e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
9 f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
10 g. Actual equipment locations.
11 h. Duct size and routing.
12 i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
13 j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
14 k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
15 l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
16 m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
17 n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
18 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize
19 personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
20 prints.
21 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
22 between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
23 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
24 from original Drawings.
25 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
26 numbers, and similar identification, where applicable
27
28 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
29 Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full
30 set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
31 1. Formats:
32 a. Revit RVT, Version 2017, building information model (BIM) at LOD 300 or greater,
33 operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.]
34 b. Annotated PDF electronic file.
35 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
36 Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
37 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
38 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
39 use in recording information.
40 a. Refer to Section 01 31 00 “Project Coordination” for requirements related to use of
41 Architect's digital data files.
42 b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.
43
44 C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record
45 Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop
46 Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
47 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an
48 alternate, substitution, or other modification.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 39 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
2 the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly
3 prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for
4 formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
5
6 D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
7 RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
8 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
9 manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
10 on cover sheets.
11 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
12 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
13 that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
14 identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
15 4. Identification: As follows:
16 a. Project name.
17 b. Date.
18 c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
19 d. Name of Architect.
20 e. Name of Contractor.
21
22 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
23
24 A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
25 varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
26 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
27 cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
28 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
29 equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
30 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
31 provide a record of selections made.
32 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
33 applicable.
34
35 B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file, and paper copy.
36
37 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
38
39 A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
40 varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
41 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
42 cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
43 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
44 manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
45 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
46 applicable.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 39 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy, and
2 scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data.
3 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and
4 title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
5
6 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
7
8 A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
9 record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or
10 file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
11
12 B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file, paper copy, and
13 scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals.
14 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section
15 number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
16
17
18 PART 3 EXECUTION
19
20 3.1 RECORDING
21
22 A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
23 record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur.
24 Do not wait until the end of the project. Architect will periodically review record documents
25 to assure compliance.
26
27 B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in
28 the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use
29 project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good
30 order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide
31 access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 46 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 78 46
2
3 EXTRA MATERIALS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for stocking of extra material.
11
12 B. Divisions 02 - 41: Specific quantities of extra material required by individual specifications
13 sections.
14
15 1.2 PRODUCTS REQUIRED
16
17 A. Provide quantities of extra materials specified in individual specification sections to Owner,
18 in addition to quantities required for completion of Work.
19
20 B. Products to be identical to those installed in Work. Include quantities in original purchase
21 from supplier or manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.
22
23 1.3 STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE
24
25 A. Temporarily store extra materials with products to be installed in Work, under provision of
26 Section 01 60 00 “Product Options,” or in other location acceptable to Owner.
27
28 B. When adequate, secure storage facilities available at Site, capable of maintaining conditions
29 required for storage and not required for Contract Work or storage; extra materials may be
30 stored in available space.
31
32 C. Maintain extra materials in manufacturer's unopened original containers with labels intact and
33 legible, until delivery to Owner.
34
35 1.4 DELIVERY
36
37 A. Coordinate final delivery of extra materials with Owner prior to Substantial Completion.
38
39 B. Deliver, unload, store, and account for specified quantities of extra materials in presence of
40 Owner's representative.
41
42 C. Owner will indicate final placement in building of extra materials.
43
44 D. Obtain written acceptance from Owner's representative of receipt of specified quantities of
45 extra materials.
46
47 E. Provide proportional quantity of spare parts and maintenance materials.
48 1. Owner to review, modify, and approve list prior to purchase of parts.
49 2. Record quantities delivered with Owner's representative.
50
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 78 46 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2
3 Not Used.
4
5
6 PART 3 – EXECUTION
7
8 Not Used.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 79 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 01 79 00
2
3 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS AND TRAINING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
11 personnel, including the following:
12 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
13 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
14 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
15
16 1.2 SUBMITTALS
17
18 A. Instruction Program: Prior to the execution of any demonstrations or training, submit
19 outline of instructional program, including a list of training modules and a schedule of
20 proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training
21 module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
22
23 B. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within 15 days of end of
24 each training module.
25 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:
26 a. Name of Project.
27 b. Name and contact information for videographer.
28 c. Name of Contractor.
29 d. Date of video recording.
30 2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label
31 information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to
32 corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video
33 recording on each page.
34 3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's in PDF
35 electronic file format on compact disc.
36
37 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
38
39 A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, experienced in
40 operation and maintenance procedures and training.
41
42 B. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing
43 demonstration and training events similar to those required.
44
45 C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with Owner’s personnel.
46 Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not
47 limited to, the following:
48 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
49 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
50 instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
51 3. Review required content of instruction.
52 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 79 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
2
3 1.4 COORDINATION
4
5 A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
6 minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
7
8 B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
9 time, and course content.
10
11 C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
12 maintenance manuals.
13
14
15 PART 2 PRODUCTS
16
17 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
18
19 A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
20 for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual
21 Specification Sections.
22
23 B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
24 Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master.
25 For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system,
26 equipment, or component:
27 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
28 a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
29 b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
30 c. Operating standards.
31 d. Regulatory requirements.
32 e. Equipment function.
33 f. Operating characteristics.
34 g. Limiting conditions.
35 h. Performance curves.
36 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
37 a. Emergency manuals.
38 b. Operations manuals.
39 c. Maintenance manuals.
40 d. Project record documents.
41 e. Identification systems.
42 f. Warranties and bonds.
43 g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
44 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
45 a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
46 b. Instructions on stopping.
47 c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
48 d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
49 e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
50 f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
51 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
52 a. Startup procedures.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 79 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
2 c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
3 d. Regulation and control procedures.
4 e. Control sequences.
5 f. Safety procedures.
6 g. Instructions on stopping.
7 h. Normal shutdown instructions.
8 i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
9 j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
10 k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
11 l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
12 m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
13 5. Adjustments: Include the following:
14 a. Alignments.
15 b. Checking adjustments.
16 c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
17 d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
18 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
19 a. Diagnostic instructions.
20 b. Test and inspection procedures.
21 7. Maintenance: Include the following:
22 a. Inspection procedures.
23 b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
24 c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
25 d. Procedures for routine cleaning
26 e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
27 f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
28 g. Instruction on use of special tools.
29 8. Repairs: Include the following:
30 a. Diagnosis instructions.
31 b. Repair instructions.
32 c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
33 instructions.
34 d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
35 e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
36
37
38 PART 3 EXECUTION
39
40 3.1 PREPARATION
41
42 A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and
43 training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination
44 with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
45
46 B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
47
48 3.2 INSTRUCTION
49
50 A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
51 systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 79 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
2 seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
3 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
4
5 C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and
6 fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final
7 operation and maintenance data submittals.
8
9 D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
10 mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
11
12 E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
13 instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
14 training use.
15
16 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
17
18 A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training
19 video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions
20 and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
21 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and
22 lesson outline.
23
24 B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable
25 to Owner, on electronic media.
26 1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with
27 commercial-grade graphic label.
28 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual
29 table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.
30 3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in
31 video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
32 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for
33 inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the
34 following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project
35 table of contents:
36 a. Name of Contractor/Installer.
37 b. Business address.
38 c. Business phone number.
39 d. Point of contact.
40 e. E-mail address.
41
42 C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
43 adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
44 1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.
45 a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.
46 b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project
47 Manual table of contents.
48 c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop
49 filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement
50 of new filming segment.
51
52 D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 01 79 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
2 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.
3
4 E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by live microphone or
5 dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of
6 items being viewed.
7
8 F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured
9 from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.
10
11 G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training
12 modules in same format as recordings of live training.
13
14
15 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 03 11 00 1
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section includes: 5
6
1.2 REFERENCES 7
A. Codes and Specifications 8
9
a. ACI 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 10
b. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 11
c. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 12
d. ACI 347R, Guide to Formwork for Concrete 13
14
a. Manual of Standard Practice 15
16
a. ASTM C203, Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of 17
Block-Type Thermal Insulation 18
b. ASTM D1621, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular 19
Plastics 20
c. ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for 21
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient 22
Bituminous Types) 23
1.3 SUBMITTALS 24
A. Shop Drawings: 25
26
27
28
B. Construction Joints: Submit diagrams of construction joints. 29
C. Form Ties: For Architecturally exposed concrete, submit layout of form tie spacing. 30
D. Product Data: 31
32
33
34
35
E. Samples: 36
F. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 37
of this Section: 38
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
a. If available, provide product specific Type III, third party certified, Environmental 2
Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product manufacturer is 3
explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 4
b. If available, provide third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) for 5
each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 6
c. If available, provide published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each product 7
documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every product ingredient. 8
9
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 10
recycled content per unit of product. 11
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 12
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 13
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 14
15
a. Indicate extraction, manufacture, and purchase location of all products; indicate 16
distance between points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the project 17
site. 18
b. Indicate material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 19
purchased within 100 miles of the project site. 20
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 21
A. Store materials off ground and protected from weather. 22
23
24
B. Protect smooth faces of form liner materials from abrasion, denting or scarring during handling. 25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 26
2.1 GENERAL 27
A. Design, erect, shore, brace and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to withstand vertical, 28
lateral, static, dynamic and construction loads that are applied prior to the concrete structure 29
reaching adequate strength to support such loads. 30
B. Limit deflections of forms to provide smooth, straight surfaces without unsightly bulges and 31
deformations. 32
C. Limit deformations of forms for architecturally exposed surfaces to 0.0025 times the span of 33
each component (facing material, studs and walers). 34
2.2 MATERIALS 35
A. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces: No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir 36
dressed to uniform and smooth contact surfaces. 37
B. Wood forms for concrete surfaces exposed to view: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir concrete 38
form plywood, moisture resistant, not less than 5 plies, and minimum thickness of 9/16 inch. 39
Line forms with one of the following: 40
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
C. Void retainers: 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
a. SureRetainer by VoidFormProducts, Englewood, CO 12
13
14
15
a. Foamular 250 Rigid Foam Insulation by Owens Corning 16
b. Styrofoam Highload 40 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation by Dow 17
2.3 COMPONENTS 18
A. Rustications: steel, polyvinyl chloride or milled and sealed white pine. 19
B. Dove-tailed anchor slots: compatible with specified dove-tailed anchors for masonry veneer. 20
2.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS 21
A. Fiberboard void forms (void boxes): manufactured using corrugated paper material with water 22
resistant fiberboard material exterior, capable of supporting weight of wet concrete without 23
crushing but non-durable in long-term (deteriorates over time with absorption of moisture). 24
Void forms to be laminated using moisture resistant adhesive. 25
26
27
a. Do not cut fiberboard void forms in field. 28
29
30
31
a. Protective cover board to be ¼-inch minimum thickness hardboard/fiberboard or 32
approved equal. 33
2.5 ACCESSORIES 34
A. Form ties: bolt rods or patented devices of sufficient strength to withstand pressure due to wet 35
concrete (3000 lbs. minimum tensile strength); adjustable in length, and removable to a depth of 36
at least 1 inch from face of concrete. 37
38
39
40
B. Form release agent: 41
42
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2.6 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 2
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 3
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 4
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 5
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 6
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 7
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 8
operations. 9
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 10
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 11
0.1%. 12
2.7 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 13
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 14
below the industry average in the following categories: 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 22
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content 23
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of materials in the project. 24
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 25
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk programs. 26
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 27
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 28
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products sourced within 29
100 miles of the project site. 30
PART 3 - EXECUTION 31
3.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 32
A. Design formwork for concrete elements to have correct dimension, shape, alignment, elevation, 33
and position with dimensional tolerances conforming to ACI 117. Reference ACI 347R. 34
B. Design formwork to safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such 35
loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to the ground 36
by the formwork system or by in-place construction of adequate strength. 37
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
C. Form sides of concrete elements unless specifically noted or shown otherwise on the Drawings. 1
2
3
4
D. Construct forms to required shapes, lines and dimensions; provide necessary studs, walers, ties, 5
centering, molds and supports. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
E. Tying of forms: provide sufficient form ties to prevent bulging or collapse of forms under 13
weight of wet concrete. 14
15
16
F. Special features: place in forms any wood strips, blocking, molding, and liners necessary to 17
produce required shapes. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
G. Coatings: 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
H. Construction joints: 32
33
a. Do not locate construction joints between lateral bracing elements of walls and 34
columns. 35
b. Locate construction joints in beams, slabs and joists approximately at midspan 36
between supports. 37
c. Provide plumb and level construction joints. In order to avoid irregular lines at 38
horizontal construction joints in exposed concrete faces, tack a continuous strip of 39
dressed lumber, 1 inch thick, to inside of wall or grade beam form, with its lower 40
edge at line of construction joint. About one hour after placing concrete in lower 41
part of wall or grade beam, remove strip, level off irregularities which appear in 42
joint line with wood float and remove laitance. 43
d. Provide shear keys and waterstops as required in construction joints. 44
I. Fiberboard Void Boxes: 45
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J. Void Retainers: 12
13
14
a. Where void space is not intact, remove excess concrete or other material prior to 15
installing void retainers. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
3.2 REMOVAL OF FORMS 26
A. Remove forms completely, unless specifically required otherwise. 27
B. Remove forms carefully to avoid damage to concrete surfaces. 28
C. Do not remove forms until concrete is adequately set. 29
30
a. Maintain sufficient ties to hold forms in place. 31
b. Withdraw through-wall ties toward the inside (or unexposed) face of walls and 32
beams. 33
c. Prevent spalling during removal of ties. 34
35
a. Minimum strength is 75% of design strength. 36
D. Remove forms sequentially and in small units to prevent shock, overload or undue eccentricity 37
in the structure. Do not store materials or place heavy equipment on structures of which forms 38
have been removed unless concrete strength is equal to design strength, or re-shores are 39
installed. Remove forms in a manner that does not require a large portion of the structure to be 40
self-supporting (i.e. a full bay of framing). Install re-shores immediately as form removal 41
progresses. 42
E. Do not remove forms until supporting structures (columns, foundation or hangers) are 43
permanently in place and full strength. 44
18 September 2018 03 11 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
END OF SECTION 1
18 September 2018 03 11 15 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 03 11 15 1
EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM BLOCK FORMWORK 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Related Sections: 03 11 00 Structural Concrete Formwork 5
1.2 REFERENCES 6
A. ASTM D6817 - Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam 7
1.3 SUBMITTALS 8
A. Shop Drawings: Show layout and dimensions of each Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) foam block 9
fill area. Indicate location, size, and elevation. Provide cross section of each area indicating 10
height and depth. Provide plan view of each layer of foam block with each part identified and 11
dimensioned. Show attachment method and configuation. 12
B. Product Data for listed materials including: 13
14
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 15
A. Deliver EPS foam labeled with material Type. 16
B. Store above ground and protected from moisture and sunlight prior to installation. 17
C. Product should not be exposed to open flame or other ignition sources. 18
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 19
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 20
A. Molded, Rigid Cellular Expanded Polystyrene Blocks: Comply with manufacturer's 21
requirements, ASTM D6817. 22
B. Adhesive: non-solvent based polyurethane adhesive. 23
C. GeoGripper Plates: Used to restrain EPS Geofoam from moving laterally in layer over layer 24
applications. 25
26
27
D. Treat EPS foam blocks with a tested and proven termite treatment for below grade applications 28
by the manufacturer, 3 year minimum field exposure. The treatment shall be EPA registered, 29
meet requirements of ICC ES EG239, and be recognized in an ICC ES report. 30
PART 3 - EXECUTION 31
18 September 2018 03 11 15 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS 1
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s EPS foam product data; including technical bulletins. 2
3.2 STORAGE 3
A. Ballast: EPS foam should be ballasted to prevent displacement by wind or high water 4
conditions, both in storage and during all phases of placement. 5
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION 6
A. Install system in compliance with the Drawings and installation/shop drawings as prepared by 7
manufacturer. 8
B. Install blocks in layers and locations as specified on shop drawings. Hold dimensions on shop 9
drawings and the Construction documents. 10
11
3.4 PROTECTION & SAFETY 12
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction as 13
required. 14
B. Do not weld with torch in the same room as installed or stored EPS. Protect EPS against 15
ignition at all times. 16
END OF SECTION 17
18 September 2018 03 15 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 03 15 00 1
EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES AND INSERTS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
6
7
8
1.2 REFERENCES 9
A. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 10
B. American Institute of Steel Construction 11
12
13
C. American Welding Society, AWS: 14
15
16
D. American Concrete Institute: 17
18
19
E. American Society for Testing and Materials: 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 03 15 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1.3 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data indicating product compliance for the following: 2
3
4
5
6
B. Shop Drawings: submit shop and installation drawings showing shop and field connection 7
details, including material grades, material sizes, and details of fabrication. 8
9
10
11
12
13
C. When requested by Owner or Architect, submit welders' certifications. 14
D. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 15
of this Section: 16
17
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 18
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 19
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 20
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 21
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 22
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 23
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 24
the product. 25
26
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 27
recycled content per unit of product. 28
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 29
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 30
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 31
32
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 33
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 34
project site. 35
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 36
purchased within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 37
38
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 39
A. Qualifications 40
41
42
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 43
18 September 2018 03 15 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
A. Store fabricated assemblies and inserts under cover and off of the ground to protect against 1
corrosion prior to placement. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3
2.1 MATERIALS 4
A. Steel 5
6
7
8
9
B. Reinforcing Bars 10
11
12
13
C. Fusion Welded Anchors 14
15
16
17
18
19
D. Welding Electrodes: E70. For welding of ASTM A706 rebar, use E80. 20
E. Coatings 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
2.2 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 28
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 29
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 30
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 31
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 32
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 33
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 34
operations. 35
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 36
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 37
0.1%. 38
2.3 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 39
18 September 2018 03 15 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 1
below the industry average in the following categories: 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 9
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 10
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 11
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 12
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 13
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 14
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 15
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 16
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 17
2.4 FABRICATION 18
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in shop. Carefully and accurately shear, flame cut, 19
and chip materials as required. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. Do 20
not enlarge holes by burning. Cut holes cleanly without torn or ragged edges. Weld in 21
accordance with AISC Specifications and with AWS D1.1 and D1.4. Permit only AWS certified 22
welders to perform welds. 23
B. Weld deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors by full-fusion process. Weld in accordance 24
with manufacturer's recommendations regarding equipment, conditions of material, and 25
temperature. Acceptable processes: Nelson Stud Welding Company, and KSM Welding 26
Services Division, Omark Industries. 27
C. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and accessories exposed to weather or soil. Steel embeds 28
used within a crawl space environment shall be hot-dip galvanized. 29
D. Plainly mark and match-mark assemblies and inserts to correspond to placement drawings and 30
diagrams. 31
PART 3 - EXECUTION 32
3.1 INSTALLATION 33
A. Clean assemblies and inserts of corrosion, dirt, oil, grease and laitance before placing in forms. 34
B. Place assemblies and inserts in forms and securely anchor in required positions with correct 35
orientations. Use templates, diagrams and instructions provided by the Fabricator for proper 36
alignment and positioning. 37
18 September 2018 03 15 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1
A. Laboratory Testing: provide independent testing laboratory services as follows: 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B. Afford full cooperation and access to Work to testing laboratory and provide adequate notice to 9
laboratory of when Work is ready for testing and inspection so that services can be carried out 10
in full, allowing sufficient time for making corrections without delaying progress of Work. 11
3.3 ADJUSTING 12
A. Field Touch Up 13
14
15
END OF SECTION 16
18 September 2018 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 03 20 00 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 03 20 00 1
CONCRETE REINFORCING 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
7
B. Products Furnished, not Installed Under This Section 8
9
1.2 REFERENCES 10
A. Codes and Specifications 11
12
a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 13
b. SP-066, ACI Detailing Manual 14
15
a. Manual of Standard Practice 16
17
a. AWS D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel 18
19
a. ASTM A1064, Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire 20
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 21
b. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars 22
for Concrete Reinforcement 23
c. ASTM A706, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel 24
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 25
d. ASTM A775, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars 26
e. ASTM A767, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for 27
Concrete Reinforcement 28
f. ASTM A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of 29
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings 30
g. ASTM D3963, Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of 31
Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars 32
1.3 SUBMITTALS 33
A. Shop Drawings 34
35
a. Reinforcing sizes and quantities 36
b. Reinforcing lengths and bending details 37
c. Placement instructions 38
d. Details and spacing of supports for reinforcing 39
e. References to Engineer's reinforcing designations 40
f. Engineer's notes regarding reinforcing placement 41
18 September 2018 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 03 20 00 - 2 17008.0000
1
2
3
B. Quality Control Submittals 4
5
6
7
C. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 8
of this Section: 9
10
a. If available, provide product specific Type III, third party certified, Environmental 11
Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product manufacturer is 12
explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 13
b. If available, provide third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) for 14
each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 15
c. If available, provide published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each product 16
documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every product ingredient. 17
18
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 19
recycled content per unit of product. 20
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 21
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 22
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 23
24
a. Indicate extraction, manufacture, and purchase location of all products; indicate 25
distance between points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the project 26
site. 27
b. Indicate material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 28
purchased within 100 miles of the project site. 29
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 30
A. Deliver materials in tagged bundles grouped by reinforcing size and length. 31
B. Store reinforcing on skids off ground and stacked to permit drainage. Prevent build-up of rust 32
and dirt on reinforcing. Protect reinforcing from contamination that would prevent bonding of 33
concrete. 34
C. Do not bend, twist or warp reinforcing during handling. 35
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 36
2.1 MATERIALS 37
A. Reinforcing Steel 38
39
40
41
42
18 September 2018 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 03 20 00 - 3 17008.0000
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 1
A. Provide manufactured units conforming to ACI 318 and capable of developing 125% of the 2
yield strength of the bar, unless noted otherwise. 3
B. Full-tension sleeve bar splices: sleeve with ferrous filler 4
5
C. Compression sleeve splice: sleeve with ferrous filler 6
7
8
D. Compression bar splice: bolted sleeve 9
10
11
E. Mechanical couplings: taper-threaded hexagonal steel couplers. 12
13
14
a. Lenton Rebar Splicing System by Erico Products. 15
b. BarGrip XL by BarSplice Products. 16
2.3 ACCESSORIES 17
A. Concrete bricks or chairs with bearing plates: Provide where supports are in contact with soil or 18
vapor barrier. 19
B. Plastic-tipped chairs: Provide of suitable color where concrete soffits will be exposed to view. 20
2.4 BAR COATINGS 21
A. Epoxy Coating: conform to ASTM A775, ASTM D3963. 22
B. Hot-dip galvanizing: conform to ASTM A767. 23
2.5 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 24
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 25
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 26
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 27
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 28
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 29
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 30
operations. 31
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 32
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 33
0.1%. 34
2.6 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 35
18 September 2018 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 03 20 00 - 4 17008.0000
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 1
below the industry average in the following categories: 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 9
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content 10
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of materials in the project. 11
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 12
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk programs. 13
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 14
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 15
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products sourced within 16
100 miles of the project site. 17
2.7 FABRICATION 18
A. Shop Fabrication 19
20
21
22
23
24
B. Tolerances: conform to ACI 318. 25
C. Marking: mark reinforcing to correspond with shop drawings. 26
D. Provide uncoated bars unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 27
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 28
A. Testing Laboratory Services 29
30
31
PART 3 - EXECUTION 32
3.1 PREPARATION 33
A. Clean reinforcing of ice, dirt, loose rust, mill scale, oil, and grease. 34
B. Repair of damaged epoxy coating: conform to ASTM D3963 35
18 September 2018 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 03 20 00 - 5 17008.0000
C. Repair of damaged galvanizing: conform to ASTM A780 1
2
3.2 PLACEMENT 3
A. Place reinforcing of required sizes and quantities in proper position. Use sufficient supports and 4
spacers to maintain position during concrete placement. 5
6
7
B. Secure reinforcing in position with wire ties complying with ACI 318. 8
9
10
C. Concrete Cover: comply with ACI 318 and Contract Documents. 11
D. Maintain position of reinforcing mats in walls with metal spacers between the mats. 12
E. Tolerances 13
14
a. Members 8 inches deep or less: +1/4 inch 15
b. Members more than 8 inches deep: +1/2 inch 16
17
18
19
F. Support reinforcing in slabs-on-grade and slabs-on-deck on bolsters or blocks. Do not lift 20
reinforcing during concrete placement. 21
3.3 COLD BENDING OF BARS IN FIELD 22
A. Dowels connecting concrete of different pour sequences may be bent in field to facilitate form 23
placement and removal with the following conditions: 24
25
26
27
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 28
A. Testing Laboratory Services 29
30
31
32
END OF SECTION 33
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 03 30 01 1
2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR LANDSCAPE WORK 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 SCOPE 8
9
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment as required in conjunction with 10
or properly incidental to placing of concrete as described herein and/or as shown on 11
the Drawings. 12
13
B. Includes all cast-in-place site concrete work for concrete walls under 36” tall. 14
15
C. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 16
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this section. 17
18
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS 19
20
A. The Work described in this Section, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or 21
herein specified, shall be governed by the latest editions of the following codes or 22
specifications. 23
24
1. ACI 211.1-81, "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Normal 25
Weight Concrete". 26
2. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 27
3. ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and 28
Placing Concrete". 29
4. ACI 305, "Hot Weather Concreting". 30
5. ACI 306, "Cold Weather Concreting". 31
6. ACI 309, "Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete". 32
7. ACI 311, "ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection". 33
8. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 34
9. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate. 35
10. ASTM C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mix Concrete. 36
11. ASTM C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse 37
Aggregates. 38
12. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 39
13. ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures. 40
14. ASTM C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for 41
Structural Concrete. 42
15. ASTM C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 43
16. ASTM C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 44
17. ASTM C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined 45
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement 46
Concrete. 47
48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 2 17008.0000
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 49
50
A. Source Quality Control: 51
52
1. Concrete production facilities shall meet the requirement for certification by 53
the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. 54
2. Concrete batchers shall be completely interlocked semi-automatic or 55
automatic batchers, as defined by the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau. 56
3. Concrete batchers shall have graphic, digital, or photographic recorders, 57
which shall register both empty balance and total weight (or volume of water 58
or admixture) of each batched material, time to the nearest minute, date, 59
identification of batch, and numerical count of each batch. Copies of the 60
record shall be furnished to the Testing Laboratory. 61
4. The Testing Laboratory shall provide concrete batch plant inspection as 62
follows: 63
64
a. Provide a qualified inspector with necessary equipment and apparatus 65
to inspect weighing and batching of controlled concrete at batch 66
plant on a random basis, approximately once daily as the concrete is 67
being placed on this project. 68
b. Make certain that materials and batch equipment used are in 69
accordance with requirements of Specifications. 70
c. Check for adjustment in batch weights to compensate for variations 71
in moisture content. 72
d. Submit promptly to Landscape Architect, certification of weights 73
used in loads of acceptable concrete which has been batched during 74
plant inspection time. 75
76
B. Concrete Mix Design Criteria 77
78
1. Design concrete mixes in accordance with Part 2 of this Section. 79
2. For each concrete mix type proposed, make trial mix using aggregate 80
proposed. 81
3. Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall be 82
in accordance with ACI 318. 83
4. Make advance tests of trial mixes with proposed materials. Mold and cure 84
test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. Do not place concrete on 85
project until laboratory reports and results of confirmation cylinder tests 86
have been evaluated by the Testing Laboratory and results indicate that 87
proposed mixes will develop required strengths. 88
89
5. Testing Laboratory shall furnish the Landscape Architect with a written 90
evaluation of each proposed concrete mix design submitted by the 91
Contractor. 92
6. Check mix designs and revise if necessary wherever changes are made in 93
aggregates or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of 94
concrete. Slump shall be minimum to produce workable mix. Laboratory 95
shall prescribe maximum quantity of water. 96
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 3 17008.0000
1.4 SUBMITTALS 97
98
A. Mix Designs: The Contractor shall submit proposed mix designs in accordance with 99
ACI 318, Section 5.3 to the Testing Laboratory and Landscape Architect for 100
evaluation a minimum of 14 days prior to placing concrete. Show: 101
102
1. Proportions of cement, including fly ash content, fine and coarse aggregates, 103
and water. 104
2. Combined aggregate gradation. 105
3. Aggregate specific gravities and gradations. 106
4. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content. 107
5. Type of cement and aggregates. 108
6. Type and dosage of admixtures. 109
7. Special requirements for pumping. 110
8. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 111
9. Any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, 112
placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product. 113
10. Test data showing an acceptable strength history as specified in Section 5.3 114
of ACI 318. 115
116
B. Mix designs based on trial mixes in accordance with Part 2 of this. 117
118
C. The Contractor shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets for each load of ready-mix 119
concrete delivered to site, in accordance with ASTM C94. Show batch weights on 120
each ticket. 121
122
D. The Contractor shall furnish mill test reports on an as-used basis for each type and 123
brand of cementitious material used, including fly ash. 124
125
E. The Testing Laboratory shall furnish a statistical analysis for each class of concrete 126
placed on the project as specified in this section. 127
128
F. Contractor shall submit samples for all products shown in Section 2. 129
130
131
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 132
133
A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. 134
Mix concrete a minimum of 70 revolutions of transit mix drum at mixing speed. A 135
minimum of 40 revolutions shall be at the production plant. 136
137
B. Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15 138
minutes. 139
140
C. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant. 141
142
143
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 4 17008.0000
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS 144
145
A. Hot Weather Concreting: 146
147
1. Follow ACI 301 and ACI 305R. 148
2. Provide retarding type admixture conforming to ASTM C494, Type A or D 149
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 150
3. Maximum concrete temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at time of 151
placement. 152
153
a. Concrete with temperatures above 90 degrees F shall be placed only 154
if a high range water reducer (super plasticizer) is added to the mix as 155
directed by the Testing Laboratory to maintain the specified slump 156
during placement. 157
158
B. Cold Weather Concreting: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced 159
strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 160
161
1. Follow ACI 301 and ACI 306.1. 162
2. When ambient temperature at site is below 40 degrees F or is expected to fall 163
to that temperature within ensuing 24 hours, heat water and/or aggregate 164
prior to adding to mix so that temperature of concrete will be between 55 165
degrees F and 85 degrees F at time of placement. 166
3. Maintain temperature of deposited concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 167
degrees F for minimum of seven days after placing. 168
169
C. Temperature Changes: Maintain changes in concrete temperature as uniformly as 170
possible, but in no case exceed change of 5 degrees F per hour or 25 degrees F in 171
any 24 hour period. 172
173
D. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 48 hours without precautions 174
to prevent exposure of concrete and workmen to exhaust gasses containing carbon 175
dioxide and/or carbon monoxide. 176
177
E. Admixtures intended to accelerate hardening of concrete or produce higher than 178
normal strength at early periods will not be permitted unless approved by the 179
Landscape Architect. The use of calcium chloride is specifically prohibited. 180
181
1.7 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING 182
183
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections as required to properly 184
execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the Work of 185
other Sections. 186
187
188
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 5 17008.0000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 189
190
2.1 MATERIALS 191
192
A. Cement/Fly Ash: 193
194
1. Portland Cement, Type I or III, conforming to the requirements of ASTM 195
C150. 196
2. Fly Ash, Class C or F, conforming to the requirements of ASTM C618. The 197
use of Fly Ash shall be subject to review by the Landscape Architect. Where 198
Fly Ash is used in the mix design, Fly Ash shall comprise no more than 20% 199
by weight of the total cementitious material in the mix. 200
201
B. Aggregate: 202
203
1. Fine: ASTM C33; clean, hard, durable, uncoated, natural sand, free of silt, 204
loam or clay. 205
2. Coarse: ASTM C33; hard, durable, uncoated, crushed stone; gradation in 206
accordance with Size No. 467 for piers and concrete footings and Size No. 207
67 for all other concrete. Maximum aggregate size in accordance with ACI 208
318. 209
3. Coarse aggregate for structural lightweight concrete shall conform to the 210
applicable requirements of ASTM C330 suitably processed, washed and 211
screened, and shall consist of durable particles without adherent coatings. 212
Gradation in accordance with Size Designation 3/4 inch to No. 4, Table 1, 213
ASTM C330. 214
4. Grading shall be in accordance with "Standard Method for Fine Analysis of 215
Sieve and Coarse Aggregates" (ASTM C136). 216
217
C. Water: ASTM C94, Paragraph 4.1.3; potable, clean and free from oil, acid and 218
injurious amount of vegetable matter, alkalies, and other impurities. 219
220
D. Admixtures: 221
222
1. Cement-dispersing, water-reducing types. Admixtures shall conform to 223
ASTM C494, Type A or D, and shall be used strictly in accordance with 224
manufacturer's recommendations and as determined by the Testing 225
Laboratory. Admixture shall not discolor concrete or in any way affect the 226
appearance of the concrete. 227
228
a. High-range water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C494, 229
Type F, may be used as required and shall be one of the following 230
types or equal: 231
(1) Gifford-Hill PSI Super 232
(2) Master Builders Admixture LA-35 233
(3) SIKA Sikament 234
(4) W.R. Grace WRDA-19 235
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 6 17008.0000
236
2. An air-entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C260 shall be used as 237
required on the Drawings and shall be one of the following types or equal: 238
a. Gifford-Hill Air-Tite 239
b. Master Builders MB-VR 240
c. SIKA AER 241
d. W.R. Grace Darex AEA 242
243
3. Use of calcium chloride is specifically prohibited. 244
245
4. All Admixtures shall be certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 246
0.1% water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. 247
248
E. Non-Shrink Cement Grout: 249
250
1. Qualities: Premixed non-shrink grout requiring only addition of 251
water. Non-metallic type grout where grout will be sight exposed. 252
a. Minimum compressive strength of 5000 PSI at 7-days and 253
7500 PSI at 28-days when placed at a plastic consistency of 254
115% flow factor. 255
b. Free of chloride, sulphates or gas producing agents. 256
2. Standards: 257
a. Overall product: CRD-C-621. 258
b. Compressive Strength: ASTM C109, 2 inch cubes. 259
c. Bleed Performance: CRD C-611. 260
d. Flow Factor: ASTM C230. 261
262
F. Miscellaneous Structural Metals Associated with Structural Concrete: 263
264
1. All structural steel pieces including miscellaneous structural metals placed in 265
concrete exposed to weather, in permanent contact with soil, or accessible to 266
salt intrusion shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM 267
A123. 268
2. All structural steel pieces embedded in concrete shall conform to ASTM 269
A36, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 270
3. Welding of inserts, anchors and other steel pieces used in conjunction with 271
structural concrete shall conform to AWS D1.1. 272
4. Welding of reinforcing steel used in conjunction with structural concrete 273
shall conform to AWS D1.4. 274
5. Headed stud anchors shall conform to ASTM A108, minimum tensile 275
strength 60,000 PSI. 276
6. Concrete expansion anchors shall be wedge-type anchors, meeting the 277
requirements of Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1, 278
plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325C, Type II, Class 279
3. Size and location shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 280
281
282
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 7 17008.0000
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES 283
284
A. Strength: Concrete is classified and specified by ultimate compressive strength (f'c) 285
at the age of 28 days. 286
287
B. Design concrete to yield strengths indicated on the Drawings. 288
289
C. Proportions: Proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain required 290
plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Do not 291
make changes in proportions without submitting proposed changes to Testing 292
Laboratory for evaluation. 293
294
1. Mix designs furnished by the concrete supplier, and accompanied by test data 295
showing an acceptable strength history meeting the requirements as specified 296
in section 5.3 of ACI 318, will be considered an acceptable alternative to the 297
procedure described in paragraphs below. 298
a. Temperature of concrete in test data shall be within 5 degrees F of 299
maximum temperature specified for this project. 300
b. Strengths indicated in test data shall be in accordance with ACI 318, 301
Section 5.3.2. 302
c. The specified strength of concrete used in supporting test data shall 303
vary no more than 500 PSI plus or minus from that specified for this 304
project. 305
306
2. If test data showing an acceptable strength history is not available trial 307
mixtures as specified in Section 5.3.3.2 of ACI 318 having proportions and 308
consistencies suitable for the work shall be made based on ACI 211.1, using 309
at least three different water-cement ratios which will produce a range of 310
strengths encompassing those required for this project. 311
a. Trial mixes shall be designed to produce a slump within 3/4" of the 312
maximum permitted, and for air-entrained concrete, within 0.5 313
percent of maximum allowable air content. The temperature of 314
concrete used in trial batches shall not exceed the maximum 315
temperature specified. 316
b. For each water-cement ratio, at least three confirmation compression 317
test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in accordance 318
with ASTM C192. Confirmation cylinders shall be tested at seven 319
and twenty-eight days in accordance with ASTM C39. 320
c. From the results of the twenty-eight day confirmation tests, a curve 321
shall be plotted showing the relationship between the water-cement 322
ratio and compressive strengths. From this curve, the water-cement 323
ratio to be used in the concrete shall be selected to produce the 324
average strength required. 325
d. The cement content and mixture proportions to be used shall be 326
such that this water-cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is the 327
maximum permitted. Control in the field shall be based upon 328
maintenance of proper cement content, slump and air content. 329
330
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 8 17008.0000
3. The Testing Laboratory shall keep a strength history record of all concrete 331
for the duration of the project as specified in this section. 332
333
PART 3 - EXECUTION 334
335
3.1 GENERAL 336
337
A. Inserts: Give the various trades and subcontractors ample notification and 338
opportunity to furnish all anchors, nailers, pipes, conduits, boxes, inserts, thimbles, 339
sleeves, frame vents, wires, supports, or other items required to be built into the 340
concrete by the provisions of the Drawings or of the Specification governing the 341
work of such trades and subcontractors, or as it may be necessary for the proper 342
execution of their work. Obtain suitable templates or instructions for the installation 343
of such items which are required to be placed in the forms. 344
345
B. Slump: 346
1. Concrete not containing a high range water reducing admixture shall not be 347
placed when its plasticity, as measured by slump test, is outside the following 348
limits: 349
350
Unit Slump 351
Piers 6" maximum, 4" minimum 352
353
All other Structural Concrete 5" maximum, 3" minimum 354
355
2. Concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture shall not be 356
placed when its plasticity, as measured by slump test, is outside the following 357
limits: 358
a. Prior to addition high range water reducer: 3 inch maximum, 1 inch 359
minimum. 360
b. After addition of high range water reducer: 10 inch maximum. 361
362
C. Classes of Concrete and Usage: Concrete of the several classes of concrete required 363
shall have the characteristics shown on the Drawings. 364
365
D. Mixing: 366
367
1. Transit-mixed concrete conforming to the requirements of ASTM C94, ACI 368
304 and ASTM C1116 shall be used in lieu of concrete mixed at the job site. 369
Concrete shall not be transported or used in any case after a period in excess 370
of ninety (90) minutes has elapsed after the introduction of water into the 371
mixer. 372
373
374
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 9 17008.0000
2. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump of concrete is prohibited. 375
Add water only at the direction of the Testing Laboratory. No water shall be 376
added which increases the water cement ratio of the concrete in excess of the 377
water cement ratio indicated on the approved mix design. At the direction of 378
the Testing Laboratory the addition of a high range water reducing admixture 379
may be used to retemper concrete. 380
3. The agency supplying transit-mixed concrete shall have a plant of sufficient 381
capacity and adequate transportation facilities, to assure continuous delivery 382
at the rate required. The frequency of deliveries to the site of the work must 383
be such as to provide for placing the concrete continuously throughout any 384
one (1) pour. 385
386
E. Conveying Concrete: Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit 387
by methods which will prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. Concrete to 388
be conveyed by pumping shall be submitted to the Testing Laboratory for evaluation 389
for each class of concrete specified before being used. Test cylinders for pumped 390
concrete shall be taken at the discharge end of the pumping equipment. 391
F. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of 392
such size and design as to assure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the 393
delivery end without separation of the materials. The use of gravity-flow or 394
aluminum chutes or conveyors for transporting concrete horizontally will not be 395
permitted. 396
397
3.2 CONCRETE CONTROL AND TESTING 398
399
A. Testing laboratory services shall be in accordance with Section 01410. 400
401
B. Sample and test concrete placed at the job site in accordance with ASTM C172. 402
Each sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis. 403
404
C. All concrete shall be tested as follows: 405
406
1. Mold and cure five (5) specimens from each sample in accordance with 407
ASTM C31. 408
2. Two (2) specimens shall be tested at seven days for information, two shall be 409
tested at 28 days for acceptance, and the remaining cylinder shall be tested as 410
directed. 411
412
D. Specimens for pumped concrete shall be taken at the discharge end of pumping 413
equipment. 414
415
E. Any deviations from the requirements of ASTM Specifications shall be recorded in 416
the test report. Test concrete specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. 417
418
419
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 10 17008.0000
F. Make at least one strength test (five specimens) for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction 420
thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day. Determine slump of 421
the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever consistency appears to vary, 422
in accordance with ASTM C143. 423
424
G. Determine air content of air-entrained, normal weight and/or lightweight, concrete 425
sample for each strength test in accordance with either ASTM C231 or ASTM C173. 426
Determine the unit weight of the concrete sample for each strength test. 427
428
H. Inspect each batch of concrete, monitor addition of mixing water to assure uniform 429
consistency from truck to truck. Check mixing form mixers before mix begins to set 430
and within time limits set forth in ASTM C94. 431
432
1. Monitor addition of water and high-range water reducer to concrete at job 433
site and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck during 434
placement. 435
2. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered, amount of 436
water added and time at which cement and aggregate was discharged into 437
truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck. 438
439
I. Should the strength of concrete fall below the minimum, then additional tests, 440
including load tests, may be required. These tests, if required, shall be made at the 441
Contractor's expense and shall be in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACI 318. If 442
tests do not meet the applicable requirements, then the structure, or any part of the 443
structure, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 444
445
J. Test reports shall include but not be limited to the following information: date of 446
concrete placement, concrete mix identification number or proportion of 447
ingredients, truck ticket number, time test was made, time of batching, location of 448
each placement, slump, unit weight and air content of concrete sampled and date and 449
results of strength test. 450
451
K. Report promptly to Landscape Architect all details of reasons for rejection of any 452
and all quantities of concrete. Give all information concerning locations of the 453
concrete pours, quantities, date of pours, and other pertinent facts concerning 454
concrete represented by the specimens. 455
456
L. Any concrete testing requested by the Contractor for early formwork or shoring 457
removal, etc., shall be at the Contractor's expense. 458
459
M. Furnish a statistical analysis for each class of concrete placed on the project in 460
accordance with ACI 214-77 and ACI 318. Information shall be updated and 461
distributed once a month as directed by the Landscape Architect. 462
463
Information shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 464
465
1. Strength tests at 7 days of 2 cylinder averages. 466
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 11 17008.0000
2. Strength tests at 28 days of 2 cylinder averages. 467
3. 28-day moving average strength tests of last 3 test groups. 468
4. Standard deviation and coefficient of variation based on 28 day strength 469
tests. 470
5. Average strength and number of 28 days tests for most recent month. 471
472
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE 473
474
A. Place concrete in reasonably uniform layers, approximately horizontal, and not more 475
than eighteen inches (18") deep, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined 476
planes. The piling up of concrete in the forms in such a manner as to cause the 477
separation or loss of any of its ingredients will not be permitted. Concrete which has 478
partially set or hardened shall not, under any circumstances, be deposited in the 479
work. 480
481
B. Place concrete in the forms as nearly in its final position as is practical to avoid 482
rehandling. Exercise special care to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement 483
with concrete. Remove any hardened or partially hardened concrete which has 484
accumulated on the forms or reinforcement before the work proceeds. Do not place 485
concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause 486
the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the respective member of 487
section, except as hereinafter specified. 488
489
C. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than five feet (5'). Where 490
longer drops are necessary, use a chute, tremie, or other acceptable conveyance to 491
assist the concrete into place without separation. Do not pour directly into any 492
excavations where water is standing. 493
494
D. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate same by means of 495
mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools, so manipulated as to work the mixture 496
well into all parts and corners of the forms, and entirely around the reinforcement 497
and inserts. Mechanical vibrators shall maintain frequencies in accordance with the 498
recommendations of ACI 309R. Table 5.1.4, and shall be operated by competent 499
workmen. Over vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms 500
shall not be allowed. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the job site during all 501
concrete placing operations. 502
503
E. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited 504
concrete which has partially or entirely set, the surface of the latter shall be 505
thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter, scum and laitance. 506
507
F. Construction Joints: Except as otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings, 508
each concrete member shall be considered as a single unit of operation, and all 509
concrete for the same shall be placed continuously in order that such unit will be 510
monolithic in construction. Should construction joints prove to be unavoidable, 511
same shall be located at or near the midpoints of spans. Additional construction 512
joints shall not be made under any circumstances without prior review by the 513
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 03 30 01 - 12 17008.0000
Landscape Architect. 514
515
G. Protect all freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water, etc. Do not 516
allow the concrete to dry out from the time it is deposited in the forms until the 517
expiration of the curing period. 518
519
I. Grout shall be mixed only in such quantities as are needed for immediate use. No 520
retempering shall be permitted and materials which have been mixed for a period 521
exceeding thirty (30) minutes shall in no case be used upon any portion of the work. 522
523
J. Unsatisfactory work, such as honeycombing, or damaged work will not be accepted. 524
Any material damaged or determined to be defective before final completion and 525
acceptance of the entire job, shall be satisfactorily replaced at the Contractor's 526
expense and shall be in conformity with all of the requirements of the Contract 527
Documents. Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a 528
manner as not to impair the appearance or strength of the structure in any way. 529
530
K. Cleaning: Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings 531
and any rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished 532
concrete surfaces shall be left in clean and perfect condition, satisfactory to the 533
Owner. Sweep with an ordinary broom and remove all mortar, concrete droppings, 534
loose dirt, mud, etc. 535
536
3.4 GROUT 537
538
A. For every one-third (1/3) cubic yards of grout placed, grout strength shall be tested 539
with a set of cubes as follows: 540
541
1. A set of cubes shall consist of three cubes to be tested at 7 days, and three 542
cubes to be tested at 28 days. 543
2. Test cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with ASTM C109, with 544
the exception that the grout should be restrained from expansion by a top 545
plate. 546
547
3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION 548
549
A. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations and per plan set details. Do not allow 550
waterproofing to be applied above the finished grade shown on the plans. 551
552
553
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING 554
555
A. Testing Laboratory services shall be in accordance with Section 00700. 556
557
558
END OF SECTION 559
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 03 31 00 1
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
7
8
9
B. Products Furnished, not Installed, under this Section 10
11
1.2 REFERENCES 12
A. American Concrete Institute: 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
C. Corps of Engineers: 21
22
23
24
D. Field Reference Manual: Contractor shall have available in field office a copy of ACI SP-15. 25
1.3 SUBMITTALS 26
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer’s data indicating product compliance for the following: 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
B. Material Certifications: submit certifications showing compliance for the following: 37
38
39
a. Coarse aggregate. 40
b. Fine aggregate. 41
C. Structural Concrete Mix Designs for each class of concrete 42
D. Concrete Delivery Tickets: Submit sample ready-mixed concrete delivery tickets in accordance 43
with ASTM C94 for each class of concrete. 44
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
E. Construction Joints: submit drawings indicating proposed locations of construction joints. 1
F. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 2
of this Section: 3
4
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 5
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 6
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 7
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 8
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 9
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 10
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 11
the product. 12
13
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 14
recycled content per unit of product. 15
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 16
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 17
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 18
19
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 20
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 21
project site. 22
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 23
purchased within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 24
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25
A. Batch Plant Qualifications - conform to the "Check List for Certification of Ready-Mixed 26
Concrete Production Facilities" of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association. 27
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 28
A. Transporting: Ready-mixed concrete supplier shall have sufficient capacity and adequate 29
facilities to provide continuous delivery at the rate required for continuous placement 30
throughout any sequence of placement. 31
B. Storage of Materials 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
C. Delivery: Truck mixers, agitators and non-agitating units shall conform to the applicable 40
requirements of ASTM C94, "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete". 41
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 42
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Ardex Inc. 2
B. Dayton Superior 3
C. Euclid Chemical Company 4
D. W.R. Grace & Company 5
E. Spec Chem 6
F. Master Builders 7
G. W.R. Meadows 8
H. Sika Corporation 9
I. Sonneborn 10
2.2 MATERIALS 11
A. Portland cement: shall be Type I, II or III Portland Cement and meet the requirements of ASTM 12
C150. 13
B. Fine aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, natural bank or river sand, 14
washed and screened, consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free of deleterious matter, 15
and graded from coarse to fine to produce a minimum percentage of voids. 16
C. Coarse aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, gravel or crushed stone, 17
suitably processed, washed and screened; consisting of hard, durable particles without adherent 18
coatings. 19
D. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: conform to ASTM C330, expanded clay or shale, 20
producing a minimum split cylinder ratio of 5.0. 21
E. Water: shall be clear, potable, city water free of all substances which would be harmful to the 22
concrete. 23
F. Fly Ash: conform to ASTM C618, carbon content not greater than 3% by volume. 24
G. Admixtures: Water-reducing, set-controlling admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A 25
or D (F or G – High Range) and shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s 26
recommendations. Products as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company, Master 27
Builders, W.R. Grace, or approved equal. 28
H. Air Entraining Admixtures: Shall conform to ASTM C260 and CRD C-13. Products as 29
manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company, Master Builders, W.R. Grace, or approved 30
equal. 31
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
I. Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixture containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions 1
shall not be permitted in concrete mixtures. 2
J. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used in concrete to be poured on metal floor deck, 3
nor in post-tensioned concrete. 4
2.3 CURING AND FINISHING PRODUCTS 5
A. Liquid Curing Compound 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
B. Curing and Sealing Compounds: 15
16
17
18
19
20
C. Evaporation Retardant: 21
22
23
24
25
D. Waterproof Paper: 26
27
28
E. Abrasive Aggregate: aluminum oxide aggregate. 29
F. Floor Hardener: 30
31
32
33
G. Cement Floor Leveling Compound: Free flowing, self –leveling, pumpable, cementitious 34
compound specially formulated for feather-edge application. 35
H. Liquid Densifier / Sealer: 36
37
38
39
40
41
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
I. Curing and finishing products and their application shall comply with applicable air-quality and 2
environmental regulations. 3
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS 4
A. Waterstops: shall be one of the following, or an approved equal, installed per manufacturer's 5
recommendations: 6
7
8
a. Representative product: "Sealtight No. 6316", W.R. Meadows Co. 9
10
a. Representative product: "SF302 Synko-Flex Waterstop", Henry Company 11
12
a. Representative product: "Volclay Waterstop-RX, Model RX101", American 13
Colloid Company 14
B. Non-Shrink Grout: pre-mixed, non-shrinking, minimum compressive strength 5000 psi in 28 15
days, conform to U.S. Army Corp of Engineers Specification No. CRD-C621. 16
17
2.5 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 18
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 19
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 20
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 21
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 22
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 23
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 24
operations. 25
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 26
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 27
0.1%. 28
2.6 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 29
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 30
below the industry average in the following categories: 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 38
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 39
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 40
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 1
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 2
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 3
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 4
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 5
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 6
2.7 CONCRETE MIXES 7
A. General: Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, 8
water, and admixtures where applicable. Design concrete mixes to be workable and appropriate 9
for each application, to bond readily to reinforcement, without segregation or the formation of 10
excessive free water on surfaces. 11
B. Selection of Proportions 12
13
14
15
16
17
C. Required Average Strength for Mix Design: 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
D. Documentation of Average Strength: provide evidence of average strength for each class of 30
concrete in accordance with ACI 318 by field strength tests, strength test records or trial 31
mixtures. 32
E. Concrete Mix Designs: submit mix designs for each class of concrete. 33
34
a. Class designation. 35
b. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water. 36
c. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump, and air content. 37
d. Type of cement and aggregates. 38
e. Type and dosage of admixtures. 39
40
41
42
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
F. Strength Gain: design concrete mixes to obtain required strengths in 28 days or less from date of 7
placement. 8
2.8 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE 9
A. Do not mix concrete for placement in the work until mix designs and corresponding strength 10
tests reflect that each proposed mix will develop strengths required and mix designs have been 11
reviewed for compliance. 12
B. Batching and Mixing: 13
14
15
16
17
18
C. Admixtures: Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into 19
mixer as solutions and shall be accurately measured by means of a mechanical dispenser. The 20
liquid shall be considered as part of mixing water. 21
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 22
A. Laboratory Inspection 23
24
25
26
B. Materials Testing 27
28
PART 3 - EXECUTION 29
3.1 PREPARATION 30
A. Do not begin delivery of concrete materials until formwork, reinforcement, and all items 31
required to be embedded in the concrete are complete, properly positioned and secured in place. 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. Prepare and have ready in good working condition chutes, tremies, pumps, buggies, vibrators 1
and all other equipment necessary for the orderly and continuous placement of concrete. 2
C. Where carton-form void forms are used, inspect condition before placing concrete. Replace 3
crushed or weakened boxes and tape all joints. Repair sides of grade beam or wall excavations 4
so that not more than 3 inches of ground is visible beyond the edge of void boxes. 5
D. Inspect and repair vapor barrier where applicable. 6
3.2 INSTALLATION 7
A. Conveying: 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
B. Depositing: 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C. Consolidating: 35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
D. Bonding: 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3.3 APPLICATION 8
A. Construction Joints 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
B. Weather Conditions: 17
18
19
20
a. Conform to ACI 305. 21
b. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling or wet cover 22
when necessary. 23
c. Use evaporation retarders, and finishing aids when necessary to achieve sound, 24
durable surfaces. 25
C. Composite Concrete/Steel Construction 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
D. Floor Flatness and Levelness Tolerances: 35
36
a. For slabs on grade, and level suspended slabs shored until after testing: plus or 37
minus 1/4 inch in 10 ft in any direction, maximum 1 inch variation between 38
columns, but not to exceed Fl and Ff limits below. Laser leveling of floor slab 39
surface may be used. 40
b. For unshored suspended slabs: floor slab thickness shall not vary by more than 1/4 41
inch in 10 feet in any direction, but not to exceed Ff limits below. See Division 5 42
Sections for steel frame tolerances. Laser leveling of floor slab surface shall not be 43
used. 44
45
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
a. Ff - maximum variation in floor elevation within any 2-foot length; "flatness." 1
b. Fl - maximum variation in floor elevation between any 2 points separated by 10 2
feet; "levelness." 3
c. Specified overall value - minimum average for Project. 4
d. Local value - minimum within each column bay. 5
6
a. Measurements shall be made where requested by Owner or Architect, at Owner's 7
expense. 8
b. Measurements shall be made in accordance with ASTM E-1155 and ACI 117. 9
10
a. Slab-on-Grade 11
1) Specified Overall Value - Ff25 / Fl20 12
2) Minimum Local Value - Ff17 / Fl15 13
b. Level Suspended Slabs Shored Until After Testing 14
1) Specified Overall Value - Ff25 / Fl20 15
2) Minimum Local Value - Ff17 / Fl15 16
c. Unshored Suspended Slabs 17
1) Specified Overall Value - Ff25 18
2) Minimum Local Value - Ff17 19
3.4 FINISHING EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES 20
A. General 21
22
23
24
25
B. Slab Surfaces 26
27
a. Locations 28
1) Initial finish for all horizontal surfaces 29
2) Final finish where topping slabs, waterproofing membrane or roofing 30
is to be placed over finished surface. 31
b. Method - after concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled begin 32
first float. Check levelness and correct as required during first float. Second float 33
shall produce a uniform and true surface with a sandy texture. 34
35
a. Locations - all floor slabs except where specifically required otherwise. 36
b. Method - First apply float finish, then power-trowel and finally hand trowel to 37
produce a dense, smooth surface free of trowel marks and blemishes, and uniform 38
in texture and appearance. Do not add cement slurry or water to surface during 39
finishing. Grind high spots and fill low spots with specified materials. 40
41
a. Locations - Concrete ramp surfaces. 42
b. Method: After float finish, power-trowel and provide coarse transverse striations 43
with a stiff fiber brush. After brushing, provide indentations perpendicular to the 44
slope of the ramp approximately 1/4th inch wide and deep and at 6-inch intervals 45
with a metal grooving tool. 46
47
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
a. Locations: Interior steel pan type stair treads and platforms, exterior concrete stair 1
and ramps. 2
b. Method: After floating, but before troweling, apply abrasive aggregate to surface 3
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, then steel trowel to a smooth, 4
even finish. Rub finished surfaces with abrasive stone or sandblast to remove 5
laitance or cement coating in order to expose abrasive aggregate. 6
C. Saw-Cutting Concrete Slabs-on-Grade 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
D. Formed Surfaces 14
15
16
17
18
19
a. Remove fins exceeding 1/4th inch in height, and grind bulges that interfere with 20
other trades. 21
b. Fill holes and honeycombs. 22
23
a. Remove all fins, bulges and unsightly form marks. 24
b. Fill holes and honeycombs to match surrounding concrete surfaces. 25
c. Provide rubbed finish where satisfactory form finish cannot be achieved. 26
27
a. Apply finish as soon as possible after casting concrete, no later than the day 28
following form removal. 29
b. Wet surface and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive to produce uniform 30
color and texture. 31
c. Form tie holes and honeycombs shall be patched and dressed to match color and 32
texture of surrounding concrete. 33
34
a. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be finished. 35
b. Mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to 36
produce a grout with the consistency of thick paint. Use white cement as 37
necessary to match color of surrounding concrete. Wet concrete surfaces to 38
prevent absorption of water from the grout. Apply grout uniformly, filling all 39
holes and air bubbles. Remove excess grout. After initial set, rub surface with 40
burlap. Wet cure for minimum 36 hours after final rubbing. 41
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION 42
A. General: Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, 43
excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical damage. 44
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. Preservation of Moisture: protect surfaces not in contact with forms from moisture loss with one 1
of the following methods immediately after finishing and continuing for a period of at least 7 2
days: 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
C. Protect surfaces cast against forms from moisture loss by keeping forms wet until removed. 16
After form removal, protect exposed surfaces by one of the methods specified. 17
D. Curing shall be continued for a period of 7 days for Type I cement, or 3 days for Type III 18
cement, or until tests indicate that the concrete has attained 70 percent of required strength. 19
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 20
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
a. Four (4) 6”x12” cylinders: one cylinder tested at 7 days, two cylinders tested at 28 28
days, one cylinder held in reserve if needed. 29
b. Five (5) 4”x8” cylinders: one cylinder tested at 7 days, three cylinders tested at 28 30
days, one cylinder held in reserve if needed. 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
a. Inspect concrete mixing and loading of transit-mix trucks at plant. 39
b. Water additions during transit shall be permitted in accordance with ASTM 40
C94/94M, with trucks equipped with automated slump and water management 41
systems, such as Verifi Slump Management System. 42
c. Monitor addition of water to concrete at job site and length of time concrete is 43
allowed to remain in truck during pour. 44
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
d. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or poured), 1
amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were discharged 2
into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck. 3
B. Contractor's Responsibilities 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C. Evaluation and Acceptance: 11
12
13
14
15
a. Average of any three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified 16
strength. 17
b. No strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi 18
when the specified strength is 5,000 psi or less, or by more than 10% of the 19
specified strength when the specified strength is greater than 5,000 psi. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
a. Burden of proof of structural adequacy shall be responsibility of Contractor. 27
Strength evaluation shall conform to requirements of ACI 318, Chapters 5 and 20. 28
b. If, in the opinion of the Architect, strength evaluation testing indicates that 29
structure is of inadequate strength, those portions of structure in question shall be 30
repaired or removed and replaced as directed by Architect at no additional expense 31
to Owner. 32
c. If strength tests fall below specified strength, but not so low as to cause concern for 33
structural adequacy, the Architect may request improved conditions of curing or 34
modification of design mixes to improve strength. 35
3.7 CLEANING AND REPAIR 36
A. Upon completion of the work, remove forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish 37
resulting therefrom from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean 38
condition, satisfactory to the Owner. After sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing 39
mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, and mud, wash concrete floors and platforms with 40
soapsuds and scrub with a steel fiber brush. Mop up the suds and flush the surfaces with clean 41
water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing operations to keep 42
excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage occasioned to such 43
floors by or on account of such operations shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily 44
repaired. 45
18 September 2018 03 31 00 - 15 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. Remove all concrete not required by the Drawings caused by overpour, bulging or collapse of 1
forms or error in form construction. 2
3
4
5
6
END OF SECTION 7
01 May 2018 03 35 73 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 03 35 73
2
3 CONCRETE FLOOR POLISHING
4
5
6 PART 1 – GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Concrete floor polishing.
11
12 1.2 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Product Data: Prior to commencing Work, submit manufacturer’s technical information and
15 installation details to describe materials to be used.
16
17 B. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s full color palette for concrete coloring material for color
18 selections by Architect.
19
20 C. Sustainable Design Submittals:
21 1. Laboratory Test Reports: For liquid floor treatments, indicating compliance with
22 requirements for low-emitting materials.
23
24 D. Qualifications Data: for Installer.
25
26 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
27
28 A. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and certified as a Craftsman or Master Craftsman
29 by the Concrete Polishing Association of America (CPAA), and regularly engaged in the
30 satisfactory installation of similar materials and products.
31
32 B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide required materials, complete, produced by the same
33 manufacturer. All prospective installers must provide a statement of certification from the
34 manufacturer.
35
36 C. Mock-ups: Prior to installation of dyed concrete finish system, provide minimum 10' x 10'
37 mock-up at project site in area where floor covering is to be installed over concrete floor slab.
38 Architect shall approve color blend and workmanship of mock-up.
39 1. Retain mock-up as standard for judging completed work.
40 2. Mock-up shall not be a part of finished work.
41 3. Mock up is to be completed upon initial deployment, and before any color or pattern
42 work is completed.
43
44 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
45
46 A. Deliver chemical materials to project site in manufacturer’s original unopened containers
47 bearing manufacturer’s name and product.
48
49 B. Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct sunlight and
50 temperatures below 50 degrees F or above 80 degrees F.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 03 35 73 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.5 COORDINATION
2
3 A. Coordinate Work of this section with trades performing concrete finishing work specified in
4 Section 03 30 00 – “Cast-in-Place Concrete”. Use only self-dissipating chemical curing
5 compounds or moisture-curing methods to cure green concrete. Do NOT apply
6 combination curing and hardening materials.
7
8 B. Contractor shall be advised that the concrete slab is the finished floor. Do not allow marking
9 of the floor in finished areas other than with chalk. Do not apply chemicals of any kind, other
10 than those approved by polishing system manufacturer. No chemical process or cleaning
11 system is known that will remove petroleum stains, hydraulic fluid and other similar
12 penetrating chemicals from concrete surfaces. The prevention of spills is essential:
13 1. DO NOT allow trades to park vehicles on the slab without protection, such as plastic or
14 non-absorbent drop clothes, under the vehicles.
15 2. DIAPER any hydraulic equipment used on the floor during the construction process.
16 3. NO PIPE FITTING/CUTTING will take place on the floor slab.
17 4. DO NOT place steel on the slab without protection beneath.
18 5. CHECK TIRES on equipment for screws and nails as these can cause chips in the floor.
19 6. DO NOT install bolts, expansion anchors, pins, nails, or fasteners of any kind
20 penetrating the floor slab unless they are part of the permanent structure or are concealed
21 from view in the final layout of the space.
22
23 1.6 WARRANTY
24
25 A. Provide 10-year warranty signed by equipment manufacturer and polished concrete
26 contractor for failure and replacement of materials and workmanship.
27
28
29 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
30
31 2.1 EQUIPMENT
32
33 A. Acceptable Polishing Machines:
34 1. HTC Systems Unit 800.
35 2. SASE Diamatic System Unit 780.
36
37 B. Polishing Grits:
38 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
39 a. HTC Systems, Inc.
40 b. SASE Company, Inc.
41 2. Grit Sizes:
42 a. 30/40-grit metals
43 b. 80-grit metals.
44 c. 150-grit metals.
45 d. 100-grit.
46 e. 400-grit.
47 f. 800-grit.
48 g. 1500-grit.
49
50 2.2 CONCRETE
51
52 A. Refer to Section 03 30 00 – “Cast-in-Place Concrete”
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 03 35 73 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.3 POLISHING MATERIALS
2
3 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide polishing chemicals by one of the
4 following manufacturers:
5 1. Americrete, Inc.
6 2. Bomanite Co.
7 3. Brickform; a division of Solomon Colors.
8 4. H&C Concrete Care Products.
9 5. Scofield, L. M. Company.
10 6. Specialty Concrete Products, Inc.
11
12 B. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's
13 "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions
14 from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
15
16 C. Penetrating Liquid Densifiers and Treatments: As recommended by manufacturer.
17
18 D. Penetrating Stains: As recommended by manufacturer.
19
20 E. Reactive Stains: As recommended by manufacturer.
21
22 F. Cleaners: As recommended by manufacturer.
23
24 G. Stain Guard: As recommended by manufacturer.
25
26
27 PART 3 – EXECUTION
28
29 3.1 EXAMINATION
30
31 A. Allow green concrete to cure a minimum of 10 days. Surfaces must be clean and dry,
32 physically sound and free of contamination. Surfaces must be free of holes, voids, or defects.
33 Cracks and abrupt changes in surface profile must be corrected or accepted as is. Fins and
34 projections must be removed. All curing compounds and sealers must be removed.
35
36 B. Contractor must report, in writing, surfaces left in improper condition by other trades.
37 Application will constitute acceptance by the applicator.
38
39 3.2 PREPARATION
40
41 A. Remove grease, dirt, form oil, and sealing/hardening compound residue.
42
43 B. Patch holes in slabs with grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
44
45 C. Protect adjacent surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
46
47 3.3 INSTALLATION
48
49 A. System to be installed by approved and licensed applicators from manufacturer. Comply with
50 flooring system manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions regarding preparation and
51 mixing of materials and application of each component of floor system.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 03 35 73 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Rough Grinding: Mechanically grind floor using the specified grits in the following steps.
2 1. 30/40-grit metals
3 2. 80-grit metals.
4 3. 150-grit metals.
5
6 C. First Coat - Densifier: Apply at a rate of 200 SF/gallon and scrub into surface with a
7 mechanical scrubber or bristle brush.
8
9 D. Fine Grinding: Mechanically grind floor using the specified grits in the following steps.
10 1. 100-grit.
11 2. 400-grit.
12 3. 800-grit.
13
14 E. Second Coat – Densifier: Apply at a rate of 200 SF/Gallon and scrub into surface with a
15 mechanical scrubber or bristle brush.
16
17 F. Final Polish: Mechanically grind floor using a 1500-grit.
18
19 3.4 PROTECTION
20
21 A. Protect floor surfaces from soiling and damage until densifier has properly dried and cured.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 03 39 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 03 39 00
2
3 CONCRETE SEALING
4
5
6 PART 1 – GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Application of curing and sealing compounds to concrete flooring.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
15 1. ASTM C 42 - Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
16 2. ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
17 3. ASTM C 1315 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compound Having Special Properties For
18 Curing And Sealing Concrete.
19 4. ASTM C 672 - Test Method for Critical Dilation of Concrete Specimens Subjected to
20 Freezing.
21 5. ASTM C 805 - Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete.
22 6. ASTM D 3359 - Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
23
24 1.3 SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Product Data: Submit technical information and installation instructions.
27
28 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
29 1.Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.
30 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with
31 requirements for low-emitting materials
32
33 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
34
35 A. Applicator Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer, with minimum three years
36 documented experience applying specified systems.
37
38 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
39
40 A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages. Protect from freezing, direct sun exposure
41 and exposure to moisture.
42
43 1.6 COORDINATION
44
45 A. Coordinate work with concrete curing specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
46 1. Combination curing and sealing" products are to be used only for finished flooring
47 applications.
48 2. Do not use combination curing and sealing products for concrete curing.
49
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 03 39 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4
5 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
6
7 2.2 MATERIALS
8
9 A. General: Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing
10 system, 90 percent of paints and coatings shall comply with the requirements of the
11 California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation
12 of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
13 Chambers."
14
15 B. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic grout as recommended by sealer manufacturer.
16
17 C. Curing and Sealing Compound:
18 1. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
19 ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
20 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
21 a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV.
22 b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear.
23 c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus.
24 d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309-30.
25
26 D. Cleaners: As recommended by manufacturer.
27
28
29 PART 3 – EXECUTION
30
31 3.1 EXAMINATION
32
33 A. Verify concrete floors are clean and have obtained adequate strength.
34
35 B. Verify curing compounds and their residue have been removed before applying sealing
36 compounds, hardeners (densifiers), and other concrete finishing systems.
37
38 3.2 PREPARATION
39
40 A. Remove grease, dirt, form oil, and curing compound residue.
41
42 B. Patch holes in slabs with grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
43
44 C. Protect adjacent surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
45
46 3.3 APPLICATION
47
48 A. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
49 according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
50 within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage
51 during curing period.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 03 39 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
2 concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless
3 manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering
4 used on Project.
5
6 B. Sealing Compounds: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation
7 by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Repeat process
8 24 hours later and apply a second coat.
9
10 3.4 PROTECTION
11
12 A. Protect floor surfaces from soiling and damage until sealing compound has properly dried
13 and cured.
14 3.5 SCHEDULE
15
16 A. Type 2: Provide at exposed floor slabs in rooms where no other finished flooring products
17 are scheduled such as storage rooms, MEP closets, etc.
18
19
20 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 03 62 14 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 03 62 14 1
GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 7
A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 8
9
10
11
12
B. Corps of Engineers: 13
14
1.3 SUBMITTALS 15
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data indicating product compliance for the following: 16
17
B. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 18
of this Section: 19
20
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 21
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 22
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 23
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 24
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 25
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 26
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 27
the product. 28
29
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 30
recycled content per unit of product. 31
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 32
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 33
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 34
35
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 36
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 37
project site. 38
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 39
purchased within a 100 mile radius of the project site. 40
18 September 2018 03 62 14 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1
A. Store grout materials in dry condition above ground. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3
2.1 MATERIALS 4
A. Non-Shrink Grout: 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
a. Euco N-S Grout, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co. 13
b. Masterflow 713, manufactured by Master Builders Co. 14
c. SikaGrout 212, manufactured by Sika Corporation. 15
2.2 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 16
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 17
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 18
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 19
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 20
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 21
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 22
operations. 23
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 24
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 25
0.1%. 26
2.3 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 27
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 28
below the industry average in the following categories: 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 36
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 37
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 38
18 September 2018 03 62 14 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 1
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 2
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 3
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 4
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 5
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION 7
3.1 PREPARATION 8
A. Surface preparation: 9
10
11
12
13
14
B. Mixing 15
16
17
18
a. Quantity of water used in mix. 19
b. Length of mixing time. 20
c. Pot life. 21
d. Retempering. 22
C. Forms 23
24
25
26
27
3.2 APPLICATION 28
A. Placement and Consolidation 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
B. Curing 36
37
38
END OF SECTION 39
01 May 2018 04 05 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 04 05 13
2
3 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Mortar and grout for unit masonry.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Concrete Institute, Structural Engineering Institute of the American Society of
15 Civil Engineers, and The Masonry Society:
16 1. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602-05: Specification for Masonry Structures
17
18 B. ASTM International:
19 1. ASTM C 91: Specification for Masonry Cement
20 2. ASTM C 109/C 109M: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
21 Mortars (Using 2-in. or Cube Specimens)
22 3. ASTM C 143/C 143M: Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
23 4. ASTM C 144: Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
24 5. ASTM C 150: Specification for Portland Cement
25 6. ASTM C 207: Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
26 7. ASTM C 270: Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
27 8. ASTM C 476: Specification for Grout for Masonry
28 9. ASTM C 780: Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
29 Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry
30 10. ASTM C 979: Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
31 11. ASTM C 1019: Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
32 12. ASTM C 1506: Test Method for Water Retention of Hydraulic Cement-Based Mortars
33 and Plasters
34
35 C. The Brick Industry Association: BIA Technical Notes 8A and 8B.
36
37 1.3 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Product Data: Provide data for design mix, admixture limitations, and required
40 environmental conditions.
41
42 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
43 1.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
44 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
45 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.]
46
47 C. Mortar Samples:
48 1. Cubes of harden, colored mortar, approximately 4" long, for color selection by Architect.
49
50 D. Material Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates and acceptable laboratory test reports
51 attesting that the following materials meet specified requirements:
52 1. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
2 ingredients.
3 3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4
5 E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
6 proportions of ingredients.
7 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
8 Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
9 water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
10 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
11 compressive strength requirement.
12
13 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15 A. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform
16 quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious
17 component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.
18
19 B. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
20 requirements in the Contract Documents.
21
22 C. Mock-Up: Furnish mortar materials for mock-ups specified in the following sections:
23 1. Section 04 21 13 – Brick Masonry.
24 2. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Units.
25 3. Section 04 73 13 – Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
26
27 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28
29 A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
30
31 B. Store and cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent
32 their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion,
33 and other causes.
34
35 C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
36 contamination avoided.
37
38 D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
39 dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated
40 platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
41
42 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
43
44 A. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
45 exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with
46 such masonry.
47 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
48 coverings on ground and over wall surface.
49 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
50 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
51 integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
52 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
2
3 B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with
4 ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged
5 by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements
6 contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
7 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg
8 F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven
9 days after completing cleaning.
10
11 C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained
12 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
13
14
15 PART 2 PRODUCTS
16
17 2.1 MATERIALS
18
19 A. Portland Cement:
20 1. ASTM C 150, Type I except Type III may be used for cold weather construction,
21 nonstaining.
22 2. Use of masonry cement will not be permitted.
23 3. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color.
24
25 B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
26
27 C. Portland Cement-Lime Mixes: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C
28 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
29
30 D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
31 use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of
32 satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
33 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
34 a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
35 b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
36 c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
37
38 E. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime
39 and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
40 ingredients.
41 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
42 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
43 a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
44 1) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color.
45 2) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime.
46 3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond Portland & Lime.
47 4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement.
48 2. Formulate blend as required to produce color as selected from manufacturer's standard
49 color range.
50 3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. Mortar Aggregates: ASTM C 144, free of clay or organic matter, except that grading shall
2 comply with the following limits:
3
4 Sieve Size Percent Passing:
5
6 No. 4 100
7 No. 8 95 to 100
8 No. 16 60 to 100 (100% passing for joints less than ¼”)
9 No. 30 35 to 70
10 No. 50 15 to 35
11 No. 100 2 to 15
12 No. 200 0 to 2
13
14 G. Grout Aggregates: ASTM C 404.
15
16 H. Water: Clean and free of acids, alkalies, or organic matter, potable.
17
18 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
19
20 A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
21 retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless
22 otherwise indicated.
23 1. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
24 2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
25 3. Do not use masonry cements.
26 4. Mix mortar in accordance with requirements of BIA Technical Notes 8A & 8B and grout
27 in accordance with ASTM C 476.
28 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
29 view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
30
31 B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
32 following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
33 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
34 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
35 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls, veneer walls, and
36 parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and
37 for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
38 4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
39
40 C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with
41 other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement
42 products.
43 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
44 2. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
45 a. Manufactured masonry veneers.
46 b. Calcium silicate masonry units.
47 c. Face brick.
48 3. Mix to match approved mockup.
49
50 D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
51 natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
52 1. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 units:
2 a. Manufactured masonry veneers.
3 b. Calcium silicate masonry units.
4 c. Face brick.
5 2. Mix to match approved mockup.
6
7 E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
8 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
9 comply with Table 7 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
10 and pour height.
11 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
12 specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
13 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C
14 143M.
15
16
17 PART 3 EXECUTION
18
19 3.1 INSTALLATION
20
21 A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of the following Sections
22 1. Section 04 21 13 – Brick Masonry Units.
23 2. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Units.
24 3. Section 04 73 00 – Calcium Silicate Units.
25
26 B. Testing and Inspecting: Special inspectors will perform tests and inspections and prepare
27 reports according to Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services. Allow inspectors access
28 to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of
29 materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
30 expense.
31 C. Inspections: Level B special inspections according to TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 and TMS
32 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Quality Assurance program requirements.
33 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
34 prepared mortar.
35 2. Verify that excessive mortar has not collected in the masonry cavity, clogging or covering
36 weep holes. Confirm all weep holes are functioning properly with water if visual
37 inspection is not adequate.
38 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
39 sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
40 4. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
41
42 D. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
43
44 E. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000-sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion
45 thereof.
46
47 F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
48 Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
49
50 G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
51
52 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 19 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 04 05 19
2
3 MASONRY ANCHORAGE, REINFORCEMENT, AND ACCESSORIES
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Continuous Joint Reinforcing.
12 2. Masonry Ties.
13 3. Reinforcing Bars.
14 4. Control Joint materials.
15 5. Embedded Flashing
16 6. Weepholes.
17
18 1.2 REFERENCES
19
20 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
21 1. ASTM A 82: Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
22 2. ASTM A 153: Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
23 3. ASTM A 167: Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
24 Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
25 4. ASTM A 615: Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
26 Reinforcement.
27 5. ASTM A 641: Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
28 6. ASTM A 653: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
29 Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
30 7. ASTM A 767: Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
31 8. ASTM A 951: Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement
32 9. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
33 High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
34 Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
35
36 B. American Concrete Institute/ACI International; American Society of Civil Engineers; and
37 The Masonry Society: ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602-2 – Specifications for Masonry
38 Structures.
39
40 1.3 SUBMITTALS
41
42 A. Product Data: Provide data for each different masonry unit, accessory and other
43 manufactured products indicated.
44
45 B. Samples - Joint Fillers, Joint Reinforcement, Anchors and Ties: Submit samples as requested
46 by Architect.
47
48 C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates and acceptable laboratory test reports
49 attesting that materials furnished meet specified requirements.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 19 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. Mock-Up:
4 1. Construct 8'-0" wide x 4'-0" high panel, in configuration indicated on drawings, showing
5 proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar, jointing, reinforcement, ties, and
6 workmanship.
7 2. Saturate brick masonry unit panel five days after laid and observe if panel effloresces.
8 Recommend cleaning procedures if necessary.
9 3. Use panel as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same materials.
10 4. Do not destroy or move panel until work is complete or as otherwise directed by
11 Architect.
12 5. If substitutions are proposed construct one panel of specified brick and one panel for
13 each proposed substitution for a side by side comparison.
14
15 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
16
17 A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
18
19 B. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of
20 dirt and oil.
21
22 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
23
24 A. Environmental Requirements:
25 1. Cold Weather Protection: When temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F, pre-
26 condition material and finish work in accordance with "Recommended Practices for Cold
27 Weather Masonry Construction", as published by International Masonry Industry All-
28 Weather Council.
29 2. Hot Weather Protection: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and
30 sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F in shade with relative
31 humidity less than 50 percent.
32
33
34 PART 2 PRODUCTS
35
36 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
37
38 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
39
40 2.2 FLASHING – COMPONENT-BASED
41
42 A. Flexible Through Wall Flashing: Use one of the following:
43 1. Self-Adhering Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304 stainless steel face sheet with
44 butyl block copolymer adhesive.
45 a. Acceptable Products:
46 1) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York 304 SS
47 2) STS Coatings, Inc.; Gorilla Flash SS Peel & Stick Butyl
48 3) Illinois Products, Inc.; IPCO Self-Adhesive Stainless Steel
49 4) TK Products, Inc.; TK Self-Adhering Stainless Steel TWF
50 2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Elastomeric thermoplastic sheet, 0.040-inch thick,
51 reinforced, UV stabilized, incorporating DuPont’s Elvaloy KEE Polymer.
52 a. Acceptable Products:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 19 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1) DuPont; Thru-Wall Flashing.
2 2) Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.
3
4 B. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming
5 materials produced by same manufacturer as primary flashing material.
6
7 C. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2
8 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
9
10 D. Metal Termination Bars: Shaped (non-flat) stainless steel bars, approximately 1 inch by 1/8-
11 inch-thick, profiled to receive sealant on leading edge.
12
13 2.3 FLASHING – MANUFACTURED UNITS
14
15 A. Unitized Cavity Wall Flashing System: Flexible through wall flashing, drip edges, mortar
16 collection devices, and weep/drainage system combined into a complete, prefabricated
17 flashing system, ready to install with manufacture provided fasteners, adhesives, preformed
18 corners, end dams, and other special. Flashing membrane serves as carrier sheet for all the
19 following pre-assembled components:
20 1. Flashing Membrane: One of the following:
21 a. Elastomeric thermoplastic sheet, 0.040-inch thick, reinforced, UV stabilized,
22 incorporating DuPont’s Elvaloy KEE Polymer.
23 b. Self-Adhering Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304 stainless steel face sheet
24 with butyl block copolymer adhesive.
25 2. Mortar Collection/Weep System: Woven mesh polyester material impregnated with UV
26 protection, biocide, and flame retardant. Material is factory adhered to the flashing
27 membrane and is designed to allow moisture to migrate to the exterior utilizing weep tabs
28 spaced at 6 inches o.c.
29 3. Termination Bars: Corrosion resistant bar with beveled top edge to receive sealant and
30 pre-drilled to receive mechanical fasteners.
31 4. Drip Edge: Stainless steel, Type 304, 0.018 inch thick by inches wide with hemmed edge.
32 5. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
33 a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Total Flash System.
34 b. STS Coatings; Wall Guardian TWF Venting Stainless Steel
35 c. York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Flash-Vent SS.
36
37 2.4 CAVITY ACCESSORIES
38
39 A. Weeps: One of the following.
40 1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and
41 width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color
42 selected from manufacturer's standard.
43 a. Acceptable Products:
44 1) Mortar Net Weep Vents by Mortar Net USA, Ltd.
45 2. Aluminum Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, L-shaped units made from sheet aluminum,
46 designed to fit into a head joint and consisting of a vertical channel with louvers stamped
47 in web and with a top flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; painted before
48 installation with color to match grout as approved by Architect.
49 a. Acceptable Products:
50 1) #343 Louvered Weep Hole by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
51 2) #3602 Louvered Weephole by Wire-Bound.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 19 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Mortar Deflection Devices:
2 1. Provide trapezoidal mortar net. 10" high polymer core geomatrix of nylon or high
3 density polyethylene woven into a mesh; thickness as required for cavity wall.
4 2. Acceptable Products:
5 a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break II.
6 b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
7 c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
8 d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
9
10 2.5 REINFORCEMENT
11
12 A. Reinforcing Rods:
13 1. Exterior Single-Wythe CMU Walls: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars; ASTM A
14 767, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized.
15 2. Exterior CMU Back-Up Walls: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars; uncoated.
16 3. Interior CMU Walls: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars; uncoated.
17
18 B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951 M.
19 1. Continuous open-web, welded wire design, with hot-dip galvanized carbon steel side
20 rods, cross rods, and veneer ties.
21 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 gauge diameter.
22 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 gauge diameter.
23 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 9 gauge diameter.
24 5. Spacing of Cross Rods and Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
25 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
26
27 C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multi-Wythe Walls: Adjustable (two-piece) type, truss
28 design with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties
29 with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to
30 extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
31 1. Acceptable Products:
32 a. Lox-All #170 Adjustable Truss by Hohmann & Barnard.
33 b. Series #900 Level Eye Truss by Wire-Bond.
34
35 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
36
37 A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
38 comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
39 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc
40 coating.
41 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
42 with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
43 3. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M; with
44 ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
45
46 B. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors, General:
47 1. Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
48 perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and
49 as follows:
50 a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in
51 both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of
52 0.05 inch.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 05 19 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal
2 anchor section.
3
4 C. Adjustable Anchors for Stud Walls with Board Insulation:
5 1. Anchor Section: 14 gauge, rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and
6 bottom, 2-3/4 inches wide by 3 inches high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for
7 inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section.
8 a. Wire Ties: Rectangular-shaped wire ties fabricated from 3/16-inch- diameter wire
9 2. Acceptable Products:
10 a. DA 213 by Dur-O-Wall, a division of Dayton Superior.
11 b. HB-213 by Hohmann & Barnard.
12 c. RJ-711 (2401 and 2402) by Wire Bond.
13
14 D. Adjustable Anchors for CMU Walls with Board Insulation:
15 1. Anchor Section: 14 gauge, rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and
16 bottom, 2-3/4 inches wide by 3 inches high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for
17 inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section.
18 a. Wire Ties: Rectangular-shaped wire ties fabricated from 3/16-inch- diameter wire
19 2. Acceptable Products:
20 a. DA 5213 by Dur-O-Wall, a division of Dayton Superior.
21 b. HB-5213 by Hohmann & Barnard.
22
23 2.7 CMU ACCESSORIES
24
25 A. Control Joint Filler:
26 1. Concrete masonry: Premolded rubber designed for use with standard concrete masonry
27 units, size to fit wall width.
28 2. Acceptable Product:
29 a. #RS Series by Hohmann & Barnard.
30 b. Rapid Control Joint by Dur-O-Wal, under Dayton Superior
31 c. #352 Control Joints by Hickmann.
32
33
34 PART 3 EXECUTION
35
36 3.1 INSTALLATION
37
38 A. Install masonry anchorage, reinforcement, and accessories to meet requirements specified in
39 the following Sections.
40 1. Section 04 21 13 – Brick Masonry Units.
41 2. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Units.
42 3. Section 04 73 13 – Calcium Silicate Units.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 04 22 00
2
3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
4
5 PART 1 – GENERAL
6
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Section Includes: Concrete masonry units, accessories, and cleaning agents.
10
11 B. Related Sections:
12 1. Section 04 05 13 “Masonry Mortar and Grout”.
13 2. Section 04 05 19 “Masonry Anchorage, Reinforcement, and Accessories”.
14
15 C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: Pre-fabricated items to be built
16 into concrete unit masonry construction.
17
18 1.2 REFERENCES
19
20 A. American Concrete Institute; American Society of Civil Engineers; The Masonry Society:
21 1. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
22 2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602: Specifications for Masonry Structures.
23
24 B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
25 1. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
26 2. ASTM C 90 - Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
27 3. ASTM C 129 - Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
28 4. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
29
30 C. International Masonry Institute All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide
31 Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
32
33 D. Masonry Advisory Council: Hot and Cold Weather Construction.
34
35 1.3 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications, installation
38 instructions and application procedures.
39
40 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
41 1.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
42 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
43 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
44 2. Provide EPD and HPD Product Data.
45
46 C. Samples: Furnish two sets of individual samples of each size, shape and type of concrete
47 masonry units including special shapes as requested by Architect.
48
49 D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates and acceptable laboratory test reports
50 attesting that materials furnished meet specified requirements.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Reinforcing: Submit placement drawings and bar lists for vertical and horizontal reinforcing
2 bars for load bearing masonry.
3
4 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5
6 A. Fire Resistance Rated Masonry: UL listed and certified that fire-rated masonry materials have
7 been manufactured in compliance with the governing codes in regard to face shell and
8 aggregate for the rating shown on the drawings
9
10 B. Mock-Up:
11 1. Construct 8'-0" wide x 4'-0" high panel for each type masonry unit in location indicated
12 by Architect showing proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar, jointing,
13 reinforcement, ties, and workmanship.
14 2. Saturate concrete masonry unit panel five days after laid and observe if panel effloresces.
15 Recommend cleaning procedures if necessary.
16 3. Use panel as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same materials.
17 4. Do not destroy or move panel until work is complete or as otherwise directed by
18 Architect.
19
20 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
21
22 A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
23
24 B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent
25 their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion,
26 and other causes; segregate various fire-rated units from each other and from other non-rated
27 units. Maintain clear indication of rating of the stored units for easy identification and
28 selection. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition.
29
30 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
31
32 A. Environmental Requirements:
33 1. Cold Weather Protection: When temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F, pre-
34 condition material and finish work in accordance with "Recommended Practices and
35 Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction", as published by
36 International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council.
37 2. Hot Weather Protection: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and
38 sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F in shade with relative
39 humidity less than 50 percent in accordance with Hot and Cold Weather Construction as
40 published by Masonry Advisory Council.
41
42
43 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
44
45 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
46
47 A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
48 faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
49 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
50 bonding, and other special conditions.
51 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
2 1. Provide open-end lightweight units.
3 2. Nominal face dimensions: 4", 6", and 8" high x 16" long, unless otherwise noted.
4 3. Provide standard and fire-rated units.
5
6
7 PART 3 – EXECUTION
8
9 3.1 EXAMINATION
10
11 A. Examine foundation to ensure surfaces to support masonry are proper grade and elevation,
12 and free from dirt or other deleterious matter.
13
14 B. Verify items built-in by other trades are properly located and sized.
15
16 C. Verify items to be built-in under this Section are fabricated correctly and readily available at
17 project site.
18
19 3.2 PREPARATION
20
21 A. Concrete Masonry Units:
22 1. Lay only dry units, free of paint, oil, efflorescence or foreign matter.
23 2. Remove laitance, loose aggregate or anything that prevents bonding to foundation.
24
25 B. Use masonry saws to cut concrete masonry units.
26
27 C. Establish lines, levels and coursing. Protect layout aids from disturbance.
28
29 3.3 INSTALLATION
30
31 A. Pattern Bond: Running bond with vertical joints located at centerline of masonry units in
32 alternate courses.
33
34 B. General Requirements:
35 1. Set units plumb, true to line and with level courses accurately spaced within allowed
36 tolerances.
37 2. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM C 90 allowable
38 requirements.
39 3. Adjust masonry unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic.
40 4. Where adjustment must be made or if units are displaced after mortar has stiffened,
41 remove units, clean joints and units of mortar, and replace with fresh mortar.
42 5. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they are set in position.
43 6. Adjust shelf angles to keep masonry level and at proper elevation.
44 7. Provide pressure relieving joints by placing continuous 1/8" foam pad under shelf angle.
45
46 C. Mortar Beds:
47 1. Hollow units:
48 a. Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
49 b. Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs where
50 adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
51 c. Use concrete block for fill-in material.
52 2. Solid units:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Lay with completely filled mortar joints.
2 b. Do not furrow bed joints.
3 c. Butter ends of solid units with sufficient mortar to fill head joints.
4 d. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent units in place.
5
6 D. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints:
7 1. Construct uniform joints, 3/8" nominal thickness.
8 2. Tool concave joints in exposed surfaces when thumb-print hard with round jointed
9 slightly larger than width of joint.
10 3. Flush cut joints not exposed.
11 4. Remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be filled with grout.
12 5. Fill horizontal joints between top of non-loadbearing masonry partitions and underside of
13 beams or slabs with flexible material.
14
15 E. Control Joints: NO CONTROL JOINTS IN PERFORMANCE HALL, STAGE OR
16 BLACK BOX CMU WALLS
17 1. Keep clean of mortar and debris.
18 2. Install where indicated and at following exterior and interior locations:
19 a. Changes in thickness, height or direction.
20 b. Within 4'-0" of corners or offsets.
21 c. At control or expansion joints in structure.
22 d. Place control joints at foundation walls, shelf angles, setbacks and materials
23 expanding at different ratios.
24 e. Space joints at 30'-0" on center maximum in uninterrupted walls.
25 f. Offset control joints to ends of lintels.
26
27 F. Collar Joints:
28 1. Keep cavity within cavity walls clean.
29 2. Remove protruding mortar fins in cavity to be grouted.
30
31 G. Joining of Work:
32 1. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, remove loose
33 units and mortar, and clean exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry.
34 2. If necessary to stop off horizontal runs of masonry, rack back one-half block length in
35 each course.
36
37 H. Bond Beams:
38 1. Provide CMU bond beams at top of CMU walls and lintels above door openings and as
39 noted by structural engineer.
40 2. Reinforce bond beams with minimum two bars and grout.
41 3. Discontinue bond beams at expansion joints; maintain minimum 8" bearing each side of
42 opening.
43 4. Place and consolidate concrete without disturbing reinforcing.
44 5. Allow lintels to reach maximum strength before removing temporary supports.
45 6. Bond beams at lintels above door and window openings shall be trough blocks, “Knock
46 Out” bond beams are not acceptable.
47
48 I. Built-In Work:
49 1. Install built-in items including bolts, anchors, expansion joints, inserts, frames, flashing
50 and other items as masonry work progresses.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Apply compatible sealant or self-adhered sheet membrane strip, as recommended by air
2 barrier manufacturer, behind masonry anchors to seal penetrations made by fasteners
3 through sheathing.
4 3. Avoid cutting and patching.
5 4. Solidly grout spaces around built-in items.
6 5. Build chases in; do not cut in.
7 6. Built-in items to be plumb to planes of wall.
8
9 J. Reinforced Masonry Grouting:
10 1. Do not place mortar under block cores at first course to allow grout to come in contact
11 with slabs.
12 2. Stack wall not more than 5'-0" for each lift.
13 3. Grout cores.
14 4. If grouting is to be stopped for more than one hour, stop grout 1-1/2" from top block.
15 5. Build second lift and grout.
16 6. Filling cores with mortar as work progresses is not permitted.
17
18 K. Pointing:
19 1. At completion of conventional masonry unit work, fill holes in joints and tool.
20 2. Cut out and repoint defective joints.
21 3. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each days’ work and after final
22 pointing.
23
24 3.4 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
25
26 A. Maximum Variation from Plumb:
27 1. Vertical lines and surfaces of columns and walls: 1/4" in 10'-0"; 3/8" in any story or 20'-
28 0" maximum and 1/2" in 40'-0".
29 2. External corners or control joints: 1/4" in any one story or 20'-0" maximum; 1/2" in 40'-
30 0".
31
32 B. Maximum Variation from Level or Grades for Exposed Lintels, Sill, Parapets, or Horizontal
33 Grooves: 1/4" on any bay or 20'-0"; 1/2" in 40'-0".
34
35 C. Maximum Variation from Plan Location of Linear Building Line or Related Portions of
36 Columns, Walls and Partitions: 1/2" in any bay or 20'-0"; 3/4" in 40'-0".
37
38 D. Maximum Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions of Columns and Thicknesses of Walls:
39 1/4", +1/2".
40
41 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
42
43 A. Reinforced Masonry Testing and Inspections - A qualified independent testing agency shall
44 provide testing and inspection of structural masonry construction as follows:
45 1. Certificates for materials.
46 a. Submit certificates for mortar, grout, and masonry units indicating compliance with
47 minimum material requirements.
48 2. Testing
49 a. Test grout for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
50 1) Prior to start of construction, build and test three grout prisms in accordance
51 with ASTM C 1019.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2) Prepare additional sets of three prisms for each 5,000 square feet of wall area and
2 test in accordance with ASTM C 1019.
3 b. Test prism assemblies for determining the combined compressive strength of
4 masonry walls in accordance with ASTM C 1314.
5 1) Prior to start of construction, build and test three masonry prisms in accordance
6 with ASTM C 1314.
7 2) Prepare additional sets of three prisms for each 5,000 square feet of wall area and
8 test in accordance with ASTM C 1314. Not required at locations of standard
9 inspection.
10 3. Inspections
11 a. Structural Inspection
12 1) Structural inspection is required at locations of load bearing walls taller than 20
13 feet. Inspection shall occur prior to placing grout in reinforced or un-reinforced
14 cells and continuously during grouting operations. Inspections shall include
15 reinforcing size and layout, lapped splices of reinforcement, condition of cells
16 prior to grouting, grout placement procedures, and construction of mortar joints.
17 b. Standard Inspection
18 1) At locations other than those requiring structural inspection, the testing agency
19 shall observe and report on placement of masonry units, placement of
20 reinforcing, condition of grout space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts
21 and during grouting operations.
22 2) Standard Inspection shall occur prior to the first grouting operation and continue
23 at random grouting operations. A minimum of 25% of the grouting operations
24 shall have standard inspection.
25 4. Retesting of materials and components failing to meet specified requirements shall be
26 done at no cost to the Owner.
27 5. See Section 01 45 29, Testing Laboratory Services, for additional requirements.
28
29 3.6 CLEANING
30
31 A. Clean initially with stiff brushes and clean water.
32
33 B. When cleaning agent is required, apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 square feet.
34 1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is reviewed by Architect.
35 2. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent and immediately rinse with clear water.
36 3. Do small sections at a time, working from top to bottom.
37 4. Protect sash, metal lintels and other corrosive parts when masonry is cleaned with acidic
38 solution.
39
40 C. Leave area and surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry.
41
42 3.7 PROTECTION OF SURFACES
43
44 A. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress with nonstaining waterproof
45 covering.
46
47 B. Extend cover minimum 24" down both sides and securely anchor in place.
48
49 C. After masonry work is complete, protect top of wall until cap or coping and flashing is in
50 place.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 22 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Load Application:
3 1. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry
4 columns or walls.
5 2. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least three days after building columns or walls.
6
7 E. Protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction.
8
9 F. Prevent grout or mortar from staining face of masonry to be left exposed or painted.
10
11 G. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar or other damage during
12 construction.
13
14 H. Remove misplaced grout or mortar immediately.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 73 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 04 73 13
2
3 CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY UNITS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Calcium silicate masonry units.
12
13 B. Related Sections:
14 1. Division 04 Section “Masonry Mortar and Grout”.
15 2. Division 04 Section “Masonry Anchorage, Reinforcement, and Accessories”.
16
17 1.2 REFERENCES
18
19 A. American Concrete Institute:
20 1. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402-99: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
21 2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602-99: Specifications for Masonry Structures.
22
23 B. American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM C 73 – Standard Specification for Calcium
24 Silicate Face Brick.
25
26 C. International Masonry Institute All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide
27 Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
28
29 D. Masonry Advisory Council: Hot and Cold Weather Construction.
30
31 1.3 SUBMITTALS
32
33 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications, installation
34 instructions and application procedures.
35
36 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
37 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
38 2. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
39
40 C. Samples: Furnish two sets of individual samples of each size, shape and type of calcium
41 silicate units including special shapes as requested by Architect.
42
43 D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates and acceptable laboratory test reports
44 attesting that materials furnished meet specified requirements.
45
46 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
47
48 A. Mock-Up:
49 1. Construct panel of size indicated on the drawing in location indicated by Architect
50 showing proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar, jointing, reinforcement, ties,
51 control joints, and workmanship.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 73 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Construct mock-up to illustrate backup wall exterior sheathing moisture barrier weeps
2 and through wall flashing.
3 3. Use panel as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same materials.
4 4. Mock-Up may remain part of the finish work.
5
6 B. Installation of Calcium Silicate Masonry Units: Comply with ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 403 and
7 ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
8
9 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
10
11 A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition wrapped in a protective film.
12
13 B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent
14 their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion,
15 and other causes; segregate various units from each other. If units become wet, do not place
16 until units are in an air-dried condition.
17
18 C. Do not use salt or calcium-chloride to remove ice from masonry surfaces.
19
20 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
21
22 A. Environmental Requirements:
23 1. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to,
24 during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
25 2. Cold Weather Protection: When temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F, pre-
26 condition material and finish work in accordance with "Recommended Practices and
27 Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction", as published by
28 International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council.
29 3. Hot Weather Protection: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and
30 sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F in shade with relative
31 humidity less than 50 percent in accordance with Hot and Cold Weather Construction as
32 published by Masonry Advisory Council.
33
34
35 PART 2 PRODUCTS
36
37 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
38
39 A. Acceptable Product: Calcium masonry units by Arriscraft International; Renaissance
40 Masonry Units.
41 1. CS-01: 3-5/8” x 3-5/8” x 23-5/8” Primary Unit.
42 2. CS-02: 3-5/8” x 7-5/8” x 23-5/8” Batten Unit.
43 3. CS-03: 3-5/8” x 7-5/8” x 23-5/8” Sloped Sill Unit.
44 4. CS-04: 3-5/8” high x (vary width) x 23-5/8” long Coping Unit.
45 5. CS-05: 3-5/8” x 3-5/8” x 3-5/8” Infill Unit.
46 6. CS-06: 3-5/8” high x 7-5/8” deep x 3-5/8” long Water Table.
47
48 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
49
50 2.2 MATERIALS
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 73 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 A. Calcium Silicate Masonry Units: ASTM C 73, Grade SW; solid units having been pressure
2 formed and autoclaved; 3-5/8” bed depth; modular size as indicated on drawings; smooth
3 finish on exposed faces and ends; special shapes as indicated; meeting the following
4 standards:
5 1. Compressive Strength: 6600 psi. per ASTM C 170
6 2. Absorption: 8.8 percent per ASTM C 97.
7 3. Density 129 lbs/ft c. per ASTM C97
8 4. Modulus of Rupture: 770 psi. per ASTM C 99.
9 5. Color: Match Architect’s sample.
10
11 2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
12
13 A. Fabricate to the following tolerances:
14 1. Unit Length: Plus or minus 1/16”.
15 2. Unit Height: Plus or minus 1/16”.
16 3. Deviation from Square: Plus or minus 1/16” with measurement taken using the longest
17 edge as the base.
18 4. Custom Dimensions: Plus or minus 1/8”.
19 5. Unit Face Deviations: Plus or minus 3/8”.
20
21
22 PART 3 EXECUTION
23
24 3.1 EXAMINATION
25
26 A. Examine foundation to ensure surfaces to support masonry are proper grade and elevation,
27 and free from dirt or other deleterious matter.
28
29 B. Verify items built-in by other trades are properly located and sized.
30
31 C. Verify items to be built-in under this Section are fabricated correctly and readily available at
32 project site.
33
34 3.2 CUTTING OF MASONRY UNITS
35
36 A. Cut masonry units with wet-saw.
37
38 B. Pre-soak masonry units with clean water prior to cutting.
39
40 C. Clean cut masonry units using a stiff fiber brush and clean water.
41
42 D. Allow units to surface dry prior to placement.
43
44 3.3 INSTALLATION
45
46 A. Pattern Bond: Running bond with vertical joints located at centerline of masonry units in
47 alternate courses.
48
49 B. General Requirements:
50 1. Set units plumb, true to line and with level courses accurately spaced within allowed
51 tolerances.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 73 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units.
2 3. Adjust masonry unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic.
3 4. Where adjustment must be made or if units are displaced after mortar has stiffened,
4 remove units, clean joints and units of mortar, and replace with fresh mortar.
5 5. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they are set in position.
6 6. Adjust shelf angles to keep masonry level and at proper elevation.
7 7. Provide pressure relieving joints by placing continuous 1/8" foam pad under shelf angle.
8
9 C. Mortar Beds Solid units:
10 1. Lay with completely filled mortar joints.
11 2. Do not furrow bed joints.
12 3. Butter ends of solid units with sufficient mortar to fill head joints.
13 4. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent units in place.
14
15 D. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints:
16 1. Construct uniform joints, 3/8" nominal thickness.
17 2. Tool concave joints in exposed surfaces when thumb-print hard with round jointed
18 slightly larger than width of joint.
19 3. Flush cut joints not exposed.
20 4. Remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be filled with grout.
21 5. Fill horizontal joints between top of non-loadbearing masonry partitions and underside of
22 beams or slabs with flexible material.
23
24 E. Control Joints:
25 1. Keep clean of mortar and debris.
26 2. Install where indicated and at following exterior locations:
27 a. Changes in thickness, height or direction.
28 b. Within 4'-0" of corners or offsets.
29 c. At control or expansion joints in structure.
30 d. At each side of openings greater than 24" wide.
31 e. Place control joints at foundation walls, shelf angles, setbacks and materials
32 expanding at different ratios.
33 f. Space joints at 30'-0" on center maximum in uninterrupted walls.
34 g. Offset control joints to ends of lintels.
35
36 F. Joining of Work:
37 1. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, remove loose
38 units and mortar, and clean exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry.
39 2. If necessary to stop off horizontal runs of masonry, rack back one-half block length in
40 each course.
41 3. Do not use toothing to join new masonry to set or partially set masonry.
42
43 G. Flashing:
44 1. Clean surface to receive flashing and remove projections which might puncture or
45 damage flashing material.
46 2. Seal joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
47 3. Seal top of flashing to ensure moisture cannot infiltrate behind flashing.
48 4. Continue flashing around corners; ensure membrane material is not interrupted in
49 horizontal plane at corners.
50 5. Wall base, window sills and opening heads:
51 a. Place flashing on mortar bed and cover with mortar.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 73 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Start 1/2" from outside face of wall and turn up in cavity 8" minimum.
2 c. Lap joints 4" minimum.
3 d. Place flashing under and behind sills.
4 e. Place flashing over steel lintels.
5 f. Extend flashing beyond opening jamb lines.
6
7 H. Pointing:
8 1. At completion of conventional masonry unit work, fill holes in joints and tool.
9 2. Cut out and repoint defective joints.
10 3. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each days work and after final
11 pointing.
12
13 3.4 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
14
15 A. Maximum Variation from Plumb:
16 1. Vertical lines and surfaces of columns and walls: 1/4" in 10'-0"; 3/8" in any story or 20'-
17 0" maximum and 1/2" in 40'-0".
18 2. External corners or control joints: 1/4" in any one story or 20'-0" maximum; 1/2" in 40'-
19 0".
20
21 B. Maximum Variation from Level or Grades for Exposed Lintels, Sill, Parapets, or Horizontal
22 Grooves: 1/4" on any bay or 20'-0"; 1/2" in 40'-0".
23
24 C. Maximum Variation from Plan Location of Linear Building Line or Related Portions of
25 Columns, Walls and Partitions: 1/2" in any bay or 20'-0"; 3/4" in 40'-0".
26
27 D. Maximum Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions of Columns and Thicknesses of Walls:
28 1/4", +1/2".
29
30 3.5 CLEANING
31
32 A. Clean initially with stiff brushes and clean water.
33
34 B. When cleaning agent is required, apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 square feet.
35 1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is reviewed by Architect.
36 2. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent and immediately rinse with clear water.
37 3. Do small sections at a time, working from top to bottom.
38 4. Protect sash, metal lintels and other corrosive parts when masonry is cleaned with acidic
39 solution.
40
41 C. Leave area and surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry.
42
43 3.6 PROTECTION OF SURFACES
44
45 A. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress with nonstaining waterproof
46 covering.
47
48 B. Extend cover minimum 24" down both sides and securely anchor in place.
49
50 C. After masonry work is complete, protect top of wall until cap or coping and flashing is in
51 place.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 04 73 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar or other damage during
3 construction.
4
5 E. Remove misplaced grout or mortar immediately.
6
7
8 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 05 12 00 1
STRUCTURAL STEEL 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS (Latest Edition) 17
B. American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC: 18
19
20
21
22
C. American Society for Testing and Materials: 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
D. American Welding Society: 15
16
17
E. Industrial Fasteners Institute: 18
19
F. American National Standards Institute: 20
21
22
G. The Society for Protective Coatings, SSPC: 23
24
25
1.3 SUBMITTALS 26
H. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings showing shop and erection 27
details including member sizes, grades of materials, details of fabrication and erection, and end 28
connections. 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
I. Erection Procedure: Submit descriptive data illustrating general procedure for erection of 39
structural steel including sequence of work, proposed schedule and details of temporary staying 40
and bracing. 41
J. Submit Mill Certifications showing compliance of materials with ASTM and AISC 42
Specifications. 43
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
K. Submit Mill Certifications (Manufacturer's Inspection Certificates) for bolts, nuts and washers. 1
L. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets or certified test results indicating compliance with 2
requirements for manufactured components. 3
M. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 4
of this Section: 5
6
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 7
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 8
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 9
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 10
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 11
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 12
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 13
the product. 14
15
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 16
recycled content per unit of product. 17
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 18
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 19
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 20
21
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 22
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 23
project site. 24
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 25
purchased within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 26
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS 27
N. Arc-Welding: Welding procedures and techniques, welders and tackers shall be qualified in 28
accordance with AWS D1.1. 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
O. Steel Fabricator: not less than 5 years of experience in fabrication of structural steel. 39
P. Steel Erector: not less than 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel. 40
41
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1
Q. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage assemblies to be embedded in concrete 2
or masonry construction. Provide setting drawings, instructions and templates required for 3
proper placement of anchor bolts and embeds. 4
R. Sequence shipments of fabricated steel to expedite erection and minimize field handling of 5
material. 6
S. Store structural steel above ground on skids or platforms and protect from corrosion. Store 7
packaged materials in unbroken containers. 8
T. Do not bend or damage materials during shipment, handling and erection. 9
U. Take precautions in the removal of packaging or bundling devices to prevent damage to 10
materials. 11
V. Certification numbers for fasteners shall appear on product containers and shall correspond to 12
identification numbers on mill test reports. 13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 14
2.1 MATERIALS 15
W. Structural Steel, normal grade: ASTM A36. 16
X. High Strength Structural Steel: ASTM A572 - Grade 50. 17
Y. High Strength Structural Steel (W-Sections): ASTM A992 – Grade 50. 18
Z. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53 - Grade B (35,000 psi yield). 19
AA. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) – Round or Rectangular: ASTM A500 - Grade B. 20
BB. Erection Bolts: ASTM A307, ANSI B18.2.1, and ANSI B18.2.2. 21
CC. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325N, ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.2.2. 22
23
DD. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A490N. 24
25
EE. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 36 26
FF. High Strength Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 105. 27
GG. Washers: ANSI B27.2 Type A. 28
HH. Welding Electrodes: 29
30
31
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
II. Coatings for structural steel 5
6
a. Rust-inhibiting primer 7
b. Paint and methods of paint application shall comply with applicable air-quality and 8
environmental regulations. 9
c. Paint shall be compatible with welding procedures and shall produce no significant 10
difference in strength of weld material. 11
d. Paint shall meet or exceed requirements for abrasion - Fed. Test No. 141; 12
elongation - ASTM D522; and salt spray - ASTM B117. 13
14
a. Acceptable Products: 15
1) Tnemec 10-09 16
2) Valspar 13-R-29 17
3) Carboline Phenoline 818 18
4) Sherwin-Williams Kem Kromik Universal B50 Series 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
JJ. Shear Studs 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
KK. Slide Bearings: 35
36
37
38
a. Fluorogold Bearings, Seismic Energy Bearing Corp. 39
b. Con-Slide Slide Bearings, Con-Serv Inc. 40
c. Structural Expansion Bearings, Fabreeka International 41
42
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
2.2 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 1
LL. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 2
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 3
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 4
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 5
MM. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 6
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 7
operations. 8
NN. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 9
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 10
0.1%. 11
2.3 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 12
OO. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 13
below the industry average in the following categories: 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
PP. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 21
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 22
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 23
QQ. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 24
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 25
RR. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 26
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 27
SS. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 28
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 29
2.4 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS 30
TT. Design connections to resist required forces, where not detailed on Drawings. 31
UU. Design connections for simple beams (except where end reactions are otherwise scheduled) for 32
55 percent of total uniform load capacity shown in Maximum Total Uniform Load Tables, Part 33
3, of AISC Manual, for given beam, span and grade of steel specified. 34
VV. Note slip critical connection requirements clearly on shop drawings. 35
WW. Complete penetration butt weld moment connections to develop 100% of flexural capacity of 36
member. 37
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
XX. Except as specifically noted otherwise, detail bolted connections using bolts conforming to 1
ASTM A325N, Bearing Type Connections with threads allowed in shear plane. Details shall be 2
in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints. 3
YY. Except as specifically noted otherwise, detail bolted connections using bolts conforming to 4
ASTM A490, Bearing Type Connections with threads allowed in shear plane. Details shall be 5
in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints. 6
ZZ. Design welded truss connections for 1.15 times required forces. 7
AAA. Diagonal Bracing: Where forces are indicated on the drawings, design connections for 1.15 8
times the indicated force. Where forces are not indicated, design connections for full strength of 9
member in tension. 10
BBB. Do not use welds in combination with bolts in the same face of any connection. 11
2.5 FABRICATION 12
CCC. Fabricate materials in accordance with applicable AISC Specifications and Standards. 13
DDD. Pre-assemble work as much as possible and deliver to site ready for erection. Mark and 14
match-mark pieces where field assembly is required. 15
EEE. Prior to fabrication; straighten materials, remove twists and bends and clean faying surfaces of 16
scale and rust. 17
FFF. Clean members to be painted with power tools in accordance with SSPC standards. 18
GGG. Camber beams to within 1/8th inch per 15 feet of beam length. Mark beams indicating 19
direction of fabricated or natural camber. 20
HHH. Provide members of required sizes, weights, shapes and lengths. Do not splice members 21
to achieve required lengths except where specifically allowed by the Architect. Do not alter 22
member shapes or lengths or enlarge bolt holes in the field for proper fit; return materials to the 23
fabrication shop for correction where required. Member splices allowed for the convenience of 24
the fabricator or erector shall not result in additional cost to the Owner. 25
III. Punch or drill holes for bolts. Hole sizes shall conform to AISC Specifications. 26
JJJ. Compression joints shall have both contact surfaces milled for precision fit. Other joints shall 27
be cut or dressed straight and true and prepared as required for welding. Components of 28
assemblies and built-up members shall be pinned and rigidly maintained in accurate position 29
during final assembly. 30
2.6 WELDED CONSTRUCTION 31
KKK. Comply with AWS D1.1. 32
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
LLL. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint, grease and dirt. Remove oil with benzine. Wire brush 1
welds after depositing for visual inspection. Welds shall be smooth and uniform in cross 2
section, shall be free of porosity and clinkers, and shall have required fusion and penetration 3
into base metal. 4
MMM. Secure members in proper position for welding. 5
NNN. Take proper precautions to minimize residual stresses and distortions in members being 6
welded. 7
OOO. Preheat and interpass temperatures shall conform to Table 3.2, AWS D1.1. 8
PPP. Prepare members to be butt-welded in accordance with AISC recommendations for pre-9
qualified welds and provide required clearances and back-up bars. Remove back-up bars after 10
completing welds. 11
QQQ. Lay fillet welds of required sizes in proper position and with gaps not exceeding AISC 12
recommendations. 13
RRR. Tack welding shall not affect quality of finished welds. 14
2.7 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION 15
SSS. Provide holes at right angles to members of sizes recommended by AISC Specifications. Short-16
slotted holes shall not be used for primary frame connections (members connecting to columns), 17
trusses and wind bracing unless specifically allowed by the Architect. Where used, short-18
slotted holes shall be oriented normal to the direction of load. 19
TTT. Provide beveled washers for surfaces out of parallel more than 1:20. 20
UUU. Provide bolts of sufficient length to extend entirely through nuts. 21
VVV. Protect fasteners from dirt and moisture at job site. Only as many fasteners as are anticipated to 22
be installed and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protective storage. Fasteners 23
not used shall be returned to protected storage at end of shift. Fasteners shall not be cleaned of 24
lubricant that is present in as-delivered condition. Fasteners for slip critical connections which 25
must be cleaned of accumulated rust or dirt resulting from job site conditions, shall be cleaned 26
and relubricated prior to installation. 27
WWW. Anchor bolts and erection bolts: tighten with a suitable wrench not less than 15 inches 28
long. Tap bolt heads with a hammer while tightening. 29
XXX. High Strength Bolts (typical, except as noted otherwise): install bolts in properly aligned holes 30
and tighten to snug tight condition. Snug tight condition is defined as the tightness that exists 31
when all plies in a joint are in firm contact. 32
YYY. High Strength Bolts (Slip-Critical Connections): Install bolts in properly aligned holes, 33
tightened in accordance with Section 8 of AISC Specifications for Structural Joints. Use either 34
calibrated wrench or turn-of-the-nut method. Provide hardened washers when calibrated 35
wrench method is to be used. 36
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
ZZZ. Hand tighten and tack weld (nut-to-bolt shank) bolts required to be "finger-tight". 1
AAAA. Holes for anchor bolts in base plates may be oversized in accordance with AISC 2
Specifications. Provide washers as indicated on Drawings. 3
2.8 COATINGS 4
BBBB. SHOP PAINTING 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CCCC. GALVANIZING 17
18
19
20
2.9 PRODUCTS 21
DDDD. FUSION WELDED ANCHORS 22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 29
EEEE. Testing of Shear Studs: 30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
FFFF. Pre-Erection Testing of High Strength Bolts 38
39
40
41
42
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
GGGG. Inspection of Structural Steel: 2
3
4
a. Inspect fabrications in shop. 5
b. Check temporary bracing of steel frame. 6
c. Check location and condition of anchor bolts. 7
d. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. 8
e. Qualification of welders and welding techniques. 9
f. Visually inspect erection bolts. 10
g. Inspection of high-strength bolting: 11
1) In accordance with Section 9 of AISC Specifications for Structural 12
Joints. 13
2) Confirm that fasteners meet project specification and are properly 14
stored and handled. 15
3) Confirm that faying surfaces have been properly prepared before 16
connections are assembled. 17
4) Observe testing and calibration and confirm that procedures used 18
result in the required fastener tension. 19
5) Visually inspect connections. 20
6) Check tightness of at least 33% of slip-critical connections. 21
7) Check tightness of at least 2 bolts of each slip-critical girder to 22
column connection. 23
h. Visually inspect all field and shop welds. 24
i. Complete-penetration welds. 25
1) Ultrasonic or X-ray testing per AWS Standards. 26
2) Testing shall be performed on 100% of shop and field complete-27
penetration welds. 28
j. Re-inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. 29
HHHH. Remove and replace Connections found to be faulty at no additional cost to the contract. 30
PART 3 - EXECUTION 31
3.1 EXAMINATION 32
IIII. Verify condition and position of anchor bolts and embeds in concrete prior to commencing 33
erection. 34
JJJJ. Correct misaligned or missing components required for connections to steel framework before 35
commencing erection. 36
KKKK. Measure camber of erected steel beams and report deviations from required camber 37
before placing concrete slabs. Do not place concrete on beams that have inadequate or negative 38
camber. 39
3.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL 40
STEEL (AESS) 41
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
LLLL. AESS is defined as steel that is exposed to view in the final construction. 1
MMMM. Section 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice shall apply to all steel identified as 2
AESS. 3
NNNN. Tube-to-tube and pipe-to-pipe connections shall be full welded connections with no 4
exposed bolts, fasteners, clips, or plates. Erection clips and bolts may be used but shall be 5
removed and ground smooth following final erection. 6
OOOO. For exposed welds in AESS, all plug, slot, V, groove, bevel, flare V and flare bevel welds 7
shall be ground smooth. All fillet welds shall be smooth and uniform, visually acceptable to the 8
Architect. 9
PPPP. When exposed fillet welds are not required to be continuous, spaces between intermittent 10
welds shall be filled with metal filler or weld to provide a continuous uniform appearance. 11
12
13
QQQQ. Edges of exposed plates shall be sawn or sheared to provide a uniform edge. Thermal 14
cutting to be used only with acceptance of the Architect if uniform edges can be maintained. 15
RRRR. Exposed fasteners may be used only as indicated on Drawings or required for field 16
connections. Exposed fasteners are not permitted for shop connections unless specifically 17
approved by Architect. When exposed fasteners are permitted, the connections shall be uniform 18
and consistent, with the connections of adjacent beams matching in size and arrangement to 19
provide a consistent, uniform appearance. When exposed fasteners are permitted, galvanized 20
bolts shall be used. 21
SSSS. Within seven days following erection, field touch up all AESS. Field touch up paint shall be the 22
same as shop primer, applied by spraying on exposed surfaces only after proper preparation 23
including grinding, smoothing and cleaning. 24
TTTT. AESS that is mishandled or stored in such a way that the steel and/or primer has been 25
damaged will be subject to rejection upon review of the Architect. 26
3.3 ERECTION AND FIELD ASSEMBLY 27
UUUU. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications. Work shall be plumb, 28
square, true to line, level and in proper position and orientation. 29
VVVV. Provide temporary bracing and guys to maintain stability of framework during erection 30
for stresses and loads due to erection equipment and its operation, weight of structure, wind, and 31
temporary loads imposed during erection. Check and adjust bracing frequently during progress 32
of erection and assembly. Maintain temporary bracing until all components of the structure 33
required for lateral stability are in place and final connections made. 34
WWWW. Do not stack materials on partially completed framework, or in a manner to cause 35
damage or overloading of the structure. 36
XXXX. Tolerances shall be in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice and as follows: 37
38
18 September 2018 05 12 00 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
YYYY. Field Assembly: 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ZZZZ. Field Connections: 25
26
27
28
29
30
3.4 ADJUSTING 31
AAAAA. Touch-up field welds, abrasions and scarred areas of structural steel with same paint used 32
for shop coating after erection of frame and final connections are completed. 33
3.5 FIELD PAINTING 34
BBBBB. Refer to Section 09 91 13 and 09 91 23 for field painting of exposed steel. 35
END OF SECTION 36
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 05 12 13 1
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4
A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all work of this Section. 5
1.2 SCOPE 6
A. This Section includes requirements regarding the appearance and surface preparation of 7
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS). Refer to Division 5, Section “Structural 8
Steel” for all other requirements regarding steel work not included in this section. This section 9
applies to any members noted on Architectural or Structural drawings as AESS. 10
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11
A. Fabricator Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Division 5 Section 12
“Structural Steel,” engage a firm experienced in fabricating AESS similar to that indicated for 13
this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production 14
capacity to fabricate AESS without delaying the Work. 15
B. Erector Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Division 5 Section “Structural 16
Steel,” engage an experienced Erector who has completed AESS work similar in material, 17
design, and extent to that indicted for this Project and with a record of successful in- service 18
performance. 19
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 20
21
D. Mock-ups: At least four weeks prior to fabricating AESS, the contractor shall construct mock-22
ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. A mock-up 23
for each of the following elements shall be constructed: 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
E. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final 31
unit of Work. 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
a. Approved mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial 4
completion may become part of the completed work. 5
1.4 SUBMITTALS 6
A. Product Data for each type of product specified. 7
B. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of AESS components. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Article to 24
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects names and 25
address, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 26
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 27
A. Deliver AESS to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of 28
installation. 29
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off 30
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged 31
materials from erosion and deterioration. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting or 32
warping of AESS members. 33
C. Erect pre-painted finish pieces using padded slings or other methods such that they are not 34
damaged. Provide padding as required to protect while rigging and aligning member’s frames. 35
Weld tabs for temporary bracing and safety cabling only at points concealed from view in the 36
completed structure or where approved by the Architect during the pre-installation meeting. 37
Methods of removing temporary erection devices and finishing the AESS members shall be 38
approved by the Architect prior to erection. 39
40
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1
A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against walls and other construction, verify 2
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop 3
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 4
work. 5
1.7 COORDINATION 6
A. Coordinate installation of anchors for AESS members that connect to the work of other trades. 7
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchors, including sleeves, 8
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in 9
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the project site in time for installation. Anchorage 10
concepts shall be as indicated on drawings and approved on final shop drawings. 11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 12
2.1 PRIMERS 13
A. Compatibility: The General Contractor shall submit all components/procedures of the paint 14
system for AESS as a single coordinated submittal. As a minimum, identify required surface 15
preparation, primer, intermediate coat (if applicable) and finish coat. All of the items shall be 16
coordinated with the finish coat specified in Division 9. 17
B. Primer: Fast curing, universal modified alkyd, rust inhibiting shop coat with good resistance to 18
normal atmospheric corrosion. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and 19
chromate levels. 20
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for galvanizing welds and repair- 21
painting galvanized steel, with dry-film coating not less than 90-percent zinc dust by weight. 22
2.2 FABRICATION 23
A. Fabricate and assemble AESS in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Locate field joints in 24
AESS assemblies at concealed locations or as approved by the Architect. Detail AESS 25
assemblies to minimize field handling and expedite erection. 26
B. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces smooth, square and of surface quality consistent with the 27
approved mock-up. Use special care in handling and shipping of AESS both before and after 28
shop painting. 29
C. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, employ the following fabrication 30
techniques as indicated on Architectural or Structural drawings. 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
2.3 SHOP CONNECTIONS 28
A. Bolted Connections: Make in accordance with Section 05 12 00. Provide bolt type and finish as 29
noted herein and align bolt heads as indicated on the approved shop erection drawings. 30
B. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and Section 05 12 00. Appearance and quality of 31
welds shall be consistent with the mock-up. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods 32
that will maintain alignment of members without warp exceeding the tolerance of this section. 33
2.4 SHOP PRIMING 34
A. Shop-prime steel surfaces, except the following: 35
36
37
38
39
40
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and 41
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC Specifications as follows: 42
43
44
45
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer’s 3
instructions to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming 4
methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 5
6
7
8
2.5 GALVANIZING 9
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to AESS indicated 10
galvanizing according to ASTM A 123. Fabricate such that all connections of assemblies are 11
made in the field with bolted connections. Provide galvanized finish or members and assemblies 12
within the range of color and surface textures presented in the mock ups. 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION 14
3.1 EXAMINATION 15
A. The erector shall check all AESS members upon delivery for twist, kinks, gouges or other 16
imperfections which might result in rejection of the appearance of the member. Coordinate 17
remedial action with fabricator prior to erecting steel. 18
3.2 PREPARATION 19
A. Provide connections for temporary shoring, bracing and supports only where noted on the 20
approved shop drawings. Temporary connections not shown shall be made at locations not 21
exposed to view in the final structure or as approved by the Architect. Handle, lift and align 22
pieces using padded slings and/or other protection required to maintain the appearance of the 23
AESS through the process of erection. 24
3.3 ERECTION 25
A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, and according to AISC 26
specifications referenced in this Section. 27
B. In addition to the special care used to handle and erect AESS, employ the following erection 28
techniques as indicated on Architectural or Structural drawings: 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
C. Field welding: Weld profile, quality, and finish shall be consistent with mock-ups approved 21
prior to fabrication. 22
D. Splice members only where indicated. 23
E. Obtain permission for any torch cutting or field fabrication from the Architect. Finish sections 24
thermally cut during erection to a surface appearance consistent with the mock up. 25
F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must 26
be enlarged to admit bolts. Replace connection plates that are misaligned where holes cannot be 27
aligned with acceptable final appearance. 28
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS 29
A. Bolted Connections: Install bolts of the specified type and finish in accordance with Division 5 30
section “Structural Steel.” 31
B. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, and appearance. Refer to 32
Division 5 section “Structural Steel” for other requirements. 33
34
35
36
37
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 38
A. Structural requirements: The Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency 39
to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. Refer to Division 5 section 40
“Structural Steel” for detailed bolt and weld testing requirements. 41
18 September 2018 05 12 13 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. AESS acceptance: The Architect shall observe the AESS steel in place and determine 1
acceptability based on the mock-up. The Testing Agency shall have no responsibility for 2
enforcing the requirements of this section. 3
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 4
A. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and Touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and 5
abraded areas of shop paint shall be completed to blend with the adjacent surfaces of AESS.” 6
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 7
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. 8
END OF SECTION 9
18 September 2018 05 21 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 05 21 00 1
STEEL JOISTS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1.2 REFERENCES 12
A. Steel Joist Institute, SJI: 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 22
23
24
25
C. American Welding Society: 26
27
28
1.3 SUBMITTALS 29
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings to include member marks, number, type, 30
location, and spacing of members; details of bridging, extended ends and attachment at 31
supports. 32
33
B. Design: Indicate on shop drawings where special designs have been provided, including a 34
detailed, written description of magnitudes and locations of loads for each special design 35
loading condition. 36
C. Submit Certified mill test reports showing compliance with requirements of ASTM and SJI 37
Specifications. 38
18 September 2018 05 21 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
D. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 1
of this Section: 2
3
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 4
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 5
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 6
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 7
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 8
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 9
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 10
the product. 11
12
d. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 13
recycled content per unit of product. 14
e. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 15
f. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 16
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 17
18
g. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 19
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 20
project site. 21
h. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 22
purchased within a 100 mile radius of the project site. 23
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 24
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 25
26
27
28
B. Welding Operator Qualifications: 29
30
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 31
A. Mark pieces for identification during erection. 32
B. Deliver to site in proper sequence for erection. 33
C. Store materials above ground; prevent corrosion, warpage and twisting. 34
D. Do not bend or damage members during handling. 35
E. Take precautions breaking bundles to prevent damage to materials and injury to workmen. 36
37
18 September 2018 05 21 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1.6 DESIGN 1
A. Joists shall be designed by the fabricator in accordance with the specifications of the Steel Joist 2
Institute. 3
B. Where loads are shown or specified, members shall be designed for the specific loading 4
conditions required. 5
C. Where loadings are not shown, members shall be designed for the maximum allowable load 6
indicated in the standard load tables published by the Steel Joist Institute for the member 7
designation and spans required. 8
D. Fabricator shall determine and include in the work any and all special bridging or temporary 9
bracing required for proper erection or final assembly of the work. 10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11
2.1 MATERIALS 12
A. Steel bridging, bearing plates and wall anchors: comply with ASTM A36. 13
B. Bolts: comply with ASTM A307. 14
C. Welding Electrodes: comply with AWS A5.5, E70 or submerged arc Grade SAW-2. 15
D. Steel Joists: comply with SJI Specifications. 16
17
18
E. Paint: rust-inhibiting primer; comply with SJI Specifications; paint and methods of paint 19
application shall comply with applicable air-quality and environmental regulations. 20
2.2 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 21
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 22
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 23
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 24
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 25
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 26
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 27
operations. 28
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 29
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 30
0.1%. 31
2.3 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 32
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 33
below the industry average in the following categories: 34
18 September 2018 05 21 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 7
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 8
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 9
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 10
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 11
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 12
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 13
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 14
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 15
2.4 FABRICATION 16
A. Design and fabricate joists in accordance with SJI Specifications. 17
B. Accessories: Provide required sag rods, bridging, extended bottom chords and top chords, side 18
wall anchors, wall connectors, headers, and ceiling extensions. 19
C. Shop Paint: After fabrication, clean joists, bridging, and anchors of rust, mill scale, dirt and 20
other foreign material. Remove grease and oil with solvents. Apply one coat of paint, minimum 21
thickness of 1 mil. 22
23
D. Extended Ends: Design to cantilever from the main span of the joist, provide load capacity at 24
least equal to that of joist. 25
E. Provide horizontal and X-bridging as required, minimum bridging requirements in accordance 26
with SJI Specifications. 27
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 28
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 29
30
31
32
33
PART 3 - EXECUTION 34
3.1 ERECTION 35
A. Replace joists damaged by bending or warping during handling and erection. 36
18 September 2018 05 21 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. Bridging shall comply with SJI Specifications and with details on Drawings. 1
C. Minimum bearing and anchorage shall comply with SJI Specifications and Drawings as related 2
to particular type of support. 3
D. Provide erection bolts for joists located on column centerlines. 4
E. Set joists to lines, levels, and spacing as indicated. Provide bearing plates as indicated or 5
required to carry out structural requirements. Execute general handling and erection in 6
accordance with SJI Specifications. 7
F. Permanently fasten joists to supports and install bridging and anchorage before any construction 8
loads, other than workmen, are placed on joists. 9
G. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 10
H. Properly store and protect electrodes to prevent deterioration or damage by moisture and 11
climate. 12
I. After erection, touch up field connections and abraded places of shop paint with same kind of 13
paint as shop coat. 14
J. Do not weld bottom chords of joists to supports until full dead load of roof is applied. Brace 15
joists and supporting structure for safety and stability until permanent bracing structures are in 16
place. 17
K. Do not use bridging to support conduit, piping, duct work, or other equipment. 18
L. Do not attach hangers supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds directly to joist chords. See 19
details on Structural Drawings for methods of supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds on 20
joists. 21
3.2 ADJUSTING 22
A. Touch-up abrasions and welds with shop paint. 23
B. Joists in crawl space: paint all connections with Special Paint. 24
C. Correct or replace damaged materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 25
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 26
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 27
28
29
END OF SECTION 30
18 September 2018 05 31 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 05 31 13 1
COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK AND FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
7
1.2 REFERENCES 8
A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 9
10
11
B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
C. American Welding Society: 19
20
21
22
D. Steel Deck Institute: 23
24
E. Underwriters Laboratories Building Materials Directory. 25
F. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Materials Directory: 26
27
1.3 SUBMITTALS 28
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer’s data indicating product compliance for the following: 29
30
a. Submit certification that decking meets requirements for working platform and 31
form for concrete placement. 32
b. Submit certification that slab and deck system meets requirements for 33
superimposed load capacity. 34
35
B. Shop Drawings: submit shop and installation drawings for review, including: 36
37
18 September 2018 05 31 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
a. Metal deck erection layouts, details, dimensions, and installation instructions. 1
Indicate where shoring of deck is required for concrete placement. 2
b. Show framing, locations, lengths, and markings of deck to correspond with 3
sequence and procedure to be followed in installing and fastening steel deck. 4
c. Show methods of fastening deck and installing accessories. 5
d. Show locations, types, and sequence of welded connections for deck units, using 6
standard AWS weld symbols. 7
e. Show size and number of holes to be cut in deck. 8
9
10
C. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 11
of this Section: 12
13
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 14
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 15
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 16
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 17
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 18
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 19
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 20
the product. 21
22
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 23
recycled content per unit of product. 24
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 25
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 26
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 27
28
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 29
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 30
project site. 31
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 32
purchased within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 33
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 34
A. Welding: 35
36
37
38
39
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 40
A. Deck: 41
42
43
18 September 2018 05 31 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B. Shear Studs: 9
10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11
2.1 MATERIALS 12
A. Shear Studs: 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B. Cold Galvanizing Compound: Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA. Tel: (800) 831-25
3275 (www.zrcworldwide.com). 26
2.2 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 27
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 28
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 29
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 30
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 31
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 32
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 33
operations. 34
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 35
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 36
0.1%. 37
2.3 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 38
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 39
below the industry average in the following categories: 40
18 September 2018 05 31 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 7
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 8
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 9
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 10
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 11
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 12
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 13
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 14
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 15
2.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS 16
A. Composite Metal Deck 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
a. Capable of supporting weight of wet concrete, plus 20 psf uniform live load or 24
150-pound concentrated load per foot of deck width without intermediate shoring 25
on all span conditions, and without exceeding SDI Specifications limits on deck 26
stress and deflection. 27
b. Classified by U.L. Building Materials Directory. 28
c. Each unit or bundle labeled and marked in accordance with U.L. requirements, 29
indicating manufacturer, testing, and inspection. 30
31
32
33
2.5 ACCESSORIES 34
A. Sheet metal closures and fillers: ASTM A653. 35
B. Ceiling hanger inserts: compatible with deck used. 36
PART 3 - EXECUTION 37
3.1 PREPARATION 38
18 September 2018 05 31 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
A. Do not begin laying of deck units until supporting members are secured in place and their end 1
connections completed. 2
B. Provide shoring where indicated on shop drawings. Shoring must be supported on adjacent 3
beams if the beams are not shored to construction below. 4
C. Where shoring of beams and girders is required, provide positive support at midpoint of spans 5
under 25 feet and at third points of spans over 25 feet. Temporary supports must rest directly 6
above beams at the supporting floor, or load must be transferred to beams with load spreaders. 7
Supporting construction must be re-shored where construction loading exceeds live load 8
capacity of supporting floor. 9
D. Clean rust, oil, grease, paint, and debris away from areas to which anchors are to be welded. 10
Remove mill scale by grinding or by sandblasting. 11
3.2 DECK INSTALLATION 12
A. Lay and align units as follows: 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Openings in deck: 20
21
22
23
24
C. Weld deck to supporting steel using 5/8" diameter puddle welds or headed shear studs at not 25
more than 12 inches on center. 26
D. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of units. 27
E. Fasten side laps and connect perimeter edges to supports at spacing not to exceed three feet. 28
29
30
F. Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place. 31
G. Replace defective deck connections before concrete slab is placed. 32
H. Install inserts to support ceiling hangers. Provide minimum of one ceiling insert for every 4 33
square feet of ceiling. 34
3.3 SHEAR STUD INSTALLATION 35
A. Automatically end weld shear studs in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 7. 36
18 September 2018 05 31 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. Remove ceramic ferrules from anchors after welding. 1
C. Do not weld studs when temperature is below zero degrees F. 2
D. Do not weld studs when surface is wet with rain or snow. 3
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 4
A. Deck: Inspect deck at welded connections. Reject connections where deck is not intact after 5
welding and where blow holes occurred. 6
B. Shear Studs: 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.5 ADJUSTING 18
A. Field Touch Up of Deck: After erection, use cold galvanizing compound to touch up both sides 19
of deck at welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. 20
END OF SECTION 21
18 September 2018 05 31 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 05 31 23 1
METAL ROOF DECK 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
6
7
1.2 REFERENCES (Latest Edition Available) 8
A. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck. 9
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel 10
Structural Members. 11
C. American Welding Society: 12
13
14
D. American Society for Testing and Materials: 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 28
29
30
31
1.3 SUBMITTALS 32
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review prior to fabrication or installation of 33
materials. 34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 05 31 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
B. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 5
of this Section: 6
7
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 8
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 9
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 10
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 11
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 12
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 13
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 14
the product. 15
16
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 17
recycled content per unit of product. 18
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 19
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 20
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 21
22
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 23
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 24
project site. 25
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 26
purchased within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 27
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 28
A. Manufacturer Qualifications 29
30
31
B. Erector Qualifications 32
33
34
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 35
A. Deliver deck in bundles and store on pallets above the ground, protect from corrosion and 36
damage. Rusted, crimped or bent deck shall not be installed in the work. 37
B. Do not store materials on installed deck before connecting to supporting structure. 38
C. Do not overload deck during construction by workmen or storage of materials. 39
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40
2.1 MATERIALS 41
18 September 2018 05 31 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
A. Steel Grades: 1
2
3
B. Miscellaneous steel plates at vents, sump pans, and closures: 20-gage material. 4
C. Welding Rods: AWS A5.1, E70 5
D. Weld Washers: 14-gage, with 3/8ths diameter hole at center. 6
E. Galvanizing: 7
8
9
F. Paint: 10
11
12
13
2.2 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 14
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 15
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 16
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 17
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 18
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 19
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 20
operations. 21
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 22
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 23
0.1%. 24
2.3 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 25
A. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 26
below the industry average in the following categories: 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 34
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 35
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 36
C. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 37
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 38
18 September 2018 05 31 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
D. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 1
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 2
E. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 3
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 4
2.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS 5
A. Metal deck units shall comply with the Specifications of the Steel Deck Institute. 6
B. Design units for required spans and conditions of continuity, generally for 3 continuous spans, 7
except as required by layout. 8
C. Stresses under construction loads, gravity loads and wind loading shall not exceed 9
recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute. 10
2.5 FABRICATION 11
A. Fabricate in lengths as long as practical and piece-mark bundles for identification during 12
erection. 13
B. Painting: 14
15
16
17
PART 3 - EXECUTION 18
3.1 INSTALLATION 19
A. Do not lay deck units in place until supporting structure is secured in place and final 20
connections are complete. 21
B. Layout deck units in accordance with shop drawings, do not stretch or bend units. 22
C. Overlap ends a minimum of 2 inches. Interlock side laps as shown on shop drawings. 23
D. Connections: 24
25
26
27
28
29
E. Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place. 30
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 31
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection: 32
33
34
18 September 2018 05 31 23 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
3.3 ADJUSTING 1
A. Touch-up scarred areas on both sides of deck including welds, rust spots and abrasions by wire-2
brushing and painting with shop paint. 3
B. Repair blow-holes at welds with 18 gage plates welded in place. Replace entire sections of 4
deck where holes cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 5
3.4 HANGERS FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 6
A. Do not attach hangers for ceilings, ductwork, or piping directly to metal roof deck. 7
END OF SECTION 8
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 05 40 00
2
3 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Exterior non-load bearing wall framing.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American Iron and Steel Institute
16 1. AISI S100: North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
17 Structural Members
18 2. AISI S200: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General
19 Provisions
20 3. AISI S210: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Floor and
21 Roof System Design
22 4. AISI S211: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Wall Stud
23 Design
24 5. AISI S212: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header
25 Design
26 6. AISI S213: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Lateral
27 Design
28
29 B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
30 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
31 2. ASTM A 123/A123M: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
32 Iron and Steel Products
33 3. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
34 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
35 4. ASTM A 780: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
36 Galvanized Coatings
37 5. ASTM A 1003/A 1003M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
38 Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members
39 6. ASTM C 1513: Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel
40 Framing Connections
41 7. ASTM E 488: Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry
42 Elements
43 8. ASTM E 1190: Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in
44 Structural Members
45
46 C. American Welding Society:
47 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. AWS D1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
2
3 D. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
4 1. ICC-ES AC70: Fasteners Power-Driven into Concrete, Steel and Masonry Elements
5 2. ICC-ES AC193: Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements
6
7 E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
8 1. SSPC-Paint 20: Paint Specification No. 20: Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic,"
9 and Type II, "Organic")
10
11 F. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers
12 1. SEI/ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
13
14 1.3 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Product Data: Submit Technical Data to verify the section properties of studs shown on
17 the architectural and structural drawings and instructions for securing studs to tracks and
18 other framing connections.
19
20 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
21 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer
22 recycled content and cost.
23 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
24 3. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
25
26 C. Shop Drawings:
27 1. Indicate component details including size and gage designations, bracing, splices,
28 bridging, framing openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, temporary bracing, welds,
29 type and location of mechanical fasteners and accessories, or items required of other
30 work for complete installation.
31 2. Detail stud layout.
32
33 D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with
34 performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
35 the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
36
37 E. Quality Control Submittals:
38 1. Certificates: Certify that each welder has satisfactory passed AWS qualification test
39 for welding process involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
40
41 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Qualifications:
44 1. Professional Engineer: Licensed to practice in state where project is located and is
45 experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
46 2. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS
47 D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
2
3 A. Protect light gage steel framing members from weather exposure and damage. Deliver to
4 project site in bundles, fully identified with name, type and grade. Store off ground in dry,
5 ventilated space or protect with suitable, venting waterproof coverings.
6
7
8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
9
10 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
11
12 A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 45 16
13 "Contractor’s Quality Control," to design cold-formed metal framing.
14
15 B. Design Criteria:
16 1. Comply with AISI Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
17 Members.
18 2. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI,
19 MFMA, or AWS D1.3 requirements.
20
21 C. Structural Loads:
22 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of cold-formed metal framing to
23 withstand loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to
24 plane of wall cladding as calculated in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish
25 wind pressure based on the following criteria:
26 a. Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph.
27 b. Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 90 mph.
28 c. Occupancy Category: III.
29 d. Exposure Category: C.
30 e. Internal Pressure Coefficient (GCPI): ±0.18.
31 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
32
33 D. Maximum Allowable Deflection:
34 1. For stud behind brick/masonry veneer: L/600 for stud by itself and L/660 for the
35 complete wall system.
36
37 E. Design system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint
38 seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or
39 cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
40
41 F. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
42 members, and clearances of intended openings.
43
44 G. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
45 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.
46 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.
47 3. Headers: AISI S212.
48 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 H. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
3 comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
4
5 I. Stud spacing and depth shall be as indicated on drawings.
6
7 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
8
9 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers include
10 but are not limited to the following:
11 1. Allied Studco.
12 2. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
13 3. CEMCO.
14 4. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, Inc.
15 5. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
16 6. MarinoWARE.
17 7. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
18 8. SCAFCO Corporation.
19 9. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
20 10. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
21 11. United Steel Manufacturing.
22
23 2.3 MATERIALS
24
25 A. Studs, Track, Bracing, Furring and Bridging:
26 1. Formed galvanized sheet steel G-60 complying with ASTM A 653, Grade A, ASTM
27 A 1003.
28 2. Studs: Studs lighter than 18 gage shall not be used.
29 a. For 18 gage units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
30 quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 1003.
31 b. For 16 gage and heaver units, fabricate metal framing components of
32 structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi;
33 ASTM A 1003.
34 3. Open box shaped sections, punched web for studs and solid web for track.
35 4. Structural properties of sections shall be computed in accordance with AISI.
36 B.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
37 preconsumer recycled content not less than 30 percent.
38
39 C. Angles, Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized formed steel, thickness determined for
40 conditions encountered, 20 gage minimum, manufacturer's standard shapes.
41
42 D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-
43 tapping steel drill screws.
44 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard
45 elsewhere.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or powder actuated fasteners, drilled expansion bolts
2 or screws with sleeves.
3
4 F. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
5
6 G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: High zinc dust content galvanizing repair
7 paint conforming to FS TT-P-645 or SSPC - Paint 20, Type II Organic zinc rich.
8
9 2.4 FABRICATION
10
11 A. Galvanize, touch-up and prime metal materials used on exterior wall framing.
12
13 B. Fabricate assemblies and framed sections of sizes and profiles required with joints fitted,
14 secured, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.
15
16 C. Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting
17 or screw fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not wire tie
18 framing components.
19
20
21 PART 3 - EXECUTION
22
23 3.1 ERECTION
24
25 A. Install metal framing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
26
27 B. Joining of members shall be made with self-drilling screws or welding. Wire tying of
28 framing members shall not be permitted.
29
30 C. Metal framing may be attached with sheet metal screws at joints according to
31 manufacturer's recommendations except where noted to be welded on details.
32
33 D. Attachments made with screws shall be self-drilling screws or hardened screw-shank nails
34 at maximum fastener spacing as specified by applicable governing codes.
35
36 E. Connections to concrete shall be made with self-tapping screws specially designed for that
37 purpose.
38
39 F. Align floor and ceiling tracks, locating to wall or partition layout. Secure in place with
40 screws or welding at maximum 24" on center. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of
41 track.
42
43 G. Place studs plumb at 16" on center maximum not more than 2" from abutting walls and at
44 each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using screws or welding in accordance
45 with manufacturer's recommendations. Where stud system abuts column or wall,
46 including masonry, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 H. Construct corners with minimum three studs. Double stud at door, windows, and
2 sidelight jambs. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud
3 spacing.
4
5 I. Provide deflection allowance of L/360 below supported horizontal building framing in
6 ceiling or head track for nonload-bearing framing
7
8 J. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other mechanical and
9 electrical items.
10
11 K. Erect load-bearing studs one piece full length where possible. Non welded splicing and
12 wire tying of components is not permitted. Join members forming trusses by welding.
13
14 L. Erect load-bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design
15 requirements.
16
17 M. Make provision for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.
18
19 N. Provide bridging at 1/3 points, or as recommended by manufacturer for loading
20 conditions, whichever is more stringent.
21
22 O. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs. Do not bridge joint
23 with any component of wall system, including tracks.
24
25 P. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior
26 framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that
27 are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
28
29 Q. Ensure framing provides true and flat surfaces.
30
31 3.2 WELDING
32
33 A. Where welding is required, use special low amperage welding equipment and small
34 diameter rods to prevent blow holes in material.
35
36 B. Welds shall be 1/8" fillet continuous across contact joint.
37
38 C. Puddle welds shall be 3/4" diameter full fusion. Weld washers shall be used where welds
39 are made to material 3/16" or more in thickness.
40
41 1. Use splices or butt welds at all butt joints in runner track. No splices shall be
42 permitted in track over lintels, diaphragm sheathing, or diagonal bracing.
43
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 40 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.3 ADJUSTING
2
3 A. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing.
4
5
6 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 05 50 00
2
3 METAL FABRICATIONS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.
12 2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.
13 3. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
14 4. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
15 5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
16 6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
17 specified in other Sections.
18 7. Shelf angles.
19 8. Metal ladders.
20 9. Ladder safety cages.
21 10. Alternating tread devices.
22 11. Structural-steel door frames.
23 12. Miscellaneous steel trim.
24 13. Metal bollards.
25 14. Metal downspout boots.
26 15. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in
27 other Sections.
28
29 B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
30 1. Loose steel lintels.
31 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
32 indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
33 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are
34 not specified in other Sections.
35
36 1.2 REFERENCES
37
38 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
39 1. AAMA 611: Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum
40
41 B. American Institute of Steel Construction
42 1. AISC 360: Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (available at www.aisc.org)
43
44 C. American National Standards Institute
45 1. ANSI A14.3: American National Standard for Ladders-Fixed-Safety Requirements
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. American Welding Society
2 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M: Structural Welding Code - Steel
3 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M: Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
4 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M: Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel
5
6 E. ASME International/Canadian Standards Association
7 1. ASME A17.1/CSA B44: Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
8
9 F. ASTM International
10 1. ASTM A 27/A 27M: Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General
11 Application
12 2. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
13 3. ASTM A 47/A 47M: Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
14 4. ASTM A 48/A 48M: Specification for Gray Iron Castings
15 5. ASTM A 53/A 53M: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
16 Coated, Welded and Seamless
17 6. ASTM A 123/A 123M: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
18 Iron and Steel Products
19 7. ASTM A 153/A 153M: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
20 Hardware
21 8. ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
22 Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
23 9. ASTM A 276: Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
24 10. ASTM A 283/A 283M: Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
25 Carbon Steel Plates
26 11. ASTM A 307: Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
27 Strength
28 12. ASTM A 325: Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
29 Minimum Tensile Strength
30 13. ASTM A 500/A 500M: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
31 Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
32 14. ASTM A 563: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
33 15. ASTM A 563M: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]
34 16. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
35 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
36 17. ASTM A 666: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
37 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
38 18. ASTM A 741: Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope and Fittings for
39 Highway Guardrail
40 19. ASTM A 780/A 780M: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-
41 Dip Galvanized Coatings
42 20. ASTM A 786/A 786M: Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-
43 Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates
44 21. ASTM A 793: Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel
45 22. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
46 Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
47 Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
48 23. ASTM B 26/B 26M: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 24. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
2 25. ASTM B 221: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
3 Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
4 26. ASTM B 632/B 632M: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate
5 27. ASTM B 633-07: Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
6 Steel
7 28. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M: Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
8 (Nonshrink)
9 29. ASTM D 1187/D 1187M: Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as
10 Protective Coatings for Metal
11 30. ASTM E 119-11: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
12 Materials
13 31. ASTM E 488/E 488M: Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
14 Masonry Elements
15 32. ASTM F 593: Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
16 33. ASTM F 594: Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
17 34. ASTM F 1554: Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield
18 Strength
19 35. ASTM F 1941: Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners
20 ASTM F 2329: Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for
21 Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
22 Threaded Fasteners
23
24 G. California Department of Public Health (formerly, California Department of Health
25 Services)
26 1. Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
27 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.
28
29 H. Master Painters Institute
30 1. MPI#20: Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer
31 2. MPI#79: Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer
32 3. MPI#107: Water Based Rust-Inhibitive Primer
33
34 I. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
35 1. MFMA-4: Metal Framing Standards Publication
36
37 J. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
38 1. SSPC-PA 1: Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance
39 Painting of Steel
40 2. SSPC-Paint 20: Paint Specification No. 20: Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic,"
41 and Type II, "Organic")
42 3. SSPC-SP 3: Surface Preparation Specification No. 3: Power Tool Cleaning
43 4. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3: Joint Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-
44 SP 6/NACE No. 3: Commercial Blast Cleaning
45
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 COORDINATION
2
3 A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
4 paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers
5 and topcoats are compatible with one another.
6
7 B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other
8 work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
9 including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to
10 be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
11 installation.
12
13 1.4 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Product Data: For the following:
16 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
17 2. Prefabricated building columns.
18 3. Metal nosings and treads.
19 4. Paint products.
20 5. Grout.
21
22 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
23 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer
24 recycled content and cost.
25 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
26 3. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
27
28 C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Provide Shop Drawings for the
29 following:
30 1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.
31 2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.
32 3. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
33 4. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
34 5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
35 6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
36 specified in other Sections.
37 7. Prefabricated building columns.
38 8. Shelf angles.
39 9. Metal ladders.
40 10. Ladder safety cages.
41 11. Structural-steel door frames.
42 12. Miscellaneous steel trim.
43 13. Metal bollards.
44 14. Metal downspout boots.
45 15. Loose steel lintels.
46
47 D. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Delegated Design: Design the following items, including comprehensive engineering
2 analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and / or
3 design criteria indicated.
4 1. Ladders: Provide ladders, capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses
5 within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
6
7 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
8
9 A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
10
11 B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished
12 comply with requirements.
13
14 C. Welding certificates.
15
16 D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop
17 primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
18
19 E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
20
21 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
24 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
25
26 B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
27 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
28 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
29 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
30
31 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
32
33 A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
34 with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
35
36
37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38
39 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
40
41 A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00
42 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
43
44 B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders shall withstand the
45 effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall
2 withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
3 under conditions indicated.
4 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
5 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..
6 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
7 4. Alternating Tread Device Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from
8 railing loads in addition to loads specified above.
9
10 D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
11 temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening
12 of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental
13 effects.
14 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
15
16 2.2 METALS
17
18 A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
19 indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
20 without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
21
22 A.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
23 preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
24
25 B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
26
27 C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666.
28
29 D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276,Type 304.
30
31 E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
32 ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
33
34 F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
35
36 G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
37
38 H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
39
40 I. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
41 unless otherwise indicated.
42
43 J. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
44
45 K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
46
47 L. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 M. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2
3 N. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.
4
5 O. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
6 bronze).
7
8 2.3 FASTENERS
9
10 A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
11 use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
12 Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
13 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
14 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
15 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
16 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
17
18 B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
19 ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
20
21 C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts,
22 ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
23
24 D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
25 ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
26 Group 1 (A1).
27
28 E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563
29 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
30 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
31 fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
32
33 F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
34 the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
35 installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M,
36 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
37
38 G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
39 indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
40 ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
41 galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
42
43 H. Post-Installed Anchors:
44 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
45 ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
46 indicated.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
2 Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts,
3 ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
4
5 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
6
7 A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
8 requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California
9 Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
10 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
11 Chambers."
12
13 B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting," and
14 Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting,".
15
16 C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated
17 metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
18
19 D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
20 compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
21
22 E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
23 ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
24
25 F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
26 grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended
27 by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
28
29 G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for
30 normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
31 3000 psi (20 MPa).
32
33 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
34
35 A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
36 units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
37 maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
38 coordinated installation.
39
40 B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
41 radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
42 rough areas on exposed surfaces.
43 C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
44 otherwise impairing work.
45
46 D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
2 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
3 corrosion resistance of base metals.
4 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
5 3. Remove welding flux immediately.
6 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
7 no roughness shows after finishing.
8
9 F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
10 fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-
11 head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
12 conspicuous.
13
14 G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
15 water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
16
17 H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
18 screws, and similar items.
19
20 I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
21 anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
22 loads.
23
24 J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
25 integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum
26 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm)
27 from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
28
29 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
30
31 A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
32 complete the Work.
33
34 B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
35 indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
36 adjacent construction.
37 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
38 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
39
40 C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
41 indicated.
42 1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
43 2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
44 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch
45 holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
46
47 D. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with
48 steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the
2 same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
3 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
4 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) baseplates with four 5/8-
5 inch (16-mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) top plates.
6
7 E. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
8
9 F. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
10
11 2.7 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
12
13 A. General: Provide prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel
14 members protected by concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel
15 shell. Fabricate connections to comply with details shown or as needed to suit type of
16 structure indicated.
17
18 B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building columns listed and labeled by a
19 testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings
20 indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119.
21 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
22
23 2.8 SHELF ANGLES
24
25 A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
26 framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not
27 more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
28 indicated.
29 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
30 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
31 approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint.
32
33 B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry
34 and concrete.
35
36 C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.
37
38 D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
39
40 E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-
41 in-place concrete.
42
43 2.9 METAL LADDERS
44
45 A. General:
46 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Steel Ladders:
2 1. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.
3 2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
4 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.
5 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
6 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-
7 oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung
8 filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
9 6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
10 metallically bonded to rung.
11 7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar
12 grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 3/4
13 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.
14 8. Support each ladder with welded or bolted steel brackets.
15 9. Galvanize and prime ladders, including brackets.
16 10. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
17
18 C. Aluminum Ladders:
19 1. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.
20 2. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2
21 inches (64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
22 3. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less
23 than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.
24 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners
25 or brackets and aluminum rivets.
26 5. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar
27 grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no
28 more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.
29 6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
30 with welded or bolted aluminum brackets.
31 7. Provide minimum 72-inch- (1830-mm-) high, hinged security door with padlock
32 hasp at foot of ladder to prevent unauthorized ladder use.
33
34 2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES
35
36 A. General:
37 1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or
38 with stainless-steel fasteners.
39 2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20
40 feet (6 m) o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48
41 inches (1200 mm) o.c. between primary hoops.
42 3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or
43 with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
44
45 B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:
46 1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch (6.4-by-100-mm) flat bar hoops.
47 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bar hoops.
48 3. Vertical Bars: 3/16-by-1-1/2-inch (4.8-by-38-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Galvanize and prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.
2 5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
3
4 C. Aluminum Ladder Safety Cages:
5 1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch (6.4-by-100-mm) flat bar hoops.
6 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bar hoops.
7 3. Vertical Bars: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop.
8
9 2.11 STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES
10
11 A. Fabricate structural-steel door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to
12 dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8-by-1-1/2-inch (16-by-38-mm) steel
13 channel stops, unless otherwise indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously
14 weld exposed joints. Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk machine screws,
15 uniformly spaced at not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. Reinforce frames and drill and
16 tap as necessary to accept finish hardware.
17 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into
18 adjoining concrete or masonry.
19
20 B. Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to
21 frames for anchoring frame to floor with expansion shields and bolts.
22
23 C. Galvanize and prime exterior steel frames.
24
25 D. Prime exterior steel frames with zinc-rich primer.
26
27 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
28
29 A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
30 shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
31 concealed field splices where possible.
32
33 B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
34 with other work.
35 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
36 masonry construction.
37
38 C. Galvanize and prime miscellaneous steel trim.
39
40 D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
41
42 2.13 METAL BOLLARDS
43
44 A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe, steel shapes, as indicated.
45 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate.
46 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts
47 for controls and holes for wire.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and
2 holes for wire.
3
4 B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete
5 slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts.
6 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for
7 plumb alignment of bollards.
8
9 C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel
10 plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and
11 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of bollard.
12
13 D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch
14 (6.4-mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less
15 than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4-inch (19-mm) steel machine
16 bolt.
17
18 E. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
19
20 2.14 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
21
22 A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
23 construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
24
25 B. Galvanize plates.
26
27 C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
28
29 2.15 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
30
31 A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
32 recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths
33 for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a
34 single unit where indicated.
35
36 B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear
37 span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
38
39 C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
40
41 D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
42
43 2.16 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
44
45 A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
46 from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
47 fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL
2
3 A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
4
5 B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
6 surrounding surface.
7
8 2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
9
10 A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
11 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
12 products.
13 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
14 adhesion.
15
16 B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
17 railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate
18 process.
19
20 C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
21 embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
22 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and
23 primers specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is
24 indicated.
25
26 D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
27 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." requirements indicated below:
28 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
29 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
30 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
31 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance
32 Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
33 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
34
35 E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
36 Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
37 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
38
39 2.19 ALUMINUM FINISHES
40
41 A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.
42
43 B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.
44
45
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 15 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
4
5 A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
6 metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
7 with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
8 lines and levels.
9
10 B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
11 are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
12 limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
13 galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
14
15 C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
16 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
17 corrosion resistance of base metals.
18 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
19 3. Remove welding flux immediately.
20 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
21 no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
22 adjacent surface.
23
24 D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
25 fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners
26 for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood
27 screws, and other connectors.
28
29 E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
30 concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
31
32 F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with
33 grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
34 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
35 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
36
37 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
38
39 A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
40 supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
41 Shop Drawings.
42
43 B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions and overhead doors securely to, and
44 rigidly brace from, building structure.
45
46 C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure
47 girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through
48 top plates of pipe columns.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 16 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on
2 concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"
3 Article.
4
5 D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout
6 column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
7 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
8 leveled.
9
10 3.3 INSTALLING PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
11
12 A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, "Specifications for
13 Structural Steel Buildings," and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire-
14 resistance rating indicated.
15
16 3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
17
18 A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days
19 before installing.
20 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
21
22 B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors, anchor bolts and
23 through bolts. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard unless otherwise
24 indicated.
25 1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches (100 mm) in concrete.
26
27 C. Anchor bollards in concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink
28 grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope
29 grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.
30
31 D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches
32 (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
33 consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
34
35 E. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and
36 align sleeves in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and
37 vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has
38 cured.
39
40 F. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch (19-mm) machine
41 bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner
42 furnishes padlocks.
43
44 G. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
45 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
46
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 50 00 - 17 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.5 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
2
3 A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
4 improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
5
6 B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
7 have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
8 but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink
9 grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
10 remain.
11
12 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
13
14 A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
15 abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
16 painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
17 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
18
19 B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
20 abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting." and
21 Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
22
23 C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
24 galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
28
29
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 51 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 05 51 00
2
3 METAL STAIRS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Steel pan type stairs and landings, with plates, angles, struts, fasteners and
11 welds for securing to building structure.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
16 1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.
17 2. ASTM A 185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, For Concrete Reinforcement.
18 3. ASTM A 283 - Carbon Steel Pates, Shapes, and Bars.
19 4. ASTM A 325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
20 5. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) on Iron and Steel Products.
21 6. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
22 7. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
23 Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
24 8. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M: Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
25 Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
26 Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
27
28 B. American Welding Society:
29 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
30 2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
31
32 C. FS FF-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices,
33 Anchoring, Masonry).
34
35 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
36
37 A. Design Requirements:
38 1. Fabricate stairs, landings and component connections to support live loads of minimum
39 100 lb./sq.ft. with concentrated load of 300 lbs. at most critical point of tread.
40 2. Deflection of stairs and landings not exceeding L/360 of span when underside is to be
41 finished with gypsum board and L/240 span when underside is not being finished.
42 3. Intermediate stringers are not permitted. Detailer to design stair pans to span to outside
43 stringers.
44
45 1.4 SUBMITTALS
46
47 A. Shop Drawings: Show in detail construction, gages, jointing, methods of installation,
48 fastening and supports location and sizes of welds, anchoring, hangers and all other pertinent
49 data and information. Submit plans and section of steel stairs, drawn to scale at not less than
50 1/4" per foot. Where conditions in three or more consecutive stories are exactly alike,
51 drawings may be broken and noted to include duplicate runs.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 51 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Quality Control Submittals:
3 1. Design Data: Submit stamped and sealed structural design calculations prepared by a
4 Professional Engineer that steel stair system complies with specified load requirements.
5 2. Certificates: Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification test for
6 welding process involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
7
8 C. Sustainable Design Submittals:
9 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer
10 recycled content and cost.
11 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
12 3. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
13
14 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
15
16 A. Qualifications:
17 1. Professional Engineer: Licensed to practice in state where project is located and is
18 experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
19 2. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 AWS
20 D1.3.
21
22
23 PART 2 PRODUCTS
24
25 2.1 MATERIALS
26
27 A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
28 preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
29
30 B. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36.
31
32 C. Plates: ASTM A 283, Grade C.
33
34 D. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type
35 B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.
36
37 E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial steel,
38 Type B, or structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), unless another grade is required by design
39 loads.
40
41 F. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High-strength type, ASTM A 325.
42
43 G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 and D1.3, type required for materials being welded.
44
45 H. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
46 requirements of the California Department of Health Services’ “Standard Practice for the
47 Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
48 Environmental Chambers.”
49
50 I. Shop Primers: Provide lead- and chromate-free primers that comply with those specified in
51 the following Sections:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 51 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting"
2 2. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
3
4 J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
5 steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying
6 with SSPC-Paint-20.
7
8 K. Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1; carbon steel, zinc plated.
9
10 L. Wire Mesh: 6 x 6 10/10 welded wire mesh, ASTM A 185.
11
12 M. Concrete Fill and Reinforcing Materials:
13 1. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 03 section
14 "Concrete Work" for normal weight, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day
15 compressive strength of 3,000 psi, and W/C ration of 0.65 maximum, unless higher
16 strengths indicated.
17 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated.
18
19 N. Stair Nosing: Comply with requirements of Section 05 55 00 - Stair Nosings.
20
21 2.2 FABRICATION
22
23 A. Fabricate to comply with NAAMM Metal Stair Manual, Commercial Class, complete with
24 necessary framing members, hangers, clips, brackets, supports, and fastening devices.
25
26 B. Fit and shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes, easily handled through building
27 openings. Accurately form and fit components and connections. Accurately form
28 components required for proper anchorage of stairs and landings to each other and to
29 building structure.
30
31 C. Grind exposed edges and welds smooth and flush. Make joints true and tight.
32
33 D. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to galvanizing or
34 prime painting.
35
36 E. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying priming material. Apply one coat of 2 mil thick
37 shop prime. Do not prime area to be field welded.
38
39 F. Stair Framing:
40 1. Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, tubes, or plates.
41 2. Provide closure for exposed ends of stringers.
42 3. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing
43 members.
44 4. Bolt or weld headers to stringers.
45 5. Bolt or weld framing members to stringers and headers.
46 6. Fabricate and join so that bolts do not appear on finished surface.
47
48 G. Metal Pan Units:
49 1. Form metal platform pans of 12 gage structural steel and treads of 14 gage steel sheets for
50 risers and treads.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 51 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Construct riser and subtread metal pans with steel angle support brackets welded to
2 stringers.
3 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
4 4. Rivet or weld metal pans to platform frames.
5 5. Weld subplatform metal pans to platform frames.
6 6. Reinforce treads and platforms with weld wire mesh, tack welded at perimeter and with
7 intermediate supports to retain position at midspan.
8
9 2.3 FINISHES:
10
11 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
12 recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
13
14 B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
15
16 C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize exterior metal stair components to comply with ASTM A
17 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and
18 iron products.
19 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
20 adhesion.
21 2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain
22 as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
23
24 D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
25 SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
26
27 E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of interior metal stair components, except those to
28 be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
29 "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for
30 shop painting.
31 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
32
33 F. Field Finish: Refer to Division 09 Sections.
34
35
36 PART 3 EXECUTION
37
38 3.1 ERECTION
39
40 A. Erect stairs square, level, plumb; aligned with adjacent construction and free from distortion
41 or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.
42
43 B. Erect platforms level with floor surfaces.
44
45 C. Provide necessary anchors, plates, angles and struts as required for connecting stairs to
46 structure.
47
48 D. Perform necessary cutting and altering for installation of work of other sections. Do not
49 perform any other additional cutting without review of Architect.
50
51 E. Use hangers, supports and connectors which will be concealed from view in final position
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 51 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 F. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding. Conceal bolts and
3 screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. Make
4 mechanically fastened joints flush hairline butted. Grind welds smooth and flush.
5
6 G. Reinforce treads and intermediate landing pans with welded wire mesh.
7
8 H. Fill pans with concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00.
9
10 I. Install metal stair nosing inserts provided in Section 05 55 00.
11
12 3.2 CLEANING
13
14 A. Clean welds and touch-up with same material used for shop priming.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 52 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 05 52 13
2
3 STEEL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Steel pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
15 1. ASTM A 47 - Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
16 2. ASTM A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
17 3. ASTM A 53 - Pipe Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
18 4. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) on Iron and Steel Products.
19 5. ASTM A 500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
20 Round and Shapes.
21 6. ASTM A 501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
22
23 B. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code
24
25 C. Steel Structures Painting Council: SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
26
27 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
28
29 A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install
30 handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding
31 the allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors,
32 and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective
33 components comprising handrails and railing systems.
34 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
35 a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
36 b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
37 c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
38 2. Infill of Guards:
39 a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
40 b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
41
42 B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
43 metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
44
45 C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from 120 deg F (67 deg C),
46 ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces change (range) in ambient temperature in
47 the design, fabrication, and installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening
48 up of joints, overstressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base
49 design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
50 nighttime sky heat loss.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 52 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 SUBMITTALS
2
3 A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of
4 fasteners, and accessories.
5
6 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
7 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
8 content and cost.
9 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
10 3. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
11
12 C. Samples: Submit 24" long samples of handrails; showing radius bends, elbows, tee, wall
13 bracket, escutcheon, and end stop when requested by Architect.
14
15 D. Quality Control Submittals:
16 1. Design Data: Submit stamped and sealed structural design calculations by Professional
17 Engineer that system complies with specified load requirements.
18 2. Certificates: Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification test for welding
19 process involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
20
21 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. Qualifications:
24 1. Professional Engineer: Licensed to practice in state where project is located and is
25 experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
26 2. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1
27 and AWS D1.3.
28
29
30 PART 2 PRODUCTS
31
32 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
33
34 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
35
36 2.2 MATERIALS
37
38 A.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
39 preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
40
41 A. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S at manufacturer's option, Grade A, Schedule 10.
42
43 B. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
44 miscellaneous fittings, inserts, and anchorage devices for interconnection of pipe and
45 attachment of railings and handrails to other construction.
46
47 C. For railing posts set in concrete, fabricate sleeves from steel, not less than 6 inches long and
48 with an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of post, with
49 steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve.
50
51 D. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 52 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 E. Splice Connectors: Steel concealed spigots. [welding collars.]
3
4 F. Brackets: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or gray iron castings, ASTM A 48, designed 1-1/2"
5 from inside edge of handrail to wall surface.
6 1. Acceptable Product: 81-382 by King Architectural Metals.
7
8 G. Shop Primers: Provide lead- and chromate-free primers that comply with those specified in
9 the following Sections:
10 1. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting"
11 2. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
12 3. Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."
13
14 H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
15 steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying
16 with SSPC-Paint-20.
17
18 I. Grout:
19 1. Non-shrink, nonmetallic.
20 2. Acceptable Product:
21 a. N-S Grout by Euclid Chemical Co.
22 b. Duragrout by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
23 c. No. 713 by Master Builders Inc.
24
25 2.3 FABRICATION
26
27 A. Rails and Posts: 1-1/4” diameter steel pipe; welded joints.
28
29 B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site.
30
31 C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured.
32
33 D. Fabricate units without fasteners on finish surface where possible. Provide exposed
34 mechanical fastenings with flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
35 consistent with design of component.
36
37 E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
38 components of same material and finish as fabrication.
39
40 F. Continuously seal joined pieces of continuous welds.
41
42 G. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joint butt
43 tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
44
45 H. Accurately form components to suit stairs and landings, to each other and to building
46 structure.
47
48 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL
49
50 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
51 recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 52 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Coat materials in contact with concrete, masonry, or other dissimilar surfaces with
3 bituminous paint.
4
5 C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
6 acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
7 variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
8 components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
9 assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
10
11 2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
12
13 A. Galvanized Railings:
14 1. Hot-dip galvanize all exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
15 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
16 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
17 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
18 adhesion.
19 5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
20 remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
21 6. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous
22 components.
23 7. For galvanized railings scheduled to be painted, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt,
24 oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
25
26 B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
27 SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
28
29 C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, fittings, brackets,
30 fasteners and other ferrous metal components unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
31 requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
32 Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to
33 be embedded in concrete or masonry.
34 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
35
36 D. Field Finish: Refer to Division 09 Sections.
37
38
39 PART 3 EXECUTION
40
41 3.1 EXAMINATION
42
43 A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
44
45 B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
46
47 3.2 PREPARATION
48
49 A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 52 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete, embedded in masonry, or placed in partitions
2 with setting templates, to appropriate Sections.
3
4 3.3 INSTALLATION
5
6 A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
7
8 B. Provide anchors, plates, and angles required for connecting railings to structure. Anchor
9 railing to structure.
10
11 C. Field weld anchors as required. Grind welds smooth and touch-up with primer.
12
13 D. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk
14 fastenings.
15
16 E. Handrail Brackets: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
17
18 F. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling and grouting in.
19
20 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
21
22 A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4" per story, non-cumulative.
23
24 B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4".
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 55 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 05 55 00
2
3 STAIR NOSINGS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Slip resistant abrasive stair nosings.
11
12 1.2 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature, specifications, anchor details, and installation
15 instructions.
16
17 B. Samples: Submit physical samples illustrating full range of colors available for abrasive
18 inserts; submit full size 6" long, finished product samples, showing selected color and
19 product.
20
21 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
22
23 A. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Store materials with provisions for air
24 circulation.
25
26
27 PART 2 PRODUCTS
28
29 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
30
31 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
32 1. American Safety Trend Co., Inc.
33 2. Armstrong Products, Inc.
34 3. Balco-Metalines.
35 4. Wooster Products.
36
37 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
38
39 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
40
41 A. Nosing:
42 1. Cast-in-place type nosing consisting of extruded aluminum base, 3" wide x 3/8" thick,
43 arrow type anchors, extruded 6063-T5 aluminum, length as required, clear anodized
44 finish.
45 2. Inserts: Homogeneous epoxy abrasive, color as selected by Architect.
46 3. Acceptable Products - Concrete Filled Steel Pan Stairs:
47 a. #9511 by American Safety Tread Inc.
48 b. #S25 by Armstrong Products, Inc.
49 c. #231BF by Wooster Products, Inc.
50
51 B. Protective Coating: 15 mils bituminous coating.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 55 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
4
5 3.1 INSTALLATION
6
7 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
8
9 B. Install items square, plumb and level, accurately fitted and free of defects.
10
11 C. Separate aluminum from concrete with protective coating to prevent electrolytic action.
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 06 10 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 06 10 00 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1.2 REFERENCES 15
B. National Forest Products Association: 16
17
C. PS20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology. 18
D. American Wood Preservers Association: 19
20
21
22
1.3 SUBMITTALS 23
E. Submit layout drawings indicating locations, spacings and lengths of floor framing. 24
F. Submit manufacturer’s data for: 25
26
27
G. Review of shop drawings by Architect will be for required loadings, general profiles, spacings, 28
details, and general compliance with Contract Documents only. Contractor shall be responsible 29
for material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions and coordination with other 30
trades. 31
H. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work 32
of this Section: 33
34
a. If available, provide a product specific Type III, third party certified, 35
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each product in which the product 36
manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. 37
18 September 2018 06 10 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
b. If available, provide a third party verified Corporate Sustainability Report (CSR) 1
for each product that covers at least 90 percent of the product contents. 2
c. If available, provide a published Health Product Declaration (HPD) for each 3
product documenting the role, amount, and health hazards for every ingredient of 4
the product. 5
6
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer 7
recycled content per unit of product. 8
b. Indicate material cost of product less labor included in project. 9
c. If recycled content is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of pre-consumer 10
and post-consumer recycled contents in the assembly by weight. 11
12
a. Indicate location of extraction, manufacture, and purchase of all products; indicate 13
distance between the points of extraction, manufacture, and purchase and the 14
project site. 15
b. Indicate the material cost less labor of all products extracted, manufactured, and 16
purchased within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 17
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 18
I. Cover wood products to protect against moisture. 19
J. Support material to prevent deformation and to allow for air circulation. 20
K. Exercise care to keep bending stresses to a minimum during handling. 21
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 22
1.5 MATERIALS 23
A. Lumber: 24
25
26
27
28
B. Metal connectors: 29
30
31
32
33
C. See Drawings for member sizes including joists, rafters, beams, headers and columns. 34
D. Plywood sheathing: shall be APA Exposure 1 C-D Douglas fir or inner-seal OSB Structural 35
Panels as manufactured by Georgia Pacific. Nominal thicknesses and span ratings as shown on 36
Drawings. 37
38
E. Fasteners 39
40
18 September 2018 06 10 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
F. Adhesives shall comply with American Plywood Association Specification AFG-01. 2
1.6 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION 3
G. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party certified 4
Type III Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) in accordance with ISO 14025 that 5
document the product’s environmental impacts associated with material extraction, energy use, 6
chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions. 7
H. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with third-party verified 8
corporate sustainability reports (CSRs) that document material supply chains and extraction 9
operations. 10
I. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with published Health 11
Product Declarations (HPDs) that document the chemical inventory of the product to at least 12
0.1%. 13
1.7 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS 14
J. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products with environmental impacts 15
below the industry average in the following categories: 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
K. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials with recycled content such 23
that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content 24
constitutes at least 25% of the total value of the materials in the project. 25
L. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, ensure that products are sourced from 26
manufacturers with third-party validated health, safety, and risk program. 27
M. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide products and materials that promote 28
good indoor environmental quality (EQ) and promote efficiencies in operational performance. 29
N. In coordination with Project sustainability goals, provide materials and products that are 30
sourced within 100 miles of the project site. 31
PART 3 - EXECUTION 32
1.8 EXAMINATION 33
A. Erector and manufacturer shall inspect field conditions and tolerances affecting installation and 34
coordinate any necessary corrections with Contractor. 35
1.9 FRAMING 36
18 September 2018 06 10 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
B. General: 1
2
3
4
5
C. Provide continuous full height double studs and headers at all wall openings. 6
D. Bearing: 7
8
9
10
E. Provide temporary lateral bracing as required for erection, to be removed after permanent 11
bracing systems are in place and connections completed. 12
1.10 BLOCKING AND BRIDGING 13
F. Bridging: 14
15
16
17
G. Install blocking as required to support finish items or accessories and to cut off concealed draft 18
openings between ceiling and floor areas. 19
1.11 PLYWOOD SHEATHING 20
H. Place plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports and continuously over at least two 21
supports, unless shown otherwise on Drawings: 22
I. Center joints accurately over supports. Provide H clips at midspan and provide adequate spacing 23
(1/8” minimum) between panels over supports to prevent buckling due to dimensional change 24
of panels 25
J. Provide solid blocking spaced no more than 24 inches on center when spacing of structural 26
supporting members exceeds 24 inches, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 27
K. Provide a continuous bead of construction adhesive on top of each floor joist prior to placing 28
and nailing plywood subfloor. 29
30
1.12 FASTENING 31
L. Nailing: 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
18 September 2018 06 10 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
M. Bolting: 1
2
3
4
5
N. Lag screws: pre-bore holes same diameter as root of threads, enlarging to shank diameter for 6
length of shank. 7
END OF SECTION 8
01 May 2018 06 10 53 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 06 10 53
2
3 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Light framing.
12 2. Wood blocking.
13 3. Fire Treated Plywood Flooring.
14 4. Rough hardware.
15 5. Fire-retardant and preservative treated wood.
16
17 1.2 REFERENCES
18
19 A. APA - Plywood Construction Guide
20
21 B. American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of
22 Building Materials.
23
24 C. American Wood Preservers Association:
25 1. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber, Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
26 2. AWPA C27 - Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
27
28 D. U.S. Product Standards:
29 1. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
30 2. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
31
32 E. NFPA - National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastening.
33
34 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
35
36 A. Structural Requirements:
37 1. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.
38 2. Preservative treated lumber and plywood shall comply with American Wood Preservers
39 Bureau, Quality Mark.
40 3. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories for treated lumber and plywood, and ASTM E
41 84, maximum flame spread of 25.
42
43 1.4 SUBMITTALS
44
45 A. Preservative Treated Certification:
46 1. Certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process
47 used, net amount of preservative retained and compliance with applicable standards.
48 2. For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated
49 materials was reduced to 25 percent maximum prior to shipment to Project site.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 10 53 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
2 1. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
3 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
4 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
5 2. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
6 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with
7 requirements for low-emitting materials.
8 4. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for adhesives.
9 5. Health Product Declaration (HPD) for adhesives.
10
11 C. Fire-Retardant Treated-Certification: Certification by treating plant stating that treated
12 materials comply with specified standard, governing ordinances and that treatment will not
13 bleed through finish paint coats.
14
15 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
16
17 A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather.
18
19 B. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building.
20
21 C. Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and
22 erection.
23
24 D. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks.
25
26 E. Protect installed carpentry work from damage by work of other trades until acceptance of
27 work.
28
29 1.6 SEQUENCING
30
31 A. Time delivery and installation of work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is
32 dependent on or affected by work of this section, and to comply with protection and storage
33 requirements.
34
35 B. Correlate locations of furring, nailers, blocking and similar supports so that attached work
36 will comply with design requirements.
37
38 C. Coordinate location of required blocking for base and wall cabinets with approved millwork
39 shop drawings.
40
41
42 PART 2 PRODUCTS
43
44 2.1 MATERIALS
45
46 A. Lumber:
47 1. Grading Rules: PS 20.
48 2. Dimensions: Lumber dimensions are nominal; actual dimensions conform to industry
49 standards established by American Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing
50 agencies.
51 3. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing; kiln dry to
52 15 percent moisture content after wood treatment except wood in contact with ground.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 10 53 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S).
2 5. Species: No. 2 grade Southern Yellow Pine or equivalent West Coast Douglas Fir.
3
4 B. Plywood: Comply with PS-1 "US Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
5 Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS-1
6 provisions, with APA PRP-108.
7 1. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-
8 retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D Plugged, Exposure 1,
9 in thickness indicated but not less than 15/32 inch; made with adhesive containing no
10 urea formaldehyde.
11 2. Plywood Flooring – PLY-1: Fire treated, refer to finish schedule; made with adhesive
12 containing no urea formaldehyde.
13
14 C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Engineered wood consisting of wood fibers from
15 softwood combined with wax and resin binder containing no urea formaldehyde; applied
16 high temperature and pressure to form panels. 600-800 kg/m2.
17
18 D. Fire Retardant Treatment:
19 1. Lumber: AWPA C20.
20 2. Plywood: AWPA C27.
21 3. Provide appropriate treatment for intended use that will not corrode metal fasteners or
22 steel studs.
23 4. If used in contact with roof, provide treatment that will not deteriorate when exposed to
24 temperatures of 160 degrees or higher.
25 5. If used in contact with concrete at roof, provide flexible flashing sheet separator sheet to
26 prevent wood from contacting concrete.
27
28 E. Preservative Treated Wood:
29 1. Above Ground: AWPB LP-2.
30 2. Ground Contact: AWPB LP-22.
31 3. Use treatment which is noncorrosive to metal.
32 4. Use only stainless steel fasteners for connecting or attaching preservative treated wood.
33
34 F. Fasteners:
35 1. Bolts: FS FF-B-575 or FF-B-584.
36 2. Nuts: FS FF-N-836.
37 3. Expansion Shields, Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF-B-561C.
38 4. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588.
39 5. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111.
40 6. Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
41 7. Metal Nailing Discs: Flat caps, minimum 1" diameter; 30 gage minimum sheet metal;
42 formed to prevent dishing; bell or cup shapes not acceptable.
43
44 G. Adhesives for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498
45 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
46 1.Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
47
48 H. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
49 rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
50 produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm).
51 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 10 53 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
2 b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered
3 Flashing.
4 c. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
5
6 I. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
7 substrate.
8
9
10 PART 3 EXECUTION
11
12 3.1 PREPARATION
13
14 A. Climatize materials according to material manufacturer's recommendations.
15
16 3.2 INSTALLATION
17
18 A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work and units which are
19 too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
20
21 B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true, and
22 accurately cut and fitted. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible
23 lengths.
24
25 C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required by
26 recognized standards. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where
27 opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections
28 between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. Pre-drill as necessary.
29 Comply with APA E30a requirements for plywood. Install fasteners at spacings
30 recommended by NFPA National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its
31 Fastening, for lumber and APA Form E30a.
32
33 D. Wood Grounds, Nailers, and Blocking:
34 1. Provide where required for screeding or attachment of other work.
35 2. Form to shapes cut as necessary for true line and level of work to be attached.
36 3. Coordinate location with other work involved.
37 4. Attach to substrate to support applied loading.
38 5. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces and built into masonry work.
39 6. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
40 7. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less
41 than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of
42 material involved.
43 8. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
44
45 E. Apply two coats of same preservative used in original treatment to cut surfaces of treated
46 wood.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 10 53 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.3 CLEANUP
2
3 A. Remove stain and soil that would show through finish or interfere with painting. Repair or
4 replace work damaged after installation.
5
6 3.4 SCHEDULE
7
8 A. Wood Blocking:
9 1. In cavities of framed walls for support of washroom accessories, handrails, millwork,
10 countertops, cabinets, shelves and miscellaneous wall mounted fixtures.
11 a. All upper cabinet and millwork units to receive a minimum of 2 rows of 2x6 blocking.
12 2. Roof blocking and curbs[, sleepers, and cants].
13 3. Miscellaneous blocking as indicated on Drawings.
14
15 B. Plywood: Use exterior grade plywood where edge of surface is permanently exposed to
16 weather, in contact with roofing, and where indicated.
17
18 C. Fire-Retardant Wood:
19 1. All interior rough carpentry items including blocking in walls, flooring, at and around
20 door frames and jambs.
21 2. All blocking and curbs used in conjunction with roof construction.
22
23 D. Preservative Treated Wood: Provide pressure-treated wood for framing, blocking, furring, or
24 nailing strips built into or in contact with exterior masonry walls or concrete.
25
26 E. Rough Hardware: Bolts, nuts, washers, nails, screws, anchors, powder actuated anchorage
27 devices, toggle type fasteners, and expansion anchorage devices.
28
29
30 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 16 63 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 06 16 63
2
3 MOISTURE RESISTANT SHEATHING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Gypsum sheathing on steel studs in exterior walls (behind exterior finish).
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
15 1. ASTM B 117 – Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
16 2. ASTM C 954 - Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from
17 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in thickness.
18 3. ASTM C 1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
19 4. ASTM C 1177 – Specifications for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
20 5. ASTM C 1396 – Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board.
21 6. ASTM D 3273 – Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
22 Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
23 7. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
24 8. ASTM E 119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
25 9. ASTM F 1667 – Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.
26
27 B. Gypsum Association (GA):
28 1. GA-253 – Application of Gypsum Sheathing
29 2. GA-254 - Fire Resistant Gypsum Sheathing.
30 3. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual, Eleventh Edition.
31 4. GA-801 – Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products
32
33 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
34
35 A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Provide fire resistance rated assemblies identical to those indicated
36 by reference to design designation in UL Fire Resistance Directory, GA 600, or in listing of
37 other testing and inspection agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
38
39 1.4 SUBMITTALS
40
41 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
42
43 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
44 1. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.
45 2. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
46 percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
47 statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
48 3. Product Data: For products extracted, manufactured and fabricated within 500-mile
49 radius of project site.
50 4.Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
51 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants and installation adhesives, indicating compliance
52 with requirements for low-emitting materials.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 16 63 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
2 7. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
3
4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5
6 A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where gypsum sheathing is part of fire-resistance rated assemblies,
7 provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire
8 resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
9 organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10
11 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
12
13 A. Deliver gypsum sheathing board and related materials in original packages bearing brand
14 name and identification of manufacturer.
15
16 B. Store gypsum sheathing board to protect against damage from weather, direction sunlight,
17 surface contamination, corrosion, and construction traffic. Stack gypsum sheathing boards
18 flat on leveled supports off ground under protective covering.
19
20 C. Handle gypsum sheathing board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
21
22 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
23
24 A. Sequence installation of gypsum sheathing board with exterior cladding so that sheathing
25 board is not exposed to weather for longer than one month. If sheathing board will be
26 exposed to the weather for longer than one month, protect cutouts, corners, and joints in
27 sheathing by filling with flexible sealant at time sheathing is applied, but do not leave
28 exposed for more than four months.
29
30
31 PART 2 PRODUCTS
32
33 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
34
35 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
36
37 2.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING MATERIALS
38
39 A. General: Provide one of the following materials at Contractor's option.
40
41 B. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content with that
42 postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes
43 a minimum of 25 percent by weight.
44
45 C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing:
46 1. ASTM C 1177, non-combustible gypsum core incorporating water resistant material,
47 surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats, unsurfaced square edges;
48 5/8" thick x 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long.
49 2. Acceptable Products:
50 a. M-Glass Exterior Sheathing by American Gypsum Company.
51 b. Dens-Glass Exterior Sheathing by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
52 c. EXP Sheathing by National Gypsum Company.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 16 63 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. GlasRoc by CertainTeed Corporation.
2 e. Securock by USG Corporation.
3
4 D. Fire-Resistive Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing:
5 1. ASTM C 1177, Type X fire resistant, non-combustible gypsum core incorporating water
6 resistant material, surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats, unsurfaced
7 square edges; 5/8" thick x 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long.
8 2. Acceptable Products:
9 a. M-Glass Exterior Sheathing by American Gypsum Company.
10 b. Dens-Glass Exterior Sheathing by Georgia Pacific Corporation.
11 c. EXP Fire-Shield Sheathing by National Gypsum Company.
12 d. GlasRoc by CertainTeed Corporation.
13 e. Securock by USG Corporation.
14
15 E. Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers: Refer to Section 07 27 26.
16
17 2.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
18
19 A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM
20 C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and
21 sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed
22 fasteners.
23 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by
24 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type
25 recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant
26 in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service
27 use.
28
29 2.4 FASTENERS
30
31 A. For steel framing:
32 1. Screws: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for
33 thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other
34 corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours
35 according to ASTM B 117.
36 a. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply
37 with ASTM C 1002.
38 b. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach sheathing
39 to comply with ASTM C 954.
40
41 2.5 ACCESSORIES
42
43 A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
44 rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
45 produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm).
46 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
47 a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
48 b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered
49 Flashing.
50 c. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 16 63 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
2 substrate.
3
4
5 PART 3 EXECUTION
6
7 3.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
8
9 A. Comply with GA-253, GA-254 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
10 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
11 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
12 structural elements.
13 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials
14 that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
15
16 B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
17 facing.
18
19 C. Install board edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of
20 adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.
21 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of
22 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
23 2. Provide blocking for support wherever end joints do not bear against stud framing.
24
25 D. Do not bridge building expansion or deflection joints with gypsum sheathing. Cut and space
26 edges to match spacing of structural support elements. Cover joint with flexible flashing in
27 order to maintain continuity of sheathing plane.
28
29 E. Seal sheathing joints as follows:
30 1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and
31 trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to
32 exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other
33 penetrations and openings. Seal all miscellaneous wall penetrations including abandoned
34 holes.
35
36
37 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 20 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 06 20 23
2
3 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
4
5
6 PART 1 – GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Field fabricated and field finished carpentry items including base,
11 miscellaneous standing and running trim and required attachment accessories.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American National Standards Institute
16 1. ANSI A208.1-2009: Particleboard
17 2. ANSI A208.2-2009: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications
18
19 B. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of
20 Canada /Woodwork Institute
21 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards.
22
23 C. ASTM International
24 1. ASTM D 3498: Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber
25 Framing for Floor Systems
26 2. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface-Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
27
28 D. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
29 1. HPVA HP-1-2009: American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
30
31 E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
32 1. NEMA LD 3-2005: High Pressure Decorative Laminates (ANSI) (Available in PDF at
33 www.nema.org)
34
35 F. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
36 1. DOC PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood
37 2. DOC PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard
38
39 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
40
41 A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
42 Standards" (AWS) for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction,
43 finishes, installation, and other requirements.
44
45 1.4 SUBMITTALS
46
47 A. Shop Drawings:
48 1. Show sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
49 2. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of fastening, bracing,
50 jointing and connecting to work of other trades.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 20 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
2 1. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
3 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
4 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
5 2. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
6 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with
7 requirements for low-emitting materials.
8 4. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
9 5. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
10
11 C. Samples: Submit duplicate 12" long samples for each type wood species to be stained and
12 finish; stepped finished as one side and one edge.
13
14 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
15
16 A. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive work of this
17 Section. Protect materials from weather while in transit.
18
19 B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60-degree F and
20 maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
21
22
23 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
24
25 2.1 LUMBER PRODUCTS
26
27 A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20; graded in accordance with requirements of AWS; maximum
28 moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or White Pine.
29
30 B. Solid Lumber Stock – WB-1:
31 1. Hardwood and Softwood Solid Stock for Base, Standing and Running Trim: AWS Section
32 3 Lumber grading rules; surfaced four sides (SFS).
33 2. Hardwood for Paint Finish: Custom Grade, Poplar; refer to finish schedule.
34 3. Softwood for Concealed Structures and Supports: Custom Grade, Western Pine.
35
36 C. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
37 quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
38 indicated.
39 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
40 formaldehyde.
41 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 medium-density overlay.
42 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
43 containing no urea formaldehyde.
44
45 D. Hardwood Edge Banding: 1/4" thick, Custom Grade; match poplar for opaque finish faces.
46
47 E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails, and Screws: Size and type to suit application, paint
48 finish in concealed locations and stain in exposed locations.
49
50 F. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 20 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 G. Anchors: Nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts as required for
2 corrosion resistance.
3
4 2.2 FABRICATION
5
6 A. Comply with AWS "Custom Grade Work" provision for grading and workmanship.
7
8 B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry interior millwork to average not more than 7 percent to 10
9 percent.
10
11 C. Machine and sand woodwork to comply with requirements of AWS.
12
13 D. Rout or groove back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except
14 plywood or veneered members.
15
16 E. Base and Trim: Fabricate with no field splices in runs where single length is available; 12'-0"
17 minimum.
18
19 2.3 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
20
21 A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
22
23 B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site
24 applied finishes.
25
26 C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces
27 and of types recommended for applied finishes.
28
29 D. Seal, stain, and varnish concealed and semi-concealed surfaces, brush applied only.
30
31 E. Prime surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
32
33 F. Verify location of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
34
35 G. Field finish in accordance with Section 09 91 23.
36
37
38 PART 3 – EXECUTION
39
40 3.1 PREPARATION
41
42 A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to
43 installing.
44
45 B. Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain
46 measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details for accurate fit.
47
48 3.2 INSTALLATION
49
50 A. Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid, plumb, and square.
51
52 B. Shim as required using concealed shims.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 20 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Cut to fit to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for
3 accurate fit. Where necessary to fit at site, provide ample allowance for cutting and fitting.
4
5 D. Install trim and base single in unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than maximum
6 length of lumber available.
7
8 E. Stagger joints in adjacent members.
9
10 F. Miter bases at returns and miter at corners.
11
12 G. Attach woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building
13 movements, blind nail where possible. Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or
14 directly attached to substrate.
15
16 H. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed nails for filling.
17
18 I. Clean woodwork and fill nail holes. Where woodwork is to receive transparent finish, use
19 matching wood filler.
20
21 J. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting this work are properly placed, complete, and
22 have been examined by Architect prior to commencement of installation.
23
24 K. Where exposed screw heads are required, counterbore holes and install wood plugs of species
25 and grain to match trim. Install plugs with glue, and flush with surface.
26
27 3.3 CLEANING
28
29 A. Repair and replace defective work.
30
31 B. Clean woodwork, touch-up finish and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish.
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 06 40 23
2
3 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
4
5
6 PART 1 – GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Shop or mill fabricated cabinets, trim, or moldings, other than field
11 fabricated work, complete with required hardware and attachment accessories.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American National Standards Institute
16 1. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
17 2. ANSI A208.2: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications
18
19 B. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of
20 Canada/Woodwork Institute
21 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS).
22
23 C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
24 1. BHMA A156.9: Cabinet Hardware
25 2. BHMA A156.11: Cabinet Locks
26 3. BHMA A156.16: Auxiliary Hardware
27 4. BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes
28
29 D. California Department of Health Services
30 1. Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
31 Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
32
33 E. Code of Federal Regulations
34 1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-2005: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
35 for Architectural Coatings.
36
37 F. Forest Stewardship Council
38 1. FSC STD-01-001: FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.
39 2. FSC STD-40-004: FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification.
40
41 G. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
42 1. HPVA HP-1: American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
43
44 H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
45 1. NEMA LD 3: High Pressure Decorative Laminates
46
47 I. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
48 1. DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Structural Plywood
49
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 DEFINITIONS
2
3 A. Exposed Surfaces:
4 1. Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed.
5 2. Bottoms of cases more than 4'-0" above finish floor.
6 3. Back and edges of hinged doors exposed when opened.
7
8 B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces:
9 1. Surfaces that become visible when drawers and doors are open.
10 2. Tops of cases 6'-0" or more above finish floor.
11
12 C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation.
13
14 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
15
16 A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
17 Standards" (AWS) for grades of architectural wood cabinets and paneling indicated for
18 construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
19 1. The Contract Documents may contain selections chosen from options in the quality
20 standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with
21 those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
22
23 1.5 SUBMITTALS
24
25 A. Sustainable Design Submittals:
26 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
27 content and cost.
28 2. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
29 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
30 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
31 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
32 low-emitting materials.
33 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
34 requirements for low-emitting materials.
35 5. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
36 6. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
37
38 B. Shop Drawings:
39 1. Draw profiles, sections, and views of items specifically manufactured for this work, at
40 scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity.
41 2. Show sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
42 3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of fastening, bracing,
43 jointing and connecting to work of other trades.
44
45 C. Samples:
46 1. Shop prepare one typical cabinet front required for job, complete with hardware and
47 applied finishes.
48 2. Sample units will be examined to ascertain degree of quality and conformity to AWS
49 standards specified in this Section.
50 3. Samples may be used as part of work when conforming to requirements indicated and
51 with permission of Architect.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Solid sample finished on one side and one edge.
2 5. 12" x 12" hardwood veneer with one-half finished.
3 6. 12" x 12" plastic laminate of each type specified.
4
5 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
6
7 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
8 similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
9 service performance.
10
11 B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
12
13 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
14 demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
15 1. Build mockups of typical architectural wood cabinets as shown on Drawings, including
16 but not limited to the following:
17 a. Hall railing assembly.
18 b. Hall wall panel and jointing.
19 c. Lobby acoustical wall assembly.
20 d. Lobby wood ceiling panel assembly.
21 e. Multi-purpose ceiling panel assembly.
22 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
23 completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
24
25 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
26
27 A. Do not deliver casework items until site conditions are adequate to receive work. Protect
28 materials from weather while in transit.
29
30 B. Store indoors in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and
31 maximum relative humidity of 25 percent to 55 percent.
32
33 C. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage.
34
35 D. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
36
37 E. Protect casework as to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
38
39 F. Spaces to receive casework shall have been conditioned for minimum of 48 hours to Owner
40 design temperature and humidity ranges, prior to commencing installation.
41
42 1.8 WARRANTY
43
44 A. Furnish warranty with provisions for making good or replacing cabinetwork and other
45 casework items which exhibit defects in material and workmanship within a period of two
46 years.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4
5 A. Acceptable Fabricators:
6 1. Brochstein's Inc.
7 2. Central Custom Millworks, Inc.
8 3. Paramount Millwork Corp.
9 4. Patella Industries Inc.
10 5. Stevens Industries
11 6. Woodhaus, Inc.
12
13 B. Acceptable Plastic Laminate Manufacturers:
14 1. Abet Laminati, Inc.
15 2. ArpaUSA
16 3. Formica Corporation.
17 4. Lamin-Art, Inc.
18 5. Panolam Industries International, Inc.
19 6. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
20
21 C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
22
23 2.2 TRANSPARENT FINISH WOODWORK
24
25 A. Grade: Custom.
26
27 B. Wood for Exposed Surfaces:
28 1. Species: Select White oak.
29 2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.
30 3. Grain Direction: As indicated.
31 4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
32 5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.
33
34 C. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
35 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed
36 surfaces, stained to match.
37 2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species
38 indicated for exposed surfaces.
39 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
40
41 D. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting
42 screws from interior of body.
43
44 E. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
45 fasteners or glued dovetail joints.
46
47 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
48
49 A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
50 standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
51 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches
52 (75 mm) wide.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
2
3 B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
4 quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
5 indicated.
6 1.Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-
7 half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 30 percent.
8 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no
9 urea formaldehyde.
10 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
11 formaldehyde.
12 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
13 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
14 containing no urea formaldehyde.
15 6. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
16 thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
17 requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
18
19 C. High Pressure Decorative (Plastic) Laminate:
20 1. NEMA LD 3, 0.050" ± 0.005", general purpose grade.
21 2. Pattern and Color: Refer to Finish Schedule.
22
23 D. Plastic Laminate Backing: High pressure paper base laminate without decorative finish,
24 minimum 0.028" thick.
25
26 E.Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
27 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
28 Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
29
30 2.4 HARDWARE
31
32 A. Cabinet Standards and Brackets:
33 1. Cabinet – Mortise-Mount.
34 a. Pilaster Standards: #255.
35 b. Shelf Supports: #256.
36 c. Finish: Painted Custom Color to match cabinet interior color.
37 d. Capacity: 500 lbs. per shelf.
38 e. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt.
39
40 B. Work Surface Support Bracket:
41 1. Stamped metal.
42 2. 24-1/4” x 18-1/4”; 400 lb. capacity per pair; maximum depth 26”
43 3. Finish: Crinkle Powder Coat; color as selected by Architect.
44 4. Acceptable Product: SWS4 by Mockett.com
45
46 C. Metal Shelf Supports:
47 1. Wall – Regular Duty:
48 a. Standards: #80.
49 b. Brackets: #180-12.
50 c. Finish: Satin Chrome.
51 d. Capacity: 320 lbs. per pair.
52 e. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Cabinet Hinges:
3 1. Fully concealed adjustable overlay cabinet hinges; self-latching, 165 degree opening, with
4 mounting plates and accessories as required.
5 2. Acceptable Products:
6 a. Wide Angle – Salice by Hafele.
7 b. No. 3903 by Grass America, Inc.
8
9 E. Cabinet Hinges:
10 1. Fully concealed adjustable overlay cabinet hinges; self-latching, 90 degree opening for
11 cabinet door adjacent to walls or limited 90 degree opening space.
12 2. Acceptable Products:
13 a. 200 Series – Salice by Hafele.
14 b. No. 3606 by Grass America Inc.
15
16 F. Drawer and Cabinet Pulls:
17 1. 3" aluminum pull.
18 2. Acceptable Product: No. 4483-1/2 by Stanley.
19
20 G. Drawer Slides:
21 1. Full extension slides, 75 lb. capacity.
22 2. Acceptable Product: KV1300 by Knape & Vogt.
23
24 H. Drawer Slide:
25 1. Full extension slides for box, card file and utility drawers.
26 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7432/7434 by Accuride.
27
28 I. Drawer Slide:
29 1. Full extension slides for file drawers.
30 2. Acceptable Product: No. C4034 by Accuride.
31
32 J. Door Catch: MSUPEC12 Duo/Magna Latch by Selby.
33
34 K. Touch Latch:
35 1. Magnetic pressure catch.
36 2. Acceptable Product: No. 245.61.322 by Hafele.
37
38 L. Drawer and Door Lock: No. 986 by Knape and Vogt.
39
40 M. Bar Grille:
41 1. 8" wide by 3'- 10" long extruded solid bronze bar grille.
42 2. Acceptable Product: EP111-3/4 SE10 Flange by Register & Grille Manufacturing
43 Company, Inc.
44
45 N. Coat Hooks:
46 1. Finish: Burnish cast aluminum double hook.
47 2. Acceptable Product: No. 580 by Ives (if double hook).
48
49 O. Hanging Rods:
50 1. Closet Shelf and Rod Supports:
51 a. Aluminum; painted white
52 b. 11”L x 10” H;
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. 1195 by Knape & Vogt
2 2. Center Support:
3 a. 24” Length; 1-1/16” od tubing; anochrome finish
4 b. 760 by Knape and Vogt
5 3. Tubing: Stainless Steel; 1-1/16” diameter; 660 by Knape & Vogt
6
7 2.5 FABRICATION
8
9 A. General:
10 1. Comply with AWS "Custom Grade Work".
11 2. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry interior casework to average not more than seven percent to
12 ten percent.
13 3. Before proceeding with casework required to be fitted to other construction, obtain
14 measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
15 4. Machine and sand casework to comply with requirements of AWS.
16 5. Fabricate casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.
17 6. Assemble in mill in as large units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting.
18 7. Miter joints where required by standard to be shop-mitered by joining, splining and gluing
19 to, complying with requirements for specified grade.
20
21 B. Allow for trimming and fitting of architectural woodwork and trim as may be required.
22
23 C. Cabinetwork:
24 1. When necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting.
25 2. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
26 3. Fit shelves, doors and exposed edges with hardwood edging.
27 4. Use full length pieces of edging only.
28 5. Cabinetwork Doors: 3/4" thick minimum.
29 6. Drawer Bottoms: 1/2" thick minimum.
30 7. Make corners and joints hairline tight; slightly bevel arises.
31 8. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when unavoidable; arrange neatly.
32 9. Shop assemble cabinetwork items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled to ensure
33 passage through building opening.
34
35 D. Plastic Laminate Countertops:
36 1. Apply laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes; cap
37 exposed edges with plastic laminate.
38 2. Form corners with hairline joints.
39 3. Mechanically fasten splash backs and aprons to counter tops with concealed steel brackets
40 at 16" on center maximum.
41 4. Face edge and backing laminates to be mill applied with heat activated glue using presses;
42 contact adhesive shall not be permitted.
43 5. Shop assemble casework items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure
44 passage through building openings.
45
46 2.6 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
47
48 A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
49
50 B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site
51 applied finishes.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces
2 and types recommended for applied finishes.
3
4 D. Seal, stain and varnish concealed and semi-concealed surfaces brush applied only. Seal
5 internal surfaces of cabinets with two coats of shellac, brush applied only.
6
7 E. Provide cutouts for inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings.
8
9 F. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
10
11 2.7 SHOP FINISHING
12
13 A. Factory Finish – Transparent:
14 1. Grade: AWS Custom.
15 2. Finish: AWS System #7 catalyzed vinyl or AWS System #11 catalyzed polyurethane.
16 3. Staining: As selected by Architect.
17 4. Effect: Open grain finish.
18 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
19
20
21 PART 3 – EXECUTION
22
23 3.1 EXAMINATION
24
25 A. Examine substrates supporting structure and conditions under which casework is to be
26 installed.
27
28 B. Verify dimensions with accurate field measurement before fabrication wherever work adjoins
29 other work that precedes it in construction.
30
31 C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
32 average prevailing humidity conditions are within recommended tolerances.
33
34 3.2 PREPARATION
35
36 A. Acclimatize casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to
37 installing.
38
39 B. Back prime casework on surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of primer paint for
40 items to be painted and with two coats of clear varnish for items to receive a transparent
41 finish.
42
43 C. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of back prime coat before
44 installation of casework.
45
46 3.3 INSTALLATION
47
48 A. Set and secure cabinetwork items in place rigid, plumb and square. Shim as required with
49 concealed shims.
50
51 B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments for wall mounted components.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 40 23 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Permanently fix cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
2
3 D. Counter-sink semi-concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components and conceal
4 with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood.
5
6 E. Place flush with surrounding surfaces.
7
8 F. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other building materials leaving gaps of 1/32"
9 maximum.
10
11 G. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
12
13 H. Install and adjust cabinet hardware to ensure smooth and correct operation.
14
15 3.4 CLEANING
16
17 A. Repair and replace defective work.
18
19 B. Clean shop-finished casework, touch-up finish and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish.
20
21
22 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 06 41 16
2
3 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Shop or mill fabricated plastic laminate faced wood cabinets and countertops.
12 2. Hardware and attachment accessories.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American National Standards Institute
17 1. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
18 2. ANSI A208.2: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications
19
20 B. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of
21 Canada/Woodwork Institute
22 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS).
23
24 C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
25 1. BHMA A156.9: Cabinet Hardware
26 2. BHMA A156.11: Cabinet Locks
27 3. BHMA A156.16: Auxiliary Hardware
28 4. BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes
29
30 D. California Department of Health Services
31 1. Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
32 Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
33
34 E. Code of Federal Regulations
35 1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-2005: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
36 for Architectural Coatings
37
38 F. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
39 1. HPVA HP-1: American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
40
41 G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
42 2. NEMA LD 3: High Pressure Decorative Laminates
43
44 H. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
45 1. DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Structural Plywood
46
47 1.3 DEFINITIONS
48
49 A. Exposed Surfaces:
50 1. Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Bottoms of cases more than 4'-0" above finish floor.
2 3. Back and edges of hinged doors exposed when opened.
3
4 B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces:
5 1. Surfaces that becomes visible when drawers and doors are open.
6 2. Tops of cases 6'-0" or more above finish floor.
7
8 C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation.
9
10 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
11
12 A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
13 Standards" (AWS) for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction,
14 finishes, installation, and other requirements.
15 1. The Contract Documents may contain selections chosen from options in the quality
16 standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with
17 those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
18
19 B. Design Requirements:
20 1. Design requirements shown by the drawings are intended to show design intent, establish
21 basic dimensions of units, profiles, and sight lines of members.
22 2. Within these limitations this Contractor is responsible for the design of the entire cabinet
23 system, including its attachment to the structure and shall make whatever modifications
24 and additions to the details as may be required to fulfill the performance requirements.
25
26 C. Performance Requirements: Provide millwork in accordance with Architectural Woodwork
27 Standards (AWS), Custom Grade.
28 1. Casework: AWS Section 10.
29 2. Countertops: AWS Section 11.
30 3. Miscellaneous Work: AWS Section 6.
31
32 1.5 SUBMITTALS
33
34 A. Sustainable Design Submittals:
35 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
36 content and cost.
37 2.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
38 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
39 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
40 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
41 low-emitting materials.
42 4.Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
43 requirements for low-emitting materials.
44
45 B. Shop Drawings:
46 1. Draw profiles, sections, and views of items specifically manufactured for this work, at
47 scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity.
48 2. Show sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of fastening, bracing,
2 jointing and connecting to work of other trades.
3 4. Include size and location of all wood blocking required for anchoring base and wall
4 cabinets.
5
6 C. Samples:
7 1. Shop prepare one typical cabinet front required for job, complete with hardware and
8 applied finishes.
9 2. Sample units will be examined to ascertain degree of quality and conformity to AWS
10 standards specified in this Section.
11 3. Samples may be used as part of work when conforming to requirements indicated and
12 with permission of Architect.
13 4. Solid sample finished on one side and one edge.
14 5. 12" x 12" plastic laminate of each type specified.
15
16 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
17
18 A. AWS Catalog: Catalog numbers indicated on the drawings and in the specifications are for
19 the convenience of identifying specific cabinet types. Unless modified by notation on the
20 drawings or otherwise specified, current description for indicated number, together with
21 indicated or specified options or accessories, constitutes requirements for each cabinet.
22 1. Catalog numbers and specific requirements indicated on the drawings and in the
23 specification are given for the purpose of establishing standard design and quality of
24 materials, construction, and workmanship.
25 2. Catalog numbers noted on the drawings are based upon AWS, Appendix A.
26
27 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28
29 A. Do not deliver millwork items until wet trades, including concrete plaster, tile and painting
30 are completed in same area.
31
32 B. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the
33 specified environmental conditions.
34
35 C. Protect cabinets during delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
36 deterioration.
37
38 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
39
40 A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install cabinets until HVAC system has been balanced to
41 anticipated temperature and humidity expected in the finished areas where these materials
42 will be finally located. HVAC system shall remain in continuous operation until final
43 acceptance by Owner.
44
45 B. Field Measurements:
46 1. Verify dimensions with accurate field measurement before fabrications wherever work
47 adjoins other work that precede it in construction.
48 2. Allow for trimming and fitting of cabinet work and trim as may be required.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Do not erect or install cabinet work in areas which still require work by other trades
2 which might cause damage or disfigure work.
3
4 1.9 COORDINATION
5
6 A. Coordinate work with other trades affected by installation.
7
8 1.10 WARRANTY
9
10 A. Furnish warranty with provisions for making good or replacing, at no cost to Owner,
11 cabinetwork and other millwork items which exhibit defects in material and workmanship
12 within a period of two years.
13
14
15 PART 2 PRODUCTS
16
17 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
18
19 A. Acceptable Plastic Laminate Manufacturers:
20 1. Abet Laminati, Inc.
21 2. ArpaUSA
22 3. Formica Corporation.
23 4. Lamin-Art, Inc.
24 5. Panolam Industries International, Inc.
25 6. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
26
27 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
28
29 2.2 MATERIALS
30
31 A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
32 standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
33 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches
34 (75 mm) wide.
35 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
36
37 B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
38 quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
39 indicated.
40 1.Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-
41 half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 30 percent.
42 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea
43 formaldehyde.
44 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
45 formaldehyde.
46 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
47 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
48 containing no urea formaldehyde.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
2 thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
3 requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
4
5 C. Softwood Lumber: PS 20 of any sound species.
6
7 D. High Pressure Decorative Laminate – PL-1:
8 1. NEMA LD 3, HPDL; Grades as Scheduled at the end of this Section.
9 2. Color and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule.
10 3. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
11
12 F. Plastic Laminate Backing: High pressure paper base laminate without decorative finish,
13 minimum 0.028" thick.
14
15 2.3 HARDWARE
16
17 A. General: BHMA A156.9 and as follows.
18
19 B. Standards and Brackets:
20 1. Cabinet – Mortise-Mount.
21 a. Pilaster Standards: #255.
22 b. Shelf Supports: #256.
23 c. Finish: White.
24 d. Capacity: 500 lbs. per shelf.
25 e. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt.
26 2. Wall – Regular Duty:
27 a. Standards: #80.
28 b. Brackets: #180-12.
29 c. Finish: Satin Chrome.
30 d. Capacity: 320 lbs. per pair.
31 e. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt.
32
33 C. Work Surface Support Bracket:
34 1. Stamped metal.
35 2. 24-1/4” x 18-1/4”; 400 lb. capacity per pair; maximum depth 26”
36 3. Finish: Crinkle Powder Coat; color as selected by Architect.
37 4. Acceptable Product: SWS4 by Mockett.com
38
39 D. Cabinet Hinges:
40 1. Fully concealed adjustable overlay cabinet hinges; self-latching, 165 degree opening, with
41 mounting plates and accessories as required.
42 2. Acceptable Products:
43 a. Wide Angle – Salice by Hafele.
44 b. No. 3903 by Grass America, Inc.
45
46 F. Cabinet Hinges:
47 1. Fully concealed adjustable overlay cabinet hinges; self-latching, 90 degree opening for
48 cabinet door adjacent to walls or limited 90 degree opening space.
49 2. Acceptable Products:
50 a. 200 Series – Salice by Hafele.
51 b. No. 3606 by Grass America Inc.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 G. Cabinet Hinges:
2 1. Concealed overlay hinges for special conditions.
3 2. Acceptable Product: No. TEC 861 by Grass America Inc.
4
5 H. Drawer and Cabinet Pulls:
6 1. 3-1/2" aluminum pull.
7 2. Acceptable Product: No. 4483-1/2 by Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.
8
9 I. Drawer Slide:
10 1. Full extension slides, 75 lb. capacity.
11 2. Acceptable Product: KV1300 by Knape & Vogt.
12
13 J. Drawer Slide:
14 1. Full extension slides for box, card file and utility drawers.
15 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7434 by Accuride.
16
17 K. Drawer Slide:
18 1. Full extension slides for file drawers.
19 2. Acceptable Product: No. C4034 by Accuride.
20
21 L. Door Catch: MSUPEC12 Duo/Magna Latch by Selby.
22
23 M. Touch Latch:
24 1. Magnetic pressure catch.
25 2. Acceptable Product: No. 245.61.322 by Hafele.
26
27 Q. Drawer and Door Lock: No. 986 by Knape and Vogt.
28
29 R. Bar Grille:
30 1. 8" wide by 3'- 10" long extruded solid bronze bar grille.
31 2. Acceptable Product: EP111-3/4 SE10 Flange by Register & Grille Manufacturing
32 Company, Inc.
33
34 S. Hanging Rods:
35 1. Closet Shelf and Rod Supports:
36 a. Aluminum; painted white
37 b. 11”L x 10” H;
38 c. 1195 by Knape & Vogt
39 2. Center Support:
40 a. 24” Length; 1-1/16” od tubing; anochrome finish
41 b. 760 by Knape and Vogt
42 3. Tubing: Stainless Steel; 1-1/16” diameter; 660 by Knape & Vogt
43
44 T. Coat Hooks:
45 1. Finish: Burnish cast aluminum double hook.
46 2. Acceptable Product: No. 580 by Ives (if double hook).
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.4 FABRICATION
2
3 A. Fabricate cabinetwork to comply with AWS Custom Grade standards.
4
5 B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry interior millwork to average not more than 7 to 10 percent.
6
7 C. Before proceeding with millwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain
8 measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details for accurate fit.
9
10 D. Machine and sand millwork to comply with requirements of AWS for specified grade.
11
12 E. Assemble in mill in as large units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting.
13
14 F. Shop assemble cabinetwork items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled to ensure passage
15 through building opening.
16
17 G. Mill apply face edge and backing laminates with heat activated using presses. Contact
18 adhesive shall not be permitted.
19
20 H. When necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting.
21 Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
22
23 I. Apply plastic laminate in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Face
24 laminates to overlap edge laminates, edge laminates to overlap backing sheets.
25
26 J. Form corners and joints hairline tight. Slightly bevel arises. Cap exposed edges with plastic
27 laminate.
28
29 K. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when unavoidable; arrange neatly.
30
31 L. Mechanically fasten splash backs and aprons to counter tops with concealed steel brackets at
32 16" on center maximum.
33
34 M. Provide cutouts for inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings. Verify
35 locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
36
37 N. Provide 1/2" minimum thick drawer bottom sheet for drawers.
38
39
40 PART 3 EXECUTION
41
42 3.1 EXAMINATION
43
44 A. Cabinet Installer: Verify and approve size and location of required wood blocking prior to
45 finished wall surface being installed.
46
47 3.2 INSTALLATION
48
49 A. Install work in accordance with AWS Custom Grade standards.
50
51 B. Set and secure cabinetwork items in place rigid, plumb and square. Shim as required with
52 concealed shims.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 41 16 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Use fixture attachments designed for wall mounted components.
3
4 D. Anchor cabinet and counter bases to floor using angles and anchorages.
5
6 E. Counter-sink semi-concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components and conceal
7 with solid plugs of species to match surrounding finish.
8
9 F. Place flush with surrounding surfaces.
10
11 G. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other building materials leaving gaps of 1/32"
12 maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
13
14 H. Install cabinet hardware.
15
16 3.3 ADJUSTING
17
18 A. Adjust moving and operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
19
20 3.4 SCHEDULE
21
22 A. Exposed Surfaces:
23 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
24 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
25
26 B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces:
27 1. Edge-banding: Grade VGS.
28 2. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
29 3. Vertical Surface: Thermoset Decorative Panels.
30
31 C. Concealed Surfaces: Grade BKL.
32
33 3.5 CLEANING
34
35 A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 42 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 06 42 16
2
3 WOOD-VENEER PANELING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Shop fabricated panels, trim, or moldings, other than field fabricated work,
11 with required hardware and attachment accessories.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American National Standards Institute
16 1. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
17 2. ANSI A208.2: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications
18
19 B. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of
20 Canada/Woodwork Institute
21 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS).
22
23 C. California Department of Health Services
24 1. Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
25 Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
26
27 D. Code of Federal Regulations
28 1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-2005: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
29 for Architectural Coatings.
30
31 E. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
32 1. HPVA HP-1: American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
33
34 F. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
35 1. DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Structural Plywood
36
37 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
38
39 A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
40 Standards" (AWS) for grades of architectural wood paneling indicated for construction,
41 finishes, installation, and other requirements.
42 1. The Contract Documents may contain selections chosen from options in the quality
43 standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with
44 those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
45
46 A. Interface: Coordinate work with other trades affected by installation.
47
48 1.4 SUBMITTALS
49
50 A.Sustainable Design Submittals:
51 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
52 content and cost.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 42 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
2 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
3 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
4 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
5 low-emitting materials.
6 4.Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
7 requirements for low-emitting materials.
8 5.Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
9
10 B. Shop Drawings:
11 1. Draw profiles, sections, and views of items specifically manufactured for this work, at
12 scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity.
13 2. Show sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
14 3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of fastening, bracing,
15 jointing and connecting to work of other trades.
16
17 C. Samples:
18 1. Submit 12" x 12" hardwood veneer panel and one edge detail with one-half finished.
19 2. Samples will be examined to ascertain degree of quality and conformity to AWS specified
20 in this Section.
21
22 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
25 similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
26 service performance.
27
28 B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
29
30 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
31 demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
32 1. Build mockups of typical paneling as shown on Drawings.
33 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
34 completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
35
36 A. Regulatory Requirements: Treat wood paneling except face veneer with suitable fire-
37 retardant treatment as required by applicable building codes and other applicable rules or
38 regulations to provide flame-spread ratings for Class I material.
39
40 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
41
42 A. Do not deliver panelwork items until site conditions are adequate to receive work. Protect
43 materials from weather while in transit.
44
45 B. Store indoors in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and
46 maximum relative humidity of 25 percent to 55 percent.
47
48 C. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage.
49
50 D. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 42 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Protect panelwork as to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
2
3 F. Spaces to receive panelwork for installation shall have been conditioned for minimum of 48
4 hours to design temperature and humidity ranges, prior to commencing panelwork
5 installation.
6
7 1.7 WARRANTY
8
9 A. Furnish warranty with provisions for repairing or replacing panelwork items which exhibit
10 defects in material and workmanship within period of two years.
11
12
13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
14
15 2.1 MATERIALS
16
17 A. Hardwood Paneling – WD-1 – WD-3:
18 1. Core: Medium density particleboard; Class A fire retardant treated, with flame spread of
19 25 or less; utilize fire retardant chemical which will not bleed through to surface, or
20 corrode fasteners.
21 2. Face Veneer: AWS Section 8, Custom Grade A faces, select white oak pair matched
22 grain; rift cut; slip match within panels and end match stacked panels.
23 3. Backing: Mill option species, balanced to face veneer.
24
25 B. Hardwood Lumber:
26 1. Rift cut select white oak, graded in accordance with requirements of AWS. Custom
27 Grade.
28 2. Select for color and grain match.
29 3. Comply with PS-58, FAS solid stock with maximum 6 percent moisture content at time
30 of dressing.
31
32 C. Hardwood Edge Banding: 1/4" thick, Custom Grade; match species of natural finished
33 faces.
34
35 D. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products with
36 an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
37 recycled content is not less than percent.
38
39 E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
40 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no
41 urea formaldehyde.
42 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 Exterior Glue.
43 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
44 containing no urea formaldehyde.
45
46 F. Fasteners: Non-corrosive Z-clips and grounds; sized to support weight of panel.
47
48 G. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
49 1. VOC Content for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Comply with the following limits
50 when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
51 2. Wood Glues: Not more than 30 g/L.
52 3. Panel Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 42 16 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Contact Adhesive: Not more than 80 g/L.
2
3 2.2 FABRICATION
4
5 A. General:
6 1. Comply with AWS Custom Grade Work provision for grading and workmanship.
7 2. Before proceeding with panelwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain
8 measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
9 3. Machine and sand panelwork to comply with requirements of AWS.
10 4. Assemble in mill in as large units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting.
11 5. Lock-miter corner joints by shop-mitering, joining, splining and gluing, complying with
12 requirements for specified grade.
13 6. Provide flush splined joints in field of paneling.
14
15 2.3 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
16
17 A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
18
19 B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site
20 applied finishes.
21
22 C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces
23 and types recommended for applied finishes.
24
25 D. Seal, stain and varnish concealed and semi-concealed surfaces brush applied only.
26
27 E. Provide cutouts for inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings.
28
29 F. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
30
31 2.4 SHOP FINISHING
32
33 A. Factory Finish – Transparent:
34 1. Grade: AWS Custom.
35 2. Finish: AWS System #7 catalyzed vinyl or AWS System #11 catalyzed polyurethane.
36 3. Staining: As selected by Architect.
37 4. Effect: Open grain finish.
38 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
39
40
41 PART 3 - EXECUTION
42
43 3.1 EXAMINATION
44
45 A. Verify average prevailing humidity conditions are within recommended tolerances.
46
47 3.2 PREPARATION
48
49 A. Acclimatize panelwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to
50 installing.
51
52 B. Back prime panelwork on surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of primer paint for
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 06 42 16 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 items to be painted and with two coats of clear varnish for items to receive a transparent
2 finish.
3
4 C. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of back prime coat before
5 installation of panelwork.
6
7 3.3 INSTALLATION
8
9 A. Set and secure horizontal grounds across substrate, rigid, plumb and square. Shim as
10 required with concealed shims to ensure straight, flush, plumb and level panel installation.
11
12 B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments for wall mounted components.
13
14 C. Install panels in sequence using full width panels in field and adjusting widths at corners.
15
16 D. Provide concealed Z-clip mounting of panels to grounds.
17
18 3.4 CLEANING
19
20 A. Repair and replace defective work.
21
22 B. Clean shop-finished panelwork, touch-up finish and refinish damaged or soiled areas of
23 finish.
24
25
26 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 13 26
2
3 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. This Section includes the following:
11 1. Adhesive-coated HDPE sheet waterproofing.
12 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. ACI International
17 1. ACI 301: Specification for Structural Concrete
18
19 B. ASTM International
20 1. ASTM C 67: Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
21 2. ASTM C 140: Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete and Masonry Units
22 and Related Units
23 3. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural
24 Sandwich Constructions
25 4. ASTM C 578: Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
26 5. ASTM C 836: Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied
27 Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course
28 6. ASTM D 146: Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and
29 Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing
30 7. ASTM D 412: Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and
31 Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension
32 8. ASTM D 570: Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
33 9. ASTM D 882: Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
34 10. ASTM D 903: Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds
35 11. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
36 12. ASTM D 1876: Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test)
37 13. ASTM D 1970: Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
38 Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection
39 14. ASTM D 4258: Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating
40 15. ASTM D 4263: Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic
41 Sheet Method
42 16. ASTM D 5385: Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing
43 Membranes
44 17. ASTM D 5957: Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing Installations
45 18. ASTM D 6135: Practice for Application of Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous
46 Waterproofing
47 19. ASTM D 6506: Specification for Asphalt Based Protection Board for Below-Grade
48 Waterproofing
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 20. ASTM E 96: Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
2 21. ASTM E 154: Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
3 under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
4
5 1.3 SUBMITTALS
6
7 A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
8 treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
9 waterproofing.
10
11 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
12 1.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of
13 Project, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest,
14 or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw
15 material.
16
17 C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
18 joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
19 adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
20 1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of
21 pedestal-supported concrete pavers.
22
23 D. Samples: For the following products:
24 1. 12-by-12-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.
25 2. 12-by-12-inch square of insulation.
26 3. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel.
27
28 E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with
29 requirements.
30
31 F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
32
33 G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
34 qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.
35
36 H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
37
38 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
39
40 A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer
41 for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.
42
43 B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, and molded-sheet
44 drainage panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
45
46 C. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. of wall to
47 demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and
48 execution quality.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply
2 waterproofing until mockups are approved.
3 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
4 of Substantial Completion.
5
6 D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
7 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate
8 condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions,
9 special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection
10 procedures, and protection and repairs.
11
12 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
13
14 A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
15 with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
16 directions for storing and mixing with other components.
17
18 B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
19 location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
20
21 C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
22
23 D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
24
25 E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
26
27 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
28
29 A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and
30 substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply
31 waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
32 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
33
34 B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing
35 materials.
36
37 1.7 WARRANTY
38
39 A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
40 agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that
41 fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.
42 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate
43 prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and
44 cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width.
45 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
46
47 B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this
48 Section, for warranty period of two years.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, and drainage panels.
2
3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
5 2.1 ADHESIVE-COATED HDPE SHEET WATERPROOFING
6
7 A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
8 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
9 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
10 a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Preprufe 160R and 300R.
11
12 B. Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheet for Vertical Applications: 32-mil- thick, uniform, flexible
13 sheets consisting of 16-mil- thick, HDPE sheet coated with a pressure-sensitive rubber
14 adhesive, a protective adhesive coating, and a release liner with the following physical
15 properties:
16 1. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412.
17 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
18 3. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 903, modified.
19 4. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 1876, modified.
20 5. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified.
21 6. Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
22 7. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent; ASTM D 570.
23
24 C. Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheet for Horizontal Applications: 46-mil- thick, uniform,
25 flexible sheets consisting of 30-mil- thick, HDPE sheet coated with a pressure-sensitive
26 rubber adhesive, a protective adhesive coating, a detackifying surface treatment, an
27 uncoated self-adhering side lap strip, and a release liner with the following physical
28 properties:
29 1. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412.
30 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
31 3. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 903, modified.
32 4. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 1876, modified.
33 5. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified.
34 6. Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
35 7. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent; ASTM D 570.
36
37 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
38
39 A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
40 intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
41 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities
42 having jurisdiction.
43
44 B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet
45 waterproofing material.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate
2 by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
3
4 D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or
5 low viscosity.
6
7 E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.
8
9 F. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
10 recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
11 1. Detail Tape: Two-sided, pressure-sensitive, self-adhering reinforced tape, 4-1/2
12 inches wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on one side and release film
13 on self-adhering side.
14
15 G. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8-inch-thick, predrilled at
16 9-inch centers.
17
18 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
19
20 A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 33 Section "Subdrainage."
21
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
24 3.1 EXAMINATION
25
26 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
27 requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
28 1. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, and sound; and ready to receive
29 adhesive-coated HDPE sheet.
30 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
31
32 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
33
34 A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
35 Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
36
37 B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
38 affecting other construction.
39
40 C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
41 penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
42
43 D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
44 holes, and other voids.
45
46 E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from
47 joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 F. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
3 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets
4 of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:
5 a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from
6 corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.
7
8 G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
9 through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
10
11 3.3 ADHESIVE-COATED HDPE SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
12
13 A. Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions.
14
15 B. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of
16 geotextile to maintain continuity.
17
18 C. Vertical Applications: Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against
19 substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 3-inch- minimum lap widths and
20 end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight
21 installation. Mechanically fasten to substrate.
22 1. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination bar
23 anchored into substrate and cover with detailing tape.
24
25 D. Horizontal Applications: Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against
26 substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 3-inch- minimum lap widths and
27 end laps. Overlap and seal seams. Overlap, stagger, and seal end laps with detail tape to
28 ensure watertight installation.
29
30 E. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and
31 outside corners with detail tape.
32
33 F. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape
34 patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling.
35
36 G. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie
37 into adjacent waterproofing.
38
39 H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements.
40 Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches beyond repaired
41 areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail
42 tape.
43
44 I. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;
45 repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 13 26 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
2
3 A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or
4 deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do
5 not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.
6 Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
7 1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.
8
9 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
10
11 A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer
12 to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings,
13 protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect.
14
15 B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
16 ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.
17 Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable
18 water.
19 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not
20 exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of sheet
21 flashings.
22 2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
23 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
24 waterproofing installation is watertight.
25
26 C. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine
27 underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
28 D. Manufacturer Rep should provide minimum of one (1) site visits per week during the
29 duration of the construction of material installation.
30
31 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
32
33 A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
34
35 B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
36
37 C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather
38 exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation
39 will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
40 immediately after installation.
41
42 D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
43 recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
44
45
46 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 21 13
2
3 BOARD INSULATION
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Board insulation at cavity wall construction.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
15 1. ASTM C 240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulating Block.
16 2. ASTM C 272 - Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich
17 Constructions.
18 3. ASTM C 578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
19 4. ASTM C 612: Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
20 5. ASTM C 665 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures.
21 6. ASTM C 1289: Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
22 Insulation Board
23 7. ASTM D 2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
24 8. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
25
26 B. NFPA
27 1. NFPA 285: Method of Test for the Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
28 Exterior, Nonload-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components
29
30 1.3 DEFINITIONS
31
32 A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-
33 values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal
34 conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.
35 Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the
36 two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at
37 mean temperatures indicated.
38
39 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
40
41 A. Performance Requirements: Materials specified in this Section shall provide continuity of
42 thermal barrier at building enclosure elements.
43
44 1.5 SUBMITTALS
45
46 A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations;
47 manufacturer's installation instructions indicating environmental conditions required for
48 installation, installation techniques.
49
50 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
51 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
52 2. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Test Reports: Based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory
3 evidencing compliance with requirements including r-values (aged values for plastic
4 insulations), fire performance characteristics, perm ratings and water absorption ratings,
5 based on testing of current products.
6
7 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
8
9 A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
10 soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
11 recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.
12
13 B. Protect Plastic Insulation as Follows:
14 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
15 concealment.
16 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project
17 site ahead of installation time.
18
19 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
20
21 A. Coordinate Work of this Section with:
22 1. Section 07 26 00 for installation of under-slab vapor retarder.
23 2. Section 07 27 26 for air barrier assemblies.
24
25
26 PART 2 PRODUCTS
27
28 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
29
30 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: In above grade, continuous insulation applications,
31 provide plastic insulation materials with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as
32 determined by testing identical plastic insulation products and system components per test
33 method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
34 authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
35 testing agency.
36 1. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed
37 multistory wall assembly of which plastic insulation is a part, complies with NFPA 285
38 for test method and required fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-
39 bearing wall assemblies.
40
41 2.2 MATERIALS
42
43 A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2 with
44 maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per
45 ASTM E 84; Greenguard Certified.
46 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
47 following:
48 a.Atlas Roofing Corporation.
49 b.Dow Chemical Company (The).
50 c.Hunter Panels.
51 d.Rmax, Inc.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Thermal resistivity: Minimum aged R value of 7.5 in; R of total thickness.
2 3. Water Absorption: Less than 1-1/2 percent by volume maximum in accordance with
3 ASTM D 2842.
4 a. Vertical and Lateral Fire Propagation Characteristics: The exterior wall assembly shall
5 be tested in accordance with and comply with the acceptance criteria of NFPA 285.
6 b. Thermal resistivity:
7 1) Walls: minimum 2 inches.
8 2) Other: Refer to drawings.
9
10 B. Polyisocyanurate Board, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C 1289, glass-fiber-mat faced,
11 Type II, Class 2 with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450,
12 respectively, per ASTM E 84; Greenguard Certified.
13 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
14 following:
15 a.Atlas Roofing Corporation.
16 b.Dow Chemical Company (The).
17 c.Hunter Panels.
18 d.Rmax, Inc.
19 2. Thermal resistivity: Minimum aged R value of 7.5/in; R of total thickness.
20 3. Water Absorption: Less than 1-1/2 percent by volume maximum in accordance with
21 ASTM D 2842.
22
23 C. Mineral-Wool Board, Type III, Faced : ASTM C 612, Type III; faced on one side with foil-
24 scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
25 developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Nominal density of 8 lb/cu.
26 ft. (128 kg/cu. m); Greenguard Certified.
27 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
28 following:
29 a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.
30 b. Isolatek International.
31 c. Owens Corning.
32 d.Roxul Inc.
33 e.Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
34 2. Thermal resistivity: Minimum aged R value of 7.5/in total thickness.
35 3. Fiber Color: Darkened.
36
37 D. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
38 securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
39
40
41 PART 3 EXECUTION
42
43 3.1 EXAMINATION
44
45 A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive
46 insulation and adhesive.
47
48 B. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycombs, fins, irregularities, materials or substances
49 that may impede adhesive bond.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
2
3 A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
4 written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive
5 or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
6
7 B. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the
8 following requirements:
9 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
10 more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
11 snug fit between ends.
12 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
13 edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
14 3. Retain first subparagraph below for eave ventilation.
15 4. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets:
16 a. Support vapor-retarder-faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of
17 metal studs.
18 b. Overlap flanges and tape all joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal
19 each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
20 c. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
21
22 3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WALLS
23
24 A. Adhere 6" wide strip of polyethylene over joint with double bead of adhesive each side of
25 joint. Tape seal joints between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint.
26
27 B. Apply adhesive to full bed 1/8" thick. Daub adhesive tight to protrusions.
28
29 C. Install boards on wall surface, horizontally.
30
31 D. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and
32 ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions.
33
34 E. Place 6" wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor and air
35 barrier bed to door [and window] frame. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor
36 and air barrier.
37
38 3.4 INSTALLATION - CAVITY WALLS
39
40 A. Adhere 6" wide strip of polyethylene sheet over control and expansion joints with double
41 beads of adhesive each side of joint between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint.
42
43 B. Apply adhesive in accordance with board manufacturer's instructions. Butter edges of boards
44 to ensure continuity of vapor and air barrier.
45
46 C. Install boards between wall reinforcement.
47
48 D. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger side and end joints. Butt edges
49 and ends tight to adjacent board with no protrusions.
50
51 E. Place 6" wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings from adhesive vapor and air
52 barrier bed to door frame. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor and air barrier.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION
2
3 A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall manufacturer's
4 written instructions.
5 1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within
6 window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer
7 to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width
8 of dimension indicated on Drawings between insulation and glass.
9 2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.
10
11 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
12
13 A. Do not permit Work to be damaged prior to covering insulation.
14
15 3.7 SCHEDULES
16
17 A. Above Grade Wall Cavity Insulation: Glass-mat faced polyisocyanurate board insulation or
18 Foil-faced polyisocyanurate board insulation.
19
20 B. Spandrel Glass: Mineral-wool semi-rigid board insulation.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
24
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 21 16
2
3 BATT INSULATION
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Batt insulation in following locations.
12 a. Exterior walls.
13 b. Exterior ceilings and soffit areas.
14 c. Roof construction.
15 2. Batt insulation for filling miscellaneous openings.
16 a. Perimeter window jambs and at mullions between units.
17 b. Crevices in exterior walls.
18 c. Exterior door jambs and door shim spaces not grouted solid.
19 d. Roof expansion joints.
20
21 1.2 REFERENCES
22
23 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
24 1. ASTM C 665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction
25 and Manufactured Housing.
26 2. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
27 3. ASTM E 119 - Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials.
28 4. ASTM E 136 - Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750N c1.
29
30 1.3 DEFINITIONS
31
32 A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity of insulated products are designated by "r-
33 values", they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity "k values." Thermal
34 conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1" thick.
35 Thermal resistivities are expressed by temperature difference in degree F. between the two
36 exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean
37 temperatures indicated.
38
39 1.4 SUBMITTALS
40
41 A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.
42
43 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
44 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
45 2. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
46
47 C. Test Reports: Based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory
48 evidencing compliance with requirements including r-values, fire performance characteristics,
49 perm ratings and water absorption ratings, other properties, based on testing of current
50 products.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide material whose indicated fire performance characteristics
4 have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below:
5 1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
6 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
7 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
8
9 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
10
11 A. Storage and Protection: Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from
12 deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location.
13 Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during
14 installation.
15
16
17 PART 2 PRODUCTS
18
19 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
20
21 A. Acceptable Mineral Fiber Manufacturers:
22 1. Isolatek International.
23 2. Owens Corning.
24 3. Roxul Inc.
25 4. Thermafiber.
26
27 B. Acceptable Glass Fiber Manufacturers:
28 1. CertainTeed Corporation.
29 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
30 3. Johns Manville.
31 4. Knauf Insulation.
32 5. Owens Corning.
33
34 C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
35
36 2.2 MATERIALS
37
38 A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; and E 136 preformed glass fiber; friction fit; Greenguard
39 Certified.
40 1. Thermal Resistance:
41 a. Walls: R value of 19.
42 b. Ceilings and Soffits: R value of 19.
43 2. Facing: Unfaced.
44 3. Flame/Smoke Properties: 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E 84.
45
46 B. Curtain Wall Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1 & 2 noncombustible; Greenguard Certified.
47 1. Nominal density of 8 lb./cu.ft.
48 2. Facing: Unfaced.
49 3. Flame/Smoke Properties: Spread of 25/5 or less in accordance with ASTM E 84
50 4. Color: dark gray.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 21 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Insulation Fasteners: Steel impale spindle and clip on flat metal base, self adhering backing,
2 length to suit insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
3
4
5 PART 3 EXECUTION
6
7 3.1 EXAMINATION
8
9 A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.
10
11 3.2 INSTALLATION
12
13 A. General:
14 1. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions
15 of installation in each case.
16 2. Install in exterior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress
17 insulation.
18 3. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
19 4. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
20 within plane of insulation.
21
22 B. For metal-framed wall cavities:
23 1. Friction fit insulation between studs after cover material has been installed on one side of
24 the cavity. Provide supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish
25 surface is applied when insulation is installed in heights over 8 feet.
26 a. When unfaced insulation is used, and in applications without a cover material or
27 where the stud depth is larger than the insulation thickness, use wire or metal straps
28 to hold insulation in place.
29
30 C. Installation with Mechanical Fasteners:
31 1. Apply insulation directly to the interior surface of the exterior wall framing with
32 appropriate spindle or prong type anchors.
33 2. Fasten anchors to framing by attaching with adhesive. Follow manufacturer's
34 recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
35 3. Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer. Select pin lengths to ensure tight fit.
36 Protect pin tips where subject to human contact. See manufacturer's diagram for impaling
37 pin pattern.
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 26 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 26 00
2
3 SHEET VAPOR RETARDERS AND BARRIERS (SLAB ON GRADE)
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Vapor retarder and barrier sheet, seaming tape, and sealant materials for
11 controlling vapor diffusion through concrete floor slabs-on-grade.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
16 1. ASTM D 1709: Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the
17 Free-Falling Dart Method.
18 2. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
19 3. ASTM E 154: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
20 Earth Under Concrete Slabs.
21 4. ASTM E 1643: Standard Practice for Installation of Water Retarders Used in Contract
22 with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
23 5. ASTM E 1745: Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in
24 Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
25
26 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
27 1. ACI 302.1 R: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
28
29 1.3 DEFINITIONS
30
31 A. Vapor Retarder: Material or assembly of materials that resists water vapor diffusion through
32 it at a rate of 0.03 grains/ft2 *hr or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
33
34 B. Vapor Barrier: Material or assembly of materials that resists water vapor diffusion through it
35 at a rate of 0.01 grains/ft2 *hr or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
36
37 1.4 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Product Data: Furnish data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria,
40 limitations; furnish manufacturer's installation instructions indicating preparation and
41 installation requirements, techniques.
42
43 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44
45 A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM E 1643 and SWRI - Sealant and Caulking Guide
46 Specification requirements for materials and installation.
47
48 1.6 SEQUENCING
49
50 A. Sequence Work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with other retardant
51 materials and seals.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 26 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Do not install vapor retarder or barrier until items penetrating it are in place.
2
3
4 PART 2 PRODUCTS
5
6 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
7
8 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
9 1. Barrier-Bac; Inteplast Group, Ltd.
10 2. Insulation Solutions Inc.
11 3. Monarflex USA
12 4. Raven Industries
13 5. Reef Industries, Inc.
14 6. Stego Industries, LLC.
15 7. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
16
17 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
18
19 A. Sheet Vapor Retarder:
20 1. Monolothic, non-woven sheet membrane material, 15-mil thickness, minimum.
21 2. ASTM E 96, Procedure B, meeting the following requirements:
22 a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate (WVTR) of 0.007 grains/ft2 *hr or less.
23 b. Permeance Rating: 0.02 Perms or less.
24 3. ASTM E 1745, Class A, meeting the following requirements:
25 a. Tensile Strength: 60 lbf/in. minimum per ASTM E 154.
26 b. Puncture Resistance: 2200 grams minimum per ASTM D 1709.
27 4. Acceptable Products:
28 a. Barrier-Bac; Inteplast Group, Ltd.; VB-350.
29 b. Insulation Solutions Inc.; Viper Vaporcheck II 15-mil
30 c. Raven Industries; VaporBlock 15.
31 d. Reef Industries; Griffolyn 15 MIL GREEN.
32 e. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Vapor Barrier.
33 f. W.R. Meadows; Perminator 15 Mil.
34
35 B. Sheet Vapor Barrier:
36 1. Six- or seven-ply sheet membrane with a reinforced core and fortified outer layers, 20 mil
37 thickness, minimum:
38 2. ASTM E 96, Procedure B, meeting the following requirements:
39 a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate (WVTR) of 0.005 grains/ft2 *hr or less.
40 b. Permeance Rating: 0.01 Perms or less
41 3. ASTM E 1745, Class A, meeting the following requirements:
42 a. Tensile Strength: 58 lbf/in. minimum per ASTM E 154
43 b. Puncture Resistance: 2600 grams minimum per ASTM D 1709
44 4. Acceptable Products:
45 a. Monarflex USA; Monarflex Reflex Super.
46 b. Raven Industries; VaporBlock Plus 20.
47 c. W. R. Meadows; Premoulded Membrane Vapor Seal with Plasmatic Core (PMPC).
48
49 2.3 ACCESSORIES
50
51 A. Seam Tape: As recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 26 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 A. Mastic Adhesive and Penetration Sealer: Compatible with sheet barrier and substrate, thick
2 mastic of uniform consistency.
3
4 B. Penetration Boots: Pre-manufactured or field fabricated from seam tape and mastic as
5 recommended by sheet manufacturer.
6
7
8 PART 3 EXECUTION
9
10 3.1 EXAMINATION
11
12 A. Verify that subgrade fill is smooth and ready to receive sheeting.
13
14 3.2 PREPARATION
15
16 A. Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion.
17
18 B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants in accordance with
19 manufacturer’s instructions.
20
21 C. Layout sheets parallel to direction of placement of concrete.
22
23 3.3 INSTALLATION
24
25 A. Install materials in accordance with ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions.
26
27 B. Vapor Retarder and Barrier for Concrete Slabs:
28 1. Install vapor retarder sheets parallel to direction of placement on smooth substrate to
29 form continuous layer over sand base course.
30 2. Lap sheets not less than 6"; seal laps tight with pressure sensitive seam tape.
31 3. Seal penetrations to form a tight seal with liquid flashing membrane and/or pressure
32 sensitive seam tape per manufacturer’s recommendations.
33 4. Repair damaged vapor retarder sheet prior to pouring concrete with pressure sensitive
34 tape per manufacturer’s recommendations.
35 5. Provide vapor retarder on top of flexible sand base course as detailed on Construction
36 Drawings.
37
38 C. Apply sealant and tape within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
39 manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges or where
40 compatibility with adjacent materials may be in doubt.
41
42 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
43
44 A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Engage manufacturer’s technical representative to inspect
45 vapor retarder materials, accessories, and installation for compliance with specified
46 requirements prior to placement of concrete. Inspections may include the following:
47 1. Continuity of vapor retarder system has been achieved.
48 2. Continuous support of vapor retarder system has been provided.
49 3. Laps in sheet materials have complied with the minimum requirements with no
50 fishmouths.
51 4. Compatible materials have been used.
52 5. All penetrations have been sealed.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 26 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Perimeter of vapor retarder system has been properly terminated and sealed.
2
3 3.5 SCHEDULES
4
5 A. Install vapor retarder on top of prepared sub-base.
6
7 B. Install vapor barrier on top of prepared sub-base under concrete slabs scheduled to receive
8 wood flooring.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 27 26
2
3 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Vapor-permeable, fluid-applied air barriers.
12
13 B. Related Requirements:
14 1. Section 06 16 63 "Moisture-Resistant Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall
15 sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments.
16
17 1.2 REFERENCES
18
19 A. ASTM International
20 1.ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
21 Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
22 2.ASTM D 412: Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
23 Tension
24 3.ASTM D 4263: Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic
25 Sheet Method
26 4.ASTM D 4541: Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable
27 Adhesion Testers
28 5.ASTM E 96/E 96M: Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
29 6.ASTM E 783: Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed
30 Exterior Windows and Doors
31 7.ASTM E 1186: Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and
32 Air Barrier Systems
33 8.ASTM E 2178: Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
34 9.ASTM E 2357: Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies
35
36 B. NFPA
37 1. NFPA 285: Fire Test Method for the Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics
38 of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible
39 Components
40
41 1.3 DEFINITIONS
42
43 A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the
44 movement of air.
45
46 B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials
2 applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to
3 control air movement through the wall.
4
5 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
6
7 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
8 1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage
9 and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.
10
11 1.5 SUBMITTALS
12
13 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
14 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
15 substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.
16 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
17 1.Product Data: For coatings, indicating VOC content.
18 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For coatings, indicating compliance with requirements for
19 low-emitting materials.
20 3. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
21 4. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
22
23 C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
24 1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies
25 specific to Project conditions.
26 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations,
27 inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
28 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
29
30 D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
31
32 E. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers
33 and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with
34 the barrier.
35
36 F. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified
37 testing agency.
38
39 G. Field quality-control reports.
40
41 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
44 and approved by manufacturer.
45 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance
46 Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
2 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly, minimum 150 sq. ft.,
3 incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door
4 frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate
5 surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing
6 of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly.
7 a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing
8 agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.
9 b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and
10 foundation wall intersection.
11 c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements,
12 reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
13 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
14 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
15 deviations in writing.
16 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
17 the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
18
19 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
20
21 A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
22 preconstruction testing on field mockups.
23
24 B. Mockup Testing: Air-barrier assemblies shall comply with performance requirements
25 indicated, as evidenced by reports based on mockup testing by a qualified testing agency.
26 1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Mockups will be tested for evidence of air leakage
27 according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke
28 tracers.
29 2. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Mockups will be tested for air-leakage rate according
30 to ASTM E 783.
31 3. Adhesion Testing: Mockups will be tested for required air-barrier adhesion to
32 substrate according to ASTM D 4541.
33 4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
34 tested.
35
36 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
37
38 A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
39
40 B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
41
42 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
43
44 A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
45 temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.
46 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.
47 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or
48 mist.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
4
5 A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from
6 single source from single manufacturer.
7 B.VOC Content: 100 g/L or less.
8 C. Low-Emitting Materials: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements
9 of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and
10 Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
11 Environmental Chambers."
12
13 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
14
15 A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be
16 capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane
17 flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-
18 barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing
19 substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and
20 transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified
21 limits.
22
23 B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57
24 lbf/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 2357.
25
26 2.3 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER
27
28 A. High-Build, Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer
29 membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written
30 instructions, of 35 mils or thicker over smooth, void-free substrates.
31 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
32 a.Synthetic Polymer Membrane:
33 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; Fire Resist Barritech VP
34 2) GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Perm-A-Barrier VPL or Perm-A-
35 Barrier VPL-LT.
36 3)Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31MR or Air-Bloc 33MR.
37 4)Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230.
38 2. Physical and Performance Properties:
39 a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
40 pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
41 a. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant
42 Method.
43 b. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
44 c. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to
45 ASTM D 4541.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
2 approved assembly.
3 e. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for [30] 180 days according to
4 manufacturer's written instructions.
5
6 B. Medium-Build, Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer
7 membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written
8 instructions, of 17 to 30 mils over smooth, void-free substrates.
9 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
10 a.Synthetic Polymer Membrane:
11 1) DuPont; Tyvek Fluid Applied Weather Barrier System WB.
12 2) GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Elemax SEC2600 SilShield
13 AWB.
14 3) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield LMP.
15 2. Physical and Performance Properties:
16 a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
17 pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
18 b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant
19 Method.
20 c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 250 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
21 d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to
22 ASTM D 4541.
23 e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
24 approved assembly.
25 f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for [30] 90 days according to
26 manufacturer's written instructions.
27
28 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
29
30 A. Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips,
31 joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars,
32 termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap
33 sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier
34 manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with
35 primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.
36
37 B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material
38 manufacturer.
39
40 C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300
41 stainless-steel fasteners.
42
43 D. Engineered Transition Assembly: Pre-engineered assembly of extruded aluminum adapters
44 and silicone rubber, sized to fit opening widths and glazing pockets, with a single-
45 component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding
46 extrusions to substrates.
47 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
48 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ETA Proglaze.
2
3 E. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured
4 low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component,
5 neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to
6 substrates.
7 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
8 a.Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
9 b.Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000 UltraSpan.
10 c.Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
11 d.Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.
12
13
14 PART 3 - EXECUTION
15
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17
18 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
19 requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
20 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other
21 contaminants.
22 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
23 air-barrier manufacturer.
24 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
25 plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
26 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
27
28 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
29
30 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
31
32 A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to
33 manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate
34 for air-barrier application.
35
36 B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
37 affecting other construction.
38
39 C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
40 penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
41
42 D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
43 holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
44
45 E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
46
47 F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners
48 and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to
3 another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide
4 continuous support for air barrier.
5
6 H. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints, discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-
7 to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement
8 according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
9
10 3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
11
12 A. Install accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and
13 details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water
14 barrier.
15 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and
16 base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
17 2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3
18 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
19 3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to
20 substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
21 4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas
22 that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for
23 more than 24 hours.
24
25 B. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air
26 barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and
27 window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior
28 door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory
29 materials.
30
31 C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with
32 termination mastic.
33
34 D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's
35 recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot
36 be applied within these temperature ranges.
37
38 E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
39 storefronts, and doors. Apply engineered transition assembly (ETA) so that a minimum of
40 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm)
41 of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of
42 full contact.
43 1. Engineered Transition Assembly (ETA): Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to
44 walls, frame, and membrane.
45
46 F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
47 miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with
2 termination mastic.
3
4 H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide transition
5 strip.
6
7 I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed
8 by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
9
10 J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and
11 flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond
12 repaired areas in strip direction.
13
14 3.4 PRIMARY FLUID-APPLIED AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
15
16 A. Apply air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a
17 continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and
18 details. Apply air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application
19 temperature ranges.
20 1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to
21 substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
22 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day.
23 Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
24 3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate
25 drying time between coats.
26
27 B. High-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates
28 according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier material in full contact around
29 protrusions such as masonry ties.
30 1. Vapor-Retarding, High-Build Air Barrier: Total minimum dry film thickness as
31 recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements,
32 but not less than 35 mils, applied in one or more equal coats.
33
34 C. High-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates
35 according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier material in full contact around
36 protrusions such as masonry ties.
37 1. Vapor-Permeable, High-Build Air Barrier: Total minimum dry film thickness as
38 recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements,
39 but not less than 35 mils, applied in one or more equal coats.
40
41 D. Medium-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates
42 according to the following thickness. Apply an increased thickness of air-barrier material in
43 full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.
44 1. Vapor-Permeable, Medium-Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as
45 recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements,
46 but not less than 17 mils, applied in one or more equal coats. Apply additional
47 material as needed to achieve void- and pinhole-free surface, but do not exceed
48 thickness on which required vapor permeability is based.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 E. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.
3
4 F. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
5 substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
6
7 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
8
9 A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
10
11 B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for
12 compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:
13 1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope
14 with no gaps or holes.
15 2. Air-barrier dry film thickness.
16 3. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.
17 4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions,
18 and mortar droppings.
19 5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been
20 maintained.
21 6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
22 7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.
23 8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and
24 have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed
25 edges), with no fishmouths.
26 9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
27 10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.
28 11. Compatible materials have been used.
29 12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been
30 provided.
31 13. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with
32 requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support,
33 integrity, and continuity of seal.
34 14. All penetrations have been sealed.
35
36 C. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:
37 1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of
38 air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization
39 with smoke tracers.
40 2. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air-leakage rate
41 according to ASTM E 783.
42 3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to
43 substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or
44 part thereof.
45
46 D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
47 1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written
48 instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 27 26 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified
2 above.
3
4 E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.
5
6 F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
7
8 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
9
10 A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction
11 period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
12 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
13 recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer
14 than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-
15 thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed
16 materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
17 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not
18 approved by air-barrier manufacturer.
19
20 B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed
21 work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected
22 construction.
23
24 C. Remove masking materials after installation.
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 41 13.16
2
3 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9 1. Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels.
10
11 1.2 REFERENCES
12
13 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
14 1. AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
15 Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum
16 Coated Steel Substrates
17
18 B. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
19 1. ASCE/SEI 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
20
21 C. ASTM International
22 1. ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
23 Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
24 2. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
25 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
26 3. ASTM A 666: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
27 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
28 4. ASTM A 755/A 755M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
29 Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building
30 Products
31 5. ASTM A 792/A 792M: Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 Percent Aluminum-Zinc
32 Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
33 6. ASTM C 645: Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members
34 7. ASTM C 754: Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
35 Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products
36 8. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
37 9. ASTM C 1289: Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
38 Insulation Board
39 10. ASTM C 1311: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants
40 11. ASTM D 226/D 226M: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
41 Roofing and Waterproofing
42 12. ASTM D 1970: Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
43 Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection
44 13. ASTM D 2244: Practice for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally
45 Measured Color Coordinates
46 14. ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
47 Paint Films
48 15. ASTM D 4637: Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 16. ASTM D 6878: Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing
2 17. ASTM E 1514: Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems
3 18. ASTM E 1592: Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and
4 Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
5 19. ASTM E 1646: Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel
6 Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
7 20. ASTM E 1680: Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof
8 Panel Systems
9 21. ASTM E 1980: Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and
10 Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces
11 22. ASTM E 2140: Test Method for Weather Penetration of Metal Roof Panel Systems
12 by Static Water Pressure Head
13
14 D. FM Global
15 1. FMG 4471: Approval Standard, Class I Panel Roofs
16 2. Approval Guide.
17 3. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29: Roof Deck Securement and Above-
18 Deck Roof Components
19 4. RoofNav.
20
21 E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
22 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
23
24 F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
25 1. UL 580: Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
26
27 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
28
29 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
30 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer,
31 metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers
32 whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof
33 accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
34 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
35 Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
36 delays.
37 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including
38 manufacturer's written instructions.
39 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
40 between and attachment to structural members.
41 5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.
42 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and
43 condition of other construction that affect metal panels.
44 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests
45 and inspections if applicable.
46 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after
47 installation.
48 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
2 furnish copy of record to each participant.
3
4 1.4 SUBMITTALS
5
6 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
7 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
8 components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
9
10 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of steel sheet metal roofing,
11 including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish
12 between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following at a scale of not less than
13 3 inches per 12 inches
14 1. Details for forming steel sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions.
15 2. Details for joining and securing steel sheet metal roofing, including layout of
16 fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
17 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
18 4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and
19 contraction.
20 5. Details of roof penetrations.
21 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
22 counterflashings.
23 7. Details of special conditions.
24 8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
25 9. Detail the following accessory items, at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches:
26 a. Flashing and trim.
27 b. Gutters, including expansion joints, and downspouts as they relate to adjacent
28 steel sheet metal roofing.
29
30 C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
31 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
32
33 D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standing-seam metal roof panels indicated to comply with
34 performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
35 the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
36
37 E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
38
39 F. Mobile Factory Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for equipment
40 manufacturer's portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing panels that comply
41 with UL requirements. Equipment shall be designed and certified by the Fabricator to roll-
42 form products from the alloy, gauge, width, temper, and finish of the metal type(s)
43 specified. Show expiration date no earlier than two months after scheduled completion of
44 steel sheet metal roofing.
45 1. Submit certificates indicating recertification of equipment whose certification has
46 expired during the construction period.
47
48 G. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 H. Field quality-control reports.
2
3 I. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
4
5 J. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
6
7 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
8
9 A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
10 and approved by manufacturer.
11
12 B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming
13 equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as
14 factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for
15 duration of work.
16
17 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
18 demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
19 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave, including fascia, and soffit as shown on
20 Drawings; approximately 12 feet square by full thickness, including
21 attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
22 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
23 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
24 deviations in writing.
25 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
26 of Substantial Completion.
27
28 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
29
30 A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged
31 or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
32
33 B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
34 and surface damage.
35
36 C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
37 and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
38 drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might
39 cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
40
41 D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
42
43 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
44
45 A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
46 conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
47 written instructions and warranty requirements.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.8 COORDINATION
2
3 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations
4 with actual equipment provided.
5
6 B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
7 soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
8 installation.
9
10 1.9 WARRANTY
11
12 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
13 replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
14 specified warranty period.
15 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
16 a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
17 b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
18 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
19
20 B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
21 agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of
22 factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
23 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
24 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
25 ASTM D 2244.
26 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
27 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
28 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
29
30 C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
31 agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain
32 weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.
33 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
34
35
36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
38 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
39
40 A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 45 16
41 "Contractor Quality Control" to design standing-seam metal roof system.
42
43 B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
44 preconsumer recycled content not less than 30 percent.
45
46 C. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of
2 the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
3 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of wall panel system to withstand loads
4 caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as
5 calculated in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish wind pressure based on the
6 following criteria:
7 a. Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph.
8 b. Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 90 mph.
9 c. Occupancy Category: III.
10 d. Exposure Category: C.
11 e. Internal Pressure Coefficient (GCPI): ±0.18.
12 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
13 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.
14
15 E. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to
16 ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference:
17 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
18
19 F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
20 ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference:
21 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 12.00 lbf/sq. ft..
22
23 G. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to
24 ASTM E 2140.
25
26 H. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
27 wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.
28 1. Uplift Rating: UL 60.
29
30 I. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with
31 requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM
32 Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.
33 Identify materials with FM Global markings.
34 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60.
35 2. Hail Resistance: SH.
36
37 J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
38 temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
39 components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
40 Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
41 nighttime-sky heat loss.
42 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
43
44 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
45
46 A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and
47 interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips,
2 cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
3 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
4 ASTM E 1514.
5
6 B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at
7 panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed
8 for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed
9 clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and
10 mechanically seaming panels together.
11 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
12 the following:
13 a. AEP Span; A BlueScope Steel Company.
14 b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
15 c. Englert, Inc.
16 d. Fabral.
17 e. Merchant and Evans.
18 f. Morin - A Kingspan Group Company.
19 g. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
20 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
21 ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel
22 sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;
23 structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
24 ASTM A 755/A 755M.
25 a. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch.
26 b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
27 c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
28 3. Clips: Two-piece floating to accommodate thermal movement.
29 a. Material: 0.064-inch- nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or
30 aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
31 4. Joint Type: Double folded.
32 5. Panel Coverage: 12 inches.
33 6. Panel Height: 1.5 inches.
34
35 2.3 ROOF INSULATION
36
37 A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards approved by standing seam metal roof system
38 manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
39 thicknesses indicated.
40
41 B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, with glass-
42 fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
43 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
44 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
45 limited to, the following:
46 a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
47 b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
48 c. Firestone Building Products.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. GAF Materials Corporation.
2 e. Hunter Panels
3 f. R-Max, Inc.
4
5 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
6
7 A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
8 intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
9
10 B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
11 corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof
12 insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
13
14 C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to
15 attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
16 1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.
17
18 D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum
19 substrate, factory primed.
20 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
21 a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Prime.
22 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
23
24 2.5 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
25
26 A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet
27 underlayment, a minimum of 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film
28 top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-
29 paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
30 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
31 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
32 3.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
33 a.Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 400HT.
34 b.Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Ice and
35 Water Shield HT.
36 c.Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
37
38 B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
39
40 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
41
42 A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated
43 steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,
44 Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
45 standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.
46 1. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped sections 0.064-inch nominal thickness.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
2 including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
3 gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels
4 unless otherwise indicated.
5 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal
6 panels.
7
8 C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
9 required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but
10 are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
11 Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
12
13 D. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
14 and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long
15 sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
16 Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (914 mm) o.c.,
17 fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at
18 outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.
19
20 E. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot-long
21 sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according
22 to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts to match gutters.
23
24 F. Panel Clip Fasteners: Post-installed, self-drilling, screws capable of sustaining, without
25 failure, a load equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined
26 by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent
27 testing agency.
28 1. Material: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M).
29
30 G. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible
31 with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
32 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
33 sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
34 nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
35 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
36 classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as
37 recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
38 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
39
40 2.7 FABRICATION
41
42 A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
43 standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
44 requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
45 dimensional and structural requirements.
46
47 B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels
48 may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels.
2 Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with
3 details shown.
4
5 C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
6 length of panel. Panels are to be fabricated in one continuous panel length with no end lap
7 conditions.
8
9 D. Fabricate metal panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a
10 weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from
11 movements.
12
13 E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
14 recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
15 Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
16 indicated.
17 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
18 buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
19 edges folded back to form hems.
20 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to
21 be seamed, form seams, and solder.
22 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
23 sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
24 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
25 not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
26 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
27 anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
28 panel manufacturer.
29 a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
30 metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal
31 being secured.
32
33 2.8 FINISHES
34
35 A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
36 strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
37
38 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
39 acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
40 variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
41 are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
42 installed to minimize contrast.
43
44 C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
45 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
46 than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
47 coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
48 written instructions.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-
2 colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with
3 a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
4
5
6 PART 3 - EXECUTION
7
8 3.1 EXAMINATION
9
10 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
11 requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions
12 affecting performance of the Work.
13 1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing
14 or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof
15 panel manufacturer.
16
17 B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
18 locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
19
20 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
21
22 3.2 PREPARATION
23
24 A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
25 members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's
26 written recommendations.
27
28 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
29
30 A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
31 precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.
32
33 B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
34 installing roof insulation.
35
36 C. Installation Over Concrete Decks:
37 1. Install base layer of insulation with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in
38 adjacent rows.
39 a. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
40 width.
41 b. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
42 each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
43 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
44 c. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inchwith insulation.
45 d. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inchof nailers, projections, and penetrations.
46 e. Loosely lay base layer of insulation units over substrate.
47 f. Adhere base layer of insulation to concrete roof deck according to FM
48 Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification,
2 as follows:
3 1) Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4
4 gal./100 sq. ft., and allow primer to dry.
5 2) Set insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly
6 pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
7 2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer
8 offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
9 a. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than
10 12 inches in adjacent rows.
11 b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
12 tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
13 c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
14 width.
15 d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
16 each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
17 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
18 e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inchwith insulation.
19 f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
20 g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM
21 Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss
22 Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification,
23 as follows:
24 1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation
25 adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
26
27 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS
28
29 A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
30 joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in
31 each direction.
32 1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
33 intersecting sloping roof decks.
34 2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.
35 a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.
36 3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.
37 4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals'
38 RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data
39 Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows:
40 a. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing
41 and maintaining insulation in place.
42
43 3.5 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
44
45 A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply
46 with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at
47 locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps
48 of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover
2 underlayment within 14 days.
3 1. Apply over the entire roof surface.
4 2. Apply a second layer over the roof areas indicated below:
5 a. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches beyond interior wall
6 line.
7 b. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18
8 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches.
9 c. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches.
10 d. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches.
11 e. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches.
12 f. Around penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches.
13
14 B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
15
16 3.6 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
17
18 A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in
19 orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless
20 otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in
21 place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
22 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
23 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
24 screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings
25 that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.
26 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
27 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
28 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
29 6. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
30 screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-
31 tapping screws.
32 7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
33
34 B. Fasteners:
35 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
36 galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
37
38 C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels clips securely in place to concrete deck beneath
39 insulation, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written
40 instructions.
41
42 D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
43 protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
44
45 E. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with
46 concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners
47 recommended in writing by manufacturer.
48 1. Install clips through insulation to concrete with self-tapping fasteners.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 15 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Install pressure plates at locations required by manufacturer's written installation
2 instructions.
3 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer
4 tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
5 4. Watertight Installation:
6 a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels,
7 using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to
8 make panels watertight.
9 b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
10 accessories.
11 c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant
12 and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
13
14 F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
15 weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
16 flashings and other components.
17 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim,
18 copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
19 similar items. Provide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not
20 indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
21
22 G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
23 installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
24 concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
25 work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
26 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is
27 true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
28 Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and
29 weather-resistant performance.
30 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
31 Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24
32 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used
33 or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints
34 of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
35 (concealed within joints).
36
37 H. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters
38 to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. using
39 manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
40 Provide for thermal expansion.
41
42 I. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold
43 downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
44 approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
45 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
46 2. Connect downspouts to drainage system indicated on Drawings.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 41 13.16 - 16 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 J. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and
2 seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.
3
4 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
5
6 A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4
7 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of
8 adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
9
10 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
11
12 A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
13 inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.
14
15 B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate
16 that they do not comply with specified requirements.
17
18 C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine
19 compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
20
21 D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
22
23 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
24
25 A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
26 installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
27 completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
28 panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
29
30 B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
31 repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 54 00
2
3 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Adhered thermoplastic membrane roofing system.
12 2. Roof insulation.
13 3. Cover board.
14 4. Walkways.
15
16 B. Related Requirements:
17 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and
18 blocking.
19 2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration
20 flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.
21 3. Section 07 71 00 "Roof Specialties" for roof edge metal flashings and copings.
22 4. Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches and roof smoke vents.
23 5. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
24
25 1.2 REFERENCES
26
27 A. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
28 1. ASCE/SEI 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
29
30 B. ASTM International
31 1. ASTM C 518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission
32 Properties by Means of The Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
33 2. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M: Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
34 Sheathing
35 3. ASTM C 1278/C 1278M: Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel
36 4. ASTM C 1289: Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
37 Insulation Board
38 5. ASTM D 41/D 41M: Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
39 Dampproofing, and WaterproofingASTM D 1079: Terminology Relating to Roofing
40 and Waterproofing
41 6. ASTM D 4263: Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic
42 Sheet Method
43 7. ASTM D 4272: Test Method for Total Energy Impact of Plastic Films by Dart Drop
44 8. ASTM D 4434: Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing
45 9. ASTM E 108: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
46 10. ASTM E 548: Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory
47 Competence
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 11. ASTM F 2170: Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
2 Slabs Using in situ Probes
3 12. ASTM G 152: Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for
4 Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
5 13. ASTM G 154: Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure
6 of Nonmetallic Materials
7 14. ASTM G 155: Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
8 Non-Metallic Materials
9
10 C. FM Approvals
11 1. FM Approvals 4450: Approval Standard for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs
12 2. FM Approvals 4470: Approval Standard Class 1 Roof Covers
13 3. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29: Roof Deck Securement and Above-
14 Deck Roof Components
15 4. RoofNav.
16
17 D. National Roofing Contractors Association
18 1. The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
19
20 E. Single-Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI)
21 1. SPRI FX-1: Standard FieldTest Procedure for Determining the Withdrawal
22 Resistance of Roofing Fasteners.
23 2. SPRI IA-1: Standard Field Test Procedure for Determining the Uplift Resistance of
24 Insulation and Insulation Adhesive Combinations over Various Substrates.
25
26 F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
27 1. UL 580: Standard for Standard Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
28 2. UL 790: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
29
30 1.3 DEFINITIONS
31
32 A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
33 Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section.
34
35 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
36
37 A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct
38 conference at Project site.
39 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
40 agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
41 representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work
42 interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-
43 mounted equipment.
44 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
45 manufacturer's written instructions.
46 3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
47 Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
48 delays.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness
2 and fastening.
3 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
4 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
5 equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
6 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
7 applicable.
8 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
9 installation.
10 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
11
12 B. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
13 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
14 agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
15 representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work
16 interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-
17 mounted equipment.
18 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
19 manufacturer's written instructions.
20 3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
21 Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
22 delays.
23 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
24 including flatness and fastening.
25 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
26 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
27 equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
28 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
29 applicable.
30 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
31 installation.
32 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
33
34 1.5 SUBMITTALS
35
36 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
37 1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals'
38 RoofNav listing.
39
40 B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work,
41 including the following:
42 1. Layout and thickness of insulation.
43 2. Base flashings and membrane termination details.
44 3. Flashing details at penetrations.
45 4. Tapered insulation layout, thickness, and slopes.
46 5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane,
47 fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system.
48 6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 7. Tie-in with adjoining air barrier.
2
3 C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
4 1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
5 2. Roof insulation.
6 3. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
7 4. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
8
9 D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind
10 uplift performance requirements.
11
12 E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
13
14 F. Manufacturer Certificates:
15 1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer,
16 certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance
17 Requirements" Article.
18 a. Evidence shall be submitted in the form of single FM Approvals RoofNav
19 assembly numbers describing the assembly in its entirety. Multiple RoofNav
20 assembly numbers used to describe a single assembly are not acceptable.
21 2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that
22 all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.
23
24 G. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
25 authorized or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
26
27 H. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a
28 qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.
29
30 I. Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
31
32 J. Field Test Reports:
33 1. Roofing system manufacturer's field quality control reports.
34 2. Fastener-pullout test results and manufacturer's revised requirements for fastener
35 patterns.
36 3. Roofing system manufacturer's inspection report(s) of completed roof installation.
37 4. EVFM test reports.
38
39 K. Field quality-control reports.
40
41 L. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
42
43 M. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
44
45 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
46
47 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approvals approved for
48 membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
2 roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
3 manufacturer's special warranty. Engage a single firm to assume undivided responsibility
4 for installing all components of the Roofing System including all related sheet metal
5 flashings and all other components.
6 1. Installer shall provide evidence of at least five (5) similar and successful installations
7 including contact names and numbers regarding those projects. Installer shall be
8 properly licensed to provide the service noted by this section and overall project.
9 Installer shall have 10 years of documented experience (as the same entity/company)
10 in regards to roofing services.
11
12 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
13
14 A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
15 labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
16 approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
17 components.
18
19 B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
20 location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
21 Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
22 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
23 shelf life.
24
25 C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
26 moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
27 manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
28
29 D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
30 deflection of deck.
31
32 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
33
34 A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
35 conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written
36 instructions and warranty requirements.
37
38 1.9 WARRANTY
39
40 A. Manufacturer's Warranty:
41 1. Written warranty, signed by roofing-system manufacturer, including:
42 a. Repair or replace components of roofing system that do not comply with
43 requirements; that do not remain watertight; that fail in adhesion, cohesion, or
44 general durability; or that deteriorate in manner not clearly specified by
45 submitted roofing-system manufacturer's data as inherent quality of material
46 for application indicated.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Removal and replacement of roof-deck board, base sheet, temporary
2 roof/vapor retarder, insulation, and walkway products. Warranty includes
3 replacing materials as necessary.
4 c. Labor and materials to perform warranty work.
5 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of completion of roofing system.
6
7 B. Roofing Installer's Warranty:
8 1. Completed warranty form at end of Section, signed by Installer, including:
9 a. Repair or replace components of roofing system that do not comply with
10 requirements; that do not remain watertight; that fail in adhesion, cohesion, or
11 general durability; or that deteriorate in manner not clearly specified by
12 submitted roofing-system manufacturer's data as inherent quality of material
13 for application indicated. Warranty includes defects such as blisters, ridging,
14 and excessive surfacing loss.
15 b. Removal and replacement of roof-deck board, base sheet, temporary
16 roof/vapor retarder, insulation, and walkway products. Warranty includes
17 replacing materials as necessary.
18 c. Labor and materials to perform warranty work.
19 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of completion of roofing system.
20
21
22 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
24 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
25
26 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
27 following:
28 1. Sika Sarnafil Inc.
29
30 B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for
31 roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved
32 by membrane roofing manufacturer.
33
34 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
35
36 A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift
37 pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
38 defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof
39 system and flashings shall remain watertight.
40 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure
41 when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
42 2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested
43 according to ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test"
44 in FM Approvals 4470.
45
46 B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and
47 adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by
48 roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures
2 when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:
3 1. Zone 1 (Roof Area Field): 48 lbf/sq. ft.
4 2. Zone 2 (Roof Area Perimeter): 80 lbf/sq. ft.
5 3. Zone 3 (Roof Area Corners): 120 lbf/sq. ft.
6
7 D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component
8 materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as
9 part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or
10 noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals
11 Certification markings.
12 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60.
13 2. Hail-Resistance Rating: SH.
14
15 2.3 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
16
17 A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type II, Grade I, glass fiber reinforced, felt- or fleece-backed
18 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
19 a. Sarnafil Inc.; Sarnafil G410.
20 2. Thickness: 80 mils nominal.
21 3. Exposed Face Color: White.
22
23 2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
24
25 A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended
26 use and compatible with other roofing components.
27 1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
28
29 B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type,
30 reinforcement, thickness, and color as sheet membrane.
31
32 C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
33
34 D. Roof Vents: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
35 Size: Not less than 4-inch diameter.
36
37 E. Low-Rise, Urethane, Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roof system manufacturer's
38 standard spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated for low
39 VOC applications and compatibility for use with fabric-backed membrane roofing..
40
41 F. Edge Metal: Heat-weldable metal sheet, formed from manufacturer's standard
42 unsupported thermoplastic sheet membrane, not less than 20 mils thick, laminated to 0.022
43 inch thick G90 galvanized steel sheet, and capable of being formed into a variety of shapes
44 and profiles.
45
46 G. Scupper Metal: Heat-weldable metal sheet, formed from manufacturer's standard
47 unsupported thermoplastic sheet membrane, not less than 34 mils thick, laminated to 0.025
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 inch thick 304 alloy stainless steel sheet, and capable of being formed into a variety of
2 shapes and profiles.
3
4 H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum
5 bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
6
7 I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
8 corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing
9 components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
10
11 J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
12 flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,
13 termination reglets, and other accessories.
14
15 2.5 ROOF INSULATION
16
17 A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roof membrane
18 manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav-listed roof assemblies.
19
20 B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, glass-fiber
21 mat facer on both major surfaces.
22 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
23 the following:
24 a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
25 b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
26 c.Hunter Panels
27 d. Sarnafil Inc.
28 e. Seaman Corporation.
29 2. Compressive Strength: 20 psi.
30 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches.
31 4. Thickness:
32 a. Base Layer: Not less than 1-1/2 inches.
33 b. Upper Layer: As required to meet specified R-value.
34
35 C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.
36 1. Material: Match roof insulation.
37 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
38 3. Slope:
39 a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
40 b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on
41 Drawings.
42
43 2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
44
45 A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
46 intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates complying with
2 corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof
3 insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
4
5 C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to
6 attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
7 1. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-
8 applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated
9 to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
10
11 D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or
12 ASTM C 1278/C 1278M fiber-reinforced gypsum board.
13 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
14 the following:
15 a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
16 b. National Gypsum Company.
17 c. USG Corporation.
18 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
19 3. Surface Finish: Factory primed.
20
21 2.7 ASPHALT MATERIALS
22
23 A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.
24
25 2.8 WALKWAYS
26
27 A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
28 walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system
29 manufacturer.
30 1. Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches.
31 2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.
32
33
34 PART 3 - EXECUTION
35
36 3.1 EXAMINATION
37
38 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
39 requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
40 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
41 roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
42 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
43 penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
44 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
45 requirements in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking."
46 4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
47 manufacturer has passed.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture, and that minimum
2 concrete internal relative humidity is not more than 75 percent, or as recommended
3 by roofing system manufacturer, when tested according to ASTM F 2170.
4 a. Test Frequency: One test probe per each 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m), or portion
5 thereof, of roof deck, with no fewer than three test probes.
6 b. Submit test reports within 24 hours of performing tests.
7 6. Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing
8 components to roof deck have been removed.
9
10 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
11
12 3.2 PREPARATION
13
14 A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
15 system installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
16 Remove sharp projections.
17
18 B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
19 or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work
20 is taking place or when rain is forecast.
21
22 C. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's written
23 instructions.
24 1. Submit test result within 24 hours after performing tests.
25 a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously submitted
26 fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.
27
28 3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
29
30 A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM
31 Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention
32 Data Sheet 1-29.
33
34 B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
35 from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is
36 forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing.
37
38 C. Coordinate installation and transition of roofing system component serving as an air
39 barrier with air barrier specified under Section 07 27 26 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air
40 Barriers."
41
42 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
43
44 A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
45 precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.
46
47 B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
48 installing roof insulation.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Installation Over Metal Decking:
2 1. Install base layer of insulation with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in
3 adjacent rows.
4 a. Locate end joints over crests of decking.
5 b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
6 tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
7 c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
8 width.
9 d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
10 each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
11 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
12 e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
13 f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
14 g. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation using mechanical fasteners
15 specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
16 insulation to metal decks.
17 1) Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' RoofNav
18 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
19 2) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter,
20 and field of roof.
21 2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer
22 offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
23 a. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than
24 12 inches in adjacent rows.
25 b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
26 tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
27 c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
28 width.
29 d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
30 each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
31 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
32 e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
33 f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
34 g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM
35 Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss
36 Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification,
37 as follows:
38 1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation
39 adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
40
41 D. Installation Over Concrete Decks:
42 1. Install base layer of insulation with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in
43 adjacent rows.
44 a. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
45 width.
46 b. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
47 each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
48 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
2 d. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
3 e. Loosely lay base layer of insulation units over substrate.
4 f. Adhere base layer of insulation to concrete roof deck according to FM
5 Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss
6 Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification,
7 as follows:
8 1) Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4
9 gal./100 sq. ft., and allow primer to dry.
10 2) Set insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly
11 pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
12 2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer
13 offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
14 a. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than
15 12 inches in adjacent rows.
16 b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
17 tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
18 c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
19 width.
20 d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
21 each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
22 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
23 e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
24 f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
25 g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM
26 Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss
27 Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification,
28 as follows:
29 1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation
30 adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
31
32 3.5 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS
33
34 A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
35 joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in
36 each direction.
37 1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
38 intersecting sloping roof decks.
39 2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.
40 a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.
41 3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.
42 4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals'
43 RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data
44 Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows:
45 a. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing
46 and maintaining insulation in place.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
2
3 A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
4 manufacturer's written instructions.
5
6 B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.
7
8 C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
9 personnel.
10
11 D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
12 dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
13
14 E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by
15 manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to
16 splice area of roof membrane.
17
18 F. Fabric- or Fleece-Backed Roof Membrane Adhesive: Apply to substrate at rate required by
19 manufacturer, and install fabric-backed roof membrane.
20
21 G. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations,
22 penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
23
24 H. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
25
26 I. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
27 roof membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation.
28 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal
29 cut edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.
30 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample
31 areas.
32 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with
33 requirements.
34
35 J. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane
36 in place with clamping ring.
37
38 3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
39
40 A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates
41 according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
42
43 B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and
44 allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
45
46 C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
47 flashing.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 15 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld
2 side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
3
4 E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
5 termination bars.
6
7 3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
8
9 A. Flexible Walkways:
10 1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:
11 a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.
12 b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting
13 rooftop unit locations.
14 c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting
15 rooftop unit locations.
16 d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder.
17 e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path
18 connecting rooftop unit locations.
19 f. Locations indicated on Drawings.
20 g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.
21 2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.
22 3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible
23 adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
24
25 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
26
27 A. Manufacturer's Field Services: At the start of the installation, periodically as the Work
28 progresses, and after completion, furnish the services of the roofing manufacturer's
29 technical representative at the job site as necessary to advise on every phase of the Work.
30 As a minimum, furnish full-time attendance during the first 2 work days, at least once every
31 week thereafter, and furnish technical assistance to the Installer as may be required. The
32 representative shall examine the substrates before installation as well as examine the
33 completed installation before it is covered.
34 1. Fastener Tests: Perform two fastener pull out tests per SPRI FX-1 test procedure to
35 verify the integrity of the roofing fasteners and compliance with required
36 performance criteria.
37 2. Securement Tests: Perform two membrane adhesive pull tests according to SPRI IA-
38 1 to verify the integrity of the roof membrane adhesive and compliance with the
39 required performance criteria.
40 3. Field Seams: Inspect the field seams to assure manufacturer's quality requirements
41 are maintained throughout the installation period. Each field seam shall be 100%
42 inspected and a written report prepared by the roofing manufacturer's technical
43 representative shall be submitted for review prior to final acceptance.
44 4. Final inspections by the roofing membrane Manufacturer shall be coordinated at
45 least two weeks in advance with the Owner, Architect, and roofing consultant so that
46 their attendance can be properly coordinated. Final inspection reports and signed,
47 completed punch list reports by the Manufacturer shall be submitted to the Owner.
48 Submittal of the roofing warranty alone is not acceptable.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 16 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and to inspect
2 substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, sheet flashings,
3 protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.
4 1. Low-Voltage Electrical Conductance Testing: Testing agency shall survey entire roof
5 area and flashings to locate discontinuity in the roof membrane using an exposed
6 metal electrical loop to create an electrical field tested with handheld probes or a
7 scanning platform with integral perimeter electrical loops creating a complete
8 electrical field.
9 a. After testing, repair areas of discontinuities, repeat tests, and make further
10 repairs until roofing and flashing installations are contiguous.
11 1) Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility.
12 b. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial
13 discontinuities, if any.
14
15 C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
16 inspect roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare
17 inspection report.
18
19 D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate
20 that they do not comply with specified requirements.
21
22 E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
23 if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
24
25 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
26
27 A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
28 When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing
29 system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report,
30 with copies to Architect and Owner.
31
32 B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements,
33 repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and
34 deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
35
36 C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
37 procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
38
39 3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
40
41 A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of
42 ___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed
43 roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
44 1. Owner: _________________.
45 2. Address: _________________.
46 3. Building Name/Type: _________________.
47 4. Address: _________________.
48 5. Area of Work: _________________.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 17 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Acceptance Date: _________________.
2 7. Warranty Period: _________________.
3 8. Expiration Date: __________________.
4
5 B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or
6 indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective
7 materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
8
9 C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions
10 herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or
11 cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct
12 faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight
13 condition.
14
15 D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
16 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
17 building, and to building contents, caused by:
18 a. lightning;
19 b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 mph;
20 c. fire;
21 d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
22 deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
23 e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
24 equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
25 and
26 f. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
27 personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
28 Owner.
29 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null
30 and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and
31 expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so
32 designated.
33 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is
34 not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from
35 leaks or faults or defects of work.
36 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
37 Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
38 penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
39 Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the
40 extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages
41 Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and
42 void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in
43 writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage
44 or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this
45 Warranty.
46 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for,
47 but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface,
48 flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 54 00 - 18 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent
2 said change affects work covered by this Warranty.
3 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected
4 leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing
5 Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or
6 deterioration.
7 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said
8 work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and
9 resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this
10 Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for
11 performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents,
12 regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract
13 with Owner's General Contractor.
14
15 E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day
16 of ___________________, ________________.
17 1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.
18 2. Name: ______________________________________.
19 3. Title: _______________________________________.
20
21
22 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 62 00
2
3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
12 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
13 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
14
15 B. Related Requirements:
16 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and
17 blocking.
18 2. Section 07 71 00 "Roof Specialties" for roof edge metal flashings and copings.
19 3. Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for roof accessory units.
20
21 1.2 REFERENCES
22
23 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
24 1. AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
25 Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum
26 Coated Steel Substrates
27
28 B. ASTM International
29 1.ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
30 Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
31 2. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
32 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
33 3. ASTM A 666: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
34 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
35 4. ASTM A 755/A 755M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
36 Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building
37 Products
38 5. ASTM A 792/A 792M: Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
39 Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
40 6.ASTM B 32: Specification for Solder Metal
41 7.ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
42 8.ASTM C 1311: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants
43 9.ASTM D 1187: Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective
44 Coatings for Metal
45 10.ASTM D 2244: Practice for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally
46 Measured Color Coordinates
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 11.ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
2 Paint Films
3 12.ASTM F 2329: Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for
4 Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
5 Threaded Fasteners
6
7 C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
8 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
9
10 D. National Roofing Contractors Association
11 1. The NRCA Roofing Manual. Four volumes; various dates.
12
13 E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
14 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
15
16 1.3 COORDINATION
17
18 A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
19 penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
20
21 B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall
22 materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
23
24 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
25
26 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
27 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
28 equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
29 2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment
30 curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
31 3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
32 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing
33 installation.
34
35 1.5 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
38 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
39 components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
40
41 B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
42 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
43 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed
44 details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
45 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and
46 location in Project.
47 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
2 fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
3 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
4 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing
5 direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
6 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
7 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
8 counterflashings as applicable.
9 10. Include details of special conditions.
10 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
11 12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.
12
13 C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with
14 factory-applied finishes.
15
16 D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
17 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including
18 finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and
19 other attachments.
20
21 E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
22 maintenance manuals.
23
24 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
25
26 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
27 flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record
28 of successful in-service performance.
29
30 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
31
32 A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
33 might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim
34 materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
35
36 B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
37 sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing
38 and trim installation.
39
40 1.8 WARRANTY
41
42 A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
43 flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
44 specified warranty period.
45 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
46 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
47 ASTM D 2244.
48 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
5 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
7 A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
8 movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
9 defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
10 Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain
11 watertight.
12 1. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA
13 Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements
14 for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
15
16 B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
17 temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
18 failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
19 calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-
20 sky heat loss.
21 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
22 material surfaces.
23
24 2.2 SHEET METALS
25
26 A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
27 applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
28
29 B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316, dead soft, fully
30 annealed; with smooth, flat surface.
31 1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).
32
33 C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to
34 ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
35 steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating
36 designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with
37 ASTM A 755/A 755M.
38 1. Surface: Smooth, flat.
39 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
40 a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
41 less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color topcoat. Prepare, pretreat,
42 and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
43 manufacturers' written instructions.
44
45 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
46
47 A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a
48 slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl-
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to
2 withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to
3 written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
4 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
5 a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW WIP 300HT.
6 b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Grace Ice and
7 Water Shield HT.
8 c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
9 d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.
10 e. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT.
11 2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or
12 higher.
13 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F
14 (29 deg C) or lower.
15
16 B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m)minimum.
17
18 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
19
20 A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
21 miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and
22 as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.
23
24 B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
25 bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
26 manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
27 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
28 a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
29 factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
30 under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
31 b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
32 metal being fastened.
33 c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
34 internal gutter width.
35 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
36 3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
37 4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel
38 Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to
39 ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
40
41 C. Solder:
42 1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
43 by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
44
45 D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant
46 tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
47 nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade,
2 class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
3 remain watertight.
4
5 F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
6 polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
7 movement.
8
9 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
10
11 A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
12 recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
13 metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing
14 and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
15 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
16 performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
17 metal.
18 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
19 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
20 buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
21 folded back to form hems.
22 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
23 fasteners on faces exposed to view.
24
25 B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
26 installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines
27 indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of
28 alignment of matching profiles.
29
30 C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
31 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
32 deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
33 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
34
35 D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
36 provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
37 standard.
38
39 E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
40 from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
41
42 F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
43 elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
44 use.
45
46 G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
2
3 A. Parapet Overflow Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure
4 flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending
5 4 inches (100 mm) beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the
6 following materials as indicated on Drawings:
7 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
8 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
9
10 2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
11
12 A. Roof and Roof-to-Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from one of the
13 following materials:
14 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch (0.86 mm) thick.
15 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.034 inch (0.86 mm) thick.
16
17 B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from one of the
18 following materials:
19 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
20 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
21
22 C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from one of the
23 following materials:
24 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
25 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
26
27 D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
28 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
29 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
30
31 E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
32 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
33
34 F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
35 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
36
37 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
38
39 A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate sill flashings to extend 4 inches
40 beyond wall openings. Form sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the
41 following materials as indicated on Drawings:
42 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
43 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
44 3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
45
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
6 requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting
7 performance of the Work.
8 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
9 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
10 anchored.
11 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or
12 backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
13
14 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
15
16 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
17
18 A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
19 Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
20 restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing
21 underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of
22 not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap
23 side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover
24 underlayment within 14 days.
25
26 B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and
27 trim.
28
29 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
30
31 A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
32 securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,
33 protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
34 complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
35 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform,
36 neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
37 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
38 performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
39 fabricating sheet metal.
40 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least
41 two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
42 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
43 buckling and tool marks.
44 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
45 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
46
47 B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
48 pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
2 separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
3
4 C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
5 movement joints at maximum of 36 feet with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of
6 corner or intersection.
7 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
8 deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
9 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
10
11 D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
12 fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
13
14 E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
15 minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a
16 tight installation.
17
18 F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
19 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
20 members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely
21 conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and
22 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way.
23 Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do
24 not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
25 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00
26 "Joint Sealants."
27
28 G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
29 edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning
30 where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.
31 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.
32 2. Do not use torches for soldering.
33 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
34 Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
35 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless
36 steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and
37 soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning
38 and neutralization.
39
40 3.4 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
41
42 A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system
43 according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation
44 of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
45
46 B. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges
47 to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal with elastomeric sealant
2 to scupper.
3 2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.
4
5 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
6
7 A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
8 and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units
9 true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are
10 permanently watertight and weather resistant.
11
12 B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with
13 top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over
14 base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
15
16 C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
17 flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
18 Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints
19 minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Secure in waterproof manner by means of anchor and
20 washer at 36-inch (910-mm) centers unless otherwise indicated.
21
22 D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
23 installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and
24 clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
25
26 3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
27
28 A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
29 according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
30 flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows and louvers.
31
32 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
33
34 A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
35 tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on
36 Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of
37 matching profiles.
38
39 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
40
41 A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
42 weathering.
43
44 B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
45
46 C. Clean off excess sealants.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 62 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
2 trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
3 instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused
4 materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim
5 manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during
6 construction.
7
8 E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
9 beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
10
11
12 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 71 00
2
3 ROOF SPECIALTIES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Manufactured copings.
12 2. Manufactured reglets and counterflashings.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
17 1.AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
18 Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum
19 Coated Steel Substrates
20 2.AAMA 2604: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
21 Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
22 Panels
23
24 B. ASTM International
25 1.ASTM A 153/A 153M: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
26 Hardware
27 2.ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
28 Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
29 3.ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
30 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
31 4.ASTM A 666: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
32 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
33 5.ASTM A 755/A 755M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
34 Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building
35 Products
36 6.ASTM B 32: Specification for Solder Metal
37 7.ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
38 8.ASTM B 221: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
39 Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
40 9.ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
41 10.ASTM C 1311: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants
42 11.ASTM D 226: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
43 Waterproofing
44 12.ASTM D 1187: Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective
45 Coatings for Metal
46 13.ASTM D 1970: Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
47 Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 14.ASTM D 2244: Test Method for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color
2 Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
3 15.ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
4 Paint Films
5 16.ASTM D 4397: Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial,
6 and Agricultural Applications
7 17.ASTM D 4586: Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
8 18.ASTM F 2329: Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for
9 Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
10 Threaded Fasteners
11
12 C. FM Approvals
13 1. RoofNav (Updated continuously)
14
15 D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
16 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
17
18 E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
19 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
20
21 F. Single Ply Roofing Industry
22 1. SPRI ES-1: Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing
23 Systems (ANSI)
24
25 1.3 SUBMITTALS
26
27 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
28 descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
29
30 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
31 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer
32 recycled content and cost.
33 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
34 3. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
35
36 C. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations,
37 keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-
38 assembled work. Include the following:
39 1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including
40 direction of expansion and contraction.
41 2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments.
42 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
43 4. Details of special conditions.
44
45 D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied
46 color finishes.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Samples for Verification: For copings and reglets and counterflashings made from 12-inch
2 lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and
3 attachments.
4
5 F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
6 qualified testing agency, for copings.
7
8 G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
9
10 H. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
11
12 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14 A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
15 demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
16 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
17 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
18 deviations in writing.
19 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
20 of Substantial Completion.
21
22 B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
23 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers
24 whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing
25 materials and accessories.
26 2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness
27 and attachment to structural members.
28 3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that
29 will affect roof specialties.
30
31 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
32
33 A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
34 denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and
35 masonry.
36
37 B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and
38 high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.
39
40 1.6 WARRANTY
41 A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
42 manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of
43 deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
44 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
45 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
46 ASTM D 2244.
47 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
48 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2
3
4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
5
6 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
7
8 A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
9 thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement
10 due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
11
12 B.Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
13 content not less than 50 percent.
14
15 C. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals'
16 "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification. Identify materials with FM
17 Approvals' markings.
18
19 D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to
20 SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:
21 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
22
23 E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
24 temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing
25 of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
26 effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal
27 movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
28 gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
29 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
30
31 2.2 EXPOSED METALS
32
33 A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,
34 with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
35 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
36 2. Mill Finish: As manufactured.
37 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
38 metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
39 a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and
40 fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin
41 by weight.
42 b. Concealed Surface: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-
43 colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash
44 coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
45
46 B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
47 type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Exposed High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
2 exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
3 instructions.
4 a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2604. System consisting of primer and
5 fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin
6 by weight.
7
8 C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
9 designation.
10 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
11 2. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.
12 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply
13 with ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
14 surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
15 a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and
16 fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin
17 by weight.
18
19 2.3 CONCEALED METALS
20
21 A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type
22 of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.
23
24 B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
25 type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.
26
27 C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.
28
29 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
30
31 A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
32 miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
33
34 B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
35 meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
36 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching
37 color of sheet metal.
38 2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
39 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-
40 dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
41 C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade,
42 class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each
43 application.
44 D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
45 polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
46 movement.
47
48 E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
3 application.
4
5 2.5 COPINGS
6
7 A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section
8 lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and
9 concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.
10 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
11 of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
12 into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
13 a.ATAS International, Inc.
14 b.Castle Metal Products.
15 c.Cheney Flashing Company.
16 d.Hickman Company, W. P.
17 e.Metal-Era, Inc.
18 f.Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
19 g.Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
20 2. Coping-Cap Material: Extruded aluminum, thickness as required to meet
21 performance requirements.
22 a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
23 b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
24 3. Coping-Cap Material: Zinc-coated steel, nominal thickness as required to meet
25 performance requirements.
26 a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
27 b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
28 1. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
29 2. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as coping.
30 3. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg
31 fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
32 4. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide,
33 with integral cleats.
34 5. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.
35
36 2.6 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
37
38 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
39 following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
40 Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
41 1.ATAS International, Inc.
42 2.Castle Metal Products.
43 1.Cheney Flashing Company.
44 2.Fry Reglet Corporation.
45 3.Hickman Company, W. P.
46 4.Metal-Era, Inc.
47 5.Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
2 counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:
3 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
4 2. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.
5 3. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch thickness.
6 4. Corners: Factory mitered and soldered or continuously welded.
7 5. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate,
8 with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for
9 sealant at top edge.
10 6. Concrete Type, Embedded: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of
11 concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and
12 guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.
13 7. Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in
14 masonry mortar joint.
15 8. Multiuse Type, Embedded: For multiuse embedment in masonry mortar joints.
16
17 C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by
18 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets or through-wall-
19 flashing receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following
20 exposed metal:
21 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
22 2. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.
23 3. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch thickness.
24
25 D. Accessories:
26 1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
27 flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
28 counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.
29 2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
30 counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
31
32 E. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
33 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
34 .
35 F. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 (bright, polished directional satin).
36
37 G. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
38 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
39
40 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
41
42 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
43 recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
44
45 B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
46 strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
2 Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
3 range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
4
5
6 PART 3 - EXECUTION
7
8 3.1 EXAMINATION
9
10 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
11 dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
12
13 B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
14
15 C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
16 anchored.
17
18 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
19
20 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
21
22 A. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of
23 mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
24 lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
25
26 B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by
27 underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment
28 manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at
29 low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-
30 1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
31
32 C. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of
33 mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
34 lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
35
36 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
37
38 A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor
39 roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
40 Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous
41 items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
42 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-
43 canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
44 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
45 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
46 Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
47 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
48 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
3 from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
4 bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
5 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties with
6 bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
7 construction.
8
9 C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
10 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of
11 corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
12 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set
13 joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately
14 for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
15
16 D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate [wood blocking or sheathing not
17 less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws] [substrate not
18 less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
19
20 E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
21
22 F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely
23 concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
24
25 G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
26 edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except reduce pre-tinning where
27 pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets
28 using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder
29 and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from
30 exposed surfaces.
31
32 3.4 COPING INSTALLATION
33
34 A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices
35 with concealed fasteners.
36
37 B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.
38 1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor
39 plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets
40 performance requirements.
41
42 3.5 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION
43
44 A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
45 concealed fasteners.
46
47 B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing
48 to meet performance requirements.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 71 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 3.6 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
3
4 A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base
5 flashings.
6
7 B. Embedded Reglets:
8 1. In Cast-In-Place Concrete Walls: Install reglets in formwork prior to placement of
9 concrete, positioned and oriented to receive roofing and counterflashing in outer
10 face exterior concrete walls.
11 2. In Masonry Walls: Install reglets in masonry oriented and positioned to receive
12 roofing and counterflashing where they are shown to be built into masonry
13
14 C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without
15 embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted
16 counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.
17
18 D. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure
19 that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing
20 joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant. Fit
21 counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
22
23 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
24
25 A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
26 weathering.
27
28 B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
29
30 C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are
31 installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused
32 fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in
33 a clean condition during construction.
34
35 D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
36 finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
37
38
39 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 72 00
2
3 ROOF ACCESSORIES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Roof hatches.
12 2. Hatch-type heat and smoke vents.
13
14 B. Related Sections:
15 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and
16 stairs for access to roof hatches.
17 2. Section 07 61 00 "Sheet Metal Roofing" for shop- and field-formed roof curbs and
18 snow guards for sheet metal roofing.
19 3. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal
20 flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet
21 metal trim and accessories.
22 4. Section 07 71 00 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops,
23 gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.
24 5. Section 23 34 23 "HVAC Power Ventilators" for power roof-mounted ventilators.
25 6. Section 28 31 11 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for interconnects to
26 automatically operated heat and smoke vents.
27
28 1.2 REFERENCES
29
30 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
31 1.AAMA 620: Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on
32 Coil Coated Architectural Aluminum Substrates
33 2.AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
34 Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum
35 Coated Steel Substrates
36 3.AAMA 2603: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
37 Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
38
39 B. American Wood Protection Association
40 1. AWPA C2: Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties, and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by
41 Pressure Processes
42
43 C. ASTM International
44 1.ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
45 2.ASTM A 53/A 53M: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
46 Coated, Welded and Seamless
47 3.ASTM A 123/A 123M: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
48 Iron and Steel Products
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4.ASTM A 153/A 153M: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
2 Hardware
3 5.ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
4 Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
5 6.ASTM A 500: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
6 Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
7 7.ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
8 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
9 8.ASTM A 666: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
10 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
11 9.ASTM A 755/A 755M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
12 Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building
13 Products
14 10.ASTM A 780: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
15 Galvanized Coatings
16 11.ASTM A 792/A 792M: Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
17 Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
18 12.ASTM A 1011/A 1011M: Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
19 Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
20 Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
21 13.ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
22 14.ASTM B 209M: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
23 [Metric]
24 15.ASTM B 221: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
25 Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tube
26 16.ASTM B 221M: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
27 Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]
28 17.ASTM C 726: Specification for Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board
29 18.ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
30 19.ASTM C 1289: Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
31 Insulation Board
32 20.ASTM C 1311: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants
33 21.ASTM D 226: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
34 Waterproofing
35 22.ASTM D 256: Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance
36 of Plastics
37 23.ASTM D 1187: Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective
38 Coatings for Metal
39 24.ASTM D 2244: Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances of Color Differences
40 from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
41 25.ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
42 Paint Films
43 26.ASTM D 4397: Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial
44 and Agricultural Applications
45 27.ASTM D 4586: Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
46 28.ASTM D 4802: Specification for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 29.ASTM F 2329: Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for
2 Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
3 Threaded Fasteners
4
5 D. Code of Federal Regulations
6 1. 29 CFR - Labor, Chapter XVII - Occupational Safety and Health Administration,
7 Department of Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards,"
8 Subpart 1910.23 - "Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes."
9
10 E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
11 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
12
13 F. NFPA
14 1.NFPA 204: Smoke and Heat Venting
15
16 G. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
17 1. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1: Joint Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-SP 5/NACE
18 No. 1: White Metal Blast Cleaning
19 2. SSPC-SP 8: Surface Preparation Specification No. 8: Pickling
20
21 H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
22 1.UL 793: Automatically Operated Roof Vents for Smoke and Heat
23 2.UL 972: Standard for Burglary Resisting Glazing Material
24
25 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
26
27 A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
28 thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement
29 due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
30
31 1.4 SUBMITTALS
32
33 A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details,
34 material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
35
36 B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and
37 attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions.
38 Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
39
40 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on
41 Samples of size to adequately show color.
42
43 D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and
44 roof-mounted items. Show the following:
45 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
46 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
47 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
48 piping, and conduit.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Required clearances.
2
3 E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
4
5 F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and
6 maintenance manuals.
7
8 1.5 COORDINATION
9
10 A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base
11 flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,
12 secure, and noncorrosive installation.
13
14 B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
15 supported.
16
17 1.6 WARRANTY
18
19 A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
20 manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of
21 deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
22 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
23 a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
24 ASTM D 2244.
25 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
26 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
27 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
28
29
30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31
32 2.1 METAL MATERIALS
33
34 A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
35 designation[ and mill phosphatized for field painting where indicated].
36 1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.
37 2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and
38 white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum
39 dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).
40 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
41 ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
42 surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
43 a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer
44 and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF
45 resin by weight.
46 4. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,
47 apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
48 and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm)
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying
2 and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
3 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
4 acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a
5 minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
6
7 B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), manufacturer's standard alloy for finish
8 required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
9 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry
10 film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written
11 instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
12 2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
13 acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a
14 minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
15
16 C. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), manufacturer's standard
17 alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill
18 finished.
19
20 D. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
21
22 E. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
23 unless otherwise indicated.
24
25 F. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube.
26
27 G. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to
28 ASTM A 123/A 123M.
29
30 H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
31
32 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
33
34 A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
35 miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
36
37 B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated.
38
39 C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
40 aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with
41 AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
42
43 D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
44
45 E. Underlayment:
46 1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
47 2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with
48 ASTM D 4397.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.
2
3 F. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application
4 and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being
5 fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the
6 following unless otherwise indicated:
7 1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300
8 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or
9 ASTM F 2329.
10 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
11 3. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300
12 stainless steel.
13 4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
14
15 G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or
16 silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
17
18 H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by roof
19 accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and
20 use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
21
22 I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
23 polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
24
25 J. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
26 application.
27
28 2.3 ROOF HATCH
29
30 A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated single-walled curbs, welded
31 or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing
32 and weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck-
33 mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
34 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
35 of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
36 into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
37 a.AES Industries, Inc.
38 b.Babcock-Davis.
39 c.Bilco Company (The).
40 d.Bristolite Skylights.
41 e.Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
42 f.Dur-Red Products.
43 g.Hi Pro International, Inc.
44 h.J. L. Industries, Inc.
45 i.Metallic Products Corp.
46 j.Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
47 k.Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The).
48 l.Nystrom.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 m.O'Keeffe's Inc.
2 n.Pate Company (The).
3 o.Precision Ladders, LLC.
4
5 B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 48” x 48”.
6
7 C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa)
8 internal uplift load.
9
10 D. Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) thick.
11 1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
12 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
13
14 E. Construction:
15 1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.
16 2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
17 metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
18 3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
19 4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
20 profile.
21 5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise
22 indicated.
23 6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter
24 curb height that is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that
25 obstructs water flow.
26
27 F. Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system,
28 and padlock hasps inside and outside.
29 1. Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches (2130 mm).
30
31 G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
32 fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete
33 installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and
34 authorities having jurisdiction.
35 1. Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.
36 2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) in diameter or
37 galvanized-steel tube, 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) in diameter.
38 3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches (50 mm) high by 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick.
39 4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21
40 inches (533 mm)in diameter.
41 5. Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end.
42 6. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing
43 system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.
44 7. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with
45 prefabricated end fittings.
46 8. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
47 handrail and railing members.
48 9. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 10. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.
2 11. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
3 a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4
5 H. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-
6 access ladder.
7 1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to
8 closed position.
9 2. Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.
10 3. Material: Steel tube.
11 4. Post: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter pipe.
12 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.
13 a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
14
15 2.4 HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS
16
17 A. Hatch-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard, with double-walled
18 insulated curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral
19 condensation gutter, and cap flashing. Fabricate with insulated double-walled lid and
20 continuous weathertight perimeter lid gaskets, and equip with automatic self-lifting
21 mechanisms and UL-listed fusible links rated at 165 deg F (74 deg C).
22 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
23 of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
24 into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
25 a.Babcock-Davis.
26 b.Bilco Company (The).
27 c.Bristolite Skylights.
28 d.Dur-Red Products.
29 e.Hi Pro International, Inc.
30 f.J. L. Industries, Inc.
31 g.Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
32 h.Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The).
33 i.Nystrom.
34 j.O'Keeffe's Inc.
35 k.Pate Company (The).
36 l.Western Canwell.
37 2. Type and Size: Double-leaf lid, 48” x 48”.
38 3. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external live load and 30-lbf/sq. ft. (1.4-
39 kPa) internal uplift load.
40 a. When release is actuated, lid shall open against 10-lbf/sq. ft. (0.5-kPa) snow or
41 wind load and lock in position.
42 4. Heat and Smoke Vent Standard: Provide units that have been tested and listed to
43 comply with UL 793 and are FM Approved.
44 5. Sound Rating: STC 50
45 6. Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch
46 (2.01 mm) thick.
47 a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
48 b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 7. Construction:
2 a. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.
3 b. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's
4 standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
5 c. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as
6 metal curb.
7 d. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise
8 indicated.
9 e. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with
10 perimeter curb height that is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or
11 cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
12 f. Security Grille: Provide where indicated.
13 8. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant or hot-dip galvanized; with
14 hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and
15 outside operation of lids.
16
17 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
18
19 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
20 recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
21
22 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
23 Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
24 range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
25
26
27 PART 3 - EXECUTION
28
29 3.1 EXAMINATION
30
31 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
32 dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
33
34 B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
35 anchored.
36
37 C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
38
39 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
40
41 3.2 INSTALLATION
42
43 A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
44 1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,
45 jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
46 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
47 loads.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
2 complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
3 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking,
4 or loosening of fasteners and seals.
5
6 B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
7 from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
8 bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
9 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous
10 coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
11 2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
12 substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install
13 a course of polyethylene sheet.
14 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers
15 of roof accessories for waterproof performance.
16
17 C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
18
19 D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with
20 each other.
21
22 E. Roof-Hatch Installation:
23 1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.
24 2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
25 mechanism and hardware.
26 3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
27 4. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
28
29 F. Heat and Smoke Vent Installation:
30 1. Install heat and smoke vent so top perimeter surfaces are level.
31 2. Install and test heat and smoke vents and their components for proper operation
32 according to NFPA 204.
33
34 3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
35
36 A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
37 galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
38
39 B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
40 according to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
41
42 C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
43
44 D. Clean off excess sealants.
45
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 72 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
2 finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3
4
5 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 84 13
2
3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A.This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-
11 resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
12 penetrating items.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. ASTM International
17 1. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
18 2. ASTM E 814: Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
19 3. ASTM E 2174: Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops
20
21 B. Code of Federal Regulations
22 1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
23 for Architectural Coatings
24
25 C. FM Global
26 1. FM Global 4991: Approval of Firestop Contractors (FCIA)
27
28 D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
29 1. UL 1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops (ANSI)
30 2. Fire Resistance Directory.
31
32 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
33
34 A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both
35 empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration
36 firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
37 requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-
38 resistance rating of construction penetrated.
39
40 B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
41 determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
42 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
43 indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
44 constructions penetrated.
45 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration
46 firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect
47 penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable
48 floor areas:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
2 b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
3 3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in
4 smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings
5 indicated at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C).
6
7 C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
8 damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
9 conditions both during and after construction.
10 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
11 moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
12 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width
13 and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of
14 supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
15 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
16 systems not requiring removal of insulation.
17
18 D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-
19 spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined
20 per ASTM E 84.
21
22 1.4 SUBMITTALS
23
24 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
25 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
26 1.Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
27 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for
28 low-emitting materials.]
29
30 C. Product Schedule: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation,
31 including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of
32 construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of
33 penetrating item.
34 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
35 agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
36 illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop
37 system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or
38 equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
39
40 D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
41
42 E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
43 qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and
4 fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
5
6 B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
7 "Approval of Firestop Contractors."
8
9 C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that
10 comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance
11 Requirements" Article:
12 1. Tested per ASTM E 814 by UL.
13 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing
14 standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated
15 systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
16
17 D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-
18 penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
19
20 E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become
21 concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's
22 inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
23
24 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
25
26 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or
27 substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping
28 manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other
29 causes.
30
31 B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using
32 natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
33
34 1.7 COORDINATION
35
36 A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
37 firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
38
39 B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
40 penetration firestopping.
41
42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
45 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
46
47 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
48 following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. A/D (Carboline) Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2 2. Grace Construction Products.
3 3. Hilti, Inc.
4 4. Nelson Firestop Products.
5 5. RectorSeal Corporation.
6 6. Specified Technologies Inc.
7 7. 3M Fire Protection Products.
8 8. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
9
10 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
11
12 A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
13 according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
14 original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems
15 shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with
16 penetrating items if any.
17
18 B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
19 determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
20 differential of 0.01-inch wg.
21 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier wall, smoke-barrier walls,
22 and fire partitions.
23 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
24
25 C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
26 determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
27 differential of 0.01-inch wg.
28 1. Horizontal assemblies include floor assemblies.
29 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
30 penetrated.
31 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
32 penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
33
34 D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
35 per UL 1479.
36 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at
37 both ambient and elevated temperatures.
38
39 E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
40 developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84
41 1.Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
42 2.Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
43 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
44 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
45 Chambers."
46
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed
2 to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components
3 specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and
4 inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
5 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
6 a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
7 b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials
8 to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
9 c. Fire-rated form board.
10 d. Fillers for sealants.
11 2. Temporary forming materials.
12 3. Substrate primers.
13 4. Collars.
14 5. Steel sleeves.
15
16 2.3 FILL MATERIALS
17
18 A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place
19 concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a
20 radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete
21 formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
22
23 B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure
24 during exposure to moisture.
25
26 C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
27 intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
28
29 D. Pre-installed Firestop Devices for Telecommunications Cabling: Firestop devices designed
30 to allow cables to penetrate fire-rated walls without the need for additional firestopping.
31 Device shall include built-in firestop that will function through the range of 0% - partial –
32 100% visual cable fill. Device shall allow cables to be easily added or removed without the
33 need to remove or reinstall firestopping materials.
34 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
35 based on initial cable volume installed, plus 20 percent additional capacity:
36 a. Hilti Firestop Speed Sleeve (CP 653).
37 1)Use in conjunction with CFS-SL GP (Gang Plate) when more than 1
38 device is required
39 b. Hilti CFS-CC Cable Collar – Utilize when existing cables require firestop
40 device.
41 c. Specified Technologies Inc.; EZ Path.
42
43 E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced
44 elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
45
46 F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no
47 solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 G. Intumescent Sealants: Gungrade, water-based intumescent acrylic dispersion sealant
2 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
3 a. Hilti, Inc.; FS-ONE.
4
5 H. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with
6 aluminum foil on one side.
7
8 I. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic
9 cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
10 form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
11
12 J. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases
13 filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-
14 retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to
15 protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.
16
17 K. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
18 expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
19
20 L. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
21 grade indicated below:
22 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
23 horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped
24 surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening
25 conditions.
26
27 2.4 MIXING
28
29 A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration
30 firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
31 water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
32 mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality
33 with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
34
35
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION
37
38 3.1 EXAMINATION
39
40 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
41 requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
42 conditions affecting performance of the Work.
43
44 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
45
46 3.2 PREPARATION
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration
2 firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
3 requirements:
4 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
5 materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
6 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
7 capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose
8 particles remaining from cleaning operation.
9 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
10
11 B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
12 manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;
13 do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
14 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
15 adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would
16 otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used
17 to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal
18 with substrates.
19
20 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
21
22 A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
23 Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation
24 instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
25
26 B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to
27 support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-
28 sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
29 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
30 forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
31 firestop systems.
32
33 C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following
34 results:
35 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
36 penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
37 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
38 penetrating items.
39 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
40 smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
41
42 D. Identification: Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or
43 plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150
44 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to
45 remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels.
46 Include the following information on labels:
47 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb.
48 Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 13 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
2 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
3 agency.
4 4. Date of installation.
5 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6 6. Installer's name.
7
8 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
9
10 A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect
11 through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with
12 ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting
13 inspections, and preparing test reports.
14
15 B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so
16 they comply with requirements.
17
18 C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only
19 after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
20
21 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
22
23 A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and
24 with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping
25 manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
26
27 B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
28 that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
29 Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut
30 out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials
31 to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 84 46
2
3 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
12 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
13 3. Joints in smoke barriers.
14
15 B. Related Sections:
16 1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated
17 walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.
18 2. Section 07 95 00 "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive architectural joint systems.
19
20 1.2 REFERENCES
21
22 A. ASTM International
23 1. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
24 2. ASTM E 119: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
25 3. ASTM E 1966: Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
26 4. ASTM E 2307: Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
27 Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus
28
29 B. Code of Federal Regulations
30 1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
31 for Architectural Coatings
32
33 C. FM Global
34 1. FM Global 4991: Approval of Firestop Contractors (FCIA)
35
36 D. Intertek ETL SEMCO
37 1. Directory of Listed Building Products.
38
39 E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
40 1. UL 2079: Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems (ANSI)
41 2. Fire Resistance Directory.
42 3. Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements.
43
44 1.3 SUBMITTALS
45
46 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
2 1.Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
3 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for
4 low-emitting materials.
5
6 C. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design
7 designation of qualified testing agency.
8 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's
9 illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration,
10 with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's
11 fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-
12 rated assembly.
13
14 D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
15
16 E. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been
17 installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
18
19 F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
20 qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.
21
22 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24 A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
25 FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found
26 to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
27
28 B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar
29 in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
30 construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
31 necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
32 requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to
33 Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on
34 buyer.
35
36 C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the
37 following requirements:
38 1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable
39 to authorities having jurisdiction.
40 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
41 referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying
42 with the following requirements:
43 a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified
44 testing agency.
45 b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
46 designations listed by the following:
47 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
48 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
3
4 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
5
6 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or
7 substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system
8 manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
9
10 B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using
11 natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
12
13 1.6 COORDINATION
14
15 A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
16 according to specified requirements.
17
18 B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.
19
20 C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system
21 installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
22
23
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
26 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
27
28 A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
29 spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
30 and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive
31 joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building
32 movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
33
34 B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint
35 systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
36 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or
37 floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
38 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of
39 construction they will join.
40 3.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
41 the following:
42 a.A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
43 b.CEMCO.
44 c.Fire Trak Corp.
45 d.Grace Construction Products.
46 e.Hilti, Inc.
47 f.Johns Manville.
48 g.Nelson Firestop Products.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 h.NUCO Inc.
2 i.Passive Fire Protection Partners.
3 j.RectorSeal Corporation.
4 k.Specified Technologies Inc.
5 l.3M Fire Protection Products.
6 m.Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
7 n.USG Corporation.
8
9 C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
10 with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential
11 of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa) or ASTM E 2307.
12 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor
13 assembly.
14 2.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
15 the following:
16 a.A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
17 b.Grace Construction Products.
18 c.Hilti, Inc.
19 d.Johns Manville.
20 e.Nelson Firestop Products.
21 f.NUCO Inc.
22 g.Passive Fire Protection Partners.
23 h.RectorSeal Corporation.
24 i.Specified Technologies Inc.
25 j.3M Fire Protection Products.
26 k.Thermafiber, Inc.
27 l.Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
28 m.USG Corporation.
29
30 D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per
31 UL 2079.
32 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg
33 (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
34 2.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
35 the following:
36 a.A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
37 b.Grace Construction Products.
38 c.Hilti, Inc.
39 d.Johns Manville.
40 e.Nelson Firestop Products.
41 f.NUCO Inc.
42 g.Passive Fire Protection Partners.
43 h.RectorSeal Corporation.
44 i.Specified Technologies Inc.
45 j.3M Fire Protection Products.
46 k.Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
47 l.USG Corporation.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
2 developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
3 1.Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
4 2.Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
5 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
6 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
7 Chambers."
8
9 F. Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing
10 and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
11 Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
12 Scale Environmental Chambers."
13
14 G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and
15 forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required.
16 Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by
17 the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.
18
19
20 PART 3 - EXECUTION
21
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23
24 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
25 requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting
26 performance of the Work.
27
28 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
29
30 3.2 PREPARATION
31
32 A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
33 comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the
34 following requirements:
35 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
36 adhesion of fill materials.
37 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
38 optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
39 operation.
40 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
41
42 B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
43 manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
44 primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
45
46 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
47 contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
48 would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-
2 resistive joint system's seal with substrates.
3
4 3.3 INSTALLATION
5
6 A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written
7 installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
8
9 B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
10 during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
11 depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
12 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
13 forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
14 fire-resistive joint system.
15
16 C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
17 following results:
18 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve
19 fire-resistance ratings indicated.
20 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
21 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
22 produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
23
24 3.4 IDENTIFICATION
25
26 A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
27 permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels
28 will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical
29 fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels
30 to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
31 1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
32 Management of Any Damage."
33 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
34 3. Designation of applicable testing agency.
35 4. Date of installation.
36 5. Manufacturer's name.
37 6. Installer's name.
38
39 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
40
41 A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
42 inspections.
43
44 B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to
45 testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.
46
47 C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after
48 inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 84 46 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
3
4 A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and
5 with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system
6 manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
7
8 1. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
9 ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of
10 Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection,
11 cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately
12 and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with
13 specified requirements.
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 07 92 00
2
3 JOINT SEALERS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Preparation of interior and exterior joint substrate surfaces.
12 2. Install sealers, primers, bond breakers, and fillers as required.
13 3. Install interior and exterior joint sealants.
14
15 1.2 REFERENCES
16
17 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
18 1. ASTM C 834: Specification for Latex Sealants.
19 2. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
20 3. ASTM C 1087: Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid Applied Sealants
21 with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems.
22 4. ASTM C 1193: Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
23 5. ASTM C 1311: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
24 6. ASTM C 1330: Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-
25 Applied Sealants.
26 7. ASTM C 1521: Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant
27 Joints.
28
29 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
30
31 A. Design Requirements:
32 1. Exterior: Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to
33 establish and to maintain watertight and air tight continuous seals without causing
34 staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
35 2. Interior: Provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to maintain airtight
36 continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint
37 substrates.
38
39 1.4 SUBMITTALS
40
41 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, recommendations and
42 instructions for surface preparation, sealant and backing installation, and related materials.
43
44 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
45 1.Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
46 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-
47 emitting materials.
48
49 C. Samples: Submit standard color charts for selection; furnish samples of custom colors as
50 applicable.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information, using same “Type” designations
2 indicated in Specifications:
3 1. Joint-sealant application and substrate.
4 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
5 3. Joint-sealant formulation.
6
7 E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,
8 indicating the following:
9 1. Materials forming each joint substrate and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
10 compatibility and adhesion with each joint sealant.
11 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
12 preparation needed for adhesion.
13
14 F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
15
16 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
17
18 A. Installer Qualifications: Provide documentation of minimum three years experience
19 approved by sealant manufacturer.
20
21 B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to installation of sealant, meet at project site to review
22 material selections, joint preparations, installation procedures and coordination with other
23 trades. Meeting shall include the sealant Installer, Contractor, Manufacturer's representative,
24 and representatives of other trades or subcontractors affected by sealant installation.
25 Examine sample installations which have been prepared and determine [and record] whether
26 everyone present is in agreement that the proposed installations are likely to perform as
27 required. Notify Architect prior to meeting as to time, place and date of meeting.
28
29 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
30
31 A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,
32 for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
33 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
34 techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
35 substrates.
36 2. Submit not fewer than four pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates,
37 shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
38 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
39 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
40 corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
41 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
42 that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for
43 adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching,
44 identically, those submitted.
45
46 1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING
47
48 A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
49 indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
50 life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendation to prevent
2 their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminates, or
3 other causes.
4
5 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
6
7 A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
8 following conditions:
9 1. When ambient and substrate conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
10 manufacturer or below 40 deg. F.
11 2. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
12 applications indicated.
13 3. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
14 from joint substrates.
15 4. When joint substrates are wet.
16
17 1.9 WARRANTY
18
19 A. Exterior Sealants:
20 1. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to
21 repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
22 requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
23 a. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
24 2. Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Silicone Sealants: Manufacturer's standard form in
25 which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those
26 that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section
27 within specified warranty period.
28 a. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
29
30
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
33 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
34
35 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
36
37 2.2 SEALING AND CAULKING MATERIALS
38
39 A.VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:
40 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
41 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of
42 250 g/L or less.
43 3. Sealants and sealant primers for porous substrates shall have a VOC content of[775 g/L
44 or less.
45 4.Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
46 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
47 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
48 Chambers."
49
50 B. Polyurethane Sealant - Type No. 1:
51 1. One-component, non-sag, low modulus, moisture curing, polyurethane joint sealant;
52 ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, and O.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Acceptable Products:
2 a. Dymonic by Tremco.
3 b. MasterSeal NP 1 by BASF.
4 c. Dynatrol I-XL by Pecora.
5 d. Sikaflex 1a by Sika.
6
7 C. Polyurethane Sealant - Type No. 2: Not Used.
8
9 D. Polyurethane Sealant - Type No. 3:
10 1. One-component, low-modulus, moisture curing, cold applied, elastomeric, self-leveling,
11 pourable, horizontal grade polyurethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P,
12 Class 25, Use T, M.
13 2. Acceptable Products:
14 a. Vulkem 45 by Tremco.
15 b. Sikaflex 1c SL by Sika.
16 c. MasterSeal SL 1 by BASF.
17 d. Urexpan NR-201 by Pecora.
18
19 E. Polyurethane Sealant Type - Type No. 4:
20 1. Multi-component, non-sag, chemically curing, cold applied, elastomeric, traffic grade,
21 polyurethane joint sealant exceeding 1 percent slope; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P,
22 Class 25, Use T.
23 2. Acceptable Products:
24 a. MasterSeal SL 2 by BASF.
25 b. Vulkem 245 by Tremco.
26 c. DynaTrol II-SG by Pecora.
27 d. Sikaflex 2c NS TG by Sika.
28
29 F. Polyurethane Sealant - Type No. 5: Not Used.
30
31 G. Polyurethane Sealant - Type No. 6: Not Used.
32
33 H. Acrylic Latex Sealant - Type No. 7:
34 1. One-component, fungicidal, readily paintable acrylic latex calk; ASTM C 834.
35 2. Acceptable Products:
36 a. Tremflex 834 Acrylic Latex by Tremco.
37 b. Sonolac by BASF.
38 c. AC-20 + Silicone by Pecora.
39 d. RCS20 by GE Silicones.
40
41 I. Silicone Sealant - Type No. 8:
42 1. One-component, moisture cured, non-staining, silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type
43 S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M, A, and O.
44 2. Acceptable Products:
45 a. 756 SMS by Dow Corning.
46 b. Silpruf SCS9000 by General Electric.
47 c. Spectrem 3 and Spectrem 4-TS by Tremco.
48 d. 890 and 890 FTS by Pecora.
49 e. Sikasil WS 290 or 295 by Sika.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 J. Silicone Sealant Type - No. 9:
2 1. One-component, low-modulus, moisture cured, elastomeric, silicone joint sealant; ASTM
3 C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, A, G, M, and O.
4 2. Acceptable Products:
5 a. DC-790 by Dow Corning.
6 b. Silpruf LM SCS2700 by General Electric.
7 c. Spectrem-1 by Tremco.
8 d. 890 by Pecora.
9 e. Sikasil WS 290 by Sika.
10
11 K. Silicone Sealant - Type No. 10:
12 1. One-component, medium modulus, moisture cured, elastomeric silicone joint sealant;
13 ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, A, G, M and O.
14 2. Acceptable Products:
15 a. DC-795 by Dow Corning.
16 b. Silpruf SCS2000 by General Electric.
17 c. Spectrem-2 or Spectrem-3 by Tremco.
18 d. 895 by Pecora.
19 e. Sikasil WS 295 by Sika.
20
21 L. Silicone Sealant - Type No. 11:
22 1. One-component, moisture cured, fungicidal, silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
23 Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A, G, and O.
24 2. Acceptable Products:
25 a. DC-786 by Dow Corning.
26 b. SCS-1700 by General Electric.
27 c. TremSil 200 by Tremco.
28 d. 898 by Pecora.
29 e. Sikasil GP by Sika.
30
31 M. Polysulfide Sealant - Type No. 12:
32 1. Multi-component, chemically cured, polysulfide joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
33 Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, G, M, A, and O.
34 2. Acceptable Products:
35 a. Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant by BASF.
36 b. Synthacalk GC 2+ by Pecora.
37 c. Deck-O-Seal One Step by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
38
39 N. Butyl - Type No. 13:
40 1. Butyl rubber polymer sealant one-component, non-sag; ASTM C 1311(FS TT-S-001657).
41 2. Acceptable Products:
42 a. BC-158 by Pecora.
43 b. Butakauk by BASF.
44 c. Butyl Sealant by Tremco.
45
46 2.3 ACCESSORIES
47
48 A. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with
49 joint forming materials.
50
51 B. Primer: Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application and
52 substrate materials.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Backer Rod:
3 1. ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), or Type B (bicellular
4 material with a surface skin), as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for
5 joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
6 contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
7 2. Acceptable Products:
8 a. Backer Rod Manufacturing; Mile High Foam.
9 b. BASF; Soft Backer Rod.
10 c. Nomaco; Sof Rod.
11 d. Ethafoam SB, Dow Chemical.
12
13 D. Precompressed Joint Sealer:
14 1. Precompressed bitumen impregnated foam; when exposed to air expands in size; size as
15 recommended by manufacturer for joint condition and width; black [gray] color.
16 2. Acceptable Products:
17 a. Backerseal by Emseal Corporation.
18 b. 600 by Will-Seal.
19
20 E. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape recommended by sealant
21 manufacturer to suit application.
22
23 F. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape.
24
25 G. Sealant Tape:
26 1. Compressible adhesive-cohesive tape of cross-linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that
27 accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement
28 of ± 25 percent.
29 2. Acceptable Products:
30 a. 440 by Tremco.
31 b. Extru-Seal by Pecora.
32 c. PTI-606 by Protective Treatments, Inc., Division of Prosoco
33
34 H. Expansion Joint Filler:
35 1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant.
36 2. Asphalt impregnated fiberboard not acceptable.
37 3. Acceptable Product: Sonofoam Closed Cell Backer-Rod by Sonneborn.
38
39 2.4 MIXING
40
41 A. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
42
43
44 PART 3 - EXECUTION
45
46 3.1 EXAMINATION
47
48 A. Examine joints to be sealed for construction defects which could adversely affect execution
49 of Work.
50
51 B. Ensure that concrete has cured 28 days minimum before commencing sealing operations.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. [Compressible Fillers: Verify actual width of each type joint to be sealed against indicated
2 joint width to ensure compliance with specified percentage of compression required.]
3
4 D. Determine in conjunction with sealant manufacturer's representative if adhesion testing is
5 necessary prior to application of materials. Submit letter of certification from sealant
6 manufacturer accepting substrate conditions for sealant.
7
8 3.2 PREPARATION
9
10 A. Clean joint surfaces using joint cleaner as necessary, free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust,
11 lacquers, laitance, release agents, liquid water repellent, moisture or other matter which might
12 adversely affect adhesion of sealants. Immediately after cleaning, wipe all joint surfaces with
13 a clean dry cloth to remove any cleaner residue.
14
15 B. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
16 combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
17 optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
18 operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
19
20 C. Etch concrete, masonry and plaster joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity. Etch with 5
21 percent solution of muriatic acid. Neutralize with dilute ammonia solution. Rinse thoroughly
22 with water and allow to dry.
23
24 D. Steel Surfaces: Scrape and wire brush to remove loose mill scale. Remove dirt, oil or grease
25 by solvent cleaning. Wipe surfaces with lintless paper towels.
26
27 E. Aluminum Surfaces:
28 1. Clean off temporary protective coatings.
29 2. When masking tape is used for a protective cover, remove tape just prior to applying
30 sealant.
31
32 F. Roughen joint surfaces on non-porous materials. Rub with fine abrasive cloth or wool to
33 produce a dull sheen.
34
35 G. Mask areas adjacent to joints as necessary.
36
37 H. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer. Do not allow primer or sealants to spill or
38 migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
39
40 I. Precompressed Joint Sealer:
41 1. Remove shrink wrap or vacuum pack from each section for immediate insertion into
42 joints, taking care not to pull or stretch material.
43 2. Remove wrapping from that quantity which can be installed immediately.
44 3. Joining of individual strips accomplished by means of scarfed joints cut at 45 degrees
45 relative to sides of joint.
46 4. Push scarfed ends well over one another to form tight joints.
47 5. In areas of pedestrian traffic where precompressed joint sealer is used as secondary seal,
48 depress strips to required depth to permit application of bond breaker and sealant.
49
50 3.3 APPLICATION
51
52 A. Install sealant materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Install backing material in joints using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing.
3
4 C. Install sealant backing to form joint depth of 50 percent of joint width, minimum of 1/4"
5 deep.
6 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
7 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
8 3. Do not braid smaller diameter sealant backings to create larger ones.
9 4. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
10 replace them with dry materials.
11
12 D. Apply sealant in joints using pressure gun with nozzle cut to fit joint width.
13
14 E. Deposit sealant in uniform, continuous bead.
15
16 F. Tool joints to required configuration within manufacturer's recommended setting time.
17
18 G. If masking materials are used, remove immediately after tooling.
19
20 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
21
22 A. Manufacturer's Representative:
23 1. No sealants may be used unless a qualified representative is present at start up of work to
24 advised installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check
25 installation.
26 2. Contractor shall give manufacturer notice one week prior to start-up that his presence
27 will be required, to ensure proper installation of his materials.
28
29 B. Field-Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to field test joint-sealant adhesion
30 to joint substrates as follows:
31 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
32 a. Perform five tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
33 joint substrate.
34 b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter.
35 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
36 Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
37 ASTM C 1521.
38 a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
39 extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for
40 opposite side.
41 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
42 a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
43 b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
44 c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
45 substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of
46 product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes
47 sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
48 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
49 installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints
50 were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration,
51 and sealant dimensions.
52 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 07 92 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new
2 sealant contacts original sealant.
3
4 C. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
5 testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
6 Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
7 requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
8 requirements.
9
10 3.5 CLEANING
11
12 A. Remove excess materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses to eliminate evidence of
13 spillage or damage to adjacent surfaces.
14
15 B. Remove and replace improperly sealed joints.
16
17 C. Clean or replace materials or surfaces that are damaged by sealing operations.
18
19 3.6 SCHEDULE OF SEALANTS AND CAULKS
20
21 A. Interior and exterior building joints subject to dynamic movement, not exposed to foot or
22 vehicular traffic: Sealant Type No. 9.
23
24 B. Interior and exterior horizontal joints subject to foot and vehicular traffic: Sealant Type No.
25 3 or 4.
26
27 C. Unexposed Windows Joints: Sealant Type No. 10 or 12.
28
29 D. Interior horizontal and vertical joints not subject to movement or traffic, subject to moisture:
30 Sealant Type No. 7 or 11.
31
32 E. Thresholds – Exterior: Sealant Type 12 or 13.
33
34 F. Stone, and masonry, substrates, for non-staining and low dirt pick-up applications subject to
35 moisture, movement, and not exposed to foot or vehicular traffic: Sealant Type No. 8.
36
37 3.7 COLOR SCHEDULE
38
39 A. Curtain Wall and Storefronts: Custom color as selected by Architect.
40
41 B. Other Exposed Locations: Manufacturer's standard color line as selected by Architect.
42
43 C. Non-exposed Locations: Manufacturer's standard.
44
45
46 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 11 13
2
3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Hollow-metal work.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American National Standards Institute, Inc.:
16 1. ANSI A117.1: Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and
17 Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
18 2. ANSI/DHI A115 Series (ANSI A115.1-1990 through ANSI A115.18-1994):
19 Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware.
20 3. ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861: Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal
21 Doors and Frames.
22 4. ANSI/SDI A250.3: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied
23 Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
24 5. ANSI/SDI A250.4: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance
25 for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing.
26 6. ANSI/SDI A250.6: Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard
27 Steel Doors and Frames.
28 7. ANSI/SDI A250.8: Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
29 Frames.
30 8. ANSI/SDI A250.10: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted
31 Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
32 9. ANSI/SDI A250.11: Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
33
34 B. American Society of Civil Engineers:
35 1. SEI/ASCE-7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
36
37 C. American Society for Testing and Materials:
38 1. ASTM A 153/A 153M: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
39 Hardware.
40 2. ASTM A 591/A 591M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for
41 Light Coating Weight Application.
42 3. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
43 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
44 4. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
45 Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
46 Formability.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 5. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M: Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled,
2 Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
3 Improved Formability.
4 6. ASTM C 665: Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
5 Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
6 7. ASTM E 2074: Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive
7 Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.
8
9 D. Door Hardware Institute (DHI)
10 1. The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors
11 in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
12
13 E. National Fire Prevention Association:
14 1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
15 2. NFPA 105: Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies.
16 3. NFPA 252: Fire Test of Door Assemblies.
17 4. NFPA 257: Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
18
19 F. Steel Door Institute:
20 1. SDI 111C: Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors.
21 2. SDI 117: Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
22
23 G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
24 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
25 2. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
26 3. UL 1784: Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
27
28 1.3 SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
31 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance
32 ratings, and finishes.
33
34 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
35 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer
36 recycled content and cost.
37 2.Environmental Product Declaration: For each product.
38 3. Health Product Declaration: For each product.
39 4. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer.
40
41 C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
42 1. Elevations of each door type.
43 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
44 thicknesses.
45 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
46 thicknesses.
47 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
48 5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
2 7. Details of accessories.
3 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
4 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
5
6 D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision
7 of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
8 Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
9
10 E. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests
11 performed by a qualified testing agency.
12
13 F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
14
15 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
16
17 A. Qualifications-Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in
18 this section with a minimum of five years documented experience.
19
20 B. Regulatory Requirements.
21 1. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a
22 qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-
23 protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA
24 252 or UL 10C.
25 2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
26 labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
27 authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed
28 in compliance with NFPA 105.
29 3. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested
30 assemblies, provide manufacturer's certification that doors conform to all standard
31 construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for
32 size.
33 4. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and
34 labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
35 jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA
36 257 or UL 9.
37
38 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
39
40 A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during
41 transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
42 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
43
44 B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
45 welded to jambs and mullions.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
2 minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm)
3 space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
4
5 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
6
7 A. Coordination:
8 1. Coordinate of door opening construction with door hardware installation and anchor
9 placement.
10 2. Coordinate grout fill of metal frames in masonry construction.
11 3. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
12
13
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15
16 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
17
18 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
19 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
20 following:
21 1. Amweld International, LLC.
22 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
23 3. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.
24 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
25 5. Deansteel.
26 6. Door Components, Inc.
27 7. Hollow Metal Xpress.
28 8. Mesker Door Inc.
29 9. National Custom Hollow Metal.
30 10. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
31 11. Republic Doors and Frames.
32 12. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
33 13. Steelcraft; an Allegion company.
34
35 2.2 MATERIALS
36
37 A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
38 preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
39
40 B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
41 for exposed applications.
42
43 C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
44 scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
45
46 D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating
2 designation; mill phosphatized.
3 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A
4 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A
5 153/A 153M, Class B.
6
7 F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
8
9 G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
10 indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
11 devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
12
13 H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
14 consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and
15 smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
16 characteristics.
17
18 I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
19
20 J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film
21 thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
22 sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
23
24 2.3 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
25
26 A. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.
27 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
28 2. Doors:
29 a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
30 b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
31 c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
32 d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
33 e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
34 polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, or mineral-board at manufacturer's discretion.
35 3. Frames:
36 a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
37 b. Construction: Full profile welded.
38 c. Exposed Finish: Prime.
39
40 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
41
42 A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
43 fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
44 specified.
45
46 B. Maximum-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 4.
47 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
48 2. Doors:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
2 b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
3 c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with
4 minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
5 d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
6 e. Core: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane or polyisocyanurate at
7 manufacturer's discretion.
8 3. Frames:
9 a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with
10 minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
11 b. Construction: Full profile welded.
12 c. Exposed Finish: Prime.
13
14 2.5 HOLLOW-METAL PANELS
15
16 A. Provide hollow-metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as adjacent door
17 assemblies.
18
19 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
20
21 A. Jamb Anchors:
22 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,
23 not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
24 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
25 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than
26 0.042 inch thick.
27 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
28 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-
29 inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
30 frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor
31 location.
32
33 B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch,
34 and as follows:
35 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
36 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
37 allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
38 finish floor surface.
39
40 2.7 FABRICATION
41
42 A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately
43 form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where
44 practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at
45 Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before
46 shipment.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
2 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical
3 stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical
4 webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5
5 inches o.c.
6 2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
7 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
8 manufacturer's discretion.
9 4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide
10 flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets.
11 5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels
12 of same material as face sheets.
13 6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
14 moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
15 7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required
16 by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4
17 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply
18 with published listing of qualified testing agency.
19
20 C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
21 limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
22 metal as frames.
23 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible
24 face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members
25 at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
26 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
27 fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
28 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
29 anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk
30 holes at bottoms of jambs.
31 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
32 a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom
33 of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and
34 as follows:
35 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
36 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
37 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
38 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
39 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
40 b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
41 bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
42 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
43 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
44 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
45 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
46 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
47 c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from
2 top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
3 5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and
4 mounted in metal-stud partitions.
5 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
6 silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
7 a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
8 b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
9
10 D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
11
12 E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
13 hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI
14 A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
15 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
16 door hardware.
17 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
18 preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
19
20 F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
21 indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
22 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
23 hollow-metal work.
24 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
25 glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
26 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
27 doors and frames.
28 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
29 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
30 installation types indicated.
31
32 2.8 STEEL FINISHES
33
34 A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
35 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
36 complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
37 compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
38
39 2.9 ACCESSORIES
40
41 A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical
42 anchors.
43
44
45
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
6 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
7 Work.
8
9 B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before
10 frame installation.
11
12 C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance
13 of the Work.
14
15 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18
19 A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by
20 grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible
21 on exposed faces.
22
23 B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
24 door hardware.
25
26 3.3 INSTALLATION
27
28 A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
29 place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
30
31 B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply
32 with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
33 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
34 permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
35 braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
36 a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
37 b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
38 limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
39 continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on
40 exposed faces.
41 c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
42 d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
43 e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
44 been properly set and secured.
45 f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
46 necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
47 g. Field apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of frames that will be in
48 contact with grout or plaster containing anti-freezing agents.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
2 floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
3 a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of
4 postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
5 Drawings.
6 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
7 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
8 between frames and masonry with grout.
9 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber
10 insulation.
11 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
12 postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,
13 flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
14 7. In-Place Metal Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to
15 manufacturer's written instructions.
16
17 C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
18 specified below. Shim as necessary.
19 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
20 a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
21 b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32
22 inch.
23 c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
24 d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
25 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
26 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
27
28 D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with
29 hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
30 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly
31 not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
32
33 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
34
35 A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
36 inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
37 defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise
38 unacceptable.
39
40 B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
41 installation.
42
43 C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
44 prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
45
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 11 13 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair
2 paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3
4
5 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 14 16
2
3 VENEER FACED WOOD DOORS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
12 2. Sound retardant doors with wood-veneer faces.
13 3. Factory finishing of flush wood doors.
14 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
15
16 1.2 REFERENCES
17
18 A. California Department of Public Health
19 1. Sta ndard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
20 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.
21
22 B. ASTM International:
23 1. ASTM E 90: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
24 Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
25 2. ASTM E 413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
26 3. ASTM E 1408: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound
27 Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems.
28
29 C. Door and Hardware Institute:
30 1. DHI A115-W - Wood Door Hardware Standards, Hardware Preparation
31 2. DHI-WDHS-3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood
32 Flush Doors
33
34 D. International Conference of Building Officials: UBC Standard 7-2 - Fire Tests of Door
35 Assemblies.
36
37 E. NFPA: NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
38
39 F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
40 Assemblies.
41
42 G. Window & Door Manufacturers Association:
43 1. WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors
44 2. WDMA I.S.10 - Specification for Testing Cellulosic Materials for Use in Fenestration
45 Products
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.3 SUBMITTALS
2
3 A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
4 construction, and trim for openings.
5
6 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
7 1.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of
8 Project, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest,
9 or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw
10 material.
11 2.Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
12 low-emitting materials.
13 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
14 requirements for low-emitting materials.
15 4. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
16 5. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
17
18 C. Shop Drawings:
19 1. Submit door schedule indicating opening identification number, door type, size,
20 handing, thickness, label requirements, and undercut.
21 a. Use same numbering system for door schedule as indicated on Drawings.
22 2. Indicate location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
23 3. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
24 4. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
25 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
26
27 D. Samples:
28 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches
29 (200 by 250 mm), for each wood species and finish.
30 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door
31 faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
32 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish
33 required.
34
35 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
36
37 A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
38
39 B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
40 "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
41
42 C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
43 qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
44 pressure according to UBC Standard 7-2 or UL 10C.
45 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested
46 assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with
47 standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies
48 except for size.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Sound Rating: Provide sound-control door assemblies identical to those of assemblies
2 tested as sound-retardant units as determined by ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable
3 condition according to ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 1408.
4
5 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
6
7 A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
8
9 B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons during transit, storage and
10 handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
11
12 C. Deliver prefinished components in manufacturer's original unopened protective bag or
13 carton, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name and identifying number on
14 packaging.
15
16 D. Storage and Protection:
17 1. Store flat over level surface above floor on wood blocking.
18 2. Under bottom door and over top of stack, furnish plywood or corrugated cardboard
19 for protection.
20 3. Do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces.
21 4. Handle doors with dry, clean canvas gloves to prevent finger marks and stains.
22
23 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
24
25 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
26 weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
27 maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity
28 between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
29
30 B. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
31
32 1.7 WARRANTY
33
34 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
35 replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
36 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
37 a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch
38 (1067-by-2134-mm) section.
39 b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-
40 inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
41 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to
42 repair or replacement of defective doors.
43 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4
5 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
6 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
7 following:
8 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
9 2. Eggers Industries.
10 3. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.
11 4. Ipik Door Company.
12 5. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
13 6. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
14 7. VT Industries Inc.
15
16 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
17
18 A.Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
19 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
20 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
21 Chambers."
22
23 B.Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde
24 resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's "Airborne Toxic Control Measure
25 to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made
26 with no added formaldehyde.
27
28 C. WDMA Grade: Custom.
29
30 D. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
31 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
32 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Assembly spaces, and exits.
33
34 E. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA TM-6.
35
36 F. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
37 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
38 a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
39 b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
40 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
41 through-bolting hardware.
42
43 G. Mineral-Core Doors:
44 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
45 quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating
46 indicated.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
2 approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated [as needed to eliminate
3 through-bolting hardware.
4 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with
5 improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
6 requirements for exposed edges.
7
8 H. Face Veneer – Transparent Finish:
9 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
10 2. Species: Select White Oak.
11 3. Cut: Rift cut.
12 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
13 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
14 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
15
16 2.3 FLUSH SOLID-CORE VENEER-FACED DOORS
17
18 A. Finish: Transparent finish, WDMA Custom Grade, Shop applied finish.
19
20 B. Fire Rating: None and 20-minute.
21
22 C. Core: Structural composite lumber.
23
24 D. Rails: Minimum 1-1/8 inch mill-option hardwood or structural composite lumber
25
26 E. Stiles: Minimum 1-3/8 inch double-banded, laminated, mill-option hardwood with no
27 finger joints permitted in outer band.
28
29 F. Crossbanding: 1/16 inch mill-option hardwood or engineered wood product.
30
31 G. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges
32 of crossbands.
33
34 H. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
35 planed before crossbands and faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot
36 press.
37
38 2.4 FLUSH FIRE-RATED SOLID-CORE VENEER-FACED DOORS
39
40 A. Fire Rating: 45, 60, and 90-minute.
41
42 B. Core: Mineral.
43
44 C. Rails: Fire retardant treated, mill-option hardwood or composite material.
45 1. Top minimum 15/16 inch.
46 2. Bottom minimum 1-7/8 inch.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Stiles: Manufacturers standard widths with maximum screw-holding capabilities, meeting
2 fire ratings indicated.
3
4 E. Crossbanding: Fire retardant treated, 1/16 inch mill-option hardwood or engineered wood
5 product.
6
7 F. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
8 stile.
9 1. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering
10 edges of crossbands.
11 2. Pairs of Doors: Provide fire-retardant stiles with concealed intumescent seals that
12 are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and
13 astragals.
14
15 G. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
16 planed before crossbands and faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot
17 press.
18
19 2.5 SOUND RETARDANT VENEER-FACED DOORS
20
21 A. Finish: Opaque finish, WDMA Custom Grade, Field applied finish.
22
23 B. Fire Rating: None and 20-minute.
24
25 C. Sound Rating: STC 49 as determined by ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable
26 condition according to ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 1408.
27
28 D. Core: Manufacturer's standard sound-retardant core as required to provide STC and fire
29 rating indicated.
30
31 E. Sound Seals: Rubber gasketed hardwood stops and automatic door bottom seal supplied
32 as assembly from door manufacturer to match face veneer.
33
34 F. Rails:
35 1. Top: Minimum 1-1/2 inch mill-option hardwood or structural composite lumber.
36 2. Bottom: Minimum 4 inch mill-option hardwood or structural composite lumber.
37
38 G. Stiles: Minimum 1-1/2 inch double-banded, laminated, mill-option hardwood with no
39 finger joints permitted in outer band.
40
41 H. Crossbanding: 1/16 inch mill-option hardwood or engineered wood product.
42
43 I. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges
44 of crossbands.
45
46 J. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to 3” thick core, then entire unit
47 abrasive planed before crossbands and faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a
48 hot press.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.6 LIGHT FRAMES
3
4 A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood
5 beads as follows unless otherwise indicated.
6 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
7 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.
8 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and
9 metal glazing clips approved for such use.
10
11 B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard
12 wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and
13 approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal
14 glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
15
16 2.7 FABRICATION
17
18 A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
19 requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
20 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
21
22 B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to
23 comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop
24 Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
25 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
26 alignment before factory machining.
27 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
28 pairs of fire-rated doors.
29
30 C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
31 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
32 2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 – “Glazing”
33
34 2.8 SHOP PRIMING
35
36 A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in
37 Section 09 91 23 - "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises
38 with primer.
39
40 2.9 FACTORY FINISHING
41
42 A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
43 fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
44 surface applied, before finishing.
45 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
46 omitted on edges of cutouts, and mortises.
47
48 B. Finish doors at factory.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 14 16 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Transparent Finish:
3 1. Grade: Custom.
4 2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
5 3. Staining: Match Architect's control sample
6 4. Sheen: Satin.
7
8
9 PART 3 - EXECUTION
10
11 3.1 EXAMINATION
12
13 A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
14 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
15 swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
16 2. Reject doors with defects.
17
18 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
19
20 3.2 INSTALLATION
21
22 A. Hardware: Refer to Section 08 70 11 – “Door Hardware”
23
24 B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
25 and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
26 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
27
28 C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
29
30 D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is
31 required at Project site.
32
33 3.3 ADJUSTING
34
35 A. Operation: Rehang, adjust, or replace doors that:
36 1. do not swing or operate freely.
37 2. stick or bind.
38 3. rattle when in latched position.
39
40 B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
41 Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
42 evidence of repair or refinishing.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 31 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 31 13
2
3 ACCESS DOORS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings at plumbing chases or other concealed
12 work that will require maintenance by Owner.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Product Data: Submit specifications, details and installation instructions, including methods
17 of anchoring.
18
19 B. Shop Drawings: If modifications from manufacturer's details is required, submit drawings
20 indicating modifications, opening size, attachment details, and hardware.
21 1. Size Verification: Obtain location and sizes for access doors from trades requiring access
22 to concealed equipment and indicate on submittal schedule.
23
24 C. Sustainable Design Submittal:
25 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
26 content and cost.
27
28 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
30 A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge and
31 latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Classified Building
32 Materials Index for ratings indicated.
33
34 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
35
36 A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for installation of
37 access doors.
38
39
40 PART 2 PRODUCTS
41
42 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
43
44 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements manufacturers
45 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
46 1. Acudor Products, Inc.
47 2. Cendrex, Inc.
48 3. J.L. Industries, Inc.
49 4. Karp Associates, Inc.
50 5. Milcor Inc.
51 6. Nystrom, Inc.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 31 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.2 MATERIALS
3
4 A.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
5 preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
6
7 2.3 NON-RATED - WALLS AND CEILINGS
8
9 A. Frame: 16 gage steel.
10
11 B. Door Panel: 14 gage steel.
12
13 C. Hinges: Continuous type, 175 degree swing, steel with stainless steel pin.
14
15 D. Locking Device:
16 1. Master-keyed cylinder lock.
17 2. Number as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.
18
19 E. Acceptable Products - Concealed Flange:
20 1. Model WB by J.L. Industries, Inc.
21 2. NW Series by Nystrom, Inc.
22 3. Style DW by Milcor, Inc.
23
24 F. Acceptable Products – Concealed Flange, Recessed Door to receive Gypsum Board:
25 1. Model CTWB by J.L. Industries, Inc.
26 2. R Series by Nystrom, Inc.
27 3. Style DWR by Milcor, Inc.
28
29 2.4 RATED WALLS
30
31 A. Frame: 16 gage steel, with perimeter casing bead for flush appearance.
32
33 B. Door Panel:
34 1. 20 gage sheet steel.
35 2. Two-inch thick insulated sandwich panel assembly.
36 3. Automatic closer and latch.
37 4. Interior latch release device.
38 5. UL 1-1/2 hour "B" Label.
39
40 C. Hinges: Concealed, pin type.
41
42 D. Locking Device:
43 1. Master-keyed cylinder lock.
44 2. Number as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.
45
46 E. Acceptable Products – Exposed Flanges:
47 1. Model FD by J.L. Industries, Inc.
48 2. IT-WP Series by Nystrom, Inc.
49 3. Style FR by Milcor, Inc.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 31 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.5 RATED - DRYWALL CEILINGS
2
3 A. Frame: 10 gage steel.
4
5 B. Door Panel: 18 gage sheet steel.
6
7 C. Hinges: Continuous.
8
9 D. Locking Device:
10 1. Master-keyed cylinder lock.
11 2. Number as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.
12
13 E. Acceptable Products – Recessed Door to Receive Gypsum Board: [
14 1. Model FRC J.L. Industries, Inc.
15 2. Style ATR Milcor, Inc.
16 3. IP Series Nystrom, Inc.
17
18 2.6 NON-RATED - ACOUSTICAL CEILING
19
20 A. Frame: 16 gage steel.
21
22 B. Door Panel: 18 gage sheet steel.
23
24 C. Hinges: Continuous.
25
26 D. Locking Device:
27 1. Master-keyed cylinder lock.
28 2. Number as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.
29
30 E. Acceptable Products – Recessed Door to Receive Acoustical Tile Material:
31 1. Model AT-5020 Acudor Products, Inc.
32 2. Style ATR Milcor, Inc.
33
34 2.7 FABRICATION
35
36 A. Fabricate from cold-rolled steel, welded components, exposed welds dressed smooth and
37 flush with adjacent surfaces.
38
39 B. Form doors with flush panel design.
40
41 C. Furnish accessories with adjustable metal anchors for securing to substrate.
42
43 D. Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as a complete unit with parts ready for
44 installation.
45
46 E. Provide plastic grommets at cylinder core through sandwich panels.
47
48 2.8 FINISH
49
50 A. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel prime coated.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 31 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 PART 3 EXECUTION
3
4 3.1 EXAMINATION
5
6 A. Verify size and dimension requirements at site.
7
8 B. Verify that openings are correctly dimensioned to receive doors.
9
10 3.2 INSTALLATION
11
12 A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for secure attachment, proper relation to adjacent
13 finished surfaces and proper operation.
14
15 B. Set assemblies plumb and level, properly anchored in place.
16
17 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
18
19 A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. Adjust latching and
20 locking mechanism to operate smoothly.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 33 23
2
3 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Insulated service doors.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
16 1. AAMA 2603: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
17 Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
18 2. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
19 3. ASCE/SEI 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
20
21 B. ASTM International
22 1. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
23 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
24 2. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
25 3. ASTM E 90: Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
26 Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
27 4. ASTM E 283: Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through
28 Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences
29 across the Specimen
30 5. ASTM E 330: Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
31 Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
32 6. ASTM E 1996: Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Glazed Curtain
33 Walls, Doors and Storm Shutters Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes
34
35 C. Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association
36 1. DASMA 105: Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Air Infiltration of
37 Garage Doors (ANSI)
38 2. DASMA 108: Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors and Rolling Doors:
39 Determination of Structural Performance under Uniform Static Air Pressure
40 Difference (ANSI)
41 3. DASMA 115: Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors and Rolling Doors:
42 Determination of Structural Performance under Missile Impact and Cyclic Wind
43 Pressure (ANSI)
44
45 D. International Code Council
46 1. ICC A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (ANSI)
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers/National Ornamental &
2 Miscellaneous Metals Association
3 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06). 2006.
4
5 F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
6 1. NEMA ICS 1: Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements
7 2. NEMA ICS 2: Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overload
8 Relays Rated 600 Volts
9 3. NEMA ICS 6: Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
10
11 G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
12 1. UL 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
13 2. UL 325: Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems
14 3. UL 723: Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
15 4. UL 1784: Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
16
17 H. U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board
18 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
19 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
20
21 1.3 SUBMITTALS
22
23 A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
24 following:
25 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,
26 profiles for slats, and finishes.
27 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
28 accessories.
29 3. For fire-rated doors, description of fire-release system including testing and resetting
30 instructions.
31
32 B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or
33 detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
34 attachments to other work.
35 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
36 clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
37 field connection.
38 2. Show locations of replaceable fusible links.
39 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
40
41 C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and
42 textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
43 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
44
45 D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples
46 of size indicated below.
47 1. Curtain Slats: 12 inches long, including vision window secure to slat.
48 2. Bottom Bar: 6 inches long with sensor edge.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Guides: 6 inches long.
2 4. Brackets: 6 inches square.
3 5. Hood: 6 inches square.
4
5 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For overhead coiling doors indicated to comply with
6 performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
7 the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
8 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
9 2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
10
11 F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
12
13 G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and
14 components, from manufacturer.
15
16 H. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that
17 exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies.
18
19 I. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.
20
21 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
24 approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
25
26 B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single
27 manufacturer.
28 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
29
30 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
31 NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
32
33 D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
34 Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
35 ICC/ANSI A117.1.
36
37
38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
40 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
41
42 A. Delegated Design: Design overhead coiling doors, including comprehensive engineering
43 analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
44 criteria indicated.
45
46 B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand
47 the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under
48 conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph.
2 b. Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 90 mph.
3 c. Occupancy Category: III.
4 d. Exposure Category: C.
5 2. Internal Pressure Coeffiicient (GCPI): ±0.18.
6 3. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load
7 without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.
8
9 C. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under
10 uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. wind load, acting inward and outward.
11
12 D. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of
13 operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle
14 is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and
15 returned to the closed position.
16
17 2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
18
19 A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats,
20 designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door
21 without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical
22 properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door
23 indicated, and as follows:
24 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet;
25 complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) zinc coating; nominal sheet
26 thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch and as required to meet requirements.
27 2. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal
28 insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
29 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely
30 within slat faces.
31 3. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face.
32 4. Gasket Seal: Provide insulated slats with manufacturer's standard interior-to-exterior
33 thermal break or with continuous gaskets between slats.
34
35 B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after
36 fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide
37 locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against
38 lateral movement.
39
40 C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-
41 1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized steel,
42 stainless steel, or aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish.
43
44 D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same
45 material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and
46 strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading.
47 Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent
48 overtravel of curtain.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.3 HOOD
3
4 A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating
5 mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll
6 and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted
7 hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face.
8 Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.
9 1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch-thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90
10 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
11 2. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a
12 perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.
13
14 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES
15
16 A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking
17 by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
18
19 B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating
20 handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
21 1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware".
22 2. Keys: Provide Three for each cylinder.
23
24 C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to
25 disengage power supply when door is locked.
26
27 2.5 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES
28
29 A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire
30 perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated.
31 1. At door head, use 1/8-inch-thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of
32 hood.
33 2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch-thick seals
34 of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.
35
36 B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting
37 handles on each side of door, finished to match door.
38 1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches high.
39
40 2.6 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
41
42 A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an
43 adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained
44 in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings
45 or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
46
47 B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,
48 structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel
2 deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
3
4 C. Spring Balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size
5 springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
6 outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.
7
8 D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled
9 steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
10
11 E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled
12 steel plate.
13
14 2.7 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
15
16 A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided
17 by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor
18 controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control
19 stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for
20 proper operation.
21 1. Comply with NFPA 70.
22 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and
23 NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc.
24
25 B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less
26 than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.
27
28 C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door.
29 1. Top-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door head plate
30 with the operator on top of the door-hood assembly and connected to the door
31 drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Headroom is required for this type of
32 mounting.
33 2. Front-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door head plate
34 with the operator on coil side of the door-hood assembly and connected to the door
35 drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Front clearance is required for this type
36 of mounting.
37 3. Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side
38 of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side
39 room is required for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be
40 mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft, headroom is required.
41 4. Through-Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted on other side of wall from coil side
42 of door.
43
44 D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor,
45 enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 11 05 13 "Common Motor
46 Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated.
47 1. Electrical Characteristics:
48 a. Phase: Single phase.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Volts: 115 V.
2 c. Hertz: 60.
3 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for
4 motor exposure indicated.
5 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start,
6 accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less
7 than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings
8 or service factor.
9 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring:
10 Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
11 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other
12 electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.
13
14 E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with
15 motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed
16 positions.
17
18 F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic
19 safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors,
20 activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.
21 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an
22 obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.
23 a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control
24 circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-
25 monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on
26 close button.
27
28 2.8 DOOR ASSEMBLY
29
30 A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal
31 slats.
32 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model
33 625 by Overhead Door or comparable product by one of the following:
34 a.Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.
35 b.C.H.I. Overhead Doors.
36 c.Cookson Company.
37 d.Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
38 e.Mahon Door Corporation.
39 f.McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.
40 g.Overhead Door Corporation.
41 h.Raynor.
42 i.Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
43
44 B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.
45 1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.
46
47 C. STC Rating: 21.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Curtain R-Value: 7.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.
2
3 E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.
4
5 F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-7/8-inch center-to-center height.
6 1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.
7
8 G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel, [prepare for paint finish with exposed finish
9 matching curtain slats.
10
11 H. Hood: Galvanized steel.
12 1. Shape: As shown on Drawings.
13 2. Mounting: Face of wall.
14
15 I. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock.
16 1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side] locking bars, operable from inside and
17 outside with cylinders.
18
19 J. Electric Door Operator:
20 1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 60 to 90 cycles per hour.
21 2. Operator Location: As shown on Drawings.
22 3. Motor Exposure: Exterior, wet, and humid.
23 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.
24 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor; self-monitoring
25 type.
26 a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black.
27
28 K. Door Finish:
29 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from
30 manufacturer's full range.
31 2. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color.
32 3. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.
33
34 2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
35
36 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
37 recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
38
39 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
40 Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
41 range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
42
43 2.10 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
44
45 A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied
46 finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment,
47 application, and minimum dry film thickness.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3
4 3.1 EXAMINATION
5
6 A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
7 requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the
8 Work.
9
10 B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
11
12 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
13
14 3.2 INSTALLATION
15
16 A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
17 anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written
18 instructions and as specified.
19
20 B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated
21 for each door.
22
23 C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes
24 in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
25
26 D. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80.
27
28 E. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.
29
30 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
31
32 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
33 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
34 instructions.
35 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
36 and equipment.
37 3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system.
38 Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
39
40 3.4 ADJUSTING
41
42 A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free
43 of warp, twist, or distortion.
44
45 B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
46
47 C. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 083323 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 3.5 DEMONSTRATION
3
4 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
5 to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
6
7
8 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 44 50
2
3 GLAZED WOOD FRAMED CURTAIN WALLS AND ENTRANCES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Glazed wood clad framed curtainwall assemblies.
12 2. Wood clad entrances.
13
14 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Combined Submittals: Combine and coordinate submittals for each type of curtainwall
17 assembly, storefronts, and entrances into a single submission for coordination between
18 curtainwall, storefront, and entrance systems. Submit combined shop drawings which have
19 been reviewed, annotated, and coordinated by each of the principal exterior cladding
20 subcontractors.
21 1. Include connections to roof system and parapet in submittal,
22 2. As an indication of review, and as a condition of acceptance by the Architect, provide
23 combined submittal with a cover sheet clearly indicating the signatures of the
24 Contractor and each exterior cladding subcontractor.
25
26 B. Product Data: Technical data identifying type of curtainwall assembly and entrance system
27 including construction details, framing methods, material descriptions, identification and
28 dimensions of individual components and profiles, connections to roof assembly and
29 parapets, wood finishes, and test data indicating compliance with requirements.
30 1. Include data for entrance hardware, accessories, and finishes.
31
32 C. Shop Drawings: Submit engineered plans, elevations, sections, full size details, and
33 attachments to other work, including details of provisions for curtainwall assembly
34 expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the
35 exterior.
36 1. Indicate fabrication and construction details, including anchors, for curtainwall and
37 storefront assemblies and entrances.
38 a. Reinforcement.
39 b. Glazing details.
40 c. Accessories.
41 2. Include full size isometric details of each vertical to horizontal intersection of wood
42 curtain walls assembly and entrance units indicating:
43 a. Wood framing.
44 b. Joinery, including concealed welds.
45 c. Anchorage.
46 d. Expansion provisions.
47 e. Glazing.
48 f. Flashing and drainage.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 g. Thermally insulated aluminum gasketed glazing assembly.
2 h. Custom profile aluminum extrusion snap on cover cap.
3 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
4 barriers.
5
6 D. Fabrication Sample: Prepare fabrication samples of each vertical to horizontal intersection
7 of curtainwall assemblies, and one corner section for entrances made from 24 inch (305 mm)
8 lengths of full size components and showing details of the following:
9 1. Wood framing.
10 2. Joinery, including concealed welds.
11 3. Anchorage.
12 4. Expansion provisions.
13 5. Glazing.
14 6. Flashing and drainage.
15
16 E. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit design data for glazed wood framed curtain walls and
17 entrances indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including
18 analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
19 responsible for their preparation.
20
21 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
22
23 A. Preconstruction Field Mockup Testing Submittals:
24 1. Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.
25 2. Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup
26 test.
27 3. Record Drawings: As built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing
28 changes made during preconstruction mockup testing.
29
30 B. Qualification Data: Submit data for Installer and field testing agency.
31
32 C. Energy Performance Certificates: Submit certificated from manufacturer for glazed wood
33 curtain walls, accessories, and components.
34 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC certified energy performance values for each glazed
35 aluminum curtain wall.
36
37 D. Product Test Reports: Submit reports for glazed wood curtain walls and entrances for tests
38 performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing
39 agency.
40
41 E. Source quality control reports.
42
43 F. Field quality control reports.
44
45 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
46
47 A. Maintenance Data: Submit data for glazed wood curtain walls to include in maintenance
48 manuals including care and resealing of exterior woods.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3
4 A. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator specializing in the fabrication of wood
5 curtainwall assemblies and components, having minimum 10 years documented experience,
6 and with sufficient production capacity, organized quality control and testing procedures,
7 and published written and illustrated installation manuals, to produce and install the
8 assemblies required.
9 1. Glued Laminated Manufacturer Qualifications: An AITC or APA-EWS licensed firm.
10 B. Installer Qualifications: Firm that specializes in the erection of glazed wood curtain wall
11 assemblies, having minimum 10 years documented experience, and approved or certified by
12 manufacturer/fabricator.
13 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for curtainwall, storefront, and window
14 systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
15 manufactured units in systems similar to those indicated.
16 a. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
17 licensed to practice in the State of Texas, experienced in providing engineering
18 services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
19 performed for installations of heavy glass storefront and entrance system similar
20 to those indicated in material, design, and extent.
21
22 C. Source Limitations: Obtain glazed wood curtain wall assembly and entrance units, including
23 framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
24
25 D. Welding Standards: Welding shall be performed by skilled and qualified mechanics. Welding
26 shall be performed in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 Structural
27 Welding Code - Steel and AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
28
29 E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and
30 accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with
31 ISO/IEC 17025.
32
33 F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements
34 for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are
35 indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
36 assemblies related to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
37 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
38 Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
39 to Architect for review.
40
41 G. Federal Standard 16 CFR 1201, Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): Safety
42 Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, published in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR).
43 1. Comply with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, wherever
44 requirements conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from
45 authorities.
46 2. Provide safety glazing complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of
47 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 H. Mockups: Build combined mockup to verify selections and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
2 and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Provide two mock ups; one for
3 field testing and to verify performance requirements; a second to verify assembly aesthetics
4 including staining and finish of wood components.
5 1. Build mockup of typical wall area including each type of curtainwall, storefront,
6 entrances, parapet, and roofing assemblies shown on Drawings. Use personnel,
7 products, and methods of construction that will be used.
8 2. Perform testing on combined mockups according to specified requirements.
9 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
10 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
11 deviations in writing.
12 4. Remove mock at the completion of the work.
13
14 I. Mockup Testing:
15 1. Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing on field mockups.
16 2. Size and Configuration: Indicated on Drawings.
17 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when field mockups will
18 be constructed and tested.
19 4. Mockup Testing Program: Test mockups according to requirements. Perform the
20 following tests in the following order:
21 a. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 50 percent of positive test load.
22 b. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.
23 c. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
24 d. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1.
25 e. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads.
26 Repeat the following:
27 1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.
28 2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
29 f. Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following:
30 1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.
31 2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
32 g. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test
33 loads. Repeat the following:
34 1) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.
35 2) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
36
37 J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
38
39 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
40
41 A. Identify components of curtainwall work after fabrication by marks clearly indicating
42 location in the building. Package modular units and components to protect from damage
43 during shipping and handling.
44
45 B. Storage on Site: Store units, components, and materials in clean, dry location, away from
46 uncured concrete, masonry work, sprayed on fireproofing work, and construction activities.
47 Cover with nonstaining waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting to permit
48 circulation of air inside the covering.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise care to avoid damage to finishes of metals
3 or breakage of glass.
4
5 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
6
7 A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements
8 before fabrication so curtainwall work is accurately designed, fabricated, and fitted to the
9 structure. Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
10 construction progress to avoid delaying the work. Use Contractor’s lines and benchmarks
11 as a basis for measurements.
12
13 1.8 WARRANTY
14
15 A. Total System Warranty: Written warranty signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor
16 in which the manufacturer, installer, and contractor agree to repair or replace components
17 of glazed wood curtain wall assembly and entrances that do not comply with requirements
18 or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
19 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
20 a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
21 b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
22 c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
23 d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
24 2. Warranty Period:
25 a. Curtainwall Assembly and Entrance System Warranty: 10 years from date of
26 Substantial Completion.
27 b. Powder Coated Finish Products: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
28 c. Glue Lam Beam Framing: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
29 d. Insulated Glass Warranty: Refer to Section 088000.
30 e. Entrance Hardware Warranty: Refer to Section 087100.
31
32 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
34 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
35
36 A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer with experience in the design of
37 wood framed curtainwalls to design glazed wood curtain walls assemblies using performance
38 requirements and design criteria indicated.
39
40 B. Comply with performance requirements specified as determined by testing of glazed wood
41 curtain walls representing those indicated without failure due to defective manufacture,
42 fabrication, installation, or defects in construction.
43 1. Glazed wood curtain wall assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting
44 structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
45 creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
46 2. Failure also includes the following:
47 a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
48 b. Glass breakage.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
2 d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
3 e. Failure of operating units.
4
5 C. Structural Loads:
6 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of curtain wall assembly to withstand loads
7 caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as
8 calculated in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish wind pressure based on the
9 following criteria:
10 a. Wind Loads: Indicated on Drawings.
11 b. Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph.
12 c. Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 93 mph.
13 d. Occupancy Category: III.
14 e. Exposure Category: C.
15 f. Internal Pressure Coefficient (GCPI): Plus/minus 0.18.
16 2. Other Design Loads: Indicated on Drawings.
17 3. Glued Laminated Timbers and Connectors Structural Performance: Structural glued
18 laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of structural loads shown
19 on Drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses listed in AITC 117
20 or determined according to ASTM D3737 and acceptable to authorities having
21 jurisdiction.
22
23 D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure:
24 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular
25 to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing
26 lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch
27 (19.1 mm), whichever is less.
28 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2
29 mm), whichever is smaller.
30
31 E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330:
32 1. When tested at positive and negative wind load design pressures, assemblies do not
33 evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
34 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative windload design pressures,
35 assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
36 or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
37 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
38
39 F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration:
40 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per
41 sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa) and 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
42 (300 Pa).
43
44 G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331: No evidence of
45 water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a
46 minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure,
47 but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. (720 Pa).
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1: No evidence
2 of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic
3 pressure equal to 20 percent of positive windload design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq.
4 ft. (720 Pa).
5 1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water
6 appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than
7 condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters,
8 or water that is drained to exterior.
9
10 I. Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand the effects of
11 earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
12
13 J. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
14 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
15 of not more than 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x degrees F (2.55 W/sq. m x K) as determined
16 according to NFRC 100.
17 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
18 gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
19
20 K. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332:
21 1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 26.
22
23 L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
24 temperature changes:
25 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F (100
26 degrees C), material surfaces.
27 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
28 anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
29 AAMA 501.5.
30 a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior
31 metal surface temperature of [180 degrees F (82 degrees C).
32 b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 degrees F (minus 18 degrees C).
33 c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 degrees F.
34
35 M. Thermal Performance of Glazing: Refer to Section 088000 for insulated glazing.
36
37 2.2 FRAMING COMPONENTS
38
39 A.Basis of Design, Curtainwall System (CW-1): Vertical Glazed Architectural Wall System by
40 Sierra Pacific Windows consisting of an aluminum gasketed glazing assembly with an
41 engineered structural wood interior framing.
42 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of design assembly or AOC50
43 by Schuco-USA, a thermally insulated aluminum gasketed glazing assembly with a
44 structural wood framing component by Structurelam, Duratherm Corporation, or
45 Timber Façade.
46 a. Alternate system by Schuco-USA shall provide a sole source responsibility for
47 the aluminum gasketed glazing assembly and the structural wood framing
48 component.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B.Basis of Design, Curtainwall Entrance System: Commercial Wood and Clad Wood Outswing
3 Door and sidelites by Sierra Pacific Windows consisting of aluminum clad wood door units.
4
5 C. Thermally Insulated Aluminum Gasketed Glazing Assembly:
6 1. Mounting Plate: Attached to structural steel column and beam framing system.
7 2. Pressure Plate: To secure glazing assembly to mounting plate and gasketing system.
8 3. Gasketing System: Retained mechanically with thermally gasketed all four sides
9 4. Snap on Aluminum Trim Cover.
10 5. Fasteners.
11 6. Glazing.
12 7. Flashings.
13
14 D. Structural Wood Framing Members: Engineered, stress rated structural glue laminated
15 Douglas fir beam framing members of dimension required to support imposed loads;
16 premium select appearance, by an AITC Certified Laminator.
17 1. Construction: Thermally insulated, pressure equalized, self draining assembly.
18 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
19 3. Glazing Plane: Front.
20 4. Finish: Stained and sealed wood, field finished.
21 5.Fabrication Method: Factory fabricated unit and mullion system.
22 6. Steel Fabrication Attachments: Secured to structural steel columns and beams.
23
24 E. Pressure Caps: Aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing. Include custom
25 profile snap on aluminum trim cover that conceals fasteners.
26
27 F. Aluminum Snap-on Trim Cover: Custom profile snap on aluminum trim cover that conceals
28 fasteners.
29 1. Vertical Mullion: Custom profile snap on aluminum trim cover that conceals fasteners.
30 2. Horizontal: Structural silicone assembly.
31
32 G. Brackets and Reinforcements: High strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims
33 for aligning system components.
34
35 H. Steel Reinforcement: Zinc rich, corrosion resistant primer complying with SSPC-
36 PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select
37 surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare
38 surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
39 a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
40 b. Cold Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
41 c. Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
42
43 I. Foamed in Place Insulation: Proprietary formulation of resins, catalysts, and water which,
44 when properly ratioed and mixed together with compressed air, produce a cold setting foam
45 insulation in the cavity of a structural steel tube.
46 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
47 a. cfiFOAM, Inc.; Core Foam.
48 b. C.P. Chemical Products, Inc.; Tripolymer Foam Insulation
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. Polymaster; R-501 Foam Insulation.
2 d. Tailored Chemical Products, Inc.; Cor-Fill 500
3 e. Thermal Corporation of America; Thermco Foam Insulation.
4 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
5 testing agency.
6 a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.
7 b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.
8 3. Sound Abatement: Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 50.
9 4. Thermal Resistance: Average R-value of 4.5/inch of thickness when calculated in
10 accordance with ASTM C 177 in the 25 degrees F and 75 degrees F range.
11
12 2.3 ENTRANCES
13
14 A. Materials:
15 1. Wood: Douglas fir, kiln dried to moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of
16 fabrication; water-repellent preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.
17 a. Grade and Grain: Interior exposed wood, solid clear, stain grade wood.
18 2. Aluminum Cladding: Extruded 6063 T5 grade aluminum.
19 a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
20 b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
21 c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
22 d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
23 3. Cladding Thickness: 0.062 inch.
24
25 B. Hardware: Refer to Section 087100.
26
27 2.4 GLAZING
28
29 A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 for insulated low-e glazing.
30
31 B. Glazing Gaskets: Sealed corner pressure glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing
32 gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers in compliance with Section 088000.
33
34 C. Glazing Sealants: Recommended by manufacturer in compliance with Section 088000.
35
36 2.5 ACCESSORIES
37
38 A. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and
39 accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
40 1. Use self locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
41 thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
42 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
43 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from 300
44 series stainless steel.
45
46 B. Anchors: Three way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that
47 accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with
48 adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot dip galvanized cast iron, malleable iron, or steel
2 inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M
3 requirements.
4
5 C. Sill Pan: Flexible membrane or metal sill pan compatible with wood framing and
6 recommended by curtainwall manufacturer with upturned leg.
7
8 D. Concealed Flashing: Corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with
9 adjacent materials.
10
11 E. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 mil (0.762 mm) thickness per
13 coat.
14
15 2.6 FABRICATION
16
17 A. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
18 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
19 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
20 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
21 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
22 maintain required glazing edge clearances.
23 5. Units that are reglazable from the interior without dismantling.
24 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
25 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
26 extent possible.
27
28 B. Fabricate components to resist water penetration. Provide pressure equalized system or
29 double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at interior side of glazed wood
30 curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented to exterior.
31
32 C. Curtain Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer
33 recommended assembly method.
34
35 D. Factory Assembled Frame Units: Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Prepare surfaces that
36 are in contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to
37 ensure compatibility and adhesion.
38 1. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
39 2. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
40 3. Install insulated glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000.
41
42 E. Entrance Units: Factory fabricate entrance units including, but not limited to, frame, panels,
43 weatherstripping, jamb extensions, astragal, and drip cap.
44 1. Jamb: Size jamb for wall depth.
45 2. Panels:
46 a. Stile and Rail Thickness: 2-1/4 inches (56 mm).
47 b. Stile Width: 5-5/8 inches (41 mm).
48 c. Top Rail Width: 6-13/16 inches (172 mm).
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. Bottom Rail Width: 12 inches (305 mm) (ADAAG compliant).
2 e. Attach solid, edge glued rails to laminated engineered stiles with 5/8 inch by 4
3 inch (26 mm by 100 mm) fluted dowels. Seal with exterior glue.
4 f. Fabricate with phenolic high density laminate moisture vapor barrier laminated
5 to both sides of stiles.
6 3. Glued and Laminated Components: Comply with ASTM D 5572 and ASTM D 5751.
7 4. Cladding: Clad exterior wood surfaces with extruded aluminum.
8 a. Fabricate frame cladding to meet frame weatherstripping.
9 b. Seal clad frame corners with silicone, along with butyl pads, and secure with
10 stainless steel screws.
11 c. Fabricate frame extrusion with continuous integral nail flange.
12 d. Fabricate exterior of frame with accessory groove to accept retrofit trim system
13 or clad brickmould.
14 5. Glazing: Refer to Section 088000.
15 F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
16 Shop Drawings.
17
18 2.7 FINISHES
19
20 A. Aluminum Cladding:
21 1. High Performance Organic Finish: Three coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
22 AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both
23 color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
24 surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
25 a. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect.
26
27 B. Entrance Unit Drip Cap: Match frame color.
28
29 C. Wood, Field Finish:
30 1. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with Woodworking Standards for sanding, filling
31 countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for
32 finishing exterior and interior woods, as applicable to each unit of work.
33 2. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or conditioner, compatible with finish coats, to
34 concealed surfaces of exterior and interior wood. Apply two coats to end grain
35 surfaces.
36 3. Transparent Finish:
37 a. Wiped Stain Finish: Consisting of dry appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and
38 sealer, resistant to mildew and fungus.
39 1) Stain Color: selected by Architect.
40 b. End Sealer: Transparent, colorless wood sealer effective in retarding
41 transmission of moisture at cross grain cuts, compatible with stain finish.
42 c. Penetrating Sealer: Transparent, satin finish penetrating wood sealer compatible
43 with stain finish, mildew and fungus resistant. Apply minimum of 2 coats.
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and conditions
6 affecting performance of the work.
7 1. Entrance Units:
8 a. Verify field measurements are acceptable to suit door unit tolerances.
9 b. Verify sill plate is level.
10 c. Verify supports and anchors are correctly and securely positioned.
11 d. Verify wood frame walls are dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and
12 without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces
13 in opening and within 3 inches of the corner.
14
15 B. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
16
17 3.2 PREPARATION
18
19 A. Coordinate door installation with wall flashings and built in components.
20
21 3.3 INSTALLATION
22
23 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
24 1. Do not install damaged components.
25 2. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
26 3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
27 4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
28 deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
29 5. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize
30 distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
31 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
32
33 B. Entrance Units: Install door units, hardware (as provided by others), and components in
34 accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings, in compliance
35 with specified performance requirements, and to provide weathertight construction.
36 1. Anchor components rigidly and securely to building structure, plumb and level,
37 accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects.
38 2. Fit exposed connections to form tight hairline joints.
39
40 C. Metal Protection:
41 1. Where aluminum or steel is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
42 action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing
43 nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
44 2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
45 painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
46
47 D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
48 members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
3
4 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
5
6 A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
7 maximum tolerances:
8 1. Plumb: 1/16 inch in 10 feet (1.6 mm in 3 m); 1/8 inch in 40 feet (3 mm in 12.2 m).
9 2. Level: 1/16 inch in 20 feet (1.6 mm in 6 m); 1/8 inch in 40 feet (3 mm in 12.2 m).
10 3. Alignment:
11 a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up
12 to 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8
13 mm).
14 b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1
15 inch (13 mm to 25 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6
16 mm).
17 c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25 mm)
18 wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
19 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch
20 (13 mm) over total length.
21
22 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
23
24 A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
25
26 B. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed wood curtain walls where directed
27 by Architect.
28
29 C. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed wood curtain
30 walls.
31 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
32 by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
33 penetration.
34 a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
35 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for testing Article but not
36 more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of
37 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
38 a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
39 3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure
40 differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for testing, but
41 not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.
42
43 D. Glazed wood curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
44 inspections.
45
46 E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 44 50 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.6 ADJUSTING, REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
2
3 A. Adjust doors, hardware, and weatherstripping to provide tight fit at contact points, smooth
4 operation, and weather-tight closure.
5
6 B. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged
7 components if repairs are not approved by Architect.
8
9 C. Cleaning: Clean interior and exterior surfaces immediately after installation in accordance
10 with manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.
11 1. Remove temporary labels from surfaces.
12 2. Remove and replace glass damaged during construction period.
13
14 D. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a
15 useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, deterioration, and
16 damage from work of other trades until Substantial Completion.
17
18 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 75 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 56 73
2
3 SOUND CONTROL WINDOWS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Fixed and sliding sound control window assemblies complete with
11 frames, stops, glazing, sound-absorbing material and concealed fasteners factory installed.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. ASTM International:
16 1. ASTM E 90: Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
17 Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
18 2. ASTM E 336: Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation in Buildings.
19 3. ASTM E 413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
20
21 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
22
23 A. Sound Rating: Provide window assemblies that have been fabricated as sound-retardant
24 units, tested according to ASTM E 90 and have the following certified Sound Transmission
25 Class (STC) rating as determined according to ASTM E 413.
26 1. STC Rating 45
27
28 1.4 SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. Product Data:
31 1. Material lists of items provided under this Section.
32 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
33 specified requirements.
34 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
35 1. For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed
36 statement for low-emitting materials.
37 2. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer
38 recycled content and cost.
39 3. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles of Project,
40 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or
41 recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw
42 material.
43 4. Environmental Product Declaration: For Each Product.
44 5. Health Product Declaration: For each product.
45 6. Sourcing of Raw Materials. Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 75 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Shop Drawings: Showing details of each frame type, elevations of window designs, details
2 of openings, and details of construction, operating hardware, installation and anchorage.
3
4 D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which,
5 when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting the Work.
6
7 E. Test Reports: Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating
8 compliance of sound ratings with the indicated requirements.
9 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10
11 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Manufacturer specializing in producing this type of work for a
12 minimum of five years with successful results.
13
14 B. Installer Qualifications: Installers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
15 necessary workmanship required, and completely familiar with the specified requirements
16 and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work.
17
18 C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide sound control windows, including stops, glazing,
19 frame and sound-absorbing material essential for sound control as an assembly by a single
20 manufacturer.
21
22 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
23
24 A. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during and after
25 installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
26
27 1.7 WARRANTY
28
29 A. Acoustic window materials shall be guaranteed against defective workmanship for one year
30 from date of substantial completion.
31
32
33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34
35 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
36
37 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide double-glazed
38 “Noise Lock” acoustic window(s) and frame(s) with stops, glazing, sound-absorbing
39 material, and concealed fasteners as manufactured by Industrial Acoustics Co, Inc (IAC),
40 (718) 931-8000; other available manufacturers:
41 1. Wausau Window and Wall Syastems.
42 2. Mon-Ray, Inc.
43 3. Peerless Products, Inc.
44
45 B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 75 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.2 FIXED AND SLIDING SOUND CONTROL WINDOWS
3
4 A.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
5 preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
6
7 B. Glass pane(s) minimum thickness:
8 1. STC 45 Rating, ¼” (6 mm) interior, ¼” (6 mm) exterior – double pane
9 2. Interlayer: Clear 0.030” thick polyvinyl butyral
10 3. Glass type shall be: ¼” Laminated Safety Glass
11
12 C. Frame(s) shall be 1 ¼” thick, fabricated from not less than 12 gauge cold rolled,
13 galvannealed steel with an A60 coating weight, reinforced and filled with sound-absorbing
14 acoustic fill. Inside and outside corners shall be mitered and interlocked to hairline
15 measurements, made square, continuously welded, and ground smooth, flush and invisible.
16 The window assembly can be installed into either existing or new construction openings.
17
18 D. Acoustic seals for glazing shall be vibration-isolating resilient gaskets, U-shaped and
19 continuous santoprene UV grade 65-75 durometer black. Self-contained, sound absorptive
20 interior perimeter of not less than 22 gauge (0.76 mm) steel shall be perforated and pre-
21 finished black. Desiccant material shall be incorporated into multiple glazed units.
22 E. Sealants: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
23 materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and
24 glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
25 sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
26 1. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more
27 than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
28
29 F. Stops: Provide stops that are 1” (25 mm) high (min) and readily removable, fabricated
30 from not less than 16 gauge (2 mm) rolled steel sections predrilled and aligned with frame
31 to form tight square acoustical joints. Stop fasteners shall be concealed.
32
33 G. Assembly: The assembly of the acoustic window units including frames, stops, glazing,
34 acoustic seals, sound-absorbing material and concealed fasteners shall take place at the
35 factory to insure required noise reduction is achieved. Glazing shall not need to be
36 removed to facilitate fastening or anchoring at the job site.
37
38 2.3 FABRICATION
39
40 A. General: Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or
41 buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practical, fit and
42 assemble units in the manufacturer’s plant. Identify work that is not permanently factory-
43 assembled before shipment to ensure proper assembly at the Project site. Weld exposed
44 joints continuously: grind, fill dress and make smooth flush and invisible.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 75 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.4 FINISHES
3
4 A. Frames shall receive a shop-applied coat of a rust-inhibitive primer. The primer shall be
5 applied over properly prepared metal, in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard shop
6 prime coat procedure and oven-baked dry.
7
8 B. Field Painting – Refer to Section 09 91 23 – Interior Painting.
9
10
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION
12
13 3.1 PREPARATION
14
15 A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protest adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from
16 damage during product installation.
17
18 B. Adjacent Construction: Coordinate window assembly details with details of adjacent work
19 to ensure proper attachments and clean junctions.
20
21 3.2 INSTALLATION
22
23 A. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product
24 catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions.
25
26 B. Install work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and these specifications using only
27 factory-trained personnel as required by the Manufacturer and approved by the Architect.
28 1. Install windows and shim accordingly to allow for a plumb and square installation
29 without excessive clearances.
30 2. During installation, solidly pack acoustic insulation around frames that are installed
31 in stud and gypsum-wallboard partitions.
32 3. Caulk exterior joint prior to painting.
33 4. Install sound control window assemblies during finish phase of construction to
34 protect units from damage.
35
36 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
37
38 A. Upon completion of this portion of work, and prior to its acceptance by the Owner, secure
39 a visit to the job site by a qualified representative of the manufacturer of the acoustical
40 door system(s) to confirm that installation is in conformance with the manufacturer’s
41 recommendations.
42
43 3.4 FIELD TESTING
44
45 A. Testing Agency: Owner will employ and pay an independent testing agency to perform
46 sound control field testing.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 05 75 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Testing Requirements: Conduct field tests according to ASTM E336 with results
2 calculated according to ASTM E413 to confirm that the operating field NIC values are
3 within 5 dB of laboratory STC values.
4
5 C. Test results shall be reported promptly and in writing by testing agency to Owner,
6 Contractor and Architect.
7
8 D. Repair or replace components of sound control windows where test results indicate STC
9 rating does not meet requirements.
10
11 3.5 DEMONSTRATION
12
13 A. Instruct the Owner’s maintenance personnel regarding the maintenance of all acoustic
14 windows.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
21 May 2018 08 70 11-1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
SECTION 08 70 11 1
2
DOOR HARDWARE 3
4
PART 1 GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. Section Includes: 9
1. Hardware for wood and hollow metal doors. 10
2. Hardware for aluminum doors. 11
3. Thresholds. 12
4. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 13
14
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 15
16
A. BHMA 1301 - Materials and Finishes. 17
18
B. American National Standards Institute: 19
1. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. 20
2. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. 21
3. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls - Closers. 22
4. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions. 23
5. ANSI A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches. 24
25
C. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 26
27
1.3 SUBMITTALS 28
29
A. Hardware Schedule: 30
1. Submit hardware supplier's typewritten copies of proposed finish hardware schedule for 31
review. 32
2. Prepare schedule using Sequence and Format for Hardware Schedule as recommended by 33
Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 34
3. After acceptance of schedule, provide schedule to Architect for file and distribution 35
purposes. 36
4. DO NOT order hardware until acceptable schedule has been received. 37
38
B. Product Data: 39
1. Manufacturer's cut sheets for each hardware item. 40
2. Details for type strike plates, length of spindle, hand, backset and bevel of locks, hand 41
and degree of opening for closers and other functions of mechanisms. 42
3. Installation instructions and maintenance information. 43
4. Copies of final hardware schedule reflecting changes made during construction. 44
45
C. Shop Drawings: 46
1. Push Plate: Indicate concealed fastening and graphics. 47
2. Thresholds: Indicate thickness of materials, method of anchoring and details of 48
construction. 49
50
D. Samples: 51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1. Provide Architect one sample of each item of finish hardware to be furnished for Project. 1
2. Samples will be held by Architect until completion of Project. 2
3. Upon completion of Project, Architect will turn over samples to Owner to serve as 3
product samples for Owner's building maintenance department. 4
5
E. Certifications: Upon request of Architect, submit hardware manufacturer's letter of 6
compliance that products meet ANSI requirements and have been tested and are grades 7
required by specification. 8
9
F. Templates: Furnish templates and accepted finish hardware schedule to door and frame 10
manufacturers for use in fabrication. 11
12
G. Maintenance Tools: Deliver hardware adjustment tools for each item of finish hardware. 13
14
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance 15
instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required 16
for proper maintenance of hardware. 17
18
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19
20
A. Manufacturer's Representative: Furnish services of Architectural Hardware Consultant to 21
prepare hardware schedule, keying, coordination with other trades, consultation with 22
Architect and Owner, and on-site inspections. 23
24
B. Fire Resistant Hardware: Comply with requirements of door and frame manufacturer for UL 25
listed assembly; bear UL labels. 26
27
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 28
29
A. Package hardware items separately with necessary screws, bolts, miscellaneous parts, 30
instructions, and where necessary, installation templates for installation. Clearly label 31
packages to identify contents and finish location in building. 32
33
B. Deliver hardware required for shop application to shop, mill or factory in ample time to not 34
impede progress of work. 35
36
C. Receive hardware when delivered. Provide dry, secure lock-up for hardware delivered to 37
project, but not yet installed. Provide space for unpacking, sorting, checking and storage of 38
finish hardware. 39
40
D. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable so 41
completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 42
43
E. Contractor and hardware supplier shall jointly inventory. 44
45
1.6 WARRANTY 46
47
A. Submit additional warranty on following items: 48
1. Mortise Locks: Five year limited warranty. 49
2. Door Closers: Ten year limited warranty. 50
51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2
3
2.1 BUTT HINGES 4
5
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 6
1. McKinney Manufacturing Company. 7
2. Ives. 8
3. Stanley Hardware, Division of Stanley Works. 9
10
B. Full Mortise Hinges: Five knuckle, ANSI A156.1, with non-rising pins, ball-bearing. 11
12
C. Non-Removable Pins: Provide butts with set screw in barrel making hinge non-removable 13
when door is in closed position for exterior. 14
15
D. Wide Throw Hinges: Where necessary to clear trim or obstacles. 16
2.2 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER 17
A. Manufacturers: 18
a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin EPT-10 19
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH PT1000, Securitron CEPT-10 20
B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide 21
with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified 22
hardware. 23
C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless 24
interference with operation of door or other hardware items. 25
2.3 OFFSET FLOOR CLOSERS AND INTERMEDIATE PIVOTS 26
A. Manufacturers: 27
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Dorma 28
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jackson, Rixson 29
B. Requirements: 30
1. Provide single-acting floor closers complete with ball-bearing top pivot, floor plates, 31
intermediate pivots and cement boxes unless indicated otherwise. 32
2. Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less than 91 inches (2311 mm) high and one 33
additional intermediate pivot per leaf for each additional 30 inches (762 mm) in height or 34
fraction thereof. Intermediate pivots spaced equally not less than 25 inches (635 mm) or 35
not more than 35 inches (889 mm) on center, for doors over 121 inches (3073 mm) high. 36
3. Provide floor closers with adjustable swing speed, latch speed, back-check, with built in 37
positive stop at specified degree of opening. 38
21 May 2018 08 70 11-4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
4. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, with reduced 1
opening force for physically handicapped. 2
5. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Provide separate adjustment 3
for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 4
6. Provide appropriate model where floor closers are specified at fire rated openings. 5
7. Provide lead-lined model where floor closers are specified at lead-lined doors. 6
8. Provide pivots with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with 7
sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. 8
Locate electrified pivot nearest to electrified locking component. If manufacturer of 9
electrified locking component requires another device for power transfer then provide 10
recommended power transfer device and appropriate quantity of pivots. 11
9. Provide mortar guard for each electric pivot specified, unless specified in hollow metal 12
frame specification. 13
2.4 PIVOT SETS 14
A. Manufacturers: 15
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 16
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma, Rixson 17
B. Requirements: 18
1. Provide pivot sets complete with oil-impregnated top pivot, unless indicated otherwise. 19
2. Where offset pivots are specified, Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less than 91 20
inches (2311 mm) high and one additional intermediate pivot per leaf for each additional 21
30 inches (762 mm) in height or fraction thereof. Intermediate pivots spaced equally not 22
less than 25 inches (635 mm) or not more than 35 inches (889 mm) on center, for doors 23
over 121 inches (3073 mm) high. 24
3. Provide appropriate model where pivot sets are scheduled at fire rated openings. 25
4. Provide lead-lined model where pivot sets are specified at lead-lined doors. 26
5. Provide pivots with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with 27
sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. 28
Locate electrified pivot nearest to electrified locking component. If manufacturer of 29
electrified locking component requires another device for power transfer then provide 30
recommended power transfer device and appropriate quantity of pivots. 31
6. Provide mortar guard for each electric pivot specified, unless specified in hollow metal 32
frame specification. 33
34
2.5 COORDINATORS 35
A. Manufacturers: 36
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 37
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood 38
21 May 2018 08 70 11-5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
B. Requirements: 1
1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other 2
hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating 3
device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head. 4
2. Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and 5
appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers and surface vertical rod exit device 6
strikes. Factory-prep coordinators for vertical rod devices if required. 7
8
2.6 LOCKSETS AND LATCH SETS 9
10
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 11
1. Sargent & Company. 12
2. Schlage Lock Company. 13
3. Best 14
15
B. Mortise Locks and Latch Sets: 16
1. Heavy duty construction with wrought cases, minimum case thickness of 0.093", ANSI 17
A156.13. 18
2. Fronts: 8" x 1-1/4", adjustable to 1/8" in 2" with 2-3/4" backset. 19
3. Minimum projection of latch bolt: 3/4". 20
4. Minimum throw of dead bolt: 1". 21
5. Beveled, rounded or rabbeted faces where required. 22
6. Where lock stiles are too narrow for backsets of locks specified, furnish special backsets. 23
24
C. Lever Handles and Escutcheons: 25
1. Cast of forged brass or bronze material, levers supported by internal spring. 26
2. On doors into hazardous areas which are accessible to physically handicapped persons, 27
provide knurled lever contact surfaces. 28
3. Locksets shall be provided with pressure release feature. When outside lever is locked, it 29
is not ridged but will move freely without operating latch bolt or transferring torque to 30
lock chassis. 31
32
D. Strikes: 33
1. Furnish locks and latches with wrought box strikes. 34
2. On single swing doors, provide latch strike plates with minimum lip projection necessary 35
to project from trim. 36
3. On pair of doors with or without astragal, lip projection of latch strike plates shall not 37
extend beyond face of lock style of inactive leaf. 38
4. Size: 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" x 3/32". 39
40
2.7 KEYING 41
42
A. Factory construction masterkeyed locksets based on Sargent cylinders. Perform further 43
keying as directed by Owner. 44
45
B. Establish keying based on GMK system. Provide following number of keys: 46
1. GMK: Six each. 47
2. MK: Six each. 48
3. Change keys: Three for each lock. 49
21 May 2018 08 70 11-6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
4. Construction keys: 12 master keys. 1
2
C. Construction Keying: Provide construction cores for locks during construction. 3
4
D. Index, tag and deliver permanent keys in sealed container to Owner. 5
6
E. Contractor to provide installation of permanent cores. 7
8
2.8 EXIT DEVICES 9
10
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 11
1. Von Duprin, Inc. 12
2. Sargent 13
14
B. Description: 15
1. Listed under Fire Exit Hardware'" in accident equipment list of Underwriters 16
Laboratories, ANSI A156.3 17
2. Chassis mounted unit construction with removable covers, identical wall thickness on all 18
types of exit devices. 19
3. Minimum wall thickness of cross bar: 0.062" or reinforced. 20
4. Minimum top and bottom rods of vertical rod devices: 3/8" diameter. 21
5. Stainless steel main arm pivot and springs. 22
6. Cross bars and arms counterbalanced by springs in both center case and hinge stile case. 23
7. Base metal stainless steel, brass, or bronze. 24
8. Guarded dead latching and flush end caps. 25
26
2.9 SURFACE MOUNTED DOOR CLOSERS 27
28
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 29
1. Norton 30
2. LCN Closer Division. 31
3. Sargent & Company. 32
33
B. Description: 34
1. ANSI A156.4, universal regular or parallel arm, nonhanded, nonsized. 35
2. Grade 1 cast iron. 36
3. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic. 37
4. Closing speed, latching speed and backcheck controlled by independently operated 38
concealed key valves. 39
5. Intensity of backcheck feature to be adjustable. 40
6. Equipped with spring adjustment allowing adjustment of spring power to suit individual 41
door conditions. 42
7. Suitable for mounting on 1-3/4" minimum top rail of door. 43
8. Size as recommended by manufacturer for door size and weight. 44
9. Provide mounting plates, hex nuts and bolts. 45
10. No graphics allowed on cover. 46
11. Provide parallel arms for exterior doors, hall doors, and outswinging interior doors. 47
12. Provide stop arms for exterior door closers with parallel arms. 48
49
C. Arm Finish: Painted, aluminum enamel. 50
51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
D. Closer Cover Finish: Sprayed enamel, color selected by Architect. 1
2
2.10 DOOR STOPS 3
4
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 5
1. Glynn-Johnson. 6
2. Ives. 7
3. Quality. 8
9
B. Wall Stops: Convex gray rubber bumper and brass, bronze or steel with concealed fasteners. 10
11
C. Furnish door stop for all door leaves. 12
13
2.11 FLUSH BOLTS AND STRIKES 14
15
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 16
1. Ives. 17
2. Quality. 18
3. Trimco. 19
20
B. Furnish flush bolts with dustproof strikes. 21
22
C. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless 23
steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 24
inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors 25
over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each 26
additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush 27
bolt. 28
29
2.12 SILENCERS 30
31
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 32
1. Ives. 33
2. Quality. 34
3. Trimco. 35
36
B. Description: Preformed neoprene or rubber, gray. 37
38
C. Provide on interior metal door frames, except for frames for weatherstripped or smoke-39
sealed doors. Provide three silencers minimum for single doors and two for pairs of doors. 40
41
2.13 AIR OR SMOKE SEALS 42
43
A. Extruded silicone bulb-type with self-adhesive backing. 44
45
2.14 WEATHER STRIPPING 46
47
A. Type: Silicone head and jamb pressure-sensitive gasket. 48
49
2.15 THRESHOLD 50
51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1
1. Pemko Manufacturing Company. 2
2. Reese Metal Weatherstripping Company. 3
3. Zero Weatherstripping Company, Inc. 4
5
B. Material: Two-piece grooved aluminum treads, for handicap access clear anodized finish, 6
fabricated with mitered corners and returns. 7
8
2.16 DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 9
10
A. Material: Neoprene bulb in aluminum channel. 11
12
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 13
1. A.J. May Corporation. 14
2. Pemko Manufacturing Company. 15
3. Reese Metal Weatherstripping Company. 16
4. Zero Weatherstripping Company, Inc. 17
18
2.17 PUSH AND PULLS 19
20
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 21
1. Ives. 22
2. Trimco Builders Hardware. 23
3. Trego Industries. 24
25
2.18 KICK PLATES 26
27
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 28
1. Ives. 29
2. Trimco Builders Hardware. 30
3. Trego Industries. 31
32
2.19 KEY CABINET 33
34
A. Surface mounted unit manufactured from patent level cold-rolled furniture steel, electro-35
welded construction; no sag continuous piano type pin hinge; pin tumbler locking device. 36
37
B. Index system including dual tag system, visible key receipt system, three-way visible index and 38
key gathering envelopes. 39
40
C. Sized to contain and index keys for project plus 100 percent expansion. 41
42
2.20 FABRICATION 43
44
A. Form surfaces true, smooth, and free from burrs; of uniform color, reasonably free from 45
imperfections affecting appearance and serviceability. Dress portions of lock mechanism 46
which come in contact or bear upon other parts to true, smooth surface. 47
48
B. Drawings show swing or hand of each door. Finish each item of hardware for proper 49
installation and operation of door swing. 50
51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
C. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, ANSI A156.7, and prepared for 1
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-2
tapping sheet metal screws except as specifically indicated. 3
4
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flathead screws 5
except as otherwise noted. Finish exposed screws to match hardware finish. 6
7
E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are not exposed when door is closed, 8
except to extent no standard manufacturer units of type specified are available with concealed 9
fasteners. 10
11
F. Provide appropriate nuts and thru-bolts with closers. 12
13
G. Provide fasteners which are compatible with bolt unit fastened and substrate, and which will 14
not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material, or fastener. 15
16
2.21 HARDWARE FINISHES 17
18
A. Match finish of each hardware unit at each door or opening. Reduce differences in color and 19
textures as much as possible where base metal or metal forming process is different for 20
individual units of hardware exposed at same door or opening. 21
22
B. Architect will determine of acceptability of match with samples and other hardware at each 23
door. Units will be judged when held 2'-0" apart at 3'-0" distance. 24
25
C. Finish designations used in schedules and elsewhere are those listed in Materials and Finished 26
Standard 1301 by BHMA. 27
28
29
PART 3 EXECUTION 30
31
3.1 PREPARATION 32
33
A. Hardware schedule should include thicknesses of door, hand and backset of hardware items, 34
method of fastening and other detail requirements. 35
36
B. Check Drawings and door schedule and provide required hardware for openings. Provide 37
required hardware for labeled opening to conform with NFPA 80 and applicable building 38
codes. 39
40
C. Coordinate with door and frame manufacturers. 41
42
D. Trim undesignated openings with hardware of equal quality and design to that specified for 43
similar opening. 44
45
3.2 INSTALLATION 46
47
A. Install finish hardware plumb, level and true to line in accordance with manufacturer's printed 48
instructions and job conditions. 49
50
B. Locate hardware to comply with NBHA standards. 51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1
C. Install finish hardware to template. 2
3
D. Cut and fit to substrate avoiding damage or weakening. Reinforce attachment substrates as 4
necessary for installation and operation. 5
6
E. Completely cover cutouts with hardware item. 7
8
F. Mortise work to correct location and size without gouging, splintering or causing irregularities 9
in exposed finish work. 10
11
G. Surfaces for paint or other finish: 12
1. Where cutting and fitting is required on substrates to be painted or similarly finished, 13
install, fit and adjust hardware prior to finishing. 14
2. Remove hardware and place in original packaging. 15
3. Reinstall hardware after finishing operation is complete. 16
17
H. Install hardware items affixed to concrete with machine screws and threaded expansion 18
shields. 19
20
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 21
22
A. Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure proper operating or function of 23
unit. 24
25
B. Lubricate moving parts as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type 26
lubrication if none other is recommended. 27
28
C. Repair or replace defective materials or units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to 29
operate freely and smoothly. Reinstall items found improperly installed. 30
31
D. Prior to Final Acceptance date, readjust and relubricate as necessary. 32
33
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 34
35
A. Instruct Owner's designated personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware 36
and finishes at time of final hardware adjustment. 37
38
3.5 MAINTENANCE 39
40
A. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after acceptance of hardware in 41
each area: 42
1. Re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. 43
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to maintenance 44
procedures. 45
3. Clean and lubricate operational items wherever installed. 46
4. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials 47
or installation of hardware units. 48
49
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 50
51
21 May 2018 08 70 11-11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 001 2
EACH TO HAVE: 3
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
B/O
4
5
6
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 003 7
EACH TO HAVE: 8
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
HARDWARE BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
B/O
9
10
11
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 103ST 12
EACH TO HAVE: 13
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050HD LATA L583-363 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS
REQ
630 GLY
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
14
15
16
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 200GT 17
EACH TO HAVE: 18
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P/FB41P AS REQ 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB X HW PREPS X
LENGTH AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
19
20
21
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 200ST 22
EACH TO HAVE: 23
21 May 2018 08 70 11-12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P/FB41P AS REQ 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB X HW PREPS X
LENGTH AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
1 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS
REQ
630 GLY
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
2 EA MEETING STILE 328AA (2 PCS - 1 SET) HEIGHT AS
REQUIRED (OMIT @ NON-RATED
DOORS)
AA ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 201CGT 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
2 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 201CT 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 201T 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
21 May 2018 08 70 11-13 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 206T 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P/FB41P AS REQ 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB X HW PREPS X
LENGTH AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
2 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS
REQ
630 GLY
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 207GQW 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS
REQ
630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 341T 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
21 May 2018 08 70 11-14 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 343T 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 LATA L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 500CGQT 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P/FB41P AS REQ 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB X HW PREPS X
LENGTH AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 500HT 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31T/FB41T AS REQ 630 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB X HW PREPS X
LENGTH AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA FLOOR STOP/HOLDER FS40 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
16
17
18
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501 19
EACH TO HAVE: 20
21 May 2018 08 70 11-15 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501CG 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501CGQ 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501CGQT 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
21 May 2018 08 70 11-16 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501CGQW 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501CT 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501G 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
21 May 2018 08 70 11-17 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501GQ 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501GQT 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501GT 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
21 May 2018 08 70 11-18 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 501T 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 507GQ 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD LATA 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS
REQ
630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 700GT 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9947-L-LBR-LAT 626 VON
2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
21 May 2018 08 70 11-19 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 701CGQR 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-F-LAT 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 701CGRT 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-F-LAT 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 715T 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-NL 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A DW + 4" AA ZER
21 May 2018 08 70 11-20 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 731CGQR 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-BE-F-LAT 626 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 731GQR 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-BE-F-LAT 626 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER
1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 731GRT 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-BE-F-LAT 626 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
16
17
18
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 760T 19
21 May 2018 08 70 11-21 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
EACH TO HAVE: 1
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7215 INT 626 IVE
2 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA MEETING STILE 328AA (2 PCS - 1 SET) HEIGHT AS
REQUIRED (OMIT @ NON-RATED
DOORS)
AA ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
2
3
4
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 764A 5
EACH TO HAVE: 6
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7215 INT 626 IVE
2 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME
MANUFACTURER
1 SET ASTRAGAL MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
7
8
9
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 765ATW 10
EACH TO HAVE: 11
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7215 INT 626 IVE
1 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER
21 May 2018 08 70 11-22 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 861T 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL PR 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 881FGTW 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT M19 626 RIX
1 EA FLOOR CLOSER 27 WITH M180 TOP PIVOT
DEADSTOP AT 90 DEGREES
626 RIX
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL PR 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET
MOUNT B2B ON 3" THICK DOORS
630-316 IVE
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. C207T 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON
1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092HDEU LATA RX CON 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS
REQ
630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON-
RATED DOORS)
BK ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
21 May 2018 08 70 11-23 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902
COORDINATE POWER SUPPLY
REQUIREMENTS W/ SECURITY. OMIT
WHERE PROVIDED BY SECURITY.
LGR SCE
1 CARD READER BY OTHERS
1 EA POWER SUPPLY FOR CARD READER
BY OTHERS
1 EA HARNESS (IN DOOR) ALLEGION CONNECT TYPE & LENGTH
AS REQ
VON
1
INGRESS BY CARD READER OR KEY OVERRIDE. EGRESS BY LEVER. 2
3
4
5
HARDWARE GROUP NO. C714AT 6
EACH TO HAVE: 7
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT HEIGHT AS REQ 628 IVE
2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
RX-QEL-9947-EO-CON 626 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
RX-QEL-9947-NL-OP-110MDCON 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F 36" 20" STD 630-316 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME
MANUFACTURER
1 SET ASTRAGAL MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
2 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH
2 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS
COORDINATE POWER SUPPLY
REQUIREMENTS W/ SECURITY. OMIT
WHERE PROVIDED BY SECURITY.
LGR SCE
1 CARD READER BY OTHERS
1 EA POWER SUPPLY FOR CARD READER
BY OTHERS
1 EA HARNESS (IN DOOR) ALLEGION CONNECT TYPE & LENGTH
AS REQ
VON
8
INGRESS BY CARD READER OR KEY OVERRIDE. EGRESS BY PUSH PAD. 9
10
11
12
HARDWARE GROUP NO. C715TW 13
EACH TO HAVE: 14
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON
21 May 2018 08 70 11-24 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
1 EA ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
RX-QEL-99-NL-CON 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A DW + 4" AA ZER
1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902
COORDINATE POWER SUPPLY
REQUIREMENTS W/ SECURITY. OMIT
WHERE PROVIDED BY SECURITY.
LGR SCE
1 CARD READER BY OTHERS
1 EA POWER SUPPLY FOR CARD READER
BY OTHERS
1 EA HARNESS (IN DOOR) ALLEGION CONNECT TYPE & LENGTH
AS REQ
VON
1
INGRESS BY CARD READER OR KEY OVERRIDE. EGRESS BY PUSH PAD. 2
3
4
5
HARDWARE GROUP NO. D714ATW 6
EACH TO HAVE: 7
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7215 INT 626 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9947-EO 626 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9947-NL-OP-110MD 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F 36" 20" STD 630-316 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME
MANUFACTURER
1 SET ASTRAGAL MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
2 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
8
INGRESS BY CARD READER OR KEY OVERRIDE. EGRESS BY PUSH PAD. 9
10
11
12
HARDWARE GROUP NO. D760ATW 13
EACH TO HAVE: 14
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA PIVOT M19 626 RIX
21 May 2018 08 70 11-25 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
2 EA FLOOR CLOSER 27 WITH M180 TOP PIVOT
DEADSTOP AT 90 DEGREES
626 RIX
2 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME
MANUFACTURER
1 SET ASTRAGAL MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
2 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. D761ATW 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT M19 626 RIX
1 EA FLOOR CLOSER 27 WITH M180 TOP PIVOT
DEADSTOP AT 90 DEGREES
626 RIX
1 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
6
7
8
HARDWARE GROUP NO. D764AT 9
EACH TO HAVE: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7215 INT 626 IVE
2 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME
MANUFACTURER
1 SET ASTRAGAL MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
2 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
11
12
13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. D765AT 14
EACH TO HAVE: 15
21 May 2018 08 70 11-26 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7215 INT 626 IVE
1 EA EXIT DEVICE PA100Z SERIES LENGTH AND HEIGHT
AS REQ
630 CRL
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. TYPE AS REQ. 626 SCH
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 65A LENGTH AS REQ A ZER
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE
1
2
3
HARDWARE GROUP NO. E781CGRTW 4
EACH TO HAVE: 5
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA PIVOT FM19 626 RIX
1 EA FLOOR CLOSER F27 WITH FM180 TOP PIVOT
DEADSTOP AT 90 DEGREES
626 RIX
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON
1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT
HARDWARE
RX-QEL-QM-99-NL-OP-F W/ MTG HDW
FOR 3" THICK DOOR
626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE
SUPPLY FOR 3" THICK DOOR PLUS
TRIM THICKNESS
626 SCH
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 FA900 LGR SCE
1 EA HARNESS (IN DOOR) ALLEGION CONNECT TYPE & LENGTH
AS REQ
VON
6
DURING OPERATIONAL HOURS, DOORS IS NORMALLY CLOSED AND UNLATCHED. ENTRY BY 7
DOOR PULL. AFTER HOURS AND BY ACTIVATION OF FIRE ALARM DOOR IS CLOSED AND 8
LATCHED. ENTRY BY KEY OVERRIDE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. WIRE THE ELECTRIFIED 9
LATCH BOLT TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. LATCH BOLTS TO REMAIN IN THE EXTENDED 10
POSITION UPON ACTIVATION OF THE FIRE ALARM UNLESS MANUALLY RETRACTED BY THE 11
PUSH PAD. 12
13
14
15
HARDWARE GROUP NO. E781CGTW 16
EACH TO HAVE: 17
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
21 May 2018 08 70 11-27 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
2 EA PIVOT M19 626 RIX
1 EA FLOOR CLOSER 27 WITH M180 TOP PIVOT
DEADSTOP AT 90 DEGREES
626 RIX
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
RX-QEL-QM-99-NL-OP W/ MTG HDW
FOR 3" THICK DOOR
626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 369AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 164A-223
OMIT @ SMOOTH SURFACE AREAS
A ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188S H & J
PROVIDE DOUBLE ROW
BK ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902
COORDINATE POWER SUPPLY
REQUIREMENTS W/ SECURITY. OMIT
WHERE PROVIDED BY SECURITY.
LGR SCE
1 EA HARNESS (IN DOOR) ALLEGION CONNECT TYPE & LENGTH
AS REQ
VON
1
DURING OPERATIONAL HOURS, DOORS IS NORMALLY CLOSED AND UNLATCHED. ENTRY BY 2
DOOR PULL. AFTER HOURS DOOR IS CLOSED AND LATCHED. ENTRY BY KEY OVERRIDE. 3
FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. 4
5
6
7
HARDWARE GROUP NO. S700MRT 8
EACH TO HAVE: 9
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE BY STC DOOR MFR 626 B/O
1 EA FIRE RATED
REMOVABLE MULLION
KR9954 HEIGHT AS REQ
COORDINATE MULLION WITH STC
DOOR MFR
689 VON
2 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-F-LAT 626 VON
3 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
B/O
10
COORDINATE ALL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS WITH STC DOOR MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO 11
SUBMITTAL. PROVIDE HARDWARE AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE SOUND DOOR ASSEMBLY. 12
13
14
15
HARDWARE GROUP NO. S700MTW 16
EACH TO HAVE: 17
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
21 May 2018 08 70 11-28 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
8 EA HINGE BY STC DOOR MFR 626 B/O
1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 HEIGHT AS REQ
COORDINATE MULLION WITH STC
DOOR MFR
689 VON
2 EA PANIC HARDWARE QM-99-L-LAT 626 VON
3 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
B/O
1
COORDINATE ALL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS WITH STC DOOR MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO 2
SUBMITTAL. PROVIDE HARDWARE AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE SOUND DOOR ASSEMBLY. 3
4
5
6
HARDWARE GROUP NO. S701RT 7
EACH TO HAVE: 8
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE BY STC DOOR MFR 626 B/O
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE QM-99-L-F-LAT 626 VON
1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH
1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 W/KEYED CONST. CORE 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
B/O
9
COORDINATE ALL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS WITH STC DOOR MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO 10
SUBMITTAL. PROVIDE HARDWARE AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE SOUND DOOR ASSEMBLY. 11
12
13
14
HARDWARE GROUP NO. S860TW 15
EACH TO HAVE: 16
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
8 EA HINGE BY STC DOOR MFR 626 B/O
2 EA LONG DOOR PULL PR 9266F DOOR HEIGHT MINUS 2 FEET 630-316 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP OR P4040XP X MTG BRKT,
SPCR & PLATE AS REQ X ST3596
689 LCN
2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
B/O
17
COORDINATE ALL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS WITH STC DOOR MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO 18
SUBMITTAL. PROVIDE HARDWARE AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE SOUND DOOR ASSEMBLY. 19
20
21 May 2018 08 70 11-29 17008.0000
Issue for Permit – Addendum 01
END OF SECTION 1
2
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
SECTION 08 80 00 1
2
GLAZING 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 SUMMARY 8
9
A. Section Includes: 10
1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, storefront framing, and glazed 11
curtain walls. 12
2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 13
14
1.2 REFERENCES 15
16
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association 17
1. AAMA 800: Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants 18
19
B. American National Standard Institute: 20
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance 21
Specifications and Methods of Test. 22
23
C. ASTM International 24
1. ASTM C 509 - Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing 25
Material 26
2. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 27
3. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 28
4. ASTM C 1048 - Heat Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated 29
Glass. 30
5. ASTM C 1087 - Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied 31
Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems. 32
6. ASTM C 1115 - Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and 33
Accessories. 34
7. ASTM C 1281 - Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications 35
8. ASTM C 1376 - Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat 36
Glass. 37
9. ASTM E 1300 - Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness of Annealed 38
Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load. 39
10. ASTM E 2188 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance. 40
11. ASTM E 2189 - Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in 41
Insulating in Insulating Glass Units. 42
12. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and 43
Evaluation. 44
45
D. Code of Federal Regulations 46
1. 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
2. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-2006: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission 1
Standards for Architectural Coatings.] 2
3
E. Glass Association of North America: 4
1. Engineering Standards Manual. 5
2. Glazing Manual. 6
3. Laminated Glazing Reference Manual 7
8
F. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance 9
1. IGMA TB-3001: Guidelines for Sloped Glazing. 10
2. SIGMA TM-3000: North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass 11
Units for Commercial and Residential Use 12
13
G. Sealed Insulated Glass Manufactures Association: 14
1. SIGMA TM-3000 - Vertical Glazing Guidelines. 15
16
H. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers: 17
1. SEI/ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 18
I. Underwriters Laboratories: 19
1. UL 972 – Burglary-Resisting Glazing Material. 20
21
1.3 SUBMITTALS 22
23
A. Product Data: 24
1. Glass: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, 25
special handling or installation requirements. 26
2. Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental 27
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. 28
3. Identify available colors; indicate special precautions required. 29
30
B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 31
1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 32
2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for 33
low-emitting materials. 34
35
C. Shop Drawings: 36
1. Sections and details of glass installation at framing members including head, 37
mullions, transoms, jambs and sills. 38
39
D. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of each type and thickness of tint, patterned and 40
coated glass. 41
42
E. Certificates: Submit glass and glazing manufacturer's certifications that materials meet 43
Specification requirements and are compatible with each other. 44
45
46
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
2
A. Fabricator Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: 3
A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass 4
manufacturer. 5
6
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project 7
who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 8
9
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 break 10
safe characteristics. 11
12
D. Heat-Strengthened and Fully-Tempered Glass: 13
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process. 14
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 15
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated 16
glass). 17
4. Fabrication Tolerances: 18
a. Optical Distortion Tolerance: Using a LightSentry measurement system or 19
equal, measure each pane of monolithic heat-strengthened glass against the 20
following criteria and reject those that do not comply: 21
1) Roller Wave Criteria: Maximum 0.004 inches at center and 0.008 inches 22
at edges from peak to valley. 23
2) Millidiopter Criteria: Over 90 percent of glass surface, plus or minus 24
120 A overall, or the highest overall measurement from the approved 25
mock-up that is less than plus or minus 120 A. Whichever is less. 26
b. Overall Bow and Warp Tolerance: Examine each pane of heat treated glass to 27
detect any lights which exceed half of the maximum bow and warp tolerances 28
in any direction as listed in ASTM C1048, Table 2 and reject those that do not 29
comply. 30
5. Orientation: Orient roller-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as 31
installed unless otherwise indicated. 32
a. If width of any glass units indicated on Drawings exceeds fabrication limits, 33
roller-wave distortion shall be oriented in a consistent direction for the entire 34
project. 35
36
E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at 37
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 38
39
F. Mock-Ups: 40
1. Erect mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and quality of materials and 41
execution using materials indicated for final unit of work. 42
2. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may 43
become part of completed Work. When directed, demolish and remove mock-ups 44
from Project Site. 45
46
47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1
2
A. Deliver glass to job in original containers bearing manufacturer's label indicating quality of 3
contents of each package. 4
5
B. Store glass under cover at site and protect from edge and surface damage. 6
7
C. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. Keep glass free from contamination by 8
materials capable of staining glass. Do not apply marking materials to either side of glass. 9
10
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 11
12
A. Environmental Requirements: 13
1. Do not install glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. 14
unless recommended by glazing material manufacturer. 15
2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after 16
installation of glazing compounds. 17
3. Do not install glazing materials when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, 18
frost, condensation, or other causes. 19
20
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 21
22
A. Coordinate Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to 23
adjacent Work. 24
25
1.8 WARRANTY 26
27
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to 28
replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration 29
of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to 30
glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's 31
written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of 32
deterioration in coating. 33
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 34
35
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace 36
laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of 37
laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to 38
glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's 39
written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing 40
vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass 41
standard. 42
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 43
44
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace 45
insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of 46
insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed 47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's 1
written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or 2
film on interior surfaces of glass. 3
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4
5
6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 7
8
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 9
10
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 11
following: 12
1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 13
2. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. 14
3. JE Berkowitz, LP. 15
4. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™. 16
5. Pilkington North America. 17
6. Saint-Gobain. 18
7. Schott North America, Inc. 19
8. Viracon, Inc. 20
9. Vitro Glass 21
22
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each 23
glass type. 24
1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer. 25
2. Obtain coated glass from single source from single manufacturer. 26
27
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single 28
manufacturer for each product and installation method. 29
30
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 31
32
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and 33
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable 34
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or 35
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects 36
in construction. 37
38
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 45 16 39
"Contractor's Quality Control," to design glazing. 40
41
C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits 42
and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 43
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of glazing systems to withstand loads 44
caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as 45
calculated in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish wind pressure based on the 46
following criteria: 47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
a. Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph. 1
b. Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 90 mph]. 2
c. Occupancy Category: III. 3
d. Exposure Category: C. 4
e. Internal Pressure Coeffiicient (GCPI): ±0.18. 5
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 6
3. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 7
4. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest 8
part of the glass. 9
5. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 10
degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 11
0.001. 12
6. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-13
glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side 14
length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 15
7. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential 16
shading within individual glass lites. 17
18
D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is required, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 19
1201, Category II. 20
21
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties 22
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated 23
below: 24
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 25
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for 26
overall unit and for each lite. 27
3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's 28
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x 29
K). 30
4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, 31
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 32
5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 33
34
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 35
36
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product 37
manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 38
See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in 39
referenced standards. 40
1. GANA: "GANA Glazing Manual." 41
3. IGMA TM-3000: "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass 42
Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 43
4. IGMA TM-3100: "Voluntary Guidelines for the Identification of Visual 44
Obstructions in the Air Space of Insulating Glass Units." 45
46
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with 1
certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, 2
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 3
4
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at 5
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 6
7
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies 8
with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 9
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 10
11
E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-12
strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with 13
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, 14
provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with 15
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide 16
fully tempered float glass. 17
18
2.4 GLASS - FLOAT GLASS 19
20
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing select), 21
Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing). 22
23
B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing 24
select), Class 1, complying with other requirements specified and with low-iron content and 25
visible light transmission not less than 91 percent. 26
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 27
a. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite®. 28
b. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite®. 29
c. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire®. 30
31
C. Glass Types: 32
1. Type 0A - Clear. 33
2. Type 0B - Tinted: Not Used. 34
3. Type 0C - Ultraclear. 35
36
2.5 GLASS - HEAT-STRENGTHENED GLASS 37
38
A. Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3 39
(glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing), Kind 40
HS (heat-strengthened), Condition A (uncoated). 41
42
B. Glass Types: 43
1. Type 1A - Clear. 44
2. Type 1B - Tinted: Not Used. 45
3. Type 1C - Ultraclear. 46
47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
2.6 GLASS - FULLY TEMPERED 1
2
A. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing 3
select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing), Kind FT (fully 4
tempered), Condition A (uncoated). 5
6
B. Glass Types: 7
1. Type 2A - Clear. 8
2. Type 2B - Tinted: Not Used. 9
3. Type 2C - Ultraclear. 10
11
2.7 COATED GLASS - HEAT-STRENGTHENED GLASS 12
13
A. Coated Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1376 and ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent 14
glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and 15
light-reducing), Kind HS (heat-strengthened), Condition C (other coated glass). 16
17
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 70XL by PPG 18
coating on the #2 (inner) surface of a low-iron ultraclear glass outer-lite, that, when paired 19
with an inner-lite of clear glass in an insulated unit configuration, results in comparable 20
appearance and performance characteristics as follows: 21
1. Transmittance: 22
a. Visible: 64% 23
b. Solar: 25% 24
c. Ultraviolet: 6% 25
2. Reflectance: 26
a. Visible Light: 12% 27
b. Total Solar Energy: 52% 28
3. U Value: 29
a. Winter night-time: 0.28 30
b. Summer day-time: 0.26 31
4. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 32
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 33
6. LSG Ratio: 2.37 34
35
C. Glass Types: 36
1. Type 3A - Clear. 37
2. Type 3B - Tinted: Not Used. 38
3. Type 3C - Ultraclear. 39
40
2.8 COATED GLASS - FULLY TEMPERED 41
42
A. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1376 and ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), 43
Quality-Q3 (glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-44
reducing), Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition C (other coated glass). 45
46
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 70XL by PPG 1
coating on the #2 (inner) surface of a low-iron ultraclear glass outer-lite, that, when paired 2
with an inner-lite of clear glass in an insulated unit configuration, results in comparable 3
appearance and performance characteristics as follows: 4
1. Transmittance: 5
a. Visible: 64% 6
b. Solar: 25% 7
c. Ultraviolet: 6% 8
2. Reflectance: 9
a. Visible Light: 12% 10
b. Total Solar Energy: 52% 11
3. U Value: 12
a. Winter night-time: 0.28 13
b. Summer day-time: 0.26 14
4. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 15
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 16
6. LSG Ratio: 2.37 17
18
C. Glass Types: 19
1. Type 4A - Clear. 20
2. Type 4B - Tinted: Not Used. 21
3. Type 4C - Ultraclear. 22
23
2.9 GLASS - HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS - CERAMIC-COATED 24
25
A. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Kind HS 26
(heat-strengthened), Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Class 1 27
(clear), Quality Q3 (glazing select) with a ceramic coating 28
1. Type 5A - Clear: 100% opaque ceramic coating on #2 (inner) surface. 29
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 30
2. Type 5B – Clear: simulated patterned ceramic frit on #2 (inner) surface. 31
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 32
b. Refer to Construction Drawings for frit pattern. 33
34
2.10 GLASS – FULLY TEMPERED - CERAMIC-COATED 35
36
A. Fully Tempered Ceramic-Coated Fritted Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type 1 (transparent 37
glass, flat), Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface 38
ceramic coated), Class 1 (clear), Quality Q3 (glazing select) with a ceramic coating 39
1. Type 6A - Clear: simulated patterned ceramic frit on #2 (inner) surface of 40
insulated units. 41
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 42
b. Refer to Construction Drawings for frit pattern. 43
44
2.11 INSULATED GLASS 45
46
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
A. Insulated Glass: Sealed units of glass lites separated by dehydrated air spaces complying 1
with ASTM E 2188, ASTM E 2189, and ASTM E 2190, with the following indicated 2
requirements: 3
1. For types, classes, kinds, and conditions of each glass lite refer to specified glass 4
types. 5
2. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary using manufacturer's standard 6
sealants. 7
3. Spacer: Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish in color as selected by 8
Architect from manufacturer's full color line. 9
4. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 " measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass 10
lites at unit edge. 11
12
B. Glass Types: 13
1. Type 8-1: 14
a. Outer Lite: Type 3C. 15
b. Inner Lite: Type 1A. 16
2. Type 8-2: 17
a. Outer Lite: Type 4C. 18
b. Inner Lite: Type 2A. 19
3. Type 8-3: 20
a. Outer Lite: Type 3C. 21
b. Inner Lite: Type 5A. 22
4. Type 8-4: 23
a. Outer Lite: Type 3C. 24
b. Inner Lite: Type 5B. 25
5. Type 8-5: 26
a. Outer Lite: Type 4C. 27
b. Inner Lite: Type 6A. 28
29
2.12 GLAZING SEALANTS 30
31
A. General: 32
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, 33
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel 34
substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant 35
manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 36
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for 37
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions 38
existing at time of installation. 39
3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.] 40
4. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 41
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of 42
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental 43
Chambers." 44
5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's 45
full range. 46
47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type 1
S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 2
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 3
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 790 Silicone Building Sealant. 4
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SCS2700 5
SilPruf LM. 6
c. Pecora Corporation; 890NST. 7
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 8
9
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type 10
S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 11
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 12
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 795 Silicone Building Sealant. 13
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; Silpruf 14
SCS200. 15
c. Pecora Corporation; 895NST. 16
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 17
18
19
2.13 GLAZING TAPES 20
21
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids 22
elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with 23
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for 24
application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products 25
indicated below: 26
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous 27
pressure. 28
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous 29
pressure. 30
31
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with 32
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 33
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary 34
sealant. 35
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination 36
with a full bead of liquid sealant. 37
38
2.14 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS 39
40
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and 41
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions 42
of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system 43
performance requirements. 44
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting 45
on glass framing members and glazing components. 46
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), 1
material surfaces. 2
3
B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 4
5
6
PART 3 - EXECUTION 7
8
3.1 EXAMINATION 9
10
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with 11
the following: 12
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and 13
offsets at corners. 14
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 15
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 16
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 17
18
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 19
20
3.2 PREPARATION 21
22
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before 23
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 24
25
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as 26
needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials 27
that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 28
29
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL 30
31
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, 32
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including 33
those in referenced glazing publications. 34
35
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass 36
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with 37
edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair 38
performance, or impair appearance. 39
40
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by 41
preconstruction testing. 42
43
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing 44
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of 45
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 46
47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 1
2
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 3
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. 4
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets 5
and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face 6
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 7
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal 8
to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed 9
thickness of tape. 10
11
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving 12
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and 13
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 14
15
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 16
17
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 18
19
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or 20
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when 21
installation is subjected to movement. 22
23
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended 24
by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt 25
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 26
27
L. Tempered Safety Glazing: 28
1. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade tempered safety glass. 29
2. Set tempered safety glass with tong marks completely concealed or in as 30
inconspicuous a location as possible. 31
3. Install tempered safety glass in hazardous locations: 32
a. Ingress and egress doors. 33
b. Operable or inoperable panels adjacent to a door in building and within same 34
wall plane as door whose nearest vertical edge is within 24" of door in closed 35
position and whose bottom edge is less than 60" above floor or walking 36
surface. 37
c. Fixed panels which have glazed area in excess of 9 sq. ft. and lowest edge is 38
less than 18" above finished floor level or walking surface within 36" of such 39
glazing where panels are not protected with horizontal member not less than 40
1-1/2" in width located between 24" and 36" above walking surface. 41
d. Other locations required by building code. 42
43
3.4 TAPE GLAZING 44
45
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are 46
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
1
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch 2
tapes to make them fit opening. 3
4
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover 5
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. 6
7
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not 8
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 9
10
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. 11
12
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting 13
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable 14
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 15
16
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) 17
18
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings 19
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 20
21
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in 22
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 23
24
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, 25
and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets 26
formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket 27
applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce 28
a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with 29
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 30
31
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, 32
and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and 33
pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress 34
gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal 35
gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 36
37
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 38
39
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) 40
41
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between 42
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from 43
extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers 44
or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant 45
relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. 46
47
18 September 2018 08 80 00 - 15 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or 1
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 2
3
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 4
5
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 6
7
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 8
9
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 10
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other 11
masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, 12
for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 13
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with 14
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass 15
manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to 16
coatings. 17
18
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. 19
20
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for 21
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in 22
writing by glass manufacturer. 23
24
3.8 SCHEDULE 25
26
A. Exterior Aluminum Entrance Doors and Other Exterior Doors: Type 8-2 glazing with dry 27
gasket system. 28
29
B. Exterior Storefronts and Curtain Walls: Type 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5 glazing with dry 30
gasket system. 31
C. Exterior Windows: Type 8-1, 8-2, and 8-3 glazing with exterior dry gasket system. 32
33
D. Interior Hollow Metal and Wood Doors: Type 2A glazing with interior wet/dry method 34
with silicone sealant. 35
36
E. Interior Windows: Type 0A and 2A glazing with interior wet/dry method with silicone 37
sealant. 38
39
40
END OF SECTION 41
01 May 2018 08 90 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 08 90 00
2
3 METAL WALL LOUVERS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Shop fabricated aluminum louvers and frame with fixed blades, head and sill flashing,
12 screening, blank off panels, and attachment hardware.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
17 1. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
18 2. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
19
20 B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
21 1. AAMA 2604, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures
22 for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
23
24 C. Air Movement and Control Association:
25 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Revisions and Errata Shutters.
26 2. AMCA 501 - Application Manual for Air Louvers.
27
28 D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association: SMACNA -
29 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
30
31 1.3 DEFINITIONS
32
33 A. Refer to AMCA Publication 501-85 for definition of terms not otherwise defined in this
34 section.
35
36 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
37
38 A. Design Requirements:
39 1. Design and size components of louver system to withstand dead and live loads, and loads
40 caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated
41 in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish wind pressure based on the following
42 criteria:
43 1) Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph.
44 2) Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 90 mph.
45 3) Occupancy Category: III.
46 4) Exposure Category: C.
47 2) Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
48 2. Allowable Free Air: 50 percent according to AMCA Standard 500.
49 3. Thermal Movement: Over a temperature range of 100 degrees F.
50 4. Comply with SMACNA - "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for
51 fabrications, construction details and installation procedures.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 90 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 1.5 SUBMITTALS
3
4 A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature including standard drawings and louver free area;
5 installation instructions, and maintenance procedures.
6
7 B. Shop Drawings: Include details of fabrication and erection of wall louvers, anchorage and
8 accessories; profile of frame and installation details, relation to adjacent construction;
9 flashing, blade configuration connections to duct work, screens; and percentage of free air
10 opening.
11
12 C. Samples: Submit sample showing frame and blade configuration and finish.
13
14 D. Sustainable Design Submittals:
15 1)Product Data: Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and
16 preconsumer recycled content and cost.
17 2)Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of
18 Project, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest,
19 or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw
20 material.
21 3) Environmental Product Declaration: For each product.
22 4) Health Product Declaration: For each product.
23 5) Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer.
24
25 E. Quality Control Submittals:
26 1. Certification: Signed by louver manufacturer certifying that their products comply with
27 specified requirements and are licensed to bear AMCA seal based or test made in
28 accordance with AMCA Standard 500-83 and complying with AMCA Certified Ratings
29 Program.
30 2. Test Reports: Showing compliance of louvers with performance requirements indicated.
31
32
33 PART 2 PRODUCTS
34
35 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
36
37 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
38 1. Airolite Company.
39 2. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
40 3. Arrow United Industries, Inc.
41 4. Construction Specialties, Inc.
42 5. Dowco Products Group.
43 6. Ruskin Manufacturing Company.
44
45 B.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
46 preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
47
48 C.Recycled Content of Aluminum Components: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half
49 of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 90 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Louver - Acceptable Products:
2 1. Model K6776 by Airolite.
3 2. Model 265 by Arrow United Industries.
4 3. Model LE31 by American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
5 4. Model 6097 by Construction Specialties.
6 5. Model DBE-06 by Dowco Products.
7 6. Model ELF6375DD by Ruskin Manufacturing.
8
9 E. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
10
11 2.2 MATERIALS
12
13 A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3005 or 5005; 0.080" minimum thickness.
14
15 B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T52; 0.080" minimum thick blades; 0.080"
16 minimum thick frame for 6" louvers.
17
18 C. Bird Screen: 1/4" x 1/4" aluminum mesh; set in extruded aluminum frame.
19
20 D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, non-corrosive compatible with fabricated items.
21
22 E. Accessories: Concealed mullions, sill extension, flashings, wall anchors, structural sub-
23 framing as required.
24
25 F. Accessories: Tie-down cables and bolts, clip angles and fasteners.
26
27 2.3 FABRICATION
28
29 A. Factory assembled drainable stationary louver blades. Fabricate frame and blades from
30 extruded aluminum to standard designs.
31
32 B. Louver Depth: 6".
33
34 C. Blade Spacing: 4-1/2".
35
36 2.4 FINISH
37
38 A. Organic Coating: Pretreatment, primer, and color coat, 70-75 percent fluoropolymer (PVDF
39 resin) color coat, AAMA 2604; 1.0 mils thickness minimum; equivalent to Kynar 500/Hylar
40 5000, custom color as selected by Architect
41
42
43 PART 3 EXECUTION
44
45 3.1 EXAMINATION
46
47 A. Verify site dimensions affecting this work.
48
49 B. Verify openings affecting this work are properly prepared and that flashings are correctly
50 located to divert moisture to exterior.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 08 90 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.2 PREPARATION
2
3 A. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with heavy coat of zinc chromate
4 primer made with synthetic resin. Dry primer before installation.
5
6 B. Coat at aluminum in contact with masonry or concrete with alkali-resistant bituminous paint
7 before installation.
8
9 3.3 INSTALLATION
10
11 A. Install louvers assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
12
13 B. Install louvers level and plumb.
14
15 C. Secure louver rigid in opening framing with concealed fasteners.
16
17 D. Coordinate installation method with application of adjoining materials.
18
19 E. Set and tie in to flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior.
20
21 F. Install screens fixed to interior.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 29 50
2
3 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
4
5
6 PART 1 – GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Steel framing and furring members to receive gypsum board.
12 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
13 3. Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing, furring, and suspension system members.
14 4. Trim accessories.
15 5. Gypsum board screw-attached to gypsum board in double layer application to existing
16 gypsum board where shown on construction Drawings.
17 6. Gypsum board bonded adhesively to interior concrete or masonry substrates.
18 7. Tile backer board for application of tile.
19 8. Taped and sanded joint treatments.
20 9. Acoustical insulation and sealants, and accessories.
21
22 1.2 REFERENCES
23
24 A. American National Standards Institute
25 1. ANSI A118.9 – Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.
26
27 B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
28 1. ASTM A 641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
29 2. ASTM A 653/653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
30 Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
31 3. ASTM C 11 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials
32 and Systems.
33 4. ASTM C 475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
34 5. ASTM C 645 - Non-load Bearing Steel Studs, Runners, and Rigid Furring channels for
35 Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
36 6. ASTM C 665 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures.
37 7. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
38 Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
39 8. ASTM C 840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
40 9. ASTM C 919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Application.
41 10. ASTM C 1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster
42 Bases.
43 11. ASTM C 1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Board.
44 12. ASTM C 1178 – Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water Resistant Gypsum
45 Backing Board.
46 13. ASTM C 1396 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
47 14. ASTM C 1658 – Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels
48 15. ASTM D 3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface
49 of Interior Coatings in an Environment Chamber.
50 16. ASTM D 3274 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint
51 Films by Fungal or Algal Growth, or Soil and Dirt Accumulation
52 17. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 18. ASTM E 488 - Strength of Anchors and Concrete and Masonry Elements.
2 19. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3 20. ASTM E 1190 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners
4 Installed in Structural Members
5
6 C. Gypsum Association:
7 1. GA-214 – Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
8 2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
9 3. GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces.
10 4. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.
11 5. GA-605 – Proprietary Gypsum Panel Products for Use in UL Classified Systems
12
13 1.3 DEFINITIONS
14
15 A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology:
16 1. Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction
17 not otherwise defined in this section or other reference standards.
18 2. Refer to ASTM C 475 for definition and terminology for finishing gypsum board.
19 3. Joint Tape: A strip of paper reinforcing material designed to be embedded in the joint
20 compound.
21
22 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
23
24 A. Performance Requirements:
25 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Identical to those indicated by reference to GA 600 file numbers
26 (systems) and UL design designation and other materials whose fire resistance ratings has
27 been determined by ASTM E 119 or by other testing and inspection organizations
28 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
29
30 B.Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
31 content not less than 25 percent.
32
33 C.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
34 preconsumer recycled content not less than 45 percent.
35
36 1.5 SUBMITTALS
37
38 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions,
39 including data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications for each type
40 of product specified.
41
42 B. Samples: Submit texture samples on 12" x 12" gypsum board to Architect for acceptance
43 using specified application method.
44
45 C. Certificates:
46 1. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed Specification
47 requirements.
48 2. Furnish certification from independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with fire
49 rating and required sound transmission ratings.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Sustainable Design Submittals:
2 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
3 content and cost.
4 2.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
5 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
6 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
7 3. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
8 4. Health Product Declaration (HPD).
9
10 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
12 A. Erector Qualifications: Minimum three years successful experience on comparable light-gage
13 metal framing projects.
14
15 B. Regulatory Requirements: Fire rated systems shall be listed and labeled by UL or other
16 recognized testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with building
17 code in effect for project.
18
19 C. Mock-Ups:
20 1. Construct 100 sq.ft. of actual wall surface. Finish field sample for each type of joint and
21 finish application. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
22 2. Request review by Architect. Remove field samples not accepted by Architect.
23 3. Accepted field sample may [not] be used as project standard.]
24
25 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
26
27 A. Environmental Requirements: Minimum room temperatures:
28 1. Maintain not less than 40 deg. F for nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board framing.
29 2. Maintain not less than 50 deg. F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously
30 thereafter until drying is complete for adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum
31 board.
32
33 B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and protected from the
34 weather.
35
36 C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
37 damaged.
38 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
39 discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
40 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
41 splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
42
43 1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING
44
45 A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
46 weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels
47 flat to prevent sagging.
48
49
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4
5 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
6 products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
7 following:
8 1. Metal Framing:
9 a. Allied Studco.
10 b. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
11 c. CEMCO.
12 d. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, Inc.
13 e. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
14 f. MarinoWARE.
15 g. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
16 h. SCAFCO Corporation.
17 i. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
18 j. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
19 k. United Steel Manufacturing.
20 2. Grid Suspension Systems:
21 a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
22 b. CertainTeed Corp.
23 c. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
24 d. USG Corporation.
25 3. Gypsum Board:
26 a. American Gypsum Company
27 b. CertainTeed Corp.
28 c. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, Gypsum Division.
29 d. National Gypsum Company.
30 e. USG Corporation.
31 4. Trim and Accessories:
32 a. Fry Reglet Company.
33 b. National Gypsum Company.
34 c. Pittcon Industries Inc.
35 d. Gordon, Inc.
36
37 2.2 METAL FRAMING
38
39 A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
40 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
41 otherwise indicated.
42 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless
43 otherwise indicated.
44
45 B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645, of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to comply
46 with structural performance requirements computed to conform with AISI "Specification for
47 Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
48 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that
49 postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
50 than 45 percent.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, sizes as shown, fabricated of 20 or 25 gage steel where
2 indicated.
3
4 D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
5 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
6 thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
7 and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide
8 lateral bracing.
9 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep
10 flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
11 runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
12
13 E. Cold-Rolled Channels: ASTM C 645, 16 gage.
14 1. 2 inches deep, 590 lbs. per 1000 ft.
15 2. 1-1/2 inches deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft.
16 3. 3/4 inches deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft.
17
18 F. Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch by 2-9/16 inch, 25 gauge, hat shaped
19 channels.
20
21 G. Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product fabricated to form 1/2 inch
22 deep channel of the following configuration:
23 1. Single-Leg Configuration: 25 gauge, 1/2" x 2-1/2", with face connected to a single flange
24 by a single slotted leg.
25 2. Double-Leg Configuration: 25 gauge, 7/8" deep hat shaped channel with 1-1/2" inch face
26 connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs.
27
28 H. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard 25 gauge zee-shaped furring members with
29 slotted and nonslotted web with a face flange of 1-1/2 inch, wall-attachment flange of 7/8",
30 and a depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
31
32 I. Backerplates: 18 gauge, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, galvanized steel; 6"
33 minimum width.
34
35 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
36
37 A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter
38 wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.
39
40 B. Ceiling Acoustic Hanger – GB-2:
41 1. Cold rolled Channel, drywall furring channel; channel clip assembly
42 2. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
43
44 C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
45 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
46 wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
47 imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
48 independent testing agency.
49 a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical or expansion anchor.
50 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
51 corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
52 indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent
2 testing agency.
3
4 D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in
5 diameter.
6
7 E. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch length indicated.
8
9 F. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053
10 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
11 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
12
13 G. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
14 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-
15 wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
16
17 H. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
18 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch.
19 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
20
21 I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
22 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
23
24 J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
25 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
26
27 K. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
28 composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
29 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
30 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
31 a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
32 b. CertainTeed Corp.; Drywall Grid System.
33 c. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
34 d. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
35
36 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
37
38 A. General: Provide gypsum board in thickness indicated, or if not indicated in thickness to
39 comply with ASTM C 840 for application and support spacing indicated.
40
41 B. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content with that
42 postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a
43 minimum of 25 percent by weight.
44
45 C. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 with tapered edges.
46 1. Type: Type X.
47 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
48
49 D. Moisture- and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 or 1658, with moisture- and
50 mold resistant core and surfaces.
51 1. Products: Products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
52 to, the following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. American Gypsum Company, M-Block Wallboard
2 b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus.
3 c. National Gypsum Company; XP Wallboard
4 d. USG Corporation; Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.
5 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
6 3. Long Edges: Tapered.
7 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
8
9 E. Gypsum Tile Backer Board: Glass-mat reinforced, water-resistant gypsum core backing
10 board, ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
11 1. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.
12 2. Type: Type X.
13 3. Thickness: 5/8”.
14 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
15 a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.
16 b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
17 c. E XP Tile Backer by National Gypsum.
18 d. USG Corporation; Durock Glass-Mat Tile Backerboard
19
20 2.5 TRIM
21
22 A. General: Provide steel corner beads, edge trim, and control/expansion joints which comply
23 with ASTM C 1047 with hot-dipped galvanized finish in accordance with ASTM A 653, G 30
24 or heavier coating.
25
26 B. Corner Beads:
27 1. "Dur-A-Bead Bi, 103"; USG Corporation.
28 2. "Wallboard Corner Bead" Gold Bond Building Products.
29
30 C. Edge Trim:
31 1. Type "J":
32 a. "Series 200-A"; USG Corporation.
33 b. No. 100 Wallboard Casing; Gold Bond Building Products.
34 2. Type "L":
35 a. "Series 200-B"; USG Corporation.
36 b. "No. 200 Wallboard Casing"; Gold Bond Building Products.
37
38 D. Control Expansion Joint: "Sheetrock Zinc Control Joint No. 093", USG Corporation.
39
40 E. Reveal Molding: 1/2" wide x 5/8" deep; DRM-625-50, Fry Reglet.
41
42 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
43
44 A. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape complying with ASTM C 475.
45
46 B. Joint Compound: Adhesives complying with ASTM C 475:
47 1. First Coat:
48 a. Sheetrock Durabond 210 Setting-Type Joint Compound; USG Corporation.
49 b. Proform Quick Set 210 Setting Compound; National Gypsum Company.
50 2. Second Coat:
51 a. Sheetrock Durabond 90 Setting-Type Joint Compound; USG Corporation.
52 b. Proform Quick Set 90 Setting Compound; National Gypsum Company.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Third Coat:
2 a. Sheetrock All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed; USG Corporation.
3 b. Proform All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed; National Gypsum Company.
4 4. Fourth Coat:
5 a. Sheetrock Brand Lightweight All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed; USG
6 Corporation.
7 b. Proform Lite Joint Compound Ready Mixed; National Gypsum Company.
8
9 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
10
11 A. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound for laminating gypsum board
12 recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board panels to suit application.
13
14 B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for
15 directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction.
16 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less when calculated according to
17 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
18
19 C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.
20 1. Type G: Used for fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
21 2. Type S: Used for fastening of gypsum board to steel framing members.
22
23 D. Metal Framing to Structure-Screws: Power driver screw, complying with ASTM C 1002,
24 fasteners shall withstand 190 pound single shear resistance; 200 pound bearing force when
25 driver through structural head or base; without exceeding allowable design stress in runner,
26 fastener, or structural support.
27
28 E. Metal Framing to Concrete Structure-Nails: No. 8 concrete stub nails, case harder, 3/4"
29 long.
30
31 F. Water-Resistant Sealant: USG Corporation Sheetrock Brand W/R Sealant.
32
33 G. Adhesive: Drywall Contact Adhesive manufactured by 3-M Company.
34
35 2.8 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
36
37 A. Acoustical Sealant:
38 1. Acrylic latex, skinning type.
39 a. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
40 according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
41 2. Acceptable Products:
42 a. "Hilti CP 506 Smoke and Acoustic Sealant", Hilti North America.
43 b. "Tremco Acoustical Sealant", Tremco, Inc.
44 c. "Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant", USG Corporation.
45
46 B. Acoustical Insulation: Unfaced glass or slag mineral fiber blanket complying with ASTM C
47 665, Type 1, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,
48 respectively, per ASTM E 84; and passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
49 1. "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blankets", USG Corporation.
50 2. "Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation", Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
51 3. "Acoustical Blanket", Knauf Fiber Glass.
52 4. "Sound Control Batts", CertainTeed Corp.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 5. "Johns Manville Sound Control Batts", Johns Manville Building Products.
2
3 C. Acoustical Insulation: Unfaced cotton-fiber batt insulation made from thermally bonded
4 natural cotton fibers, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 50 and
5 35, respectively, per ASTM E 84; and passing ASTM E 119 for combustion characteristics.
6 1. Sustainability Requirements: Provide cotton-fiber batt insulation as follows:
7 a. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with no formaldehyde.
8 b. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less
9 than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
10 c. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer
11 recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a
12 minimum of 40 percent by weight.
13 d. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Provide blankets manufactured from natural cotton
14 fiber.
15 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
16 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
17 a. Bonded Logic, Inc.; UltraTouch Natural Cotton Fiber Insulation.
18
19
20 PART 3 – EXECUTION
21
22 3.1 EXAMINATION
23
24 A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction for compliance with requirements for
25 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of gypsum board
26 construction.
27
28 3.2 PREPARATION
29
30 A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of
31 overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions
32 have been installed.
33 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other trades for installation well
34 in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction.
35
36 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL:
37
38 A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and
39 ASTM C 840.
40
41 B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for
42 support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings,
43 and similar construction.
44
45 C. Isolate steel framing, ceilings and walls, from building structure to prevent transfer of loading
46 imposed by structural movement, to comply with details shown on Drawings.
47
48 D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members;
49 independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 METAL STUD INSTALLATION
2
3 A. Install steel studs in sizes to withstand lateral design loadings of 5 psf. for maximum heights
4 of 27’-0” with deflection not to exceed L/240 of wall height with stud spacing as indicated on
5 Drawings, but not less than 16 inches center-to-center.
6 1. For stud heights above 27' refer to sizes indicated on the Drawings.
7
8 B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
9 ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
10 framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions
11 above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
12
13 C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
14 produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
15
16 D. Frame Door Openings: Install two 20 gauge minimum studs at each jamb, extend one stud
17 at each jamb through suspended ceiling and attach to underside of structure above, and one
18 additional stud not more than 6 inches from jamb studs. Attach studs to door frame anchor
19 clips. Install runners track section at head, for cripple studs, and secure to jamb studs.
20
21 E. Frame Openings: Identical to that required for door openings except that one jamb stud is
22 not required to extend to structure above and install framing below sills of openings to match
23 framing above door heads.
24
25 3.5 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
26
27 A. Erect furring channels horizontally; space maximum 16" on center, not more than 4" from
28 floor and ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24" on
29 center.
30
31 3.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
32
33 A. Install suspension system components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not greater than
34 spacings required by ASTM C 754 or below for assembly types indicated.
35 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
36 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
37 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
38
39 B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
40 building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
41
42 C. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or
43 furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24" past each end of
44 openings.
45
46 D. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
47 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
48 ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
49 a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
50 forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
51 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
52 spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
2 trapezes or equivalent devices.
3 a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
4 performance limits established by ASTM C 754.
5 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
6 eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
7 and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
8 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
9 to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
10 structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
11 otherwise fail.
12 5. Isolation Hanger – GB-2: Secure to structure with ceiling bracket; include channel
13 bracket, neoprene spring cup, coil spring, hanger bolt, steel spring cap; and adjustment
14 nut that will not ause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
15 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
16 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
17 8. Do not attach hangers to concrete decks with powder-actuated fasteners.
18 9. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
19
20 E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
21
22 F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
23 systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to
24 each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
25
26 G. Where sprinkler heads, diffusers, and speakers are arranged in alignment, variation from exact
27 alignment shall not vary more than 1/2" either side of centerline through various element
28 openings.
29
30 H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
31 measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
32 parallel members that will receive finishes.
33
34 3.7 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
35
36 A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
37 around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing
38 through partitions.
39
40 B. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
41
42 3.8 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
43
44 A. General:
45 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA-201, GA-216, GA-600 and
46 manufacturers written instructions.
47 2. Install moisture- and mold-resistant gypsum board on the inside surface of all exterior
48 walls and regular gypsum board at all interior partitions except where tile backer board is
49 required as a substrate for tile.
50 3. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-
51 butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end
52 joints at least 24 inches.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or
2 avoids them entirely where possible.
3 5. Wall/Partition Board Joints:
4 a. Butt boards together with light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16
5 inch open space between boards.
6 b. Position boards so that like edges abut.
7 c. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
8 6. Sound-Rated Construction: Seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints,
9 opening and penetrations with acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 919 and
10 manufacturers written recommendations for rating specified.
11 7. Remove and replace any gypsum board that develops signs of moisture or mold damage
12 throughout the duration of construction.
13
14 B. Single Layer Gypsum Board:
15 1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board installation.
16 2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
17 indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
18 3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height and high wall areas over 15'-0" in height apply
19 gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with end joints staggered over
20 studs; use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.
21 4. On partitions/walls with thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes install
22 gypsum board as follows:
23 a. In "dry" locations at toilet rooms and other areas install tile backer board to comply
24 with ASTM C 840.
25 b. In "wet" locations at showers, tubs, and similar areas install tile backer board and treat
26 joints according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
27 c. Where Stone is wall finish, install cement backer board and treat joints according to
28 manufacturer’s written recommendations.
29
30 C. Double Layer Gypsum Board:
31 1. General: Install gypsum board for base layer and gypsum board for face layer.
32 2. On ceilings apply base layer, at right angles to supports, prior to application of base layer
33 on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at
34 least 10 inches.
35 3. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with
36 joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base
37 layer joints.
38
39 D. Fastening Methods - Single Layer: Fasten with screws.
40
41 E. Fastening Methods - Double Layer: Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to
42 supports with screws.
43
44 F. Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adhered to a
45 substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply
46 with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten
47 gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 13 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.9 TRIM INSTALLATION
2
3 A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
4 fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
5 instructions.
6
7 B. Corner Beads: Installed at outside corners.
8
9 C. Edge Trim: Installed where gypsum board would be left exposed or semi-exposed.
10 1. Install "J" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and
11 back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
12 2. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed.
13
14 D. Control Joints: Joints shall be installed to meet fire requirements of wall.
15 1. Walls/Partitions: Install control joints:
16 a. Vertically:
17 1) at 30'-0" on center and no further than 10'-0" from corners of walls.
18 2) at both corners of openings in wall planes, both above and/or below opening,
19 where width of opening is 6’-0” or greater, or where ratio of width to height of
20 wall plane above and/or below opening exceeds 4:1.
21 3) at other locations indicated on Drawings
22 b. Horizontally: at all spliced joints of vertical studs.
23 2. Ceilings: Install control joints at 30'-0" on center each direction and where wings of "A",
24 "L", "O", "U", and "T" shaped ceiling areas or furr-down areas are joined, or as indicated
25 on Drawings.
26
27 3.10 FINISHING
28
29 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA 214.
30
31 B. Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
32 heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
33 decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
34 1. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated
35 as not intended to receive tape.
36 2. Apply joint treatment in coats and sand between coats and after last coat with #120 grit
37 or finer sandpaper or #200 grit or finer mesh cloth.
38 3. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that maximum camber is 1/32" [ 1/16"] using a
39 6 inch wide tool for the 1st and 2nd coats and a 12 inch wide tool for the 3rd coat.
40
41 C. Finishing Tile Backer Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer’s written
42 instructions.
43
44 D. Joint Sanding: Sand joints with 150 grit or finer sandpaper or 220 grit or finer mesh cloth.
45
46 E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish:
47 1. Level 0: No taping, finishing or accessories required.
48 2. Level 1:
49 a. Joints: Tape set in joint compound.
50 b. Interior Angles: Tape set in joint compound.
51 c. Surface: Tool marks and ridges acceptable. Surface free of excess joint compound.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 29 50 - 14 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Level 2:
2 a. Joints: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife, leaving a thin
3 coat of compound over tape.
4 b. Interior Angles: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife,
5 leaving a thin coat of compound over tape.
6 c. Accessories: Shall be covered to one separate coat of joint compound.
7 d. Fasteners: Shall be covered by one separate coat of joint compound.
8 e. Surface: Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges
9 acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape
10 embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy
11 the conditions of this level.
12 4. Level 3: Not Used.
13 5. Level 4:
14 a. Joints: Taped as in Level 2, then covered with two separate coats of joint compound.
15 b. Interior Angles: Taped as in Level 2, then covered with one separate coat of joint
16 compound.
17 c. Accessories: Shall be covered by three separate coats of joint compound.
18 d. Fasteners: Shall be covered by three separate coats of joint compound.
19 e. Surface: Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
20 6. Level 5: Not Used.
21
22 3.11 SCHEDULES
23
24 A. Levels of Gypsum Board Finishing:
25 1. Level 0: Provide in areas for temporary construction or whenever the final decoration has
26 not been determined or in other areas not normally open to view; do not use in areas
27 where fire and smoke code are required.
28 2. Level 1: Provide in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in areas where the assembly
29 would generally be concealed, or in building service corridors and other areas not
30 normally open to view.
31 3. Level 2: Provide where water resistant gypsum backing board or cement backer board is
32 used as a substrate for tile or stone.
33 4. Level 3: Not Used.
34 5. Level 4: Provide in areas that are to receive flat, satin or semi-gloss paint.
35 6. Level 5: Not Used.
36
37 3.12 TOLERANCES
38
39 A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8" in 10'-0"
40 in any direction.
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 30 00
2
3 TILING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Porcelain tile walls, base and floors using thinset application method.
12 2. Thresholds at doors.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American National Standards Institute:
17 1. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specification for Chemical Resistant Water
18 Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Adhesive.
19 2. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specification for Latex Portland Cement
20 Mortar.
21 3. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile Grouts.
22 4. ANSI A118.7 - Polymer Modified Cement Grout.
23 5. ANSI A118.15 – American National Standard Specification for Improved Modified Dry-
24 Set Cement Mortar.
25 6. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile.
26
27 B. American Society for Testing and Materials
28 1. ASTM C 171 - Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
29 2. ASTM C 241 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic.
30 3. ASTM C 373 - Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent
31 Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products.
32
33 C. TCNA - Tile Council of North America Installation Handbook.
34
35 1.3 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Product Data: Provide instructions for using adhesives and grouts; include recommended
38 cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes for each
39 type of product specified.
40
41 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,
42 thresholds, junctions with dissimilar materials, location and sizes of control, isolation, and
43 expansion joints in tile substrate and finish tile surfaces.
44
45 C. Samples:
46 1. Mount tile, base and apply grout on 24" x 24" plywood or hardboard panels illustrating
47 pattern, color variations in tile and grout, and grout joint size for each type of tile or grout
48 required.
49 2. Submit 6" long sample of stone threshold.
50 3. Submit 6" long sample of metal edge strip.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Certification:
2 1. Certification signed by manufacturer and installer that products meet or exceed ANSI
3 A137.1.
4
5 E.Sustainable Design Submittals:
6 1)Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
7 2) Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
8 low-emitting materials.
9 3)Laboratory Test Reports: For sealers, indicating compliance with requirements for
10 low-emitting materials.
11
12 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14 A. Qualifications:
15 1. Manufacturer's: Regularly engaged in manufacture of materials for minimum ten years.
16 2. Installer: Five years minimum documented experience in installation of materials and
17 systems specified in commercial installations.
18
19 B. Mock-Ups
20 1. Construct mockup, 5'-0" x 5'-0", with finish grout, and specified accessories.
21 2. Locate where directed.
22 3. Obtain Architects acceptance of mock-up before start of work.
23 4. Mockup may remain as part of Work.
24
25 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
26
27 A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
28 intact until time of use.
29
30 B. Comply with requirements of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
31
32 C. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, excessive heat, foreign
33 matter and other causes.
34
35 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
36
37 A. Environmental Requirements:
38 1. Do not install adhesives in unventilated environment.
39 2. Maintain 50 degrees F temperature minimum during installation of mortar materials and
40 for 10 days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by manufacturer's
41 written instructions.
42 3. Furnish adequate lighting for good grouting and thorough cleaning.
43
44 1.7 MAINTENANCE
45
46 A. Extra Materials: Furnish full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed but not less
47 than one unopened carton of each type and color tile specified.
48
49
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4
5 A. Acceptable Tile Manufacturers:
6 1. American Olean Tile Company.
7 2. Atlas Concorde
8 3. Crossville Ceramics Company.
9 4. Dal-Tile Corporation.
10 5. Keraben USA
11 6. Interceramic
12 7. Metropolitan Ceramics.
13 8. Summitville Tiles Inc.
14
15 B. Acceptable Setting Material Manufacturer's
16 1. Ardex Engineered Cements
17 2. Custom Building Products
18 3. Mapei Corporation.
19 4. Laticrete International.
20 5. Merkrete
21 6. Tex-Rite by Texas Cement Products.
22 7. PCI-USA.
23
24 C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
25
26 2.2 TILE MATERIALS
27
28 A. Porcelain Wall, Floor and Base Tile:
29 1. ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade, unglazed porcelain, 0 to 0.5 moisture absorption, ASTM
30 C 373.
31 2. Size: Refer to Finish Schedule.
32 3. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule.
33 4. Acceptable product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
34
35 B. Marble Thresholds: Group A marble thresholds, 3/4" thick, with honed finish and abrasion
36 hardness (Ha) of 10.0 in accordance with ASTM C 241, color as selected by Architect.
37
38 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS
39
40 A. General: Provide one of the following materials at Contractor's option.
41
42 B. Preblended Modified Mortar – Thinset: Comply with ANSI 118.15.
43 1. FlexBond Crack Prevention Mortar by Custom Building Products.
44 2. Utra Flex 3 by Mapei
45 3. 254 Platinum by Laticrete
46 4. X77 by Ardex Engineered Cements
47
48 C. Latex Thinset Mortar Additives: Comply with requirements of ANSI A118.4.
49 1. Acceptable Products:
50 a. Laticrete 4237 by Laticrete International, Inc.
51 b. Keracrete by Mapei Corporation.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. CustomCrete by Custom Building Products.
2
3 D. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: Integral colored grout containing mineral oxide
4 pigments compatible for use with portland cement.
5 1. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full color line.
6 2. Acceptable Products: Joints 1/8" in width or greater.
7 a. Laticrete Floor Grout & Joint Filler with Laticrete Grout Admix by Laticrete
8 International.
9 b. Keracolor Floor Grout with Plasti/Joints by Mapei Corporation.
10 c. Polyblend Sanded Grout by Custom Building Products.
11 d. FL Grout by Ardex Engineered Cements.
12 3. Acceptable Products: Joints less than 1/8" in width.
13 a. Laticrete Dry-Set Wall Grout with Laticrete Grout Adix by Laticrete International.
14 b. Keracolor Wall Grout with Plasti/Joints by Mapei Corporation.
15 c. Polyblend Non-Sanded Grout by Custom Building Products.
16 d. FG-C Unsanded Grout by Ardex Engineered Cements.
17
18 E. Epoxy Grout: Two or three-component epoxy grout with integral color, ANSI A118.3.
19 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color line.
20 2. Acceptable Products:
21 a. Color-Poxy by Bostik Construction Products.
22 b. Latapoxy SP-100 Epoxy Grout by Laticrete International.
23 c. Kerapoxy by Mapei Corporation.
24 d. CEG Lite 100% Solids Epoxy by Custom Building Products.
25 e. WA Epoxy Grout by Ardex Engineered Cements.
26
27 2.4 METAL TRIM ACCESSORIES
28
29 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
30 1. Blanke Corporation, 3073-14 McCall Drive, Atlanta GA.30340, 800.787.5055.
31 2. Schluter Systems LP, 194 Pleasant Ridge Rd., Plattsburg, NY 12901, 800.472.4588.
32 3. Custom Building Products, 13001 Seal Beach Blvd, Seal Beach, CA.90740, 562.598.8808.
33
34 B. Edge Strip:
35 1. Acceptable Products:
36 a. CTC Edge Strip by Ceramic Tool.
37 b. Edge Protector Trim by Blanke.
38 c. Schiene by Schluter.
39 d. Profloor by Custom Building Products.
40 2. Material/Finish: Aluminum with Clear anodized finish.
41
42 C. Transition Strip (Higher tile surfaces to adjoining lower surface) :
43 1. Acceptable Products:
44 a. RENO-TK by Schluter.
45 b. Adjustable Transition Profile by Blanke.
46 c. Pronivo S by Custom Building Products.
47 2. Material/Finish: Aluminum with Mil-Finish.
48 .
49 D. Transition Strip: ( Lower tile surfaces to adjoining higher surfaces)
50 1. Acceptable Products:
51 a. RENO-UK by Schluter.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Pronivo K by Custom Building Products.
2 2. Material/Finish: Aluminum with Mil-finish.
3
4 E. Expansion Joint:
5 1. Acceptable Products
6 a. CTC Joint by Ceramic Tool.
7 b. Heavy Duty Expansion Joint by Blanke
8 c. DILEX-KS by Schluter.
9 2. Material/Finish: Aluminum with Mil-Finish.
10
11 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
12
13 A. Mortar - Preblended Mixes: Comply with ANSI A118.4.
14 1. Portland Cement - Latex Thinset Mortar Mix and Leveling Bed/Scratch Coats:
15 a. Factory Preblended Portland Cement and Sand Mix: 1 part portland cement to 1 part
16 sand.
17 b. Five gallons latex thinset mortar additive, mix in accordance with manufacturer's
18 printed instructions.
19
20 B. Grout - Preblended Mixes: Comply with ANSI A118.6.
21 1. 50 Pounds Factory Mixed Commercial Portland Cement Grout With/Without Sand:
22 a. Joint Size - 1/8" or Less: Unsanded grout.
23 b. Joint Size - More Than 1/8": Sanded grout.
24 2. One gallon latex grout additive, mix in accordance with additive manufacturer's printed
25 instructions.
26
27 C. Mortar and Grout Mixes - Epoxy: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
28
29
30 PART 3 EXECUTION
31
32 3.1 EXAMINATION
33
34 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
35
36 B. Verify that areas to receive tile installed by thinset method have steel trowel or fine broom
37 finish, are true to within 1/8" in 10'-0", are free of curing or sealing compounds, and are
38 pitched to drains where required.
39
40 C. Verify surface is firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films, mortar and soil.
41
42 D. Verify grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work in or behind
43 tile are installed.
44
45 3.2 PREPARATION
46
47 A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
48
49 B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
2 flatness tolerances.
3
4 D. Apply sealer and conditioner to substrate surfaces in accordance with adhesive
5 manufacturer's instructions.
6
7 3.3 INSTALLATION - THINSET METHOD
8
9 A. Install Setting Materials and Tile as Follows:
10 1. Walls with Cementitious Backer Boards (Dry locations): TCNA W244 with ANSI
11 A118.4 latex- portland cement mortar and ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
12 2. Floors Over Slabs-on-Grade: TCNA F113 with ANSI A118.4 latex-portland cement
13 mortar and ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
14 3. Restroom Floors: TCNA F115; ANSI A118.4 latex-portland cement mortar and ANSI
15 A118.3 water-cleanable epoxy grout.
16
17 B. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
18
19 C. Place metal edge strips or thresholds and wall trim at all exposed tile edges.
20
21 D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor,
22 base and wall joints.
23
24 E. Place tile joints uniform in width, and of the minimum size recommended by tile
25 manufacturer, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight,
26 without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout.
27 1. Pattern and joint sizes shall follow tile manufacturer’s recommendation unless otherwise
28 directed by Architect.
29
30 F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
31
32 3.4 GROUTING
33
34 A. Allow tile to set for minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
35
36 B. Grout tile joints.
37
38 C. Before grouting, tiles must be firmly set, paper and glue removed from face of mounted tiles,
39 and spacers, strings, ropes, or pegs removed.
40
41 D. Use caution when grouting to prevent damaging or scratching surface of installed tiles.
42
43 E. Install grout with uniform color in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pack
44 joints full, free of pinholes, voids or low spots, before mortar takes initial set.
45
46 F. Finish cushion edge tile even to depth of cushion. Finish square edge tile flush with surface.
47
48 G. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints on horizontal surfaces according
49 to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated
50 grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 30 00 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.5 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS
2
3 A. Keep expansion and control joints free of adhesive or grout. Install backer rod and sealant in
4 joints.
5
6 B. Fill joints around toilet fixtures with sanitary sealant specified in Section 07 92 00.
7
8 C. Install control joints where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs,
9 columns, wall corners and directly over cold joints and control joints in structural surfaces
10 conforming to architectural details. Install control joint in floors not exceeding 20'-0" on
11 center. Rake or cut control joints through setting bed to supporting slab or structure.
12
13 D. Install control and expansion joints in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method No.
14 EJ171.
15
16 3.6 CLEANING
17
18 A. Clean excess mortar from surface of tile with wet cloth or sponge while mortar is fresh.
19
20 B. Remove grout haze following recommendations of mortar additive manufacturer. Do not
21 use acids for cleaning.
22
23 3.7 PROTECTION
24
25 A. After setting, keep traffic off tile work for 48 hours min, as required per manufacturer. Keep
26 traffic off freshly filled joints to protect from traffic dirt for 48 hours.
27
28 B. Protect tile floors with heavy-duty, nonstaining construction paper until Owner occupancy.
29
30 C. Where early use of new floor is unavoidable, use large, flat boards for walkways.
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 51 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 51 13
2
3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim.
12 2. Acoustical panels.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
17 1. ASTM C 635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Systems.
18 2. ASTM C 636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
19 Lay-In Panels.
20 3. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
21 4. ASTM E 1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products.
22
23 B. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory.
24
25 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
26
27 A. Performance Requirements:
28 1.Ceiling products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of
29 Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
30 Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
31 2. Deflection: Suspension system shall rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including
32 integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360.
33 3. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A comply with ASTM E 84.
34
35 1.4 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Product Data: Submit data on metal grid system components and acoustical; furnish
38 manufacturer's installation instructions indicating special procedures, perimeter conditions
39 requiring special attention.
40
41 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, splicing, junctions with other
42 work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.
43
44 C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units; submit
45 12" long sample of each suspension system main runner, cross runner, edge trim, and
46 retention clips.
47
48 D. Certificate: Submit manufacturer's certification that suspension system is capable of
49 supporting light fixtures, grilles and acoustical panels.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 51 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Sustainable Design Submittals:
2 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
3 content and cost.
4 2.Laboratory Test Reports: For ceiling products, indicating compliance with requirements
5 for low-emitting materials.
6
7 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
8
9 A. Qualifications:
10 1. Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing ceiling grids with minimum
11 three years documented experience.
12 2. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing acoustical units
13 with minimum three years documented experience.
14 3. Installer: Minimum of three documented installations of comparable extent as proposed
15 Project.
16
17 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
18
19 A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and
20 maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
21
22 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
23
24 A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceiling units are not installed until building is enclosed,
25 sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is
26 completed, tested, and approved.
27
28 B. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system
29 components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
30 including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any) and
31 partition system (if any).
32
33 C. Install grid after major above ceiling work is complete. Install acoustical units after work
34 above ceiling is complete. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
35
36 D. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.
37
38 1.8 MAINTENANCE
39
40 A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials equal to 1 percent of each type of acoustical material
41 supplied. Furnish suspension system components in amount sufficient to install extra ceiling
42 units.
43
44
45 PART 2 PRODUCTS
46
47 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
48
49 A. Suspension System Acceptable Manufacturers:
50 1. Armstrong World Industries.
51 2. CertainTeed Corp.
52 3. Chicago Metallic.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 51 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 4. USG Interiors, Inc.
2
3 B. Acoustical Units Acceptable Manufacturers:
4 1. Armstrong World Industries.
5 2. CertainTeed Corp.
6 3. USG Interiors, Inc.
7
8 C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
9
10 2.2 SUSPENSION MATERIALS
11
12 A.Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
13 content not less than 25 percent.
14
15 B. Standard Exposed Tee Grid:
16 1. Intermediate duty classification, 15/16" wide face flange dimension, ASTM C 635, non-
17 fire-rated; commercial quality cold-rolled steel with galvanized coating; components die-
18 cut and interlocking; cope cross runners to lay flush with main runners, except at edge
19 moldings.
20 2. Exposed Finish: Baked-on enamel, color as selected by Architect.
21 3. Acceptable Products:
22 a. Prelude XL by Armstrong World Industries.
23 b. Classic Stab System by CertainTeed Corp.
24 c. Donn Suspension System DX by USG Interiors, Inc.
25
26 C. Standard Exposed Tegular Grid:
27 1. Intermediate duty classification, 9/16" wide face flange dimension, ASTM C 635, non-
28 fire-rated; commercial quality cold-rolled steel with galvanized coating; components die-
29 cut and interlocking; cope cross runners to lay flush with main runners, except at edge
30 moldings.
31 2. Exposed Finish: Baked-on enamel, white satin finish.
32 3. Acceptable Products:
33 a. Centricitee by USG Interiors, Inc.
34 b. Elite Narrow Stab by CertainTeed Corp.
35 c. Suprafine XL by Armstrong World Industries.
36
37 D. Concealed Ceiling Grid: Intermediate duty, ASTM C 635; commercial quality cold rolled steel
38 with galvanized or zinc coating; upward or downward acting as shown on construction
39 drawings.
40 1. Acceptable Products - Upward Acting:
41 a. Prelude Concealed System by Armstrong World Industries.
42 b. Donn suspension System "DX Concealed Grid - Upward Acting" by USG Interiors,
43 Inc.
44 2. Acceptable Products - Downward Acting:
45 a. Accessible Tile System by Armstrong World Industries.
46 b. Donn Suspension System DX Concealed Grid - Downward Acting by USG Interiors,
47 Inc.
48
49 E. Rough Suspension: Galvanized steel carrying channels and hangers, sized and type to suit
50 application and to rigidly secure complete acoustic unit ceiling system, with maximum
51 deflection of L/360.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 51 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. Grid Accessories: Stabilizer bars, furring clips, splices, retention clips, and edge moldings as
2 required to complete and compliment suspended ceiling grid system.
3
4 G. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
5 paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
6 according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and
7 effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
8 building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
9 ASTM E 90.
10
11 H. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
12 nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250
13 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24),
14 recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
15
16 2.3 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
17
18 A.Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
19 content not less than 50 percent.
20
21 B. Acoustical Panel – ACT-1
22 1. Nominal Size: 24" x 24" x 1".
23 2. Composition: Wet formed mineral fiber with acoustically transparent membrane, ASTM
24 E 1264, Class A.
25 3. Finish: Factory applied acoustically transparent membrane with factory applied latex
26 paint, white color.
27 4. Articulation Class: 170
28 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class: 35 db.
29 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.85.
30 7. Light Reflectance: LR-1, over 85 percent.
31 8. Edge: Square Tegular, 9/16” grid.
32 9. Pattern: Type IV, Form 2, E
33 10. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule.
34 11. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
35
36
37 PART 3 EXECUTION
38
39 3.1 EXAMINATION
40
41 A. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
42
43 3.2 INSTALLATION - LAY-IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM
44
45 A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636 and as supplemented in this
46 section.
47
48 B. Lay out system to balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical
49 unit size. Locate system on room axis.
50
51 C. Supply hangers, inserts, or clips, as required, for installation with instructions for correct
52 placement.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 51 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
3 carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
4
5 E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
6 affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance.
7
8 F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead
9 load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located
10 within 6" of each corner; or support components independently.
11
12 G. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
13
14 H. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical
15 lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
16
17 3.3 INSTALLATION - CONCEALED GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM
18
19 A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636 and as supplemented in this
20 section.
21
22 B. Lay out system to balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical
23 unit size. Locate system on room axis.
24
25 C. Supply hangers, inserts, or clips, as required, for installation with instructions for their correct
26 placement.
27
28 D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
29 carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
30
31 E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
32 affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance.
33
34 F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead
35 load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located
36 within 6" of each corner; or support components independently.
37
38 G. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
39
40 H. Install concealed edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest
41 practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide [concealed] edge moldings at junctions with other
42 interruptions.
43
44 3.4 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
45
46 A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
47
48 B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
49 appearance and function.
50
51 C. Lay directional patterned units shortest room axis.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 51 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
2
3 E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
4
5 F. Cut panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbet panel edge. Double cut
6 and field paint exposed edges of tegular units.
7
8 G. Where bullnose concrete block corners and or round obstructions occur, provide preformed
9 closers to match edge molding.
10
11 H. Install retention clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20'-0" of exterior doors.
12
13 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
14
15 A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8" in 12'-0".
16
17 B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
18
19
20 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 54 26 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 54 26
2
3 LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Prefabricated linear wood ceiling system, with suspensions system and
11 accessories.
12
13 1.2 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard product data, descriptive literature,
16 specifications, and recommendation for installation of wood grille ceiling panels and
17 suspension system.
18
19 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensions, junctions with other work or
20 ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system; support at
21 ceiling fixture; splicing method for main and cross suspension system runners; and change in
22 level details.
23
24 C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of wood panels that illustrate finish range; submit 12"
25 sample of each type suspension system member.
26
27 D. Certificates:
28 1. Furnish certification of fire endurance rating and flame spread index of fire rating
29 organization.
30 2. Furnish certification of materials and systems conforming to Specification requirements.
31 3. Submit manufacturer's certification that suspension system is capable of supporting light
32 fixtures, grilles and acoustical panels.
33
34 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
35
36 A. Installer Qualification: Minimum of three documented project installations of comparable
37 extent as proposed Project.
38
39 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
40
41 A. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content prior to installation.
42
43 B. Store materials under cover, keep dry.
44
45 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
46
47 A. Do not install wood ceilings until building area is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
48 generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, tested and
49 accepted.
50
51 B. Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 54 26 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Maintain humidity of 20 percent to 40 percent prior to, during and after installation.
3
4 D. Maintain uniform temperature of 61 degrees F minimum prior to, during and after
5 installation.
6
7 1.6 COORDINATION
8
9 A. Coordinate work with other trades affected by installation with particular attention to
10 mechanical and electrical work.
11
12
13 PART 2 PRODUCTS
14
15 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
16
17 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
18 1. Architectural Components Group, Inc., ACGI
19 2. Forms & Surfaces.
20 3. Designed Performance Associates.
21 4. Rulon
22 5. 9Wood
23
24 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
25
26 2.2 WOOD CEILING SYSTEM
27
28 A. Wood Panels – Basis of Design : ACGI- WGC-1:
29 1. Plank: 3-1/4” wide x ¾” thick plank.; ¾” reveal between planks.
30 2. Panel size: As shown on construction drawings.
31 3. 3 Face wood veneer species; Class I fire rated core.
32 4. Species: Refer to Finish Schedule.
33 5. Black non-woven felt above ceiling panel.
34 6. Finish: Factory finished stain with satin sheen.
35 7. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
36
37 B. Acoustical Panel – Basis of Design - AWC-1:
38 1. Nominal plank size: 5-1/4” wide plank; 5/4” open reveal.
39 2. Panel Size: 2’ x 2’
40 3. Panels factory assembled with wood planks connected with black, rectangular wood
41 backers.
42 4. 3 Face wood veneer species; Class I fire rated core.
43 5. Species: Refer to Finish Schedule.
44 6. Black non-woven felt above ceiling panel.
45 7. Finish: Factory finished stain with satin sheen.
46 8. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
47
48 C. Sound Absorbing Material:: 1” x 3 lb per cubic foot density black face Fiberglass.
49
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 54 26 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Support System: Manufacturer's standard 15/16” black HD T-Grid with main runners on 2’
2 centers and cross T’s every 4’, consisting of 2' x 4' and 2' x 8' units; main support runners
3 installed parallel to length of grid.
4
5
6 PART 3 EXECUTION
7
8 3.1 EXAMINATION
9
10 A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspension system for unevenness, irregularities and
11 dampness.
12
13 3.2 INSTALLATION
14
15 A. Install suspended wood grille ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's
16 recommendations to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels and free from warped,
17 soiled or grille panels.
18
19 B. Suspension System:
20 1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
21 2. Ensure layout of hangers and supports are located to accommodate fittings and units of
22 equipment which are to be placed after installation of ceiling grid systems.
23 3. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
24 adjacent hangers and related supports as necessary to span required distance.
25 4. Provide additional hangers and inserts as necessary.
26 5. Place hangers independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
27 6. Locate first hanger 6" from wall and space 4'-0" along carrying channel.
28
29 C. Wood Panels:
30 1. Fit units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance
31 and function.
32 2. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces.
33 3. Install units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
34
35 D. Fixture Support:
36 1. Do not support fixtures from main runners or cross runners if weight of fixture causes
37 total dead load to exceed deflection capability.
38 2. In such cases, support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6" of each
39 corner or support fixtures independently.
40 3. Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentrically loaded.
41
42 3.3 TOLERANCES
43
44 A. Install ceiling systems to support superimposed loads with maximum permissible deflection
45 of L/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of 1/8" in 10'-0".
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 54 26 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
2
3 A. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in ceiling systems and replace any part which is
4 damaged or faulty.
5
6
7 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 61 05 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 61 05
2
3 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION AND ALKALINITY CONTROL
4 FOR CONCRETE SLABS
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section includes:
11 1. Topical water vapor reduction system on new concrete slabs to receive carpet and
12 resinous flooring, or other moisture sensitive flooring.
13 2. Topical water vapor reduction system and cementitious surfacing on new concrete
14 slabs to receive tile carpet, wood, and resilient flooring, or other moisture sensitive
15 flooring.
16
17 B. Related Requirements:
18 1. Pre-installation testing methods and quantities for each unique flooring product are
19 specified within each individual flooring product Section in Division 09.
20
21 1.2 UNIT PRICES
22
23 A. Work of this Section is affected by the following unit prices specified in Section 01 22 00
24 "Unit Prices":
25 1. Unit Price No. 3: Topical moisture vapor emission and alkalinity control of concrete
26 floor slabs in sheet carpeted areas and areas with resinous flooring products.
27 2. Unit Price No. 4: Topical moisture vapor emission and alkalinity control of concrete
28 floor slabs and cementitious surfacing installation in tile carpeted areas, wood
29 flooring product areas, and resilient flooring product areas.
30
31 1.3 REFERENCES
32
33 A. ASTM International
34 1. ASTM D 1308: Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear
35 and Pigmented Organic Finishes.
36 2. ASTM D 4541: Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
37 Portable Adhesion Testers.
38 3. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
39 4. ASTM F 710: Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
40 5. ASTM F 1869: Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate
41 of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
42 6. ASTM F 2170: Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in
43 Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 61 05 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
2
3 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
4 procedures related to installation including, but not limited to, the following:
5 1. Review substrate conditions, moisture and pH test results, manufacturer's installation
6 instructions, and warranty requirements.
7 2. Document proceedings, including required corrective measures.
8
9 1.5 SUBMITTALS
10
11 A. Product Data: For each type of product used in vapor emission control system.
12
13 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
14 1.Product Data: For coatings, indicating VOC content.
15 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For coatings, indicating compliance with requirements for
16 low-emitting materials.
17
18 C. Product Schedule: For all floor areas to receive moisture vapor emission and alkalinity
19 control system products. Use same room label and numbering designations indicated on
20 Drawings.
21 1. Distinguish on schedule between those areas required to receive cementitious
22 surfacing over moisture vapor emission and alkalinity control system and those areas
23 where not required.
24
25 D. Qualification Data: Certificates indicating Installer of vapor emission control treatments is
26 trained and certified or employed by treatment manufacturer.
27
28 E. Product Test Reports: For each product performed by nationally recognized independent
29 testing agency indicating conformance with specified performance requirements.
30
31 F. Preconstruction Test Reports: For alkalinity, calcium chloride, and relative humidity of
32 concrete slabs.
33
34 G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty for vapor emission control coating system
35 and certificate of underwriter’s coverage of manufacturer’s warranty.
36
37 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
38
39 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience in manufacturing water
40 vapor reduction systems.
41 1. The water vapor emission reduction system must be specifically formulated and
42 marketed for water vapor emission reduction and alkalinity control without change
43 of system design for a minimum period of ten (10) years.
44
45 B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products or an entity that employs installers and
46 supervisors who are trained and certified by manufacturer. Installer must have a minimum
47 of five years experience installing vapor emissions control systems.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 61 05 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Moisture and pH testing shall be performed by an
2 International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI), Certified Concrete Slab Moisture Testing
3 Technician – Grade 1.
4
5 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
6
7 A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Following at least 28 days after placement of concrete
8 and prior to floor covering installation, owner will engage a qualified independent testing
9 agency to perform the following tests on floor areas to receive moisture vapor emission
10 and alkalinity control system:
11 1. Calcium chloride testing per ASTM F 1869.
12 2. Relative humidity testing per ASTM F 2170.
13 3. Alkalinity testing per ASTM F 710.
14
15 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
16
17 A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers fully identified with brand, type,
18 grade, class and all other qualifying information.
19
20 B. Deliver materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
21 recommendations.
22
23 C. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated area at minimum 50 deg F and maximum 90 deg F.
24
25 1.9 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING
26
27 A. Coordinate testing agency to test concrete slabs not less than one week or more than 5
28 weeks prior to scheduled flooring installation.
29 1. Apply treatment to areas with moisture vapor emission or relative humidity rates
30 which exceed floor covering manufacturer’s written limits, as determined by ASTM
31 F 1869 and ASTM F 2170 testing.
32
33 B. Coordinate with installation of floor coverings. Ensure flooring installation complies with
34 vapor emission control system manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
35
36 1.10 WARRANTY
37
38 A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
39 treatment system, cementitious surfacings, floor covering materials, adhesives, and
40 installation labor for same period resulting from moisture vapor emission related failure
41 that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
42 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
43
44 B. Warranty shall be underwritten by product liability insurance carrier having a minimum "A"
45 rating from Best or equivalent rating system in the amount of $1,000,000 per occurrence.
46
47 C. Warranty shall guarantee moisture vapor and alkalinity emission rates to be at or below
48 published requirements of floor covering manufacturers.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 61 05 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 D. Warranty shall not exclude concrete slabs containing silica or silicate compounds.
3
4
5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
6
7 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
8
9 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured
10 by one of the following:
11 1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.
12 2. BASF Corporation
13 3. Floor Seal Technology, Inc.
14 4. KOSTER Waterproofing Systems USA.
15
16 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
17
18 A. Multi- or single-component, fluid-applied penetrants or coatings intended to seal or
19 stabilize internal humidity by restricting excessive moisture and pH (alkalinity), and to
20 mechanically regulate permeability and suppress the volume of moisture reaching concrete
21 surfaces, for compliance with subsequent floor covering manufacturer’s written limitations.
22 1. Application methods are to be determined by site conditions, presence of sub-slab
23 vapor barriers for slabs-on-grade, concrete mix design and contaminants, age of
24 concrete substrate, results of ASTM F1869 calcium chloride testing, if required, and
25 finish floor covering manufacturer’s recommendations.
26
27 2.3 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION AND ALKALINITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
28
29 A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
30 1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.; MC ULTRA Moisture Control System.
31 2. BASF Corporation; Chemrex MV-Block.
32 3. Floor Seal Technology, Inc.; MES 100 Remedial Treatment.
33 4. KOSTER Waterproofing Systems USA; VAP I 2000.
34
35 B. Physical Characteristics:
36 1. ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission: Minimum 94% reduction under laboratory
37 conditions
38 2. ASTM D 1308 Alkali Resistance: PASS, up to pH of 14
39 3. ASTM D 4541 Adhesion Strength: 500 psi (100% Concrete Adhesive Failure)
40 4. Resists up to 100% Relative Humidity as measured by ASTM F 2170.
41 5. VOC: 96g/L per SCAQMD Rule #1113
42 6. Low-Emitting Materials: Coating shall comply with the testing and product
43 requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for
44 the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
45 Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 61 05 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.4 ACCESSORIES
2
3 A. Cementitious Surfacing: Portland cement-based, self-leveling compound to be applied to
4 areas receiving resilient or wood flooring. Cement must bond with subsequent floor
5 coverings and adhesives.
6 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
7 include, but are not limited to the following:
8 a. Ardex K-15 by Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.; Ardex K-15.
9 b. Mapei International; Mapei Ultraplan 1 Plus.
10
11
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION
13
14 3.1 EXAMINATION
15
16 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with conditions
17 affecting performance of the Work.
18
19 B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.
20
21 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
22
23 3.2 PREPARATION
24
25 A. Mask and protect adjacent wall and floor surfaces from effects of scarification and
26 application.
27
28 B. Scarify slab surface in area of application by shot blasting or other method acceptable to
29 coating treatment manufacturer.
30
31 C. Prepare and treat cracks, control joints, and cold joints per system manufacturer’s written
32 requirements.
33
34 D. Sweep and vacuum concrete substrate.
35
36 3.3 INSTALLATION
37
38 A. Apply treatment system in number of coats required by manufacturer with roller and
39 squeegee over entire treatment area; saturate surfaces to ensure a thorough bond.
40
41 B. Clean and fill divots, chips, voids and other surface irregularities with 100 percent Portland
42 cement based patching compound or cementitious fill.
43
44 C. Apply cementitious surfacing over coating in areas to receive tile carpet, wood, and resilient
45 flooring, or other moisture sensitive flooring to facilitate adhesive bond.
46 1. Apply at a thickness of 1/8-inch.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 61 05 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 PROTECTION
2
3 A. Protect each coat during specified cure period from traffic, topical water, and
4 contaminants.
5
6 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 64 53
2
3 RESILIENT WOOD FLOORING SYSTEMS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Plywood sheathing and sleepers on cushion blocks.
12 2. Hardwood flooring.
13 3. Surface sanding and finish coating.
14
15 1.2 REFERENCES
16
17 A. APA - American Plywood Association.
18
19 B. FS TT-W-571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
20
21 C. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
22
23 D. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
24
25 E. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
26
27 1.3 SUBMITTALS
28
29 A. Product Data:
30 1. Submit descriptive literature, specifications and recommended installation instructions for
31 resilient blocks, flooring materials, floor coating.
32 2. Submit manufacturer's maintenance instructions including recommended cleaning and
33 stain removal methods, materials, and waxes.
34
35 B. Shop Drawings:
36 1. Indicate floor joint pattern, grain direction, and termination details.
37 2. Indicate provisions for expansion and contraction, base, base corner details.
38
39 C. Samples: Submit 18" x 18" samples illustrating floor finish color, and sheen.
40
41 D. Sustainable Submittals:
42 1. Product Data for for wood flooring installation adhesives, including printed statement of
43 VOC content.
44 2. Product Data for field-applied finishes for wood flooring, including printed statement of
45 VOC content.
46 3. Product Data for composite wood products, documentation indicating that the bonding
47 agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
4 1. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified within minimum three years
5 documented experience.
6
7 B. Installer Qualification: Minimum of three years documented experience in applying work
8 specified and approved by manufacturer.
9
10 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
11
12 A. Deliver materials in time to permit moisture content to stabilize to ambient conditions.
13
14 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
15
16 A. Environmental Requirements:
17 1. Do not install wood flooring until wet construction work is completed.
18 2. Do not install flooring until moisture content of concrete subfloor has stabilized at 12
19 percent maximum and ambient air at installation space is not less than 65 degrees F.
20 3. Provide permanent heat, light, and ventilation prior to installation.
21 4. Maintain minimum room temperature of 65 degrees F for period of two days prior to
22 delivery of materials during and after installation.
23
24
25 PART 2 PRODUCTS
26
27 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
28
29 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
30 1. Aacer Hardwood Flooring
31 2. AA, Inc.
32 3. Connor/AGA.
33 4. Harris-Tarkett, Inc.
34 5. Horner Flooring Company.
35 6. Robbins, Inc.
36
37 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
38
39 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
40 A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient wood flooring shall comply with requirements of
41 FloorScore Standard.
42 B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
43 requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
44 Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
45 Environmental Chambers."
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.3 MATERIALS
2
3 A. Stage Flooring – WF-1:
4 1. 3/4” Temper hardboard faced panels equal to Tempered Plyron as manufactured by
5 Olympic Panel Products.
6 a. Top and Bottom face: 1/8” tempered hardboard
7 b. Core: solid core Grade C plywood
8 c. Factory Bonded
9 2. Thickness: 3/4”.
10 3. Width: 4’
11 4. Length: 8’
12 5. Moisture content: At time of delivery, limited average moisture content of wood flooring
13 to 7% with 9% maximum for any piece.
14 6. Plywood: APA rated Sheathing, Exposure I, Fir or Southern Pine 1” thick; 48/24, C-C
15 Plugged Exterior in accord with PS 1-95.
16 7. Sleepers: A product complying with the quality and performance of Robbins, Inc. "Bio-
17 Channel Classic". 1-1/2" thick x 2-5/8" x 8' factory assembled steel encased treated
18 wooden sleeper. Sleeper must be free to move vertically within steel channel confines to
19 assure proper uniformity of resiliency and function
20 8. Ventilating Base:
21 a. Molded rubber, 4" high with straight toe, ventilating type, with adhesives and
22 accessories.
23 b. Color: As selected by Architect.
24 9. Fasteners:
25 a. Flooring – Zinc plated, 1-1/2" Phillip’s flat head, steel screws.
26 b. Sub floor - Galvanized, steel screws; length for full wood penetration, but not to exit
27 on underside of sleeper.
28 c. Channel anchors at wood floor – Zinc plated, 1-1/4" pan head, steel screws.
29 d. Channel anchors to concrete – 1-1/4” pneumatic or powder-actuated concrete
30 anchor
31 10. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork expansion strip; FS HH-C 576, Type I-B, Class
32 2.
33 a. Loose Granular Perlite Insulation: ASTM C549, Type II and III, treated with silicone
34 for water repellency.
35 11. Sleeper Anchor: As recommended by manufacturer.
36 12. Floor Finish Coating: Satin Wrought Iron Black latex. Vanex’s Break-Through 50 VOC.
37 13. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
38
39 B. Wood Flooring – WF-2:
40 1. Species and grade stamped on underside of each piece, complying with following:
41 2. Species: Select White Oak
42 3. Grade: Second and better.
43 4. Cut: Quarter/Rift.
44 5. Moisture Content: 10 to 13 percent.
45 6. Actual Thickness: 25/32".
46 7. Actual Width: 2-1/4".
47 8. Edge: Tongue and groove.
48 9. End: Tongue and groove.
49 10. Length: Random.
50 11. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Wood Flooring – WF-3:
2 1. Species and grade stamped on underside of each piece, complying with following:
3 2. Species: Select White Oak
4 3. Grade: Second and better.
5 4. Cut: Quarter/Rift.
6 5. Moisture Content: 10 to 13 percent.
7 6. Actual Thickness: 33/32".
8 7. Actual Width: 2-1/4".
9 8. Edge: Tongue and groove.
10 9. End: Tongue and groove.
11 10. Length: Random.
12 11. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
13
14 D. Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07 26 00 - Sheet Vapor Retarders and Barrier
15
16 E. Subfloor – WF-2:
17 1.Factory assembled subfloor panels shall provide nominal 3/4” X 4” X 8’ UL plywood
18 nailers set at Alliance I spacing with 3/4” Rezill pads attached. Sleeper anchorage
19 struts shall be nominal 1/2” X 4” UL grade plywood with pre-drilled anchor pockets.
20
21 F. Subfloor – WF-3:
22 1. Nominal 2”x4”x4’ S4S, Spruce, Pine, of Fir with pads attached 12” on center.
23 2. 1”x6” Spruce, Fir, or Pine, or 23/32” APA rated plywood sheething. Exposure 1
24
25 G. Fasteners:
26 1. Flooring - 2” barbed cleats.
27 2. Subfloor - 1” coated staples.
28 3. Concrete-Sleeper anchors shall be modified steel drive pins, 2-1/2” long, minimum 1”
29 penetration.
30
31 H. Finish Materials – Any seal and finish approved by manufacturer.
32 I. Sleepers: Softwood, pressure treated with wood preservative or moisture protection to FS
33 TT-W-571; conforming to following:
34 1. Species: Dense Pine or Dense Spruce.
35 2. Grade: #1 Common or Better.
36 3. Maximum Moisture Content After Treatment: 15 percent.
37 4. Nominal Size: 2" x 3" or 2" x 4".
38
39 J. Impact Isolator: As recommended by flooring manufacturer.
40
41 K. Divider Strip: Angle, mill aluminum as recommended by manufacturer.
42
43 L. Threshold: Extruded, mill finish [[ anodized ]] aluminum as recommended by manufacturer.
44
45 M. Sleeper Anchor: As recommended by manufacturer.
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.4 FINISH
2
3 A. Floor Finish Coating: Sustainable floor finish as recommended by manufacturer.
4 1. Two component polyurethane, type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
5 2. VOC Content: Comply with the following limits when calculated according to 40 CFR
6 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
7 a. Floor Sealers and Finish Coats: Not more than 274 g/L.
8 b. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Not more than 50 g/L.
9
10
11 PART 3 EXECUTION
12
13 3.1 EXAMINATION
14
15 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
16
17 B. Verify that subfloor surface has smooth steel trowel finish and is flat to tolerance of 1/8" in
18 10'-0" maximum.
19
20 C. Verify that concrete substrate moisture content is 15 percent maximum.
21
22 3.2 PREPARATION
23
24 A. Broom clean substrate.
25
26 3.3 INSTALLATION – STAGE FLOOR SYSTEM WITH SLEEPER
27
28 A. Place Bio-Channels 16" O.C. end-to-end, staggering end joints in adjacent rows. Anchor at
29 predetermined locations (approximately 22" O.C.)
30
31 B. Fill voids between Bio-Channels with Loose Granular Perlite Insulation to top of Bio-
32 Channel assembly. Level insulation between Bio-Channels and remove any excess from top
33 of Bio-Channel assembly.
34
35 C. Install layer of plywood sub floor perpendicular to sleeper channels and fasten sub floor
36 along sleepers as specified. Leave 3/8” gap for expansion at edge of floor.
37
38 D. Install hardboard flooring, perpendicular to the layer of plywood sub floor, by screwing to
39 sub floor, leaving 3/32" gaps between panels for expansion with end joints staggered. Install
40 sheets with cut edge toward the stage rear wall. Leave 1/8" gap for expansion at edge of
41 floor. Pre-drill and counter-sink screws through hardboard panel face extending 1" into
42 substrate. Locate screws at 16” intervals along center of both panel axes, at panel corners,
43 and at 16" intervals around perimeter of each panel. Screws at edge should be 1/2" from
44 edge. Use no adhesives.
45
46 E. Complete assembled floor must be of uniform flatness to plus or minus 1/8" over 10 feet
47
48 3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOOR SYSTEM WITH SLEEPER
49
50 A.Subfloor
51 1.Cover concrete with vapor barrier, sealing and lapping joints a minimum of 6”.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.Layout subfloor assembly with sleepers at right angle to finish flooring. Place subfloor
2 panels to maintain spacing between panel edges as provided between pre-assembled
3 sleepers. Lap panel nailer ends onto designated cross struts, providing 1/4” end
4 joint spacing, and secure with nails or staples and construction adhesive. Align
5 subfloor panels to provide correct stagger of concrete anchors in adjacent rows.
6 Provide 1-1/2” expansion voids at perimeter and at vertical obstructions. Install
7 solid blocking at doorways, under bleachers in the stacked position, and below
8 portable goals.
9 3.Secure sleeper struts to concrete with steel anchors inserted into anchor pockets
10 provided. Maintain proper anchor penetration with Connor installation tools and
11 procedures.
12
13 B.Flooring
14 1.Install maple flooring parallel to main playing court by power nailing or stapling at
15 all sleeper locations. End joints shall be properly driven up.
16 2.If required, size joints between flooring strips to allow for intermediate expansion in
17 accordance with local humidity conditions.
18 3.Provided 1-1/2” expansion voids at perimeter and at all vertical obstructions
19
20 3.5 INSTALLATION FIXED SLEEPER
21
22 A. SUBFLOOR:
23 1. Cover entire slab with vapor barrier, sealing and lapping joints a minimum of 6”.
24 2. Install sleepers at right angle to long dimension of room a maximum 9” on center for
25 25/32” flooring. (Note: 12” on center for 33/32”, 8” on center for 3rd grade.)
26 3. Install 1”x6” SPF subflooring diagonally to sleepers. Break all joints over sleeper with
27 ends butted and sides space 1”. Securely nail or staple to sleepers.
28 4. Options(Specify of Delete)
29 a. Install plywood panels parallel to or at 45 degree angle to sleepers. Lay in a brick
30 pattern, spacing all edges 1/4" and staggering joints 4’.
31 5. Install solid blocking at doorways, under bleachers in the stacked position, and below
32 portable goals.
33 6. Provide 1-1/2” expansion voids at perimeter and all vertical obstructions.
34
35 B. FLOORING
36 1. Install flooring parallel with the long dimension of room. Flooring shall be power nailed
37 every 10” to 12” O.C. with all end joints properly driven tight.
38 2. Expansion joints may be required between flooring strips intermittently throughout the
39 floor. Requirements will be determined by site and geographical conditions.
40 3. Provide a minimum 2” expansion void at all walls and permanent obstructions.
41
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 64 53 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
2
3 A. Provide divider strips, threshold and where flooring terminates with other floor areas.
4
5 B. Install base at floor perimeter to cove expansion space in accordance with manufacturer's
6 instructions. Miter inside and outside corners.
7
8 3.7 FINISHING
9
10 A. Sand flooring to smooth even finish with no evidence of sander marks. Take precautions to
11 contain dust. Remove dust by vacuum.
12
13 B. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
14
15 C. Apply three finish coats in accordance with floor finish manufacturer's instructions.
16
17 D. Apply first coat, allow to dry and buff with steel wool to remove irregularities. Vacuum clean
18 and wipe with damp cloth. Apply second coat. Allow to dry. Lightly buff with steel wool
19 and vacuum clean.
20
21 E. Apply last coat of finish.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
25
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 65 19 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 65 19
2
3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. ASTM International
16 1. ASTM C 109/C 109M: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
17 Mortars (Using 2-in. or Cube Specimens)
18 2. ASTM D 695: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
19 3. ASTM E 648: Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
20 Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
21 4. ASTM E 662: Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by
22 Solid Materials.
23 5. ASTM F 510: Test Method for Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Coverings
24 Using an Abrader with a Grit Feed Meter
25 6. ASTM F 710: Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
26 7. ASTM F 970: Test Method for Static Load Limit
27 8. ASTM F 1066: Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile
28 9. ASTM F 1869: Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
29 Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
30 10. ASTM F 2170: Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
31 Slabs Using in situ Probes
32
33 B. NFPA
34 1. NFPA 253: Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems
35 Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
36
37 1.3 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
40 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
41 1.Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
42 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
43 low-emitting materials.
44 3.Product Data: For chemical-bonding compounds, indicating VOC content.
45 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For chemical-bonding compounds, indicating compliance
46 with requirements for low-emitting materials.
47 5.Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 65 19 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for
2 low-emitting materials.
3 7.Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with
4 requirements for low-emitting materials.
5 8.Environmental Product Declaration: For each product.
6 9. Health Product Declaration: For each product.
7 10. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer.
8
9 C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
10 doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
11 1. Show details of special patterns.
12
13 D. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
14
15 E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
16
17 F. Product Schedule: For floor tile.
18
19 G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
20
21 H. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
22
23 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
24
25 A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
26 covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
27 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,
28 color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
29
30 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
32 A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
33 competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming
34 method indicated.
35 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified
36 by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
37
38 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
39 demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
40 1. Build mockups for floor tile including accessories.
41 a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern in
42 locations indicated.
43 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
44 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
45 deviations in writing.
46 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
47 the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 65 19 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
3
4 A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
5 ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
6 than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat
7 surfaces.
8
9 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
10
11 A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
12 than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile
13 during the following time periods:
14 1. 48 hours before installation.
15 2. During installation.
16 3. 48 hours after installation.
17
18 B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within
19 range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than
20 95 deg F (35 deg C).
21
22 C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
23
24 D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
25
26 E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
27
28
29 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
30
31 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
32
33 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing
34 identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
35 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
36 B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of
37 FloorScore certification.
38 C. [Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of
39 Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
40 Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
41
42 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
43
44 A.Products – VCT-1: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may
45 be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
46 1.AB; American Biltrite.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 65 19 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2 3.Congoleum Corporation.
3 4.Mannington Mills, Inc.
4
5 B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
6
7 C. Wearing Surface: Embossed.
8
9 D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
10
11 E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
12
13 F. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule.
14
15 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
16
17 A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
18 blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile
19 manufacturer for applications indicated.
20
21 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to
22 suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
23
24 C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile
25 manufacturer.
26
27
28 PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
30 3.1 EXAMINATION
31
32 A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
33 moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
34 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
35 specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
36 scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
37
38 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
39
40 3.2 PREPARATION
41
42 A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
43 adhesion of resilient products.
44
45 B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
46 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 65 19 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
2 adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
3 recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
4 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile
5 manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within
6 range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or
7 more than 10 pH.
8 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing
9 according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less
10 stringent than the following:
11 a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed
12 with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
13 rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
14 b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
15 Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent
16 relative humidity level.
17
18 C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
19 recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
20
21 D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
22 compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
23
24 E. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to
25 be installed.
26 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation
27 materials into spaces where they will be installed.
28
29 F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
30 resilient floor tile.
31
32 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
33
34 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
35
36 B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
37 offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid
38 using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
39 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
40
41 C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence
42 as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
43 deformed tiles.
44 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
45
46 D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
47 fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 65 19 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor
2 tiles to center of door openings.
3
4 F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
5 cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
6 nonpermanent marking device.
7
8 G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint
9 covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and
10 pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile
11 edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
12
13 H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
14 to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
15 joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
16
17 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
18
19 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
20
21 B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
22 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
23 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
24 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
25
26 C. Protect floor tile from marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
27 operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
28 period.
29
30 D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
31 liquid floor polish.
32 1. Apply three coat(s).
33
34 E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
35
36
37 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 68 13
2
3 TILE CARPETING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Carpet tiles, accessories, and installation on floor surfaces.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
15 1. ASTM C 423 - Acoustical Test.
16 2. ASTM E 84 - Flammability Tunnel Test.
17 3. ASTM E 648 - Flooring Radiant Panel Test.
18 4. ASTM E 662 - Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
19
20 1.3 SUBMITTALS
21
22 A. Product Data: Submit installation instructions including allowable temperature range,
23 maintenance and cleaning instructions.
24
25 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of carpet areas showing starting points, walls or
26 partitions, fixed built-in equipment, required cutouts pile or pattern direction, location and
27 type of edge strips, and interface with other specified flooring materials or thresholds.
28
29 C. Samples:
30 1. Carpet:
31 a. Submit three carpet tiles of each selected color and pattern.
32 2. Edge Strip: 6" long piece.
33
34 D. Test Reports: Submit manufacturer's fire hazard classification, sound absorption and static
35 control reports.
36
37 E. Sustainable Design Submittals:
38 1.Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
39 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
40 low-emitting materials.
41 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements
42 for low-emitting materials.
43
44 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
45
46 A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years experience, installed at least ten projects
47 equivalent to work specified; certified by carpet manufacturer.
48
49 B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
50 response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
2
3 A. Do not deliver carpet tile to project site until painting and finishing work is complete and
4 ceilings and overhead work has been tested and accepted.
5
6 B. Deliver and store materials at project site in original factory packaging and containers. Store
7 materials flat, above ground, in a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture,
8 soiling, humidity, and extreme temperature.
9
10 1.6 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
11
12 A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain temperature, in areas where materials are stored or
13 installed, of 68 deg. F at least three days prior to, during, and after installation.
14
15 B. Existing Conditions: Substrate.
16 1. No condensation on underside of a 4' x 4' polyethylene sheet within 48 hours, fully taped
17 at perimeter to substrate.
18 2. PH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pHydrum paper applied.
19
20 1.7 WARRANTY
21
22 A. Manufacturer's five-year warranty for material including statement carpet will maintain
23 specified levels of static control.
24
25 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
26
27 A. Carpet Tile: Before installation begins, furnish full size units equal to [5] [10] [15] percent of
28 amount installed and store where directed by Owner.
29
30
31 PART 2 PRODUCTS
32
33 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
34
35 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements manufacturers
36 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
37 1. Collins & Aikman.
38 2. InterfaceFLOR.
39 3. Lees Carpet.
40 4. Milliken
41 5. Shaw Industries.
42
43 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
44
45 2.2 MATERIALS
46
47 A. Environmental Requirements; Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product
48 requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute’s “Green Label Plus” program.
49
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Recycled Content of Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of
2 products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
3 not less than 50 percent.
4
5 C.Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
6 Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
7 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
8
9 D. Carpet Tile – CPT-1:
10 1. Construction: Multi-level pattern loop
11 2. Fiber: Eco Solution q nylon
12 3. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed
13 4. Primary Backing: Synthetic
14 5. Secondary Backing: Ecoworx Tile
15 6. Protective Treatments: SSP Shaw Soil Protection
16 7. Warranty: Lifetime Commercial Limited
17 8. Size: 24” x 24”
18 9. Gauge: 1/12
19 10. Stitches: 8.5
20 11. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.078”
21 12. Average Density: 7385
22 13. Total Thickness: 0.228
23 14. Tufted Weight: 16.0
24 15. Performance + Testing:
25 a. Antimicrobial Assessment: Passes (AATCC-174)
26 b. Pill Test: Pass
27 c. Radiant Panel: Class 1
28 d. NBS Smoke: Less than 450
29 e. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kv
30 16. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule.
31 17. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
32
33 E. Adhesive:
34 1. Non-flammable type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
35 2. Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
36 conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile
37 and that is recommended by carpet tile [and resilient base] manufacturer.
38 a.Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
39 b.Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
40 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
41 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
42 Chambers."
43
44 F. Edge Strips: Vinyl, color selected by Architect.
45
46 G. Patching and Leveling Compound: Latex based as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Verify floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0", noncumulative.
6
7 B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
8 requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and
9 other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color,
10 pattern, and potential defects.
11
12 C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
13 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
14 materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
15 characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
16 manufacturer.
17 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
18 Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
19 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
20
21 3.2 PREPARATION
22
23 A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances which
24 would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to
25 thoroughly dry.
26
27 B. Use filler to patch cracks and small holes, for leveling, and for transitions to other floor
28 materials.
29
30 3.3 INSTALLATION
31
32 A. Begin installation at central point in room and lay out by measuring length and width of area,
33 planning tiles down hallways, snapping chalk lines with right angles to center point of grid.
34
35 B. Create "anchor" line along edge of each quadrant by spreading trowel width of adhesive using
36 notched trowel. Allow adhesive to dry 20-30 minutes before installing tiles.
37
38 C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for dot application.
39
40 D. Apply carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for glueless application.
41
42 E. Begin carpet installation at one of right angles created by chalk lines, and lay first tile making
43 sure it is aligned with chalk lines. Install adjacent tiles, pressing squarely against first tile. Use
44 pyramiding technique of installation with all four corners aligning properly.
45
46 F. Fit carpet squares around walls, doors, etc., cutting tiles from back with straight edge and
47 carpet knife, with all cut squares adhered to floor.
48
49 G. In large areas, install additional "anchor" lines every 12-15 feet. In corridors, adhere tiles
50 across width every 6-8 feet with "anchor" lines.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 H. Continue grid uninterrupted into all spaces.
2
3 3.4 EDGE TRIM INSTALLATION
4
5 A. Install edge strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings and at carpet bases in
6 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
7
8 B. Use full length pieces butted tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided,
9 butt ends tight and flush.
10
11 3.5 ADJUSTMENT
12
13 A. Replace damaged tiles and soiled or stained tiles which cannot be cleaned. Remove loose
14 pieces of face yarn with sharp scissors.
15
16 3.6 CLEANING
17
18 A. Remove spots and smears of adhesive from carpet and adjacent surfaces immediately with
19 solvent.
20
21 B. Remove rubbish, wrapping materials, salvages and scraps.
22
23 C. Vacuum carpet using beater bar type vacuum cleaner.
24
25 D. Protect finish installation from soiling and damage by covering with protective sheets if
26 additional work is required in area with carpet.
27
28
29 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 68 16
2
3 SHEET CARPETING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Sheet carpeting accessories, and installation on floor surfaces.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
15 1. ASTM D 2859 - Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering
16 Materials.
17 2. ASTM E 84/NFPA 25 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
18 3. ASTM E 648/NFPA 253 - Flooring Radiant Panel Test.
19
20 1.3 SUBMITTALS
21
22 A. Product Data: Submit physical characteristics, resistance to fading, flame resistance
23 characteristics, installation instructions including allowable temperature range, maintenance
24 and cleaning instructions for each type of carpet material and accessory specified.
25
26 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of carpet areas, pile or pattern direction, location and
27 method of joining seams, dye lots, location and type of edge strips and interface with ceramic
28 tile or thresholds.
29
30 C. Samples:
31 1. Carpet:
32 a. Submit small samples of manufacturer's full color line.
33 b. Submit two pieces 18" x 18" minimum of each selected color and pattern.
34 2. Edge Strip: 6" long piece.
35
36 D. Sustainable Design Submittals:
37 1.Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
38 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
39 low-emitting materials.
40 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements
41 for low-emitting materials.
42
43 E. Test Reports: Submit manufacturer's fire hazard classification, sound absorption and static
44 control reports.
45
46 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
47
48 A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years experience, installed at least ten projects equal to
49 work specified, and certified by carpet manufacturer.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
2 response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
3
4 C. Conform to ASTM D 2859 for surface flammability ignition test.
5
6 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
7
8 A. Do not deliver sheet carpet to project site until spaces are ready to receive installation.
9
10 B. Deliver in packaging to protect carpet from elements during transit and temporary project
11 site storage.
12
13 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
14
15 A. Do not commence carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
16 ceilings and overhead work has been tested and accepted.
17
18 B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 68 degrees F for at least 72 hours prior to and
19 during installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which area is to be
20 maintained.
21
22 C. Provide sufficient lighting for installation.
23
24 D. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of 4' x 4' polyethylene
25 sheet, fully taped at perimeter to substrate.
26
27 1.7 WARRANTY
28
29 A. Furnish manufacturer's standard five year warranty for material and that carpet will maintain
30 specified levels of static control.
31
32 B. Adhesive manufacturer shall warrant that carpet will not delaminate from sub floor for period
33 of five years.
34
35 1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL
36
37 A. Deliver unused carpet pieces, over 2 square feet or 8" in least dimension and store where
38 directed by Owner.
39
40 B. Deliver additional single carpet piece, in full width of roll by length that equals 10 percent of
41 total coverage, one piece for each type or pattern of carpet.
42
43
44 PART 2 PRODUCTS
45
46 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
47
48 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements manufacturers
49 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
50 1. Bentley.
51 2. Collins & Aikman
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. InterfaceFLOR
2 4. Lees Commercial Carpet.
3 5. Mohawk Carpet.
4 6. Prince St. Technologies, LTD.
5
6 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
7
8 2.2 MATERIALS
9
10 A. Recycled Content of Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of
11 products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
12 not less than 50 percent.
13
14 B.Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
15 Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
16 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
17
18 C. Sheet Carpet – CPT-2:
19 1. Construction: Multi-level pattern loop
20 2. Fiber: Eco Solution q nylon
21 3. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed
22 4. Primary Backing: Synthetic
23 5. Secondary Backing: Ecoworx Tile
24 6. Protective Treatments: SSP Shaw Soil Protection
25 7. Warranty: 10 yeare Commercial Limited
26 8. Size: 12.00 feet
27 9. Gauge: 1/8
28 10. Stitches: 10 per inch
29 11. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.124”
30 12. Average Density: 6968 per cu. yd.
31 13. Total Thickness: 0.297
32 14. Tufted Weight: 24 oz. sq. yd.
33 15. Pattern Repeat: 4.0”w x 6.0”l
34 16. Performance + Testing:
35 a. Antimicrobial Assessment: Passes (AATCC-174)
36 b. Pill Test: Pass
37 c. Radiant Panel: Class 1
38 d. NBS Smoke: Less than 450
39 e. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kv
40 17. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule.
41 18. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
42
43 D. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
44 conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
45 recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.
46 1.Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
47 2.Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
48 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
49 Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
50 Chambers."
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 16 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 E. Edge Strips: Vinyl, color selected by Architect.
2
3 F. Patching and Leveling Compound: White, premixed latex; type as recommended by carpet
4 manufacturer.
5
6
7 PART 3 EXECUTION
8
9 3.1 EXAMINATION
10
11 A. Verify floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0", noncumulative.
12
13 B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
14 requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and
15 other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and
16 potential defects.
17
18 C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
19 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
20 materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
21 characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet [cushion]
22 manufacturer.
23 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
24 Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
25 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
26
27 D. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect's review.
28
29 E. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots.
30
31 3.2 PREPARATION
32
33 A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances which
34 would be detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet.
35
36 B. Allow floors to thoroughly dry.
37
38 C. Use patching compound to filler to cracks and small holes, for leveling, and for transitions to
39 other floor materials.
40
41 3.3 INSTALLATION
42
43 A. Install tackless carpet stripping by nailing. Locate to ensure concealment of carpet edge
44 between stripping and base of wall. Lay strip at entire perimeter of carpeted space,
45 obstructions, and cutouts. Provide narrow stripping with 2 rows of pins where stretched
46 width of carpet is 20 feet or less; stripping with 3 rows of pins where carpet width exceeds 20
47 feet.
48
49 B. Install cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. Place cushion face up as
50 recommended by cushion manufacturer. Apply minimum 2-inch fabric-type adhesive tape
51 on cushion seams.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 16 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Cut carpet where required in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Make cuts
3 straight, true and not frayed.
4
5 D. Locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. Join seams in manner recommended by
6 manufacturer so as not to detract from appearance of carpet installation and decrease life
7 expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped, or peaked and free of gaps. Seams
8 will not be permitted where single piece of carpet can be installed.
9
10 E. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer over full area of installation.
11 Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.
12
13 F. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Do not change
14 run of pile in any one run or from one room to next where carpet is continuous through
15 opening.
16
17 G. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement, and taping and/or
18 sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life
19 of carpet.
20
21 H. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free, taut, trim edges; secure to stripping and conceal
22 behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20 feet.
23
24 I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor, to walls and to other vertical
25 surfaces.
26
27 J. Fit carpet neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and penetrations, under
28 saddles, thresholds and around permanent cabinets and equipment.
29
30 K. Do not place heavy objects on carpet surfaces for minimum 24 hours or until adhesive is set.
31
32 L. Lay entire carpet installation tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges and present
33 uniform, pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any
34 one area.
35
36 3.4 EDGE TRIM INSTALLATION
37
38 A. Install edge strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings and at carpet bases in
39 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
40
41 B. Use full length pieces butted tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided,
42 butt ends tight and flush.
43
44 3.5 ADJUSTING
45
46 A. Replace damaged, soiled or stained carpeting which cannot be cleaned. Remove loose pieces
47 of face yarn with sharp scissors.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 68 16 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.6 CLEANING
2
3 A. Remove spots and smears of adhesive from carpet and adjacent surfaces immediately with
4 solvent.
5
6 B. Remove rubbish, wrapping materials, selvages and scraps.
7
8 C. Upon completion of installation, vacuum carpet using beater bar type vacuum cleaner.
9
10 D. Protect finish installation from soiling and damage by covering with protective sheets if
11 additional work is required in area with carpet.
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 77 23
2
3 ACOUSTIC PANELS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Prefabricated acoustical wall and ceiling treatments.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
15
16 1.3 SUBMITTALS
17
18 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product and installation instructions for each type of
19 acoustical wall and ceiling panel specified.
20
21 B. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of each type of acoustical panel required and in each
22 color, texture and pattern selected for facing materials.
23
24 C. Quality Control Submittals:
25 1. Test Reports: Be qualified independent testing laboratory that acoustical well panels
26 comply with requirements specified for fire and sound performance.
27 2. Certificates: By manufacturer that acoustical panels comply with specified requirements.
28
29 D. Sustainable Design Submittals:
30 1.Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
31 content and cost.
32 2.Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles (160 km) of Project,
33 indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery
34 for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
35 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
36 low-emitting materials.
37 4.Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
38 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with
39 requirements for low-emitting materials.
40 6.Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
41 requirements for low-emitting materials.
42 7.Laboratory Test Reports: For wall materials, indicating compliance with requirements for
43 low-emitting materials.
44
45 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
46
47 A. Qualifications:
48 1. Installer: Minimum of three project installations of comparable extent as proposed
49 Project.
50 2. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of acoustical panel from a single source to
51 provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
3
4 A. Handling:
5 1. Protect acoustical panels from moisture during shipment, storage and handling.
6 2. Store panels, open cartons at each end to stabilize moisture content prior to installation a
7 dry place with adequate air circulation.
8
9 B. Do not deliver panels to building until "wet work" such as painting, plastering and tile work
10 has been completed.
11
12 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
13
14 A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces to receive panels have
15 been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature as
16 planned for occupancy.
17
18 PART 2 PRODUCTS
19
20 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
21
22 A.Wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
23 Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
24 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
25
26 B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements manufacturers
27 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
28 1. Acoustical Resources, Inc.
29 2. Architectural Silence, Inc.
30 3. Armstrong World Industries
31 4. Decoustics Inc.
32 5. Capaul Corporation.
33 6. Conweb
34 7. Golterman & Sabo.
35 8. Kinetics Noise Control.
36 9. Quiet Technology Systems
37 10. Sound Concepts, Inc.
38 11. Sound Design Panels by Koroseal.
39
40 C. Available Fabric Manufacturers:
41 1. Koroseal.Sound Design
42 2. Knoll
43 3. Guilford of Maine
44 4. Terratex.
45
46 D. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
47
48 E. Sustainable Design Requirements:
49 1.Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
50 content not less than 50 percent.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting
2 formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's "Airborne Toxic
3 Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products"
4 or shall be made with no added formaldehyde.
5
6 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL
7
8 A. Acoustic Panels – AB-1:
9 1. Formed Copolymer Facing and edges.
10 2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
11 3. Core: 2” thick, 6-7 PCF density fiberglass.
12 4. Edge: Square.
13 5. NRC: 1.00
14 6. Texture: Smooth
15 7. Performance Requirements:
16 a. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):
17 a. Flamespread: 25 maximum.
18 b. Smoke Developed: 450 maximum.
19 c. Fire ratings for all fabric covered panels is based on testing of the panel wrapped
20 with the standard in stock fabric, Guilford of Maine, Model FR 701.
21 8. Surface Finish: Refer to Finish Schedule.
22 9. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
23
24 2.3 WOOD GRILL ACOUSTIC PANEL
25
26 A. Acoustic Wall Panels – WG-1:
27 1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
28 2. Wood: Refer to Finish Schedule.
29 3. Size: 8 blades per foot x 1-3/8” tall x 3/4” thick blades.
30 4. Backers: Wood.
31 5. Edge: Square.
32 6. NRC: 1.00
33 7. Texture: Smooth
34 8. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A
35 9. Surface Finish: Refer to Finish Schedule.
36 10. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
37
38 2.4 PERFORATED METAL ACOUSTICAL PANEL
39
40 A. Perforated Metal Wall and Ceiling Panels – AMP-1 & AWC-1:
41 1. Construction: 22 gage galvanized steel face, perforated with 3/32 inch holes on 3/16
42 inch staggered centers, providing 23% open area. 20 gage steel channel/stiffener
43 framing. 2 inches thick, black glass fiber batt insulation with medium density skin.
44 2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard powder coated paint finish.
45 a. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule
46 3. Size: As indicated on the drawings.
47 4. Sound Absorption (ASTM E795, A mounting): Noise Reduction Coefficient of 0.90.
48 5. Mounting Accessories: Flush mount Z-clips top with angle clips bottom
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 6. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
2
3 2.5 FABRIC WRAPPED ACOUSTICAL PANEL
4
5 A. Fabric Wrapped Acoustical Panel – AB-2:
6 1. 1/16 inch thick copolymer perforated with 3/32 inch holes on 5/32 inch staggered
7 centers
8 2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
9 3. Core: 2” thick, 6-7 PCF density fiberglass.
10 4. Edge: Square.
11 5. NRC: 1.00
12 6. Fabric: 100% polyester fabric, FR 701 by Guilford of Maine.
13 7. Performance Requirements:
14 a. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):
15 b. Flamespread: 25 maximum.
16 c. Smoke Developed: 450 maximum.
17 d. Fire ratings for all fabric covered panels is based on testing of the panel wrapped with
18 the standard in stock fabric, Guilford of Maine, Model FR 701.
19 8. Surface Finish: Refer to Finish Schedule.
20 9. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
21
22 2.6 WOOD VENEER PERFORATED PANELS
23
24 A. Perforated Acoustic Wood Veneer Panels
25 1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
26 2. Perforations: 16mm
27 3. 2” Acoustical Panel
28 4. NRC: 0.80
29 5. Wood: Refer to Finish Schedule.
30 6. Aluminum Extrusions:
31 a. Series 200: Extrusions extend to the face of the wall panel for framed panel system.
32 b. Series 300: Extrusions cover edge of the panel for shallow reveal.
33 c. Finish:
34 1) Black Brushed, Bright Dip (provide sample for approval)
35 2) Black Buffed, Bright Dip (provide sample for approval)
36 3) Black Etched (provide sample for approval)
37 7. Edge: Square.
38 8. Texture: Smooth
39 9. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A
40 10. Surface Finish: Refer to Finish Schedule.
41 11. Acceptable Product: Refer to Finish Schedule.
42
43 2.7 FABRICATION
44
45 A. Acoustical panels shall be manufactured to within 1/8" tolerance of actual measured field
46 conditions.
47
48 B. Acoustical Wall Panel Accessories:
49 1. Impaling clips
50 2. Z-clips
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 23 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive acoustical panels for unevenness, irregularities and
6 dampness.
7
8 3.2 INSTALLATION
9
10 A. Install acoustical panels and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
11
12 B. Install panels level, plumb, secure and at proper heights. Attach wood sleepers to wall
13 surface attached to treated wood blocking.
14
15 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS
16
17 A. Repair or replace damaged units.
18
19 3.4 CLEANING
20
21 A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 50 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 77 50
2
3 SANITARY WALL PANELS
4
5 PART 1 GENERAL
6
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Section Includes:
10 1. FRP sanitary wall panels.
11 2. Molding and trim accessories.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
16
17 1.3 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive data, application methods; and
20 maintenance instructions including recommended cleaning materials.
21
22 B. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of selected color and finish.
23
24 C. Sustainable Design Submittals:
25 1.Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
26 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
27 low-emitting materials.
28 3.Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
29 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for
30 low-emitting materials.
31 5.Laboratory Test Reports: For wall materials, indicating compliance with
32 requirements for low-emitting materials.
33
34 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
35
36 A. Applicator Qualifications: On year minimum experience; approved by manufacturer.
37
38 B. Regulatory Requirements: Fire hazard classifications complying with building code and
39 ASTM E 84:
40 1. Flame Spread: Class A (I).
41 2. Smoke Developed: 200.
42
43 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
44
45 A. Store wall panels in clean and dry interior area, protected from sunlight, where temperatures
46 are maintained at minimum 60 degrees F with normal humidity. Do not store in upright
47 position, store flat on skids.
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 50 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
2
3 A. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60 degrees F 72 hours before, during, and for 48
4 hours after application.
5
6 B. Remove wall paneling from packaging and allow to acclimatize to area of installation 24
7 hours before application.
8
9 1.7 SCHEDULING
10
11 A. Place sanitary wall paneling before installation of plumbing fixtures, casings, bases, cabinets,
12 and other kitchen equipment.
13
14
15 PART 2 PRODUCTS
16
17 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
18
19 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
20 1. Graham FRP.
21 2. Kemlite Company, by Crane Composites
22 3. Marlite.
23 4. Nudo
24 5. Panel Specialties, Inc.
25 6. Sequentia, by Crane Composites
26 7. Stabilit/Glasteel.
27
28 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
29
30 2.2 MATERIALS
31
32 A.Wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
33 Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
34 Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
35
36 B. FRP Panels:
37 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic with textured surface.
38 2. Water Absorption: 0.4 percent.
39 3. Size: 4'-0" x 8'-0" x 0.09" thick.
40 4. Color: No. 85 White.
41 5. Acceptable Products:
42 a. Fire-X Glasbord Plus by Crane/Kemlite Company.
43 b. Exceliner by Graham FRP.
44 c. Sanilite by Marlite.
45 d. Fiber-Lite by Nudo.
46 e. Structoglas by Sequentia.
47 f. Stabilit by Stabilit/Glasteel.
48
49 C. Accessories: One piece division bars, 2" inside corners, 2" outside corners, caps, and nylon
50 drive rivets.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 77 50 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 D. Adhesive and Sealant: Multi-purpose as recommended by panel manufacturers.
2 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
3 2.Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
4 3. Adhesive and Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
5 California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and
6 Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
7 Environmental Chambers."
8
9
10 PART 3 EXECUTION
11
12 3.1 EXAMINATION
13
14 A. Verify surfaces to receive sanitary wall paneling are clean, true and free of irregularities.
15
16 3.2 INSTALLATION
17
18 A. Layout panel installation prior to beginning work to minimize number of joints required.
19
20 B. Remove and replace hardware, accessories, plates and similar items to allow wall paneling to
21 be installed.
22
23 C. Install panels and accessories over framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
24
25 3.3 CLEANING
26
27 A. Clean wall paneling of adhesives, dust, dirt and other contaminants in accordance with
28 manufacturer's recommendations.
29
30 B. Replace wall plates and accessories.
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 91 13
2
3 EXTERIOR PAINTING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1. SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings.
11
12 B. Work not requiring finish, the following items are not required to be finished under this
13 Section.
14 1. Items with factory applied final finish.
15 2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, chromium plate, copper, nickel and stainless steel.
16 3. Brick, tile, and stone.
17 4. Moving parts of operating units.
18 5. Code required labels such as UL or equipment identification plates.
19
20 1.2. REFERENCES
21
22 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
23 1. ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
24 Products.
25 2. ASTM D 523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.
26 3. ASTM D 2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
27
28 1.3. DEFINITIONS
29
30 A. Comply with ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
31
32 B. Gloss Factors: Values of various degrees of luster when tested in accordance with ASTM D
33 523 shall comply with following:
34 1. Flat: Below 5 units at 85 degree test angle.
35 2. Eggshell/Satin: 10 to 30 units at 60 degree test angle.
36 3. Semi-Gloss: 30 to 65 units at 60 degree test angle.
37 4. Gloss: Over 70 units at 20 degree test angle.
38
39 1.4. SUBMITTALS
40
41 A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis,
42 instruction for handling, storage, surface preparation procedures and application
43 recommendations for each paint system including primers and sealers.
44
45 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
46 1.Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.
47
48 C. Shop Drawings: Submit painting schedule including manufacturer's product name, color,
49 and substrate proposed for painting, and method of application.
50
51 D. Samples: Provide stepped samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
52 primers - of each color, texture and material to be applied on the following substrates:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Painted Wood: Provide two 12" square samples of each color and material on hardboard.
2 2. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4" square samples of flat metal and two 8" long samples of
3 solid metal for each color and finish.
4
5 E. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish certificates from manufacturer that all products
6 supplied comply with local, state, and federal regulations controlling use of volatile organic
7 compounds (VOC's).
8
9 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
10
11 A. Qualifications:
12 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five
13 years commercial and three projects of similar scope documented experience.
14 2. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
15 manufacturer as the finish coats.
16
17 B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Texas Air Control Board (TACB) Regulation V and
18 requirements of governing authorities relative to volatile organic compounds (VOC) content.
19
20 C. Field Samples:
21 1. Prepare 100 sq. ft. field sample panel illustrating each special coating color, texture, sheen,
22 and finish.
23 2. Locate where directed by Architect.
24 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
25 4. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work.
26 5. Final acceptance of colors will be from job applied samples.
27
28 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
29
30 A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers. Examine to verify
31 acceptability.
32
33 B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number and
34 date of manufacturer, brand code, coverage rate, surface preparation, instructions for mixing
35 and reducing drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and application
36 instructions.
37
38 C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature between 45 degrees F and 90 degrees
39 F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
40
41 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS
42
43 A. Environmental Requirements:
44 1. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside
45 humidity ranges required by paint product manufacturer.
46 2. Dew Point: Do not apply exterior coatings unless dew point is at least 5°F above surface
47 (to be coated) temperature, and rising.
48 3. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50
49 degrees F for exterior, or as otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet.
50 4. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or
51 exterior, or as otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet.
52 5. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS
3
4 A. Provide two gallons of each color, type, and surface texture to Owner.
5
6 B. In addition to manufacturer's label, identify each container with color, type, texture, and
7 room location.
8
9
10 PART 2 PRODUCTS
11
12 2.1. MANUFACTURERS
13
14 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements manufacturers
15 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
16 1. AkzoNobel: Devoe High Performance Coatings.
17 2. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore): Coronado, Corotech, Insl-X, Lenmar, Maxum.
18 3. Glidden Professional (GP), a division of PPG.
19 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Co., Inc. (KM).
20 5. PPG Paints (PPG).
21 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company. (S-W).
22
23 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
24
25 2.2. MATERIALS
26
27 A.VOC Content: For field applications, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content
28 limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
29 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
30 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
31 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
32 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
33 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L.
34 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.
35 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
36 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
37 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
38
39 B. Coatings:
40 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings.
41 2. Process pigments to soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
42 dispersed to homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying
43 or curing free of streaks or sags.
44
45 C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
46 specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality.
47
48 D. Patching Materials: Latex filler.
49
50 E. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.
51
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2
3 3.1. EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Verification of Conditions:
6 1. Examine the substrates, adjoining constructions, and the conditions under which the
7 work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
8 detrimental to the work have been corrected.
9 2. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by product
10 manufacturer.
11 3. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
12 4. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
13 finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums:
14 a. Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
15 b. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2016.
16
17 3.2. PREPARATION
18
19 A. General:
20 1. Remove or mask electrical and mechanical, plates, hardware and hardware accessories,
21 light fixture, escutcheons, fittings, and similar items prior to preparing surfaces or
22 finishing. Reinstall removed items by workers skilled in the trades involved.
23 2. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
24 3. Schedule cleaning and surface preparation so that dust and other containments will not
25 fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
26 4. Seal with shellac marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
27 5. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
28
29 B. Surface Preparation:
30 1. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam
31 or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply
32 etching primer immediately following cleaning.
33 2. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt,
34 loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and
35 grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains
36 caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after
37 thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
38 3. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
39 Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with vinyl spackling
40 compound after prime coat has been applied.
41 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
42 Apply coat of etching primer.
43 5. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium
44 phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
45 6. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
46 edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with suitable solvent or
47 detergent and water. Prime bare steel surfaces with primer compatible with shop coat
48 and scheduled topcoat.
49 7. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: In accordance with SSPC SP-1, solvent clean to
50 remove oil, grease, dirt, and other contaminants that may affect adhesion of primer.
51 Remove mill scale using hand-or power-tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-2, and
52 SSPC SP-3, respectively. Where blast cleaning is deemed appropriate, prepare surface of
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 steel and iron in accordance with SSPC SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Spot prime
2 paint after repairs, with appropriate compatible primer.
3 8. Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
4
5 3.3. APPLICATION
6
7 A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
8
9 B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
10
11 C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
12
13 D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat.
14
15 E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
16
17 F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next
18 coat.
19
20 G. Observe manufacturer’s published re-coat window times for products being used.
21
22 H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain before
23 set. Wipe excess from surface.
24
25 I. Prime concealed surfaces of exterior woodwork with primer paint.
26
27 3.4. FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
28
29 A. Paint shop prefinished items occurring at exposed exterior areas.
30
31 B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,
32 hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and except where items are prefinished.
33
34 3.5. CLEANING
35
36 A. Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and
37 remove daily from site.
38
39 3.6. SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
40
41 A. Metal - Aluminum:
42 1. Finish: Semi-Gloss latex enamel, primer and two finish coats.
43 2. Primer:
44 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer/Finish, 2.0-2.2 mils dft.
45 b. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer, P04, 1.7-2.3 mils dft.
46 c. PPG: 90-712 Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel, 2.0
47 -3.0 mils dft.
48 d. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 Series, 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
49 e. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish 1.6 – 2.0 mils dft.
50 3. Finish Coats:
51 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4216HP High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 1.5-4.0 mils
52 dft.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Moore: Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi- Gloss, P29, 1.5-2.5 mil dft/coat.
2 c. PPG: 6-900XI Series Speedhide Exterior House and Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic, 1.4
3 mils dft/coat
4 d. S-W: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss, B53-1150
5 Series 2.0 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
6 e. KM: 1215 Color Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel 1.7-2.2 mils dft.
7
8 B. Ferrous Metal - Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:
9 1. Finish: Semi-gloss acrylic, anticorrosive alkyd primer and two finish coats.
10 2. Primer:
11 a. Devoe Coatings Devguard 4160 Tank & Structural Primer, 2.0 - 2.5 mils dft/coat.
12 b. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer, P04, 1.7-2.3 mils dft/coat.
13 c. PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils
14 dft/coat.
15 d. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 Series, 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft..
16 e. KM: 1710 Kel-Guard Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft/coat.
17 3. Finish Coats:
18 a. Devoe 4306 Devguard Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.9-2.4 mils dft/coat.
19 b. Moore: Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss, P 29,1.5 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
20 c. PPG: Industrial Semi-Gloss Oil, 2.0 – 2.2 dft/coat.
21 d. S-W: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss, B53-1150
22 Series 2.0 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
23 e. KM: 1275 Weather Shield Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Oil, 1.7 – 2.2 mils dft/coat.
24
25 C. Ferrous Metal – Doors, Frames, Guardrails, Handrails:
26 1. Finish: Semi-gloss alkyd, anticorrosive primer and two finish coats.
27 2. Primer:
28 a. Moore: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer, V 110, 1.6-2.0 mils dft/coat.
29 b. Devoe Coatings Devguard 4160 Tank & Structural Primer, 2.0 - 2.5 mils dft/coat.
30 c. KM: 1710 Kel-Guard Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft/coat.
31 d. PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils
32 dft/coat.
33 e. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 Series, 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
34 3. Finish Coats:
35 a. Moore: Corotech Alkyd Urethane Semi-Gloss, V201.,1.5 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
36 b. Devoe 4306 Devguard Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.9-2.4 mils dft/coat.
37 c. KM: 1275 Weather Shield Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Oil, 1.7 – 2.2 mils dft/coat.
38 d. PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Urethane Modified Gloss Oil, 2.3 dft/coat.
39 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss, B53-1150
40 Series 2.0 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
41
42 D. Galvanized Metal - Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:
43 1. Finish: Semi-gloss acrylic [alkyd], primer and two finish coats.
44 2. Primer:
45 a. Devoe Coatings Devguard 4160 Tank & Structural Primer, 2.0 - 2.5 mils dft/coat.
46 b. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer, P04, 1.7-2.3 mils dft.
47 c. PPG: Speedhide Interior/Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft/coat.
48 d. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 Series, 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
49 e. KM: 1712 All Metal Gard White Rust-Inhibitive Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft.
50 3. Finish Coats:
51 a. Devoe 4306 Devguard Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.9-2.4 mils dft/coat.
52 b. Moore: Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss, P 29, 1.5 – 2.5 mils dft./coat.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 13 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 c. PPG: Industrial Semi-Gloss Oil, 2.0 – 2.2 dft/coat.
2 d. S-W: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss, B53-1150
3 Series 2.0 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
4 e. KM: 1275 Weather Shield Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Oil, 1.7 – 2.2 mils dft/coat.
5
6 E. Galvanized Metal – Doors, Frames, Guardrails, Handrails:
7 1. Finish: Semi-gloss alkyd, primer and two finish coats.
8 2. Primer:
9 a. Moore: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110, 1.6-2.0 mils dft.
10 b. Devoe 4160 Devoe Coatings Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer, 1.5
11 – 2.0 mils dft/coat.
12 c. KM: 1712 All Metal Gard White Rust-Inhibitive Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft.
13 d. PPG: 6-209 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils
14 dft/coat.
15 e. S-W: Galvite HS Alkyd, 3.0 – 4.5 mils dft/coat.
16 3. Finish Coats:
17 a. Moore: Corotech Alkyd Urethane Semi-Gloss, V201, 2.0-2.2 mils dft/coat.
18 b. Devoe 4306 Devguard Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.9-2.4 mils dft/coat.
19 c. KM: 1275 Weather Shield Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Oil, 1.7 – 2.2 mils dft/coat.
20 d. PPG: Speedhide Int/Ext Urethane Modified Gloss Oil, 2.3 dft/coat.
21 e. S-W: B54Z Industrial Enamel, 2.0 – 3.0 dft/coat.
22
23 F. Wood – Plywood:
24 1. Finish: Semi-Gloss acrylic latex, primer and two finish coats.
25 2. Primer:
26 a. GP: 3210 GRIPPER Int/Ext Primer SealerHydrosealer Primer Sealer 6001-1200, 1.8
27 - 2.1mils dft.
28 b. Moore Sure Seal Latex Primer-Sealer, 027, 1.3 mils dft.
29 c. PPG: 6-609 Speedhide Exterior House and Trim Wood Primer Flat, 1.3 – 1.6 dft.
30 d. S-W: A100 Exterior Latex Primer, 1.4 mils dft minimum.
31 e. KM: 250 Color Shield Exterior 100% Primer-Sealer 1.5-2.0 mils dft.
32 3. Finish Coats:
33 a. GP: Ultra-Hide 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint 2416V, 1.3 – 1.5 mils dft/coat.
34 b. Moore: Ultra Spec EXT Satin Finish, N448, 1.5 mils dft minimum.
35 c. PPG: 6-900XI Series Speedhide Exterior House and Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic, 0.90 –
36 1.10 mils dft/coat.
37 d. S-W: Metallatex Semi-Gloss Coating B42 Series, 3.0 – 5.0 dft/coat.
38 e. KM: 1215 Color Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel 1.7-2.2 mils dft.
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 09 91 23
2
3 INTERIOR PAINTING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1. SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings.
11
12 B. Work not requiring finish, the following items are not required to be finished under this
13 Section.
14 1. Items with factory applied final finish.
15 2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, chromium plate, copper, nickel and stainless steel.
16 3. Brick, tile, and plastic laminate.
17 4. Acoustical ceilings.
18 5. Concealed ducts, pipes and conduit.
19 6. Moving parts of operating units.
20 7. Code required labels such as UL or equipment identification plates.
21
22 1.2. REFERENCES
23
24 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
25 1. ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
26 Products.
27 2. ASTM D 523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.
28 3. ASTM D 2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
29
30 1.3. DEFINITIONS
31
32 A. Comply with ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
33
34 B. Gloss Factors: Values of various degrees of luster when tested in accordance with ASTM D
35 523 shall comply with following:
36 1. Flat: Below 5 units at 85 degree test angle.
37 2. Eggshell/Satin: 10 to 30 units at 60 degree test angle.
38 3. Semi-Gloss: 30 to 65 units at 60 degree test angle.
39 4. Gloss: Over 70 units at 20 degree test angle.
40
41 1.4. SUBMITTALS
42
43 A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis,
44 instruction for handling, storage, surface preparation procedures and application
45 recommendations for each paint system including primers and sealers.
46
47 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
48 1.Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.
49 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with
50 requirements for low-emitting materials.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Shop Drawings: Submit painting schedule including manufacturer's product name, color,
2 and substrate proposed for painting, and method of application.
3
4 D. Samples: Provide stepped samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
5 primers - of each color, texture and material to be applied on the following substrates:
6 1. Drywall: Provide two 12" square sample of each color and material on drywall.
7 2. Painted Wood: Provide two 12" square samples of each color and material on hardboard.
8 3. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4" square samples of flat metal and two 8" long samples of
9 solid metal for each color and finish.
10
11 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13 A. Qualifications:
14 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five
15 years commercial and three projects of similar scope documented experience.
16 2. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
17 manufacturer as the finish coats.
18
19 B. Field Samples:
20 1. Prepare 100 sq. ft. field sample panel illustrating each special coating color, texture, sheen,
21 and finish.
22 2. Locate where directed by Architect.
23 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
24 4. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work.
25 5. Final acceptance of colors will be from job applied samples.
26
27 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
28
29 A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers. Examine to verify
30 acceptability.
31
32 B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number and
33 date of manufacturer, brand code, coverage rate, surface preparation, instructions for mixing
34 and reducing drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and application
35 instructions.
36
37 C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature between 45 degrees F and 90 degrees
38 F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
39
40 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS
41
42 A. Environmental Requirements:
43 1. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside
44 humidity ranges required by paint product manufacturer.
45 2. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors.
46 3. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interiors.
47 4. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
48
49 1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS
50
51 A. Provide two gallons of each color, type, and surface texture to Owner.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. In addition to manufacturer's label, identify each container with color, type, texture, and
2 room location.
3
4
5 PART 2 PRODUCTS
6
7 2.1. GENERAL
8
9 A.VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and
10 coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the
11 following VOC content limits:
12 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
13 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
14 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
15 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
16 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L.
17 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.
18 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
19 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
20 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
21
22 B. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system,
23 90 percent of paints and coatings shall comply with the requirements of the California
24 Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
25 Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
26
27 C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat
28 paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the
29 following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that
30 are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
31 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
32 weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
33 benzene rings).
34 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
35 a. Acrolein.
36 b. Acrylonitrile.
37 c. Antimony.
38 d. Benzene.
39 e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
40 f. Cadmium.
41 g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
42 h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
43 i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
44 j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
45 k. Diethyl phthalate.
46 l. Dimethyl phthalate.
47 m. Ethylbenzene.
48 n. Formaldehyde.
49 o. Hexavalent chromium.
50 p. Isophorone.
51 q. Lead.
52 r. Mercury.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
2 t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
3 u. Methylene chloride.
4 v. Naphthalene.
5 w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
6 x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
7 y. Vinyl chloride.
8
9 2.2. MANUFACTURERS
10
11 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements manufacturers
12 that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
13 1. AkzoNobel: Devoe High Performance Coatings.
14 2. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore): Coronado, Corotech, Insl-X, Lenmar.
15 3. Kelly-Moore Paint Co., Inc. (KM).
16 4. PPG Paints (PPG).
17 5. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
18
19 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
20
21 2.3. MATERIALS
22
23 A. Coatings:
24 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings.
25 2. Process pigments to soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
26 dispersed to homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying
27 or curing free of streaks or sags.
28
29
30 PART 3 EXECUTION
31
32 3.1. EXAMINATION
33
34 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
35 requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
36 the Work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the
37 work have been corrected.
38
39 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
40 meter as follows:
41 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
42 2. Wood: 15 percent.
43
44 C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
45 1. Verify that Finish Level 5 specified in Section 09 29 50 – “Gypsum Board Systems” has
46 been completed and accepted prior to application of the prime paint coat.
47
48 D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
49 finishes and primers.
50
51 E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
52 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 3.2. PREPARATION
3
4 A. General:
5 1. Remove or mask electrical and mechanical, plates, hardware and hardware accessories,
6 light fixture, escutcheons, fittings, and similar items prior to preparing surfaces or
7 finishing. Reinstall removed items by workers skilled in the trades involved.
8 2. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
9 3. Schedule cleaning and surface preparation so that dust and other containments will not
10 fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
11 4. Seal with shellac marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
12 5. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
13
14 B. Surface Preparation:
15 1. Gypsum Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after
16 repair.
17 2. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior
18 priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks
19 after primer has dried; sand between coats.
20 3. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and
21 cotton.
22 4. Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
23 by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion
24 of subsequently applied paints.
25 5. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
26 edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare
27 steel surfaces using primer compatible with shop primer and scheduled topcoat. Prime
28 metal items, including shop prime items.
29 6. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: In accordance with SSPC SP-1, solvent clean to
30 remove oil, grease, dirt, and other contaminants that may affect adhesion of primer.
31 Remove mill scale using hand-or power-tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-2, and
32 SSPC SP-3, respectively. Where blast cleaning is deemed appropriate, prepare surface of
33 steel and iron in accordance with SSPC SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Spot prime
34 paint after repairs, with appropriate compatible primer.
35
36 3.3. APPLICATION
37
38 A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in
39 "MPI Manual."
40 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
41 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
42 surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
43 furniture with prime coat only.
44 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
45 hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
46 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
47 identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
48 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
49 or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
50
51 B. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles just prior to painting. Use tack cloth just prior
52 to applying each coat.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
3 same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
4 sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
5
6 D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, flashing, spotting, holidays, laps,
7 brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
8 sharp lines and color breaks.
9
10 E. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
11 film has a uniform paint finish, sheen, color, and appearance.
12
13 F. Lightly sand metal substrates between coats to achieve required finish.
14
15 G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
16
17 H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood stain and work fillers into grain.
18
19 I. Prime concealed surfaces of woodwork scheduled to receive painted finish with primer.
20
21 J. Prime concealed surfaces of woodwork scheduled to receive stain or transparent finishes
22 with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
23
24 3.4. FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
25
26 A. Refer to Divisions 23 and 26 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of
27 equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit.
28
29 B. Paint shop primed equipment.
30
31 C. Paint the following prefinished items occurring at exposed interior areas to match adjacent
32 surface color when adjacent surface is not white:
33 1. Mechanical diffusers, registers, and grilles.
34
35 D. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
36 components and paint separately.
37
38 E. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,
39 hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and except where items are pre-finished.
40
41 F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat
42 of flat black paint to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, and grilles.
43
44 G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
45
46 H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
47 before installing equipment.
48
49 I. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in accordance with
50 requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings
2 removed prior to finishing.
3
4 3.5. CLEANING
5
6 A. Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and
7 remove daily from site.
8
9 3.6. SCHEDULE – INTERIOR PAINT
10
11 A. Concrete Floor Stain:
12 1. Finish: Low luster acrylic opaque stain; two finish coats.
13 2. Finish Coats:
14 a. S-W: H&C® COLORTOP™ Water-Based Solid Color Concrete Stain.
15
16 B. Cotton or Canvas Covering over Insulation:
17 1. Finish: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
18 a. KM: 1500 Enviro-Coat Zero VOC Acrylic Interior Flat Wall Paint (0 g/L VOC) 1.5 -
19 2.0 mils dft/coat.
20 b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer, 0 VOC, N534, 1.8 mils dft/coat
21 minimum.
22 c. PPG: 6-4110XI Speedhide zero Interior Flat Latex (0 g/L VOC), 1.8 mils dft/coat
23 minimum.
24 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Flat Paint B30-2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.6 mils
25 dft/coat minimum.
26
27 C. Gypsum Board:
28 1. Finish: Lusterless (flat) latex; primer and two finish coats.
29 2. Primer: NO SUBSTITUTIONS.
30 a. KM: 971 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior PVA Primer/Sealer (0 g/L VOC), 2.0 mils
31 dft minimum.
32 b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer Sealer N534, (0 g/L VOC), 1.8
33 mils dft minimum.
34 c. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2, (less than50 g/L VOC), 1.0 mils dft
35 minimum.
36 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.5
37 mils dft minimum.
38 3. Finish Coats:
39 a. KM: 1005 KM PROFESSIONAL Interior Acrylic ZERO VOC Flat Wall Paint (0
40 g/L VOC) 1.5-2.0 mils dft.
41 b. Moore: Waterborne Ceiling Paint, Flat, 0 VOC, 508, 1.4 mils dft/coat
42 c. PPG: 6-4110XI Speedhide zero Interior Flat Latex (0 g/L VOC), 1.8 mils dft/coat
43 minimum.
44 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Flat Paint B30-2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.6 mils
45 dft/coat minimum.
46 4. Location: CEILINGS ONLY.
47
48 D. Gypsum Board:
49 1. Finish: Semi-Gloss latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
50 2. Primer: NO SUBSTITUTIONS.
51 a. KM: 971 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior PVA Primer/Sealer (0 g/L VOC), 2.0 mils
52 dft minimum.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 8 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer Sealer N534, (0 g/L VOC), 1.8
2 mils dft minimum.
3 c. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2, (less than50 g/L VOC), 1.0 mils dft
4 minimum.
5 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.5
6 mils dft minimum.
7 3. Finish Coats:
8 a. KM: 1050 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7
9 - 2.2 mils dft/coat.
10 b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Latex Interior Semi Gloss Finish, 0 VOC, N539, 1.8 mils
11 dft/coat minimum.
12 c. PPG: 6-4510XI Series Speedhide zero Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex (0 g/L
13 VOC), 1.4 mils dft/coat.
14 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 (0 g/L
15 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
16
17 E. Gypsum Board:
18 1. Finish: Satin latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
19 2. Primer: NO SUBSTITUTIONS
20 a. KM: 971 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior PVA Primer/Sealer (0 g/L VOC), 2.0 mils
21 dft minimum.
22 b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer Sealer N534, (0 g/L VOC), 1.8
23 mils dft minimum.
24 c. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2, (less than50 g/L VOC), 1.0 mils dft
25 minimum.
26 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.5
27 mils dft minimum.
28 3. Finish Coats:
29 a. KM: 1010 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7 -
30 2.2 mils dft/coat.
31 b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Latex Interior Egshell Finish, 0 VOC, N538, 1.8 mils dft/
32 coat.
33 c. PPG: 6-4310XI Series Speedhide zero Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex ( 0g/L VOC),
34 1.5 – 1.7 mils dft/coat.
35 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Low Gloss Interior Latex Eg-Shel B41-2600 (0 g/L
36 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
37
38 F. Ferrous Metal:
39 1. Finish: Semi-Gloss latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
40 2. Primer:
41 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF DTM Primer & Finish (75 g/L VOC), 2.2 – 3.5
42 mils dft.
43 b. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Metal Primer (100 g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
44 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM Enamel, Semi-Gloss, P29, 1.5- 2.5 mils dft
45 minimum.
46 d. PPG: 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
47 Enamel (123 g/L VOC), 2.0 – 3.0 mils dft.
48 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (less than100 g/L
49 VOC), 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
50 3. Finish Coats:
51 a. Glidden Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint 1415 (0 g/L VOC), 1.3
52 dft/coat minimum.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 9 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 b. KM: 1050 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7
2 - 2.2 mils dft.
3 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM, Semi Gloss, P29, 1.5- 2.5 mils dft minimum
4 d. PPG: 6-4510XI Series Speedhide zero Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex ( 0 g/L
5 VOC), 1.4 mils dft/coat.
6 e. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 (0 g/L
7 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
8
9 G. Ferrous Metal:
10 1. Finish: Satin latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
11 2. Primer:
12 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF DTM Primer & Finish (75 g/L VOC), 2.2 – 3.5
13 mils dft.
14 b. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Metal Primer (100 g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
15 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM, P 29, 1.5-2.5 mils dft /coat.
16 d. PPG: 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
17 Enamel (123 g/L VOC), 2.0 – 3.0 mils dft.
18 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (less than100 g/L
19 VOC), 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
20 3. Finish Coats:
21 a. Glidden Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint 1411 (0 g/L VOC), 1.3 dft/coat
22 minimum.
23 b. KM: 1010 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7 -
24 2.2 mils dft.
25 c. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Eggshell Finish, 0 VOC, N538, 1.8mils dft/coat
26 minimum.
27 d. PPG: 6-4310XI Series Speedhide zero Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex ( 0g/L VOC),
28 1.5 – 1.7 mild dft/coat.
29 e. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 (0 g/L
30 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
31
32 H. Ferrous Metal – Doors, Frames, Guardrails, Handrails:
33 1. Finish: Semi-gloss, waterborne light industrial coating; primer and two finish coats.
34 2. Primer:
35 a. Devoe, Devflex 4020 Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish (91 g/L VOC) 2.2 – 3.5
36 mils dft.
37 b. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (less than100 g/l) 1.6-2.0 mils dft.
38 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM, Semi Gloss, P 29, 1.5-2.5 mils dft / coat.
39 d. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus, Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer 90-912 (less than90 g/L VOC)
40 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
41 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (less than100 g/L
42 VOC) 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
43 3. Finish Coats:
44 a. Devoe High Performance Devflex 4216 High Performance WB Acrylic Semi-Gloss
45 Enamel 4216L (less than150 g/L VOC) 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft/coat.
46 b. KM: 1685 DuraPoxy 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (less than50 g/L VOC).
47 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM, Semi Gloss, P 29, 1.5- 2.5 mils dft min/ coat.
48 d. PPG: Pitt-Glaze WB1, Pitt-Glaze WBI Int. Semi-Goss Acrylic Epoxy 16-510 (less
49 than100 g/L VOC) 1.5 mils dft/coat minimum.
50 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Water Based Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss, B53-1150
51 Series (<50 g/L VOC) 1.4 – 1.7 mils dft.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 10 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 I. Ferrous Metal – Galvanized:
2 1. Finish: Semi-Gloss latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
3 2. Primer:
4 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020 DTM Primer & Finish (75 g/L VOC), 2.2 – 3.5 mils
5 dft.
6 b. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Metal Primer (100 g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
7 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM, Semi Gloss, P 29, 1.5 -2.5mils dft min.
8 d. PPG: 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
9 Enamel (123 g/L VOC), 2.0 – 3.0 mils dft.
10 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (less than100 g/L
11 VOC), 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
12 3. Finish Coats:
13 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4216HP Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (less than100 g/L
14 VOC), 1.5 – 4.0 mils. dft/coat.
15 b. KM: 1050 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7
16 - 2.2 mils dft/coat.
17 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM Semi Gloss, P 29, 1.5- 2.5 mils dft/ coat.
18 d. PPG: 6-4510XISeries Speedhide zero Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex ( 0 g/L
19 VOC), 1.4 mil mils dft/coat.
20 e. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 (0 g/L
21 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
22
23 J. Ferrous Metal – Galvanized:
24 1. Finish: Satin latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
25 2. Primer:
26 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF DTM Primer & Finish (75 g/L VOC), 2.2 – 3.5
27 mils dft.
28 b. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Metal Primer (100 g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
29 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM, Semi Gloss, P 29, 1.5 – 2.5 mils dft minimum
30 d. PPG: 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
31 Enamel (123 g/L VOC), 2.0 – 3.0 mils dft.
32 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (less than100 g/L
33 VOC), 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
34 3. Finish Coats:
35 a. Devoe Coatings Devflex 4212HP Acrylic Eggshell Enamel (less than100 g/L VOC),
36 1.5 – 4.0 mils. dft/coat.
37 b. KM: 1010 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7 -
38 2.2 mils dft/coat.
39 c. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Latex Interior Eggshell Finish, 0 VOC, N538, 1.5-2.5 mils
40 dft/ coat
41 d. PPG: 6-4310XI Series Speedhide zero Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex ( 0 g/L VOC),
42 1.5 – 1.7 mild dft/coat.
43 e. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Low Gloss Interior Latex Eg-Shel B41-2600 (0 g/L
44 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
45
46 K. Galvanized Metal – Doors, Frames, Guardrails, Handrails:
47 1. Finish: Semi-gloss, waterborne light industrial coating; primer and two finish coats.
48 2. Primer:
49 a. Devoe, Devflex 4020 Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish (91 g/L VOC) 2.2 – 3.5
50 mils dft.
51 b. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (less than100 g/l) 1.6-2.0 mils dft.
52 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM Semi-Gloss , P 29, 1.5-2.5 mils dft.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 11 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 d. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus, Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer 90-912 (less than90 g/L VOC)
2 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
3 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (less than100 g/L
4 VOC) 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
5 3. Finish Coats:
6 a. Devoe High Performance Devflex 4216 High Performance WB Acrylic Semi-Gloss
7 Enamel 4216L (less than150 g/L VOC) 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft/coat.
8 b. KM: 1685 DuraPoxy 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (less than50 g/L VOC).
9 c. Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic DTM Semi Gloss, P 29, 1-5-2.5 mils dft/coat.
10 d. PPG: Pitt-Glaze WBI, Pitt-Glaze WBI Int. Semi-Goss Acrylic Epoxy 16-510 (less
11 than150 g/L VOC) 1.5 mils dft/coat minimum.
12 e. S-W: Pro Industrial Water Based Alkyd Urethane Enamel Semi-Gloss, B53-1150
13 Series (<50 g/L VOC) 1.4 – 1.7 mils dft.
14
15 L. Woodwork:
16 1. Finish: Semi-gloss waterborne acrylic enamel; primer and two finish coats.
17 2. Primer:
18 a. KM: 973 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior Wall Primer & Undercoat (0 g/L VOC) 1.5 -
19 2.0 mils dft.
20 b. Moore: Advance™Water-Reducible Alkyd Primer, 790 less than50 g/L /VOC), 1.4
21 mils dft
22 c. PPG: 17-921 Series Seal Grip Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Universal
23 Primer/Sealer (89 g/L VOC), 1.2 – 1.5 mils dft.
24 d. S-W: Premium Wall & Wood Interior Latex Primer B28W8111 (41 g/L VOC), 1.8
25 mils dft minimum.
26 3. Finish Coats:
27 a. KM: 1050 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel(0 g/L VOC) 1.7
28 - 2.2 mils dft/coat.
29 b. Moore: Advance™ Water Reducible Alkyd Enamel, Satin Finish, 792 (less than50
30 g/L VOC), 1.4 mils dft/coat.
31 c. PPG: 6-500 Series Speedhide Interior Enamel Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex (42 g/L
32 VOC), 1.4 mils dft/coat.
33 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 (0 G/L
34 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
35
36 M. Woodwork:
37 4. Finish: Satin waterborne acrylic enamel; primer and two finish coats.
38 5. Primer:
39 a. KM: 973 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior Wall Primer & Undercoat (0 g/L VOC) 1.5 -
40 2.0 mils dft.
41 b. Moore: Advance™Water-Reducible Alkyd Primer, 790 less than50 g/L /VOC), 1.4
42 mils dft
43 c. PPG: 17-921 Series Seal Grip Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Universal
44 Primer/Sealer (89 g/L VOC), 1.2 – 1.5 mils dft.
45 d. S-W: Premium Wall & Wood Interior Latex Primer B28W8111 (41 g/L VOC), 1.8
46 mils dft minimum.
47 6. Finish Coats:
48 a. KM: 1010 KM Professional Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Enamel (0 g/L VOC) 1.7 -
49 2.2 mils dft/coat.
50 b. Moore: Advance™ Water Reducible Alkyd Enamel, Satin Finish, 792 (less than50
51 g/L VOC), 1.4 mils dft/coat
52 c. PPG: 6-411 Series Speedhide Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (42 g/L VOC), 1.5 –
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 09 91 23 - 12 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.7 mils dft/coat.
2 d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Low Gloss Interior Latex Eg-Shel B41-2600 (0 g/L
3 VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
4
5 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 14 00
2
3 SIGNAGE
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Engraved interior aluminum plate acrylic plastic signs.
12 2. Cast aluminum letters.
13 3. Brackets, pedestals, adhesives and accessories.
14
15 1.2 REFERENCES
16
17 A. ASTM International
18 1. ASTM B26/B26M: Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings.
19 2. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
20 3. ASTM D 4802: Specification for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet
21
22 1.3 SUBMITTALS
23
24 A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature, specifications, and installation instructions; and
25 maintenance instructions including cleaning materials, application methods, and precautions
26 in use of cleaning materials which may be detrimental to surfaces if improperly applied.
27
28 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction, mounting system, and lettering style, size, and text.
29
30 C. Samples: Submit full size samples of each type sign, and letter.
31
32 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
34 A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ADA Braille recommendations.
35
36 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
37
38 A. Package signs in crates or cartons, adequately padded and protected against scratching and
39 other damage. Label packages with listing of sign labels and locations.
40
41 B. Include in sign packages installation templates, hardware or adhesive, and installation
42 instructions.
43
44 C. Store materials out of weather and protect from damage.
45
46
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 MANUFACTURER
4
5 A. Acceptable Aluminum and Plastic Sign Manufacturers:
6 1. Architectural Graphics, Inc.
7 2. ASI Sign Systems.
8 3. Best Signs
9 4. Bayuk Graphic Systems, Inc.
10 5. InPro Signscapes
11 6. Matthews Architectural Division.
12 7. Mohawk Signs
13 8. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
14 9. Vomar Products, Inc.
15 10. Takeform
16 11. 2/90 Sign Systems
17 12. Architectural Signing
18 13. Appenx
19
20 B. Acceptable Cast Letter Manufacturers:
21 1. California Neon Products (CNP)
22 2. Federal Heath Sign Company.
23 3. Matthews Architectural Division.
24 4. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
25 5. The Southwell Company.
26
27 C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
28
29 2.2 ROOM SIGNS
30
31 A. Engraved Sign:
32 1. Letter Style: Refer to construction documents.
33 2. Sign Description: 1/8” aluminum plate with raised letters mounted to 3/8” acrylic
34 backer with offset hardware as noted on Construction Drawings.
35 3. All signage to include Grade II Braille characters compliant with the American
36 Disabilities Act.
37 4. Tactile characters/symbols shall be raised 1/32" from sign plate face. Signs shall be of
38 one-piece construction; added-on and/or engraved characters are unacceptable.
39 5. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille.
40 6. All letters, numbers and/or symbols shall contrast with their background - either light
41 characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Characters
42 and background shall have matte finish.
43 7. All signage specified to be installed on a glass surface to have finished base color on each
44 side and be attached with one drop silicone caulk in each of the four corners.
45 8. Colors: Refer to Construction Drawings.
46
47 2.3 CAST ALUMINUM LETTERS
48
49 A. Materials:
50 1. Cast aluminum alloy F-214, of sufficient thickness to assure rigid structure, with casting
51 surfaces free of imperfections.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. Grind letter faces smooth and polish to fine grain satin finish.
2 3. File edges and grind smooth, and remove traces of sand texture.
3
4 B. Letter Style: Arial Black.
5
6 C. Mounting Materials:
7 1. Vertical Mounting: Aluminum supports and brackets.
8 2. Cement: Quick setting type as recommended by letter manufacturer for flush mounting.
9
10 D. Aluminum Finish:
11 1. Factory baked enamel finish system.
12 2. Color: As selected by Architect.
13
14 E. Size: 12" high x 1-3/4" deep.
15
16 2.4 MATERIALS
17
18 A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign
19 manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.
20
21 B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
22 producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
23
24 C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type
25 UVF (UV filtering).
26
27 D. Paints and Coatings for Sheet and Plate Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are
28 recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water
29 resistant for colors and exposure indicated.
30
31 2.5 ACCESSORIES
32
33 A. Brackets and Pedestals:
34 1. Materials:
35 a. Steel: ASTM A 653, 18 gauge sheet steel.
36 b. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 302, 304 or 305.
37 1) Expansion bolts: FS FF-S-325.
38 2) Sheet Metal Screws: Flat Phillips head sheet metal screws.
39 3) Machine bolts: Slotted round head bolts with hex head nuts.
40 2. Finish:
41 a. Steel: One coat of rust inhibitive primer and two coats of semi-gloss alkyd enamel
42 applied after fabrication; surfaces prepared and coating spray applied in accordance
43 with coating manufacturer's recommendations.
44 b. Exposed Stainless Steel: No. 4 brushed satin finish.
45
46 B. Anchoring Devices: Refer to Construction Drawings.
47
48 C. Glazing Tape: 1/16" thick butyl rubber glazing tape manufactured by Tremco, Pecora.
49
50 D. Mounting Tape and Adhesives: 1/32" thick vinyl foam tape and Silastic adhesive in addition
51 to tape where recommended by sign manufacturer for substrates.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 2.6 FABRICATION
3
4 A. Fabricate items true to shapes with accurate angles and surfaces, and straight edges. Form
5 bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
6 impairing work.
7
8 B. Perform welding of aluminum in accordance with applicable AWS Standards to prevent
9 pitting, discoloration or other surface imperfections after finishing. Weld seams
10 continuously. Grind exposed welds in aluminum smooth and flush, and finish to match
11 adjacent surfaces.
12
13
14 PART 3 EXECUTION
15
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17
18 A. Verify exact locations with Architect.
19
20 3.2 INSTALLATION
21
22 A. Install items after painting of substrate surfaces and application of other finish materials is
23 complete.
24
25 B. Install signs, letters and supports plumb, level, in line, in accordance with manufacturer's
26 recommendations. Install signs with concealed fasteners and adhesive.
27
28 3.3 CLEANING
29
30 A. Clean and polish letters, signs, and related brackets and supports in accordance with
31 manufacturer's instructions.
32
33 B. Remove excess adhesive using methods that will not damage or stain signs or substrate
34 surfaces.
35
36 C. Vacuum areas to remove dust and drill shavings produced by work under this Section.
37
38 3.4 ADJUSTING
39
40 A. Repair or replace substrate materials damaged by improper location of signs.
41
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 53 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 14 53
2
3 SITE SIGNAGE
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Handicapped parking signage.
12 2. Traffic signage.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
17
18 1.3 SUBMITTALS
19
20 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ standard product data and descriptive literature for
21 each sign indicating acceptance of use by highway departments.
22
23 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign layout, locations and installation details.
24
25 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
26
27 A. Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened cartons, clearly marked with contents.
28
29 B. Store material off ground and raised platforms and cover with tarpaulins.
30
31
32 PART 2 PRODUCTS
33
34 2.1 SITE TRAFFIC SIGNS
35
36 A. Site Signs: 0.080" thick aluminum conforming to ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6, degreased and
37 etched; with reflectorized finish complying with Mil Spec MIL-R-13689A.
38
39 B. Posts: 2" diameter, 0.080" thick aluminum posts conforming to ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6,
40 degreased and etched; black anodized finish.
41
42 C. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 31 00.
43
44 D. Accessories: Cadmium plated or galvanized bolts with 5/16" minimum diameter, clamps,
45 washers, nuts and other required accessories as recommended by sign manufacturer.
46
47 2.2 HANDICAPPED PARKING SIGNAGE
48
49 A. Support Post:
50 1. 3" square extruded aluminum post with welded end cap and integral channel to receive
51 slide extrusion attached to panel.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 53 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. 3/8" thick flange plate welds to bottom of post with holes to receive (4) 1/2" diameter J-
2 bolts.
3
4 B. Fiberglass Sign Panel:
5 1. Combination of 1/4" thick thermosetting polyester resin reinforced with chopped glass
6 fiber strands bonded to rigid, extruded aluminum framework.
7 2. Aluminum framework shall contain integrally extruded, dove-tailed, resin-trapping
8 channels which shall permanently capture fiberglass material during thermosetting
9 process.
10
11 C. Panel Mounting: Mount sign panel to aluminum post extrusions with male slide extrusions
12 which track into receiving channels extruded in post, provide set screw attached for locking
13 into place.
14
15 D. Graphics:
16 1. Subsurface, integral with molded sign panel and protected with clear matte polyurethane
17 coating containing ultraviolet inhibitors for maximum color stability.
18 2. Paints, inks, and resins are to be compatible and guaranteed not to cause discoloration,
19 deterioration, or delamination of materials used in fabrication.
20 3. Lettering and graphics shall be executed in such manner that edges and corners of
21 letterforms are true, clean, correctly spaced, photographically precise, and must accurately
22 reproduce letterform.
23
24
25 PART 3 EXECUTION
26
27 3.1 EXCAVATION
28
29 A. Provide holes with diameters three times of post size.
30
31 B. Excavate holes approximately 3" deeper than post bottom, with post bottoms minimum 3'-
32 0" below ground surface. Excavate deeper if necessary due to soft soil conditions or other
33 deleterious conditions.
34
35 C. Remove loose material and debris from hole bottoms.
36
37 3.2 INSTALLATION
38
39 A. Set posts and moisten soils prior to concrete placement. Align posts plumb and vertical, with
40 post bottoms 3" minimum above bottom of excavation.
41
42 B. Hold posts accurately in place and hold in position with braces if necessary.
43
44 C. Place concrete around posts in continuous pour and consolidate.
45
46 D. Attach signs with necessary accessories to required heights.
47
48 3.3 CLEANING
49
50 A. Dispose of spoil off property site.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 14 53 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 21 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 21 13
2
3 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Metal toilet compartments, ceiling hung.
12 2. Urinal screens, wall mounted.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16
17 A. FS RR-P-1352 - Partitions, Metal Toilet, Complete.
18
19 B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
20 1. ASTM A 591 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated.
21 2. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel, Plate, Sheet and
22 Strip.
23
24 1.3 SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Product Data: Submit data sheets, color charts, parts list, installation instructions, and
27 maintenance procedures.
28
29 B. Shop Drawings:
30 1. Show fabrication and erection of partition assemblies to extent not fully described by
31 manufacturer's data sheets.
32 2. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes.
33 3. Provide location template drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for
34 attachment of partitions.
35
36 C. Samples: Submit sample of selected color on actual surface material.
37
38 D. Certificate: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements.
39
40 E. Sustainability Submittals:
41 1. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages of weight of
42 postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for
43 each product having recycled content.
44
45 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
46
47 A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum three years experience and acceptable to manufacturer.
48
49 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
50
51 A. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened packaging.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 21 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Open ends of containers 48 hours prior to installation to climatize materials.
2
3 C. Cover with manufacturer's standard protective covering during shipment and installation.
4
5
6 PART 2 PRODUCTS
7
8 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
9
10 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
11 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation
12 2. Bradley Corp.
13 3. General Partitions
14 4. Global Steel Products Corporation.
15 5. Knickerbocker
16 6. Metpar Corporation
17 7. Sanymetal, a Metpar Corporation company.
18
19 B. Acceptable Products:
20 1. Ceiling Hung Supported Toilet Partitions:
21 a. Accurate Partitions Ceiling Hung
22 b. Bradley Series 600, Ceiling Hung.
23 c. Series 50 by General Partitions.
24 d. Ceiling Hung by Global.
25 e. Partitions: Empire by Knickerbocker
26 f. CH-700 Forum by Metpar
27 g. CH-700 Forum (formerly Century) by Sanymetal.
28 2. Wall Hung Urinal Screens:
29 a. Type F by Sanymetal Product Co.
30 b. Bradley Model #2 Wall Hung with Wing Bracket.
31 c. Type WT by Metpar
32
33 C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
34
35 2.2 MATERIALS
36
37 A. Recycled Content of Ferrous Metal Products: Provide products with an average recycled
38 content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
39 recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
40
41 B. Stainless Sheet Steel:
42 1. ASTM A 167, Type 304, 18-8 stainless steel.
43 2. Doors: 22 gage.
44 3. Panels: 22 gage.
45 4. Pilasters: 18 gage.
46
47 C. Core: Sound deadening material, honeycomb, impregnated Kraft paper.
48
49 D. Pilaster Shoes: AISI Type 302/304, 20 gage stainless steel, 3" high, No. 4 satin finish.
50
51 E. Panel Wall Brackets: Two ear, "T" style, 1" stock.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 21 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 F. Panel to Pilaster Brackets: Stirrup style brackets, nonferrous alloy with satin chrome finish.
2
3 G. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Exposed fasteners, tamper-resistant type to match
4 hardware, with neoprene washers; hot-dip cadmium plated concealed fasteners.
5
6 H. Hinges:
7 1. Wrought stainless steel, surface mounted, 11 gage one-piece leaf and casing; 3/8"
8 stainless steel pin; non-removable trim parts, fully adjustable.
9 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7280/81 by Sanymetal.
10
11 I. Latch:
12 1. Slide latch, flush surface mounted; 11 gage, stainless steel encased in 14 gage welded
13 housing.
14 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7231 by Sanymetal.
15
16 J. Door Stop and Keeper:
17 1. 14 gage stainless steel inswing keeper; two heavy, rubber bumpers; emergency access
18 keeper. [full height continuous stop with full height rubber bumper;]
19 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7269 by Sanymetal.
20
21 K. Door Pull:
22 1. 14 gage stainless steel; mount opposite sliding latch.
23 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7268 by Sanymetal.
24
25 L. Coat Hook:
26 1. 14 gage stainless steel, rubber tipped.
27 2. Acceptable Product: No. 7267 by Sanymetal.
28
29 2.3 FABRICATION
30
31 A. Fabricate partitions in accordance with FS RR-P-1352. Assemble to greatest extent possible.
32 Make cutouts for toilet accessories at factory.
33
34 B. Provide formed and closed edges for doors, panels and pilasters. Miter and weld corners and
35 grind smooth.
36
37 C. Provide internal reinforcement in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of
38 reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories.
39
40 D. Doors and Panels: 1" thick x 24" wide x 58" high sheet steel face pressure bonded to core;
41 34 inch wide doors, swinging out, for handicapped stalls.
42
43 E. Supports and Hangers: Leveling devices, anchor studs and locking nuts as recommended by
44 manufacturer.
45
46 F. Pilasters: 1-1/4" inch thick, constructed same as doors of sizes required to suit cubicle
47 widths and spacing.
48
49 G. Pilasters must extend to floor every 3rd pilaster, at any of the following locations or as
50 indicated on drawings.
51 1. Adjacent to walls,
52 2. At intersections of pilaster to panels,
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 21 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Intermediate pilasters.
2
3 2.4 FINISH
4
5 A. Preparation: Clean, degrease and neutralize panels.
6
7 B.Finish: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 Satin.
8
9
10 PART 3 EXECUTION
11
12 3.1 EXAMINATION
13
14 A. Check areas scheduled to receive partitions for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls and
15 soundness of wall surfaces that would affect installation.
16
17 B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of partitions.
18
19 C. Ensure correct location or built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required.
20
21 3.2 INSTALLATION
22
23 A. General Requirements:
24 1. Install partitions rigid, straight, secure, plumb, level, and square.
25 2. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels.
26 3. Provide clearances of not more than 1" between panels and walls.
27 4. Provide clearance of not less than 9” between bottom of door and top of finished floor.
28 5. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets, attached near top and
29 bottom of panel, with tamper-resistant bolts and nuts.
30 6. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in tile joints.
31 7. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting to room finish.
32 8. Equip each door with two hinges, pull on inside of door, pull on both sides of door at
33 accessible stalls, one door latch, one coat hook and bumper
34
35 B. Overhead Supported Partitions:
36 1. Attach pilasters to supporting steel with pilaster supports.
37 2. Level, plumb and tighten installation with leveling devices.
38 3. Secure pilasters in position.
39 4. Set tops of doors parallel with panels when doors are in closed position.
40 5. Furnish shoes at bottom of pilasters.
41
42 C. Wall Mounted Urinal Screens:
43 1. Attach to wall with anchoring devices and wall brackets.
44 2. Position, level and tighten units securely.
45
46 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
47
48 A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4.
49
50 B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8".
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 21 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 ADJUSTING
2
3 A. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after installation.
4
5 B. Set hinges on inward swing doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed
6 position when unlatched.
7
8 C. Set hinges on outward swing doors to return to hold doors open approximately 10 degrees
9 from closed position when unlatched.
10
11 D. Perform final adjustment to leveling devices and hardware.
12
13 3.5 CLEANING
14
15 A. Field touch-up of scratches or defaced finish will not be permitted. Damaged, scratched or
16 marred defective materials will be rejected. Replace with new materials.
17
18 B. Clean exposed surfaces and partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories in accordance with
19 manufacturer's recommendations.
20
21 C. Remove protective masking. Clean surfaces free of oil and foreign materials.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 28 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 28 13
2
3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1. SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Toilet, bath, shower, and washroom accessories.
12 2. Grab bars.
13 3. Framed mirrors.
14 4. Attachment hardware.
15
16 1.2. REFERENCES
17
18 A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
19 1. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
20 Strip.
21 2. ASTM A 269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Tubing for General Service.
22 3. ASTM A 366 - Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality.
23
24 1.3. SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. Product Data: Submit product data, descriptive literature, catalog cut sheets, data sheets,
27 complete parts list, installation instructions, maintenance data, operating instructions, and
28 keys required for each type equipment and lock.
29
30 B. Samples:
31 1. Submit full-size samples in specified finish when requested by Architect.
32 2. Requested samples will be returned to Contractor after completion of Project.
33
34 C. Certification: Submit certification of grab bar strength and installation.
35
36 1.4. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
37
38 A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to
39 receive them.
40
41 B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish.
42
43 C. Deliver materials in original unopened containers and store in enclosed location providing
44 protection from damage and exposure to elements.
45
46 D. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from premises.
47
48 1.5. PROTECTION
49
50 A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of
51 work of this section.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 28 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2
3 PART 2 PRODUCTS
4
5 2.1. MANUFACTURERS
6
7 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
8 1. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI)
9 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co.
10 3. Bradley Corporation.
11 4. World Dryer.
12
13 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
14
15 2.2. MATERIALS
16
17 A. Steel: ASTM A 366, commercial grade, cold-rolled steel.
18
19 B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, commercial grade, Type 302 or 304, 22 gage.
20
21 C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, commercial grade, Type 302 or 304, seamless welded.
22
23 D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts:
24 1. Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz/sq ft.
25 2. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
26 component and substrate.
27
28 2.3. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
29
30 A. Grab Bars:
31 1. Material: 1-1/4" diameter stainless steel, 18 gage, Type 304, brushed satin finish with
32 peened gripping surface.
33 2. Mounting: Concealed plates, without exposed fasteners; concealed anchor kit for type of
34 wall.
35 3. Acceptable Products:
36 a. 24" Units:
37 1) B-5806.99 x 24 by Bobrick
38 2) ASI 3701-24
39 3) Bradley 832-2-001-24
40 b. 42" Units:
41 1) B-5806.99 x 42 by Bobrick
42 2) ASI 3701-42
43 3) Bradley 832-2-001-42
44
45 B. Foam Soap Dispensers:
46 1. Material: Type 304, 18 gauge, satin-finish stainless steel; all welded, concealed wall
47 fastening.
48 2. Mounting: Wall surface.
49 3. Capacity: 27 fl. oz. liquid soap
50 4. Acceptable Products: B-2013 by Bobrick.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 28 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Electric Hand Dryer: ADA Recessed
2 1. Material: Material: 22 gage, Type 304 stainless steel, bushed finish.
3 2. Mounting: Recessed.
4 3. Drying Time: 17 seconds
5 4. Voltage: 220-240V, 50Hz
6 5. Sensor Range: 3-15/16” vertically under outlet
7 6. Air Outlet Temperature: 129°F and 68°F for ambient air
8 7. Noise Level: 71dB
9 8. Air Speed: 91 ft/s
10 9. Nominal power/rates: 1.8Kw at 230V
11 10. Acceptable Products: L-M9 by Lovair
12
13 D. Waste Receptacle:
14 1. Material: 22 gage, Type 304 stainless steel, bushed finish.
15 2. Construction: Welded, stainless steel door piano hinge, two tumbler locks.
16 3. Mounting: Recessed.
17 4. Capacity: 4.4 gallons.
18 5. Acceptable Products: LM10 by Lovair
19
20
21 E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
22 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, Satin finish.
23 2. Construction: Seamless flange, no mitered corners, one tumbler lock on door.
24 3. Mounting: Recessed.
25 4. Capacity: Two standard toilet paper rolls.
26 5. Acceptable Products: B-3888 by Bobrick
27
28 F. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
29 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, polished finish; chrome plated plastic rollers.
30 2. Mounting: Partition; dual sided
31 3. Capacity: Two standard toilet paper rolls.
32 4. Acceptable Products: B-386 by Bobrick.
33
34 G. Combination Napkin Disposal, and Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
35 1. Cabinet: Type 304, stainless steel satin finish, welded construction, tumbler lock.
36 2. Mounting: Recessed
37 3. Capacity: 2 standard toilet tissue rolls.
38 4. Acceptable Products: B-3094 by Bobrick
39
40 H. Combination Feminine Napkin-Tampon Dispenser:
41 1. Material: 18 gage, Type 304 stainless steel, Satin finish.
42 2. Construction: Welded, stainless steel door piano hinge, tumbler locks on door and coin
43 box.
44 3. Mounting: Recessed.
45 4. Capacity: 31 feminine napkins and 22 tampons.
46 5. Controls: Coin operated, cost to be selected by Architect. [ 25¢. ]
47 6. Acceptable Products:
48 a. B-3706 by Bobrick
49 b. ASI 04684
50 c. Bradley 4017
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 28 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 I. Feminine Napkin-Tampon Disposal:
2 1. Material: 22 gage, Type 304 stainless steel, Satin finish.
3 2. Construction: Seamless flanges, welded, self-closing stainless steel door with piano hinge,
4 tumbler lock.
5 3. Mounting: Partition mounted, serves two toilet compartments.
6 4. Receptacle: Removable from one side.
7 5. Acceptable Products: B-4354 by Bobrick
8 a. ASI 0472
9 b. Bradley 4721-15.
10
11 J. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser:
12 1. Material: 18 gage, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish.
13 2. Construction: One-piece seamless flanges, stainless steel door piano hinges; tumbler lock.
14 3. Mounting: Surface.
15 4. Capacity: 500 paper toilet seat covers.
16 5. Acceptable Products:
17 a. B-3013 by Bobrick
18 b. ASI 20477-SM
19 c. Bradley 5831.
20
21 K. Framed Mirrors:
22 1. Material: One piece, roll-formed stainless steel angle frame, 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2",
23 Type 304, satin finish.
24 2. Mirror: 1/4" thick float glass mirror electrolytically copper plated; 15-year guarantee.
25 3. Mounting: Theft resistant, concealed wall hangers.
26 4. Quality:
27 5. Acceptable Products:
28 a. B-165 Series by Bobrick
29 b. ASI 0620
30 c. Bradley 781.
31
32 L. Frameless Mirrors:
33 1. Material: Type 304, 18-8 stainless steel, No. 20 gauge with No. 8 mirror finish; with ¼”
34 thick tempered water resistant masonite back. 15/16” returns to wall all around.
35 2. Mounting: Four 7/32” diameter mounting holes.
36 3. Acceptable Products: ASI 8026 Frameless Mirror.
37
38 M. Shelf with Mop and Broom Holders:
39 1. Material: 18 gage stainless steel, Satin finish.
40 2. Construction: 8" deep with four mop holders, three rag hooks and wet rag rod.
41 3. Mounting: Surface.
42 4. Acceptable Products:
43 a. B-224 x 36" by Bobrick
44 b. ASI 1315-4
45 c. Bradley 9984.
46
47 2.4. FABRICATION
48
49 A. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without
50 distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 28 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Fabricate recessed units with seamless one piece flange on exposed face. Weld corners
2 leaving on open miters.
3
4 C. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
5
6 D. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.
7 Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.
8
9 E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
10
11 F. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
12
13 G. Key locked dispensing units alike. Key coil operated boxes separately from dispensing unit.
14
15
16 PART 3 EXECUTION
17
18 3.1. EXAMINATION
19
20 A. Check openings scheduled to receive recessed units for correct dimensions, plumbness of
21 blocking or frames and preparation that would affect installation of accessories.
22
23 B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet compartments that affect installation of
24 accessories.
25
26 C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories.
27
28 3.2. PREPARATION
29
30 A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of
31 accessories.
32
33 B. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames at project site at appropriate time for building in.
34 Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
35
36 3.3. INSTALLATION
37
38 A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
39
40 B. Drill holes to correct size and application that is concealed by items with 1/4" tolerance.
41
42 C. Mount recessed accessories into wall openings with sheet metal screws into metal frames.
43
44 D. Mount surface mounted accessories to backup material with toggle bolts, plumb and align.
45
46 E. Anchor grab bars to through-wall anchor plates.
47
48 F. Use tamperproof fasteners.
49
50
51 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 44 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 44 13
2
3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Fire extinguishers, fire extinguisher cabinets and accessories.
11
12 1.2 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature, installation instructions and cleaning
15 recommendations.
16
17 B. Samples:
18 1. Furnish one full size sample in specified finish of each type cabinet, bracket and accessory
19 for review by Architect.
20 2. Owner will retain samples at completion of Project for extra stock.
21 3. Submit samples in manufacturer's original packaging.
22
23 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
25 A. Regulatory Requirements: Fire extinguisher and fire extinguisher cabinets shall bear UL
26 Label, and shall comply with applicable provisions of NFPA including the inspection and
27 tagging of fire extinguishers; approved for intended use and locations by applicable governing
28 authority.
29
30 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
31
32 A. Deliver fire extinguisher cabinets and brackets in manufacturer's original cartons, properly
33 labeled and intact.
34
35
36 PART 2 PRODUCTS
37
38 2.1 MANUFACTURER
39
40 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
41 1. J.L. Industries.
42 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
43 3.Potter Roemer Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
44 4. Nystrom, Inc.
45
46 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 44 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
2
3 A. Semi-Recessed Cabinet – FE-2: Multipurpose Dry Chem
4 1. Door: One piece solid construction, cold-rolled steel white baked enamel steel; vertical
5 duo glass style; with piano hinge, lock and handle.
6 2. Trim: One piece trim frame with joints welded and ground smooth, cold-rolled white
7 baked enamel steel.
8 3. Tub: Cold-rolled white baked enamel steel; corners welded and ground smooth.
9 4. Glazing: Clear 1/4" acrylic.
10 5. Signage: Apply exterior signage to cabinet door stating AFire Extinguisher@ in color and
11 size acceptable to local fire departments.
12 6. Fire Rating: Warnock Hersey labeled for 1 or 2-hour wall, where indicated.
13 7. Acceptable Product:
14 a. Non-rated Cabinet:
15 1) Model No. 2409-6R by Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
16 2) Model No. Steel 1017 by J.L. Industries.
17 3) Model Steel FC-7022 by Nystrom, Inc.
18 b. 1- or 2-Hour Rated Cabinet: Cosmopolitan 1037-FX by J. L. Industries.
19
20 B. Brackets: Surface mounted portable fire extinguisher steel wall brackets; enamel or epoxy
21 paint finish; sized to fit portable fire extinguisher supplied.
22
23 C. Class A Fire Extinguisher for General Use:
24 1. Type: Multi-purpose dry chemical.
25 2. Heavy duty cylinder with epoxy finish; chrome valve and siphon tubes, replaceable
26 molded valve steam seal; large pressure indicating gages, pull pin; up-right squeeze-grip
27 operation.
28 a. MRI Room/Area: provide nonferrous fire extinguisher.
29 3. Acceptable Products:
30 a. UL rated 4A-60B:C, 10 lb. capacity:
31 1) Model No. MP10 by Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
32 2) Cosmic 10E by J. L. Industries.
33 3) Model No. EX-3010 by Nystrom.
34
35 D. Class K Fire Extinguisher for Kitchen Areas ONLY:
36 1. Type: Potassium acetate, low PH agent, wet chemical
37 2. Heavy duty cylinder with epoxy finish; chrome valve and siphon tubes, replaceable
38 molded valve steam seal; large pressure indicating gages, pull pin; up-right squeeze-grip
39 operation.
40 3. Capacity: 12 lb; UL 2A:1B:C:K
41 4. Acceptable Product:
42 a. WC-6L by Larsens.
43 b. EX-3260 by Nystrom, Inc.
44
45
46 PART 3 EXECUTION
47
48 3.1 INSTALLATION
49
50 A. Securely fasten cabinets and brackets to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with
51 manufacturer's instruction. Install at mounting height to comply with governing authorities.
52
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 44 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
2
3 A. Inspection: Inspect and tag fire extinguishers as required by NFPA.
4
5 3.3 SCHEDULE
6
7 A. Install cabinets, brackets and extinguishers at rate of minimum one portable fire extinguisher
8 for each 6,000 square feet, or as indicated in the drawings.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 51 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 51 13
2
3 METAL LOCKERS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Prefinish metal locker types as follows with bases, sloping tops, filler
11 panels, hooks, latches, hardware, accessories, fasteners, and attachment hardware:
12 1. Standard Duty Wardrobe Lockers.
13 2. Benches.
14
15 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
16
17 A. Design Requirements: Provide lockers with interchangeable parts that are standard products
18 of a single manufacturer complete with necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and
19 accessories.
20
21 1.3 SUBMITTALS
22
23 A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature, specifications, and installation instructions.
24
25 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker types, sizes, configurations, installation details, layout of
26 groups of lockers, fillers, trim, base, accessories, numbering sequence, color and finish.
27
28 C. Samples: Submit 3" x 6" samples of each color on actual base metal.
29
30 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
31
32 A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened packaging.
33
34 B. Exercise care during handling, assembly and installation to prevent damage to locker finishes
35 and adjacent surfaces.
36
37
38 PART 2 PRODUCTS
39
40 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
41
42 A. Basis of Design: Provide ADA Lockers and Bench by Lyone; other acceptable
43 manufacturers that meet same requirements as Lyon:
44 1. American Independent Manufacturers/AIM Lockers
45 2. ASI Storage Solutions
46 3. Global
47 4. List Industries, Inc.
48 5. Lyon Metal Products.
49 6. Penco Products.
50 7. Republic Storage Systems Company, Inc.
51 8. Salsbury Industries.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 51 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
3
4 2.2 MATERIALS
5
6 A. Sheet Steel: Mild cold-rolled and level furniture steel, free from buckle, scale, and surface
7 imperfections.
8
9 B. Perforated Steel Sheet: Mild cold-rolled and level furniture steel, free from buckle, scale and
10 surface imperfections with diamond shaped openings 3/4" wide x 1-1/2" high in such quality
11 and pattern as to ensure maximum ventilation without compromising strength.
12
13 C. Fasteners: Cadmium zinc, or nickel-plates steel; exposed bolt heads, slotless type; self-locking
14 nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
15
16 D. Equipment: Hooks of cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel and shelves.
17
18 2.3 FABRICATION
19
20 A. General:
21 1. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, without warp, flat metal faces, and free of dents or
22 distortion with exposed edges safe to touch.
23 2. Bolt or rivet other joints and connections.
24 3. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on front of locker frames, doors panels.
25
26 B. Fabricate back and sides with full height double-flanged connections and top and bottom
27 with single flanged edges.
28
29 C. Frames: Fabricate of 16 gage channels with continuous stop/strike formed on vertical
30 members.
31
32 D. Doors:
33 1. One piece, flanged at top and bottom, flanged or channel shaped or hinge side, and
34 channel shaped on the lock side to fully conceal the lock bar.
35 2. Fabricate door to swing 180 degrees.
36 3. Ventilation: Stamped, louvered vents in door face as follows:
37 a. Double-tier Lockers: Not fewer than 3 louvered openings top and bottom.
38 4. Hinges: Steel, full loop, 5-knuckle, tightpin and welded to inside of frame and secure to
39 door with not less than two factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and
40 tamper proof when door is closed.
41 a. Provide 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches high.
42 b. Provide 2 hinges for each door 42 inches high or less.
43 5. Projecting Handle and Latch: Positive automatic, prelocking, pry-resistant latch and pull
44 with rubber silencers; chromium-plated, heavy duty, vandalproof lift-up handle,
45 containing strike and eye for padlock.
46
47 E. Finishing:
48 1. Chemically pretreat metal with degreasing and phosphatizing process.
49 2. Apply baked-on enamel finish to all surfaces, exposed and concealed, except plates and
50 nonferrous metal.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 51 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Color: Provide locker units in color(s) selected by Architect from manufacturer’s
2 standard and custom colors. Concealed parts may be manufacturer's standard neutral
3 color.
4
5 2.4 LOCKER ACCESSORIES
6
7 A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following:
8 1. Single-tier: Hat shelf, one double-prong hook and not less than two single-prong wall
9 hooks.
10 2. Double-tier: One double-prong hook and not less than two single-prong wall hooks
11
12 B. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, nonferrous metal
13 number plates with numerals not less than 3/8 inches high.
14 1. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two fasteners of same
15 finish as number plate.
16 2. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect.
17
18 C. Metal Base: Minimum 20-gage cold-rolled steel fabricated in lengths as long as practicable to
19 enclose base of lockers without additional fastening devices. Factory finish base to match
20 lockers.
21
22 D. Legs: Six inch high legs by extending vertical frame members or by attaching gusset type legs
23 made of not less than 16 gage steel sheet with provisions for fastening to floor and metal
24 closure panels.
25
26 E. Sloping Tops: Not less than 20 gage sheet steel, approximately 25 degree pitch, in lengths as
27 long as practicable but not less than 4 lockers, with closures at ends. Factory finish tops to
28 match lockers.
29
30 F. Filler Panels: Scribe, non-perforated, filler panels of not less than 18 gage steel sheet, factory
31 fabricated and finished to match lockers to close space between lockers and adjacent
32 structure.
33
34 G. End Panels: Non-perforated end panels for corridor lockers of not less than 16 gage steel
35 sheet, with no exposed fasteners, factory fabricated and finished to match lockers.
36
37 2.5 BENCHES
38
39 A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches.
40
41 B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
42 1. Size: Provide 24-inch wide tops where accessible benches are indicated.
43 2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of
44 clear lacquer on top and sides.
45
46 C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for
47 attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as
48 follows:
49 1. Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with
50 standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-
51 coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 51 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Install supports at 6’-0” o.c. maximum spacing.
2
3
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 51 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 EXAMINATION
4
5 A. Verify existing conditions, such as clearances, which may affect installation of Work under
6 this Section.
7
8 B. Verify readiness of curbs provided by others.
9
10 3.2 PREPARATION
11
12 A. Take site dimensions affecting this work.
13
14 B. Ensure bases are properly sized and located.
15
16 3.3 INSTALLATION
17
18 A. Install lockers plumb, level, square, rigid, and flush in accordance with manufacturer's
19 recommendations.
20
21 B. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials with minimum pullout force of
22 100 lbs., maximum spacing 48 inches o.c., through backup reinforcing plates where necessary
23 to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners.
24
25 C. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
26
27 D. Install end panels, filler panels, sloped tops, and bases using concealed fasteners with flush,
28 hairline joints against adjacent surface.
29
30 E. Install benches in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
31
32 3.4 ADJUSTING
33
34 A. After installation, level all items, and adjust and lubricate doors and integral locking devices
35 for proper operation without binding.
36
37 3.5 CLEANING
38
39 A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.
40
41 3.6 SCHEDULES
42
43 A. Standard Wardrobe Lockers:
44 1. Construction:
45 a. Bodies: 24 gage.
46 b. Backs: 24 gage.
47 c. Door Panel: 16 gage for doors 12" or larger, 18 gage for doors 9" or smaller.
48 2. Double-tier Lockers:
49 a. 15" wide x 18" deep x 72" high.
50
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 51 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 73 26 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 73 26
2
3 WALKWAY COVER
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Prefinished, pre-assembled, extruded aluminum walkway cover
11 system, including framing, reinforcing, structural anchors, integral gutters and drains,
12 attachments, shims and sealants.
13
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15
16 A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
17 1. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
18 Extrusions and Panels.
19
20 B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
21 1. ANSI/ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
22 2. ANSI/ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
23 3. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
24
25 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
26
27 A. Design Criteria:
28 1. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement and temperature
29 changes without detriment to appearance or performance.
30 2. Engineer components of completed system with provisions and allowances for minimum
31 of + or - 180 degree F variation in surface temperature to eliminate excessive thermal
32 stresses and deformation.
33
34 B. Wind Loading: 25 psf positive and negative wind load.
35
36 C. Deflection: L/180.
37
38 1.4 SUBMITTALS
39
40 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's fabrication and field installation instructions; submit
41 maintenance and cleaning instructions.
42
43 B. Shop Drawings: Include details of construction and installation methods, types and
44 thicknesses of materials; section module of wind load-bearing members, calculations for
45 stresses and deflections under design loading.
46
47 C. Samples: Submit 12" long section with finish of corrugated aluminum roof panel, gutters and
48 posts; submit samples of interlocking deck joint, roof deck expansion joint, welded column
49 or beam corner, beam cap, and rain cap.
50
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 73 26 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
3 A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Five years documented experience in engineering and
4 fabrication of similar work.
5
6 B. Installer Qualifications: Five years documented experience; approved by manufacturer.
7
8 1.6 COORDINATION
9
10 A. Supply inserts and anchoring devices for building into concrete and instruct other trade of
11 proper location and position.
12
13
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15
16 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
17
18 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
19 1. Avadek Walkway Cover Systems.
20 2. American Walkway Covers, LLC
21 3. Mapes Industries.
22 4. Metals USA
23 5. US Sunguard
24
25 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
26
27 2.2 MATERIALS
28
29 A. Aluminum Panel:
30 1. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, 0.078" thick, nominal 2 3/4" x 6" channel with
31 interlocking joints to form corrugated roof deck panels.
32 2. Acceptable Product: AVAdek Walkway Cover Systems.
33
34 B. Gutter and Fascia: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6 0.125" thick, nominal 3" style, fascia
35 and gutter beam.
36
37 C. Roof Beams: 4" x 6", 4" x 8" and 6" x 10" extruded aluminum channel beams providing
38 structural support and conductance for rain water.
39
40 D. Columns: 6" x 10" extruded aluminum tubular posts 0.125" thick.
41
42 E. Fasteners: Prefinished fasteners, sized for conditions encountered.
43
44 2.3 CONCRETE MIX
45
46 A. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days, ASTM C 94 portland cement concrete.
47
48 2.4 FABRICATION
49
50 A. Refer to Architectural Drawings for details.
51
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 73 26 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Fabricate supports to act as downspouts. Fabricate framing system to drain water from fascia
2 gutter to support columns and provide discharge spouts for designated columns at ground
3 level.
4
5 C. The canopy deck is to have welded end closures at the deck terminations.
6
7 D. Apply protective coating to aluminum in contact with grout.
8
9 2.5 FINISH
10
11 A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Pretreatment, primer, and color coat, of 70-75 percent
12 fluorocarbon (polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF) resin), AAMA 605.2; 1.0 mils thickness
13 minimum; equivalent to Kynar 500/Hylar 5000, custom color as selected by Architect.
14
15 B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA AA-M12C22A31, Class 1, 0.7 mils thick clear
16 anodized; AAMA 607.1.
17
18 C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A 123 to 2.0 oz/sq.ft..
19
20 D. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
21 cementitious or dissimilar materials.
22
23
24 PART 3 EXECUTION
25
26 3.1 PREPARATION
27
28 A. Erect canopy after concrete and masonry work in vicinity is completed and washed down.
29
30 3.2 INSTALLATION
31
32 A. Set posts on 10'-0" maximum centers, in concrete footings. Ensure drainage is constructed
33 so no standing water will be at downspout post bottoms.
34
35 B. Erect walkway cover in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including related
36 flashings, concealed gutters and drains, fasteners, hardware, sealants and material necessary
37 for complete weathertight installation.
38
39 C. Weld beams and columns either into one-piece rigid bents or shop build as mechanical joint.
40 Install structural ties in tops of beams for rigidity and to serve as closures between draining
41 deck sections.
42
43 D. Interlock sections in structural unit with joint fabricated into rigid shape which is self-
44 flashing. Fasten interlocking joints rigidly with fastenings 8" on center. Assemble roof deck
45 on simple spans of 15'-0" or more with camber sufficient to neutralize deflection caused by
46 dead load of material and to provide positive drainage from center of deck. No protruding
47 ribs on underside of deck are permissible.
48
49 E. Form expansion joints with no metal-to-metal contact between deck and beam or clamps.
50
51 F. Fill downspout columns with grout to discharge level to prevent standing water. Vibrate with
52 small rod to fill voids. Install downspout deflectors after grouting.
53
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 73 26 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.3 ADJUSTING
2
3 A. Repair damage or scratches using same paint as factory finish.
4
5 3.4 CLEANING
6
7 A. Wash down exposed surfaces using mild domestic detergent in warm water applied with soft
8 cloths. Remove dirt from corners and interior surfaces.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 90 99 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 10 90 99
2
3 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous specialties work includes furnishing and installing items
11 shop fabricated, job fabricated and manufactured items not part of other sections of these
12 specifications.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Product Data: Submit on each time prior to starting this work and sufficiently early to
17 coordinate with other work. Samples may be submitted in lieu of literature if approved by
18 Architect.
19
20 B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for Architect's review. Completeness of shop
21 drawings shall be sufficient to indicate compliance with Contract Documents and to
22 correlate with other materials. In general, they shall indicate size, material, quantity, finish,
23 attachment methods, connections, weight, performance data, etc., depending on
24 specifications.
25
26 C. Operation Instructions: Provide printed or written instructions for Owner to follow in
27 proper operation of equipment. Instruct and demonstrate proper operation to Owner's
28 representative. Record details of such instructions and file copies with Owner and the
29 Architect for record.
30
31 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
33 A. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers or names may be indicated on
34 drawings or specified for convenience in identifying certain miscellaneous specialties items.
35 Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, manufacturer's current
36 catalog description for indicated number, together with indicated or specified in options or
37 accessories, constitutes requirements for each such unit.
38
39 B. Used of catalog numbers, and specific requirements indicated on drawings and in
40 specification, are not intended to preclude use of equivalent products by other acceptable
41 manufacturers, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of design and quality for
42 materials, construction and workmanship.
43
44 C. Certification: submit manufacturer's certificate stating that materials furnished comply
45 with specified requirements. Include supporting certified testing data indicating that
46 material meets specified requirements.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 90 99 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
2
3 A. Deliver materials to protect site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled
4 with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire performance
5 characteristics, and lot number.
6
7 B. Store miscellaneous blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping, in original
8 undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather,
9 moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
10
11 C. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery,
12 storage, and handling requirements.
13
14 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
15
16 A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
17 fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for
18 adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking of field measurements before
19 fabrication might delay work.
20
21 B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for
22 installation of miscellaneous specialties and related work; coordinate delivery with other
23 work to avoid delay.
24
25 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
26
27 A. Sequence delivery and installation of miscellaneous specialties items until construction is
28 ready for their installation to minimize possibility of damage.
29
30
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
33 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
34
35 A. Manufacturer(s) listed herein are included for convenience of Contractor in establishing
36 quality, performance, function, and aesthetic appearance acceptable to Architect.
37
38 B. Other manufacturers approved by Architect may be used whose qualities meet or exceed
39 specified manufacturer.
40
41 1.1 VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT
42
43 A. Material: 16 gage galvanized steel panels beige electrostatic powder coat paint; vacuumed
44 formed plastics.
45
46 B. Description:
47 1. 750 lb load capacity and 330 lb seat capacity, 20 feet per minute travel speed, 7’ floor to
48 floor plus 3” pit lifting height, platform size 36"wide x 48” x 42-1/8" high walls, Type 1L
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 90 99 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 Exit/Entry same side; flush mount 36” wide fire rated steel door at both landings with
2 self-closer.
3 2. Operation and Controls: Electronic free relay logic controller; 24 VDC operation,
4 call/send stations at landings, continuous pressure type buttons, operating control
5 buttons on platform, automatic battery recharging system (115 VAC), remote manual
6 lowering device, low-voltage controls, lit switches, handrail, non-skid platform surface, no
7 machine room required, emergency stop button/alarm. Chain hydraulic drive system
8 3. Safety Features: Platform gate, safety underpan, door locks, safety brake, emergency stop
9 buttons, manual lowering and battery lowering system.
10 4. Tower: Modular 8’ base guide rail assembly. Roller guide support.
11 5. Battery Backup for Emergency Back-UP to meet TDLR guidelines.
12 6. Acceptable Product: Savaria V1504 Type 1L
13
14 C. Work Provided by Others:
15 1. 120-volt single-phase 15 amp power source at lower landing
16 2. Visible, lockable, inline, disconnect
17 3. Plug above each door header for power door openers on Stage lift
18 4. 3” recessed pit
19 5. Telephone line to controller
20 6. All local, state, and federal permits, variances and inspections
21 7.Provide enclosure and supports around lift and doors as per shop drawings by
22 manufacturer
23 8.Emergency lighting in shaft way
24
25
26 PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
28 3.1 EXAMINATION
29
30 A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the substrate conditions under which units of
31 miscellaneous specialties and equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing
32 of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not
33 proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
34 acceptable to installer.
35
36 3.2 PREPARATION
37
38 A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other Sections to
39 obtain proper installation of items. Contractor shall acquaint himself with work of other
40 Sections whose work abuts, adjoins, or is affected by or related to work under this Section.
41
42 3.3 INSTALLATION
43
44 A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using concealed fasteners
45 appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of units. Install units plumb and
46 level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
47
48
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 10 90 99 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
2
3 A. Test and Examinations: After installation, equipment shall be examined and sufficiently
4 tested under operating conditions to determine that the unit has been installed correctly
5 and will function properly. If inspection shows defects, such defects shall be corrected,
6 defective material replaced, and inspection repeated. Such repairs shall be made with new
7 material at no additional expense to the Owner.
8
9 3.5 CLEANING
10
11 A. At completion of installation clean and polish all exposed surface and units in strict
12 accordance with manufacturer's instructions after removing temporary labels and
13 protective coating.
14
15 3.6 PROTECTION
16
17 A. Protect installed units from damage and soiling until acceptance by Owner.
18
19
20 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 11 30 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
SECTION 11 30 00 1
2
APPLIANCES 3
4
5
PART 1 GENERAL 6
7
1.1 SUMMARY 8
9
A. Section Includes: Refrigerator, cooktop, hood, microwave oven, waste disposer, dishwasher, 10
ice maker, and trash compactor. 11
12
1.2 SUBMITTALS 13
14
A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature, rough-in requirements, installation instructions 15
and maintenance instructions for each type of appliance accepted. 16
17
B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 18
1. Product Data: For indicated products, indicating compliance with requirements for 19
ENERGY STAR product labeling. 20
21
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22
23
A. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy cost analysis 24
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC 25
Appliance Labeling Rule. 26
1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling 27
program. 28
29
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING 30
31
A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after 32
Utility rough-in are complete and construction is substantially complete and ready of 33
installation. 34
35
1.5 WARRANTY 36
37
A. Refrigerator: Submit manufacturer's written five year parts and labor warranty. 38
39
B. Ice Maker: 40
1. Compressor and Condenser: Five years. 41
2. All Other Parts and Labor: Three years. 42
43
C. Dishwasher: 44
1. Motor and Pump: Five years. 45
2. Stainless Steel Components: Ten years against rust. 46
47
48
49
18 September 2018 11 30 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 3
4
A. Acceptable Appliance Manufacturers: 5
1. General Electric. 6
2. Sub-Zero. 7
3. KitchenAid. 8
4. Thermador/Waste King. 9
5. Scotsman Consumer Products. 10
6. Hot Point. 11
12
B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00. 13
14
2.2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER 15
16
A. Type: 16.5 cu. ft. refrigerator with freezer on top, 28" wide. 17
18
B. Color: Stainless steel. 19
20
C. Acceptable Product: Frigidaire FFHT1621QS. 21
22
2.3 ICE MAKER 23
24
A. Type: Undercounter, produces 39 lbs. of ice cubes in 24 hour period, capacity bin stores 35 25
lbs of ice 26
27
B. Door Front: Glass Door with white interior. 28
29
C. Unit Dimensions: 33-3/4" high x 14-7/8" wide x 25-9/16" deep. 30
31
D. Acceptable Product: Model ML15CL by Marvel. 32
33
2.4 ICE STORAGE BIN 34
35
A. Type: Slope Front; rear bin drain; polyethylene bin liner insulated foam; 6” legs. 36
37
B. Capacity: 242 lbs. of medium size ice cubes 38
39
C. Exterior Finish: Aluminum finish. 40
41
D. Acceptable Product: B25PP by Ice O Matic Storage. 42
43
44
PART 3 EXECUTION 45
46
3.1 INSTALLATION 47
48
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions. 49
50
B. Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify 51
that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely 52
18 September 2018 11 30 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01
concealed. 1
2
3.2 ADJUSTING 3
4
A. Test each item of equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustment. 5
6
3.3 CLEANING 7
8
A. Remove packing material from equipment items and leave units in clean condition, ready for 9
operation. 10
11
12
END OF SECTION 13
14
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
SECTION 11 61 13 1
2
CONCERT ENCLOSURE SYSTEM 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8
9
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 10
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11
12
B. Structural steel. 13
14
C. Painting and finishing. 15
16
D. Acoustic reflector panels. 17
18
E. Theatrical lighting system (“E” series drawings, “TL” series drawings and Section 11 61 19
63). 20
21
F. Theatrical rigging system (“TR” series drawings and Section 11 61 33). 22
23
G. Theatre Orchestra Shell system (“TO” series drawings). 24
25
1.2 DEFINITIONS 26
27
A. The term "Contractor" shall mean the contracting entity, also referred to herein as 28
Orchestra Shell Contractor or Manufacturer, responsible for the fabrication, assembly, 29
installation, testing, instruction and completion of all work as covered in these 30
Specifications and related Drawings. 31
32
B. The terms "General Contractor" is used herein to refer to organizations, individuals, 33
and their representatives as typically defined for construction projects. These terms 34
refer to parties other than the Rigging Contractor ("Contractor"). 35
36
C. Technical terms unique to stage rigging and related work shall be construed in the 37
following order, in accordance with: 38
1. Captions on related Drawings. 39
2. Relevant usage and definitions of handbooks, guidebooks, or trade group 40
recommendations by manufacturers' associations or professional and engineering 41
societies, such as ASTM, ASME, ASHRAE, etc. 42
3. Generally recognized theatrical usage 43
44
1.3 SCOPE 45
46
A. All materials, components, and services necessary to provide a complete system 47
indicated in this Section, as specified herein and shown on related Drawings, including: 48
1. Preparation and submission of complete shop drawings and samples for review 49
prior to fabrication. 50
2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site prior to fabrication. 51
3. Shipment of equipment to job site and the secured storage of all non-fixed 52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
equipment. 1
4. Installation and completion, in accordance with these Specifications, related 2
Drawings, the Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations, established trade 3
criteria, and all applicable code requirements. 4
5. The inspection, demonstration, and necessary adjustment of the completed 5
installation by the Contractor's engineering personnel. 6
6. Preparation and submission of complete record drawings and operational and 7
maintenance data and certificates. 8
9
B. WORK INCLUDED 10
1. Furnish and install a complete orchestra shell, as indicated on the drawings 11
and as specified herein. 12
2. Concert enclosure lighting 13
3. The above is for reference only and is not intended to define the limits of the work 14
for a complete installation. 15
16
C. WORK NOT INCLUDED 17
1. Rigging to support the orchestra shell ceiling. 18
2. Electrical work other than that affixed to the enclosure. 19
3. The above is for reference only and is not intended to define the limits of the work 20
for a complete installation. 21
22
1.4 SUBMITTALS 23
24
A. Submit following with bid: 25
1. Proof that the firm has been continuously engaged in the fabrication and 26
installation of orchestra shells for professional theatres during the past five (5) 27
consecutive years. 28
2. A list of at least three (3) professional theatre orchestra shell installations by the 29
bidder comparable to this project in size and scope. 30
3. A list of any proposed deviations or exceptions from the Specifications. Any 31
deviations or exceptions from the Specification proposed after bid shall not be 32
accepted. 33
4. A schedule for the anticipated completion of the following: 34
1. Shop drawings 35
2. Delivery of all equipment 36
5. Installation of all systems 37
38
B. Submit following within 30 days: 39
1. The Contractor shall submit at least three sets of shop drawings to the Architect 40
for review prior to fabrication: 41
a. Plan and section in scale equal to 1/4" = 1'-0". 42
b. Elevation of each different ceiling section. 43
c. Weights of each ceiling panel including lighting and cables to be supplied by 44
the Contractor. 45
d. Complete, fully dimensioned shop drawings of all major components. 46
e. Requisite plans, sections, schematics and details indicating assembly and 47
installation 48
of components. 49
f. Photometric verification (2 foot grid for entire enclosure area) shall be 50
included in full shop drawing submittal. 51
2. The Contractor shall submit at least three sets of product data documents to the 52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
Architect for review prior to fabrication: 1
a. Complete descriptions, including manufacturer and model number, of all 2
electrical components. 3
b. Quantities of each component and sub-assembly. 4
c. Indication by boxed caption of any and all variations from the contract 5
Drawings and Specifications, whether or not these variations have been 6
formally or informally accepted by the Theatre Consultant. 7
d. Prepare all shop drawings under the supervision of professional structural 8
engineer so licensed by the state in which the work will be installed. All shop 9
drawings shall be stamped and certified by said engineers. Structural 10
Engineer's review shall include, but not be limited to, all elements related to 11
overhead lifting and structural support of overhead suspended elements, and 12
ground-supported towers. 13
14
C. LEED Submittals: Credit EQ 4.4: Manufacturer’s certificate indicating that composite 15
wood products and adhesives used in acoustical shells contain no urea formaldehyde. 16
17
D. Samples. Within 30 days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit to the 18
Architect’s Consultant for review prior to fabrication: 19
1. One complete (triple) caster assembly. 20
2. One sample of face material and finish, minimum 24" by 24", showing 21
construction and fasteners. 22
3. Samples of any equipment component requested by the Architect’s Consultant. 23
4. Samples shall not be considered part of specified quantities but shall be returned. 24
25
E. Final submittal. Within thirty (30) days of final tests, and as a condition for final review, 26
the Contractor shall submit to the Architect: 27
1. Receipts for delivery of all non-installed items, i.e., all items designated, "deliver to 28
Owner." 29
2. Three (3) bound sets to the Architect and one (1) bound set to the Theatre 30
Consultant: 31
a. "As built and approved" drawings and wiring diagrams showing all systems 32
and components as installed, including all field modifications. 33
b. Operation and service manuals, schematics, and parts lists for each unit of 34
equipment installed or provided. 35
c. Flame proofing certificates. 36
3. Certificates of warranty, as set forth below. 37
38
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 39
40
A. All equipment and installation shall be the responsibility of a single contractor who shall 41
own and operate a full-time, staffed shop for the fabrication and assembly of stage 42
equipment. This Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the design, 43
fabrication, transportation, and installation of the work in this Section, and shall hold 44
the Owner, Architect, Theatre Consultant, and all their Employees and Consultants 45
harmless for any costs for errors or omissions associated with the work of this Section 46
and any action arising there from. 47
48
B. Approved contractors may, at their option, arrange for sub-contract field and special 49
shop work to be done by others. Bid submissions must identify such subcontractors 50
and indicate the work they are to do. 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
C. The Contractor shall have at least ten (10) years' experience in the installation of similar 1
equipment and systems for professional theatres. If requested, the Contractor shall 2
submit a representative list of professional theatre installations during the above period. 3
4
D. For purposes of establishing the quality and performance desired, the following 5
companies are approved as manufacturers for the herein specified equipment: 6
1. Wenger Corporation, Owatonna, MN 7
2. Stage Right, Claire, MI 8
3. Staging Concepts, Minneapolis, MN 9
10
E. Subject to the above requirements, work performed under this Section may be by one 11
of the following listed contractors: 12
1. Wenger Corporation, Owatonna, MN 13
2. Stage Right, Claire, MI 14
3. Staging Concepts, Minneapolis, MN 15
16
F. Approval indicates approval of the manufacturer only and not approval of specific 17
products. The Contractor shall be required to provide equipment that will meet or 18
exceed the intent of these specifications. 19
20
1.6 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION 21
22
A. Upon completion of all installation work, the Contractor shall certify in writing to the 23
Architect that the work is complete and ready for final inspection. Final inspection 24
shall be scheduled by the Owner, the Architect, and the Theatre Consultant within 25
fourteen (14) days following the Contractor's notice of completion. 26
27
B. Costs of additional or repeat tests due to delay, lateness, or negligence on the part of the 28
Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor. These costs include the Theatre 29
Consultant at their current hourly rates and the direct expenses of the Theatre 30
Consultant resulting from this delay, lateness, or negligence. 31
32
C. Final inspection shall be conducted by a knowledgeable representative of the 33
Contractor, in the presence of the Owner, the Architect, and the Architect’s Consultant, 34
and shall include the following: 35
1. Operation of all components. 36
2. Visual examination of all components. 37
3. Necessary adjustments or modifications shall be made as required. 38
39
D. Contractor's representative shall instruct Owner's designated staff or representatives in 40
the safe operation and maintenance of all items, including the storage and cleaning of all 41
fabrics. This instruction session shall be scheduled to last a minimum of four (4) hours. 42
While it may be possible to schedule this instruction session to coincide with the system 43
checkout, such coincidence shall not be assumed. 44
45
1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 46
47
A. Orchestra Shell will consist of two (2) ceiling section and eight (8) side towers, 48
per the Drawings. 49
50
B. Field-verify all sizes, measurements and finishes prior to fabrication. 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
C. This work shall comply with local codes NEC and all other applicable recognized 1
standards. All electrical components shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing 2
Laboratory (NTRL) and carry all pertinent listing labels. 3
4
D. All equipment shall be fully insured against loss or damage during shipment, job site 5
storage, installation, and testing. The Contractor shall have and assume full 6
responsibility for the safety of every unit of equipment, components, wiring, and plans 7
during delivery, installation, and testing. Certification of such coverage shall be 8
furnished to the Architect within 30 days of award of contract. 9
10
E. General Conditions of the project contract, work schedules, and site regulations apply 11
to this work. 12
13
1.8 WARRANTY 14
15
A. The Contractor shall unconditionally warrant all equipment and systems provided under 16
this Section to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at 17
least twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of all work of this Section. 18
19
B. All repairs and service during the warranty period shall be performed at the job site; 20
labor, materials, and transportation of replacement material and parts and service 21
personnel to and from the job site shall be included hereunder at the Contractor's 22
expense. 23
24
C. Appropriate additional equipment to replace equipment or devices for repair, service, or 25
cleaning shall be provided at the job site at no expense to the Owner to replace any and 26
all equipment that must be removed for repair or service. 27
28
D. Warranty service shall be performed by personnel in the employ of the Contractor and 29
shall not be sub-contracted or assigned to another company, service, or individual 30
unless the Owner has approved such assignment in writing, in which event the 31
Contractor shall nevertheless be responsible to the Owner for such work. 32
33
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 35
36
2.1 GENERAL 37
38
A. Acoustical shell ceiling shall be adjustable ceiling panels supported by integral structure 39
and suspended from stage rigging. It shall store in fly loft in vertical-tilt position. 40
41
B. Mobile towers shall be free-standing, self-supporting towers for back and side 42
walls. Counterweight tower base with adjustable leveling pads. Wing panel 43
doors as indicated on drawings. 44
45
C. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer. 46
47
D. Finish Paint: All metal components shall be Manufacturer's standard or Matte Black. 48
Special marking colors same type, colors as specified. Special finishes as specified by 49
Architect. 50
51
E. Panel Finish: Wood Veneer, Verify finish with Architect. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
F. Cable Fittings and Clips: Galvanized or cadmium plated, conforming to cable 2
Manufacturer's recommendations as to size, number and method of installation. 3
4
G. Metal Theatrical-Type Fittings and Hardware: First quality of machined, bent, or 5
dropped forged fabrication and selected for use per hardware Manufacturer's 6
recommendations and specifications. Provide as required. 7
8
H. Incidental Hardware: Provide all bolts, nuts, lock washers, washers, fittings, anchors, 9
supports, hinges and other items required for complete installation and operational 10
safety. Exposed items shall be plated or painted, as required. 11
12
2.2 HARDWARE AND FASTENERS 13
14
A. Provide bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, fittings, anchors, guides, supports, bearing 15
plates, fastenings, catches and other items required for complete assembly and 16
installation, and for operational safety. All visible hardware and fasteners subject to 17
review by the Architect/Engineer. 18
19
B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: 20
1. Cadmium plated, black Parkerized or gun-metal blued finished. 21
2. Nuts and bolts generally secured with lock washers and cement (e.g. Lok-Tite). 22
3. Ceiling unit assembly bolts shall have lock washers only; no cement. 23
24
C. Screws: 25
1. Sheet metal type, for attachment to wood or thin metal. 26
2. Self-tap, for attachment to heavier metal, as required. 27
3. Coarse-thread machine screws for attachment to tapped metal where indicated by 28
drawings. 29
4. Aluminum screws for attachment to ceiling light panel framing. 30
5. Steel screw finishes as for bolts, Aluminum natural finish. 31
32
D. Nails for Assembly of Wood Components 33
1. Annular ring nails for assembly of frames and for non-face nailing 34
2. Coated, small-head ("finishing") nails for attachment of face panels to frames and 35
for attachment of trim members. 36
37
E. Flat head wood screws or bolts for flooring. 38
39
F. Hinges: plated; exposed surfaces painted to match face finish. 40
41
G. Bearing plates and bolt plates: bright steel, paint to match face finish if exposed. 42
43
H. Latches, catches and other fastening devices: cadmium or brass plated. 44
45
I. All other hardware and fittings: plated or painted. 46
47
2.3 METAL FRAMING AND COMPONENTS 48
49
A. Steel tubing: hot formed, welded and seamless. 50
51
B. Rolled steel sections and plates: hot-rolled, open hearth. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 7 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
C. Bar-size steel sections: hot-rolled, open hearth. 2
3
D. Aluminum sections: Alloy 6063-T5 sharp-cornered, extruded architectural shapes, mill 4
finish. 5
6
E. Round and smooth all sharp edges and corners of tower bases and support frames. 7
8
2.4 TOWER AND CEILING PANEL FACES 9
10
A. Field panels shall be panels with minimum 1" thick 3/8" cell cellulose honeycomb core 11
material bonded to 1/4" hardboard skins with a waterproof urethane adhesive. Wood 12
veneer finish front and high pressure laminate backer sheet on back for balance shall be 13
bonded to 1/4" hardboard skins. Appearance shall match acoustic reflectors in the 14
theatre. There shall be no exposed fasteners. Edges shall be framed with: (a) aluminum 15
extrusion and capped with vinyl extrusion OR (b) a milled, clear hardwood edge, stained 16
per Architect’s color selection. 17
18
B. Refer to drawings for shape. 19
20
2.5 DOORS 21
22
A. Fabricate hinged door panels of same materials as bowed field panels. 23
24
B. Provide push plate on front, pull handle on rear. 25
26
C. Provide a mechanical means to hold open and to hold closed on rear of panel. 27
28
2.6 CASTERS 29
30
A. Zero-throw casters with 3 swivel casters mounted to a swiveling plate, minimum 31
3 units per tower. Each tire shall be minimum 3" diameter polyurethane wheel 32
with minimum 2" wide tread (face). Each swivel caster of the zero-throw 33
assembly shall be rated for minimum 1,000 lbs capacity. Verify with final 34
weights of towers. 35
36
B. Neoprene sealed head and wheel bearings. Lubrication by leak-resistant 37
pressure-type grease fittings. 38
39
2.7 LIGHTING AND WIRING 40
41
A. Orchestra enclosure Manufacturer shall provide and install lighting fixtures in the 42
orchestra shell with wiring and connectors as shown in the drawings and as specified 43
herein. 44
45
B. LED lighting fixture shall provide 100fc average maintained on floor. Ave/Min = 2, 46
Max/Min = 3. 47
48
C. Fixtures shall be gimbal mounted to accommodate different ceiling pitch angles. 49
50
D. Fixtures shall be 3500K color temp LED with DMX drivers that dim smoothly to less 51
than 1.0% light output. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 8 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
E. Fixtures shall be convection cooled with no moving parts. 2
3
F. Light source shall be regressed into fixture such that a 45-degree cutoff to the light 4
source is maintained when fixture is aimed straight down. 5
6
G. Fixtures and arrangement of fixtures shall provide beam overlap 7’above stage floor. 7
8
H. Fixture shall have L70 life of 50,000 hours min. 9
10
I. Color consistency from fixture to fixture be plus or minus 50K throughout light source 11
life. 12
13
J. Fixture shall have a min.5 year comprehensive warranty. 14
15
K. Each ceiling panel shall include a mercury or similar switch(es) to disconnect all lighting 16
circuits in stored position. Light fixtures shall be LED with one of the spread lens. 17
Select appropriate lenses to achieve the maximum but uniform light distribution and 18
prevent light scalloping on tower walls. Provide to Owner the remaining lens sets 19
provided with fixtures. The fixture shall be listed by a NRTL for use as a stage lighting 20
fixture. 21
22
L. Each ceiling panel (as shown on drawings) shall be equipped with SO cables of 23
sufficient length and conductors to reach the junction box mounted on the edge of the 24
ceiling plus 10 feet. Each SO cable shall be provided with a Kellem’s Grip wire mesh 25
strain relief. Circuits will terminate within the junction box on the ceiling panel. 26
27
2.8 FINISHES 28
29
A. Finishes for surfaces visible to the audience shall be selected by the Architect from 30
wood veneer manufacturer's standard colors. Finishes for exposed edge framing shall 31
be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 32
33
34
PART 3 - INSTALLATION 35
36
3.1 FABRICATION 37
38
A. Fabricate and install all items in conformity with applicable trade practices and 39
manufacturer's recommendations, unless specifically excepted by specifications or 40
drawings. 41
42
B. Carry out shop and field welding in full conformity with applicable AISC and ASA 43
standards for full strength welds. Use electric welding where possible. Clean all welds 44
of flux, slag and spatter before painting. Wire brush or grind if necessary. 45
46
C. Finish all hand-touchable and people-level items smoothly without sharp corners or 47
edges 48
49
D. Fit all items with proper allowances for stretch and shrinkage, or expansion and 50
contraction. All edges, corners and joints shall be true or properly aligned. 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 9 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
E. Install all shop and field assemblies in strict alignment, with adequate clearances and 1
adjustment provisions. 2
3
F. Fabricate and install all operating equipment for lowest possible operating noise levels 4
in performance use. 5
6
G. Comply with codes and regulations as listed in Division 01 and with AISC, NEC and 7
ASA standards as applicable. 8
9
H. Comply with federal, state and local labor regulations and applicable requirements. 10
11
I. Equipment must have pertinent certificates, labels from a NRTL, and any required 12
union labels. 13
14
J. Machine finish all operating parts to standard trade tolerances, fits and finishes, unless 15
otherwise specified. Smooth all edges adjacent to line and cable ways. 16
17
K. Thoroughly clean all fabricated steel work, including equipment, supports and framing. 18
Apply primer and at least one coat of finish paint. Where necessary for full coverage, 19
paint before assembly. Retouch as necessary. 20
21
3.2 INSTALLATION 22
23
A. Position all items accurately as indicated on drawings, and true to plumb line and level. 24
25
B. Do all required cutting, drilling, tapping and welding necessary to properly install work. 26
Obtain Architect/Engineer’s prior approval for cutting and drilling of structural work. 27
28
C. Use only qualified riggers for installation and for trimming and adjustment. 29
30
D. Consult and coordinate work with trades doing adjoining work. 31
32
E. Clean and retouch all field welds and abraded paintwork with matching primers and 33
finishes. 34
35
F. Check all operating elements for noise, clearances and smoothness of operation. Adjust 36
if required. 37
38
G. Focus lighting fixtures and adjust mercury switches for appropriate operation. 39
40
H. Assist Section 11 61 33 with setting of ceiling position presets at the completion of 41
acoustic tuning. 42
43
I. Verify completed installation, ready for satisfactory operation prior to tests and 44
inspection. Advise the Architect/Engineer in writing that the installation is completed 45
and ready for acceptance tests and inspection. 46
47
3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 48
49
A. Tests and inspections during progress of the work, and for final approval, may include 50
any of the following and/or such other tests, inspections and operations as the Owner, 51
18 September 2018 11 61 13 - 10 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
Architect/Engineer, or their representatives and Consultants, or local authorities having 1
jurisdiction may find necessary. 2
3
B. Visual examination, uncovering and disassembly of components. 4
5
C. Upon completion of all work, the Manufacturer shall certify in writing that work is 6
complete and ready for inspection for substantial completion. Inspection shall be 7
scheduled by the Owner and Architect/Engineer at their convenience and that of their 8
representatives, within a period of 14 days following receipt of such notification. 9
10
D. In the presence of the Architect’s Consultant, completely set-up system and mark tower 11
positions on floor at completion of acoustic tuning. Markings shall be fixed, be flush, 12
and not disturb the finish of the stage floor. 13
14
E. Following Substantial Completion, the Manufacturer shall make any adjustments or 15
modifications necessary from the punch list to bring the work into conformance with 16
established contract requirements, and, shall then certify that the work is ready for final 17
inspections which shall be done within 14 days of receipt of notice. 18
19
F. Should deficiencies due to faulty equipment or installation require re-inspection after 20
final inspection, all expenses of such re-inspection, including time and travel of the 21
Architects or Architect’s Consultants shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer 22
without cost to the Owner. 23
24
3.4 TRAINING 25
26
A. The Manufacturer's supervisor shall instruct designated Owner’s representatives and/or 27
facility operating staff in the safe operation, servicing, care, and maintenance of all 28
items. Minimum one 4-hour session for designated representatives. 29
30
B. The Architect and their Consultants and other representatives may be present or 31
represented. 32
33
C. Instruction shall be scheduled in conformance with test and instruction schedules, and 34
availability of Owner, staff, Architect, Architect’s Consultant, and their representatives. 35
36
D. Completion of instruction shall be verified, in writing, with the signature of an 37
authorized Owner’s Representative within 5 business days of completion. Copies will 38
be given to the Owner, the General Contractor, the Architect and the Consultant, and 39
included in the Maintenance and Operations manuals. 40
41
42
END OF SECTION 43
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
SECTION 11 61 23 1
PORTABLE PLATFORM SYSTEM 2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL 4
5
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6
7
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 8
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 9
10
B. Drawings “TP”. 11
12
C. Division 3 - Concrete. 13
14
D. Division 9 - Painting and finishing. 15
16
E. Architectural drawings. 17
18
1.2 DEFINITIONS 19
20
A. The term "Contractor" shall mean the contracting entity, also referred to herein as 21
Portable Platform System Contractor or Manufacturer, responsible for the fabrication, 22
assembly, installation, testing, instruction and completion of all work as covered in these 23
Specifications and attached or related Drawings. 24
25
B. The terms "General Contractor" is used herein to refer to organizations, individuals, 26
and their representatives as typically defined for construction projects. These terms 27
refer to parties other than the Portable platform system Contractor ("Contractor"). 28
29
C. Technical terms unique to portable platform systems and related work shall be 30
construed in the following order, in accordance with: 31
1. Captions on related Drawings. 32
2. Relevant usage and definitions of handbooks, guidebooks, or trade group 33
recommendations by manufacturers' associations or professional and engineering 34
societies, such as ASTM, ASME, ASHRAE, etc. 35
3. Generally recognized theatrical usage 36
37
1.3 SCOPE 38
39
A. Portable audience seating platform set. System shall be suitable for all types of 40
performance events requiring portable platform seating. Seating platform system shall 41
be capable of creating the layouts shown in the drawings, consisting of decks, guardrails, 42
and legs of adjustable length. Also includes closure panels and storage carts. The 43
system shall be configurable to other arrangements. 44
45
B. All materials, components, and services necessary to provide a complete system 46
indicated in this Section, as specified herein, including: 47
1. Preparation and submission of complete shop drawings and samples for review 48
prior to fabrication. 49
2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site prior to fabrication. 50
3. Shipment of equipment to job site and the secured storage of all non-fixed 51
equipment. 52
4. Installation and completion, in accordance with these Specifications, and related 53
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
Drawings, the Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations, established trade 1
criteria, and all applicable code requirements. 2
5. The inspection, demonstration, and necessary adjustment of the completed 3
installation by the Contractor's engineering personnel. 4
6. Preparation and submission of complete record drawings and operational and 5
maintenance data and certificates. 6
7
1.4 SUBMITTALS 8
9
A. Submit following with bid: 10
1. Proof that the firm has been continuously engaged in the fabrication and 11
installation of portable platform systems for performance venues during the past 12
ten (10) consecutive years. 13
2. A list of at least twenty (20) portable platform systems installed by the bidder 14
comparable to this project in size and scope. 15
3. A list of any proposed deviations or exceptions from the Specifications. Any 16
deviations or exceptions from the Specification proposed after bid shall not be 17
accepted. 18
4. A schedule for the anticipated completion of the following: 19
1. Shop drawings 20
2. Delivery of all equipment 21
3. Installation of all systems 22
23
B. Submit following within 60 days: 24
1. The Contractor shall submit three (3) sets of reproducible shop drawings to the 25
Architect for review prior to fabrication: 26
1. Plan and section in scale equal to 1/4" = 1'-0". 27
2. Elevation of each different platform section. 28
3. Weights of each element. 29
4. Complete, fully dimensioned shop drawings of all major components. 30
5. Requisite plans, sections, schematics, and details indicating assembly and 31
installation of components. 32
2. The Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of product data documents to the 33
Architect for review prior to fabrication: 34
1. Quantities of each component and sub-assembly. 35
2. Indication by boxed caption of any and all variations from the contract 36
Drawings and Specifications, whether or not these variations have been 37
formally or informally accepted by the Theatre Consultant. 38
39
C. Samples. Within sixty (60) days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit to the 40
Architect for review prior to fabrication: 41
1. One sample of each surface material and finish, minimum 24" by 24", showing 42
construction and fasteners. 43
2. Samples of any equipment component requested by the Theatre Consultant. 44
3. Samples shall not be considered part of specified quantities. 45
46
D. Final submittal. Within thirty (30) days of final tests, and as a condition for final review, 47
the Contractor shall submit to the Architect: 48
1. Receipts for delivery of all non-installed items, i.e., all items designated, "deliver to 49
Owner." 50
2. Three (3) bound sets to the Architect and one (1) bound set to the Theatre 51
Consultant: 52
1. "As built and approved" drawings showing all systems and components as 53
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
installed, including all field modifications. 1
2. Operation and service manuals, schematics, and parts lists for each unit of 2
equipment installed or provided. 3
3. Flame proofing certificates. 4
4. Certificates of warranty, as set forth below. 5
6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7
8
A. All equipment and installation shall be the responsibility of a single contractor who shall 9
own and operate a full-time, staffed shop for the fabrication and assembly of stage 10
equipment. This Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the design, 11
fabrication, transportation, and installation of the work in this Section, and shall hold 12
the Owner, Architect, Theatre Consultant, and all their Employees and Consultants 13
harmless for any costs for errors or omissions associated with the work of this Section 14
and any action arising there from. 15
16
B. Approved contractors may, at their option, arrange for sub-contract field and special 17
shop work to be done by others. Bid submissions must identify such subcontractors 18
and indicate the work they are to do. 19
20
C. The Contractor shall have at least ten (10) years' experience in the installation of similar 21
equipment and systems for professional theatres. If requested, the Contractor shall 22
submit a representative list of professional theatre installations during the above period. 23
24
D. Approved manufacturers include: Wenger Corporation, StageRight Corporation, and 25
Staging Concepts. 26
27
1.6 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION 28
29
A. Upon completion of all installation work, the Contractor shall certify in writing to the 30
Architect that the work is complete and ready for final inspection. Final inspection 31
shall be scheduled by the Owner, the Architect, and the Theatre Consultant within 32
fourteen (14) days following the Contractor's notice of completion. 33
34
B. Costs of additional or repeat tests due to delay, lateness, or negligence on the part of the 35
Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor. These costs include the Theatre 36
Consultant at their current hourly rates and the direct expenses of the Theatre 37
Consultant resulting from this delay, lateness, or negligence. 38
39
C. Final inspection shall be conducted by a knowledgeable representative of the 40
Contractor, in the presence of the Owner, the Architect, and the Theatre Consultant, 41
and shall include the following: 42
1. Operation of all components. 43
2. Visual examination of all components. 44
3. Necessary adjustments or modifications shall be made as required. 45
46
D. Contractor's representative shall instruct Owner's designated staff or representatives in 47
the safe operation and maintenance of all items, including the storage and cleaning of all 48
surfaces. This instruction session shall be scheduled to last a minimum of six (6) hours. 49
While it may be possible to schedule this instruction session to coincide with the system 50
checkout, such coincidence shall not be assumed. 51
52
1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 53
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
1
A. General Conditions of the project contract, work schedules, and site regulations apply 2
to this work. 3
4
B. This work shall comply with local, state and federal codes. 5
6
C. All equipment shall be fully insured against loss or damage during shipment, job site 7
storage, installation, and testing. The Contractor shall have and assume full 8
responsibility for the safety of every unit of equipment, components and plans during 9
delivery, installation, and testing. Certification of such coverage shall be furnished to 10
the Architect within 30 days of award of contract. 11
12
1.8 WARRANTY 13
14
A. The Contractor shall unconditionally warrant all equipment and systems provided under 15
this Section to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at 16
least twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of all work of this Section. 17
18
B. All repairs and service during the warranty period shall be performed at the job site; 19
labor, materials, and transportation of replacement material and parts and service 20
personnel to and from the job site shall be included hereunder at the Contractor's 21
expense. 22
23
C. Appropriate additional equipment to replace equipment or devices for repair, service, or 24
cleaning shall be provided at the job site at no expense to the Owner to replace any and 25
all equipment, which must be removed for repair or service. 26
27
D. Warranty service shall be performed by personnel in the employ of the Contractor and 28
shall not be sub-contracted or assigned to another company, service, or individual 29
unless the Owner has approved such assignment in writing, in which event the 30
Contractor shall nevertheless be responsible to the Owner for such work. 31
32
33
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34
35
2.1 GENERAL 36
37
A. Finish: All metal components shall be Manufacturer's standard or Matte Black. Special 38
marking colors same type, colors as specified by Owner/Architect. Special finishes as 39
specified by Owner/Architect. 40
41
B. Incidental Hardware: Provide all bolts, nuts, lock washers, washers, fittings, anchors, 42
supports, hinges and other items required for complete installation and operational 43
safety. Exposed items shall be plated or painted, as required. 44
45
C. All parts shall be included so as to set-up configurations shown in drawings. 46
47
48
2.2 AUDIENCE SEATING PLATFORMING 49
50
A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 51
1. Design Requirements: Portable interlocking platform system to create a variety of 52
tiered seating configurations. Guardrails, step units, and chair rails shall be 53
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
included for a complete system. 1
2. Performance Requirements: Installed platform system shall be capable of 2
supporting a uniform vertical load of 125 pounds per square foot while 3
simultaneously withstanding a 3% side load uniformly applied to the platform 4
system along its longest dimension. Under rated load, unit deflection must not 5
exceed L/360 criteria. 6
3. Guardrail Requirements: Guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding a 200 7
lb (90.7 kg) point load applied laterally or vertically and a 50 lb per lineal foot (22.7 8
kg per .3 m) applied laterally or vertically. These loads shall not be superimposed. 9
Testing performed by an independent testing agency with the guardrail attached to 10
the specified staging platform is required to comply with this specification. 11
Furthermore, the guardrails must be able to prevent a sphere measuring 4" from 12
passing through anywhere in the rail. Load tests performed by an independent 13
testing agency must show that the 4" sphere rail is capable of withstanding the 14
same loads as noted above. 15
16
B. DEMOUNTABLE PORTABLE PLATFORM SYSTEM 17
1. Platforms shall be lightweight. No single platform assembly, including legs and 18
bracing, if attached, shall weigh more than 200 pounds. 19
2. Platform system shall consist of lightweight frames or feet that are individually 20
adjustable for leveling. 21
3. Subject to the above requirements, the platform system shall be Wenger 22
"Stagetek”, Staging Concepts SC90, StageRight All Purpose Stage Deck and Z800, 23
or approved equal. 24
4. Decks 25
1. Each deck shall be 3/4" overall, comprised of Group I Douglas fir veneer 26
plywood. Finished surface shall be manufacturer’s standard grey carpet 27
applied to 5/8” plywood. 28
2. Decks shall be nominally 3’ wide. 29
3. Provide angled decks for corner platform configurations as shown on 30
drawings. 31
5. Frame 32
1. Frame shall be constructed of structural aluminum with a natural finish. The 33
extrusion shall be a box design for maximum strength and rigidity, with 34
special grooves to protect the top surface edge, connect adjacent platforms, 35
and to attach all accessories. The overall thickness of the frame shall be 3" - 36
4". 37
2. Stage units shall be capable of being connected to each other on any side or 38
end to allow for unlimited stage assembly configurations through the use of 39
the unit-to-unit connectors. Connectors shall be designed to be inserted into 40
the special grooves and to be located at any position at the end of any frame 41
rail on the stage unit. 42
6. Single Height Legs 43
1. Deck units shall be provided with four or six leg sockets to accept detachable 44
legs. 45
2. Leg sockets shall be designed with a single action, friction lever for locking 46
legs into the sockets. Leg sockets shall be permanently attached to the 47
platform frames. 48
3. The legs shall be fabricated from structural aluminum tubes in lengths to 49
provide platform heights. 50
4. Each leg shall be provided with a plastic or rubber cap to protect existing 51
flooring and shall be equipped with a screw-type adjustable foot to allow for 52
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
fine adjustments. 1
5. The legs shall be a natural aluminum finish. 2
6. Provide quantity and height of legs to complete audience configurations in 3
drawings. 4
7. Telescoping Legs 5
1. Adjustable height leg assembly with 2-4" height increments shall be comprised 6
of an outer tube, a telescoping inner tube, a major adjustment pin, and a 7
round foot assembly with threaded adjustment to allow infinite height options 8
through the entire advertised range. The outer tube shall be tempered 9
aluminum with integral nylon bearing for smooth operation and minimum 10
side play; the inner tube shall be tempered aluminum; major adjustment pin 11
shall be plated steel with pull ring and spring-ball detent for security; 12
2. Feet shall have resilient rubber pad to prevent damage to the floor with up to 13
4" of fine leveling adjustment. 14
8. Guardrail 15
1. Guardrails shall conform to the loading requirements set forth in 2.3A. 16
Failure to provide independent test reports upon request shall be considered 17
not in compliance with this specification. 18
2. The guardrail shall clamp to the platform. Guardrail systems that require 19
bolting to the platform shall not be acceptable. 20
3. Guardrails shall incorporate two cross members, one 42" above the platform 21
surface and the other 26" above the platform surface. Cross members shall be 22
constructed of not higher than 16 gauge steel tubing with an outside diameter 23
to meet handrail requirements. 24
4. A chair stop located 1-5/8" above the platform surface shall be an integral 25
component of the guardrail system. 26
5. Guardrail uprights shall be constructed of not higher than 14 gauge steel 27
tubing. 28
9. Deliver to Black Box Theater. 29
30
2.3 ACCESSORIES 31
32
A. Storage/Transport Carts: 33
1. Provide quantity of transport carts required to store ¼ of all components of the 34
audience seating portable platforming system. 35
2. A push handle shall be provided for each cart. 36
3. Each cart shall have four ball bearing casters with 8" (20 cm) wheels, each rated at 37
900 pounds (408 kg). Two casters shall be swivel and two shall be rigid. 38
4. Maximum floor area for transporting or storing one truck shall be 49-1/2" x 98-39
1/2". 40
41
42
PART 3 - INSTALLATION 43
44
3.1 FABRICATION 45
46
A. Fabricate and install all items in conformity with applicable trade practices and 47
manufacturer's recommendations, unless specifically excepted by specifications or 48
drawings. 49
50
B. Carry out shop and field welding in full conformity with applicable AISC and ASA 51
standards for full strength welds. Use electric welding where possible. Clean all welds 52
of flux, slag and spatter before painting. Wire brush or grind if necessary. 53
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 7 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
1
C. Finish all items smoothly without sharp corners or edges. 2
3
D. Fit all items with proper allowances for stretch and shrinkage, or expansion and 4
contraction. All edges, corners and joints shall be true or properly aligned. 5
6
E. Install all shop and field assemblies in strict alignment, with adequate clearances and 7
adjustment provisions. 8
9
F. Comply with applicable codes and regulations and with AISC, NEC and ASA standards 10
as applicable. 11
12
G. Equipment must have pertinent certificates, Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory 13
(NRTL) labels and any required union labels. 14
15
3.2 INSTALLATION 16
17
A. Position all items accurately as indicated on drawings, and true to plumb line and level. 18
19
B. Do all required cutting, drilling, tapping and welding necessary to properly install work. 20
Obtain Architect/Engineer’s prior approval for cutting and drilling of structural work. 21
22
C. Consult and coordinate work with trades doing adjoining work. 23
24
D. Clean and retouch all surfaces with matching primers and finishes as needed. 25
26
E. Check all elements for noise, clearances and smoothness of operation. Adjust if 27
required. 28
29
F. Verify completed installation, ready for satisfactory operation prior to tests and 30
inspection. Advise the Architect/Engineer in writing that the installation is completed 31
and ready for acceptance tests and inspection. 32
33
3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 34
35
A. Tests and inspections during progress of the work, and for final approval, may include 36
any of the following and/or such other tests, inspections and operations as the Using 37
Agency, or Architect/Engineer, or their representatives, or local authorities having 38
jurisdiction may find necessary 39
1. Visual examination, uncovering and disassembly of components 40
2. Operation of components 41
42
B. Upon completion of all work, the Manufacturer shall certify in writing that work is 43
complete and ready for inspection for substantial completion. Inspection shall be 44
scheduled by the Using Agency and Architect/Engineer at their convenience and that 45
of their representatives, within a period of 5 days following receipt of such notification. 46
47
C. Following Substantial Completion, the Manufacturer shall make any adjustments or 48
modifications necessary from the punch list to bring the work into conformance with 49
established contract requirements, and, shall then certify that the work is ready for final 50
inspections which shall be done within 5 days of receipt of notice. 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 23 - 8 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
D. Should deficiencies due to faulty equipment or installation require re-inspection after 1
final inspection, all expenses of such re-inspection, including time and travel of the 2
Architect/Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer without cost to the 3
Owner 4
5
3.4 STAFF INSTRUCTION 6
7
A. The Manufacturer's supervisor shall instruct designated representatives of the Using 8
Agency in the safe operation, servicing, care, and maintenance of all items, including 9
storage. Minimum one 6-hour session for designated representatives. 10
11
B. The Architect/Engineer and other representatives may be present or represented 12
13
C. Instruction shall be scheduled in conformance with test and instruction schedules, and 14
availability of Using Agency, Architect/Engineer, and their representatives. 15
16
D. Completion of staff instruction shall be verified, in writing, with the signature of an 17
authorized Owner’s Representative within 5 business days of completion. Copies will 18
be given to the Owner, the General Contractor, the Architect and the Consultant. 19
20
21
22
23
END OF SECTION 24
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
SECTION 11 61 33 1
2
STAGE RIGGING AND CURTAIN SYSTEMS 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 8
9
A. For the sake of brevity these specifications omit phrases such as "(Sub)Contractor shall 10
furnish and install,” "unless otherwise indicated or specified,” etc., but these phrases are 11
nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the (Sub)Contractor 12
to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations complete to the 13
satisfaction of the Architect’s Consultant. Exceptions are noted herein or shown on the 14
drawings. 15
16
B. No representative of the Owner shall have power to waive the obligations of this 17
contract for the furnishing of good materials or of performing good work, as herein 18
described, in full accordance with the contract documents. The failure of any 19
representative of the Owner to condemn any defective work or materials shall not 20
release the obligation to at once tear out, remove, and properly replace the same at any 21
time prior to final acceptance upon discovery of said defective work or material. When 22
requested, however, the Owner's representative shall observe and accept or reject any 23
material furnished. In the event the material has been accepted once by the Owner's 24
representative, such acceptance shall be binding on the Owner unless it can be clearly 25
shown that such material does not meet the specifications for this work. 26
27
C. All equipment and installation shall be the responsibility of a single contractor. This 28
Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the engineering, fabrication, 29
transportation, and installation of the work in this Section. 30
31
D. All equipment shall be fabricated, manufactured, and installed in accordance with 32
applicable standards, including: 33
1. Rigging Manual (published by the Construction Safety Association) 34
2. Wire Rope Handbook (published by Wire Rope Corporation of America) 35
3. Wire Rope Users Manual (published by American Iron and Steel Institute) 36
4. National Electric Code (NEC) 37
5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 38
6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 39
7. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 40
8. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 41
9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 42
10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 43
11. Any and all local governmental or other applicable codes. 44
45
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 46
47
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 48
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to work of this section. 49
50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
B. Refer to Contract Drawings TR series for plans, graphic representations, schedules, and 1
notations showing Stage Rigging System work. 2
3
C. Refer to Contract Drawings TVA series for plans, graphic representations, schedules, 4
and notations showing Variable Acoustic Curtain System work. 5
6
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. Work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, 9
transportation, services, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 10
Stage Rigging System, Variable Acoustic Curtains, and other items as herein listed, all as 11
described in these specifications, as illustrated on the drawings, and as directed by the 12
Architect’s Consultant. Any question as to the installation of equipment should be 13
cleared with the Architect’s Consultant prior to installation. Work is comprised of, but 14
not limited to, the following principal items: 15
1. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site, 16
2. Line sets, arbors, wire rope, battens, hardware, chain, blocks, etc., 17
3. Stage curtains, 18
4. Curtain tracks and accessories, 19
5. Motorized hoists and control, 20
6. Wire, conduit, junction boxes and all other electrical components for motorized 21
hoist and control, 22
7. Installation all cords and cables supplying electricity or control signal to any 23
equipment supported by equipment furnished under this Section, including cable 24
saddles. 25
8. Miscellaneous steel for mounting equipment, 26
9. Miscellaneous components and parts herein specified. 27
10. Portable and loose equipment 28
11. Proof of performance testing 29
30
B. Furnish and install complete Stage Rigging System with all necessary apparatus, 31
equipment, wiring, etc., required to insure complete systems in excellent working order 32
as specified herein and on the attached diagrams. 33
34
C. Consistent with the detailed information contained herein and on the drawings, provide 35
functional and complete overall systems. Verify complete parts lists, the accuracy of the 36
type numbers, and the overall suitability of the equipment to produce complete 37
functional systems coordinated and interfaced with related work. 38
39
D. Minor items of equipment needed in order to meet the requirements stated above, even 40
if not specifically mentioned herein or on the drawings, shall be provided in quality 41
equivalent to other conditions on the project with no claim for additional payment. 42
43
E. Coordinate with related work provided under other sections: 44
1. Fire protection systems 45
2. Stage lighting system 46
3. Lighting plugging devices 47
4. Building structure and catwalks 48
5. Smoke vents and roof hatches 49
6. General electrical work 50
7. Orchestra shell 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
8. Ductwork 1
2
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 3
4
A. Coordinate layout and installation of rigging with other adjacent work, including 5
structural, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression elements. 6
7
B. Verify all conditions on job site applicable or pertaining to this work. Coordinate with 8
scheduled work of other trades. Notify Architect’s Consultant in writing of 9
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions prior to commencement of work or correct the 10
same at Contractor's expense. 11
12
C. The drawings show diagrammatically the arbors, sheaves, running lines, controls, etc. 13
So far as possible the drawings show arrangement of equipment that will fit into the 14
spaces available without interference. If conditions exist at the job site that make it 15
impossible to install work as shown, prepare and submit drawings to the Architect’s 16
Consultant for approval showing how the work may be installed, and, on approval, 17
install the work without additional cost to the Owner. 18
19
D. Contractor shall take care not to damage any equipment or to disconnect any wiring 20
other than as required to interface new system. Any contractor-damaged equipment 21
shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 22
Return any systems disturbed during work to found condition. 23
24
E. Deliver materials to the job site such that they will be protected from damage. Store all 25
materials at building site under cover. 26
27
1.5 APPROVED FABRICATORS 28
29
A. The hoists, motors, hardware and related components specified herein shall be 30
fabricated by the following: 31
32
Wenger Corp./J. R. Clancy, Inc., 7041 Interstate Island Road, Syracuse, New York, 33
13209 34
http://www.jrclancy.com/ 35
36
Protech, 3431 N. Bruce St., North Las Vegas, 89030 37
http://www.protechlv.com/ 38
39
Texas Scenic Company, 8053 Potranco Road, San Antonio, Texas, 78251 40
http://www.texasscenic.com/ 41
42
Hall Stage Limited, Unit 4, Cosgrove Way, Luton LU1 1XL, UK 43
http://www.hallstage.com/ 44
45
H & H Specialties, Inc., 2203 Edwards Avenue, South El Monte, California, 91733 46
http://www.hhspecialties.com/ 47
48
Rigging Innovators, 7819 Fortune Drive, San Antonio, TX 78250 49
http://www.rigginginnovators.com/index.html 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
Tiffin Scenic Studios, Inc., 146 Riverside Drive, Tiffin, Ohio 44883 2
http://www.tiffinscenic.com/ 3
4
Electronic Theatre Controls, 3031 Pleasant View Rd, Middleton, WI 53562 5
http://www.etcconnect.com 6
7
B. The draperies and related components specified herein shall be fabricated by the 8
following: 9
10
J B Martin Corporation, 645 5th Avenue, Suite 400, New York, NY 10022 11
http://www.jbmartin.com/ 12
13
KM Fabrics, Inc., Box 7379, Branwood Station, Greenville, SC 29610 14
15
I. Weiss & Sons, 2-07 Borden Avenue, Long Island City, NY 11101 16
http://www.i-weiss.com/ 17
18
Rose Brand,424 W 33rd Street, New York, NY 10001 19
http://www.rosebrand.com/ 20
21
Stage Decoration & Supplies, Inc., 3519 Associate Drive, Greensboro, NC 27405 22
http://www.stagedec.com/ 23
24
Syracuse Scenery & Stage Lighting Co., Inc., 101 Monarch Drive, Liverpool, 25
NY 13088-4514 26
http://www.syracusescenery.com/ 27
28
Texas Scenic Company, 8053 Potronco Road, San Antonio, Texas, 78251 29
http://www.texasscenic.com/ 30
31
Tiffin Scenic Studios, Inc., 146 Riverside Drive, Tiffin, Ohio 44883 32
http://www.tiffinscenic.com/ 33
34
C. The track, track hardware, and related components specified herein shall be fabricated 35
by the following: 36
37
Automatic Devices Company, 2121 South 12th Street, Allentown, PA 18103 38
http://www.automaticdevices.com 39
40
Hall Stage Limited, Unit 4, Cosgrove Way, Luton LU1 1XL, UK 41
http://www.hallstage.com/ 42
43
H & H Specialties, Inc., 2203 Edwards Avenue, South El Monte, CA 91733 44
www.hhspecialties.com 45
46
1.6 RIGGING CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION 47
48
A. Qualified rigging contractors shall have been actively engaged in the sales and 49
installation of theatrical rigging systems and equipment for a minimum of five years. In 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
addition, the qualified contractor shall have completed a minimum of three projects of 1
similar scope and magnitude within the last five years. Contractors not demonstrating 2
this minimum experience at the time of bid submission will not be considered qualified 3
to perform the work specified in this section. 4
5
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS 6
7
A. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, 8
materials, fixtures, form, or type of construction by name, make, or catalog number, 9
such reference shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be 10
construed as limiting competition. The Contractor in such cases, may at his option use 11
any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the 12
judgment of the Architect’s Consultant expressed in writing, is equivalent to that 13
specified. 14
15
B. All materials and equipment specified herein have been determined to provide an 16
overall physical appearance and background of proven operation desired by the Owner, 17
and therefore, to establish a standard of quality required for this project. If equipment 18
or material other than that specified is proposed to be furnished, this Contractor shall 19
be required to furnish the Architect’s Consultant with such samples as he requires, the 20
same to be submitted by the Architect’s Consultant to an independent testing laboratory 21
selected by the Owner for tests to determine the actual equality of the proposed 22
substitute items. All costs and charges incurred by these tests shall be borne by the 23
Contractor. Should such tests prove the substitute materials and equipment equal and 24
acceptable, the Contractor shall be so advised. However, the Owner reserves the right 25
to examine, and where necessary, to have additional tests made by the same 26
independent testing laboratory of the actual equipment delivered to the job site to 27
insure that the delivered equipment is equal in fact to that specified. Should such 28
secondary tests prove the equipment is satisfactory, the Owner will pay the cost for 29
such tests. Otherwise, the Contractor shall pay for the test and shall proceed to remove 30
unacceptable equipment from the job site and to provide that specified. The Architect’s 31
Consultant's decision, based on this test, will be final. 32
33
C. The plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and 34
arrangements as indicated herein. Acceptance of the shop drawing submittal indicates 35
only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality and assumes that the specific 36
requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans and 37
specifications. The Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the Owner, furnish all 38
accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and shall perform all work necessary for proper 39
functioning and to fit his substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated in the 40
specifications. 41
42
D. If a substitute system is selected, the Contractor, at no additional cost, shall provide any 43
changes in architectural, electrical, or structural systems required as a result of the 44
alternate system to the Owner. The decision of the Architect’s Consultant as to the 45
compliance of the proposed system based on the submitted data and demonstrated 46
system shall be final. 47
48
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 1
2
A. Shop drawings and equipment data sheets shall be submitted to the Architect’s 3
Consultant in accordance with the requirements of these specifications within 90 days 4
after award of the contract. Failure to comply with this 90-day requirement shall be 5
cause for disqualification of the Contractor and cancellation of the contract without 6
cost to the Owner on the basis that the Contractor has not demonstrated the ability or 7
intention to comply with the Contract Documents. 8
9
B. Prepare all shop drawings and field changes under the supervision of a professional 10
structural engineer so licensed by the state of the installation. All as-built drawings shall 11
be stamped and certified by said engineer. Structural Engineer's review shall include, 12
but not be limited to, all elements related to overhead lifting, structural support of 13
elements and all suspended elements provided under this section. 14
15
C. Acceptance of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment purchasing or 16
fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner as 17
specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial 18
submittals will be reviewed. Review is for conformance with design intentions only. 19
Review does not relieve contractor of responsibility to verify field conditions; nor does 20
it relieve the contractor of responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations in 21
submittals. 22
23
D. The Contractor assumes responsibility for the accuracy of all dimensions and quantities. 24
25
E. Shop drawings shall be performed at a scale of not less than 1/4" = 1'-0" for plans and 26
sections and 1" = 1'-0" for details. Drawings and catalogs shall be marked to show the 27
name of project, date, Owner, Architect’s Consultant, Contractor and/or manufacturer 28
and supplier. 29
30
F. Drawings: Submit three (3) sets of drawings for review. Drawings shall indicate 31
complete details and dimensions of all work to be performed. Include all equipment 32
types and locations, clearances required, guides, chains, line sets, contractor-fabricated 33
equipment and all other details required to describe work to be performed. Shop 34
drawings shall contain at least the following details: 35
1. Groove details for all sheaves and drums 36
2. Complete rigging schematics with weights of all equipment 37
3. Complete hanging/attachment details 38
4. Complete hardware details 39
5. Weights of all equipment 40
6. Schematic diagrams of all electrical work including motorized hoists 41
7. Manufacturer’s data sheets 42
8. Indication of all variance from contract drawings 43
44
G. Catalog Sheets: Submit two (2) copies of catalog data sheets (8-1/2" x 11"), neatly 45
bound in sets with title page, space for submittal stamps, and tabbed dividers between 46
sections. Additional copies of this set of data sheets are required with as-built drawings. 47
Catalogs shall contain data sheets, in proper order, on all equipment proposed with part 48
or model number clearly indicated. Provide a complete list of proposed equipment with 49
reference to its corresponding specification section/paragraph number or equipment 50
title. Denote all deviations from specified equipment on the list. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 7 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
H. Fabric Samples: Submit a minimum of two (2) sets of samples of all curtain materials 2
with full range of colors and patterns available. 3
4
I. Finished Curtain Samples: Submit two (2) finished samples of each of curtain type. 5
Each sample should be approximately 3' x 3' and consist of all details that will be 6
included in the complete finished curtain less the hanging hardware. The traveler 7
sample may have 4" hems (sample only) with specified fullness and other specified 8
features. All other samples shall have specified hems, webbing, grommets, tie line and 9
pipe pocket. Samples shall include but not limited to: 10
1. Main Curtain and Valance 11
2. Travelers 12
3. Legs/Borders 13
4. Cycloramas 14
5. Scrims 15
6. Heat Stop Borders 16
7. Acoustical Drapes 17
18
J. Grand curtain sample: Provide a sample assembly of venetian grand curtain that is one 19
quarter of the full length of the curtain. Sample shall demonstrate fullness of curtain, 20
spacing of d-rings and spacers, sewing details, and include string for sample operation 21
and travel one quarter of the full travel. 22
23
1.9 RECORDS FOR OWNER 24
25
A. Drawings: Maintain a full record set of drawings on the job to show the actual 26
installation of the work performed. Submit four (4) hard copy sets of drawings and 27
four (4) CDs of electronic copy in PDF format showing 'as installed' work to the 28
Architect’s Consultant for initial review. If 'as installed' documents are rejected, correct 29
and resubmit in the manner specified. 30
31
B. Manuals: At the time of project closeout, submit four (4) sets each of the following 32
manuals to the Architect’s Consultant for review. Manuals (8-1/2" x 11") are to be 33
neatly bound and include title page with the name of the project, date, Owner, 34
Architect’s Consultant, Contractor, Contractor and/or Manufacturer and Supplier. The 35
manuals to be supplied are as follows: 36
1. Operation and Instruction Manual, including: 37
a. Table of contents 38
b. Brief description of the operation of each system, (descriptions shall be 39
written such that new personnel may read the manual and be able to set-up 40
and operate the system). 41
c. Manufacturer's operation instructions for all user-operated equipment. 42
d. Small scale, clear laminated plan(s) showing the location of all equipment. 43
2. Maintenance Data Manual, including: 44
a. Table of contents 45
b. A list of all equipment supplied by this contract with manufacturer's name, 46
model and part number. 47
c. A listing of equipment manufacturer's/supplier's addresses for all equipment 48
covered by this contract. 49
d. All equipment warranties and guarantees including contractor's guarantee. 50
Explain the limits of the warranty, and whom to contact for service, etc. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 8 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
e. Manufacturer's owner and service manuals on all equipment under this 1
contract. 2
f. Replacement parts lists of all major items and equipment indicating specific 3
part ordering numbers. 4
g. Approved shop drawing catalog data sheets. 5
h. All test results required under these specifications. Videos shall be submitted 6
in DVD format. 7
i. Any and all other data and/or drawings required during construction. 8
9
1.10 TESTS AND OBSERVATIONS 10
11
A. The complete job shall be, during and/or after construction, subject to the following 12
tests and observations: 13
1. By Architect’s Consultant observations and tests conducted by him or for him in 14
his presence. Upon notice, Contractor shall furnish not to exceed two (2) persons 15
(one to be the job foreman) and tools to assist for a reasonable amount of time to 16
make such tests and observations as are requested by the Architect’s Consultant. 17
2. By any Government or local authority. 18
3. Operation and visual examination of all components. 19
4. Verification and fine-tuning of all hoist limit switch settings (ultimate and normal). 20
5. Full load testing of all motorized sets that suspend loads. Testing shall include full 21
range of travel in all axes of movement, directed by the installed control system. 22
Test shall include both controlled stop and emergency stop conditions. Test 23
weight shall be equal to the payload listed on the Drawings. 24
a. Variable speed sets shall be tested at a minimum of three speeds: creep, 60%, 25
and maximum specified. Tests shall be performed at each speed for the full 26
range of travel. 27
b. For all sets, a test with the weight uniformly distributed across all lift lines 28
shall be performed. 29
c. For ten percent of each set type, but not less than one per type, a test with the 30
weight eccentrically distributed shall be performed. Test weight shall be equal 31
to the capacity of the set and distributed so that one lift line shall carry the 32
maximum load per lift line as shown in the Drawings. 33
d. Testing must be video-recorded with audio and submitted with written 34
certification for each set. 35
e. Motorized sets need not have the scheduled equipment (curtains, ceilings, et. 36
al.) installed during the full load testing if the Contractor prefers to use a 37
“dummy” load. Cable management systems must be operating normally 38
during the test. 39
6. Simulated failure test of mechanical over-speed brakes. Test shall be simulated so 40
as not to compromise the integrity of the installed components. Test does not 41
need to be performed on site, but must be video-recorded and submitted. In lieu 42
of this test, manufacturer may supply written certification of a successful test of 43
representative samples. 44
45
B. After completion of installation and preliminary tests by the Contractor, observation of 46
the work shall be performed by the Architect’s Consultant. The cost of periodic trips to 47
the job site for final observation by the Architect’s Consultant has been provided for in 48
the Architect’s Consultant's contract. The cost of any additional trips to the job site due 49
to delays, omissions, or mistakes by the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor. 50
51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 9 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1.11 GUARANTEE 1
2
A. All labor and materials provided under this contract, unless otherwise noted, shall be 3
guaranteed for a period of one (1) year following the date of final acceptance of the 4
installation. 5
6
B. The following equipment provided under this contract shall be guaranteed for a period 7
of two (2) years following the date of final acceptance of the installation 8
1. Motorized gear/motor/brake assemblies. 9
2. Motorized hoist control system. 10
11
C. All equipment with factory warranties greater than one year shall have their warranties 12
under the Owner's name. 13
14
D. All defects occurring in labor or materials within the guarantee period shall be rectified 15
by replacement or repair. Contractor shall, within this guarantee period, be required to 16
answer all service calls within a 24-hour period and repair or replace any faulty item 17
within 48 hours after the initial service call without charge to the Owner. 18
19
20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21
22
2.1 GENERAL 23
24
A. All materials shall be new and of first quality. 25
26
B. All load bearing rigging components shall be rated for overhead lifting; capable of 27
supporting design loads as shown with minimum design factor of eight (8); and shall be 28
of, or treated with, corrosion resistant materials. 29
30
C. The rigging products of certain manufacturers are specified by catalog number for 31
establishing a standard of quality. Items equal in quality and performance by 32
manufacturers other than those specified will be permissible upon acceptance by the 33
Architect’s Consultant. 34
35
D. Equipment quantities are "as required" or "as shown on drawings" or "as specified 36
elsewhere" unless otherwise noted. 37
38
E. Loading capacities of systems, where specified in the Drawings or the Specifications, 39
refer to the net working payloads exclusive of the dead loads – pipe battens, truss 40
battens, sandbags, hooks, plugstrips, etc. – exactly as indicated on the Drawings and 41
Specifications. Should the Contractor choose to suggest alternate methods that require 42
heavier loads, the Contractor shall be responsible for increasing the capacities of the 43
individual components, including the arbor capacities, accordingly. Any alternate 44
methods must be approved specifically by the Architect’s Consultant. 45
46
F. Provide all guards and other protective devices required to ensure protection of 47
individuals who may be near or adjacent to equipment and devices during normal 48
operation. 49
50
2.2 ARBOR GUIDE SYSTEM 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 10 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
A. T-track system shall be 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" steel or 2" x 2" x 1/4" aluminum tees, 2
or jays, spaced as shown on the Drawings. Tees shall be Clancy type 1500 with 3
appropriate number of Type 215 or 315 U Plates. All spreader U plates shall be bolted 4
to continuous angle wall battens. 1-3/4" x 1-3/4" x 3/16” steel angle wall battens shall 5
be mounted 5'-0" apart vertically over the entire area of the arbor guide battery. Both 6
legs of the wall battens shall be slot punched to provide for any alignment of the tees 7
made necessary by irregularities in the wall. The tee bar shall also be slot punched in 8
order to provide for vertical alignment of the guide system. Tees shall extend upward 9
to underside of head block beams. Top and bottom stops of hardwood bumpers with 10
steel angle backing shall be provided to control limits of arbor travel. The top and 11
bottom stop battens and the floor batten shall be secured to the tee bar, and the 3" x 6" 12
floor batten shall be secured to the floor by means of 3/8" x 2" lag screws. Provide 13
adjustable stops on tees, or jays, to limit upward travel of tension blocks. Any splices in 14
T-track must be smooth and free from any burns, or notches that could catch arbor 15
shoe. 16
17
2.3 ARBOR 18
19
A. For single purchase T-track system, arbor shall be mounted between tees, or jays, to 20
accommodate counter-weights. Arbor top and bottom is to be a fabricated steel 21
weldment of 1/4" plate formed into a channel with 3" sides and is to be properly fitted 22
to receive the required number of cables. The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied 23
together by means of two 3/4" rods which shall be threaded at each end to 24
accommodate the below mentioned nuts. Each rod is to have two 3/4" nuts above and 25
one below the arbor top and one above and two below the arbor bottom. Each rod 26
shall be equipped with one retaining collar with thumbscrew (no tools required) to lock 27
weights in place. Arbors shall also be equipped with sliding spacers, one (1) for every 28
2'-0" of arbor height equal in width to bottom of arbor. The arbor shall be equipped 29
with a ½" x 3" steel tie bar that is bolted between the arbor top/bottom and the guide 30
shoe assembly. Arbor shall accept required number of hoist lines. Arbors utilizing cast 31
materials are not acceptable. Arbor backbone shall be painted to show 1’-0” 32
increments. 33
34
B. Approved Equipment: 35
1. J.R. Clancy, Inc. Model No. 007-15x 36
2. H & H Specialties, Inc. Model No. 990 37
38
C. Quantity: Per rigging schedule. 39
40
D. For double purchase double stack T-track system, arbor shall be mounted 41
between tees, or jays, to accommodate two stacks of counter-weights. Arbor top 42
and bottom is to be a fabricated steel weldment of 1/4" plate formed into a 43
channel with 3" sides. The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by 44
means of four 3/4" rods which shall be threaded at each end to accommodate 45
the below mentioned nuts. Each rod is to have two 3/4" nuts above and one 46
below the arbor top and one above and two below the arbor bottom. Each rod 47
shall be equipped with one retaining collar with thumbscrew (no tools required) 48
to lock weights in place. Arbors shall also be equipped with sliding spacers, one 49
(1) for every 2'-0" of arbor height equal in width to bottom of arbor. The arbor 50
shall be equipped with a ½" x 3" steel tie bar that is bolted between the arbor 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 11 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
top/bottom and the guide shoe assembly. Arbor top shall contain a sheave for 1
rope and cables. Arbor bottom shall contain a sheave for rope. Arbors utilizing 2
cast materials are not acceptable. Arbor backbone shall be painted to show 1’-0” 3
increments. 4
5
E. Quantity: Per rigging schedule. 6
7
F. For single purchase double stack T-track system, arbor shall be mounted 8
between tees, or jays, to accommodate two stacks of counter-weights. Arbor top 9
and bottom is to be a fabricated steel weldment of 1/4" plate formed into a 10
channel with 3" sides and is to be properly fitted to receive the required number 11
of cables. The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of 12
four 3/4" rods which shall be threaded at each end to accommodate the below 13
mentioned nuts. Each rod is to have two 3/4" nuts above and one below the 14
arbor top and one above and two below the arbor bottom. Each rod shall be 15
equipped with one retaining collar with thumbscrew (no tools required) to lock 16
weights in place. Arbors shall also be equipped with sliding spacers, one (1) for 17
every 2'-0" of arbor height equal in width to bottom of arbor. The arbor shall be 18
equipped with a ½" x 3" steel tie bar that is bolted between the arbor 19
top/bottom and the guide shoe assembly. Arbor shall accept required number 20
of hoist lines. Arbors utilizing cast materials are not acceptable. Arbor 21
backbone shall be painted to show 1’-0” increments. 22
23
G. Quantity: Per rigging schedule. 24
25
26
2.4 ARBOR GUIDE 27
28
A. At each end of the arbor there shall be a ball bearing roller guide assembly. Each 29
assembly shall consist of the following: Two 3 ½” Nylatron GS guide wheels; 6-3/8” x 30
3" x 3/16" steel back-up plates. Each guide assembly shall be secured to the tie-plate 31
and the top and bottom of the arbor by means of at least two 3/8" grade 5 bolts and 32
nuts. 33
34
B. Approved Equipment: 35
1. J.R. Clancy, Inc. 007-TBRG 36
2. H & H Specialties, Inc. Model 991RG 37
38
2.5 LOCKING RAIL 39
40
A. Locking rails for the arbor guide system shall be fabricated as shown on drawings and 41
shall consist of the required steel angles, braces, etc., to facilitate the mounting of one 42
rope lock for each line set and a pin rail for hanging plug box rope sets. Provide a 43
Lamacoid tag permanently attached at each line set, identifying it by number, with space 44
to write on for identifying equipment placed on the line set. Provide adjustable stops 45
for tensioning floor blocks on the tees, or jays, to limit upward travel of each take-up 46
block. Provide a 2" x 2" hardwood arbor stop mounted to the top back steel angle. 47
The locking rail shall be designed and installed in such a way as to resist a maximum 48
uplift of 500 pounds per linear foot of locking rail as mounted to the floor. This shall 49
be accomplished by use of an expansion or adhesion anchor into the concrete floor 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 12 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
installed per anchor manufacturer’s instruction. When unable to anchor to concrete, 1
anchor in manner which shall meet the loads specified above. 2
3
B. Approved Equipment: Atlas Silk 578 4
5
C. Quantity: As shown on drawings 6
7
2.6 ROPE LOCK 8
9
A. Rope lock shall be positive locking, quick-release type with thumbscrew adjustment for 10
rope size. Body shall be fabricated of heavy-duty ductile iron. Jaws shall be fabricated 11
of gray iron, and sized to fit specified arbor control line. Rope lock shall have 9" steel 12
handle encased in plastic. Rope lock ring shall also be encased in plastic. Rope lock 13
and rope lock handle shall be smooth finished and free of all cast flashing and sharp 14
edges. Provide rubber bumper for the handle to land on when opened and spring 15
washers between the dogs and the house to provide silent operation. Provide one rope 16
lock per counter-weight set. 17
18
B. Approved Equipment: 19
1. J.R. Clancy, Inc. Model No. 533R 20
2. H & H Specialties, Inc. Model No. 576-9 21
22
C. Quantity: One per counter-weight line set per locking gallery. 23
24
2.7 FLOOR BLOCK 25
26
A. Floor block on T-track for tensioning arbor control line. Sheave shall be 10" with 5/8" 27
SAE Grade 2 or better steel shaft and sealed precision ball bearings. Bottom half of 28
sheave shall be completely enclosed in block assembly. T-track guide assembly shall 29
consist of two steel shoe guides and one spacer. Each line set shall be installed with 30
respective floor block on the T-track at ½ way up their total travel to allow for stretch 31
of arbor control line. Tension blocks will be re-adjusted, as needed, before final 32
checkout. Rope groove shall be sized for specified arbor control line, smooth finished 33
and free of all cast flashing. Minimum weight of block shall be 40#. 34
35
B. Approved Equipment: 36
1. J.R. Clancy, Inc. Model No. 1015 37
2. H & H Specialties, Inc. Model No. 70 38
39
C. Quantity: One per counter-weight line set. 40
41
2.8 HEAD BLOCKS 42
43
A. Head blocks shall have one sheave of sufficient width to accommodate required 44
number of wire rope grooves and one arbor control line. Sheave shall conform to cable 45
manufacturer's recommendation on depth and design of grooves and shall have 1/64" 46
tolerance. Pitch diameter from any wire rope groove to any other shall not vary by 47
more than .001". Head blocks shall be equipped with life-time lubricated Timken 48
tapered roller bearings. The shaft shall be SAE Grade 8 steel bolt with head keyed to 49
prevent shaft rotation. Insert steel sleeve into bore to provide bearing surface for roller 50
bearings. Head blocks shall be equipped with at least 3 spacers of 1/2" pipe to prevent 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 13 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
jumping of wire rope from the grooves. Side plates shall be at least 10 gauge securely 1
welded to base frame with a continuous staggered weld. Provide base angles and 2
auxiliary base angles as necessary for support to structure. Fasteners shall be SAE Grade 3
5 or better. 4
5
B. Sheave Material: Nylatron GSM 6
7
C. Sheave Diameter: Standard Rigging - 12" 8
9
D. Minimum Shaft Diameter: Standard Rigging - 1" 10
11
E. Approved Equipment: 12
1. J.R. Clancy, Inc. Series 55 13
2. H & H Specialties, Inc., Series 50 14
15
F. Quantity: One per counter-weight line set 16
17
2.9 LOFT BLOCKS AND MULE BLOCKS 18
19
A. Loft blocks and mule blocks shall have one sheave (mules may require more than one 20
sheave) of sufficient width to accommodate required number of wire rope grooves. 21
Sheave shall conform to cable manufacturer's recommendation on depth and design of 22
groove and shall have a 1/64" tolerance. Pitch diameter from any groove to any other 23
shall not vary by more than .001". Blocks shall be equipped with life-time lubricated, 24
sealed bearings as specified below. The shaft shall be SAE Grade 8 steel bolt with head 25
keyed to prevent shaft rotation. Blocks shall be equipped with at least 2 spacers of 1/2" 26
pipe to prevent jumping of cable from the grooves. Side plates shall be at least 10 27
gauge securely welded to base frame with a continuous staggered weld. Provide base 28
angles as necessary for support to structure. Fasteners shall be SAE Grade 5 or better. 29
Provide idlers on each block with sufficient number of sheaves to support passing wire 30
rope on each loft block. 31
32
B. Approved Sheave Material: 33
1. NYLATRON GS 34
2. ZYTEL GRZ 35
36
C. Sheave Diameter: Standard Rigging - 8" 37
38
D. Bearings: 39
1. Standard Rigging Loft Blocks - Precision Ball Bearings 40
2. Standard Rigging Mule Blocks with two or less lines - Precision Ball Bearings 41
3. Standard Rigging Mule Blocks with three or more lines - Sealed Timken Tapered 42
Roller Bearings 43
44
E. Minimum Shaft Diameter: 5/8" 45
46
F. Approved Equipment: 47
1. Upright Loft Block: Atlas Silk Series 40NS 48
2. Underhung Loft Block: Atlas Silk Series 42NS 49
3. Pivot Loft Block: Atlas Silk Series 44NS 50
4. Underhung Swivel Loft Block: Atlas Silk Series 46NS 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 14 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
5. Upright Mule Block: Atlas Silk Series 80NS 1
6. Underhung Mule Block: Atlas Silk Series 81NS 2
3
G. Quantity: Refer to drawings and as required 4
5
2.10 WIRE ROPE 6
7
A. Wire rope shall be first quality, galvanized carbon steel, and impregnated with a dry 8
lubricant. All cable ends shall be neat, seized and smoothed to prevent scratching and 9
catching. Wire rope shall be terminated with cable thimbles and utilize one of the 10
following termination methods: 11
1. Nicopress sleeves as manufactured by National Telephone Supply, applied in 12
conformity with manufacturer's instructions. 13
2. Forged wire rope clips as manufactured by The Crosby Group, Inc. (Crosby® 14
Clips), applied in conformity with manufacturer's instructions. 15
16
B. Wire Rope Diameter: 17
1. Grand Curtain Guide – 1/4" 18
2. Standard Rigging – 1/4" 19
3. Motorized Rigging – 3/8” 20
21
C. Approved Equipment: 22
1. Hoist and Rigging – Macwhyte 7 x 19 Utility Cable 23
2. Guide – Macwhyte 7 x 7 Non-Flexible Utility Strand 24
25
2.11 HOIST LINE TERMINATION ASSEMBLIES - WIRE ROPE 26
27
A. Batten termination 28
1. Type 1 – Wire rope shall be terminated as specified elsewhere or as shown on 29
drawings and fitted with 36" long trim chain. Trim chain shall be connected 30
through the cable thimble and terminated as specified elsewhere. Chain shall make 31
at least one full wrap around the pipe batten. Type 1 terminations will be installed 32
on all single batten line sets unless otherwise noted 33
2. Type 2 – Wire rope shall be as specified elsewhere or as shown on drawings and 34
fitted with rated jaw-jaw turnbuckles. Type 2 terminations will be installed on all 35
double batten line sets unless otherwise noted. 36
37
B. Arbor terminations - Wire rope shall be terminated as specified elsewhere and fitted 38
with an appropriate sized, Grade 8 bolt passed through the arbor top. 39
40
2.12 CHAIN 41
42
A. Dead hanging battens and batten termination assemblies (trim chains). 43
1. Each chain shall be 36-inches long fabricated from 1/4-inch alloy Theatrical Chain, 44
specifically designed for theatrical overhead lifting applications. 45
2. The chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000 pounds. 46
3. The chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Individual 47
link size shall match the National Association of Chain Manufacturers, Welded 48
Steel Chain Specifications for Grade 30 Proof Coil Chain. 49
4. Each link of the chain shall be stamped with the manufacturer’s identifying mark. 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 15 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
5. The chain shall be lot traceable, with a coded date stamp on every tenth link of 1
chain. 2
3
B. Approved product: 4
1. J.R. Clancy Alpha Chain 5
2. Or approved equal 6
7
2.13 CHAIN TERMINATIONS 8
9
A. Shackle for termination of dead hanging chain and hoist line terminations (trim chains). 10
B. Approved Equipment: Crosby Load Rated Forged Screw Pin Anchor Shackle. 11
C. Shackles shall be “moused” shut with wire, after proper installation. 12
D. Quick link for termination of certain special components. Quick links may only be 13
utilized when specifically indicated herein or on drawings. 14
E. Approved Equipment: Cooper Group Rapid Link load rated at 880 lbs. 15
16
2.14 BATTENS 17
18
A. Pipe battens shall be nominal 1-½" I.D. black steel pipe, ASTM A53/A Strong 19
(Schedule 40), stripped and painted with at least one coat of black primer and one coat 20
of flat black paint free of surface irregularities, in lengths as indicated on rigging 21
schedule. 22
23
B. Splices shall be close-fitting internal steel sleeves with a wall thickness of not less than 24
0.1875 inch, and min. 24 inches long. Both sides of the splice shall be held in place 25
with a minimum of two (2) plug welds per side. 26
27
C. All battens shall have bright yellow end caps on each end for visibility in the loft. End 28
caps shall be a minimum of 6” long and provide a smooth surface to the batten end. 29
Line set number shall be stenciled on each end of each batten inside of the end caps, in 30
contrasting color paint, such that the number is readable from the floor when the pipe 31
is flown out and from position upstage of the batten when the pipe is flown in. In lieu 32
of end caps, battens can be painted for 24” on each end with bright yellow enamel. 33
34
D. Paint on every batten a 1” wide strip at center stage of the batten. 35
36
2.15 PIPE CLAMPS 37
38
A. For connection of temporary pipe lengths to permanent lighting and rigging pipe 39
structures. 40
41
B. Clamps shall be sized to connect to 1-1/2” (1.9” O.D.) black steel pipe. 42
43
C. Rotalocks shall be designed to connect horizontal pipes to vertical pipes at a 90-degree 44
fixed angle. Minimum working load limit shall be 45
46
D. Couplers shall be designed to connect pipes in a horizontal orientation. Minimum 47
working load limit shall be 1100 pounds. Couplers shall use wing nuts to tighten 48
clamps without requiring the use of tools. 49
50
E. Rotalock Approved equipment: 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 16 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1. Alvin Industrial AIS79-8 1
2. Sapsis Rigging Inc Steel Pipe Clamp – 1-1/2” 2
3
F. Swivel or Fixed 90 deg. Coupler Approved Equipment: 4
1. The Light Source Swivel Coupler 5
2. Doughty Engineering Swivel Couplers 6
7
G. Quantity: 8
1. Rotalocks: Twelve (12) 9
2. Swivel Couplers: Zero (0) 10
3. Fixed 90 deg. Couplers: Zero (0) 11
12
2.16 FIBER ROPE 13
14
A. Fiber rope shall be a synthetic rope consisting of combination filament and staple/spun 15
polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin. 16
17
B. Fiber rope diameter: 18
1. All other counterweight sets – ¾” 19
20
C. Approved Equipment: New England Ropes 3-Strand Composite Multiline II, 3 STML-21
689. 22
23
2.17 COUNTERWEIGHT 24
25
A. Counterweight shall be first quality mild steel bar stock, with U-shaped slots flame-cut 26
into the ends to fit arbor rods. All edges shall be ground free of burrs and rough or 27
sharp edges. 28
29
B. Weights shall be six (6) inches in width. Contractor shall provide weights in two 30
thicknesses that correspond to approximately 30 pounds and 15 pounds. 31
C. Counterweights shall be chamfer-cut on two opposing corners. 32
33
D. Provide balance weight for all line sets using primarily 30-pound weights. Balance 34
weights shall be painted red and seized to the arbor bottom with two bands of standard 35
mechanically locked steel strapping. On the front face of the top dead weight, paint the 36
set number in white, using stenciled numerals not less than 1/2" high. 37
38
E. After balancing, provide additional weight equal to 60% of the total arbor capacity of all 39
installed line sets. Additional weight shall consist of the following percentages, by 40
weight: 41
1. 30 pound: 75% 42
2. 15 pound: 25% 43
44
F. Additional weight shall be delivered to the Loading Gallery. 45
46
2.18 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS 47
48
A. Special components may be required for muling around structural components to meet 49
wire rope fleet angle requirements, supporting hoisting cable, or dropping lines through 50
structure to battens. These special components shall meet or exceed comparable 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 17 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
equipment specified herein. Idler blocks, pivot blocks, structural support for these 1
blocks, etc., required to make all lines fully operable, whether such components are 2
specifically named or not, shall be furnished without claim for additional payment. 3
4
A. Additional mounting components, such as miscellaneous steel, wood blocking, and 5
fittings, required for installation, support, bracing, and operation of equipment under 6
this Section shall be provided without claim for additional payment. These components 7
shall be coordinated with other trades. 8
9
2.19 MOTORIZED RIGGING COMPONENTS 10
11
A. All motors, hoisting cables, chain, sheaves, hardware, etc., shall be rated for overhead 12
lifting; capable of supporting design loads as shown and shall be of, or treated with, 13
corrosion resistant materials. 14
15
B. Motors 16
1. General 17
a. All motors shall be properly sized for the application and not more than 1.25 18
times the specified load and at the specified speed. 19
b. Motors shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled. 20
c. Except as otherwise specified, all motors shall have minimum Class A 21
winding insulation in accordance with NEMA Standard MG 1-12.40 rated for 22
15 to 20 minute intermittent duty cycle. 23
d. All motors shall be equipped with sealed bearings. 24
e. Conduit connection box shall be watertight, of cast iron, aluminum, or 25
wrought iron construction, with neoprene gasket. A tapped hole shall be 26
provided for conduit entrance and connection box shall be oriented and 27
coordinated with associated equipment to provide full access to internal 28
connections. Corrosion resistant, high melting point, non-flammable sealing 29
compound shall be used around motor leads where they pass through the 30
motor frame. 31
2. AC Motors 32
a. All AC motors shall be squirrel-cage type, of NEMA torque design B, with 33
medium starting torque, normal breakdown torque, low slip, and low starting 34
current. 35
a. All AC motors shall be TEFC (totally enclosed, fan cooled) enclosures as 36
defined by NEMA Standard MG 1-12.21. 37
3. DC Motors 38
a. DC motors shall be variable speed TENV (totally enclosed, non-ventilated) 39
and designed for continuous duty cycle. 40
b. Units shall be equipped with integral tachometer units for speed regulation 41
feedback to the associated drive electronics. Use of armature voltage 42
feedback for speed regulation shall not be permitted. Tachometer output shall 43
be coordinated with the drive amplifier provided. 44
c. Units shall incorporate an internally mounted winding thermostat to monitor 45
winding temperature. This thermostat shall interrupt the control circuitry to 46
the associated drive in such a fashion so as to prevent operation when safe 47
operating temperatures are exceeded within the motor. 48
d. Units shall have class H+ insulation on armature and field windings and shall 49
conform to a class F maximum temperature rise curve. All DC motors shall 50
be specifically designed for operation in conjunction with controlled phase 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 18 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
rectified power amplifiers. 1
e. DC motors shall be selected with sufficient de-rating and regard for field 2
heating due to site environmental conditions. 3
4. For all fixed speed winches, the gear reducer shall incorporate a high inertia 4
flywheel at the motor stage for "soft start" and "soft stop" capability. 5
6
C. Gear Reducers 7
1. General 8
a. The output shaft shall be supported by two tapered roller bearings. The gears 9
shall run in an oil bath. The shaft bearings shall be provided with double lip 10
oil seals to prevent leakage. 11
b. Two (2) removable, threaded lubrication plugs shall be furnished for each 12
gearbox. Upper plug opening shall be for lubricant entrance, and lower plug 13
opening shall permit simultaneous purging of spent lubricant from the 14
bearing. 15
c. Provide a drain plug in the bottom of the frame on the bearing brackets so as 16
to permit periodic drainage of any possible accumulation of moisture. 17
d. Provide full drip pan under motor and reducer assembly. 18
2. Right Angle and Helical Bevels 19
a. Each right angle bevel or spiral bevel gear drive shall be selected to transmit 20
twice required torque, horsepower, and impact. All ratings shall be AGMA 21
mechanical ratings for load classification service factor equal to 2.0, except as 22
otherwise noted. 23
b. Each right angle bevel gear drive unit shall consist of the following: 24
c. One housing made of high tensile nickel cast iron, properly reinforced at all 25
strain points for maximum rigidity, with precisely located gear set bearing 26
supports. Each housing shall have sufficient capacity for lubricant, and surface 27
area for adequate heat dissipation. 28
1. Pinions, gears, and gear shafts manufactured from chromium, molybdenum 29
alloy steel (AISI C-4150) and heat-treated to 32 Rockwell "C" scale minimum 30
core hardness. 31
2. Pinion and gear shafts supported by tapered roller or precision ball bearings 32
of adequate capacity, properly mounted, and furnished with oil seals. 33
3. All shaft diameters precisely ground, stepped, and radiused to minimize 34
stress concentrations. 35
3. Helical Worm 36
a. Gear reducers shall be combination helical-worm reducer, directly flange-37
mounted to the motor/brake assembly. The reducer shall have two (2) gear 38
stages; the first stage shall be helical and the second stage shall consist of a 39
worm and worm wheel. The worm shaft shall be milled, hardened, and 40
ground to insure maximum efficiency and long life. 41
b. Gear reducers shall be enclosed in high-strength gray cast iron housings with 42
precisely located gear set bearing supports. Each housing shall have sufficient 43
capacity for lubricant, and surface area for adequate heat dissipation. 44
c. Gear reducer shall incorporate a high inertia flywheel at the motor stage for 45
"soft start" and "soft stop" capability. 46
d. Gear reducers shall be SEW-Eurodrive "Helical-Worm Gear", or approved 47
equal. 48
e. Gear reducers shall be of the worm gear type with compound helical bevel to 49
single envelopment worm or double enveloping worm gears. Single stage 50
'Spirol' gearing is not acceptable equipment provided for the Work of this 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 19 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
Specification. 1
f. Worm gear reducers shall be selected to safely transmit specified torque and 2
horsepower. Capacity and type shall be as required. Design of the power 3
transmission train shall provide for gearing ratios of the worm gear stage to be 4
greater than 40:1 wherever practical. Ratios less than 40:1 shall require 5
approval of the Architect’s Consultant. All ratings shall be AGMA Class 2 6
mechanical ratings with a load classification service factor equal to 1.3, except 7
as otherwise noted or approved. 8
g. Each worm gear reducer shall consist of essentially the following: 9
1. One housing made of high tensile nickel cast iron, properly reinforced at 10
all strain points for maximum rigidity, with precisely located gear set 11
bearing supports. Each housing shall have sufficient capacity for lubricant, 12
and surface area for adequate heat dissipation. 13
2. Worm gears manufactured from gear bronze with minimum tensile 14
strength of 40,000 PSI and properly keyed or splined to the gear shaft. 15
Gear shafts shall be manufactured from chromium, molybdenum alloy 16
steel (AISI C-4150). 17
3. Worm and worm shaft manufactured from chromium, molybdenum alloy 18
steel (AISI C-4150) and heat- treated to 32 Rockwell "C" scale minimum 19
core hardness. 20
4. Each worm gear and shaft supported by two (2) tapered roller bearings of 21
adequate capacity, properly mounted, and furnished with oil seals. 22
5. All shaft diameters precisely ground, stepped, and radiused to minimize 23
stress concentrations. 24
25
D. Primary Brake 26
1. Automatic power failure braking shall provide fail-safe stopping in the event of 27
power loss. 28
2. Except where indicated otherwise, all brakes shall operate from single-phase AC, 29
and shall be electrically released/spring applied, designed to conform to applicable 30
NEMA standards for intermittent duty. All brakes shall be furnished with means 31
for manual release. 32
3. Brakes shall have drip-tight NEMA type 2 enclosures. 33
4. All brakes shall stop and hold a minimum of 200% of motor full torque capacity. 34
5. Any required brake conditioning (for example burn-in) shall be completed prior to 35
system commissioning. 36
6. Brake noise shall comply with the noise requirement as outlined in this 37
specification. 38
39
E. Secondary brakes 40
1. All motors shall incorporate one of the secondary brake methods described below. 41
a. Centrifugal overspeed 42
1. Brakes shall be a fully mechanical overspeed brakes, directly mounted to 43
the drum shaft or sprocket drive shaft. 44
2. The overspeed brake shall engage automatically when the set exceeds the 45
maximum specified speed by 10%. 46
3. It shall be possible to preset the brake tension to adjust the stopping 47
distance, so that it brings the load to a controlled stop without shock. 48
4. The secondary brake shall stop and hold 200% of the full load torque. 49
b. Pneumatic-release disk brakes 50
1. Brakes shall be spring-applied, pneumatically released disk brakes, 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 20 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
directly mounted to the sprocket drive shaft in two (2) locations. 1
2. The brakes shall engage automatically when the set exceeds the 2
maximum specified speed by 10%, E-stop is engaged, or the control 3
system detects a fault. 4
3. Each secondary brake shall stop and hold 130% of the full load torque. 5
c. Drive-through brakes 6
1. The brake shall be a continuously applied, automatic load brake with a 7
retarding torque matching the load on the hoist. 8
2. The brake shall be selected and designed to accommodate the heat 9
produced during normal operation without undue wear. 10
d. Redundant gear/motor/brake assemblies 11
1. When redundant gear/motor/brake assemblies are used as the secondary 12
braking mechanism, at least two assemblies shall be required to move to 13
the load, while any one shall be able to stop and hold the full torque load. 14
2. The gear/motor/brake assemblies shall be located on the extents of the 15
drive train so that either gear/motor/brake can stop and hold the full 16
load. 17
3. The brakes shall engage automatically when the load exceeds the 18
maximum specified speed by 10%, E-stop is engaged or the control 19
system detects a fault. 20
2. A redundant motor brake on a single motor shaft shall not be used as a secondary 21
brake. 22
3. The secondary brake shall not apply more than 300% of the full load torque to the 23
system. 24
4. Any required brake conditioning (for example burn-in) shall be completed prior to 25
system commissioning. 26
5. Brake noise shall comply with the noise requirement as outlined in this 27
specification. 28
29
F. Frames & Guards 30
1. All motors and associated gearboxes shall be installed on built-up frames, which 31
contain all elements of the lifting system. Frames shall be securely attached to 32
structure. 33
2. All motor units shall have durable, leak-proof drip pans to contain leakage of oil 34
from motor, gearbox and/or pillow blocks. 35
3. All exposed moving equipment, devices, and ropes within 7 feet of a working 36
surface shall be guarded in a manner to prevent accidental contact with other 37
machinery, devices, lines, or personnel. Guards shall not impede the operation of 38
the protected device or adjacent devices. 39
a. Sheaves, drums, shaft assemblies, and ropes moving at the lineset load speed 40
on a hoist limited to no greater than 30 feet per minute and located at the 41
gridiron(s), attic, rigging pit, and catwalks may not require this guarding if both 42
the following conditions are met: 43
1. “Authorized Personnel Only” signage is provided at access points to 44
these areas, per the Drawings. 45
2. Clearances are provided around the equipment such that people need not 46
contact components to access any part of the gridiron/catwalk. 47
b. Guard construction shall be sufficient to resist incidental impact without 48
deforming. When located underfoot, guards shall be capable of supporting a 49
310 pound person. 50
1. Guard material for custom assemblies shall be open metal mesh with 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 21 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
openings not to exceed 1/2 in. unless otherwise noted in the Drawings. 1
2. Shrouds for packaged hoists, as engineered by the hoist manufacturer, 2
may act as guards, provided all other provisions of this Section are met. 3
3. Guards for curtain machines may be sheet metal, provided all other 4
provisions of this Section are met. 5
c. Guards shall be removable for maintenance. 6
d. Guard construction and attachment shall not produce additional noise when 7
the motor is in operation. 8
e. Guard construction must be designed so as to not impede cooling. 9
10
G. Grooved Wire Rope Drums 11
1. Drums shall be grooved welded steel, properly annealed. Minimum tread diameter 12
shall be at least 30 times the diameter of the wire rope employed. 13
2. Drums shall have integral hubs with properly sized shafts for the transmission of 14
loads and torque. Drums shall be connected to the hub using a key to prevent 15
relative rotation. All driving hubs must have a minimum of two set screws. 16
3. All wire rope drums shall have sufficient capacity in a single layer for maximum 17
travel plus a minimum of three (3) dead wraps for each wire rope connection. One 18
(1) hole shall be drilled through the root of the groove for each rope end. This 19
hole shall have an axis which, in section, is angled 45° from a radial line drawn 20
from the shaft to the center of the hole. Hole shall be chamfered, free of burrs, 21
and of correct size to retain stop sleeve cable retainer. 22
4. Drums shall be grooved for wire rope and sized as noted in Drawings. Grooves 23
shall be lathe turned and machined to the proper size for the rope used, with 24
groove diameters sized to fit rope closely and prevent rope from assuming an oval 25
or elliptical shape under load. Groove diameter shall be no greater than 10% larger 26
than rope diameter for ropes smaller than 3/8 in. diameter, and 8% larger for 27
ropes 3/8 in. diameter and larger. Minimum groove depth shall be 40% of the 28
rope diameter. 29
5. Steel rod or pipe keepers shall be provided to prevent cable from jumping out of 30
grooves. These elements shall be located so that they do not bear on the cable 31
when the cable is correctly seated in the groove. 32
6. Fleet angles shall not exceed ± 2°. 33
7. Shafts through drums shall be supported on both ends by bearing blocks to 34
minimize bending stresses in the shaft. Single-line drum blocks shall utilize self-35
aligning, four-bolt, flange-mount style, cast iron housings with ball bearings, equal 36
to Peer UCF-200 series. Multi-line drum blocks shall utilize self-aligning, two-bolt, 37
pillow block style, cast iron housings with tapered ball bearings, equal to Peer UC 38
00 series. Each bearing shall be selected to support at least three (3) times the total 39
load of the respective drum. 40
41
H. Pileup/Yo-Yo drums 42
1. Pileup drums shall confine the lift lines to individual winding chambers so that the 43
lifting media winds in concentric layers upon itself. 44
2. Drums shall be constructed of cold rolled steel. Minimum tread diameter shall be 45
at least 36 times the diameter of the wire rope or 28 times the thickness of the 46
strap used. 47
3. All drums shall have sufficient chamber depth for maximum travel plus a 48
minimum of three (3) dead wraps. The rope or strap shall be securely seized to the 49
drum in a manner that maintains the full specified capacity of the drum inclusive 50
of applicable safety factors as noted in this Section. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 22 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
4. Chamber clearance shall be between 5 - 8% of rope diameter or strap width. 1
5. Fleet angles shall not exceed ± 1.5°. 2
6. Drum shafts shall be supported on both ends by bearing blocks to minimize 3
bending stresses in the shaft. Blocks shall utilize self-aligning, flange-mount style, 4
cast iron housings with ball bearings. Each bearing shall be selected to support at 5
least three (3) times the total load of the respective drum. 6
7
I. Shafts, Keys and Couplings 8
1. All shafting shall be designed and proportioned in accordance with the "Code for 9
Design of Transmission Shafting" of the ANSI to safely transmit all applied loads 10
and torques and their combinations with proper allowance for impact. 11
2. All shafting shall be designed to satisfy critical speed and torsional deflection 12
criteria. 13
3. All shafting shall be of AISI C-1018 steel minimum, unless otherwise specified. 14
4. All keys and keyways shall be designed to safely transmit all applied loads and shall 15
be proportioned according to ANSI standards. 16
5. All stepped down shaft corners shall be properly radiused. 17
6. Shaft couplings shall maintain the proper alignment and load rating of the shaft. 18
System design shall employ the fewest number of couplings possible. 19
20
J. Traction Blocks 21
1. A V-grooved sheave shall be designed to drive lift lines in a motorized application. 22
The sheave shall be designed to minimize wire rope slippage and abrasion during 23
operation. 24
2. Sheaves shall be connected to properly sized shafts for the transmission of loads 25
and torque, using a key to prevent relative rotation. A minimum of two set screws 26
shall secure the key. 27
3. The traction block shall hold the load without slippage in a static condition. 28
4. The traction block shall be rated for the loads and capacities as shown in the 29
Drawings. 30
31
K. Chain Drive Components 32
1. Chain drives shall be used only with motor-assisted counterweighted loads. 33
Design schemes employing chain transmission of power are not acceptable for any 34
'dead-lift' applications. Any other applications must be specifically approved by 35
the Architect’s Consultant. 36
2. All chain transmissions shall be ANSI standard double-strand roller chain 37
(minimum), selected to safely transmit the required torque, horsepower, and 38
impact. 39
3. Unless otherwise noted, all roller chain up to and including 3/4 inch pitch shall be 40
riveted type, and all sizes 1 inch pitch and greater shall be detachable type with 41
cotter pins. Use proper mounting links and attachments to connect roller chains 42
to each other and to the driven object. Terminations shall be bolted with a 43
minimum of two (2) high strength bolts and locking nuts at each termination. The 44
strength of all connections shall be equal to the strength of the roller chain. 45
4. Sprockets shall be machined from steel plate. All sprocket teeth shall be accurately 46
cut to ANSI dimensional standards. Bore diameters shall be held to proper 47
tolerances to prevent side-weave, run-out, and eccentricity. The hub diameter shall 48
be at least 1.7 times the bore size. 49
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 23 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
5. Large steel sprockets shall be manufactured by inserting a steel hub into a steel 1
plate sprocket. Steel hub and sprocket contact surfaces shall be accurately 2
machined before welding. Welds shall be continuous and shall have strength equal 3
to the sprocket shear area at the hub diameter. 4
6. Sprocket pitch diameter as indicated in the Drawings. 5
7. Sprockets shall be keyed to shafts. 6
8. All chain drive systems shall be accurately aligned with sprockets, spaced at a 7
proper center distance, and closely supported by approved tapered roller bearings. 8
Provide means for appropriate bearing lubrication 9
9. Chain tensioning devices must be provided as required maintain appropriate chain 10
tension. Tensioning devices must be field-adjustable and must be installed so as to 11
not impede operation of device or adjacent devices. 12
10. Guides shall be provided to maintain full engagement of the chain on all sprockets. 13
14
L. Electrical Enclosures and Panels 15
1. Recessed panels shall be contained within code gauge, formed, and welded, steel 16
back boxes or rack mount style enclosures. The operating panels shall be 17
minimum 16-gauge steel or 6061-T6 aluminum plate, recessed within the back box 18
to a depth sufficient to permit a locking hinged door to completely cover the panel 19
without affecting any device within the enclosure. The front surface of the cabinet 20
cover shall be flush with the finished wall surface. 21
2. Surface mounted enclosures shall be code gauge steel back boxes, with all seams 22
and joints continuously welded and ground smooth. Surface mounted cabinets 23
shall conform to NEMA ICS 6-1993 R200, Type 3; type shall be appropriate to the 24
location. Operating panel shall be mounted per the drawings, on the front cover 25
of the enclosure or recessed within the back box to a depth sufficient to permit a 26
locking hinged door to completely cover the panel without affecting any device. 27
3. Rack mounted panels shall be contained within a NRTL-listed rack. Surface 28
mounted cabinets shall conform to NEMA standards. The operating panels shall 29
be minimum 16-gauge steel or 6061-T6 aluminum plate, recessed within the rack 30
to a depth sufficient to permit a locking hinged door to completely cover the panel 31
without affecting any device within the enclosure. 32
4. Internal components shall be protected by a locking mechanism to prevent 33
unauthorized access. An integral device shall be provided to hold the operating 34
panel open for service. Complete accessibility to internal components shall be 35
provided when opened. Internal bracing shall be provided where required by 36
panel size to prevent flexing of the panels. 37
5. All steel shall be zinc-phosphate treated, primed with a coat of zinc chromate, and 38
finish painted with baked enamel. All aluminum panels shall be anodized and then 39
be painted with a thermo setting epoxy paint. All finish colors shall be as selected 40
by the Architect’s Consultant. 41
6. All labels and legends shall be permanently engraved directly into the faceplate. 42
Engravings shall be filled with contrasting color enamel. Micarta, lamicoid, and 43
other types of engraved plastic labels shall not be used unless permanently, 44
mechanically attached. Dry transfer, decals, plastic "Dymo," or other types of 45
adhesive labels or silk screened legends shall not be used. 46
7. All control panel face plates shall have beveled edges and rounded corners. 47
8. Panel(s) shall have a nameplate in a conspicuous location identifying the Rigging 48
Contractor, Project and Panel Designation. 49
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 24 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
9. Each panel shall be completely factory-wired internally, with permanently 1
identified barrier type terminal strips provided for the connection of the external 2
wiring. All panels shall be factory tested. 3
4
M. Motor control cabinets 5
1. Cabinet(s) shall be of steel framed construction with applied steel side, top and 6
bottom panels, equal to a NEMA Type 3 rating. All components shall be factory 7
primed and painted. 8
2. Cabinet(s) shall have a locking front door with an integral safety-interlock, which 9
when the door is opened shall automatically disable the main electrical feed to the 10
panel. 11
3. Cabinet(s) shall contain all motor control system electronics, starters, and power. 12
4. All wires inside the cabinet(s) shall be identified at the jacket with separate 13
numbers. 14
5. An engraved Lamicoid label shall be bolted or riveted to the front of each cabinet, 15
to read: 16
(Name of Venue) 17
(Name of Rigging Motor Control Cabinet) 18
(Axis Name #1) 19
(Axis Name #2) 20
(Etc.) 21
22
Schuler Shook Theatre Planners, Dallas, TX 23
(Name, Location and Phone Number of Rigging Contractor) 24
(Year of Commissioning) 25
6. Install where shown in the Drawings. 26
27
N. Limit Switches 28
1. All linear motion monitoring switches shall be furnished with rotary lever arm, 29
cam, or plunger style operators. All adjustable linear motion monitoring limit 30
switches shall include sufficient liquid-tight, flexible conduit and wire including 31
grounding conductor, to permit at least 10 ft. of movement for adjustment. 32
2. All rotary motion monitoring limit switches shall have a minimum NEMA Type 12 33
or IP65 rated surface mounted enclosure with provisions for conduit fitting 34
mounting. Each limit switch shall employ a lead screw or gear driven, ball bearing 35
supported camshaft and associated precision, snap-action type contact assemblies. 36
Each circuit shall be actuated by an individually adjustable cam operator. 37
3. All intermediate position limit switches shall provide accurate positioning 38
regardless of direction of travel. See Drawings for intermediate preset positions. 39
4. All motor-operated equipment shall be equipped with normal travel limit switches 40
to stop motion at each end of travel and redundant over-travel limits which shall 41
remove power from the motor when actuated at each over-travel limit of travel. 42
All over-travel limit switches, when struck, shall de-energize the corresponding 43
motor, and all other affected motors until the assembly is manually reset. Bypass 44
and reset over-travel limits shall be limited to authorized, trained personnel; bypass 45
and reset shall not be possible from a user control panel. 46
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 25 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
5. All limit switches shall be located so as to be easily accessible following installation 1
for adjustment and observation. 2
6. Exact limit settings will be verified in the field during commissioning. 3
4
O. Encoders shall be used to provide position and speed data for all permanently installed 5
motorized rigging sets with programmable presets or positional feedback, as indicated 6
in the Drawings. These encoders shall be capable of retaining position data during 7
emergency stop and normal power down events. 8
9
P. Safety and Protective Devices 10
1. Slack line detection shall be provided for each lift line by means of a low-voltage 11
detecting device. Lift line contact with this detector shall signal a slack condition 12
to the control system. This requirement does not apply to fire curtain systems. 13
2. Interlocks 14
a. Shear Protection. All shear conditions shall be protected by full-length, 15
continuous pressure tube, astragal tape, or other fail-safe pressure sensitive 16
shear point guards as approved by the Architect’s Consultant. 17
b. Access Management. All locations and access points indicated in the 18
Drawings shall be protected by safety switches or door interlocks. All of 19
these protection devices shall interlock in their respective "safe" positions 20
before any motion can be initiated. All interlocks shall remain in their 21
respective "safe" positions for motion to continue. Temporary or permanent 22
tripping of any interlock to an "unsafe" position while axis is in motion shall 23
stop the axis and require manual resetting. 24
1. Where indicated, door interlocks shall disable the door from being 25
opened when engaged. Keyed bypass switches shall be provided 26
outside the area to override the interlock. An emergency bypass switch 27
shall be on the inside of the area. The emergency switch shall stop 28
motion in the axis. 29
2. Safety switches and interlocks on guards shall have a means of bypass 30
for system maintenance. This bypass shall be limited to authorized 31
personnel. 32
33
Q. Actuators 34
1. Actuators shall be electrically operated linear actuators. 35
2. Actuators shall have a clear path of travel for full range of specified motion. 36
3. Actuators shall be sized for the load and stroke required as shown in the Drawings. 37
For those applications where the actuators are used to maintain loads in 38
compression or tension, the actuator shall be selected using a design factor of 8. 39
4. Actuators shall be selected to meet the associated rigging device’s duty cycle. 40
5. Actuators shall be provided with adjustable disc slip clutches. Breaking force shall 41
be as indicated in Drawings. 42
6. Install as shown in the Drawings. 43
44
R. Electrical Cable Management 45
1. Power Cable Reel 46
a. Steel frame construction. 47
b. Yellow powder coated finish 48
c. Thermoplastic slip ring cover 49
d. Slip ring assembly for required number of conductors. 50
e. Adjustable guide arm 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 26 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
f. Sealed, lubricated spring motor canister, no ratchet 1
g. Provide Kellems Grips for attachment at the orchestra shell ceiling. 2
h. Provide J-bolts for gridiron mounting. 3
i. Refer to rigging drawings to calculate the cable length and required travel. 4
j. Provide black cables 5
2. Acceptable Products: 6
a. Conductix-Wampfler, GafferReels 7
b. Approved equal 8
3. Quantity 9
a. As indicated on drawings. 10
4. Data Cable Reel 11
a. Steel frame construction. 12
b. Thermoplastic slip ring cover 13
c. Slip ring assembly for required number of conductors. 14
d. Adjustable guide arm 15
e. Sealed, lubricated spring motor canister, no ratchet 16
f. Provide Kellems Grips for attachment at the orchestra shell ceiling. 17
g. Provide J-bolts for gridiron mounting. 18
h. Refer to rigging drawings to calculate the DMX cable length and required 19
travel. 20
i. Provide black cables 21
22
5. Acceptable Products: 23
a. Conductix-Wampfler, GafferReels 24
b. Approved equal 25
6. Quantity 26
a. As indicated on drawings. 27
28
2.20 MOTORIZED RIGGING HOISTS 29
30
A. Each hoist shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified loads at the specified 31
speed. 32
33
B. Hoist assemblies shall consist of a self-contained winch module mounted on a common 34
frame on the gridiron. Frames shall be designed and engineered to resolve all lateral 35
forces associated with normal set operation. 36
37
C. Each lineshaft winch module shall contain a wire rope drum for each hoist line 38
scheduled on Drawings, a motor/brake and gear reducer, coupled together with a 39
common shaft. Each cable drum shall support a wire rope, which in turn supports the 40
scheduled batten. Each cable drum shall wind in the opposite direction to the adjacent 41
drum(s) in a manner that will prevent longitudinal movement of the batten. 42
D. All motors, hoisting cables, chain, sheaves, hardware, etc., shall be rated for overhead 43
lifting; capable of supporting design loads as shown, with minimum safety factor of 44
eight (8) and shall be of, or treated with, corrosion resistant materials. 45
46
E. All electronic components shall be sized at 200% of nominal capacity. 47
48
F. Each hoist assembly shall have an affixed engraved name plate. The name plate shall 49
include the following information: hoist number, lifting capacity, sustaining capacity, 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 27 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
incoming power source (including voltage, panel number, circuit numbers and panel 1
location) and manufacturer’s name and 24 hour service phone number. 2
3
G. Hoist shall have the following performance requirements in addition to those listed 4
above: 5
1. Stopping distance of one-half inch (1/2") at full load at full speed under normal 6
operation 7
2. Preset targets and limit settings to ½” accuracy. 8
3. Normal travel speed of 16 feet per minute 9
4. Speed regulation within 5% at full load 10
11
12
2.21 MOTORIZED HOIST CONTROL 13
14
A. Rigging Motor Control System Functions 15
1. The control system shall be specifically designed for the control of motorized 16
theatrical rigging equipment. It shall provide a level of reliability, accuracy, and 17
integrity appropriate for overhead lifting in places of public assembly. 18
2. The system shall be capable of controlling all specified hoists but shall not allow 19
more than four hoists to operate simultaneously. Programmed play positions trims 20
shall be stored in non-volatile memory. 21
3. The control system shall perform the functions as noted for specific elements 22
below. This list of functional requirements describes the minimum operating 23
parameters of the systems. 24
a. Stage Electrics 25
1. Operator authorization levels to ensure secure access levels and lockout 26
levels of operation and control as noted in this Section. 27
2. Axis grouping allowing multiple axes to operate simultaneously with different 28
target positions. 29
3. Programmability of target position and group. 30
31
B. Acoustical Banner Control System Functions 32
1. The control system shall be specifically designed for the control of 33
motorized acoustical banner curtain equipment. It shall provide a level of 34
reliability, accuracy, and integrity appropriate for overhead lifting in places 35
of public assembly. 36
2. The system shall be capable of controlling all specified hoists but shall not 37
allow more than 18 hoists to operate simultaneously. 38
3. The control system shall perform the functions as noted for specific 39
elements below. This list of functional requirements describes the 40
minimum operating parameters of the systems. 41
a. Acoustic Banners 42
1. Axis grouping for operating multiple hoists together. 43
2. Hold to run push buttons for each grouping of motors. 44
3. E-stop button. 45
46
C. Emergency Stop 47
1. The emergency stop system shall meet NFPA-79 (Electrical Standard for Industrial 48
Machinery) 49
2. The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit 50
that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operation shall 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 28 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
not depend on software or semiconductors. 1
3. Emergency Stop. There shall be a single emergency stop system that shall, when 2
activated, stop all elements as shown in the Drawings. 3
a. Emergency stop actuators shall be rear-illuminated mushroom pushbutton 4
switches. Operation shall be PUSH to engage and TWIST to release. Color: 5
red. 6
4. Both systems shall function as noted below. 7
a. Category 0: Activation shall directly remove power by means of 8
electromechanical components, using a UL580E Type 2, non-welding, 9
positive break contactor(s). 10
b. Category 1: A controlled stop per NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for 11
Industrial Machinery) shall be provided. The system shall stop all motors and 12
remove power in not less than 0.75 seconds. 13
c. Engagement of the system shall remove power from the motors, but not the 14
control system electronics. 15
d. Feedback 16
1. When activated all pushbuttons described in this paragraph shall be 17
illuminated and shall flash to indicate a “STOP” condition. Buttons shall 18
continue to flash until system has been taken out of “STOP” condition. 19
2. The system shall provide visual feedback on the motor control panel as 20
to the specific control location that has initiated the “STOP” condition. 21
e. When the system is taken out of the “STOP” condition no movement shall 22
begin automatically. 23
5. Panel design and location as shown in the Drawings. 24
6. E-stops shall be located in all control panels, on the stage right/left wall, and at the 25
rigging motor control cabinet. 26
27
D. Software 28
1. Motor Control 29
a. The system shall provide a controller; preset creation and editing 30
facilities. 31
2. The system shall be capable of the following operating parameters: 32
a. Jog - One axis can be selected and operated directly. 33
b. Single Target – axes may be simultaneously directed to a common 34
target height. 35
3. Presets 36
a. Presets shall be able to be composed, stored, modified, and recalled to 37
allow recording and re-creation of movements. 38
b. Presets shall be recorded in a manner similar to cues to provide a 39
defined starting point for the following cues. 40
41
E. User interface 42
1. The control system shall be comprised of individual control panels as 43
shown in the Drawings. Each panel may contain one or more of the 44
following control elements: 45
a. Emergency Stop Button(s) as described in this section. 46
b. One ON/OFF key switch. Provide five (5) keys. Switch shall not allow 47
removal of key when in the ON position. 48
c. Movement Controls: One set of two (2) momentary contact switches, 49
labeled with the appropriate directional destination. It shall be 50
necessary to maintain contact on the switch in order to maintain 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 29 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
movement. A dedicated DEADMAN switch shall be acceptable as an 1
alternative to push to run switches. 2
d. Set Trim Controls: Controls shall be an illuminated push-button. 3
Controls shall set two (2) intermediate targets between the mechanical 4
upper and lower limits. The location of these intermediate targets shall 5
be as indicated in the dynamic display, and shall be selectable within 6
1/2 in. Button shall flash when the location has been stored in the 7
control software. The user will be required to hold the button for three 8
(3) seconds in order to set the trim position. 9
2. Local Control 10
a. Provide local motor control in immediate proximity to each individual 11
motor location. 12
b. Control at motors shall be in NEMA type 1 housings. In addition to 13
pushbuttons for control of stop, up, down and overtravel limit bypass, 14
control stations at motors shall include a three-position switch for 15
delegating control of motor to local-off-normal. All STOP functions, 16
whether local or remote, shall function regardless of the position of the 17
local-off-normal selector switch. 18
1. Maintenance pendants may be provided for local control functions 19
provided that the connection of a fixed speed style control pendant to a 20
variable speed unit will not result in motion or damage to the 21
connected units or vice versa. Connectors shall equal AMPHENOL 22
MS or 97 series. When a maintenance pendant is plugged in the unit 23
shall automatically switch from Normal to Local mode. 24
3. All labels and legends shall be permanently engraved into the face of the 25
panel and filled with a contrasting paint. No surface-mounted labels or tags 26
of any kind will be permitted. No decals or silk-screened legends will be 27
permitted. 28
4. Provide vinyl dust covers for all equipment components that are not wall-29
mounted. 30
31
F. The system shall be capable of sending and receiving commands from other control 32
systems or devices as shown in the Drawings. 33
34
G. Removed 35
36
H. Signage 37
1. Provide an engraved lamicoid placard at each control panel location. 38
2. Placard shall include the following information: 39
a. Name, address, and phone number of stage rigging contractor. 40
b. Cautionary notice: 41
CAUTION 42
HEAVY LOADS OVERHEAD. 43
DO NOT OPERATE STAGE RIGGING SYSTEM 44
WITHOUT PROPER TRAINING. 45
c. Notice regarding the necessity of periodic inspections. 46
I. All components shall be UL listed and carry UL labels. 47
48
J. Install as indicated in the Drawings. 49
50
K. Quantities as per schedule. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 30 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
L. Approved Equipment: 2
1. JR Clancy 3
2. Stage Technologies 4
3. Texas Scenic 5
4. Electronic Theatre Controls 6
7
2.22 CURTAIN FABRICS 8
9
A. Refer to drawings for new curtain sizes and quantities. All fabrics shall be first quality. 10
All fabrics shall be produced from one dye lot per color. Color quality shall be 11
consistent throughout, with no visible streaking, striping, or spotting. 12
13
B. Fabric for Grand Curtain shall be 25-ounce combed velour with liner. Color shall be 14
selected by Architect. Approved fabric manufacturers: 15
1. KM Fabrics 16
2. JB Martin 17
18
C. Fabric for borders, legs, black out drapes and traveler curtains shall be 25-ounce 19
synthetic velour. Color shall be black. Approved fabric manufacturers: 20
1. KM Fabrics 21
2. JB Martin 22
3. I. Weiss & Sons 23
24
D. Fabric for scrim curtains shall be black sharkstooth scrim. Color shall be black. 25
Approved fabric manufacturers: 26
1. Rose Brand 27
2. Dazian Fabrics 28
29
E. Fabric for Cyclorama shall be seamless cotton. Color shall be bleached white. 30
Approved Fabric: 31
1. Rose Brand Seamless Translucent Muslin 32
2. Gerriets international Shirting Bleached Muslin 33
34
F. Fabric for Heat Stop Border curtains shall be 26-ounce heat resistant fabric. Color shall 35
be black. Approved Fabric: 36
1. Canvas Specialty Co. # CSC-G2P 37
2. ZetexPLUS 800 38
39
G. Approved jute upholstery webbing for top of curtains: Dazian 3-1/2" Wide #115062 40
41
2.23 STAGE CURTAIN TRACK ACCESSORIES 42
43
A. For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality desired, curtain tracks and certain 44
other products of Automatic Devices Company (ADC), 2121 S. Twelfth St., Allentown, 45
PA, (610) 767-6000, have been used in this specification and in the drawings. 46
47
B. Refer to Drawings and Rigging Schedule for equipment types, sizes and quantities. 48
49
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 31 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
C. Channel Traveler Track Type - Silent Steel 283-R Series Track complete with all 1
necessary accessories for manual rope pull operation. Specific track lengths are shown 2
in the Rigging Schedule. Included equipment: 3
1. 8” Adjustable Floor Pulley: ADC No. FTSP-8 4
2. 8” Live End Pulley: ADC No. 2863-A 5
3. 8” Dead End Pulley: ADC No. 2864-A 6
4. 1/2” Synthetic center pull cord: ADC No. 2830 Cord 7
5. Single Carriers equipped with neoprene-tired ball bearing wheels: ADC No.2849 8
6. Master Carriers equipped with neoprene-tired ball bearing wheels ADC No.2850 9
7. Back-Pack Guide: ADC No.2833-A 10
8. Rubber Bumpers ADC No. 2825 11
9. Curtains shall be connected to Carriers by means of a heavy-duty steel self-closing 12
clip at each Carrier which connects the trim chain of each Carrier to grommets 13
located at the top of the curtains. Connection by means of S-Hook or other 14
device requiring tools to open or close shall not be acceptable. 15
16
D. I-Beam Traveler Track Type – Patriarc 501-R SeriesTrack complete with all necessary 17
accessories for manual rope pull operation. All components shall be black. Specific 18
track lengths are shown in the Rigging Schedule. Included equipment: 19
1. 8” Adjustable Floor Pulley: ADC No. FTSP-8 20
2. Live End Pulley: ADC No. 5003 21
3. Dead End Pulley: ADC No. 5004 22
4. 1/2” Synthetic center pull cord: ADC No. 2830 Cord 23
5. Single Carriers equipped with neoprene-tired ball bearing wheels: ADC No.5001-A 24
6. Master Carriers equipped with neoprene-tired ball bearing wheels ADC No.5002 25
7. Hanging Clamps: ADC No. 5008 26
8. Ceiling Clamps: ADC No. 5023 27
9. End Stops: ADC No. 5009 28
10. Curtains shall be connected to Carriers by means of a heavy-duty steel self-closing 29
clip at each Carrier that connects the trim chain of each Carrier to grommets 30
located at the top of the curtains. Connection by means of S-Hook or other 31
device requiring tools to open or close shall not be acceptable. 32
33
E. I-Beam Walk-Along Track Type – Patriarc 602-A SeriesTrack complete with all 34
necessary accessories for manual rope pull operation. All components shall be black. 35
Specific track lengths are shown in the Rigging Schedule. Included equipment: 36
1. Single Carriers equipped with neoprene-tired ball bearing wheels: ADC No.5001-A 37
2. Master Carriers equipped with neoprene-tired ball bearing wheels ADC No.5002 38
3. Hanging Clamps: ADC No. 5008 39
4. Ceiling Clamps: ADC No. 5023 40
5. End Stops: ADC No. 5009 41
6. Pull cords 42
7. Curtains shall be connected to Carriers by means of a heavy-duty steel self-closing 43
clip at each Carrier that connects the trim chain of each Carrier to grommets 44
located at the top of the curtains. Connection by means of S-Hook or other 45
device requiring tools to open or close shall not be acceptable. 46
47
2.24 OUTRIGGER BATTEN 48
49
A. Outrigger batten shall be nominal 1-1/2 inch black steel pipe, ASTM A53/A Strong 50
(Schedule 40), stripped and painted with at least one (1) coat of flat black paint. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 32 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
B. Batten shall be supported from the T-bar battery ten (10) feet O.C. by brackets made of 2
steel plate. 3
C. 4
D. Outrigger batten shall extend the full width of the lock rail and be rigidly fastened at 5
each end. 6
E. 7
F. Install as shown in the Drawings. 8
9
2.25 INDEX STRIP LIGHT 10
11
A. Provide Index Strip Light as shown on drawings. Fixture to be hung by chains as 12
shown on drawings. The light source will be a dimmable LED. Provide two colors of 13
LED, white and blue. Controller will have separate dimming controls for white and 14
blue. Controller will have an indicator light to locate the switch in dark areas. 15
16
B. All high voltage and low voltage wires must be in conduit. 17
18
C. Acceptable manufacturers: Lumenesce Index Strip. 19
20
D. Quantity: As shown on drawings 21
22
2.26 SYSTEM SIGNAGE 23
24
A. Provide placard(s), placed in conspicuous location(s) and as indicated on Drawings, 25
visible from the operating area(s), with information on stage rigging system. 26
27
B. Sign shall be screen-printed plastic, permanently secured, filled with contrasting paint, 28
with text as shown in the Drawings. 29
30
C. Size and quantity per Drawings. 31
32
D. Coordinate mounting location in the field with Architect’s Consultant. 33
34
2.27 MOTORIZED ACOUSTIC BANNER 35
36
A. Type: Electrically operated Variable Acoustic Banner capable of being wall or 37
ceiling mounted, consisting of frame, fabric, motor with electric brake and 38
mechanical limits, positioning sensor, roller tube, tension and diverter tubes. 39
40
B. Mounting Positions: Ceiling Banners must be rigidly attached to structure. 41
Supply cross bracing if necessary. 42
43
C. Frame: A heavy duty frame in standard mill finish aluminum, constructed to 44
mount either from the top or rear, shall support and house the motor assembly 45
and banner. 46
1. There shall be an integral mounting system built into the frame for 47
mounting to the building structure. 48
49
D. Infill Panels: The frame shall have infill panels made of low VO Sintra, 50
removable for maintenance. Color Selection: Black 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 33 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
E. Motor: The motor shall be UL approved, single phase 120 VAC, 60Hz, 4 wire, 2
instantly reversing, permanent split capacitor motor. Motor shall be lifetime 3
lubricated, and equipped with an internal thermal overload protector, and 4
electric fail-safe brake, and pre-set limit switches. 5
1. The system shall be capable of nominal lifting speed of 27 - 30/fpm. The 6
motor and drive system shall be sized to accommodate the size and weight 7
of the specified banner. 8
2. The motor shall be fitted with a plug/cord connection to allow for 9
installation of banners after electrical work has been completed. Connector 10
shall be a Mini 4 pin connector (“7/8” trade size) extended ground pin. 11
3. Starter and encoder for each machine shall be supplied by this contractor. 12
13
F. Limit Switches: The motor shall incorporate two internal, mechanical-type limit 14
switches. 15
1. The switches shall directly remove power from the motor circuit when they 16
are tripped. 17
2. They shall be adjustable at any time without the need for laptops or other 18
accessory equipment. Limits may be engaged or disengaged with the 19
simple push of a button on the motor to allow for fabric maintenance or 20
adjustment. 21
22
G. Positioning Sensor: The banner assembly shall incorporate a separate solid 23
state encoder as a positioning sensor to provide feedback information to the 24
controls. 25
1. The positioning sensor shall be fitted within the frame to read the position 26
of the main roller tube. This position information is sent to the control 27
system to provide real time position of the banner to the operator. This 28
information updates even when the banner is moving. 29
2. The sensor shall be fitted with a plug/cord connection to allow for 30
installation of banners after electrical work has been completed. Connector 31
shall be a M12 4 pin connector. 32
3. Encoders that are incorporated within the motor and are not replaceable 33
are not acceptable. 34
35
2.28 ACOUSTIC BANNER FABRIC PANELS 36
37
A. Fabric: 29oz per linear yard, 100% Wool, Durably Flame Retardant. 38
1. The fabric panel is one continuous fabric loop which is seamless and flat. 39
2. Colors may be manufacturer’s standard colors. Black 40
3. Fabric shall meet NFPA 701 testing standards. 41
42
B. Fabric Panel: The banner shall have an inner chamber of 3” depth formed by 43
the bottom tube weight and two idler rollers within the frame. The two planes 44
of fabric shall be parallel and separate at a constant distance of 3” over the full 45
height and width of the banner. 46
47
C. The banner fabric shall be kept taut by means of an internal bottom tube weight. 48
49
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 34 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
D. Banners shall travel vertically and plumb. There shall be no folding of the banner 1
fabric; it shall be fully enclosed in the frame described above and as shown on 2
the drawings. 3
4
E. Exposed fabric shall be seamless, height as specified on drawings; maximum 20’ 5
tall. 6
7
F. Fabric edges shall be cut straight, plumb and true. Selvage shall not be 8
incorporated in the width of the banner. 9
10
PART 3 - EXECUTION 11
12
3.1 INSTALLATION, LABOR AND SUPERVISION 13
14
A. Employ only fully trained stage riggers, assisted by competent common laborers, for the 15
erection and installation of the stage equipment and related accessories herein specified. 16
Stage Riggers shall be adequately and properly trained in the erection and installation of 17
the style of rigging specified herein. Employ a competent superintendent on the work 18
at all times. 19
20
B. Install all items of the stage and auditorium rigging where indicated and completely 21
connect and make operative as specified. Install in accordance with generally accepted 22
theatre industry practices and the following references. 23
1. USITT Recommended Guidelines for Stage Rigging and Stage Machinery 24
2. Macwhyte Wire Rope Handbook (published by Macwhyte Wire Rope Company) 25
3. Rigging Manual (published by the Construction Safety Association) 26
4. Wire Rope Users Manual (published by American Iron and Steel Institute) 27
28
C. Install draperies at scheduled locations. After installation, all curtains and draperies 29
shall be thoroughly brushed to remove all loose dust, visible dirt, fabric lint, loose 30
threads, etc. Wrinkles will be permitted to fall out naturally. All curtains, or draperies, 31
shall hang level and be uniformly in contact with the stage floor along the entire width 32
of the curtain, or drapery. 33
34
D. Install cable clips where specified in accordance with manufacturer's installation 35
instructions with correct amount of torque on nuts. After installation, apply a load to 36
each batten and re-check for proper torque on nuts of cable clips. Battens shall be 37
trimmed level to the horizon and parallel to the stage or auditorium floor to a tolerance 38
of ±½" over the length of the batten. 39
40
E. Maintain wire rope fleet angles at one and one-half degrees (1½) or less. Install Mule 41
Blocks as required to maintain specified angles. System should run quietly in every 42
respect when operated. 43
44
F. Install electrical devices provided under this section for proper hoisting of equipment. 45
Install cable saddles and rigging for plugstrips and hanging plug box SO cables. Cable 46
saddles are furnished under other section and installed under this section. Electrical 47
cables shall be installed in such a manner that the entire length of all cables is in a plane 48
parallel to the associated set and so that, except for the terminal, no portion of the cable 49
ever rests on or interferes with the electrical device supplied. Provide support, muling, 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 35 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
and turning blocks as required for proper support and movement of the electrical cables 1
and cords. 2
3
G. Install counterweight arbors so they may be loaded at the loading gallery when batten is 4
at scheduled low trim. 5
6
3.2 FLAMEPROOFING OF FABRICS 7
8
A. All fabrics used in the fabrication of the curtains and draperies herein specified, if not 9
inherently flame-resistant by nature and fiber content of their own construction, shall be 10
chemically flameproofed, by immersion process with pressure rolled extraction, in a 11
formula approved by the Bureau of Standards of the United States Department of 12
Commerce, and the finished fabrics, after treatment shall pass such tests as required by 13
the Fire Marshal of the city of installation. A certificate for each type and color of cloth 14
used in the fabrication of curtains and draperies for this project shall be furnished to the 15
Architect before request for payment for such equipment is made. The certificate shall 16
provide the following information: 17
1. The name of the Rigging Contractor. 18
2. The name and color of the fabric covered by the certificate. 19
3. The name of the firm doing the flameproofing (chemical treatment). 20
4. The date of the treatment. 21
5. The date of re-treatment will be required. 22
6. The name of the chemical formula used. 23
7. The method of application of the chemical used. 24
8. The signature of an officer of the company doing the flameproofing. 25
9. The signature of an officer of the company installing the equipment, herein known 26
as the Rigging Contractor. 27
10. Both signatures shall be affixed to the certificate. A Notary Public appointed 28
within the State where the flameproofing is done may witness the signature of the 29
officer of the company doing the flameproofing. The signature of the Rigging 30
Contractor may be notarized by a Notary Public appointed in the state of the 31
installation or where the Rigging Contractor’s office is located. 32
33
3.3 FABRICATION OF CURTAINS 34
A. All fabrics shall be sewn with box-pleats to specified fullness to jute upholstery 35
webbing. Pleats shall be spaced 12" o.c. All thread used in sewing these curtains and 36
draperies shall be cotton mercerized, and shall be the color of the fabric on which it is 37
used, both in the needle and bobbin. The needle thread shall not be lighter than #16 in 38
size, and the bobbin thread shall not be lighter than #24 in size. The same size thread 39
shall not be used in both needle and bobbin. Double rows of stitching shall be used to 40
sew the fabrics to the webbing. Bad stitching, missed stitches, puckered seams and 41
hems, etc., will not be acceptable. All seams shall be sewn in straight and even lines. 42
43
B. All panels of fabric shall be of a single piece for the entire height of the curtain in which 44
it is used. No splicing of fabric to achieve a desired length of cloth will be acceptable. 45
46
C. Linings shall be sewn into the top hem with same fullness as curtain. Vertical hems 47
shall be 1-1/2" and shall fall 6" inside the curtain size. Tack to curtain with 3/4" 48
webbing on 12" center. Bottom hem to be 3" and 6" shorter than curtain. Tack to 49
curtain same as sides. Webbing tacks to allow enough slack to keep from distorting 50
curtains in any way, and to allow for stretching of curtain fabric. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 36 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
D. Unless otherwise noted, all pile fabrics shall have pile running up. 2
3
E. Bottom hems of all curtains shall be 6" and shall be weighed with a #6 galvanized 4
pump chain. This chain shall first be encased within a heavy canvas pocket, with the 5
pocket being sewn inside the hem at the top, thus keeping the chain from resting on the 6
bottom of the hem. 7
8
F. Center of all curtains shall be marked clearly on the top webbing. If ties are provided 9
with the curtain, they shall be black in color, except at center, unless otherwise noted. 10
11
G. Curtains, which are to be operated on traveler tracks, shall be equipped with black brass 12
grommets set on 12" centers along the top webbing. The curtain or drapery shall be 13
connected to the track carriers by means of a galvanized carrier-to-curtain fastener, as 14
previously specified, at each grommet. Traveler panels shall be sewn with half-width 15
fold-back on both leading and trailing edges. 16
17
H. Curtains, or draperies, which are to be 'dead-hung' on battens (legs and borders) shall be 18
unpleated and shall be equipped with No. 2, or brass grommets and 30" long tie lines 19
made from No. 4 cotton mason's line, the grommets to be set on 6" centers. Vertical 20
hems of all "dead hung" curtains and draperies shall be 6". 21
22
I. The cyclorama curtain shall be one piece, flat with no pleats or seams. Side bottom and 23
top hems shall be the same as a standard curtain. The 6" wide bottom hem shall have a 24
special canvas flap sewn the continuous length behind it. Heavy duty snaps are to be 25
provided on 2' centers along the entire length of this canvas flap. When the flap is 26
snapped up and holding the 1" pipe weight that is to be furnished, the flap shall not be 27
seen from the front and curtain shall be perfectly flat. 28
29
J. After installation in the building in their proper positions and prior to Owner turnover, 30
all curtains shall be thoroughly brushed to remove all loose dust, visible dirt, fabric lint, 31
loose threads, etc. Wrinkles will be permitted to fall out naturally. 32
33
K. Curtains shall have a permanent tag (no larger than 4" x 3") affixed to the top, upstage 34
right corner of each finished panel. Each tag shall include the following information: 35
1. Name of Facility. 36
2. Name of company installing the equipment specified in this section. 37
3. Date installed. 38
4. Finished size (example 24'-0" H x 5'-0" W). 39
5. Use (see Rigging Schedule). 40
6. Fabric manufacturer, name, weight and color. 41
42
L. Grand curtain 43
1. Fabric pile shall run down. 44
2. Grand curtain height shall be determined by field measurement, to ensure that the 45
top of curtain is not visible from any seat in auditorium. Finished height shall be 46
this field measurement or dimension stated in curtain schedule, whichever is 47
greater. 48
3. Grand curtain shall have vertical rows of “D” rings attached 12” O.C. to the back 49
side of the curtain. Curtain shall have no vertical fullness. Sewn-in horizontal 50
18 September 2018 11 61 33 - 37 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
fullness will vary from 0 – 200%, as required for shaping. Overall horizontal 1
fulness is 100%. Desired curtain edge shaping is linear, rather than scalloped. 2
3
3.4 CLEARANCES 4
A. Entire rigging system and components shall, when completed, be free running and free 5
from binding, rubbing, bumping, etc., in all respects. 6
7
B. Trim all curtains or draperies that are operated on traveler tracks at the drapery trim 8
chain. Curtains shall be trimmed ¼" above the finished floor with a tolerance of +/-9
1/8". 10
11
3.5 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL 12
13
A. A representative of the Contractor, fully knowledgeable and qualified in Rigging 14
Systems operation, shall provide four (4) hours of instruction to the Owner designated 15
personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall 16
be arranged through the Owner and will occur over up to two sessions. 17
18
3.6 CLEANING OF THE SITE 19
20
A. Remove from the site all rubbish, trash, discarded packing materials, cartons, and other 21
debris caused by daily operations. Upon completion of work, the entire area of work 22
shall be left in broom and mop clean condition. 23
24
25
END OF SECTION 11 61 33 26
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
SECTION 11 61 53 1
2
STAGE LIGHTING INSTRUMENTS AND PORTABLE EQUIPMENT 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6
7
1.1 GENERAL 8
9
A. General provisions of the Contract apply to work of this section. 10
11
B. All lighting instruments specified herein shall be furnished to the jobsite new and in 12
unopened factory shipping containers. Lamps and accessories shall be packed separate 13
from instruments. 14
15
1.2 GUARANTEE 16
17
A. All instruments shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a 18
period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the Owner and/or 19
Architect/Consultant. Instruments deemed defective within this period shall be 20
replaced by the Supplier at no additional cost to the owner. 21
22
B. Quartz lamps shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a 23
period of no less than 90 days from date of acceptance. Arc lamps shall have a full 24
warranty for one-half of rated life and prorated warranty thereafter to end of rated life. 25
Lamps failing in this period shall be replaced with new lamps at no additional charge. 26
27
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 28
29
A. Shop drawings and equipment data sheets shall be submitted to the 30
Architect/Consultant in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. 31
32
B. Acceptance of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment purchase or 33
fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner as 34
specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial 35
submittals will be accepted. 36
37
C. Submit five (5) copies of catalog data sheets (8-1/2" x 11"), neatly bound in sets with 38
title page, space for submittal stamps, and tabbed dividers between sections 39
(Architect/Consultant to retain one catalog set). Additional copies of this set of data 40
sheets will be required with record drawings. Catalogs shall contain data sheets, in 41
proper order, on all equipment proposed with part or model number clearly indicated. 42
Provide a complete list of proposed equipment with reference to its corresponding 43
specification section/paragraph number or equipment title. Denote all deviations from 44
specified equipment on the list. 45
46
D. Shop drawings shall indicate complete data on instruments and accessories including 47
but not limited to: 48
1. Specifications and all photometrics (based on specified lamp) of instruments 49
2. Lamp manufacturer(s), types, and quantities 50
3. Roundel types, colors, and quantities 51
4. Plug and receptacle type and manufacturer 52
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
5. Details of C-clamps, safety cable, and gel frames 1
6. Details of all custom equipment and accessories 2
3
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS 4
5
A. Other manufacturers may bid selected equipment. In order to be considered, 6
manufacturers or suppliers other than those specified must submit to the 7
Architect/Consultant a letter expressing their desire to bid. This letter shall be received 8
by the Architect/Consultant not later than ten (10) days prior to date of bid opening, 9
and shall include full details of equipment being offered. These details shall include 10
performance data, weights, and specifications in sufficient detail to fully describe 11
offered equipment. A statement shall accompany the substitute bid. This statement 12
shall be by an officer of the manufacturing firm submitting the proposed substitute that 13
the items on the bill of material are equal to those specified in quality of construction, 14
finish, forms, function, and performance in, of, and by each item. Statements by 15
representatives and sales agents will not be acceptable. The decision of the 16
Architect/Consultant as to the acceptability of the proposed alternate equipment, based 17
on the submitted data, shall be final. 18
19
B. Product Substitutions for procedures and requirements. All materials and equipment 20
specified herein have been determined to provide an overall physical appearance and 21
background of proven operation desired by the Owner, and therefore, are specified to 22
establish a standard of quality required for this project. If equipment or material other 23
than that specified is proposed to be furnished, this Supplier shall be required to furnish 24
the Architect/Consultant with such samples as he requires, the same to be submitted by 25
the Architect/Consultant to an independent testing laboratory selected by the Owner 26
for tests to determine the actual equality of the proposed substitute items. All costs and 27
charges incurred by these tests shall be borne by this Supplier. Should such tests prove 28
the substitute materials and equipment equal and acceptable, the Supplier shall be so 29
advised. The Architect/Consultant reserves the right to examine, and where necessary, 30
to have additional tests made by the same independent testing laboratory of the actual 31
equipment delivered to the jobsite to insure that the delivered equipment is equal in fact 32
to that specified. Should such secondary tests prove the equipment is satisfactory, the 33
Owner will pay the cost for such tests. Otherwise, this Supplier shall pay for the tests 34
and shall proceed to remove unacceptable equipment from the jobsite and to provide 35
that specified. The Architect/Consultant’s decision, based on this test, shall be final. 36
37
C. The specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and 38
arrangements as indicated therein. Acceptance of the shop drawings and/or submittals 39
indicates only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality, and assumes that the 40
specific requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans 41
and specifications. This Supplier shall, at no additional cost to the Owner, furnish all 42
accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and shall perform all work necessary for proper 43
functioning and to fit his substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated on 44
the plans and in the specification. 45
46
1.5 RECORDS FOR OWNER 47
48
A. Submit four (4) sets of the following data, prepared in neat brochures or packet folders, 49
to the Architect/Consultant. 50
1. All warranties and guarantees, and manufacturer's directions on all equipment and 51
material covered by the contract. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
2. Equipment brochures (cut sheets). 1
3. Accepted shop drawings. 2
4. Any and all other data and/or drawings required during construction. 3
5. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment. 4
6. Lamp types used in each instrument type. 5
7. Owner shall be provided with three (3) complete sets of approved brochures. 6
7
1.6 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 8
9
A. For purposes of establishing the quality and performance desired, products of the 10
following companies are approved as manufacturers of the herein specified equipment: 11
1. Portable lighting instruments and accessories: 12
a. Altman Stage Lighting 13
b. Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. 14
c. Leviton Manufacturing Company 15
d. Lighting & Electronics 16
e. Lycian 17
f. Robert Juliat 18
g. Strand Selecon Lighting 19
h. Strong Lighting 20
2. Quartz lamps: 21
a. GE Lighting 22
b. Osram Sylvania, Inc. 23
c. Philips Lighting Co. 24
3. Arc lamps: 25
a. Osram Sylvania, Inc. 26
b. Philips Lighting Co. 27
c. Ushio America, Inc. 28
4. Plugs and connectors: 29
a. Bates 30
b. Rosco Laboratories, Inc. 31
c. Union Connector Co., Inc. 32
5. Cable Assemblies: 33
a. Cable assemblies shall be from the following manufacturers 34
i. act Lighting, “Data”, Tour, and “Power” series. 35
ii. LEX Products, “PowerFlex” and “Data” series. 36
iii. TMB Associates “Pro” and “Data” series. 37
iv. Approved equal 38
39
B. Approval indicates approval of the manufacturer only and not approval of specific 40
products. The Contractor shall provide equipment, which meets or exceeds these 41
specifications. 42
43
44
PART 2 - MATERIALS 45
46
2.1 GENERAL 47
48
A. Provide the herein specified lighting instruments complete with plugs, accessories, and 49
lamps listed. 50
51
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
B. Provide lamps in quantities shown in the schedule. Provide appropriate lamp type, 1
which will cause instrument to meet or exceed specified performance. 2
3
C. All instruments and accessories shall be labeled with owner-designated initials and/or 4
words in permanent, heat resistant paint in 1/8" block letters. Label all portable cables 5
and jumpers similarly with printed heat-shrinkable tags located at both ends. Include 6
lengths on portable cable labels. Verify label location and lettering on shop drawings 7
prior to engraving or printing. 8
9
D. All lighting instruments shall meet or exceed manufacturer’s published electrical, 10
mechanical, environmental, and operational data for listed approved instruments 11
specified herein. 12
13
E. All lighting instruments shall conform to the following: 14
1. Each instrument shall include the following accessories: two color frames; one 15
heavy-duty yoke; one OSHA-approved safety cable and one heavy duty C-clamp. 16
C-clamp shall fit up to 2" (O.D.) pipe with separate adjustments for pipe size, pan, 17
and tilt, providing 360-degree rotation on the horizontal axis. C-clamp and yoke 18
shall be both equipped with positive hand locks not requiring tools for instrument 19
focus adjustment. C-clamp shall be equal to Colortran #158-003. 20
2. Each instrument, electrical device, and connector shall be approved by a Nationally 21
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL); and shall, when furnished and installed, 22
bear a factory affixed NRTL label. 23
3. Instrument performance information shall be furnished on request without cost 24
and shall be in the form and by methods approved by I.E.S./S.M.P.T.E. for such 25
reports. 26
4. Instruments shall be painted with a matte black high-heat resistant finish. 27
5. Refer to Schedule (Section 2.3) for quantities. 28
29
2.2 PORTABLE LIGHTING INSTRUMENTS 30
31
A. Profile Luminaire – LED 32
1. General 33
a. Shall be a color mixing luminaire employing min. four (4) LED engines. The 34
engine shall be capable of providing tunable white color temperature matched 35
presets as well as millions of permutations of color. 36
b. Shall conform to USITT DMX 512A protocol standards. 37
c. Shall have an integrated control system that provides local controls offering 38
access to set up parameters, preset color temperatures, stored custom presets, 39
and status reporting. 40
d. Shall have control inputs for DMX512 with input/output connectivity. The 41
luminaire shall have Remote Device Management (RDM) capabilities. 42
e. All LED luminaires shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure 43
overall compatibility. 44
f. Shall employ a system to rotate the shutter and reflector gate assembly 45
through a full 360 degrees. It shall be possible to use both an iris accessory 46
and gobo holder accessory concurrently if required. 47
g. Shall be supplied with a limited three-year warranty when used in normal 48
theatrical applications. 49
h. Shall be available with PowerCON in and through connectors allowing the 50
daisy chaining of power from luminaire to luminaire. 51
i. Power draw shall not exceed 580 watts with all LED engines are at full 52
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
output. 1
j. Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles. 2
k. Additional equipment per unit as follows: 3
1. Theatrical-style hanging yoke and c-clamp. 4
2. 5’ cable with Neutrik PowerCon™ to Edison plug. 5
3. Gate diffuser 6
4. A-size pattern holder 7
5. 5’ PowerCon to PowerCon cable for fixture power linking 8
6. Smooth Wash Diffuser for overlapping beams of light from multiple 9
fixtures 10
7. 5’ DMX cable. 11
2. Approved instruments: 12
a. ETC ColorSource Spot 13
b. Selecon PLProfile1 MKII LED 14
15
B. LED Adjustable Focus Profile 16
1. General 17
a. The luminaire shall have a molded glass reflector with multiple dichroic layers. 18
b. The luminaire shall have a lamp centering/field adjustment mechanism and a 19
bayonet action lamp changing system. Peak/Flat field adjustment shall be via 20
screw drive mechanism to insure smooth, tool free field settings. 21
c. Adequate ventilation shall be provided in the form of openings in the body 22
with proper baffling to prevent light leaks. 23
d. Lens tube shall have scale markings for field angle range and have smooth 24
zoom angle focus adjustment. It shall be possible to “lock” the focus 25
position. 26
e. The lens shall be fitted with heavy-duty color frame holders capable of 27
holding two standard metal color frames and retaining clip. 28
f. The lens tubes shall rotate a minimum of 50 degrees to provide optimum 29
luminaire orientation at all times. Luminaires offering limited range of motion 30
shall not be accepted. 31
g. The shutters shall be stainless steel. The shutters shall operate in a minimum 32
of three independent planes. It shall be possible to align any two adjacent 33
shutters parallel to one another. The three-plane gate assembly shall make 34
triangular patterns possible. Shutters shall be held in a spring loaded gate 35
assembly. 36
h. The rear housing assembly shall open for reflector cleaning. 37
2. Approved instruments: 38
a. Electronic Theatre Controls ColorSource Zoom Series 39
b. Approved Equal 40
3. Quantities: Refer to schedule. 41
42
C. PAR Spotlights – LED 43
1. General 44
a. Shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of 45
intensity and color. 46
b. Shall comply with the USITT DMX-512 A standard. 47
c. Additional equipment per fixture as follows: 48
1. Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard 49
2. 5’ power lead with Edison connector as standard 50
3. 5’ PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking 51
4. 5’ DMX cable 52
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
5. Multiple secondary lens options to include multiple angles in the following 1
patterns: 2
1. Linear 3
2. Round 4
3. Oblong 5
6. Provide base for floor mounting. 6
2. Approved PAR instruments: 7
a. ETC ColorSource PAR 8
b. Strand Lighting Spotlight SL PAR 155 Zoom 9
3. Quantities: Refer to schedule. 10
11
D. LED Cyclorama Lights 12
1. General 13
a. Shall be a color mixing luminaire red, green, blue, and white LED engines. 14
The engine shall be capable of providing color matched presets as well as 15
millions of permutations of color. 16
b. Shall conform to USITT DMX-512A protocol standards. 17
c. Shall have an integrated control system that provides local controls offering 18
access to set up parameters, preset colors, stored custom presets and chases, 19
and status reporting. 20
d. Shall have control inputs for DMX 512 and RDM via 5 Pin DMX connector. 21
e. Shall include an accessory slot above the lens. 22
f. Shall be supplied with a limited two-year warranty when used in normal 23
applications. 24
g. The Luminaire, in 16-bit mode, shall use 16-bit nonlinear scaling techniques 25
for high-resolution dimming. 26
h. The luminaire shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width 27
modulations (PWM) in concert with power factor control (PFC)to ensure a 28
smooth flicker free dim curve from 100 to 0 % and shall be imperceptible to 29
video cameras and video related devices. 30
i. Additional equipment per fixture as follows: 31
1. Standard c-clamps and necessary attachments. 32
2. 5’ power lead with Edison connector as standard. 33
3. 5’ PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking. 34
4. 5’ DMX cable. 35
2. Approved cyclorama unit: 36
a. Altman Spectra Cyc 100 37
b. ETC Colorsource Cyc, SCYC 38
3. Quantities: Refer to schedule. 39
40
E. Follow Spotlights 41
1. General 42
a. Lamp shall be metal halide type. 43
b. Spotlights shall have variable focal length lens system and provide no less than 44
80 fc at wide focus, measured 100’ from the unit. 45
c. The followspot shall use a zoom profile system, providing the following 46
adjustable beam angle ranges: 4º-8º. 47
d. Spotlight shall be equipped with a color boomerang for six filters, dowser, 48
horizontal and vertical masking control, and iris control. The iris shall black 49
out when fully closed, and include a guard to protect the iris leaves from the 50
direct light beam when in the closed position. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 7 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
e. The followspot shall quietly channel heat away from the lamp base, iris, and 1
lenses. 2
f. The lenses shall be constructed from high heat resistant polished borosilicate 3
glass. The lenses shall be optically coated to improve the beam quality and 4
light output. Plastic lenses shall not be permitted. 5
g. Peak/flat field adjustment shall be by a master gear located on the rear panel 6
of the followspot. No tools shall be required for peak / flat field adjustment, 7
and it shall be possible to operate the adjustment controls without gloves, 8
even after the followspot has been in operation for several hours. 9
h. Yoke shall be provided with base with locking casters and leveling jacks. 10
Fixture shall be able to tilt at least 55 degrees below and 15 degrees above 11
horizon. Yoke and stand shall include lock for pan. 12
i. Spotlights shall operate on 20 amp, 120/208 volt, 60 Hz, 1-phase electrical 13
service and shall be equipped with a 15 ft. power cord and Hubbell brand 14
connector of proper configuration for appropriate power receptacles. The 15
Ballast for the followspot shall be electronic, flicker free, and mounted inside 16
the main body of the followspot. It shall have a dimmable range of 50-100%. 17
2. Approved instrument for Theatre 18
a. Selecon Performer Series, Toru 19
b. Super Korrigan, 1200W, Robert Juliat 20
c. M2, Lycian, 1200W Medium Throw 21
d. Approved Equal 22
3. Quantities: Refer to schedule. 23
4. Approved instruments for Black Box 24
a. Lycian, Midget, 1000W 25
b. Altman, 1000Q Follow Spot 26
c. CantoUSA, Canto 1000th 27
d. Phoebus, iMarc 200 28
e. Or approved equal 29
5. Quantities: Refer to schedule. 30
31
2.3 PORTABLE LIGHTING INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE 32
33
A. Instruments: 34
35
FIXTURE QUANTITY 36
LED Profile 19-Degree ellipsoidal 30
LED Profile 26-Degree ellipsoidal 16
LED Profile 36-Degree ellipsoidal 36
LED adjustable focus profile 15-30-Degrees 10
LED adjustable focus profile 25-50-Degrees 10
LED PAR 48
LED Cyc 20
Follow spot - Theatre 2
Follow spot – Black Box 2
37
B. Accessories: 38
1. Spare Lamps: Quantity: Twenty percent for each lamp type. Minimum spare 39
quantity of any lamp type shall be one (1). 40
2. Pattern Holder - To fit Ellipsoidal. Quantity: (20) 41
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 8 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
3. Ellipsoid Iris Assembly Kit. Quantity: (4) 1
4. 18” Side arms with single Tee. Equal to Altman Model No. 509-18-1. Quantity: 2
(10) 3
5. 24” Side arms with two sliding Tee. Equal to Altman Model No. 509-24-1. 4
Quantity: (0) 5
6. Top hat for ellipsoidal spotlights, full size. Quantity: (10). 6
7. Pipe Booms: 7
a. Black 1-1/2” Sch. 40 Pipe, Threaded on both ends. Quantity: (4) @ 16’. 8
b. 50lbs Cast iron boom bases w/flange threaded to receive 1-1/2” Sch. 40 pipe. 9
Equal to Altman B-50. Quantity: (4). 10
c. 1-1/2” tie-off ring equal to Altman 530. Quantity (4). 11
8. Stage ghost light. Provide with 45-watt compact fluorescent lamp. Equal to 12
Altman GHOST. Quantity one (1). 13
14
2.4 LIGHTING SUPPORT EQUIPMENT 15
16
A. Data Cables: 17
1. All control signal protocol and connector types shall comply with the following 18
Standards: 19
a. ANSI E1.11 – 2004 / Entertainment Technology USITT DMX-512-A 20
Asynchronous Serial Digital Data Transmission Standard for Controlling 21
Lighting Equipment and Accessories. 22
b. ANSI E1.17 – 2006 Entertainment Technology – Architecture for Control 23
Networks. 24
c. ANSI E1.20 – 2006 Entertainment Technology – RDM Remote Device 25
Management over DMX512 Networks. 26
d. ANSI E1.30 Series of Documents level equipment interoperability for control 27
of commonly encountered entertainment technology devices using E1.17. 28
29
B. Portable Cables 30
1. Lighting Network Cables. 31
a. RJ-45 connector to Category 5 cable equal to Belden 1872A to RJ-45 32
connector. Each cable to be Category 5 Certified. Provide lengths and 33
quantities as listed in Lighting Support Equipment Schedule. 34
2. DMX Control Cables. 35
a. Equal to Rosco/Entertainment Technology IPS-DM-xx. Provide lengths and 36
quantities as listed in Lighting Support Equipment Schedule. 37
3. Single Circuit Cables. 38
a. Provide lengths and quantities as listed in Lighting Support Equipment 39
Schedule. 40
b. Cable A – NEMA 5-20M to Type SO 12/3 to NEMA 5-20F. 41
c. Twofer - NEMA 5-20M to 2 @ 36” Type SO 12/3 to NEMA 5-20F, 42
wired in parallel. 43
d. Cable B – Neutrik PowerCON power-in to Type SO 12/3 to Neutrik 44
PowerCON power-out. 20A, 120VAC 45
e. Extension adapter – Allows connection of two Jumper Cable Type B to 46
create a longer jumper. Adapter should be no longer than one foot. 47
4. L5-20 Adapter 48
a. Allows connection of LED lighting fixture to L5-20 receptacle. 49
b. Should be no longer than 5’-0”. 50
51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 9 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
C. Cable Bundle Wraps 1
1. Provide 3/4" wide hook and loop tie-wraps for bundling of portable cables. Tie-2
wraps shall be imprinted with owner designated initials and/or words. Provide 3
one tie-wrap of suitable length to properly bundle each high and low voltage cable 4
listed in Lighting Support Equipment Schedule. 5
6
D. Devices: 7
8
PORTABLE CABLE TYPE QUANTITY 9
LIGHTING NETWORK CABLE
6-foot 10
10-foot 10
25-foot 5
DMX CONTROL CABLE
6-foot 20
10-foot 20
25-foot 10
SINGLE CIRCUIT CABLE
TYPE A 5-foot jumper 20
10-foot jumper 20
25-foot jumper 10
36” Two-fer 15
TYPE B 10-foot jumper 20
25-foot jumper 10
EXTENSION ADAPTER 10
L5-20 ADAPTER 20
10
11
PART 3 - EXECUTION 12
13
3.1 INSTALLATION 14
15
A. Unpack fixtures, install lamps, plugs, C-clamps, and adjust all lighting instruments to 16
manufacturer’s specified performance in presence of Owner’s personnel. 17
18
B. Unpack and install lamp, yoke, stands, ballasts, plugs, and accessories for follow 19
spotlights in the follow spot room. 20
21
C. Place all other equipment at Owner designated storage location. Supplier will not be 22
expected to hang and/or focus equipment. 23
24
D. Remove from the site all rubbish, trash, discarded packing materials, cartons, and other 25
debris caused by this Supplier. Upon completion of work, the entire area of work by 26
this Supplier shall be left in broom clean condition. 27
28
3.2 STAFF INSTRUCTION 29
30
18 September 2018 11 61 53 - 10 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
A. The Manufacturer's supervisor shall instruct designated representatives of the Using 1
Agency in the safe operation, servicing, care, and maintenance of all items, including 2
storage. Minimum one 6-hour session for designated representatives. 3
4
B. The Architect/Engineer and other representatives may be present or represented. 5
6
C. Instruction shall be scheduled in conformance with test and instruction schedules, and 7
availability of Using Agency, Architect/Engineer, and their representatives. 8
9
D. Completion of staff instruction shall be verified, in writing, with the signature of an 10
authorized Owner’s Representative within 5 business days of completion. Copies will 11
be given to the Owner, the General Contractor, the Architect and the Consultant. 12
13
3.3 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER 14
15
A. Acceptance testing will include operation by the Architect/Consultant of each 16
component deemed necessary. Supplier will assist as necessary in this testing, and will 17
provide test equipment as required. 18
19
B. In the event the need for further adjustment or work becomes evident during 20
observation and/or acceptance testing, the Supplier will continue his work until 21
equipment is deemed acceptable and at no addition to the contract price. If approval is 22
delayed because of defective equipment or failure of equipment or installation to meet 23
the requirements of these specifications, the supplier will pay for any additional time 24
and expenses of the Architect/Consultant. 25
26
27
28
END OF SECTION 29
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
SECTION 11 61 63 1
2
STAGE LIGHTING CONTROL AND DIMMING AND POWER SYSTEM 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 8
9
A. For the sake of brevity these specifications shall omit phrases such as "(Sub)Contractor 10
shall furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these 11
phrases are nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the 12
(Sub) Contractor to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations 13
complete to the satisfaction of the Architect’s Consultant. Exceptions are noted herein 14
or shown on the drawings. 15
16
B. No representative of the Owner shall have power to waive the obligations of this 17
Contract for the furnishing of good materials or of performing good work, as herein 18
described, in full accordance with the Contract Documents. The failure of any 19
representative of the Owner to condemn any defective work or materials shall not 20
release the obligation to at once tear out, remove, and properly replace the same at any 21
time prior to final acceptance and upon discovery of said defective work or material. 22
However, when requested, the Owner's representative shall observe and accept or reject 23
any material furnished; and in the event the material has been once accepted by the 24
Owner's representative, such acceptance shall be binding on the Owner unless it can be 25
clearly shown that such material does not meet the specifications for this work. 26
27
C. All work provided under this section shall be provided by a qualified Theatrical Lighting 28
Contractor. The qualified Theatrical Lighting Contractor shall demonstrate the 29
following at time of bid submission: 30
1. No less than five (5) years experience installing theatrical lighting systems of similar 31
scope and magnitude 32
2. No less than ten (10) projects of similar scope and magnitude, which the dealer has 33
installed. 34
3. Maintain a showroom open to the public thirty (30) or more hours per week 35
located in a commercially zoned area. 36
4. Employ at least one full time retail sales person. 37
5. Maintain an inventory, held for resale, of at least $50,000, with the value based on 38
the manufacturer's published net pricing. 39
6. Offer for retail sales at least ten (10) lines of product purchased directly from at 40
least ten (10) different recognized entertainment equipment manufacturers on 41
open account. 42
7. Hold a valid business license and/or resale tax permit for the location in which the 43
work will occur. 44
45
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 46
47
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 48
Conditions, other General Requirement Sections, apply to work of this section. 49
50
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
B. All work shown on Contract Drawings TL series is provided under this section. Refer 1
to these drawings for plans, graphic representations, schedules, and notations showing 2
Stage Lighting and Dimming System work. 3
4
C. Also refer to Theatre Rigging, and E Series drawings for related work. 5
6
D. Switches, switchboards, contactors, panel boards, transformers, conduit, wire, outlets, 7
connectors and other electrical devices specified herein or on accompanying drawings 8
shall conform to provisions of other sections of Division 26 of the Contract 9
Documents unless otherwise noted. 10
11
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK 12
13
A. Work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, 14
transportation services, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 15
Stage Lighting & Dimming System and other items as herein listed, all as described in 16
these specifications, as illustrated on the drawings, and as directed by the Architect’s 17
Consultant. Work is comprised of, but not limited to, the following principal items: 18
1. House light dimming and control system 19
2. Stage light dimming, distribution and control system 20
3. Control console(s) and control devices 21
4. Control outlets, relays, connections, and wiring. 22
5. Custom panels and equipment 23
6. Work light control and fixtures 24
7. Acoustical concert shell lighting 25
8. Stage Manager console 26
9. DMX-controlled relay panels 27
10. Theatrical transfer switches 28
11. Theatrical company switches 29
30
B. Furnish and install complete Stage Lighting and Dimming Systems with all necessary 31
apparatus and equipment, wiring, etc., required to insure complete systems in excellent 32
working order as specified herein and on the attached diagrams. 33
34
C. Consistent with the detailed information contained in this specification, it is the 35
responsibility of the Contractor to supply complete and functional overall systems. 36
Verify complete parts lists, the accuracy of the type numbers and the overall suitability 37
of the equipment to provide functional systems coordinated and interfaced with related 38
work. Provide repeaters, additional switches, and similar equipment as needed for 39
cable length limitations. 40
41
D. Minor items of equipment needed in order to meet the requirements stated above, even 42
if not specifically mentioned herein or on the drawings, shall be provided in quality 43
equivalent to other conditions on the project with no claim for additional payment. 44
45
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 46
47
A. Verify all conditions on jobsite applicable to this work. Coordinate with scheduled 48
work of other trades. Notify Architect’s Consultant in writing of discrepancies, 49
conflicts, or omissions prior to commencement of work or correct same at Contractor's 50
expense. 51
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
B. The drawings show diagrammatically the cables, conduit, wiring, and so far as possible, 1
the arrangement of equipment, which fit into the spaces available without interference. 2
If conditions exist at the jobsite which make it impossible to install work as shown, 3
prepare and submit drawings to the Architect’s Consultant for approval showing how 4
the work may be installed and, on approval, install the work without additional cost to 5
the Owner. 6
7
C. Contractor shall take care not to damage any equipment or to disconnect any wiring 8
other than as required to interface new system. Any contractor-damaged equipment 9
shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 10
11
1.5 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 12
13
A. For purposes of establishing the quality and performance desired, the following 14
companies are approved as manufacturers for the herein specified equipment: 15
1. Dimming and control 16
a. Electronic Theatre Controls 17
b. Entertainment Technologies, a Division of Phillips Lighting 18
c. Strand Lighting, a Division of Phillips Lighting 19
2. Wiring devices 20
a. Electronic Theatre Controls 21
b. Entertainment Technologies, a Division of Phillips Lighting 22
c. LEX Products 23
d. Rigging Innovators, 24
e. SSRC 25
f. Strand Lighting, a Division of Phillips Lighting. 26
g. TMB, 27
h. Union Connector, 28
29
B. Approval indicates approval of the manufacturer only and not approval of specific 30
products. The Contractor shall be required to provide equipment that will meet or 31
exceed the intent of these specifications. 32
33
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS 34
35
A. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, 36
materials, fixtures, form, or type of construction by name, make, or catalog number, 37
such reference shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be 38
construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor in such cases, may at his option 39
use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in 40
the judgment of the Architect’s Consultant, expressed in writing, is equivalent to that 41
specified. 42
43
B. All materials and equipment specified herein have been determined to provide an 44
overall physical appearance and background of proven operation desired by the Owner, 45
and therefore, to establish a standard of quality required for this project. If equipment 46
or material other than that specified is proposed to be furnished, this Contractor shall 47
be required to furnish the Architect’s Consultant with such samples as he requires, the 48
same to be submitted by the Architect’s Consultant to an independent testing laboratory 49
selected by the Owner for tests to determine the actual equality of the proposed 50
substitute items. All costs and charges incurred by these tests shall be borne by the 51
Contractor. Should such tests prove the substitute materials and equipment equal and 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
acceptable, the Contractor shall be so advised. However, the Owner reserves the right 1
to examine, and where necessary, to have additional tests made by the same 2
independent testing laboratory of the actual equipment delivered to the jobsite to insure 3
that the delivered equipment is equal in fact to that specified. Should such secondary 4
test prove the equipment is satisfactory, the Owner will pay the cost for such test. 5
Otherwise, the Contractor shall pay for the test and shall proceed to remove 6
unacceptable equipment from the jobsite and to provide that specified. The Architect’s 7
Consultant’s decision, based on this test, will be final. 8
9
C. The plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and 10
arrangements as indicated herein. Acceptance of the shop drawing submittal indicates 11
only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality and assumes that the specific 12
requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans and 13
specifications. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner, furnish all 14
accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and shall perform all work necessary for proper 15
functioning and to fit his substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated in the 16
specifications. 17
18
D. If a substitute system is selected, any changes in architectural, electrical, or structural 19
systems required as a result of the alternate system shall be provided by this Contractor 20
at no additional cost to the Owner. The decision of the Architect’s Consultant as to the 21
compliance of the proposed system based on the submitted data and demonstrated 22
system shall be final. 23
24
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS 25
26
A. Shop drawings and equipment data sheets shall be submitted to the Architect’s 27
Consultant in accordance with the requirements of these specifications. 28
29
B. Acceptance of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment purchase or 30
fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner as 31
specified. All shop drawing information regarding this Section shall be submitted at the 32
same time; no partial submittals will be accepted. 33
34
C. Shop drawings shall be performed at a scale of not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" for plans and 35
1/4" = 1" for details. Drawings and catalogs shall be marked to show the name of 36
project, date, Architect’s Consultant, Contractor and/or Manufacturer and Supplier. 37
38
D. Contractor assumes the responsibility for the accuracy of all dimensions and quantities. 39
Drawings: Submit three (3) sets of drawings for approval. Drawings shall indicate 40
complete details and dimensions of all work to be performed, including all equipment 41
types and locations, contractor-fabricated equipment and all other details required to 42
describe work to be performed. Shop drawings shall contain at least the following 43
details: 44
1. Control consoles, panels, and device layouts and schematic diagrams 45
2. Dimmer bank layouts and schematic diagrams 46
3. Fabrication details of custom consoles, panels, devices and enclosures 47
4. Wiring diagrams of all specified systems and connections between systems 48
5. Riser diagrams showing conduit and wiring requirements (indicating number of 49
conductors, type of wire, and wire installation numbers to be used in each conduit) 50
6. Fully dimensioned custom panel and plate details indicating complete 51
manufacturer part numbers for all switches, knobs, meters, connectors, engraving, 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
etc. 1
7. Plugging device layouts, numbering and circuiting. Submittals with plug strip 2
layouts not showing circuit numbers will be returned rejected. 3
8. Detail of small scale circuit plot. 4
9. Details of Work Light Fixture Assembly 5
6
E. Catalog Sheets: Submit three (3) copies of catalog data sheets (8-1/2" x 11"), neatly 7
bound in sets with title page, space for submittal stamps, and tabbed dividers between 8
sections. Additional copies of this set of data sheets will be required with record 9
drawings. Catalogs shall contain data sheets, in proper order, on all equipment 10
proposed with part or model number clearly indicated. Fixture data sheets shall include 11
photometrics. Provide a complete list of proposed equipment with reference to its 12
corresponding specification section/paragraph number or equipment title. Denote all 13
deviations from specified equipment on the list. 14
15
F. The plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes, 16
and arrangements as indicated herein. Acceptance of the shop drawing submittal 17
indicates only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality and assumes that the 18
specific requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans 19
and specifications. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner, furnish all 20
accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and shall perform all work necessary for proper 21
functioning and to fit his substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated in the 22
specifications. 23
24
1.8 RECORDS FOR OWNER 25
26
A. Drawings: Maintain a full record set of drawings on the job to show the actual 27
installation of the work performed. Submit four (4) sets of drawings and four (4) CDs 28
of electronic copy in PDF format showing 'as installed' work to the Architect’s 29
Consultant for review. If 'as installed' documents are rejected, correct and resubmit in 30
the manner specified. 31
32
B. Manuals: Submit four (4) sets each of the following manuals in hardcopy along with 33
four (4) electronic copies in PDF format to the Architect’s Consultant for review. 34
Manuals (8-1/2" x 11") are to be neatly bound and include title page with the name of 35
the project, date, Owner, Architect’s Consultant, Contractor, Manufacturer and/or 36
Supplier. The manuals are to be supplied as follows: 37
1. Operation and Instruction Manual, including: 38
a. Table of contents. 39
b. Brief description of the operation of each system, (descriptions shall be written 40
such that new personnel may read the manual and be able to set-up and 41
operate the systems.) 42
c. Manufacturer's operation instructions for all user-operated equipment. 43
d. Small scale, clear laminated plan(s) showing the location and circuit numbers for 44
all dimmed circuit outlets and network devices and taps. 45
2. Maintenance Data Manual: 46
a. Table of contents. 47
b. A list of all equipment supplied under this contract with manufacturer's name, 48
model and part number. 49
c. A listing of equipment manufacturer's/supplier's addresses for all equipment 50
covered under this contract. 51
d. All equipment warranties and guarantees including Contractor's guarantee. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
Explain the limits of the warranty, and whom to contact for service, including 1
telephone numbers answered 24 hours per day so that the Owner may obtain 2
24-hour service when required. 3
e. Manufacturer's owner and service manuals on all equipment under this contract. 4
f. Accepted shop drawing catalog data sheets including fixture brochures and lamp 5
data. 6
g. Replacement parts lists of all major items and equipment indicating specific part 7
ordering numbers including lamp type replacements. 8
h. All test results required under these specifications. 9
i. Any and all other data and/or drawings required during construction. 10
11
1.9 TESTS AND OBSERVATIONS 12
13
A. The entire job shall be, during and/or after construction, subject to observations by: 14
1. Architect’s Consultant: Upon notice, Contractor shall furnish no more than two 15
(2) persons (one to be the job foreman) and tools for a reasonable amount of time 16
to assist with tests and observations as requested by the Architect’s Consultant. 17
2. Government or authority having jurisdiction. 18
19
B. After completion of installation and preliminary tests by the Contractor, observation of 20
the work shall be performed by the Architect’s Consultant. The cost of periodic trips to 21
the jobsite for final observation by the Architect’s Consultant has been provided for in 22
the Architect’s Consultant's contract. The cost of any additional trips to the jobsite due 23
to delays, omissions, or mistakes by the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor. 24
25
1.10 WARRANTY 26
27
A. All labor and materials provided under this contract shall be guaranteed for a period of 28
one (1) year following the date of final acceptance by the Owner. All equipment with 29
factory warranties greater than one year shall have their warranties under the Owner's 30
name. All defects occurring in labor or materials within the one-year guarantee period 31
shall be rectified by replacement or repair. 32
33
B. Contractor, or entity providing warranty, within this guarantee period shall answer all 34
service calls within a 24-hour period and repair or replace any faulty items(s) within 48-35
hours after initial service call without charge to the Owner. 36
37
C. Incandescent, quartz, and low voltage lamps shall be guaranteed against defects in 38
material and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days from date of acceptance. 39
Lamps failing in this period shall be replaced with new lamps at no cost to the Owner. 40
41
1.11 PERMIT 42
43
A. Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the installation, 44
and conform in all trades with all applicable codes/regulations. Obtain all permits 45
necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner. 46
47
48
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT 49
50
2.1 GENERAL 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 7 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
A. All components and systems shall be in new condition and of first quality. 1
2
B. Where acceptable, equipment items are specified by catalog number only; device shall 3
meet all published manufacturer's specifications. Where quantities are not given, refer 4
to drawings. Where two or more products are listed, contractor may use either at his 5
option. Equipment shall not be substituted without specific written approval by the 6
Architect’s Consultant, per the substitution paragraphs of these specifications. 7
8
C. Reference to equipment by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as 9
establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. 10
11
D. All multi-conductor connectors shall be wired in accordance with the recommended 12
practice RP-1 as published by the United States Institute for Theatre Technology 13
14
E. All control, signal, and video connectors shall be of substantial construction and shall 15
be of the locking or latching type. All plate-mounted connectors shall be bolted to 16
faceplates – rivets shall not be acceptable. 17
18
F. All keys for devices in each theatre (i.e. control console, entry panels, dimmer racks, 19
etc.) shall be keyed identically. Provide a total of (2) keys for each keyed device. 20
21
2.2 CONTROL AREA WORK LIGHT 22
23
A. Littlite model L-18-LED 18" high intensity gooseneck lamp with model WB weighted 24
base. Furnish in addition to those specified for control console(s). 25
1. The Hall - Quantity: 3 26
2. Black Box - Quantity: 2 27
28
2.3 HOUSE LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 29
30
A. House Light Control System shall be configured to provide controlled and dimmable 31
house and preset stage lighting for presentations or rehearsals. System shall be 32
controlled by a microprocessor based, user programmable device. Remote Control 33
Stations located throughout the theater may address the system. 34
35
B. The system shall support no less than 32 wall stations or remote devices in any number 36
of rooms. A minimum of 1536 dimmers may be assigned to one of 128 system control 37
zones. A minimum of 250 presets and system events shall be provided. The system 38
shall receive inputs from the following devices: 39
1. Remote Control Stations 40
2. Stage Lighting Control Console 41
3. Stage Lighting System Network 42
4. Ethernet based control signals 43
5. PCs 44
6. Contact closure stations 45
7. RS232/422/485 Serial communication 46
47
C. The system shall process incoming information and distribute it to dimmer bank, 48
building management systems, and other associated devices. 49
50
D. The system shall have the ability to connect multiple processing units in to one large 51
system via onboard twisted pair and/or fiber optic Ethernet connections. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 8 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
E. The system shall operate on the Stage Lighting System Network as a native device. 1
2
F. A configuration program shall allow the following functions: 3
1. Patching dimmers to zones with proportional levels and user selectable dimmer 4
output curves 5
2. Programming presets and system events 6
3. Naming of presets and channels 7
4. Setting room and station assignments 8
9
G. Electrical 10
1. The system shall operate from a processor unit which shall be a microprocessor 11
based, solid-state device. Field programmable system configuration and program 12
information shall be stored in Flash Memory, which shall not require battery 13
backup. Systems without a simple method of backup shall not be acceptable. 14
2. A DMX-512 input shall be provided for snapshot input via the dimmer bank 15
control module. This input shall accept level information from any DMX source. 16
The DMX-512 input shall be opto-isolated from all other electronics with the 17
isolation exceeding 1500 V. 18
3. A DMX-512 output shall be provided. This output shall transmit level 19
information to the dimmers bank and other DMX operated devices. 20
4. A control network port shall be provided for communications with control 21
devices. The network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II 22
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring. The network topology may be bus, loop, 23
home run, or any combination of these three. 24
5. Operating voltage for the processor shall be provided by the dimmer bank control 25
module. In the event of power loss, the processor shall return to its last valid state 26
when power is restored. 27
6. An Ethernet network port shall be provided for communications and linking via 28
the Stage Lighting System Network. 29
30
H. System Functions 31
1. It shall be possible to record presets, consisting of any number of zones set to any 32
level with an associated fade time. It shall be possible to recall a preset from a 33
pushbutton, remote input, astronomical time clock event (ATC) or macro. 34
2. A macro language shall allow sequences of presets and system events to be stored 35
and recalled. Conditional arguments may be used within a macro to check time or 36
input states. Macros may be assigned to pushbuttons, remote inputs, and/or ATC 37
events. 38
3. An internal ATC shall allow presets and system events to be recalled at a 39
preprogrammed time relative to sunrise or sunset or at a specific time of day. 40
Systems not providing an internal ATC shall not be acceptable. 41
4. Each system shall be able to lock out Remote Control Stations. The system shall 42
be unlockable at any "Master Station" using a 4-digit code. 43
5. Stations shall be configurable in mirrored condition so that a change in one station 44
will effect the same change in the mirrored station. 45
6. System and Stage Lighting Control Console control signals shall have the capability 46
of operating dimmers simultaneously in pile-on mode. 47
7. System shall be controllable from other such systems as a single entity across the 48
Stage Lighting System Network. 49
50
I. System Setup 51
1. A setup menu shall be provided with the processor. This menu shall be accessed 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 9 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
using the control module input terminal of the dimmer bank control module. This 1
menu shall provide basic setup functions. 2
2. A configuration program shall be provided for setup and programming of any size 3
system. All functions of the system may be configured and monitored using this 4
program. 5
3. Installation shall include programming basic operations as directed by the Owner 6
or Architect’s Consultant. Programming files shall be provided to the Architect’s 7
Consultant on USB flash drive so that the Architect’s Consultant may retain a copy 8
for their records. 9
10
J. Acceptable House Light Control Systems: 11
1. Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.: Unison Paradigm 12
2. Strand Lighting Inc.: Vision.net 13
14
K. Quantities: 15
1. Auditorium - Quantity: One (1) 16
2. Black Box - Quantity: One (1) 17
18
2.4 HOUSE LIGHT REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS "EP(X)" 19
20
A. EP1 - "Master Station" shall have the following functions and features: 21
1. A backlit liquid crystal display with a graphic touch screen user interface which 22
shall show preset names, respective levels expressed as a percentage, operating 23
instructions, fade times in one second increments, clock and calendar settings, lock 24
mode status, station mirroring status, auxiliary closure names, have the ability to 25
page or scroll up and down to reveal information, and have adjustable levels of 26
intensity. 27
2. Memory shall be stored in non-volatile electronic memory. 28
3. Control shall be accessed through graphic buttons and faders. Control page will 29
allow for the control, selecting and editing of presets. 30
4. Shall mount in standard three-gang box. 31
5. Shall be capable of displaying current date and time. 32
6. Shall be capable of setting the correct time and date within the system. 33
34
B. EP2 - "Preset Station" shall have the following functions and features: 35
1. Control shall be accessed through two soft push buttons that shall be used to turn 36
"on" and "off" one (1) each user programmable preset. 37
2. Shall have a LED to display when a preset or divider is on. 38
3. Shall mount in one-gang box. 39
40
C. EP3 - "Entry Station" shall have the following functions and features: 41
1. Control shall be accessed through one keyed switch which shall be used to turn 42
"on" and "off" one (1) user programmable preset or master-preset. 43
2. Shall have a LED to display when a preset is on. 44
3. Shall mount in single-gang box. 45
4. Shall have no less than one preset. 46
47
D. EP5 - "Preset Station" shall have the following functions and features: 48
1. Control shall be accessed through five soft push buttons that shall be used to turn 49
“on” and "off" one (1) each user programmable preset or master-preset. 50
2. Shall have a LED to display when a preset or divider is on. 51
3. Shall mount in one-gang box. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 10 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
4. Shall have no less than three presets. 1
E. EP6 - "Master Station" 18.5” shall have the following functions and features: 2
1. A backlit display with a graphic touch screen user interface which shall show preset 3
names, respective levels expressed as a percentage, operating instructions, fade 4
times in one second increments, clock and calendar settings, lock mode status, 5
station mirroring status, auxiliary closure names, have the ability to page or scroll 6
up and down to reveal information, and have adjustable levels of intensity. 7
2. Memory shall be stored in non-volatile electronic memory. 8
3. Control shall be accessed through graphic buttons and faders. Control page will 9
allow for the control, selecting and editing of presets. 10
4. Shall mount in a recessed box. 11
5. Shall be capable of displaying current date and time. 12
6. Shall be capable of setting the correct time and date within the system. 13
7. 14
15
F. PORTABLE LCD Master Station 16
1. PLCD shall have the following functions and features: 17
2. A backlit liquid crystal display with a graphic touch screen user interface which 18
shall show preset names, respective levels expressed as a percentage, operating 19
instructions, fade times in one second increments, clock and calendar settings, lock 20
mode status, station mirroring status, auxiliary closure names, have the ability to 21
page or scroll up and down to reveal information, and have adjustable levels of 22
intensity. 23
3. Memory shall be stored in non-volatile electronic memory. 24
4. Control shall be accessed through graphic buttons and faders. Control page will 25
allow for the control, selecting and editing of presets. 26
5. Shall be capable of displaying current date and time. 27
6. Shall be capable of setting the correct time and date within the system. 28
7. Shall be a portable, plug in device with a ten-foot (10’) cord. 29
30
G. Plug-in Stations are indicated on the TL drawings as “Auxiliary console” and shall serve 31
as receptacles for the Portable LCD Master Station. 32
33
H. Acceptable House Light Remote Control Stations: 34
1. Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.: Unison Paradigm 35
2. Strand Lighting: Vision.net 36
37
I. Quantity: As shown on drawings plus Two (2) EP5 portable LCD station. 38
39
2.5 STAGE LIGHTING CONTROL CONSOLE (THE HALL) 40
41
A. Specifications 42
1. DMX Outputs: 1024 43
2. Control Channels: 250 44
3. Encoders: 4 45
4. Touchscreens: 2 46
5. Removable Media recording for show file storage 47
6. 24 Submaster Faders with bump buttons and status-indicating LEDs 48
7. Live Real-Time Tracking Backup Processing 49
50
B. Console shall include: 51
1. Two (2) high-resolution 19” LCD flat screen color. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 11 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
2. Two (2) Removable Media for show file storage. 1
3. One (1) set of 25-foot control cables terminating in locking connectors appropriate 2
for mating with the Control Receptacle Panel. 3
a. Connectors shall be Neutrix EtherCon or equivalent. 4
4. Vinyl dust covers for the console and video displays. 5
6
C. Acceptable products. 7
1. ETC Ion XE 8
2. No other system shall be considered unless specifically approved by the Theatre 9
Consultant at least 10 days prior to bid date. 10
11
D. Install in the Control Room as shown in the Drawings. 12
13
2.6 STAGE LIGHTING CONTROL CONSOLE (BLACK BOX) 14
15
A. Specifications 16
1. DMX Outputs: 1024 17
2. Control Channels: 250 18
3. Encoders: 4 19
4. Touchscreens: 2 20
5. Removable Media recording for show file storage 21
6. 24 Submaster Faders with bump buttons and status-indicating LEDs 22
7. Live Real-Time Tracking Backup Processing 23
24
B. Console shall include: 25
1. Two (2) high-resolution 19” LCD flat screen color. 26
2. Two (2) Removable Media for show file storage. 27
3. One (1) set of 25-foot control cables terminating in locking connectors appropriate 28
for mating with the Control Receptacle Panel. 29
a. Connectors shall be Neutrix EtherCon or equivalent. 30
4. Vinyl dust covers for the console and video displays. 31
32
C. Acceptable products. 33
1. ETC Ion XE 34
2. No other system shall be considered unless specifically approved by the Theatre 35
Consultant at least 10 days prior to bid date. 36
37
D. Install in the Control Room as shown in the Drawings. 38
39
40
2.7 CONTROL ACCESSORIES 41
42
A. Uninterruptible power supply. Capable of sustaining operating voltage to control 43
console and CRT(s) for up to 10 minutes in the event of a loss of power. Capable of 44
filtering spikes, surges, and noise from power source. Conditioner shall provide 45
continuity of earth ground from source to the console. Shall include test switch to 46
confirm battery charge. UPS shall be sized to provide rated power supply for control 47
console, CRT(s), and any console-mounted work light. Topaz ESV Series or approved 48
equal. 49
50
B. Wireless Handheld Remote. Provide Wireless Hand-held remote control. Capabilities to 51
call up channels, adjust levels, call up cues, run cues, and perform dimmer check. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 12 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
Provide transmitter and all access points required for a complete and functioning 1
system. System shall provide for continuous operation from all points within the 2
auditorium and stagehouse including but not limited to the gridiron, stage floor, dimmer 3
room, auditorium catwalks, control rooms, and auditorium. 4
1. Quantity: 5
a. The Hall – One (1) 6
b. Black Box – One (1) 7
8
2.8 CONTROL WIRE 9
10
A. Control wire shall be provided in quantity required. 11
12
B. Provide the type of control wire as directed by system manufacturer(s). 13
14
C. Provide all network wiring to follow Category 5 installation guidelines and protocols as 15
prescribed under this section. 16
17
D. Wiring methods 18
1. All permanent network wiring shall terminate in receptacles in panels. All 19
equipment shall be connected to receptacles via "patch cables" with RJ45 plugs. 20
No installed wire shall terminate directly to network equipment. The use of male 21
RJ45 pigtails shall not be permitted. 22
2. Cable shall be pulled in conduits, meeting the minimum bending radius permitted 23
by the cable manufacturer. All cable shall be pulled with no more than the 24
maximum pulling tension permitted by the cable manufacturer. 25
3. Riser rated or plenum rated cable shall be used where required under local codes. 26
27
E. Electrical requirements 28
1. All UTP wiring segments shall be of continuous runs of not more than 250 feet. If 29
a wiring run exceeds the noted maximum footage, manufacturer shall provide 30
required repeaters and system elements to bring the segment wiring to the stated 31
maximum run. Contractor shall provide and install such elements as part of the 32
work of this Section. 33
2. All cable shall meet the standards for EIA/TIA 568 TSB-36 Category 5. The 34
Contractor shall use a current generation 100Mhz or higher, network/cable 35
analyzer to perform testing on the cable plan and shall test all data pairs. All cable 36
shall be tested for continuity, attenuation, near end crosstalk, mutual capacitance, 37
cable impedance, cable resistance, cable length, structural return loss and pair 38
mapping. All testing will be performed by certified cable technicians. As part of 39
the final submittal, provide cable analyzer printouts of all test performed, labeled 40
by cable number. 41
3. All wiring shall meet the EIA/TIA T586B wiring standard. 42
4. All cable and installation shall accommodate 100Mbs transmission rate. "Thin 43
Net" systems shall not be used. 44
5. The system shall be designed for maximum 40% traffic utilization and maximum 45
10% collisions within the same collision domain. The use of switches is acceptable 46
to manage network traffic. 47
6. All Layer 2 switches shall provide for IGMP Layer 3 snooping to accommodate IP 48
multicast events. 49
50
F. Network cables and patch cables 51
1. Cables shall be rated Category 5 to match wiring of installed wiring. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 13 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
2. Cables shall include RJ45 plugs at each end, for proper mating to receptacle panels 1
and node devices. Each cable shall be protected by a rubber boot of a diameter 2
sufficient to extend beyond the plug connection tab. 3
3. Patch cables and boots shall use multiple colors to differentiate collision domains. 4
Drop cables and boots (cables 10' long or more) shall be black. 5
6
G. Quantities sufficient to patch all receptacle panels. In addition to scheduled quantities. 7
8
2.9 CONTROL RECEPTACLE PANELS 9
10
A. The Control Receptacle Panels shall be mounted as indicated in the Drawings, dead 11
front, and completely wired internally, with terminal strips of the proper rating for all 12
external connections. 13
14
B. The face of the panels shall contain flush mounted receptacles. These receptacles shall 15
be of the locking type and shall be sized for the proper number and capacity of 16
conductors as indicated in the Drawings. Control connectors shall be equal to 4-pin or 17
5-pin XLR, Switchcraft D4M or D5M. All Category 5 connectors shall be RJ45 18
EtherCon (by Neutrik or approved equal). All fiber optic connectors shall be ST style 19
connectors. Smaller or less substantial connectors shall not be acceptable. 20
21
C. The face of each panel shall contain receptacles as indicated in the Control Device 22
Schedule. 23
24
D. Engraved Lamicoid labels with the following information shall be mounted beside each 25
receptacle wired with Category 5 network wire, per the Drawings. 26
1. Panel designation 27
2. Title of "Lighting Network" 28
3. Designation of wire destination 29
4. Maximum length of patch cable permissible from the receptacle. 30
31
E. Install as shown in the Drawings. 32
33
2.10 PORTABLE CONTROL RECEPTACLE PANELS 34
35
A. Portable control receptacle panels (CRP) shall be for the connection of equipment at 36
receptacle panels. 37
38
B. Nodes shall have receptacles for connection of network cables as well as for connection 39
of other equipment to which, the portable CRP is designed to interface. 40
41
C. Portable CRP’s shall be compatible with Power over Ethernet powering schemes. 42
43
D. Portable CRP’s shall have the required number of ports as indicated in the device 44
schedule. 45
46
E. Quantity: Eight (8). 47
48
F. Deliver to Owner. 49
50
2.11 NETWORK DATA SYSTEMS 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 14 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
A. The Network Data Systems shall provide for the interconnection of devices used solely 1
for stage lighting and special effects. 2
3
B. The network shall consist of receptacle panels, connecting wiring, patch bay(s), patch 4
cables, hub devices, routers, switches, DMX/Ethernet nodes, and receptacle panels for 5
portable node devices. 6
7
C. All materials, components, and services necessary to provide complete network data 8
systems indicated in this Section. Manufacturer shall be responsible for performance of 9
the complete system. 10
11
D. All control devices shall operate as part of the network. If the manufacturer's system 12
requires devices that are not network compatible, manufacturer shall provide all 13
required hardware to accommodate those devices to meet the intent of this 14
specification. Contractor shall provide and install all conductors to accommodate these 15
devices, as part of the work of this Section. 16
17
E. The network shall provide for the connection of the following devices as well as 18
dedicated non-network "dry lines" as noted: 19
1. Control Consoles 20
a. DMX: non-network dedicated lines to dimmers (Theatre network only) 21
b. DMX out (network – via Ethernet) 22
c. Dimmer feedback information 23
2. Remote video displays 24
3. Designer's remote control consoles 25
4. Automated spotlights 26
5. Color changers 27
6. Moving yoke devices 28
7. DMX-controlled special effects 29
30
F. Network capacity shall be determined by the following simultaneous usage criteria. 31
System shall allow all the data below to be sent simultaneously, within the traffic and 32
collision maximums noted above. 33
1. Control Consoles – quantity two (2) 34
a. DMX out: network usage to dimmers 35
b. Dimmer feedback information 36
2. Remote video displays – quantity two (2) in use, in two separate locations 37
3. Designer's remote control consoles – quantity one (1) 38
4. Wireless remote controls 39
a. Network signal for one (1) unit 40
5. Distributed DMX signal – two (2) 512-dimmer universes 41
42
G. All system elements shall be provided from a qualified network hardware manufacturer. 43
The manufacturer shall have at least five (5) years experience in the fabrication of 44
network hardware. Subject to the above requirements, the equipment indicated herein 45
shall be by one of the following manufacturers: 46
1. Allied Telesyn 47
2. Bay Networks 48
3. Cisco Systems 49
4. 3Com Corporation 50
5. Hubbell Premise 51
6. Panduit 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 15 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
1
H. Data Distribution Panel(s) and Signal Processing Rack(s) 2
1. The System shall utilize central panel(s) for patching and distribution. The Panel(s) 3
shall be surface wall mounted and completely wired internally. Design and 4
configuration as shown in the Drawings. 5
2. Patch panel(s) shall include sufficient patching for all network receptacles, plus six 6
(6) spare receptacles. 7
3. The Panel(s) shall be 19" equipment mounting rack(s) with a hinged front door. 8
Panel shall include hinged “swing-away” mounting for rear access. 9
4. The Panel(s) shall include wire management panel(s) as manufactured by Panduit 10
or approved equal. 11
5. All wires shall be permanently identified at the jacket at each end per Division 26 12
requirements. 13
6. Each port in patch panels shall be labeled in a logical order with the name of the 14
connected device as indicated in the Drawings. 15
7. The Panel(s) shall include UPS protection and surge protection for all devices 16
requiring a power source - Best Devices or approved equal. 17
18
2.12 PLUGGING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES 19
20
A. Each electrical device shall be approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory 21
(NRTL), shall be currently listed by NRTL and shall, when furnished and installed, bear 22
a factory affixed NRTL label. 23
24
B. All steel parts and panels shall be cleaned and primed with rust-inhibiting primer. 25
Exterior finishes shall be epoxy resin or baked enamel anodized in matte black, on in 26
Manufacturer’s standard color where not specified. 27
28
C. Gridiron and plug strip junction boxes provided with terminal strips as required for 29
number of wires shown plus ground terminal. 30
31
D. Provide woven wire supports on all devices connected to portable cable (SO) including, 32
but not limited to gridiron junction boxes, batten-mounted plug strips, border lights, 33
and hanging plug boxes. Woven wire supports installed in gridiron junction boxes shall 34
be installed in the bottom of the box, rather than the side. 35
36
E. Circuit labels shall be an engraved lamicoid. 37
38
2.13 STAGE MANAGER’S PANEL 39
40
A. The panel shall include a desk, shelf, lockable cabinet, worklight with dimmer, and a 41
switched duplex convenience receptacle. 42
43
B. Face of panel shall include: 44
1. EP-1 lighting control touch screen 45
2. “ALL ON” switch. Recessed rear-illuminated pushbutton switch. Color: Red. 46
Operation Push On / Push Off. Pushbutton shall directly activate designated 47
dimmers to full intensity. Switch shall be protected against accidental activation. 48
3. Night Light switch. Recessed rear-illuminated pushbutton switch. Color: Green. 49
Operation: Push On / Push Off. Night Light switch shall activate dedicated 50
fixture circuits for use when the theatre is unoccupied. The Night Light preset 51
shall only be activated and deactivated with this switch and with a similar switch in 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 16 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
the Stage Manager Console. All other houselight controls and worklight switches, 1
including Entry Panels, will continue to operate while the Night Light preset is 2
engaged, but their action shall not affect any channels being controlled by the 3
Night Light preset. 4
4. Two (2) Flush-mounted LED digital clocks with stopwatch function. All setting 5
and stopwatch controls shall be on front panel. 6
5. Dimmable LED 18” gooseneck rack lights. Quantity: two (2) 7
6. Network connection to Network Data System 8
7. Edge lighting control panel 9
8. Switched power strip for convenience power: one (1) 20A, 120VAC circuit. 10
9. Grand curtain variable speed controller, by 11 61 33. 11
12
C. All labels and legends shall be engraved directly into the face plates and filled with white 13
paint. 14
15
D. No devices utilizing cooling fans shall be located in the stage manager’s panel. 16
17
2.14 WORK LIGHT FIXTURE 18
19
A. Uniform wide beam fixture. 20
21
B. Install 3' power cord with L5-20 twist lock plug. Mount fixture with Colortran #SMP-22
2443503 C-clamp. Provide safety cable. 23
24
C. Approved fixture: Aquarii Axceleron AX-150-30-70-D-B-M 25
26
D. Quantity: The Hall – Eight (8) work light assemblies. 27
28
2.15 APRON EDGE LIGHTING SYSTEM 29
30
A. Low profile extrusion housing capable of supporting up to 200# point loads. Extrusion 31
shall be no larger than ¾” wide by ½” deep. 32
33
B. Sources shall be low voltage LEDs. 34
35
C. 120v AC power supply with manual intensity control. 36
37
D. Two circuits on switch at stage manager’s panel: 38
1. One circuit on apron edge 39
40
E. Angled red LED lights shall be visible to stage performers but not visible to audience. 41
Configure as shown on drawings. Centerline and quarter-mark LEDs blue. 42
43
F. Approved Product: 44
1. LUMENesce , 4th Wall or equal 45
46
2.16 MOTORIZED BREAKER PANELS 47
48
A. General 49
1. Incorporate required over-current circuit protection and remote on and off circuit 50
control, utilizing motorized circuit breakers, in a single enclosure. 51
2. Shall hold the required quantity of breakers from the schedule. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 17 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
3. Panel shall be constructed of 16-gauge steel. All panel components shall be 1
properly treated; primed and finished in fine-textured, scratch resistant paint or 2
rust resistant galvanized coating. The entire unit shall surface mount. 3
4. The panel shall be convection cooled. No fans or other powered ventilation shall 4
be allowed. 5
5. The panel shall be fed by 3-Phase 5-wire (3-Phase conductors, 200% Neutral), 6
Isolated Technical Ground (ITG) and chassis ground 120/208 or 277/480 VAC 7
60 Hz supply. 8
6. Main Circuit Breaker protection or Main Lug Only options shall be provided. 9
7. The panel control electronics shall operate on single phase, 120-277V AC 60Hz 10
fed from an included 15 amp circuit breaker. Fault current protection shall be 11
25,000 AIC @ 120 VAC. 12
8. The individual remote controlled circuit breakers shall contain motor driven, 13
mechanically held contacts with ampacity ratings of 15, 20 or 30 amps at up to 14
480VAC. Circuit loads must be derated as required by national and local electrical 15
codes. 16
9. All line, neutral and ground terminals shall accept up to 6 AWG wire. 17
10. Control wiring shall land on removable headers for easy contractor installation 18
(On-board DMX, Serial, BACnet and I/O and Input terminations). 19
11. Ethernet connectivity shall be an RJ-45 jack. 20
12. A voltage barrier shall be provided to separate Type 1 and Type 2 sections of the 21
panel. 22
13. The panel shall receive: 23
a. PLASA E1.31 (sACN) streaming ACN control protocol. Universe and address 24
shall be set via internal web page. 25
14. An internal astronomical clock shall provide up to 84 events to be automatically 26
adjusted for Sunrise and Sunset times based on the physical location of the panel 27
and calendar date. The internal schedule feature shall allow an offset of up to 3 28
hours, by 15 minute steps, before or after actual Sunrise or Sunset times. Access to 29
the internal schedule and selecting the physical location of the panel shall be 30
through the internal web page. 31
15. Selecting Sequenced operation shall allow the choice of order and delay time 32
between motorized circuit breaker operations. 33
34
B. Acceptable Products: 35
1. Lyntec Remote Control Breaker Panel 36
2. ETC Sensor IQ 37
3. Or approved equal 38
39
C. Quantity indicated on drawings. 40
41
2.17 CONSOLE TABLE 42
43
A. Provide a table for the lighting console with the following features: 44
1. 6’-0” long by 2’-6” wide. 45
2. Adjustable in height from 27” to 32” minimum. 46
3. Minimum load capacity 150 pounds distributed evenly across table top, and 50 47
pounds concentrated on a 6”X6” area anywhere on the table top. 48
4. Locking leg casters for ease of movement. 49
5. Black laminate top with vinyl bull nose edging on all sides. All corners to be 50
rounded. 51
6. Steel frame under the top with steel leg structure. Steel components to be powder 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 18 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
coated black in color. 1
2
B. Approved Manufacturer: 3
1. KI – Synthesis Series 4
2. Approved Equal 5
6
C. Quantity: 7
1. The Hall - Two (2). 8
2. Black Box – Three (3) 9
10
2.18 CABEL REEL 11
12
A. Power Cable Reel 13
1. Steel frame construction. 14
2. Yellow powder coated finish 15
3. Thermoplastic slip ring cover 16
4. Slip ring assembly for required number of conductors. 17
5. Adjustable guide arm 18
6. Sealed, lubricated spring motor canister, no ratchet 19
7. Provide Kellems Grips for attachment at the orchestra shell ceiling. 20
8. Provide J-bolts for gridiron mounting. 21
9. Refer to rigging drawings to calculate the cable length and required travel. 22
23
B. Acceptable Products: 24
1. Conductix-Wampfler, GafferReels 25
2. Approved equal 26
27
C. Quantity 28
1. One (1) per orchestra shell ceiling. 29
30
D. Data Cable Reel 31
1. Steel frame construction. 32
2. Thermoplastic slip ring cover 33
3. Slip ring assembly for required number of conductors. 34
4. Adjustable guide arm 35
5. Sealed, lubricated spring motor canister, no ratchet 36
6. Provide Kellems Grips for attachment at the orchestra shell ceiling. 37
7. Provide J-bolts for gridiron mounting. 38
8. Refer to rigging drawings to calculate the DMX cable length and required travel. 39
40
E. Acceptable Products: 41
1. Conductix-Wampfler, GafferReels 42
2. Approved equal 43
44
F. Quantity 45
1. One (1) per orchestra shell ceiling. 46
47
48
PART 3 - EXECUTION 49
50
3.1 GENERAL 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 19 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
A. Install all items of the stage lighting and dimming system where indicated and 1
completely connect, wire, and make operative as specified. 2
3
B. Isolate cables carrying signals at different levels to restrict control interference. Separate 4
wiring into conduits for low-level analog and digital and optical control, power circuits 5
up to 50 amps each, and feeder services to dimmer banks. Exercise care in wiring to 6
avoid damage to cables and equipment. 7
8
C. Make all digital control circuits, wiring, and connections with shielded cable and 9
connectors. Terminate shields properly to prevent and guard against electromagnetic 10
and electrostatic noise. 11
12
D. Equipment racks and portable equipment to be wired in a neat manner with care taken 13
to provide for future serviceability and expansion. No loose or randomly routed wires 14
shall be permitted. 15
16
E. Each outlet box shall be provided with connector shown on drawing or as specified. 17
Each receptacle circuit number shall be clear coated after application to prevent 18
removal. Orient the number in an upright position easily seen by operating personnel. 19
20
F. All lamicoid labels shall be permanently attached in a neat and plumb manner (i.e., glue 21
and screws). Double-sided adhesive tape will not be accepted. 22
23
G. Letters on pushbutton switches shall be engraved and filled with contrasting paint (on 24
translucent lenses). 25
26
H. Each stage circuit shall have one load and one neutral connector. All unused wire shall 27
be terminated in an approved manner at a junction box terminal strip for future 28
expansion. 29
30
I. All circuits, which are disconnected during the construction period, shall be 31
reconnected to insure that all equipment is in proper working order at end of 32
construction period. 33
34
J. Coordinate location of all devices installed over the stage and wings with Section 35
116133 work. 36
37
K. Protect all portable cables (Type SO cables) from kinks, abrasion and binding. Support 38
both ends of portable cables with strain relief devices as specified herein. Make top 39
connection of cable then allow the cable to hang free for a minimum of four days prior 40
to bottom connection or rigging to prevent cable twisting. 41
42
L. Install work light fixtures at owner’s direction. 43
44
M. Install dimmer rack using resilient pads as specified herein. No portion of the dimmer 45
rack shall contact any part of the building structure or walls except through resilient 46
connections specifically approved by the Architect. All load, feed, and control conduit 47
connections to the dimmer racks shall be isolated through the use of deflection fittings, 48
Type DF as manufactured by Appleton Electric, or approved equal. 49
50
N. Assemble and move console tables to control booth. 51
52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 20 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
O. Terminate control wire from architectural fixtures controlled by this Section in 1
appropriate devices at the Signal Processing Rack. 2
3
P. Address and make fully operational all lighting network devices. Coordinate addressing 4
of light fixtures controlled under this Section with Division 26. 5
6
Q. Program preset and master stations per direction of the Architect, Consultant, and 7
Owner. 8
9
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY 10
11
A. An authorized representative of the manufacturer of the stage lighting and dimming 12
system equipment shall be required to visit the project during construction and after 13
completion to check installation of each system of stage and house lighting dimming 14
equipment. 15
16
B. Systems will not be turned on or rendered active in any way until approved by 17
representative of manufacturer who shall be present when systems are activated. 18
19
3.3 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL 20
21
A. Contractor or manufacturer’s representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in 22
operation of the installed system, shall provide a total of eight (8) hours of instruction 23
to Owner-designated personnel on the safe operation, servicing, care, and maintenance 24
of these systems. Training times may not be continuous, however, manufacturer shall 25
not be required to conduct more than two separate training sessions. Instruction times 26
shall be arranged through the Owner. 27
28
B. The Architect and other representatives may be present or represented 29
30
C. The same Contractor’s representative shall be present at the first formal use of the Stage 31
Lighting and Dimming System to further instruct Owner personnel in operation. 32
33
D. Completion of staff instruction shall be verified, in writing, with the signature of an 34
authorized Owner’s Representative within 5 business days of completion. Copies will 35
be given to the Owner, the General Contractor, the Architect and the Consultant. 36
37
3.4 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER 38
39
A. Contractor will request acceptance testing by the Architect’s Consultant when the 40
system is substantially complete. 41
42
B. Acceptance testing will include operation of each major system and all other 43
components deemed necessary. Contractor will the assist as necessary in this testing, 44
and will provide test equipment and personnel as required. 45
46
C. In the event the need for further adjustment or work becomes evident during 47
acceptance testing, the Contractor will continue his work until system is acceptable at 48
no addition to the contract price. If approval is delayed because of defective equipment 49
or failure of equipment or installation to meet the requirements of these specifications, 50
the Contractor will pay for any additional time and expenses of the Architect’s 51
Consultant during any extension of the acceptance testing period. 52
18 September 2018 11 61 63 - 21 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
1
3.5 CLEANING OF THE SITE AND EQUIPMENT 2
3
A. Remove from the site all rubbish, trash, discarded packing materials, cartons, and other 4
debris caused by daily operations. Upon completion of work, the entire area of work by 5
this Contractor shall be left in broom clean condition. 6
7
B. Clean any racks, floor pockets, and similar devices that may have accumulated dust and 8
debris during work. 9
10
11
END OF SECTION 12
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 12 24 13
2
3 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Motor-operated roller shades with single rollers.
12
13 B. Related Requirements:
14 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds
15 for mounting roller shades and accessories.
16 1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories
17 for light-blocking shades with a sealant.
18
19 1.2 REFERENCES
20
21 A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
22 1. NEMA ICS 6: Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
23
24 B. NFPA
25 1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
26 2. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and
27 Films
28
29 C. Window Covering Manufacturers Association
30 1. WCMA A 100.1: Safety of Corded Window Covering Products (ANSI)
31
32 1.3 SUBMITTALS
33
34 A. Product Data: For each type of product.
35
36 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual
37 components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller
38 shades.
39
40 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including
41 shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
42 1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power,
43 signal, and control wiring.
44
45 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches
46 long.
47
48 D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
2
3 E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
4 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if
5 applicable.
6 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long
7 for each type of roller shade indicated.
8 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.
9
10 F. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
11
12 G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
13
14 H. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.
15
16 I. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by
17 manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
18
19 J. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
20
21 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
22
23 A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
24 covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
25 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size,
26 color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than [two] <Insert number>
27 units.
28
29 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
30
31 A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
32
33 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
34 demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
35 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
36 Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
37 deviations in writing.
38 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
39 the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
40
41 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
42
43 A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
44 location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
45
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
2
3 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work
4 in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
5 conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended
6 use.
7
8 B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
9 dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
10 measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable
11 glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that
12 vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
13 delaying the Work.
14
15
16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
17
18 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
19
20 A.Basis of Design Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Motorized FlexShade by
21 Draper; other available products by one of the manufactures below that meet the same
22 requirements:
23 1.DFB Sales Inc.
24 2.Draper Inc.
25 3.Hunter Douglas Contract.
26 4.Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
27 5.MechoShade Systems, Inc.
28 6.Nysan Solar Control Inc.; a Hunter Douglas company.
29 7. Architectural Fabric Systems/Solarfective Products Limited.
30 8.Springs Window Fashions; SWFcontract.
31 9. TimberBlindMetroShade
32
33 B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
34
35 2.2 MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES
36
37 A. Motorized Operating System: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator system of size
38 and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions
39 indicated, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power
40 disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories
41 required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to
42 motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with
43 building electrical system.
44 1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
45 testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
46 2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in roller.
47 a. Electrical Characteristics: Single phase, 24 V, 60 Hz.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed
2 or flush mounting. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades:
3 a. Keyed Control Station: Keyed, momentary-contact, three-position, switch-
4 operated control station with open, close, and off functions. Provide two keys
5 per station.
6 b. Individual Switch Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-position, rocker-
7 style, wall-switch-operated control station with open, close, and center off
8 functions.
9 c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
10 4. Crank-Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power
11 outage or motor failure.
12 5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to stop
13 shades automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions.
14
15 B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall
16 thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of
17 shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end
18 assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
19 1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.
20 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
21 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
22
23 C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
24 assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and
25 conditions indicated.
26
27 D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join
28 up to three inline rollers that are operated by one roller drive-end assembly.
29
30 E. Shadebands:
31 1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric.
32 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
33 a. Type: Exposed with endcaps and integral light seal where bottom (sill)
34 channels are indicated.
35 b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
36
37 F. Installation Accessories:
38 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
39 operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
40 a. Shape: Curved.
41 b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and
42 shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
43 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
44 3. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for
45 recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end
46 plates, and removable bottom closure panel.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and
2 shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than height indicated on
3 Drawings.
4 b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel.
5 4. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at
6 bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to
7 wall clip without fasteners.
8 a. Closure-Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings.
9 5. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades
10 as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other
11 means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.
12 6. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps
13 at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.
14 7. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
15
16 2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
17
18 A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a
19 qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
20 agency.
21
22 B. Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.
23 1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
24 2. Type: Greenguard; Polyester with foamed-acrylic backing.
25 3. Fabric Thickness: .026”.
26 4. Mesh Weight: 13.41 oz. sq. yd..
27 5. Roll Width: 94 inches or 118” standard width.
28 6. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
29 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
30 8. Acceptable Product: SW 7000 by Draper.
31
32 2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
33
34 A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
35 requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning
36 labels.
37
38 B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured
39 at 74 deg F:
40 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of
41 opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or
42 minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which
43 shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
44 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
45 between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined
46 vertical separations between openings.
47 C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible
48 except as follows:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than
2 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure
3 shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without
4 distortion of the material.
5
6
7 PART 3 - EXECUTION
8
9 3.1 EXAMINATION
10
11 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
12 requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
13 connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of
14 the Work.
15
16 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
17
18 3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
19
20 A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to
21 manufacturer's written instructions.
22 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior
23 face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
24
25 B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system.
26
27 3.3 ADJUSTING
28
29 A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding
30 or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
31
32 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
33
34 A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written
35 instructions.
36
37 B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
38 and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
39 Substantial Completion.
40
41 C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
42 before time of Substantial Completion.
43
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 24 13 - 7 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 3.5 DEMONSTRATION
2
3 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
4 to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.
5
6
7 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 36 63 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 12 36 63
2
3 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL FABRICATIONS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Section Includes:
10 1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
11
12 1.2 REFERENCES
13
14 A. American National Standards Institute
15 1. ANSI SS1: Performance Standard for Solid Surface Materials
16
17 1.3 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
20
21 B. Sustainable Submittals:
22 1. For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that product
23 contains no urea formaldehyde.
24 2. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
25 weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement
26 indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
27
28 C. Shop Drawings: Cutting and setting drawings showing sizes, dimensions, sections, and
29 profiles; arrangement and provisions for jointing, anchoring, supports, and other necessary
30 details for reception of work.
31
32 D. Samples: For countertop material, 6 inches square.
33
34 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
35
36 A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before
37 countertop fabrication is complete.
38
39 1.5 COORDINATION
40
41 A. Coordinate locations of electrical and plumbing fixtures that will penetrate countertops or
42 backsplashes.
43
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 36 63 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
3 2.1 COUNTERTOPS
4
5 A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
6 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top with 1-inch laminated edge..
7 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at edges.
8 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
9
10 B. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same
11 material.
12
13 C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.
14
15 D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise
16 indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for
17 adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
18
19 2.2 MATERIALS
20
21 A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, made with binder containing no
22 urea formaldehyde.
23
24 B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
25 touch sanded.
26
27 C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
28
29 D. Solid Surface Material – SS-1:
30 1. Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
31 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
32 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
33 limited to, the following:
34 a. Avonite Surfaces.
35 b. DuPont Chemical.
36 c. InPro Corporation.
37 d. Formica Corporation.
38 e. LG Chemical, Ltd.
39 f. Meganite Inc.
40 g. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.
41 h. Wilsonart International.
42 3. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
43 4. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule.
44
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 36 63 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.1 INSTALLATION
4
5 A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
6
7 B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
8 subtops. Attach countertops to subtops using adhesive. Align adjacent surfaces and, using
9 adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
10 instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire
11 surface.
12 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written
13 instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
14 2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 36 66 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 12 36 66
2
3 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.
12
13 1.2 REFERENCES
14
15 A. American National Standards Institute
16 1. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
17
18 B. International Cast Polymer Association/American National Standards Institute
19 1. ICPA/ANSI SS-1: Performance Standard for Solid Surface Materials
20
21 1.3 SUBMITTALS
22
23 A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
24
25 B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
26 1.Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.
27 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for
28 low-emitting materials.
29 3.Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
30 requirements for low-emitting materials.
31
32 C. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
33 methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
34
35 D. Samples: For countertop material, 6 inches square.
36
37 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
38
39 A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before
40 countertop fabrication is complete.
41
42 1.5 COORDINATION
43
44 A. Coordinate locations of electrical and plumbing fixtures that will penetrate countertops or
45 backsplashes.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 36 66 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2
3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
5 2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS
6
7 A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
8 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top with 1-1/2-inch laminated edge.
9 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at edges.
10 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
11
12 B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same
13 material.
14
15 C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate.
16
17 D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise
18 indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for
19 adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
20 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.
21
22 2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
23
24 A.Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde
25 resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's "Airborne Toxic Control Measure
26 to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made
27 with no added formaldehyde.
28
29 B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, made with binder containing no
30 urea formaldehyde.
31
32 C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
33 touch sanded.
34
35 D. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer.
36 1.Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
37
38 E. Quartz Agglomerate – SS-2:
39 1. Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled
40 plastic resin and complying with ICPA/ANSI SS-1, except for composition.
41 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
42 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
43 limited to, the following:
44 a. Cambria.
45 b. Cosentino USA.
46 c. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
47 d. LG Chemical, Ltd.
48 e. Meganite Inc.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 36 66 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.
2 g. Silestone Inc.
3 h. Technistone USA, Inc.
4 i. Transolid, Inc.
5 j. Verona Marble
6 k. Zodiac
7 3. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule.
8
9
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
12 3.1 INSTALLATION
13
14 A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
15
16 B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
17 subtops. Attach countertops to subtops using adhesive. Align adjacent surfaces and, using
18 adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
19 instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire
20 surface.
21 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written
22 instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
23 2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
24
25
26 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 48 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 12 48 13
2
3 ENTRANCE MATS
4
5
6
7 PART 1 GENERAL
8
9 1.1 SUMMARY
10
11 A. Section Includes: Entrance mat and frame.
12
13 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
14
15 A. Uniform Loading: 200 lbs./sq.ft. minimum.
16
17 1.3 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications and installation
20 instructions.
21
22 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation details, coordination with finish flooring materials and
23 slab leave-out instructions.
24
25 C. Samples: Submit 12" long samples of framing members and grid members in selected finish.
26
27 D. Sustainable Design Submittals:
28 1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
29 percentages of weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
30 statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
31 2. Product Data: Manufacturers' product data for interior sealants, including printed
32 statement of VOC content.
33 3. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
34 manufacturer.
35
36
37 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
38
39 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
40
41 A. Acceptable Aluminum Mat Manufacturers:
42 1. Balco, Inc.
43 2. Construction Specialties, Inc.
44 3. J. L. Industries, Inc.
45
46 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
47
48 2.2 MATERIALS
49
50 A. Recycled Content of Aluminum Products: Provide products with an average recycled
51 content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
52 recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 12 48 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
3 weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
4 calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
5 1.Architectural Sealants: Not more than 250 g/L.
6 2.Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: Not more than 250 g/L.
7 3.Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
8
9 2.3 ALUMINUM MATS
10
11 A. Tread Rails: Extruded aluminum clear anodized 6063-T52 alloy; rails continuously hinged at
12 each tread connection.
13
14 B. Frame: Extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish with mitered corners.
15
16 C. Treads: Carpet insert color as selected by Architect.
17
18 D. Support Cushion: Continuous vinyl strip mounted under tread in channels.
19
20 E. Acceptable Product: Pedimat by Construction Specialties, Inc.
21
22
23 PART 3 - EXECUTION
24
25 3.1 EXAMINATION
26
27 A. Examine base to ensure suitable, level substrate.
28
29 3.2 INSTALLATION
30
31 A. Separate aluminum from contact with concrete with one coat of zinc chromate primer.
32
33 3.3 PROTECTION
34
35 A. Protect mat from damage and soiling due to construction operations.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
SECTION 12 60 10 1
2
FIXED AUDITORIUM SEATING 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7
8
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 9
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to work of this section. 10
11
B. Refer to Contract Drawings “TS” series for plans, graphic representations, schedules, 12
and notations showing Fixed Auditorium Seating work. Also, refer to “E” Series 13
drawings for related work. 14
15
C. Division 3 - Concrete 16
17
1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 18
19
A. For the sake of brevity these specifications omit phrases such as "(Sub)Contractor shall 20
furnish and install,” "unless otherwise indicated or specified,” etc., but these phrases are 21
nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the (Sub)Contractor 22
to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations complete to the 23
satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Exceptions are noted herein or shown on the 24
drawings. 25
26
B. No representative of the Owner shall have power to waive the obligations of this 27
contract for the furnishing of good materials or of performing good work, as herein 28
described, in full accordance with the contract documents. The failure of any 29
representative of the Owner to condemn any defective work or materials shall not 30
release the obligation to at once tear out, remove, and properly replace the same at any 31
time prior to final acceptance upon discovery of said defective work or material. When 32
requested, however, the Owner's representative shall observe and accept or reject any 33
material furnished. In the event the material has been accepted once by the Owner's 34
representative, such acceptance shall be binding on the Owner unless it can be clearly 35
shown that such material does not meet the specifications for this work. 36
37
1.3 SCOPE 38
39
A. The work under this contract shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, 40
equipment, transportation, services, etc., and supervision necessary to complete the 41
demolition of the existing audience seating and installation of new seating, as indicated. 42
Extent of all work shall be furnished as described in these specifications, as illustrated 43
on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Architect/Consultant. 44
45
B. Provide and install fixed auditorium chairs with upholstered seats and backs, and aisle 46
and center standards, all as specified, floor mounted, with self-lifting seats that raise 47
automatically to a uniform 3/4 fold position. 48
49
C. Varying lateral sizes of backs shall be used in accordance with approved seating shop 50
drawings, with standards in each row spaced laterally so that the end standards shall be 51
in alignment from first to last row whether aisles are of constant of converging width. 52
Use a variety of chair width from 20” wide to 24” wide with the majority of the chair 53
widths to be 22”. Chairs less than 20” wide are not acceptable. 54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
D. All equipment specified herein, or shown on related drawings, including all hardware, 2
fittings and components necessary for full and complete installation, including: 3
1. Samples and preparation and submission of complete, detailed shop drawings and 4
diagrams for review prior to fabrication. 5
2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at job site. Field dimensions are 6
required. 7
3. Transportation to job site, unloading and initial setup. 8
4. Coordination with associated trades and installation in accordance with these 9
specifications, pertinent drawings, established trade criteria and applicable code 10
requirements. 11
5. Services required for inspection, demonstration and necessary adjustment of 12
completed installations. 13
6. Training of Owner's staff personnel, half-day session, minimum. 14
7. Submission of required record drawings, service and operational data and 15
certificates. 16
17
1.4 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT 18
19
A. Comply with ADA Rules and Regulations. 20
21
1.5 FIRE PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF UPHOLSTERED SEATING 22
23
A. Chairs provided shall have been tested and certified as complying with BIFMA 24
Voluntary Upholstered Furniture Flammability Standard BIFMA X5.7-1991 sponsored 25
by the Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association. 26
27
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 28
29
A. All equipment and installation to be the responsibility of a single Manufacturer. 30
31
B. Provide all new materials of types specified. 32
33
C. A qualified and experienced supervisor of the Manufacturer shall be at the site during 34
the installation and shall actively direct and supervise the work. 35
36
D. Turn over all work to the owner in undamaged condition. 37
38
E. For purposes of establishing the quality and performance desired, the following 39
companies are approved as manufacturers for the herein specified equipment: 40
1. Irwin Seating Company 41
2. Series Seating 42
3. Jezet Seating 43
4. Seating Concepts 44
45
F. Approval indicates approval of the manufacturer only and not approval of 46
specific products. The Contractor shall be required to provide equipment, 47
which will meet or exceed the intent of these specifications. To assure high and 48
satisfactory quality, design, color and operation of products, reference has been 49
made to brand names; however, it is not intended to limit competition and items 50
of brands that are equal will be given full consideration. This specification is 51
based on Series Seating, Madison. 52
53
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
G. Manufacturer shall have provided and installed five (5) seating projects of similar size 1
and shall have been in service for 5 years or longer. Projects submitted as evidence of 2
experience shall incorporate chairs with seats, backs and standards consistent with those 3
offered on this project. 4
5
1.7 SUBMITTALS 6
7
A. Submit with or prior to bid a sample chair with features and components similar to 8
those specified. Sample chairs from the successful bidders shall be retained by Owner 9
until fabrication and installation is substantially complete and shall be used as a quality 10
sample in reviewing final installation for acceptance. Sample chairs from unsuccessful 11
bidders shall be retained by Owner for 30 days after bids are submitted. Manufacturer 12
shall arrange for delivery and pick-up. 13
14
B. Within 45 days of Notice of Award, submit complete and at one time the following for 15
review prior to fabrication: 16
1. Schedule for drawing preparation, fabrication and installation, conforming to time 17
limits set for this project. 18
2. A complete bill of materials with manufacturer's names, model and type numbers 19
and catalog data sheets with clear notation where products vary from this 20
specification. 21
3. The following samples: 22
a. Manufacturer’s standard fabric cards 23
b. Manufacturer’s standard plastic samples 24
c. Powder coat color and finish samples 25
d. Wood armrest materials and finish samples 26
e. Number and letter plates 27
f. Exposed fasteners, if any 28
g. End standard aisle light 29
4. Other items as may be required in Division 1 or as requested. Such items and/or 30
samples shall be provided within ten (10) days of written request. 31
32
C. Submit the following for review prior to fabrication and installation: 33
1. A complete two-chair sample mounted on a moveable base. 34
2. Complete, fully-dimensioned shop drawings for layout and all components with 35
indication by arrow and boxed caption of all variations from contract drawings and 36
specifications. Layout drawings shall be based on field dimensions. 37
3. Samples shall become quality and finish standards for all similar items provided to 38
the project. 39
40
D. Review of Submissions 41
1. Review of shop drawings and samples is for quality and design. 42
2. Such review does not change requirements of contract drawings or specifications, 43
or reduce quality or quantity of items to be supplied, unless so stated in writing. 44
3. Such review does not relieve Manufacturer of responsibilities re site conditions as 45
specified unless so stated in writing. 46
47
1.8 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 48
49
A. Manufacturer shall guarantee parts replacement and system repair and site visits by 50
factory representative, including time and travel expenses, for a period of two (2) years 51
from the date of substantial completion. All guarantee work shall be coordinated with 52
Using Agency's requirements for facility use. All guarantee work shall be performed 53
within thirty (30) days of notification. 54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
B. Ordinary wear and defects due to improper usage are excepted. 2
3
C. Three signed copies of the above are required as a condition for final approval of the 4
work. 5
6
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS 7
8
A. Manufacturer shall coordinate preparation of chair layout drawings and chair installation 9
with the contractors for electrical service to aisle lights. 10
11
B. Manufacturer shall immediately notify in writing the Architect/Engineer of any 12
conditions, measurements, quantities, or other data, as required for proper execution, fit 13
and completion of all work, and for safe and proper operating clearances. 14
15
C. Manufacturer shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer of any site conditions or 16
variations that affect installation or completion of work, and where appropriate, shall 17
indicate suggested remedial procedures by drawings and/or descriptions. 18
19
D. Contractor shall take care not to damage any equipment, which will be reused, or to 20
disconnect any wiring other than as required to interface new system. 21
22
1.10 PERMITS 23
24
A. Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the demolition, 25
and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes. 26
27
1.11 APPROVAL 28
29
A. The following conditions must be met before acceptance. 30
1. Approval of final tests and inspections. 31
2. Submittal of three signed copies of the warranty. 32
3. Submittal of record drawings, and data. 33
4. Instruction for staff. 34
35
36
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37
38
2.1 STEEL 39
40
A. Steel shall be the primary structural material for chair support systems, including aisle 41
and center standards, and back component attachment. Steel structural components 42
shall be die-formed according to modern manufacturing methods, and assembled by 43
means of state-of-the-art MIG welding processes. All steel shall have smooth surfaces 44
and be of sufficient gauge thickness and designed to withstand strains of normal use 45
and abuse. 46
47
2.2 WOOD 48
49
A. Plywood, exposed or concealed, shall be hardwood. All plywood shall be hot press 50
laminated using high frequency process. Interior plies shall be Class 3 or better. 51
Exposed exterior plys shall be Class 1, continuous, and selected as to color. Solid 52
hardwood shall be clear and shall be selected as to color. All exposed hardwood, solid 53
or veneer, shall be northern-grown maple. Particle core shall be 55 pound density. 54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
2.3 PLASTIC COMPONENTS 2
3
A. Injection molded structural plastic shall be one-piece, high impact resistant, 25% glass-4
filled polypropylene with built-in ultra-violet light inhibitors to retard fading, and anti-5
static compounds to retard dirt attraction. 6
7
B. Injection molded decorative plastic shall be one-piece, high impact, linear polyethylene 8
with built-in ultra-violet light inhibitors to retard fading, and anti-static compounds to 9
retard dirt attraction. 10
11
C. Plastic laminate shall be minimum 0.030 inch thickness, composed of a core of kraft 12
papers impregnated with phenolic resins, a decorative surface sheet, and overlay sheet 13
containing melamine. Layers are fused together under pressures in excess of 1000 PSI, 14
and temperatures over 275 degrees. Plastic laminate shall meet or exceed performance 15
standards as established by N.E.M.A. 16
17
D. Plastic shall have a maximum burn rate of 1" per minute when tested in accordance 18
with ASTM D635, or Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 19
No. 302. 20
21
2.4 PADDING MATERIAL 22
23
A. Seat and back padding material shall be of new (prime manufacture) polyurethane foam. 24
Padding material shall comply with the flammability requirements outlined in the 25
California Technical Information Bulletin #117, Resilient Cellular Materials, Section A 26
& D, dated February 1975, when tested in accordance with Federal Test Method 27
Standard 191, Method 5903.2. 28
29
2.5 FABRIC 30
31
A. Fabric shall exhibit superior color fastness, light fastness, tear strength, and break 32
strength and shall be exceptionally resistant to staining, chemicals, and abrasion. Fabric 33
shall meet Class 1 flammability requirements of the U.S. Department of Commerce 34
Commercial Standard 191-53 per Bulletin #117 (California Code). Fabrics shall be 35
available in a choice of 30 colors ranging from delicate to vibrant. 36
37
2.6 FINISH 38
39
A. Metal Parts: All exposed metal parts shall be powder coated with a hybrid thermosetting 40
powder coat finish. The powder coat finish shall be applied by electrostatic means to a 41
thickness of 2 - 2.5 mils, and shall provide a durable coating having a 2H Pencil 42
hardness. Prior to powder coating, metal parts shall be treated with a five-stage 43
bonderization process for superior finish adhesion, and after coating shall be oven 44
baked to cause proper flow of the epoxy powder to result in a smooth, durable finish. 45
Manufacturer's standard color range shall be used. 46
47
B. Wood Parts: All exposed surfaces shall be stained to color selected and coated with 48
lacquer of sufficient film depth to afford wear resistance of institutional quality and 49
oven baked. 50
51
C. Plastic Parts: Color of plastic shall be selected from manufacturer's standard color 52
range. 53
54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
D. Hardware: All assembly hardware shall be rust resistant, black plated. 1
2
2.7 UPHOLSTERED BACKS: 3
4
A. The back components shall be upholstered and padded on their face with a hardwood 5
veneer plywood rear, and shall be approximately 29" long to provide a height of back 6
extending to a nominal 34" above the floor, the height necessary to allow proper 7
shoulder support for the chair occupant. The back shall be compound-contoured to 8
conform to the proper posture of a seated individual, giving special attention to 9
supporting the lumbar region of the back. 10
11
B. The upholstery panels shall be 7/16" 5-ply hardwood plywood formed with compound 12
curves for proper body support, and shall be padded with a 2" thick polyurethane foam 13
pad, and covered over its full face with the specified fabric. The polyfoam pad shall be 14
securely cemented to the plywood inner panel, and the upholstery fabric shall be 15
secured to the padding and upholstery panel by two tufted decorative tie-backs, and the 16
fabric fastened to the hardwood inner panel by means of upholstery staples. The wings 17
for the attachment of the complete back to the standards shall be not less than 14 gauge 18
(.0747") steel, firmly bolted to the back using concealed threaded washers. Back wings 19
shall have provision for three pitches, providing a selection of mean back angle of 19, 20
16, or 13 degrees. 21
22
C. The rear of the back shall be enclosed by plywood panel, formed to enclose the edges 23
of the inner upholstery panel at the top and both sides of the back; and shall be not less 24
than 29" in length, extending below the seat level to protect the seat cushion from the 25
rear. There shall be no exposed fasteners above the armrests. The plywood rear panel 26
shall be contoured to conform to the shape of the inner plywood panel and shall, by its 27
contours, set the tone of the entire chair design, suggesting comfort by its appearance. 28
29
2.8 UPHOLSTERED SELF-LIFTING SEAT 30
31
A. Seats shall be padded and upholstered on their top surface with an ergonomically 32
correct firm support system to provide exceptional comfort for the seated individual. 33
Seat foundation shall be wood, and shall be quietly and automatically self-lifting to a 34
3/4 fold position when unoccupied. Seats shall be ISO 9001 certified through routine 35
testing during manufacturing to pass seat cycle oscillation, ASTM Designation F851-87 36
Test Method for Self-Rising Seat Mechanism, and 600 lb. static load to front of seat. 37
38
B. The seat cushions shall have a base structure of properly contoured, rigid 39
polypropylene, and shall have 3” thick individually cold-molded polyurethane foam 40
pads with the specified fabric, carefully tailored, and of panel-side construction, secured 41
around the perimeter of the cushion frame by means of a drawstring and staples. Pads 42
shall be individually molded, high resilient polyurethane foam conforming to the base 43
structure on the bottom, and flat across the top, and shall have an extended, rounded 44
front. The seat cushion assembly shall be securely locked to the seat foundation, 45
preventing unauthorized removal; but facilitating convenient removal by trained 46
maintenance personnel. 47
48
C. Seat foundation shall be ¾”, 8-ply hardwood veneer, completely enclosing the self-49
lifting hinge mechanism, and providing an attractive, decorative bottom surface for the 50
seat. Bolted attachment of the seat component to the chair structure shall be to present 51
a finished, refined appearance. Bottom decorative surface shall be hardwood matching 52
other wood components in finish. 53
54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 7 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
D. When unoccupied, the seat shall quietly and automatically rise to a 3/4 fold position, 1
and upon a slight rearward pressure, shall achieve full-fold, allowing the patron 2
additional passing room. The seat shall rotate on two, molded, structural, glass-filled 3
nylon hinge rods in internally molded channels with integral down stops for exceptional 4
strength. Seat-lift shall be accomplished by compression springs and lubricated plastic 5
cams, providing quiet gentle seat uplift. Down stops and up stops shall be non-metallic, 6
eliminating plangent noise and providing quiet operation. Action of self-rising seat shall 7
not produce noise. The Architect/Engineer and Owner shall assess degree of noise 8
produced. All springs shall be dampened with neoprene pads at all metal contact 9
points. 10
11
2.9 STANDARDS 12
13
A. Aisle Standards: shall provide a rectangular support structure shall be formed of 16 14
gauge (.0598”) steel with the sides formed into "C" channels. The top of the column 15
shall be provided with two formed steel dovetail lugs for secure attachment of the 16
armrest. Brackets for seat attachment shall be 7 gauge (.1875") buttressed steel welded 17
on the inside of the standard. Standards shall be machined to the appropriate floor 18
incline to maintain proper seat and back height and angle. Heavy 12 gauge (.1046) 19
attaching feet shall be securely welded to the standard to provide for attachment to the 20
floor. The steel foot shall allow for severe tightening and shock without fracture. 21
22
B. A 14 gauge (.0747) steel formed foot shall be welded to the bottom of the rectangular 23
column. This weldment shall be at all critical stress areas 360 degrees around the 24
column, and concealed on the inside so as not to detract from the clean appearance. 25
The foot dimension shall be 8" x 2-3/4" to provide maximum bearing surface to the 26
floor to withstand severe tightening and shock without fracture. The standard shall be 27
fabricated to be compatible with the floor incline, and to maintain proper seat and back 28
height and angle. All weldments shall be gas shielded, arc weld. 29
30
2.10 ARMRESTS 31
32
A. Armrests shall be solid hardwood with all edges well rounded. Armrests shall be 33
furnished with two (2) keyhole slots in the bottom and shall lock securely to dovetail 34
lugs provided on aisle and center standards. Further, one (1) security screw shall be 35
utilized. 36
B. Finish per architect. 37
38
2.11 HANDICAPPED ACCESS AISLE STANDARDS 39
40
A. Aisle standards shall be arranged for easy access by handicapped individuals and shall be 41
designed to allow the individual to transfer easily from a wheelchair to the theatre chair. 42
The aisle standard support column shall be inclined to the rear at the top by 16 degrees, 43
and shall be equipped with an armrest capable of lifting to a position parallel with the 44
chair back, opening sideways access to the seat. Aisle standards so equipped shall be 45
provided with a label, displaying an easily recognizable "handicapped" symbol. 46
Decorative requirements of aisle standards are waived for the Handicapped Access 47
Standards. 48
49
2.12 AISLE LIGHTS 50
51
A. Aisle lights shall be furnished for the aisle standards located as designated on the 52
approved seating plan. Aisle lights shall be low voltage, non-hazardous 24 volt, A.C. 53
system, utilizing a minimum of six LEDs per standard, and providing adequate 54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 8 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
illumination for floor and/or steps adjacent to aisle standards. The light assembly shall 1
be recessed under the aisle standard armrest, concealed from sight and protected from 2
damage. The standard shall be completely pre-wired with 18" of wiring extending 3
beyond the standard. The standard shall be provided with a flex-steel conduit 4
connector thru which the wiring extension shall pass. All wiring will be concealed. 5
Seating supplier shall furnish as part of the aisle light package a voltage reduction 6
device, suitably housed in a steel safety enclosure and shall be equipped with primary 7
and secondary fuses, terminal blocks, and safety disconnect; all components 8
Underwriters' Laboratories listed, and assembled by licensed electricians to N.E.C. 9
specifications, to facilitate safe connection to the building electrical system. All wiring 10
connections from the electric distribution system to the aisle light standards, and 11
installation and connection of the voltage reduction device shall be the responsibility of 12
the electrical contractor. 13
14
2.13 NUMBER AND LETTER PLATES 15
16
A. A numbering system shall be provided for identification of all chairs. Number and letter 17
plates shall be furnished as shown on the approved seating layout. Number Plates shall 18
be 5/8" x 1-5/8" with a bronze finish and black Helvetica Medium letters and 19
numerals. The seat pans shall be recessed at the center of the front edge for the number 20
plates, and the plates shall be attached by two (2) pop rivets. Bronze Letter plates shall 21
be attached in a recess in the aisle standard armrest by two (2) escutcheon pins. 22
Attaching hardware shall have a bronze finish compatible to plates. 23
24
25
PART 3 - EXECUTION 26
27
3.1 EXAMINATION 28
29
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 30
requirements for construction tolerances, material properties as they affect anchors and 31
fasteners. 32
33
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 34
35
3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 36
37
A. The fixed audience seating contractor will be held responsible for the unloading, storage 38
and placement/installation of all items comprising the contract. The contractor shall be 39
responsible for receiving and storing fixed audience seating offsite prior to installation. 40
If storage is required off site, the owner will require a certificate of insurance showing 41
their products additionally insured at the contractor's expense. 42
43
3.3 INSTALLATION 44
45
A. Coordinate installation of chairs with other trades, noting especially the under seat 46
return air. 47
48
B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. 49
50
C. Standards shall be anchored with not less than two anchoring devices in color to match 51
standard. 52
53
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 9 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
D. Install chairs using manufacturer’s recommended hardware and fasteners. Chairs in 1
curved rows shall be installed at smooth radius. 2
3
E. Verify moving components operate smoothly and quietly. 4
5
3.4 ADJUSTING 6
7
A. Adjust self-rising seat mechanisms to ensure seats in each row are aligned when in 8
upright position. 9
10
B. Repair minor abrasions and imperfections in finishes with materials that match the 11
factory-applied finish in color and sheen and are compatible for field application. 12
13
C. Replace upholstery fabric damaged during installation. 14
15
3.5 PROTECTION 16
17
A. Protect seating against damage during remainder of construction period, complying 18
with manufacturer's direction. 19
20
B. Provide additional protection as needed to ensure that seating will not be damaged or 21
deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. 22
23
3.6 CLEANING OF THE SITE 24
25
A. Remove from the site all rubbish, trash, discarded packing materials, cartons, and other 26
debris caused by daily operations. Upon completion of work, the entire area of work by 27
this Contractor shall be left in broom clean condition. 28
29
3.7 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 30
31
A. Tests and inspections during progress of the work, and for final approval, shall include 32
visual examination, uncovering and disassembly of components and/or such other 33
tests, inspections and operations as the Architect/Engineer or local authorities having 34
jurisdiction may find necessary. 35
36
B. Upon completion of all work, the Manufacturer shall certify in writing that work is 37
complete and ready for inspection for substantial completion. Inspection shall be 38
scheduled by the Architect/Engineer at their convenience. 39
40
C. Should deficiencies due to faulty equipment or installation require re-inspection after 41
final inspection, all expenses of such re-inspection, including time and travel of the 42
Architect/Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer without cost to the 43
Owner. 44
45
3.8 STAFF INSTRUCTION 46
47
A. The Manufacturer's supervisor shall instruct designated representatives of the Owner in 48
the care and maintenance of all items. 49
50
B. The Architect/Engineer and other representatives may be present or represented. 51
52
C. Instruction shall be scheduled in conformance with test and instruction schedules, and 53
availability of the Architect/Engineer and their representatives. 54
18 September 2018 12 60 10 - 10 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction – Change Order 01 17008.0000
1
D. Confirmation of completed instruction must be obtained in writing from appropriate 2
Owner’s Representative, with copies provided to the Architect and Theatre Consultant. 3
4
END OF SECTION 5
18 September 2018 12 62 16 - 1 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
SECTION 12 62 16 1
2
PORTABLE AUDIENCE SEATING 3
4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8
9
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 10
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to work of this section. 11
12
1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 13
14
A. For the sake of brevity these specifications omit phrases such as "(Sub)Contractor shall 15
furnish and install,” "unless otherwise indicated or specified,” etc., but these phrases are 16
nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the (Sub)Contractor 17
to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations complete to the 18
satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Exceptions are noted herein or shown on the 19
drawings. 20
21
B. No representative of the Owner shall have power to waive the obligations of this 22
contract for the furnishing of good materials or of performing good work, as herein 23
described, in full accordance with the contract documents. The failure of any 24
representative of the Owner to condemn any defective work or materials shall not 25
release the obligation to at once tear out, remove, and properly replace the same at any 26
time prior to final acceptance upon discovery of said defective work or material. When 27
requested, however, the Owner's representative shall observe and accept or reject any 28
material furnished. In the event the material has been accepted once by the Owner's 29
representative, such acceptance shall be binding on the Owner unless it can be clearly 30
shown that such material does not meet the specifications for this work. 31
32
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK 33
34
A. The work under this contract shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, 35
equipment, transportation, services, etc., and supervision necessary to complete the 36
installation of new portable seating, as indicated. Extent of all work shall be furnished 37
as described in these specifications, as illustrated on the contract drawings, or as 38
directed by the Architect. 39
40
B. Provide and install portable audience seating chairs with upholstered seats and backs, 41
with self-lifting seats that raise automatically to a uniform fully raised position. 42
43
C. Chair widths to be 24” and shall be capable of being ganged together regardless of 44
width. 45
46
D. Comply with ADA Rules and Regulations. 47
48
E. All equipment specified herein, or shown on related drawings, including all hardware, 49
fittings and components necessary for full and complete installation, including: 50
1. Samples and preparation and submission of complete, detailed shop drawings and 51
diagrams for review prior to fabrication. 52
18 September 2018 12 62 16 - 2 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at job site. Field dimensions are 1
required. 2
3. Transportation to job site, unloading and initial setup. 3
4. Coordination with associated trades and installation in accordance with these 4
specifications, pertinent drawings, established trade criteria and applicable code 5
requirements. 6
5. Services required for inspection, demonstration and necessary adjustment of 7
completed installations. 8
6. Training of Owner's staff personnel. 9
7. Submission of required record drawings, service and operational data and 10
certificates. 11
12
1.4 REFERENCES 13
14
A. Chairs provided shall have been tested and certified as complying with the following 15
1. California Technical Bulletin 133. 16
2. ANSI/BIFMA X5.1-2002. 17
3. ASTM F851-87 (2000). 18
19
1.5 SUBMITTALS 20
21
A. Product data. 22
23
B. Shop Drawings: Assembly and installation drawings showing product components in 24
assembly with adjacent materials and products. 25
26
C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 27
1. Cleaning and Maintenance Data. 28
2. Warranty. 29
30
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 31
32
A. Provide all new materials of types specified. 33
34
B. Turn over all work to the owner in undamaged condition. 35
36
C. For purposes of establishing the quality and performance desired, the following 37
companies are approved as manufacturers for the herein specified equipment: 38
1. Wenger 39
2. Irwin Seating Company 40
3. Hussy seating 41
42
D. Approval indicates approval of the manufacturer only and not approval of specific 43
products. The Contractor shall be required to provide equipment, which will meet or 44
exceed the intent of these specifications. To assure high and satisfactory quality, design, 45
color and operation of products, reference has been made to brand names; however, it 46
is not intended to limit competition and items of brands that are equal will be given full 47
consideration. This specification is based on the 027A101 Single Standard Portable 48
Audience Chair, manufactured by the Wenger Corporation. 49
50
1.7 WARRANTY 51
18 September 2018 12 62 16 - 3 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
A. Provide written warranty stating that products found not in accordance with the 1
requirements of the contract documents within a period of five years after date of 2
delivery shall be corrected promptly after receipt of written notice from owner. 3
4
1.8 PERMITS 5
6
A. Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the work in 7
this section, and confirm with all applicable codes. 8
9
1.9 APPROVAL 10
11
A. The following conditions must be met before acceptance: 12
1. Approval of final tests and inspections. 13
2. Submittal of three signed copies of the warranty. 14
3. Submittal of record drawings and data. 15
4. Instruction for Owner. 16
17
18
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 19
20
2.1 GENERAL 21
22
A. Fully upholstered, portable folding chair with automatic seat uplift. Chair standards are 23
mounted on welded steel plate protected with rectangular rubber cushions. Back 24
cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort. 25
26
B. Automatic spring-loaded seat rise returns seat to an upright position when not 27
occupied. Arm rests initiate folding for putting in storage. 28
29
C. The chair folds for storage. A transport cart shall be available. 30
31
D. Each chair is equipped with a ganging device for solid, orderly rows. 32
33
E. Quantities indicated within for equipment provided under this section are anticipatory 34
and used for budgeting purposes. 35
36
2.2 CHAIR FRAME 37
38
A. Steel chair frame shall be constructed of 16-gauge continuous, electric welded 1 x 2 39
inches rectangular steel tube. 40
41
B. Frame color: Black powder coat. 42
43
C. Chair seat shall return to an upright position when not occupied. The seat plate is fixed 44
to the front standards. Independent seat fold action is by means of two double tension 45
springs, which provide noiseless tilting mechanism. Legs and armrests shall pivot on 46
steel rivets. 47
48
D. Chair back height: 32 inches; seat height: 17-½ inches. 49
50
E. Chairs shall be available in single, double, or triple-chair configurations. 51
52
18 September 2018 12 62 16 - 4 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
F. Chairs shall be available in widths of 24”, outside-to-outside dimension referencing 1
single-chair configuration. 2
3
2.3 SEAT AND BACK 4
5
A. Seat and back upholstery shall selected by Architect 6
7
B. Seat Cushion material shall be of new (prime manufacture) 2-1/2”-thick, high-resiliency 8
polyurethane foam cushion glued onto a five-ply, 3/8” contoured hardwood plywood 9
structure completely fabric covered. High-resiliency polyurethane foam, shall be flame-10
retardant, allergy-proof, odorless and moisture-proof, and glued to plywood structure. 11
12
C. Back Cushion material shall be of new (prime manufacture) one-inch thick, high-13
resiliency polyurethane foam with a five-ply, 3/8” contoured hardwood plywood 14
substrate. 15
16
D. Under-seat and seatback shall be fabric-covered with the same fabric as used on the seat 17
and back cushions. 18
19
2.4 ARMREST 20
21
A. Armrests shall be solid wood coordinate with architect, with rounded corners, fixed to 22
the top of the chair standards. 23
24
2.5 FINISH 25
26
A. Metal: Baked enamel coating finish electro-statically applied. 27
28
B. Wood: Black lacquer. 29
30
2.6 PORTABLE AUDIENCE SEATING CHAIRS AND QUANTITIES 31
32
A. Provide 24” wide, single seat, portable audience chairs. 33
1. Quantity: 34
a. Black Box - Two hundred (200) 35
36
2.7 UNIT PRICING 37
38
A. Provide unit pricing for one (1) 23” wide, single seat, portable audience chair. 39
40
B. Provide unit pricing for one (1) 26” wide, single seat, portable audience chair. 41
42
C. Prices shall be for adding or deducting from the base bid quantity. 43
1. Adding shall not exceed an additional 10 units. 44
2. Deducts shall not exceed 50% of each chair size. 45
46
2.8 ACCESSORIES 47
48
A. Storage/Transport Cart 49
1. Chair capacity: 24. 50
2. Steel frame construction with casters. 51
3. Loaded dimensions (inches): 79H x 82W x 38D. 52
18 September 2018 12 62 16 - 5 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
4. Unloaded dimensions (inches): 70H x 82W x 38D. 1
5. Quantity: 2
a. Two (2) 3
4
B. Dust Cover 5
1. Dust cover shall be designed to work with chairs when stored on the storage 6
transport cart. 7
2. Dust cover to be constructed from durable vinyl-coated polypropylene. 8
3. Quantity: 9
b. Provide one (1) dust cover per storage cart. 10
11
12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 13
14
3.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 15
16
A. The portable audience seating contractor shall be responsible for the unloading, storage 17
and placement/installation of all items comprising the contract. The contractor shall be 18
responsible for receiving and storing portable audience seating offsite prior to 19
installation. If storage is required off site, the owner will require a certificate of 20
insurance showing their products additionally insured at the contractor's expense 21
22
3.2 INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT 23
24
A. Assemble all chairs and transportation carts as per manufacturer’s directions. 25
26
B. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. 27
28
C. Adjust self-rising seat mechanisms to ensure seats in each row are aligned when in the 29
upright position. 30
31
D. Repair minor abrasions and imperfections in finishes with materials that match the 32
factory-applied finish in color and sheen and are compatible for field application. 33
34
E. Replace upholstery fabric damaged during installation. 35
36
F. Clean metal, wood and fabric surfaces after installation. 37
38
G. Protect seating against damage during the remainder of the construction period, 39
complying with manufacturer's direction. 40
41
H. Store transportation carts per Owner’s direction. 42
43
3.3 CLEANING 44
45
A. Remove from the site all rubbish, trash, discarded packing materials, cartons, and other 46
debris caused by daily operations. Upon completion of work, the entire area of work by 47
this Contractor shall be left in broom clean condition. 48
18 September 2018 12 62 16 - 6 Old Town Arts Center
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
3.4 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 1
2
A. Tests and inspections of the work for final approval shall include visual examination, or 3
such other tests, inspections and operations as the Architect, their Consultant or local 4
authorities having jurisdiction may find necessary. 5
6
B. Upon completion of all work, the Manufacturer shall certify in writing that work is 7
complete and ready for inspection for substantial completion. Inspection shall be 8
scheduled by the Architect at their convenience. 9
10
C. Should deficiencies due to faulty equipment or installation require re-inspection after 11
final inspection, all expenses of such re-inspection, including time and travel of the 12
Architect and shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer without cost to the Owner. 13
14
15
END OF SECTION 16
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 12 93 00 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 12 93 00 1
2
SITE FURNISHINGS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7
8
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 9
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10
11
1.2 SUMMARY 12
13
A. For specifications specifically related to the concrete and reinforcement, refer to the 14
“Structural Concrete” specification where this specification is silent. 15
16
B. This Section includes the following: 17
1. Bike Racks 18
2. Flag Poles 19
20
1.3 SUBMITTALS 21
22
A. Product Data & Shop drawings: For each type of product indicated. 23
24
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25
26
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who 27
complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 28
29
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless 30
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 31
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 33
34
2.1 BIKE RACKS 35
36
A. Landscape Forms, Bola Bike Rack, powdercoat silver, or approved equal. 37
1. Contact Lara Moffat (972-740-3373) 38
39
2.2 FLAG POLES 40
41
A. Quinn Flags and Banners or approved equal. Satin Flagpole #ECH30IH-SATIN with 42
Satin internal halyard. 30’-0” Height. 43
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 12 93 00 - 2 17008.0000
PART 3 - EXECUTION 44
45
3.1 EXAMINATION 46
47
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for correct and level 48
finished grade, surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 49
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 50
51
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 52
A. 53
B. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on 54
Drawings. For each condition shown contractor shall install per manufacturer’s 55
recommendation. 56
57
3.3 CLEANING 58
59
A. After completing site furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and 60
debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component. 61
62
END OF SECTION 63
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 00 00 - 1
DIVISIONS 210000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION TITLE
210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
211000 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
211200 FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
213213 ELECTRIC DRIVE VERTICAL TURNBINE FIRE PUMPS
213400 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMPS
213900 CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE PUMP DRIVERS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 00 00 - 2
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 1
SECTION 210500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Grout.
6. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Painting and finishing.
9. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,
crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and
mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and
weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include
installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Mechanical sleeve seals.
2. Escutcheons.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
B. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical
services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction,
to allow for fire-suppression installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and
other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 3
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or
specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and
chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe
and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Metraflex Co.
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
d. Hilti.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number
required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring
and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 4
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around
pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and
recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.
Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump
sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or
parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 5
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as
required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to
2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe
material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install
in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping" for materials.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 6
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and
clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings
and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is
specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do
not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections
"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support
and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.5 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 00 - 7
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 21 05 00
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 17 - 1
SECTION 210517
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Grout.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar;
zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with
plain ends.
D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. CALPICO, Inc.
3. Metraflex Company (The).
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5. Proco Products, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between
piping and sleeve.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 17 - 2
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-
inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are
constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate
for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 17 - 3
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping
entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID
or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal
system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): PVC-pipe sleeves
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: PVC-pipe sleeves.
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: [
c. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves
END OF SECTION 210517
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 18 - 1
SECTION 210518
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip
fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that
completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Finished Wall: None. Seal around pipe with
caulking and finish with wall paint.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 18 - 2
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: None. Seal around pipe
with caulking and finish with wall paint.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: None. Seal around pipe
with caulking and finish with wall paint.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated
finish.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that
completely covers opening.
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 210518
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 48 - 1
SECTION 210548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Restraining braces.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 48 - 2
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded
with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of
supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity
range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-
resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing
neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor
and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127 and NFPA 13.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of
80 feet (24 m) o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
C. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of
beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
E. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors.
Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the
structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design
strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to
be fastened.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 48 - 3
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
END OF SECTION 210548
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 53 - 1
SECTION 210553
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed content for
each label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches
(600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black
C. Background Color: Red.
D. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch
(64 by 19 mm).
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 53 - 2
E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600
mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
F. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets
G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
service and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full] circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as
used on Drawings; pipe size; and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where
devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
D. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
E. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark
each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 05 53 - 3
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m)
in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
END OF SECTION 210553
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 1
SECTION 211000
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for piping outside the building.
2. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
C. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Underground service piping below the building.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Combined Standpipe and Wet Sprinkler System: Fire-suppression system with both standpipe and
sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system is supplied from standpipe system.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
B. Fire-suppression standpipe system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor
shall provide a complete fire protection system including all components necessary to insure proper
operation and meet code/manufacturer’s requirements.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through
water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
b. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
d. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 2
e. Patient rooms, treatment rooms, and laboratories: Light Hazard.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
d. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing and manufacturers requirements.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.
b. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
c. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
d. Light Hazard Areas: 225 sq. ft.
e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
6. System design areas shall be per the in-force edition of NFPA 13. Adjustment allowances shall be
strictly enforced.
7. Preaction system design areas shall be increased 30% to allow for delay in water delivery.
8. Gridded or looped piping configurations will not be allowed on preaction systems
9. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13, unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes
b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and sprinkler specialty fittings.
2. Pipe hangers and supports
3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty valves
and trim.
4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish, and
other pertinent data.
5. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish.
6. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps and
chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
7. Alarm devices, including electrical data.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been
approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 Include "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground
Piping."
E. Welding certificates.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 3
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression systems.
Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test combined with fire pump.
B. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
3. NFPA 230, "Fire Protection of Storage."
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate any electrical requirements for sprinkler systems with electrical contractor.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space for
minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by
NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type
of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell end and plain end.
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel
bolts and nuts.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 4
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell end and plain end.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
C. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory- or field-formed, radius-cut-grooved ends
according to AWWA C606.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Victaulic Co. of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching ductile-iron-pipe
OD.
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-iron-pipe OD.
Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching ductile-iron-pipe and fitting grooves, rubber
gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts.
d. Grooved-End-Pipe Transition Coupling: UL 213 and AWWA C606, gasketed fitting with end
matching ductile-iron-pipe OD and end matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron
housing with key matching ductile-iron-pipe groove and key matching steel-pipe groove,
rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
e. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key for ductile-iron-pipe
dimensions. Include flange-type, ductile-iron housing with rubber gasket listed for use with
housing and steel bolts and nuts.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dip
galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
B. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dip
galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed, roll-grooved ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
3) Victaulic Co. of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-
pipe OD.
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise
indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys
matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel
bolts and nuts.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 5
C. Grooved-End, Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller;
and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 ; with factory- or field-formed, roll-grooved
ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
3) Victaulic Co. of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-
pipe OD.
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise
indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys
matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel
bolts and nuts.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 175-psig minimum working-
pressure rating and ends according to the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end-pipe couplings.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
2. Flex-Weld, Inc.
3. Mercer Rubber Co.
4. Metraflex, Inc.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered
with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum working-pressure
rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have 250-psig
minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure piping system.
B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 6
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug inlet and
outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Viking Corp.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and threaded
outlet for sprinkler.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet and
sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. G/J Innovations, Inc.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CECA, LLC.
b. Merit.
G. Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.
2.6 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves shall have
250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.
B. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
4. Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO.
b. Victaulic Co. of America.
C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 7
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Global Safety Products, Inc.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
3) Nibco
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or
grooved ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Global Safety Products, Inc.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Clow Valve Co.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
f. Grinnell Fire Protection.
g. Hammond Valve.
h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
i. Mueller Company.
j. NIBCO.
k. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
l. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
m. Star Sprinkler Inc.
n. Stockham.
o. United Brass Works, Inc.
p. Victaulic Co. of America.
q. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
3) NIBCO.
4) United Brass Works, Inc.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Clow Valve Co.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 8
2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
4) Hammond Valve.
5) Milwaukee Valve Company.
6) Mueller Company.
7) NIBCO.
8) Red-White Valve Corp.
9) United Brass Works, Inc.
F. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting piping.
1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.
2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2) NIBCO.
3) Victaulic Co. of America.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or
grooved ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Grinnell Fire Protection.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Milwaukee Valve Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Victaulic Co. of America.
2.7 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Sprinklers shall
have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure piping system.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
3. Grinnell Fire Protection.
4. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
5. Star Sprinkler Inc.
6. Victaulic Co. of America.
7. Viking Corp.
C. Store sprinkler system components in their original shipping container, in a clean, dry space protected
from weather. Until completion of all finish-out, protective caps/clips shall not be removed from sprinklers
or cover plates/escutcheon plates installed. Any painted sprinklers or cover plates shall be replaced.
D. Fire sprinklers shall be of one manufacturer throughout the protected area. No mixing of sprinkler brands
shall be permitted. Utilization of non-metal parts in the sealing portion of the sprinkler is strictly prohibited.
E. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 9
F. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating,
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.
a. Orifice: 1/2 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Orifice: 17/32 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
G. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Institution sprinklers, made with a small, breakaway projection.
4. Quick-response sprinklers.
5. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
6. Sidewall sprinklers.
7. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers.
8. Upright sprinklers.
H. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.
I. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
J. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications.
Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel one piece, flat.
K. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. Guards shall be list
with the sprinkler they are installed on.
2.8 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
2. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
3. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
B. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig minimum pressure rating, hose valve for connecting fire
hose. Include angle or gate pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose outlet; and lugged cap,
gasket, and chain. Include NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 as indicated, and hose valve threads according to
NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is indicated
2. Finish: chrome-plated.
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
2. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
3. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 10
B. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig minimum pressure rating; with corrosion-
resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and
brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963
and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples,
check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similar to "AUTO SPKR &
STANDPIPE."
1. Type: Exposed, projecting, with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.
2. Finish: Polished chrome-plated
2.10 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator with shaft
length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 10-inch- diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong
with red-enamel factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 inlet and NPS 1 drain connections.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
c. Grinnell Fire Protection.
d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
e. Star Sprinkler Inc.
f. Viking Corp.
C. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 8-inch- minimum-diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with
red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
D. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow detector with 250-
psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-
throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc;
complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover
that sends signal if removed.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
c. Viking Corp.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature. Include single-
pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising pressure and signals
water flow.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
c. Viking Corp.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 11
F. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
1. Manufacturers:
a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
G. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open
position.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. AGF Manufacturing Co.
2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
5. Marsh Bellofram.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to 250 psig
minimum.
1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.
2. Air System Piping: Include retard feature and caption "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connections
before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing for hose-
station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 12
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.
B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure ratings
same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe
with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded grooved ends; grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, push-on joint pipe and fittings and restrained joints.
F. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe and fittings; grooved-end-pipe
couplings; and grooved joints.
G. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Type L, soft copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed
joints.
3.4 STANDPIPE SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Type Standpipe System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Grooved-end, black standard-weight steel pipe with roll-grooved ends;
grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
2. NPS 4 and Smaller: Grooved-end, Schedule 10 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe
couplings; and grooved joints.
3. NPS 4 and Smaller: Grooved-end, Type L, hard copper tube; grooved-end copper fittings;
grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
4. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Grooved-end, black standard-weight steel pipe with roll-grooved ends;
grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
5. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Grooved-end, Schedule 10 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe
couplings; and grooved joints.
6. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Grooved-end, Type L, hard copper tube; grooved-end copper fittings; grooved-
end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
7. NPS 8: Grooved-end, black standard-weight steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
B. Standard-Pressure, Dry-Type Standpipe System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Threaded-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; galvanized, cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. NPS 4 and Smaller: Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with roll-grooved ends;
grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 13
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required by
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14
a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end-
pipe couplings.
2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid,
grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Copper Tube: Roll-groove tubing. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end-tube couplings.
4. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
C. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both piping
materials.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
3. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.
3.7 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for exterior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for
backflow preventers.
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.
3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having
jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 14
C. Install underground ductile-iron service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints.
D. Install underground copper service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24.
E. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe
sizes.
F. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged
devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
G. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger
connections.
H. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install drain valves on standpipes.
K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to
floor drain or outside building.
L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
M. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated
globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
O. Drain dry-type standpipe piping.
P. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
Q. Fill wet-standpipe system piping with water.
R. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
S. Install flexible connectors on fire-pump supply and discharge connections and in fire-suppression piping
where indicated.
3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and
specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply
except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system
controlled by each valve.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 15
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in
potable-water supply sources.
3.10 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the following
sprinkler types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers, coordinate with architect.
3. Rooms with lay-in ceiling or gypboard ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
4. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
5. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry sprinklers
6. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers
7. Sprinkler Finishes:
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to
view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to
acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
c. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
3.11 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels and tiles.
B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type sprinklers
with water supply from heated space.
3.12 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type, fire department connections in vertical wall.
B. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. Include backflow preventer between potable-water
piping and fire-suppression piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
backflow preventers.
D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain or outside
building.
E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.
F. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1. Pressure gages and controls.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 10 00 - 16
2. Electrical power system.
3. Fire alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.
G. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.
H. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm. Connections specified in Division 26.
I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
5. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
6. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.17 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain specialty valves. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 21 10 00
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 1
SECTION 211200
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Hose connections.
4. Fire-department connections.
5. Alarm devices.
6. Pressure gages.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
2. Division 21 Section Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps for fire pumps, pressure-
maintenance pumps, and fire-pump controllers.
3. Division 28 Section Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System for alarm devices not specified in this
Section.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Has
open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
B. Automatic Wet-Type, Class II Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose stations. Has open
water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
C. Automatic Wet-Type, Class III Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose stations and NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of
supplying water demand.
D. Manual Dry-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Does not
have permanent water supply. Piping is dry. Water must be pumped into standpipes to satisfy demand.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working
pressure.
B. Delegated Design: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1. Refer to drawings for available fire-hydrant flow test: Contractor to provide new flow test for design
submission.
C. Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 2
1. Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is as follows:
a. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) Hose Connections: 100 psig (690 kPa).
2. Maximum residual pressure at required flow at each hose-connection outlet is as follows unless
otherwise indicated:
a. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) Hose Connections: 175 psig (1200 kPa.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14, that have been approved
by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements and as described in NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression standpipes
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 3
D. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials,
and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or
field formed to match joining method.
B. Standard-Weight, Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, seamless steel
pipe with threaded ends.
C. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
D. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Corcoran Piping System Co.
c. National Fittings, Inc.
d. Shurjoint Piping Products.
e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
f. Victaulic Company.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless
otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber
gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 4
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. :
a. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
i. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
j. United Brass Works, Inc.
k. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.
l. Victaulic Company.
m. Viking Corporation.
.
3. Standard: UL 312.
4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
5. Type: Swing check.
6. Body Material: Cast iron.
7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
C. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO INC.
e. United Brass Works, Inc.
2. Standard: UL 262.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
4. Body Material: Bronze.
5. End Connections: Threaded.
D. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 5
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
2. :
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Fivalco Inc.
c. Global Safety Products, Inc.
d. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Shurjoint Piping Products.
h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
i. Victaulic Company.
3. Standard: UL 1091.
4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
5. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
6. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
7. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch and
visual indicating device.
2.5 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
2. :
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
d. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
e. GMR International Equipment Corporation.
f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
g. Potter Roemer.
h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
i. Wilson & Cousins Inc.
j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Division.
3. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting pressure-control device,
for connecting fire hose.
4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum.
5. Material: Brass or bronze.
6. Size: NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 40 or DN 65), as indicated.
7. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 6
8. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose valve threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.
9. Pattern: Angle.
10. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing..
11. Finish: Polished chrome plated
2.6 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Flush-Type, Fire-Department Connection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
2. :
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
c. GMR International Equipment Corporation.
d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
e. Potter Roemer.
3. Standard: UL 405.
4. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.
5. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
6. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
7. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and
threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or
clappers.
8. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
9. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.
10. Outlet: With pipe threads.
11. Body Style: Horizontal.
12. Number of Inlets: Four.
13. Outlet Location: Bottom.
14. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE
15. Finish: [Polished chrome plated.
16. Outlet Size: [NPS 6 (DN 150).
2.7 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Flow Indicators:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ADT Security Services, Inc.
b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
e. Viking Corporation.
f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 7
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary
contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard
element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
C. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.
b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.8 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.
2. Ashcroft Inc.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to water-service piping at service entrance into building.
Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-
Service Piping."
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories at connection to fire-
suppression water-service piping.
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 8
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having
jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-suppression standpipe
piping.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for seismic-restraint device
materials and installation.
D. Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.
F. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department connections and check
valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
G. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
H. Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. Comply with
requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
I. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with
connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining
pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to
freezing.
J. Drain dry-type standpipe system piping.
K. Pressurize and check dry-type standpipe system piping.
L. Fill wet-type standpipe system piping with water.
M. Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping in areas
subject to freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Division 21 Section "Heat Tracing for
Fire-Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems
Insulation."
N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves
specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for
sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish
and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 9
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment
having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service.
Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and
clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings
and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.
Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings
according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.
Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings
according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
J. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-
steel pipe.
K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping
systems.
3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties
according to NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply
except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of
system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in
potable-water-supply sources.
3.5 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
C. Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device.
D. Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by
DN 40) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 10
E. Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish matching
valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for
connection of fire hose. Comply with requirements for cabinets in Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher
Cabinets."
3.6 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type, fire-department connections.
B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 14.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
C. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe
with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
B. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
C. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150, shall be one of the
following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 12 00 - 11
D. Dry-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, shall be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints
END OF SECTION 211200
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 32 13 - 1
SECTION 213213
ELECTRIC-DRIVE, VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vertical-turbine fire pumps.
2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum unless higher
pressure rating is indicated.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, motor drivers, and fire-pump accessories and specialties. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled
components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements.
B. Product Certificates: For each fire pump, from manufacturer.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 32 13 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 20, "Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested fire-pump and driver unit.
B. Base: Fabricated and attached to fire-pump and driver unit with reinforcement to resist movement of pump
during seismic events when base is anchored to building substrate.
C. Finish: Red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.
2.2 VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
1. A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries.
2. Patterson Pump Company; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Company.
3. Peerless Pump, Inc.
4. Pentair Pump Group; Aurora Pump.
5. Pentair Pump Group; Fairbanks Morse.
6. S.A. Armstrong Limited.
B. Pump Head: Cast iron, for surface discharge.
1. Discharge Outlet: With flange according to ASME B16.1 except connections may be threaded
according to ASME B1.20.1, in sizes where flanges are not available.
2. Pump Head Seal: Stuffing box and packing.
3. Base: Cast iron or steel with hole for electrical cable.
C. Pump:
1. Standard: UL 448, for vertical-turbine pumps for fire service.
2. Line Shaft: Stainless steel or steel, with corrosion-resistant shaft sleeves.
3. Line Shaft Bearings: Rubber sleeve, water lubricated.
4. Line Shaft: Steel.
5. Line Shaft Bearings: Corrosion resistant, oil lubricated.
6. Impeller Shaft: Monel metal or stainless steel.
7. Bowl Section: Multiple cast-iron bowls with closed-type bronze or stainless-steel impellers.
8. Column Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends and
cast-iron or steel fittings, in sections 10 feet (3 m) or less.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 32 13 - 3
9. Suction Strainer: Cast or fabricated, bronze or stainless steel, and sized to restrict passage of 0.5-
inch (12.7-mm) spheres.
D. Driver:
1. Standard: UL 1004A.
2. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B.
3. Mounting: On pump head above pump.
2.3 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump discharge piping.
B. Relief Valves: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in fire-suppression water-supply
piping.
C. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump-head discharge outlet.
D. Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.
E. Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:
1. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.
2. Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel with ends threaded according to
ASME B1.20.1.
3. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.
4. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.
5. Manifold:
a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers instead of
inlets.
b. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.
c. Nipples: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with ends threaded
according to ASME B1.20.1.
d. Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded according to
NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.
e. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; rectangular.
f. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire-department threads.
g. Exposed Parts Finish: Polished.
h. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."
2.4 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 32 13 - 4
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test" and
"Manufacturing and Protection Tests."
1. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.
B. Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and
conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.
B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before fire-pump installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Fire-Pump Installation Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of fire pumps, relief valves, and
related components.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire pumps on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases
specified in Division 03 Section Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C. Install fire-pump discharge piping equal to or larger than size required by NFPA 20.
D. Support piping and pumps separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.
E. Install valves that are same size as connecting piping. Comply with requirements for fire-protection valves
specified in Division 21 Section Fire-Suppression Standpipes and Division 21 Section Wet-Pipe Sprinkler
Systems.
F. Install pressure gage on pump head discharge flange pressure-gage tapping. Comply with requirements
for pressure gages specified in Division 21 Section Fire-Suppression Standpipes and Division 21 Section
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems.
G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not factory mounted.
Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittals to electrical Installer.
H. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 32 13 - 5
I. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on concrete base, grout has set, and
anchor bolts have been tightened.
B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely with grout, with metal
blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has hardened. Check alignment
and make required corrections.
C. Align piping connection.
D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 2.4 and to tolerances
specified by manufacturer.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping and valves specified in Division 21 Section Fire-Suppression
Standpipes and Division 21 Section Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems. Drawings indicate general arrangement
of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect relief-valve discharge to drainage piping or point of discharge.
D. Connect fire pumps to their controllers.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for fire-pump marking according to NFPA 20.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test each fire pump with its controller as a unit. Comply with requirements for electric-motor-driver fire-
pump controllers specified in Division 21 Section "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers."
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing components, assemblies, and equipment including controller, test for compliance
with requirements.
2. Test according to NFPA 20 for acceptance and performance testing.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 32 13 - 6
3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
E. Components, assemblies, and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other acceptable location to
dispose of fire-pump test water. Hoses are for tests only and do not convey to Owner.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain fire pumps.
END OF SECTION 213213
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 34 00 - 1
SECTION 213400
PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Regenerative-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps.
2. Vertical-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 21 Section "Controllers For Fire-Pump Drivers" for pressure-maintenance-pump
controllers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For pumps, accessories, and specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 34 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VERTICAL-TURBINE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries.
2. Patterson Pump Company; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Company.
3. Peerless Pump, Inc.
4. Pentair Pump Group; Aurora Pump.
5. S.A. Armstrong Limited.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, vertical, multistage, open-line-shaft turbine pump as defined
in drawings; with pump motor mounted above pump head.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Pump Head: Cast iron, for surface discharge, with flange, except connections may be threaded in
sizes in which flanges are not available.
2. Pump Head Seal: Stuffing box and stuffing.
3. Line Shaft: Stainless steel or steel, with corrosion-resistant shaft sleeves.
4. Line Shaft Bearings: Rubber sleeve, water lubricated.
5. Line Shaft: Steel.
6. Line Shaft Bearings: Corrosion resistant, oil lubricated.
7. Impeller Shaft: Monel metal or stainless steel.
8. Bowl Section: Multiple cast-iron bowls with closed-type bronze or stainless-steel impellers.
9. Column Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends and
cast-iron or steel fittings, in sections 10 feet (3 m) or less, with strainer of cast or fabricated bronze
or stainless steel at bottom.
D. Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in Division 21
Section "Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment."
1. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller and at least 10 feet (3 m
long.
E. Base: Cast iron or steel with hole for electrical cable.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 21 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Fire
Suppression Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections
specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of pressure-maintenance pumps.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 34 00 - 3
B. Base-Mounted Pump Mounting: Install pumps on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete
bases specified in Division 03 Section Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
5. Attach pumps to equipment base using anchor bolts.
C. Install regenerative-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 1.4.
D. Install vertical-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 2.4.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Pressure-maintenance pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate pumps as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable pressure-switch ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 213400
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 1
SECTION 213900
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Full-service, full-voltage controllers rated 600 V and less.
2. Limited-service controllers rated 600 V and less.
3. Controllers for diesel-drive fire pumps.
4. Controllers for pressure-maintenance pumps.
5. Remote alarm panels.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Automatic transfer switch(es).
B. ECM: Electronic control module.
C. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work, including required clearances and service spaces around controller
enclosures.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Schematic and Connection Diagrams: For power, signal, alarm, and control wiring and for
pressure-sensing tubing.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer's factory test reports of fully assembled and tested equipment.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 2
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump controllers and all associated equipment from single source or
producer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials and installation.
D. Comply with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70.
E. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic
forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FULL-SERVICE CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aquarius Fluid Products, Inc.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.
3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
4. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Industrial Controls.
5. Joslyn Clark Corporation.
6. Master Control Systems, Inc.
7. Metron, Inc.
8. Tornatech.
B. General Requirements for Full-Service Controllers:
1. Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218.
2. Listed by an NRTL for electric-motor driver for fire-pump service.
3. Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation.
4. Factory assembled, wired, and tested; continuous-duty rated.
5. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment.
C. Method of Starting:
1. Pressure-switch actuated.
a. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high- and low-
calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression piping.
b. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.
c. Programmable minimum-run-time relay to prevent short cycling.
d. Programmable timer for weekly tests.
2. Magnetic Controller: Wye-delta open transition type.
3. Emergency Start: Mechanically operated start handle that closes and retains the motor RUN
contactor independent of all electric or pressure actuators.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 3
D. Method of Stopping: Automatic and nonautomatic shutdown after automatic starting.
E. Capacity: Rated for fire-pump-driver horsepower and short-circuit-current (withstand) rating equal to or
greater than short-circuit current available at controller location.
F. Method of Isolation and Overcurrent Protection: Interlocked isolating switch and nonthermal MCCB; with a
common, externally mounted operating handle, and providing locked-rotor protection.
G. Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:
1. Monitor, display, and control the devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as
required for drivers and controller types used.
2. Method of Control and Indication:
a. Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline digital readout.
b. Membrane keypad.
c. LED alarm and status indicating lights.
3. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
a. Controller power on.
b. Motor running condition.
c. Loss-of-line power.
d. Line-power phase reversal.
e. Line-power single-phase condition.
4. Audible alarm, with silence push button.
5. Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.
H. ATS:
1. Complies with NFPA 20, UL 218, and UL 1008.
2. Integral with controller as a listed combination fire-pump controller and power transfer switch.
3. Automatically transfers fire-pump controller from normal power supply to alternate power supply in
event of power failure.
4. Allows manual transfer from one source to the other.
5. Alternate-Source Isolating and Disconnecting Means: Integral molded-case switch, with an
externally mounted operating handle.
6. Alternate-Source Isolating and Disconnecting Means: Mechanically interlocked isolation switch and
circuit breaker rated at a minimum of 115 percent of rated motor full-load current, with an externally
mounted operating handle; circuit breaker shall be provided with nonthermal sensing,
instantaneous-only short-circuit overcurrent protection to comply with available fault currents.
7. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
a. Normal source available.
b. Alternate source available.
c. In normal position.
d. In alternate position.
e. Isolating means open.
8. Audible alarm, with silence push button.
9. Nonautomatic (manual, nonelectric) means of transfer.
10. Engine test push button.
11. Start generator output contacts.
12. Timer for weekly generator tests.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 4
2.2 CONTROLLERS FOR PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Aquarius Fluid Products, Inc.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.
3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
4. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Industrial Controls.
5. Joslyn Clark Corporation.
6. Master Control Systems, Inc.
7. Metron, Inc.
C. General Requirements for Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:
1. Type: UL 508 factory assembled, -wired, and tested, across-the-line; for combined automatic and
manual operation.
2. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2 for wall-mounting.
3. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint.
D. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
1. Fusible disconnect switch.
2. Pressure switch.
3. Hand-off-auto selector switch.
4. Pilot light.
5. Running period timer.
2.3 REMOTE ALARM PANELS
A. General Requirements for Remote Alarm Panels: Comply with NFPA 20 and [UL 218] <Insert standard>;
listed by an NRTL for fire-pump service.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aquarius Fluid Products, Inc.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.
3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
4. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Industrial Controls.
5. Joslyn Clark Corporation.
6. Master Control Systems, Inc.
7. Metron, Inc.
C. General Requirements for Remote Alarm Panels: Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
D. Supervisory and Normal Control Voltage: 120-V ac dual source.
E. Audible and Visual Alarm and Status Indications:
1. Driver running.
2. Loss of phase.
3. Phase reversal.
4. Supervised power on.
5. Common trouble on the controller.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 5
6. Controller connected to alternate power source.
F. Audible and Visual Alarm and Status Indications: Manufacturer's standard indicating lights; with separate
test push button.
1. Engine running.
2. Controller main switch turned to the off or manual position.
3. Supervised power on.
4. Common trouble on the controller or engine.
5. Common pump room trouble.
6. Controller connected to alternate power source.
G. Audible alarm, with silence push button.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Fire-Pump Controllers, ATS, and Remote Alarm Panels: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental
conditions at installed locations and NFPA 20.
1. Indoor Locations Subject to Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 2 (IEC IP11).
B. Enclosure Color: Manufacturer's standard "fire-pump-controller red.
C. Nameplates: Comply with NFPA 20; complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals, listings, and other
pertinent data.
D. Floor stands, 12 inches (305 mm) high, for floor-mounted controllers.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test and inspect fire-pump controllers according to requirements in NFPA 20 and UL 218.
1. Verification of Performance: Rate controllers according to operation of functions and features
specified.
B. Fire-pump controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
A. Install controllers within sight of their respective drivers.
B. Connect controllers to their dedicated pressure-sensing lines.
C. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on walls with disconnect operating handles not higher than
79 inches (2006 mm) above finished floor, and bottom of enclosure not less than 12 inches (305 mm)
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 6
above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel
channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26
Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal-thickness concrete bases,
using floor stands high enough so that the bottom of enclosure cabinet is not less than 12 inches (305 mm)
above finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-
in-Place Concrete] [Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary
blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
F. Comply with NEMA ICS 15.
3.2 REMOTE ALARM PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install panels on walls with tops not higher than 72 inches (1829 mm above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For panels not
on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
3.3 POWER WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install power wiring between controllers and their services or sources, and between controllers and their
drivers. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Comply with NECA 1.
3.4 CONTROL AND ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between controllers and remote devices and facility's central monitoring system. Comply with
requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B. Install wiring between remote alarm panels and controllers. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20,
NFPA 70, and Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
C. Install wiring between controllers and the building's fire-alarm system. Comply with requirements specified
in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."
D. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
E. Connect remote manual and automatic activation devices where applicable.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20 for marking fire-pump controllers.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 7
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification in
NFPA 20 and as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Inspect and Test Each Component:
a. Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and adjust
components and equipment.
b. Test insulation resistance for each element, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuits.
c. Test continuity of each circuit.
2. Verify and Test Each Electric-Driver Controller:
a. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus 10 or minus 1 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages, with motors off. If outside this range for any motor, notify
Architect before starting the motor(s).
b. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit
operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Field Acceptance Tests:
1. Do not begin field acceptance testing until suction piping has been flushed and hydrostatically
tested and the certificate for flushing and testing has been submitted to Architect and authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Prior to starting, notify authorities having jurisdiction of the time and place of the acceptance
testing.
3. Engage manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative to be present during the testing.
4. Perform field acceptance tests as outlined in NFPA 20.
D. Controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
F. Perform startup service.
G. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controllers to function smoothly and as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, and timers.
C. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording,
and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial
Completion.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
21 39 00- 8
D. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain controllers and remote alarm panels, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-
based controls within this equipment].
END OF SECTION 213900
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 00 00 - 1
DIVISIONS 220000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
SECTION TITLE
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
220156 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS ANS SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMPING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 PLUMPING PIPING INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 13 - 1
SECTION 220513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small
and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at
equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing
equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without
exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 13 - 2
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F>.
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324Tand larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes
smaller than 324T
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with
and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to
resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width
modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific
motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding
temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection
device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 13 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 220513
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 16 - 1
SECTION 220516
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.
2. Pipe loops and swing connections.
3. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for
selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of
assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end connections,
and location for each expansion joint.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product certificates.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 16 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.
b. American BOA, Inc.
c. Badger Industries, Inc.
d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.
e. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
f. Flexicraft Industries.
g. Flex Pression Ltd.
h. Flex-Weld, Inc.
i. Flo Fab inc.
j. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
k. Metraflex, Inc.
l. Proco Products, Inc.
m. Senior Flexonics Pathway.
n. Tozen Corporation.
o. Unaflex.
p. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.
q. Universal Metal Hose; a subsidiary of Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
r. U.S. Bellows, Inc.
s. WahlcoMetroflex.
2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers
Association, Inc."
3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
5. Configurationdouble joint with base class(es) unless otherwise indicated.
6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper pipe ends, and
brass shrouds.
a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder joint.
b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): threaded.
c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged.
2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
A. Alignment Guides:
1. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and
base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
B. Anchor Materials:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.
3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 16 - 3
5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland
cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.
b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless
otherwise indicated.
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.
B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint
Manufacturers Association, Inc."
3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or
compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in main.
C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in riser.
D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in
main.
3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
B. Install one guide on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion
joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.
C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.
D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to
prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
E. Anchor Attachments:
1. Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,
Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.
3. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24, U-
bolts bolted to anchor.
F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9
and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 16 - 4
1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.
2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener
manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.
END OF SECTION 220516
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 17 - 1
SECTION 220517
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Grout.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. CALPICO, Inc.
3. Metraflex Company (The).
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5. Proco Products, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between
piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing
elements.
2.3 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 17 - 2
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-
inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are
constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate
for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping
entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID
or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal
system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 17 - 3
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than [NPS 6 (DN 150)]: Cast-iron wall sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system]
[Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): PVC-pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: PVC-pipe sleeves.
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): PVC-pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150)> and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
END OF SECTION 220517
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 18 - 1
SECTION 220518
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip
fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that
completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 18 - 2
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated
finish.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that
completely covers opening.
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 220518
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 19 - 1
SECTION 220519
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
3. Thermowells.
4. Dial-type pressure gages.
5. Gage attachments.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Inc.
2. Ernst Flow Industries.
3. Marsh Bellofram.
4. Miljoco Corporation.
5. Nanmac Corporation.
6. Noshok.
7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.
9. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
10. Trerice, H. O. Co.
11. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
12. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
13. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
14. Winters Instruments - U.S.
B. Standard: ASME B40.200.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 19 - 2
C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) nominal diameter.
D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F (deg C).
E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.
F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.
H. Window: Plain glass
I. Ring: Stainless steel.
J. Element: Bimetal coil.
K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.5 percent of scale range.
2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]:
a. Flo Fab Inc.
b. Miljoco Corporation.
c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
e. Trerice, H. O. Co.
f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
g. Winters Instruments - U.S.
2. Standard: ASME B40.200.
3. Case: Cast aluminum 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid.
6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in
deg F (deg C).
7. Window: Glass.
8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5
percent of scale range.
2.3 THERMOWELLS
A. Thermowells:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.
2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 19 - 3
5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,) ASME B1.20.1 pipe
threads.
7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer
connection.
B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
2.4 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
b. Ashcroft Inc.
c. Ernst Flow Industries.
d. Flo Fab Inc.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Miljoco Corporation.
g. Noshok.
h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.
j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
k. Trerice, H. O. Co.
l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
o. Winters Instruments - U.S.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.
3. Case: Liquid-filled, Sealed type(s); cast aluminum 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter.
4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet
type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi (kPa).
8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
9. Window: Glass.
10. Ring: Stainless steel.
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
B. Direct-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
b. Ashcroft Inc.
c. Flo Fab Inc.
d. Marsh Bellofram.
e. Miljoco Corporation.
f. Noshok.
g. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
h. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.
i. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
j. Trerice, H. O. Co.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 19 - 4
k. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
l. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
m. Winters Instruments - U.S.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.
3. Case: Sealed type; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter.
4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet
type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi (kPa).
8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
9. Window: Glass.
10. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type
surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to
match sizes.
C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with
tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most
readable position.
H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.
I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
J. Install thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.
2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.
3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.
4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.
K. Install pressure gages in the following locations:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 19 - 5
1. Building water service entrance into building.
2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.
3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.
L. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of
meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
M. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.2 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.
B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.
C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.
D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.
E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.3 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.
3.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed direct mounted, metal case.
B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed direct-mounted, metal case.
C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Liquid-filled Sealed direct-mounted, metal case.
3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: [0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa)] [0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa].
END OF SECTION 220519
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 1
SECTION 220523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Brass ball valves.
2. Bronze ball valves.
3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.
4. Bronze swing check valves.
5. Iron swing check valves.
6. Iron swing check valves with closure control.
7. Bronze gate valves.
8. Iron gate valves.
9. Bronze globe valves.
10. Iron globe valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures
and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 2
2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller except plug valves.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:
1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.
2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective
sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
F. Valve-End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Kitz Corporation.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. DynaQuip Controls.
e. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation.
h. Jomar International, LTD.
i. Kitz Corporation.
j. Legend Valve.
k. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.
l. Milwaukee Valve Company.
m. NIBCO INC.
n. Red-White Valve Corporation.
o. RuB Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.
b. CWP Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa).
c. Body Design: One piece.
d. Body Material: Forged brass.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Brass.
h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i. Port: Full.
2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 3
c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.
b. CWP Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa).
c. Body Design: One piece.
d. Body Material: Bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Bronze.
h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i. Port: Full.
2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
c. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corporation.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
f. DeZurik Water Controls.
g. Flo Fab Inc.
h. Hammond Valve.
i. Kitz Corporation.
j. Legend Valve.
k. Milwaukee Valve Company.
l. NIBCO INC.
m. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.
n. Red-White Valve Corporation.
o. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
p. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without
use of downstream flange.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e. Seat: EPDM.
f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 4
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Kitz Corporation.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
j. Red-White Valve Corporation.
k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
m. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
2.6 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Kitz Corporation.
f. Legend Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
j. Red-White Valve Corporation.
k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
2.7 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL
A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 5
a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.
2.8 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Kitz Corporation.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
j. Red-White Valve Corporation.
k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded[ or solder joint].
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, or bronze.
2.9 IRON GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
d. Flo Fab Inc.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Kitz Corporation.
g. Legend Valve.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Powell Valves.
k. Red-White Valve Corporation.
l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 6
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
2.10 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Powell Valves.
h. Red-White Valve Corporation.
i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.
e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.
f. Packing: Asbestos free.
g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, or bronze.
2.11 IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Kitz Corporation.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Powell Valves.
i. Red-White Valve Corporation.
j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 7
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance,
and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final
adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.
2. Throttling Service: Globe or ball valves.
3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and
weight or with spring.
c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check
valves with lever and weight or spring.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with
higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-
end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded
valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded
valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 8
3.4 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG (1035 kPa) OR LESS)
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to NPS 100): May be provided with threaded ends
instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, NBR seat, aluminum-bronze disc.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
4. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
3.5 HIGH-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 TO 200 PSIG (1035 TO 1380 kPa))
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to NPS 100): May be provided with threaded ends
instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, NBR seat, aluminum-bronze disc.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
4. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
3.6 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
3. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to NPS 100): May be provided with threaded ends
instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.
5. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 23 - 9
3.7 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM-DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to NPS 100): May be provided with threaded ends
instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.
4. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
5. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
END OF SECTION 220523
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 1
SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Pipe positioning systems.
6. Equipment supports.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the
effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation
details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Equipment supports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing
surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural
carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig
(862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig
(862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield.
2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-
out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel anchors, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 3
2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in
pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel
shapes.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping
of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4
inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators
that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-
actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping
connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for requirements for pipe
positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 4
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion
loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to
forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
b. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill
interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span
an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at
least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment
above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 5
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance
and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated
slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. Bottom of rods 4”
above finished ceilings.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have
field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact
with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general
service applications.
F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment applications.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 6
G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to
NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4
to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base
stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
5. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain
pipe.
6. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
7. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24
if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.
M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to
attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using
clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 29 - 7
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4
inches.
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor
to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where
required in concrete construction.
R. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping
for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION 220529
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 48 - 1
SECTION 220548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Freestanding, Restrained, Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
5. Housed spring mounts.
6. Elastomeric hangers.
7. Spring hangers.
8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Restraining braces and cables.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint calculations and details indicated
to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 48 - 2
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded
with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of
supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity
range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-
resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing
neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator
pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten
and level equipment.
E. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
F. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator
elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise
identify to indicate capacity range.
G. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 48 - 3
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to
support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
H. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with
spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
I. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated
by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation
material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions.
J. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a
factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction
shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement.
Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be
adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor
and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet
o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 48 - 4
D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of
beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
F. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors.
Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the
structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design
strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to
be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained
component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days'
advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-
spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 220548
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 53 - 1
SECTION 220553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches
(600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches
(600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 53 - 2
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and
title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment
is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch
(64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600
mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to
attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as
used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 05 53 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow
pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m)
in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:
a. Background Color: Blue.
b. Letter Color: White.
2. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:
a. Background Color: Black
b. Letter Color: White
3. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Yellow
b. Letter Color: White.
4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
END OF SECTION 220553
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 1
SECTION 220716
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing equipment:
1. Domestic water heat exchangers.
2. Domestic water converters.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections and access panels.
4. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
5. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
6. Detail field application for each equipment type.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or
another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and
Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50
or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of
150 or less.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50
ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet and K-FLEX LS.
F. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA
Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40
kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x
deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,mprovide the following
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation
to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 3
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
75.
d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-127.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
60/85-70.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and
joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-82.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-
19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 4
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-
80/30-90.
b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-
mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-10.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 46-
50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms (1.2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm)
dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied
jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 5
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for equipment.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying
with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch (0.51 mm) thick, /4 inch (19 mm)] wide with closed seal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting
spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated
when self-locking washer is in place.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 6
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2
inches (50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to
suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability
to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation,
hangers, and substrates.
2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position
indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in
diameter.
c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability
to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation,
hangers, and substrates.
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick,
stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but
not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC 150.
2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum
according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 7
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat
tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-
steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of equipment.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each
item as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports,
anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from
point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at
attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry
film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 8
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to
butt joints.
O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION
A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe, and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100
percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours.
Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks
and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and
with substrate.
c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm) from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and
vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where
insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch
prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or
breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches (150
mm) from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm)
o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch
prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install
additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48
inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and
other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams,
breaks, and punctures in insulation.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 9
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire
surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings
in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.5 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish
coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation
manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect for exposed systems. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work. All concealed piping shall be white.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket
and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to
one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For
large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance
with requirements.
3.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of
equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.
C. Heat-Exchanger (Water-to-Water for Domestic Water Heating Service) Insulation:
1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
D. Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank insulation
shall be[ one of] the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 16 - 10
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
E. Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation:
1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: Of thickness to provide an R-value of 12.5.
F. Domestic Water Filter-Housing Insulation:
1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
END OF SECTION 220716
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 1
SECTION 220719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1. Domestic hot-water piping.
2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.
3. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions.
4. Storm-water piping exposed to freezing conditions.
5. Rainwater leaders.
6. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50
or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of
150 or less.
B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous
components:
1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule,"
"Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation
Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50
ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 Deg F (454 Deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation
to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 3
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
75.
d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-127.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
60/85-70.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and
joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-82.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
20.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-
19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 4
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-
80/30-90.
b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-10.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 46-
50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
D. ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied
jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 5
2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq.
in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
B. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane
consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and
laminated aluminum foil.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap.
b. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Insulrap No Torch 125.
2.7 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying
with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
2.8 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch
(19 mm) wide with wing seal
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
2.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 6
a. Engineered Brass Company.
b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.
c. McGuire Manufacturing.
d. Plumberex.
e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies
and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water
supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat
tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-
steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each
item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 7
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports,
anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from
point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at
attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry
film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure
strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at
bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward
clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends
adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Cleanouts.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 8
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve
seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material
and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece
and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement
finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material
and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section
closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than
two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves,
insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than
two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange
or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a
removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains
vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 9
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install
vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services.
Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped
contour.
8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and
color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at
these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with
finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as
that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on
each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands.
Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-
part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks
wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with
tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill
space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover
assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel
second coat to a smooth finish.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings
in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness
of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to
valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 10
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-
barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward
clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal
tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness
of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch
(25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or
bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system
identified below.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish
coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation
manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect for all exposed piping. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
E. All concealed piping shall be white.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 11
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection
shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers,
three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service
defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance
with requirements.
3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping
system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from
materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
B. Stormwater and Overflow: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
C. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
D. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for
People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
E. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation, Type I, 1-
1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
3.11 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Water Piping: Insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 07 19 - 12
B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
C. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 220719
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 1
SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside
the building.
2. Specialty valves.
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.
5. Water meters.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-
pw" on piping.
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and
joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.
1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 2
4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
5. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1) NVent LLC.
b. Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-copper fitting
complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in
each end instead of solder-joint ends.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless
grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2.4 CPVC PIPING
A. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings.
2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40
2.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic
and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 3
1. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-
duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves,
drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
C. CPVC Union Ball Valves:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-122.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 73 deg F (23 deg C)
c. Body Material: CPVC.
d. Body Design: Union type.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Detachable, socket.
f. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged.
g. Ball: CPVC; full port.
h. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
i. Handle: Tee shaped.
D. CPVC Ball Check Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at [73 deg F (23 deg C)].
b. Body Material: CPVC.
c. Body Design: Union-type ball check.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Detachable, socket.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged.
f. Ball: CPVC.
g. Seals: EPDM- or FKM-rubber O-rings.
2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 4
B. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Description: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 40 equivalent dimensions; one
end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1. Description: CPVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end, solvent-cement-
joint plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with
separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Description:
a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
1. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa)
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Description:
a. Electroplated steel nipple.
b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-
braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 5
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa).
2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
2.11 WATER METERS
A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C700.
b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure.
c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections: Threaded.
B. Compound-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C702.
b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure.
c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility company.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. Pipe Connections: Flanged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water
piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion,
and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the
building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 6
G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless
otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or
parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate
with other services occupying that space.
L. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system
pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
O. Install piping free of sags and bends.
P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Q. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
R. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster
pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for
pressure gages.
S. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.
T. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves
specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for
sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and
clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings
and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 7
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints"
Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings
according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth
gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to
the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping
systems.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment,
on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply
stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-
1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where
required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and
circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2
(DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Comply with
requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.
3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal
transition fittings or unions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 8
3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flange kits
D. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 5 to NPS 6 (DN 125 to DN 150)] <Insert pipe size>: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump and in
suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.
B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation, and install water meters according to utility
company's requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the following:
D. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter
outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved
bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
F. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
seismic-restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 9
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
J. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches (1500 mm) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller, and
every 72 inches (1800 mm) for NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and larger.
K. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
L. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
M. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar
piping materials.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 10
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the
following:
1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for
connection sizes.
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment
connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until
it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to
stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory
results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 11
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before
using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods
are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow
procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L)
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200
mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after
the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures
if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller shall be the
following:
D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought-copper solder-joint fittings;
and brazed joints.
E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) cast-copper solder-joint fittings; and
brazed joints.
F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) cast-copper solder-joint fittings; and
brazed joints.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 16 - 12
3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or
gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or
ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
END OF SECTION 221116
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 1
SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
6. Strainers.
7. Hose bibbs.
8. Wall hydrants.
9. Drain valves.
10. Water hammer arresters.
11. Trap-seal primer valves.
B. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise
indicated.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic
water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e. Rain Bird Corporation.
f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1001.
3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. Legend Valve.
e. MIFAB, Inc.
f. Prier Products, Inc.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
h. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1001.
3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cash Acme.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Honeywell Water Controls.
e. Legend Valve.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1012.
3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
5. Body: Bronze.
6. End Connections: Solder joint.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 3
7. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product
by one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1013.
4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
5. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1015.
3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
7. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
D. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
c. Flomatic Corporation.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure
instructions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 4
2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cash Acme.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. Honeywell Water Controls.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1003.
3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa).
4. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and
DN 80).
5. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3
(DN 65 and DN 80).
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.
3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
4. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller.
5. Body: Copper alloy.
6. Port: Standard or full port.
7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. Honeywell Water Controls.
e. Legend Valve.
f. Leonard Valve Company.
g. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
h. Symmons Industries, Inc.
i. Taco, Inc.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 5
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1017.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
4. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.
5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control
handle.
8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. Leonard Valve Company.
d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
e. Symmons Industries, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1017.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
4. Type: Cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.
5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and
adjustable, temperature-control handle.
8. Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Valve Finish: Polished, chrome plated
10. Piping Finish: Chrome plated
2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron[ with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and] for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100 0.062 inch (1.57 mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm).
6. Drain: Pipe plug.
2.7 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 6
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying
with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.8 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Prier Products, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
4. Operation: Loose key.
5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp.
6. Inlet: (DN 20 or DN 25).
7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
8. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.
9. Box and Cover Finish: Brush Chrome plated.
10. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
11. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Brush nickel bronze.
12. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.
B. Moderate-Climate Wall Hydrants <Insert drawing designation if any>:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Prier Products, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
4. Operation: Loose key.
5. Inlet: NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25).
6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker or nonremovable hose-connection vacuum
breaker complying with ASSE 1011; and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
7. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 7
8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker or nonremovable hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011; and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
10. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
11. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.
C. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
2. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.
3. Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.
4. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed.
5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
6. Operation: Loose key.
7. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp.
8. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
9. Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
2.9 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap
with brass chain.
2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 8
3. Type: Metal bellows.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. PPP Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1018.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other
equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting,
fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain
piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer.
Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with
shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing valve,
solenoid valve, and pump.
G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 11 19 - 9
H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties.
J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or
near each of the following:
1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
4. Water pressure-reducing valves.
5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
K. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention
assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 1
SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
B. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping
components. Include marking with"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous
waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.
2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners,
and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands
and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Clamp-All Corp.
2) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
2.4 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or
transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-
metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco, Inc.
c. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
d. Mission Rubber Co.
2. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials
being joined.
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,
corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Mission Rubber Co.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 3
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or transition-type
mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band
and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
D. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying
with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and ductile-iron gland, rubber
gasket, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
E. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with
gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or
AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-
iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
b. Romac Industries, Inc.
c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty shielded stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe
materials with small difference in OD.
B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe
materials with small difference in OD.
C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe
materials with small difference in OD.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 4
D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-
coupling joints.
2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe
materials with small difference in OD.
E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Solid wall PVC pipes, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
F. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Solid-wall, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing."
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.
C. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight.
Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing."
E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV,
"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends,
and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if
change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend
fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees,
elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.
Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing
size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install
required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;
1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 5
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without
membrane waterproofing.
K. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping."
B. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump
discharge.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer than 100 Feet, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 6
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar
piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by
plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for
each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after
roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was
tested.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 16 - 7
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on
completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow,
but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of
inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with
water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on
roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to
pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this
pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of
inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory
results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent
damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 22 13 16
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 19 - 1
SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Roof flashing assemblies.
4. Through-penetration fire stop assemblies.
5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for channel drainage systems for storm
water, roof drains, and catch basins.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping
specialty components.
1.6 COORDINATION
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 19 - 2
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated
on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
5. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
6. Closure: Countersunk plug.
7. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
B. Cast-Iron Wall CleanoutsSee Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming
manufacturers and products. Retain one of first three subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below.
See Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated
on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
5. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
6. Closure: Countersunk plug.
7. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
8. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw.
9. Wall Access: Round nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and
cover.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated
on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 19 - 3
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
3. Standard: ASME A112.6.3
4. Pattern: Area drain.
5. Body Material: Cast iron.
6. Seepage Flange Required.
7. Anchor Flange Required.
8. Clamping Device: Required.
9. Outlet: Bottom Backwater Valve: Drain-outlet type Coating in first subparagraph below is usually
used only on sanitary floor drains.
10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel Sediment Bucket: Not
required Top or Strainer Material: Bronze Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Rough bronze Top
Shape: Round
11. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty Funnel: Not required.
12. Inlet Fitting: Not required
13. Trap Material: Cast iron
14. Trap Pattern Standard P-trap.
15. Trap Features Not required.
2.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions
about naming manufacturers and products. Retain one of first two subparagraphs and list of
manufacturers below. See Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ProSet Systems Inc.
2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-
pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting
joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping copy and edit paragraph and subparagraphs below for
each type of floor-drain, trap-seal primer fitting required. If only one type is required, drawing
designation may be omitted.
B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve
connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
C. Sleeve Flashing Device
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor
penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 19 - 4
extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will
extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stacks piping.
D. Stack Flashing Fittings
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof
membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
E. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals
1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper
or galvanized steel.
2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar
extension, with counterflashing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush
with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for
servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger
cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with
frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished
floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with
grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total
depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total
depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 19 - 5
F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.
I. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
J. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
K. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
L. Install trap, vent, fresh-air inlet, and flow-control fitting according to authorities having jurisdiction. Install
shelf fastened to reinforcement in wall construction and adjacent to unit, unless otherwise indicated. Install
culture bottle, culture metering pump, timer, and control on shelf. Install tubing between culture bottle,
metering pump, and chamber.
M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.
O. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets
and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
22 13 19 - 6
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent
damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 22 13 19
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 00 - 1
DIVISIONS 230000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL
SECTION TITLE
230010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 DUCT INSULATION
230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233600
233713
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
234100
236200
237313
238126
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 1
SECTION 230010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Basic Requirements: Requirements of the Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract,
Specifications, Drawings, and Addenda and Contract Modifications (the Contract Documents),
apply to the requirements of each Section of Division 23.
B. Conflicts: Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to conflict in any way with other
provisions or requirements of the Contract documents. The intent is that this Section will take
precedence. Where differences arise, the Architect shall decide which directions or instructions
take precedence.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. General: Unless an item is specifically mentioned as being provided by others, the requirements
of Division 15 Contract Documents shall be completed. The systems, equipment, devices and
accessories shall be installed, finished, tested and adjusted for continuous and proper operation.
Any apparatus, material or device not shown on the Drawings but mentioned in these
Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the project
complete and operational in all respects, shall be furnished, delivered and installed without
additional expense to the Owner. Include all materials, equipment, supervision, operation,
methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests necessary for complete and
properly functioning systems.
1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. Code Compliance: Refer to Division 1. As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated, comply with all
rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances and laws of local, state and federal governments
and the amendments and interpretation of such rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances
and laws of local, state and federal governments by the authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
B. ADA: Comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Texas
Accessibility Standards (TAS)
C. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and
Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction.
D. International Building Code: Conform in strict compliance to the International Code Council, Inc.
(ICC), International Building Code, 2015 Edition, and the amendments which are enforced by the
local authority having jurisdiction.
1.International Mechanical Code, 2015 Edition
2.International Plumbing Code, 2015 Edition
3.International Fuel Gas Code, 2015 Edition
4.International Fire Code, 2015 Edition
5.International Energy Conservation Code, 2015 Edition
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 2
E. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION (NFPA) Standards:
1.NFPA-1, Uniform Fire Code™, 2006 Revision
2.NFPA-10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2002 Revision
3.NFPA-13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 Revision
4.NFPA-14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 2003 Revision
5.NFPA-15, Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection, 2001 Revision
6.NFPA-17, Standard for Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2002 Revision
7.NFPA-20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, 2003
Revision
8.NFPA-30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, 2003 Revision
9.NFPA-45, Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals, 2004 Revision
10.NFPA-50, Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, 2001 Revision
11.NFPA-51, Standard for the Design and Installation of Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems for
Welding, Cutting and Allied Process, 2002 Revision
12.NFPA-54, National Fuel Gas Code, 2006 Revision
13.NFPA-70, National Electrical Code, 2005 Revision
14.NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code, 2002 Revision
15.NFPA-75, Standard for the Protection of Information Technology Equipment, 2003 Revision
16.NFPA-90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems, 2002
Revision
17.NFPA-90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,
2006 Revision
18.NFPA-91, Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists and
Noncombustible Particulate Solids, 2004 Revision
19.NFPA-92A, Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems, 2006 Edition
20.NFPA-96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Prevention of Commercial Cooking
Operations, 2004 Revision.
21.NFPA-99, Standard for Health Care Facilities, 2005 Revision
22.NFPA-101A, Guide to Alternative Approaches to Life Safety, 2004 Revision
23.NFPA-101B, Standard on Means of Egress for Buildings and Structures, 2002 Revision
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 3
24.NFPA-704, Standard System for the Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials for
Emergency Response, 2001 Revision
25.NFPA-780, Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, 2004 Revision
26.NFPA-1962, Standard for Inspection, Care and Use of Fire Hose including Couplings and
Nozzles; and the Service Testing of Fire Hose, 2003 Revision
27.NFPA-1963, Standard for Fire Hose Connections, 2003 Revision
28.NFPA-2001, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems, 2004 Edition
F. Notification: Comply with all of the requirements of the Federal "Right-To-Know" Regulations and
the Texas "Right-To-Know" Law and provide notification to all parties concerned as to the use of
toxic substances.
G. Texas DOE Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the Department of Education's
design standard, State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF), 1999.
H. Owner Design Guidelines: Comply with all the requirements of the latest Owner MEP Engineering
Design Guidelines and the latest Owner Architectural Construction Standards.
1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Intent: The intent of the drawings and specifications is to establish minimum acceptable quality
standards for materials, equipment and workmanship, and to provide operable mechanical
systems complete in every respect.
B. Equipment Placement: The drawings are diagrammatic, intended to show general arrangement,
capacity and location of various components, equipment and devices. Each location shall be
determined by reference to the general building plans and by actual measurements in the building
as built. Reasonable changes in locations ordered by the Architect prior to the performance of the
affected Work shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Drawing Scale: Due to the small scale of the drawings, and to unforeseen job conditions, all
required offsets, transitions and fittings may not be shown but shall be provided at no additional
cost.
D. Conflict: In the event of a conflict, the Architect will render an interpretation in accordance with the
General Conditions.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Provide/Install: The word "provide" shall mean furnish, install, connect, test, complete, and leave
ready for operation. The word "install" where used in conjunction with equipment furnished by the
Owner or under another contract shall mean mount, connect, complete, and leave ready for
operation.
B. Concealed: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment is concealed
from view when standing inside a finished room, such as inside a chase or above a ceiling.
C. Exposed: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment is seen from
inside a finished room, such as inside an equipment or air handling unit room.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 4
D. Protected: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment on the exterior
of the building but protected from direct exposure to rain by an overhang, eave, in an
unconditioned parking garage or building crawl space.
E. Unprotected: The surface of insulated or non-insulated piping, ductwork or equipment on the
exterior of the building and exposed to rain.
F. Abbreviations: Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, shall be interpreted
to mean the normal construction industry terminology, as determined by the Architect. Plural
words shall be interpreted as singular and singular words shall be interpreted as plural where
applicable for context of the Contract Documents.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in this section. Include the following data:
1.Shop Drawings:
a.Submit shop drawings for the following:
(1)Each piping system
(2)Ductwork systems
(3)Coordination drawings
1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Production: Maintain one set of black or blue line on white project record "as-built" drawings at the
site. At all times the set shall be accurate, clear, and complete, indicating the actual installation.
Record drawings shall be updated weekly to record the present stage of progress. These
drawings shall be available to the Architect at all times. Equipment schedules, control diagrams,
sequences of operation shall also be updated.
B. Completion: Prior to substantial completion, transfer onto an unmarked second set of drawings all
changes, marked in colored pencil, and submit them to the Architect. Upon completion of all
punch lists, transfer all "As-Built" conditions to the AutoCAD drawing files, package three (3) print
sets of full size drawings and two (2) CDs of the AutoCAD drawing files with associated reference
files and submit them to the Architect for review and approval.
1.08 SUBMITTAL
A. General: The provisions of this section are supplemental to the requirements in Division 1, and
only apply to the material and equipment covered in Division 15.
B. Time: Submit manufacturer's literature, performance data and installation instructions covered in
each Section of Division 15 under an individual letter of transmittal within 30 days after Notice to
Proceed unless otherwise indicated.
C. Submitter's Review: All items required for each section shall be reviewed before submittal.
Submittal information for each item shall bear a review stamp of approval, indicating the name of
the Contractor and Subcontractor (where applicable), the material suppliers, the initials of
submitter and date checked. Responsibility for errors or omissions in submittals shall not be
relieved by the Architect's review of submittals. Responsibility for submittals cannot be
subrogated to material suppliers by Contractors or Subcontractors.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 5
1.Review of the submittal data, whether indicated with "APPROVED" or with review
comments, does not constitute authorization for or acceptance of a change in the contract
price.
D. Architect's Review: The submittal data shall be reviewed only for general conformance with the
design concept of the project and for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Any
action indicated is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Reviews of submittal
data review shall not include quantities; dimensions (which shall be confirmed and correlated at
the job site); fabrication processes; techniques of construction; and co-ordination of the submittal
data with all other trades. Copies of the submittal data will be returned marked "ACCEPTED AS
SUBMITTED", "ACCEPTED AS NOTED", "REVISED AS NOTED AND RESUBMIT",
"REJECTED, REVISED AS NOTED AND RESUBMIT”.
E. Submittal Items: Submittal items shall be inserted in a Technical Information Brochure. Mark the
appropriate specification section or drawing reference number in the right hand corner of each
item. All typewritten pages shall be on the product or equipment manufacturer's printed
letterhead.
1.Manufacturer's Literature: Where indicated, include the manufacturer's printed literature.
Literature shall be clearly marked to indicate the item intended for use.
2.Performance Data: Provide performance data, wiring and control diagrams and scale
drawings which show that proposed equipment will fit into allotted space (indicate areas
required for service access, connections, etc.), and other data required for the Architect to
determine that the equipment complies with the Contract Documents. Where noted,
performance data shall be certified by the manufacturer at the design rating points.
3.Installation Instructions: Where requested, each product submittal shall include the
manufacturer's installation instructions. Generic installation instructions are not acceptable.
Instructions shall be the same as those included with the product when it is shipped from the
factory.
4.Written Operating Instructions: Instructions shall be the manufacturer's written operating
instructions for the specified product. If the instructions cover more than one model or type
of product they shall be clearly marked to identify the instructions that cover the product
delivered to the project. Operating Instructions shall be submitted immediately after the
product or equipment submittal has been returned from the Architect marked "APPROVED"
or "APPROVED AS NOTED".
5.Maintenance Instructions: Information shall be the manufacturer's printed instructions and
parts lists for the equipment furnished. If the instructions cover more than one model or
type of equipment they shall be marked to identify the instructions for the furnished product.
Submit maintenance instructions immediately after the product or equipment submittal has
been returned from the Architect marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED".
F. Substitutions:
1.General: Refer to Division 1. Substitutions may be considered for any product or equipment
of a manufacturer. See paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURER" in this Section. Any product
or equipment may be submitted for review; however, only one substitution per item will be
considered. If a substituted product or equipment item is rejected, provide the specified
product or equipment.
a.Submittal shall include the name of the material or equipment to be substituted,
equipment model numbers, drawings, catalog cuts, performance and test data and
any other data or information necessary for the Architect to determine that the
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 6
equipment meets the specification requirements. If the Architect accepts any
proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth in writing.
b.Substituted equipment with all accessories installed or optional equipment where
permitted and found acceptable, must conform to space requirements. Substituted
equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether accepted or not, shall be
replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. If the substituted item affects the
work of other trades, the Request for Substitution form shall include a list of the
necessary modifications.
2.Deviations: The Request for Substitution form shall include a complete list of deviations from
the scheduled item stating both the features and functions of the scheduled item and the
comparable features and functions of the proposed substitution.
a.Any deviation not indicated in writing will be assumed to be identical to the specified
item even if it is shown otherwise on the submittal data.
b.If a deviation not listed is found anytime after review and acceptance by the Architect
and that deviation, in the opinion of the Architect, renders the substituted item as
unacceptable, the item shall be removed and replaced by the scheduled item at no
additional cost to the Owner.
c.The Architect shall retain the right to specify modifications to the substituted item,
correcting or adjusting for the deviation, if the Architect deems it to be in the best
interest of the Owner.
3.Scheduled Item: A scheduled item is a product or item of equipment indicated in the
Contract Documents by manufacturer's name and model number identifying a single item.
The manufacturer's trade name for a group of products that does not signify a single item
including type, style, quality, performance, and sound rating shall not be classified as a
scheduled item. Where more than one manufacturer and product model number are
indicated, each shall be considered as a scheduled item.
4.Form: When a product or item of equipment is proposed as a substitution a "REQUEST
FOR SUBSTITUTION" form shall be completed and submitted with the required data. A
copy of the form is included after the end of this section.
5.Rejection: Substituted products or equipment will be rejected if, in the opinion of the
Architect, the submittal does not meet any one of the following conditions or requirements:
a.The submittal data is insufficient or not clearly identified. The Architect may or may
not request additional information.
b.The product or equipment will not fit the space available and still provide the
manufacturers published service area requirements.
c.The product or equipment submitted is not equivalent to or better than the specified
item. Products or equipment of lesser quality may be considered provided an
equitable financial rebate, satisfactory to the Architect, is to be returned to the Owner.
d.The product or equipment submitted has less capacity, efficiency and safety
provisions than the specified item.
e.The product or equipment submitted does not have warranty, service and factory
representation equivalent to that specified.
f.The Owner prefers not to accept the submitted product.
G. Technical Information Brochure:
1.Binder: Include binders with the first submittal for the Technical Information Brochure. Each
binder shall be size 3 inch, hardcover, 3-ring type for 8-1/2" X 11" sheets. Provide correct
designation on outside cover and on spine of each binder, i.e., MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 7
DATA, MECHANICAL OPERATION INSTRUCTION and MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS.
2.Number: Submit not less than five sets of binders for each of the three mechanical
brochures indicated above. Each set shall consist of a minimum of two binders for submittal
data and 1 binder each for operating instructions and for maintenance instructions.
Additional binders shall be submitted at the request of the Architect. One set of binders
shall be retained by the Architect. Three sets of binders shall be maintained for the Owner
and the remaining set shall become the property of the Engineer.
3.Index: First sheet in each brochure shall be a photocopy of the "Division 15 Index" of the
specifications. Second sheet shall list the firm name, address, phone number,
superintendent's name for the contractor and all major subcontractors and suppliers
associated with the project.
4.Dividers: Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specifications
Section reference number for each Section in which submittal data or operation and
maintenance instructions is required.
1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Revit requirements: Make Shop Drawings for piping systems at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch per
foot in AutoCAD Version 2000 (or later) and print on reproducible transparencies to verify
clearances and equipment locations. Show required maintenance and operational clearances.
Identify Shop Drawings by project name and include names of Architect, Engineer, Contractors,
Subcontractors and supplier, date in Shop Drawing title block. Number drawings sequentially and
indicate:
1.Architectural and structural backgrounds with room names and numbers, etc., including but
not limited to plans, sections, elevations, details, etc.
2.Fabrication and erection dimensions.
3.Arrangements and sectional views.
4.Necessary details, including complete information for making connections to equipment.
5.Descriptive names of equipment.
6.Modifications and options to standard equipment required by Contract Documents.
B. Stamp Area: Leave 4 inch by 2-1/2 inch blank area near title block for Architect's shop drawing
stamp. The acceptance of a shop drawing by indicating "APPROVED" does not relieve the
contractor from full compliance with the sizes and equipment connections shown on the contract
documents unless the changes are specifically indicated on the shop drawing.
C. Reference Key: Indicate by cross-reference the Contract Drawings, notes, or Specification
paragraph numbers where item(s) occur in the Contract Documents.
D. Additional Requirements: See specific Sections for additional requirements.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS FOR DUCT SYSTEMS
A. Revit Requirements: Make Shop Drawings for duct systems at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch per
foot in AutoCAD Version 2000 (or later) and print on reproducible transparencies to verify
clearances and equipment locations. Show required maintenance and operational clearances.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 8
Identify Shop Drawings by project name and include names of Architect, Engineer, Contractors,
Subcontractors and supplier, date in Shop Drawing title block. Number drawings sequentially and
indicate:
1.Architectural and structural backgrounds with room names and numbers, etc., including but
not limited to plans, sections, elevations, details, etc.
2.Fabrication and erection dimensions.
3.Arrangements and sectional views.
4.Necessary details, including complete information for making connections to air distribution
devices and air handling equipment.
5.Kinds of materials and finishes.
6.Descriptive names of equipment.
7.Modifications and options to standard equipment required.
B. Stamp Area: Leave 4 inch by 2-1/2 inch blank area near title block for Architect's shop drawing
stamp. The acceptance of a shop drawing by indicating "APPROVED" does not relieve the
contractor from full compliance with the sizes and connections shown on the contract documents
unless the changes are specifically indicated on the shop drawing.
C. Reference Key: Indicate by cross-reference the Contract Drawings, notes, or Specification
paragraph numbers where item(s) occur in the Contract Documents.
D. Ceiling Plans: Provide Shop Drawings of architectural reflected ceiling plans, which indicate
locations of exposed air distribution devices, sprinkler heads, lights and access panel.
E. Additional Requirements: See specific Sections for additional requirements.
1.11 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. General: Provide detailed (minimum 1/4 inch per foot) scaled coordination drawings showing
locations and positions of all architectural, structural, (FF&E) equipment, electrical, plumbing, fire
protection and mechanical elements for all installations. Provide overlay drawings, prior to
beginning work, indicating work in and above ceilings and in mechanical and electrical rooms with
horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions
and other services. Accommodate phasing and temporary conditions indicated on the contract
drawings as necessary to complete the work without disruption to the Owner's use of the existing
occupied areas of the building(s).
B. Coordination of Space: Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of
mechanical and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routings
shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available
physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize
accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in construction.
Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. Contractor shall provide
background drawings showing partitions, ceiling heights, and structural framing locations and
elevations, and existing obstructions. Contractor shall resolve major interferences at initial
coordination meeting prior to production of coordination drawings.
C. Precedence of Services: In event of conflicts and interferences involving location and layout of
work, use the following priority to resolve interferences:
1. Structure has highest priority.
2. Walls systems.
3. Ceiling grid/light fixtures.
4. Gravity drainage lines.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 9
5. Large pipe mains.
6. Ductwork/diffusers, registers and grilles.
7. Sprinkler heads.
8. Small piping and tubing/electrical conduit.
9. Access panels.
D. Drawings shall be developed on AutoCAD Version 2000 (or later), and utilize AIA Standard
layering conventions. At the completion of the project construction, the Contractor shall provide
two (2) full-sized print sets and two (2) CDs of all drawing files with related reference files
representing as-built installations for Architect review. Upon approval that the submitted
information is complete, a similar submittal shall be provided to the Owner.
E. Stamp Area: Leave 4 inch by 2-1/2 inch blank area near title block for Architect's shop drawing
stamp.
F. Reference Key: Indicate by cross-reference the Contract Drawings, notes, or Specification
paragraph numbers where item(s) occur in the Contract Documents.
G. Additional Requirements: See specific Sections for additional requirements.
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S CHECKOUT
A. Start-up and Checkout: At completion of installation and prior to performance verification, a
factory-trained representative of the manufacturer shall provide start-up and checkout service.
After the performance verification the manufacturer's representative shall examine performance
information and check the equipment in operation, and sign "Check-Out Memo" for the record.
Submit a copy of Memo on each item of equipment where indicated in individual sections of these
specifications for inclusion in each Technical Information Brochure. The "Check-Out Memo" shall
be included with the performance verification data. Do not request "Instruction in Operation
Conference" or request final inspection until Memos have been submitted and found acceptable.
1.13 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER
A. General: Instructions to the Owner shall be by competent representatives of the manufacturers
involved, with time allowed for complete coverage of all operating procedures. Provide classroom
instruction and field training in the design, operation and maintenance of the equipment and
troubleshooting procedures. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency
and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency
and similar provisions of the systems. On the date of substantial completion, turn over the prime
responsibility for operation of the mechanical equipment and systems to the Owner's operating
personnel.
B. Training Period: Unless otherwise indicated training periods shall encompass the following
number of hours of classroom and hands-on instructions with a maximum period of 4 hours per
day for either. Mixing classroom instructions and hands on training in the same day is
unacceptable.
C. Scheduling: Submit any remaining required items for checking at least one week before final
inspection of building. When submittal items are found acceptable, notify Owner, in writing that an
"Instruction in Operation Conference" may proceed. Conference will be scheduled by the Owner.
After the conference, copies of a memo certifying that the "Instruction in Operation Conference"
and "Completed Demonstration" have been made will by signed by Owner and the instructors,
and one copy will be inserted in each Technical Information Brochure.
D. Documentation: Provide video documentation of all owner classroom and training instruction.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 10
1.14 ALLOWANCES
A. General: Division 1.
1.15 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Specified Products: Manufacturer’s names and product model numbers indicated on the drawings
and in these specifications establish the type, style, quality, performance, and sound rating of the
desired product. Listing of other manufacturers indicates that their equivalent products would be
acceptable if they meet the specification requirements, the specific use and installation shown on
the drawings, including space and clearance requirements, and the energy consumption and
efficiency of the specified product. The listing of additional manufacturers in no way indicates that
the manufacturer can provide an acceptable product.
B. Space Requirements: All manufactured products furnished on this project must have the required
space and service areas indicated in the manufacturer's printed literature or shown on their shop
drawing. When the manufacturer does not indicate the space required for servicing the
equipment, the space shown on the drawings or as required by the Architect must be provided.
2.02 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. General: Material and equipment used shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in
the production of similar items, and with a history of satisfactory use as judged by the Architect.
B. Specified Equipment: Equipment shall be the capacity and types indicated or shall be equivalent in
the opinion of the Architect. Material and equipment furnished and installed shall be new, recently
manufactured, of standard first grade quality and designed for the specific purpose. Equipment
and material furnished shall be the manufacturer's standard item of production unless specified or
required to be modified to suit job conditions. Sizes, material, finish, dimensions and the
capacities for the specified application shall be published in catalogs for national distribution.
Ratings and capacities shall be certified by a recognized rating bureau. Products shall be
complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a
complete installation and for the intended use and effect.
C. Compatibility: Material and equipment of one and the same kind, type or classification and used
for identical or similar purposes shall be made by the same manufacturer. Where more than one
choice is available, select the options which are compatible with other products already selected.
Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be done in a neat, workmanlike and
timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of the requirements of the
Contract Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods and craftsmanship needed to produce
a first-quality installation. Personnel who install materials and equipment shall be qualified by
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 11
training and experience to perform their assigned tasks. All materials and equipment shall be
installed per the manufacturer’s written requirements.
B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-quality appearance
and function which conforms to applicable standards of building system construction and exhibits
a degree of quality and proficiency which is judged by the Architect as equivalent or better than
that ordinarily produced by qualified industry tradesmen.
C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of material and
equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or unqualified to
perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations not in compliance with the
Contract Documents, or installed with substandard workmanship in the opinion of the Architect,
shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified craftsmen at no change in the contract price.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Refer to Division 1.
B. Emergency Contacts: Prior to the beginning of the project, provide the Owner with a list of names,
email and emergency telephone numbers of individuals who can be contacted during working and
non-working hours, including weekends, for assistance throughout the warranty period if leaks,
equipment failure or other damages occur. Update the list throughout installation and warranty to
provide continuous availability of responsible parties to the Owner. If the Owner cannot contact
the responsible party during an emergency situation, the Owner may effect emergency repairs
through other means and may backcharge for the costs of repair material and labor incurred.
C. Emergency Contacts: Along with the operating and maintenance manual submittal, provide the
Owner with a list of the names and emergency telephone and beeper numbers of individuals who
can be contacted during working and non-working hours, including weekends, for assistance
throughout the warranty period should leaks, equipment failure or other damage occur. Update
the list throughout warranty to provide continuous availability of responsible parties to the Owner.
If the Owner cannot contact the responsible party during an emergency situation, the Owner may
effect emergency repairs through other means and may backcharge for the costs of repair
material and labor incurred.
D. Housekeeping: Keep interiors of duct and pipe systems clean and free from dirt, rubbish and
foreign matter. Close open ends of piping and ductwork at all times throughout the installation.
Install 30% efficient filter media over each return air grille and open return duct opening; change
media regularly during construction when dirty to keep duct interiors clean. Prevent dust, debris
and foreign material from entering the piping and ductwork.
E. Equipment Protection: Protect fan motors, switches, equipment, fixtures, and other items from
dirt, rubbish and foreign matter. Do not operate air-handling equipment if the building is not clean
or if dust can enter the coils or the fan housings.
F. Equipment Cleaning: Thoroughly clean equipment and entire piping systems internally upon
completion of installation and immediately prior to final acceptance. Open dirt pockets and
strainers, blow down each piping system and clean strainer screens of accumulated debris.
Remove accumulated dirt, scale, oil and foreign substances. Thoroughly wipe clean internal
surfaces of ductwork and air handling units prior to request for substantial completion. (See para.
3.2 above.)
G. Building Cleanup: Remove debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools and equipment from work
areas and site. Clean tunnels and closed off spaces of packing boxes, wood frame members and
other waste materials used in the installation. Final acceptance shall not be approved until site is
cleaned.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 12
H. Fixture Cleanup: Remove temporary labels, stickers, etc., from fixtures and equipment. Do not
remove permanent nameplates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc.
I. Filter Replacement: Provide filters, with the same efficiency rating as required for the final
installation, for the protection of the air moving equipment and ductwork continuously throughout
the construction phase. Provide replacement clean filters as required to maintain system
operation during construction. Provide a new set of clean filters for the test and balance of the air
side equipment.
J. Protection of Finished Installation: Where installation is required in areas previously finished by
other trades, protect the area from marring, soiling or other damage.
K. Air Handling Unit Operation During Construction Phase: Do not operate air handling equipment
during building construction phase unless filter fabric is fastened to all duct systems’ inlets and all
specified and scheduled air filters are installed to minimize dirt entry into ductwork and air moving
equipment. When running air handling units to dry out the building, control the building
temperature to drop very slowly, and verify all HVAC insulation is completed and doors and
windows are installed and closed, to prevent condensation of water from humid air on building
interior surfaces, equipment, materials and ductwork.
3.03 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. General: At no additional cost to the Owner, rectify discrepancies between the actual installation
and contract documents when in the opinion of the T&B Agency or the Architect the discrepancies
will affect system balance and performance.
B. Drive Changes: Include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing
dampers, valves and fittings, and access panels to achieve proper system balance recommended
by the T&B Agency.
3.04 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE
A. General: Provide all labor, equipment, tools and material required to operate the equipment and
systems necessary for the testing and balancing of the systems and for the adjustment,
calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic automated control devices and components.
These services shall be available on each working day during the period of final testing and
balancing.
B. Drawings and Specifications: Provide to the T&B Agency a complete set of project record
drawings and specifications and an approved copy of all HVAC shop drawings and equipment
submittals. The T&B Agency shall be informed of all changes made to the system during
construction, including applicable change orders.
C. Coordination: Coordinate the work of all trades and equipment suppliers to complete the
modifications recommended by the T&B Agency and accepted by the Architect. Cut or drill holes
for the insertion of air measuring devices as directed for test purposes; repair to as-new condition,
inserting plastic caps or covers to prevent air leakage. Repair or replace insulation and re-
establish the integrity of the vapor retardant.
3.05 PREPARATIONS FOR PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
A. Verification: Prior to commencement of the balancing by the T&B Agency, the Contractor shall
verify in writing:
1.That air filters have been replaced and are in clean condition.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 13
2.That linkages between dampers and their actuators are secure, non-overloading and non-
binding.
3.That ductwork specialties are in their normal operating positions.
4.That fans are operating at the correct rotation and specified RPM.
5.That ductwork has been pressure tested and accepted.
6.That strainers have been removed, cleaned and replaced, and that temporary construction
strainers have been removed.
7.That compression or expansion tanks have been inspected, are not air-bound or water-
logged and are pre-charged, and that the piping systems have been completely vented and
filled with water.
8.That air vents at coils and high points of the piping systems have been inspected and
installed and operating freely.
9.That automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been placed in a fixed open
position for full flow through all devices.
10.That linkages between valves and their actuators are secure, non-overloading and non-
binding.
11.That pressures for hydronic reducing valves have been set.
12.That operating temperatures have been set for chillers, regulating valves, etc.
13.That pumps are operating at the correct rotation and specified horsepower.
14.That piping has been pressure tested and accepted and piping systems have been cleaned,
flushed, sterilized and refilled with chemicals and prescribed treated water and vented.
15.That operating temperatures have been set for boilers, regulating valves, etc.
16.That the operating safeties (thermal overloads, firestat/freezestats, smoke detectors, relief
valves, etc.), are installed and fully functional.
17.That equipment has been lubricated and can be operated without damage.
18.That the systems are operational and complete.
19.That no latent residual work remains to be completed.
3.06 ACCEPTANCE TESTING PROCEDURE
A. General: Each HVAC system shall be tested to confirm proper operation and function in
accordance with the construction documents and control sequence of operations.
B. The enclosed checklists shall be completed for each system and signed off by the mechanical
sub-contractor project representative, then verified and signed-off by the mechanical sub-
contractor project supervisor and the construction manager systems engineer. All checklists shall
be incorporated into the project's close-out manuals submitted for Owner record.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 14
C. On-site testing by the Architect and Engineer shall be performed at the discretion of the
Architect/Engineer for any or all systems to confirm test results and system function.
D. The Contractor is responsible to provide adequate time in the completion of the construction to
perform these system tests prior to the AHCA final inspections in the affected areas/systems.
E. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring all required system tests are conducted successfully
and recording associated test data and results.
F. The Contractor is responsible for contacting the Architect and Engineer at least two weeks prior to
system test availability and schedule acceptable to Architect/Engineer for on-site testing.
G. If, in the Architect's and Engineer's opinion, the test results indicate that the systems' installation is
not adequately complete for testing, the testing shall be re-scheduled and the Contractor shall be
responsible to prepare for such re-test.
H. Prior to Owner occupancy, all system testing shall be completed and approved.
3.07 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Requirements: Do not store fiberglass insulation or any equipment within the building until it has
been "dried in". If dry space is unavailable and the insulation and equipment must be installed or
stored before the building is "dried in" and completely enclosed, provide polyethylene film cover
for protection.
B. Replacement of Damaged Stored Material and Equipment: Any material and equipment that has
been wet or otherwise damaged prior to installation, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be
replaced with new material regardless of the condition of the material and equipment at the time
of installation.
C. Repair of Damaged Installed Material and Equipment: After installation correct or repair dents,
scratches and other visible blemishes. At the direction of Architect replace or repair to "as new"
condition equipment which has been damaged during construction.
D. During construction, all piping and ductwork system openings shall be capped with at least two
layers of polyethylene film, fastened tightly in place with banding material or foil tape until
connection of the continuation of such piping or ductwork is occurring.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 15
REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (Must be Submitted Prior to Bid)
Project Name: _________________________ Location: ____________________
Date of Request: ____________________________
Name of Party Requesting Substitute:
_________________________________________________________________
Reason for Substitution Request:
_________________________________________________________________
Drawing Spec. Sect. No. Paragraph Specified Item Manu Model
_______ _______________ _________ __________ ________ _______
Proposed Substitute: _______________________________________________
Manufacturer and Model Number:
_________________________________________________________________
Deviations from the Specified Item: (See paragraph entitled "Deviations".)
Reason for Substitution:
Changes to Other Systems to Permit Use of Proposed Substitute:
(List changes. Submit drawings if required for clarity.)
Technical Data to Support Request for Acceptance:
(List ASTM or other standards designations, testing laboratory reports, experience records, etc.)
Other Supporting Data:
(Submit brochures, samples, drawings, etc.)
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 00 10 - 16
REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (Continued)
Certification: In making request for substitution, the party whose authorized signature appears below,
certifies that all of the following statements are correct and are accepted without exception:
The proposed substitution has been personally investigated and is equal or superior in all
significant respects to the product specified for the specific applications required;
The proposed substitution will be warranted under the same terms required for the specified
product;
Coordination aspects necessitated by the proposed substitution will be accomplished in a
complete and proper fashion by the party signing this form without any additional cost to the
Owner; and
Claims against the Owner for additional costs related to the proposed substitution which
subsequently become apparent after acceptance by the Architect are hereby waived.
Credit: If this substitution is acceptable the following credit shall be given to the Owner;
$__________________________
═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
CERTIFICATION OF EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR
EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE
The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the
specified item.
Submitted by: _________________________________________________
Signature Title
Typed Name: ______________________________________
Company: ________________________________________
Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide
a legally binding signature will invalidate this request.
END OF SECTION 23 00 10
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 13 - 1
SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small
and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at
equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC
equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without
exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 13 - 2
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes
smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with
and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to
resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width
modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific
motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding
temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection
device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 13 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 1
SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Equipment supports.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects
of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include
Product Data for components:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Equipment supports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing
surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing
surface of piping.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
C. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural
carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa)
minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa)
minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 3
2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-
out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel
shapes.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping
of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4
inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators
that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-
actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 4
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion
loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at
changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms
and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
L. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with
clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill
interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span
an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate
for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm)
thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52
mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm)
thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67
mm) thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of
length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment
above floor.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 5
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance
and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated
slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have
field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact
with copper tubing.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 6
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general
service applications.
F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment applications.
G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C), pipes
NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4
to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes
NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900),
with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to
DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate,
and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750),
from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050) if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is
not necessary.
K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24
(DN 24 to DN 600).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24
(DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.
M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to
attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 29 - 7
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using
clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches
(32 mm).
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor
to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where
required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 230529
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 48 - 1
SECTION 230548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
5. Housed spring mounts.
6. Elastomeric hangers.
7. Spring hangers.
8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Restraining braces and cables.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 48 - 2
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded
with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of
supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity
range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-
resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing
neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-
resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing
neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten
and level equipment.
F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being
removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator
pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that
acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 48 - 3
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator
elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise
identify to indicate capacity range.
I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to
support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with
spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated
by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation
material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a
factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction
shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement.
Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by
OSHPD.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive
them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 48 - 4
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components
so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading
limits.
3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor
and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of
80 feet (24 m) o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of
beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
G. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors.
Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the
structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design
strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to
be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained
component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days'
advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-
spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 48 - 5
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 230548
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 53 - 1
SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches
(600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches
(600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 53 - 2
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and
title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment
is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: White.
C. Background Color: Red.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch
(64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600
mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to
attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as
used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.4 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 53 - 3
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch
(64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600
mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as
used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions,
or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow
pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet (7.6 m)
in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 53 - 4
B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Refrigerant Piping:
a. Background Color: Green.
b. Letter Color: Black.
2. Condensate Piping:
a. Background Color: Yellow.
b. Letter Color: Black.
3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 25 feet
(15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
END OF SECTION 230553
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 1
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies
and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
B. Certified TAB reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or TABB a TAB
technician.
B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and
referenced in this Specification.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 2
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5,
"Instrumentation."
E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 -
"System Balancing."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions
in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these
balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for
environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about
HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can
create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed
under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate
system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or
in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed
conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and
adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and
equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their
controls are connected and functioning.
J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record
system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 3
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to
balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to
construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings,
vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-
speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification
material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers
through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 4
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,
measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible,
upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses
the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit,
and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery
equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static
pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate
actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans,
belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.
7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating,
economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow
for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 5
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions
and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated
values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air
terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of
the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at
maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan.
Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust
the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that
simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure
static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical
terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum
inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system
losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed
maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment.
When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed
minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets
balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum
outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at
the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the
most critical unit.
8. Record final fan-performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 6
1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-
pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal
units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and
verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify
that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed
minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets
balanced for maximum airflow.
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum
outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at
minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among
the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum
airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to
the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total
airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum
outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described
for constant-volume air systems.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from
minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record
observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate
data.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 7
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.11 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in
"Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices.
Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance
measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general
construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in
progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being
tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems
serving multiple floors.
3.12 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested
systems and balanced systems.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 8
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified
testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product
data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number
each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each
system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 05 93 - 9
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being
maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter
conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 1
SECTION 230713
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
7. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
8. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation."
3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of
insulation.
3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50
or less.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation
Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where
insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50
ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with
ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with
ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-
applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation
to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-127.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
60/85-70.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 3
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap
seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-82.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-
19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-
80/30-90.
b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-
mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-10.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 46-
50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 4
e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms (1.2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm)
dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.4 SEALANTS
A. FSK Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-
44.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: Aluminum.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied
jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for ducts.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 5
C. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized
bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.
2.8 TAPES
A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying
with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm).
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.9 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting
spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated
when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2
inches (50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability
to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation,
hangers, and substrates.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 6
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but
not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. C & F Wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of
duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports,
anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 7
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from
point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at
attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry
film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends
adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to
butt joints.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof
flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches
(50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 8
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent
insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap
damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100
percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken
vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install
vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and
sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-
foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-
shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation
thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each
surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to
fit the elbow.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 9
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-
(150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100
percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken
vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install
vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and
sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-
foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-
shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation
thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each
surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of
elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit
the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-
(150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint
strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-
barrier mastic.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 10
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints;
for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish
bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm)
o.c. and at end joints.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in
layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s)
for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance
with requirements.
3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air (internally lined ductwork).
3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space (internally lined ductwork).
5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches (50 mm thick and 1.5-
lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) nominal density.
B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5-
lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. M) nominal density.
C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches (50 mm) thick and
1.5-lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. M) nominal density.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 13 - 11
D. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5-
lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) nominal density.
E. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5-
lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) nominal density.
F. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5-
lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) nominal density.
END OF SECTION 230713
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 1
SECTION 230719
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:
1. Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping, indoors and outdoors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation."
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement
material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50
ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
E. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically
sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 2
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ OR ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation
to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable
solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C).
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-
84.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-
75.
d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 3
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-
45.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F (Minus 73 to plus 149 deg C).
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 4
2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied
jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented
barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perm (0.007 metric perm) when tested according to
ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when
tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
2.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C;
thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in
field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers
for lavatories.
C. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and
with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
2.6 TAPES
A. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for
indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
b. Compac Corporation; 130.
c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 5
2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm).
3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.
B. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape.
2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Film Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch (10.1 N/mm) in width.
2.7 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. C & F Wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat
tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-
steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 6
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each
item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports,
anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from
point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at
attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry
film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends
adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to
butt joints.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 7
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof
flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve
seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches
(50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 8
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material
and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece
and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement
finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material
and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section
closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than
two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves,
insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than
two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange
or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a
removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains
vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install
vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services.
Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped
contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC
tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and
color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at
these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with
finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as
that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on
each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands.
Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-
part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks
wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with
tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of
valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish
cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel
second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a
metal jacket.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 9
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-
barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-
clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal
tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness
of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe
insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch
(25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings
in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness
of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 10
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to
valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints;
for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish
bead along seam and joint edge.
B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm)
o.c. and at end joints.
C. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe
prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping
the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2
inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply
1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or
PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's
written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent
bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer
circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit
allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket
to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for
"fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a
minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation
manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
B. Color: White. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 11
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection
shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations
of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three
locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in
the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance
with requirements.
3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping
system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from
materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied
jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 07 19 - 12
3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied
jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 40 mils (1.0 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 230719
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 1
SECTION 230900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and
this Section is directly applicable to them.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This project requires the installation of a new Integrated Automation System constructed using a Niagara
Framework or equivalent with BACnet Field Level Devices. The new IAS shall utilize a single or multiple
JACE 8000 controller(s), networked with a Niagara Framework Web Supervisor when multiple JACEs are
necessary to address the point counts and resource limitations and identify device type for new systems
control devices.
B. The Contractor will be required to perform the following:
1. Furnish, install, configure and commission a new Niagara Framework with BACnet fully
programmable and application specific DDC controllers for the equipment identified in the drawings,
including all components, software and applications required to meet the sequence of operation and
the design/performance intent of the systems.
2. Provide Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) and Programmable Control Units (PCUs) as
specified herein and as required to meet equipment requirements. Provide I/O and ancillary
devices as specified herein, as indicated on the drawings, and as necessary to perform the
sequences of operation. Provide Niagara Framework-based certified products that communicate on
free topology, MS/TP, bus topology, IP channels to meet the functional specifications.
3. Provide BACnet BTL AWS (Advanced Work Station) certification for the Control System Server
(CSS). All Network Controllers (NCs) shall be BTL BBC certified.
4. Furnish and install electronic energy meters to monitor energy usage and measure the efficiency of
energy use within the facility.
5. Furnish and install all low voltage step-down transformers with associated low voltage connections,
power supplies and power/communication/input/output cabling necessary for the control system.
6. Provide and install a spare DLN communication cable at all Master or Peer to Peer control network
locations. This cable shall be a separate color different than the color used for the primary operational
bus. Run this spare cable parallel to the operating cable to and from each communicating device.
7. Furnish and install conduit, junction boxes, fittings, panels, enclosures, and hardware as specified in
these specifications, on the drawings and as required by Code.
8. Provide Graphical User Interface Development for all of the devices identified above and illustrated
within the drawings. Graphical User Interface development must match existing City of Coppell
central system graphics, tool sets and features.
9. It is the contractor’s responsibility to review all of the design documents and specifications and
report any discrepancies to the owner.
10. Contractor shall contract with TDIndustries as the System Integrator for the new system to the
existing City Of Coppell Web Supervisor Software.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 2
1.3 GENERAL IAS INSTALLATION SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall implement a Niagara Framework based open system that will allow products from various
suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance,
and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with
any and all incremental work on the project. Only Niagara Framework based products branded Vykon
are acceptable.
A. The Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files and application-
level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code, databases
and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and/or
configured for use with the NAC, FMCS Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet
connected routers and devices. Any and all required IDs and passwords for admin and programming level
access to any component or software program shall be provided to the Owner.
B. It is the owner’s intent to purchase an open system capable of being serviced and expanded by any
acceptable system integrator that has and maintains certification (TCP) to work on Niagara Framework
systems. The Niagara Compatibility Statement (NICS) for all Niagara Software shall allow open access and
be set as follows: accept.station.in="*" accept.station.out="*" accept.wb.out="*" accept.wb.in="*”. In any
case, the Owner shall maintain the right to direct contractor to modify any software license, regardless of
supplier, as desired by the Owner. The Contractor shall not install any “brand specific” software, applications
or utilities on Niagara Framework based devices.
C. All hardware and field level devices installed, (i.e.; ASCs, PDUs), for the project shall not be limited in their
ability to communicate with a specific brand of Niagara Framework device. They shall also be constructed
in a modular fashion to permit the next generation and support components to be installed in replace of or
in parallel with existing components.
D. Provide and install all wiring required for a complete system, including communication bus, analog points,
digital points, low voltage power, emergency power, and spare communication bus. Splices are not permitted
within the IAS FAC LAN or DLN communication cables. Only continuous bus topologies, MS/TP or
continuous homeruns are allowed for these networks. Capacity of any bus shall be limited to 80% of the
allowable device count to allow for future minor modifications or expansions to the network.
E. Provision of all documentation called out in these specifications including, but not limited to, submittals, O&M
manuals, commissioning submittals, CAD based as-built documentation, and training manuals. Provide both
hard copies and electronic files on electronic media.
F. Training of facility personnel, and or maintenance contractor, on the operation and maintenance of the
system.
G. The repair of all finished surfaces effected as a result of IAS related installation work. This includes but is
not limited to carpet, drywall, paint, ceiling tiles, furniture, and the like.
H. System point to point check out, verification and documentation. Assist the Owner/CxA, and/or TAB Firm in
verification and functional performance testing and GUI acceptance testing.
I. Graphical User Interface Development. The Contractor shall develop the graphics, tools, features, and
network integration as required.
1.4 CONTROL DIAGRAMS AND SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Mechanical Drawings for information on the components and intended control functions.
1.5 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. Program each Niagara Framework Network Controller, and third party ASC, PCU, device, etc., to perform
the sequences of operation provided on the construction documents. Provide all necessary hardware on
each piece of equipment in order for the equipment to perform the specified sequence and to meet the
requirements of the point lists.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 3
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all control wiring connections, auxiliary devices and control wiring
diagrams to complete the control system and attain the described sequence of operation.
1.6 CODES
A. Comply with all current codes, ordinances, regulations, and the City of Coppell requirements.
1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific
edition date.
A. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards
addressed within the following references:
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
3. UL 916: Energy Management Systems
4. LonMark International
5. BACnet Testing Lab
1.8 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Certain LONMARK®, BACnet®, MODBUS, and other products, systems and interface devices may be
provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain the requirements to install, wire,
program, commission, and/or interface to these systems. Particular attention must be paid towards the
interface boards submitted by the various equipment providers. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to
verify the submitted interfaces will integrate properly into the IAS. Report any discrepancies to the Owner.
A. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades and with the Owner’s
representative to insure that all trades have the information necessary so that they may properly install all
the necessary connections and equipment.
B. Provide sleeves and conduit for passage of pipes, and wiring through structural masonry, concrete walls
and floors, and elsewhere for the proper protection of the IAS work.
1.9 PARTS LIST
A. As part of the submittal, provide an accurate parts list including manufacturer, model number and quantity
for all hardware and software.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide a Niagara Framework as the basis of the new IAS. The Contractor shall be fully certified in the
development and customization of the Niagara Framework software.
A. All microprocessor based control products used shall conform to LONMARK® Certified Interoperability
Standards, BTL Certified Standards, Modbus communication standards and/or Niagara Framework.
B. The IAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916) as an Energy Management
System.
C. Functionality and Completeness: Contractor shall furnish and install all hardware, software and programming
necessary to provide a complete and functioning system as specified. Contractor shall include all hardware,
software and programming not specifically itemized in these Specifications, which is necessary to
implement, maintain, operate, and diagnose the system in compliance with these Specifications.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 4
1.11 INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer's Qualifications: The Contractor shall have a successful history in the design and installation of
Niagara Framework based Integrated Automation Systems to provide web browser monitoring and control
of LONWORKS®, BACnet, Modbus field level devices. Contractor must demonstrate experience in IAS
installations for not less than 5 years and in DDC installation projects with point counts equal to this
Project and systems of the same character as this Project.
A. Installer's Experience with Proposed Product Line: Firms shall have specialized in and be experienced with
the installation of the proposed product line for not less than one year from date of final completion on at
least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity. Submittals shall document this experience with
references. Provide evidence of Niagara TCP certification as part of the submittal process.
1.12 BID PACKAGE SUBMITTAL
A. Provide the following submittals as part of the bid package.
1. Proposed device schedule including all hardware and software.
2. Qualifications
3. One-line diagram indicating how the new Niagara Framework network controllers will integrate with
the existing City of Coppell IAS and LONWORKS®, BACnet, or Modbus field level devices.
4. An overall sequence of the construction as it pertains to the installation of the Integrated Automation
System.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit under provisions of Division 01.
A. Electronic Submittals: While all requirements for hard copy submittal apply, IAS control submittals and
operation and maintenance (O&M) information shall also be provided in electronic format as follows:
1. Drawings and Diagrams: Shop Drawings shall be provided on electronic media as an AutoCAD
drawing per Owner’s CAD standards.
2. Other Submittals: All other submittals shall be provided in Adobe Portable Document Format
B. Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications as indicated for the appropriate
items.
C. Submit a list of no less than three similar projects, which utilize the Niagara Framework or equivalent for
Enterprise connectivity to provide an Integrated Automation System that consists of web-browser control
and monitoring of the proposed LONWORKS®, BACnet, Modbus field level devices. These projects must be
on-line and functional such that representatives from the Owner can observe the Integrated Automation
System and Interface in full operation. Include proper references and contact numbers of these reference
projects.
D. Submit validation which indicates the successful completion of the Niagara Framework TCP or equivalent
certification course.
E. Submit resumes of installing staff indicating passing certificates for training on the LONWORKS®, BACnet,
Modbus, Tridium TCP certification line of controls to be installed as part of this project.
F. GUI development software
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 5
1. Provide screen captures of graphical user interfaces developed by the Contractor on previous
projects. These screen shots shall represent work performed by the contractor and not of the
company from the line of controls which the Contractor represents. Provide client contact information
for the Owner to validate.
G. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each Niagara Framework based Network
Controller, control device, sensor, actuator, relay, panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions,
capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation and
start-up instructions.
H. Products: Within twenty one (21) days after date of execution of General Contractor/Sub-Contractor
agreement, submit for acceptance a list of all material and equipment manufacturers whose products are
proposed, as well as names of all subcontractors whom the Contractor proposes to employ.
I. Submit documentation indicating LONMARK®, NICs and/or BTL compliance and include Protocol
Implementation Conformance (PIC) Statements.
J. Submit Shop Drawings for each control system.
K. Control Logic Documentation:
1. Provide a written description of each control sequence.
2. Include control response, settings, set points, throttling ranges, gains, reset schedules, adjustable
parameters and limits as part of as-built documentation.
L. Submit an IAS Start-Up Test Agenda and Schedule for review and approval.
M. Record Documents:
1. Provide record copies of product data and control Shop Drawings updated to reflect the final installed
condition.
2. Accurately record actual set points and settings of controls, final sequence of operation, including
changes to programs made after submission and approval of Shop Drawings and including changes
to programs made during specified testing.
3. Record copies shall include individual floor plans with device (controllers, routers, sensors, etc.)
locations with all interconnecting wiring routing including space sensors, LAN wiring, power wiring,
low voltage power wiring.
1.14 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. The system provided shall incorporate hardware and software resources sufficient to meet the functional
requirements of these Specifications. The Facility Local Area Network (FAC LAN) and Device Level
Network (DLN) shall be based on industry standard open platforms as specified herein and utilize
commonly available operation, management and application software. All software packages and
databases shall be licensed to the Owner to allow unrestricted maintenance and operation of the IAS.
Contractor shall include all items not specifically itemized in these Specifications that are necessary to
implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance with the functional intent of these
Specifications.
A. The system architecture shall implement a new building IAS which is based on the Niagara Framework and
consists of an Ethernet-based, wide area network (WAN), a single Local Area Network (LAN) that supports
NCs, PCUs, ASCs, Operator Workstations (OWS), Smart Devices (SD), and Remote Communication
Devices (RCDs) as applicable.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 6
1. Facility Local Area Network (FAC LAN): The FAC LAN shall be an Ethernet-based, 10/100/1000
Ethernet LAN connecting Local NCs, IAS Server and OWSs. The FAC LAN serves as the backbone
for the NCs communications path and as the connection point to the WAN. Contractor shall provide
a FAC LAN as a dedicated LAN for the control system. LAN shall be IEEE 802.3 Ethernet over Fiber
or Category 6 cable with switches and routers that support 1000base-T gigabit Ethernet throughput.
2. Device Level Network (DLN): Network used to connect PCUs and ASCs. These shall be Peer to
Peer or Master/Slave devices as defined in the LONMARK® Interoperability, Sedona or BTL
standard. Network speed shall be 78K bits per second (LonWorks), 19.2K bits per second
(MODBUS), Varies (BACnet).
3. ARCnet and/or Token-Ring based FAC LANs and DLNs shall not be acceptable.
B. Remote Data Access: The system shall support the Internet Browser-based remote access to the building
data. The IAS contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s IT department to insure all remote browser access
(if desired by the owner) is protected with the latest Niagara Software updates and a VPN (Virtual Private
Network) must be installed to protect the owner’s network from cyber attacks.
C. Browser-based access: A remote/local user using a standard browser will be able access all control system
facilities and graphics via the WAN or direct connection, with proper username and password. Only native
Internet browser-based user interfaces (HTML5, Java, XML, CCS3 JAVA Script, etc.) that do not require
plug-ins (thin clients) are acceptable. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of
clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™, Firefox™ or Chrome™.
D. The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, CSS, and operator interface
devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under any loading condition.
E. Niagara Framework Control Systems Server (CSS): A server that maintains the systems configuration and
programming database. It shall allow secure multiple-access to the control information.
F. Systems Configuration Database: The system architecture shall support maintaining the systems
configuration database on a server that resides on the FAC LAN. User tools for DLN and FAC LAN
management shall be provided and licensed to the Owner and shall allow unrestricted configuring, updating,
maintaining, and expanding of all current devices, configurations and settings.
G. Database Schema shall be published and provided to the Owner to facilitate easy access to DLN and FAC
LAN data.
1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Wherever the words “for review” or “for acceptance” are used in regard to manufactured specialties, or
wherever it is desired to substitute a different make or type of apparatus for that specified, submit all
information pertinent to the adequacy and adaptability of the proposed apparatus to the Owner’s
Representative and secure their approval before the apparatus is ordered. Refer to general condition
requirements for substitutions.
1.16 WARRANTY
A. The entire IAS and all ancillary equipment required for its operation shall be free from defects in
workmanship and material under normal use and service. If within 12 months from the date of substantial
completion the installed equipment is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, the
Contractor shall replace, repair or adjust the defect at no cost to the Owner.
A. The warranty period for work and systems of this project shall commence after written notification of Owner’s
final acceptance.
B. Corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user
documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 7
C. The Owner reserves the right to make changes to the IAS during the Warranty Period. Such changes do
not constitute a waiver of warranty. Contractor shall warrant parts and installation work regardless of any
such changes made by Owner, unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing evidence that a specific
problem is the result of such changes to the IAS.
D. At no cost to the Owner, during the Warranty Period, Contractor shall provide maintenance services for
software including all current software updates, firmware and hardware PRODUCTS. Prior to the closeout
of the warranty period, the IAS contractor shall meet with the owner’s representative to address any
questions or concerns and offer ongoing Software Maintenance Services to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers – Network Controllers
1. Niagara Framework JACE 8000
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or blemishes, and shall
not be damaged in any way. Used equipment shall not be used in any way for the permanent installation
except where Drawings or Specifications specifically allow existing materials to remain in place.
B. The make and model of network switches, routers, ups, control system server computers, personal
computers (PC), notebook PC’s, and monitors shall comply with Owner’s current standards as of the date
of Substantial Completion. Contact Owner for the current hardware standards.
2.3 ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. Ebtron, Inc.
c. Heat-Timer Corporation.
d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
f. RDF Corporation.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.36 deg F (0.2 deg C) at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (460 mm) long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m).
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches (915 mm) long, flexible use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. (1 sq. m).
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-
1/2 inches (64 mm).
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 8
c. Thermometer: Concealed
d. Color: White
e. Orientation: Vertical.
8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.
C. RTDs and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
c. RDF Corporation.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, [18 inches (460 mm) long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m).
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 inches (610 mm) long, rigid; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m); length as required.
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
c. Thermometer: Concealed.
d. Color: White
e. Orientation: Vertical
8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.
D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. General Eastern Instruments.
c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
e. TCS/Basys Controls.
f. Vaisala.
2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.
3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.
4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
c. Color: White
d. Orientation: Vertical.
5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate.
6. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure, suitable for
operation at outdoor temperatures of 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C)
7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative
humidity.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 9
2.4 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to
5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).
B. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers
with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.
C. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter,
adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
D. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current
transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at
1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.
E. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and
system output requirements.
2.5 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers:
1. B. W. Technologies.
2. CEA Instruments, Inc.
3. Ebtron, Inc.
4. Gems Sensors Inc.
5. Greystone Energy Systems Inc.
6. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.
7. INTEC Controls, Inc.
8. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
9. MSA Canada Inc.
10. QEL/Quatrosense Environmental Limited.
11. Sauter Controls Corporation.
12. Sensidyne, Inc.
13. TSI Incorporated.
14. Vaisala.
15. Vulcain Inc.
B. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state plug-in sensors
with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C); with 2
factory-calibrated alarm levels at 35 and 200 ppm.
C. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors; suitable over
a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F (minus 5 to plus 55 deg C) and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with
continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.
D. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180-
degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush mounting.
2.6 THERMOSTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erie Controls.
2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 10
3. Heat-Timer Corporation.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.
B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.
3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.
4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.
5. Short-cycle protection.
6. Programming based on every day of week.
7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable,
remote sensor, and fan on-auto.
8. Battery replacement without program loss.
9. Thermostat display features include the following:
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with
adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F (13 to 30 deg C) set-
point range, and 2 deg F (1 deg C) maximum differential.
D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-
switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point
adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F (13 to 30 deg C) set-point range, and 2 deg F (1 deg C) maximum differential.
1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.
2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.
E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient
temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.
2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.
3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to cover
full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.
4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument.
5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application.
6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable
for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.
F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
3. Thermometer: Concealed.
4. Color: White
5. Orientation: Vertical
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 11
G. Room thermostat accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
2. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
3. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, adjustment knob.
H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable
throttling range and adjustable set point.
I. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in
middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb,
bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.
J. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic- reset
switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or below
set point.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m).
2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) of coil surface.
K. Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic- reset
switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or above
set point.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m).
2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) of coil surface.
L. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-rubber
diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25
psig (172 kPa), and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.
2.7 HUMIDISTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
2. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
B. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range, 20
to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.
2.8 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-
position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed.
Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy
removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150
in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).
4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 12
5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque
of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).
6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.
b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.
c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.
e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to
2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500
to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque by 2.0.
3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release
on nonspring-return actuators.
6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal.
9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F (Minus 30 to plus 50 deg C)
10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 30 to plus 121 deg C).
11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed
12. Control contractor responsible for providing power to all control companies 120v to 24 volt.
2.9 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.
3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc..
4. United Enertech Corp.
5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade design; 0.108-inch- (2.8-mm-) minimum thick, galvanized-steel or
0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper
blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8
inches (200 mm) and length of 48 inches (1220 mm).
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with oil-
impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass,
ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every
blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
3. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade
seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft.
(50 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) when damper is
held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to AMCA 500D.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 13
2.10 STAND-ALONE FUNCTIONALITY
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install single controllers with the physical and software resource count
for standalone operation of each piece of equipment e.g. AHU, MAU, VAV, etc.. The sequence of
operation and required points for control shall reside on a single controller. Remote I/O modules (via a
field wired communications bus) are not acceptable for points required to achieve the sequence of
operation. Expansion I/O modules plugged directly into the controller may be utilized for expansion.
2.11 THIRD PARTY INTERFACES
A. Manufacturer third party interfaces shall be limited to equipment which the IAS contractor cannot or has
not been contracted to control directly via DDC controllers. This equipment shall include the following.
CRAC, ATS, Energy Meters, Lighting Systems.
2.12 ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS
A. The IAS shall have the ability to perform energy management routines via preprogrammed function blocks
or template programs.
2.13 UNIFORMITY
A. To the extent practical, all equipment of the same type serving the same function shall be identical and
from the same manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with Work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
A. These specifications call out certain duties of the Contractor and any subcontractor(s). They are not
intended as a material list of all items required by the Contract.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Utilize licensed electricians for all new and retrofitted electrical distribution systems and comply with
Division 26 electrical specifications.
A. Provide related items and work indicated on the IAS Drawings and items and work called for in this Division
of the Specifications. This includes all incidentals, equipment, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding,
supports, tools, supervision, labor, consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete
systems. Perform start up, configuration, programming and commissioning coordination on each control
product and system to provide fully operable systems in accordance with the specified functional
performance.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations and shall meet or
exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and
ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. The IAS Drawings show the general arrangement of the respective systems. Follow these Drawings as
closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. Provide devices, power,
fittings, sensors, controllers, wiring and accessories, which may be required but are not shown on the
Drawings or specified herein. The Contractor shall be responsible for achieving the sequence of operations
and intent of the system design.
D. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 14
E. Limit LAN cable lengths to no longer than 80% of the longest dimension published by the manufacturer of
the cable between the most remote network nodes.
F. Comply with all rules, guidelines and procedures defined by the owner’s IT authority.
3.3 DIGITAL CONTROL PANELS, CONTROLLER QUANTITY AND LOCATION
A. Individual Digital Control Panels (DCP) are referenced to indicate allocation of points to each DCP and
DCP location. Digital control panels shall consist of one or multiple controllers to meet requirements of
this Specification.
A. Contractor shall extend power to the DCP from an acceptable power panel (coordinate with Division 26).
3.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal
Cabling."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables
follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion.
Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except
local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and
equipment.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater
resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand
position.
3.5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall thoroughly and completely configure IAS system control devices, software, supplemental
software, application programming, network communications, CSS, OWS, remote operator workstations,
portable operator’s terminal, printer, and network communications to permit the functional requirements
of the IAS herein specified. The setup shall include as a minimum the following network management
procedures:
1. Automatic backup of the DDC System database to appropriate media.
2. Program, load and debug all software installations, including integration of third party applications
(e.g. analytics and energy management).
3. Network user auditing routine.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 15
3.6 SURGE PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection, filters, etc. as necessary for proper
operation and protection of all NCs, operator interfaces, printers, routers and other hardware and interface
devices. All equipment shall be capable of handling voltage variations 10 % above or below measured
nominal value, with no affect on hardware, software, communications, and data storage.
3.7 CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY
A. IAS Contractor shall provide all power source wiring required for operation of all equipment and devices
provided under Division 25 and the IAS Drawings.
3.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. All products and materials shall be new, clean, and free of defects, damage and corrosion.
A. Ship and store products and materials in a manner which will protect them from damage, weather, and entry
of debris until final acceptance.
3.9 SITE CLEAN UP
A. At conclusion of each day’s work, and at the request of the owner, clean up and remove from the site all
rubbish, debris and trash accumulated during the day as a result of work of the Contractor.
A. Marks on walls or ceiling tiles caused by the Contractor shall be cleaned by the Contractor. Ceiling tiles,
drywall, carpet, paint, and all architectural finishes damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced by the
Contractor.
3.10 IAS CONTRACTOR’S CHECK OUT (CCO) START-UP TESTING, ADJUSTING, CALIBRATION
A. Work and/or systems installed under this Division shall be fully functioning prior to Demonstration and
Acceptance Phase. Contractor shall conduct the CCO which addresses the start-up, testing,
adjustments, and calibrations of all work and/or systems under this Contract.
B. All CCO testing procedures shall be documented in the CCO report to be provided by the contractor to
the Owner/CxA.
3.11 SUMMARY OF IAS ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
A. Submit product data, Shop Drawings, logic documentation, and sample graphics to the Engineer of
Record, and receive approval.
B. Install IAS. Obtain Owner/CxA acceptance.
C. Submit as-built record documents.
D. Provide the Owner/CxA an agenda and schedule of CCO testing activities for approval and coordination.
E. Provide written notice that the system is ready for Owner acceptance testing. Schedule IAS
Demonstrations and Owner/CxA Commissioning.
F. Demonstrate IAS systems to Owner/Engineer. Perform functional performance testing including
sequence of operation, point to point verification to graphical interface, historical data logging, and alarms.
G. Owner/CxA to provide detailed punch list to contractor.
H. Contractor to repair issues on Owner/CxA punch list in seven (7) calendar days.
I. Contractor provides all usernames, passwords, software, GUI, databases, licenses, and application
programming tool(s) to the Owner.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 09 00 - 16
J.Contractor Trains Owner on all aspects of the IAS including architecture, devices, software, final sequences
and modes of operation.
K. Owner issues letter to contractor declaring that system is substantially complete. Date of this letter starts
the warrantee period,
L. Revise and re-submit as-built record Drawings and O&M Manuals.
M. Final Acceptance. Owner issues letter to contractor accepting system.
END OF SECTION 25 00 00
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 1
SECTION 232300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop,
based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes,
flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall
and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships
between piping and equipment.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot .
2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping
layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a
minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and
length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected
equipment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 2
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior
are clean when installed.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on
copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long
assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 3
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; Type, Grade, and wall thickness as selected in
Part 3 piping applications articles.
B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for welded joints.
C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets, bevel-welded
end connection, and raised face.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E. Flanged Unions:
1. Body: Forged-steel flanges for NPS 1 to NPS 1-1/2 and ductile iron for NPS 2 to NPS 3. Apply
rust-resistant finish at factory.
2. Gasket: Fiber asbestos free.
3. Fasteners: Four plated-steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts. Apply rust-resistant finish at factory.
4. End Connections: Brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper tubing.
5. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long
assembly.
6. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 400 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 330 deg F.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, stainless-steel-wire-reinforced protective jacket
2. End Connections:
a. NPS 2 and Smaller: With threaded-end connections.
b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: With flanged-end connections.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long
assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
B. Packed-Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 4
7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch
conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an
NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 45 deg F .
6. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
7. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig .
H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 5
4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
6. Equalizer: Internal.
7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch
conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.
8. End Connections: Socket.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
I. Straight-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
J. Angle-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
4. End Connections: Socket or flare.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
5. End Connections: Socket or flare.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).
L. Mufflers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. End Connections: Socket or flare.
3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).
M. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.
1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.
5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).
N. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 6
2.4 REFRIGERANTS
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2.DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3.Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4.INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A
A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,
annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B. Suction Lines NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2 for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type L, drawn-
temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type L or K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper
fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems;
indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump
sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved
on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or
parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.
K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in
accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in
Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed
behind finished surfaces.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 7
L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.
N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems,
seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
expansion-valve bulb.
P. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following procedures:
1. Shot blast the interior of piping.
2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing by means
of a wire or electrician's tape.
3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this
procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe
to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.
5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be open to allow
unrestricted flow.
Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for
insulation installation.
R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves
specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for
sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent
scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 8
F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings
and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal threading is
specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do
not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.
I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install
gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a
trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and
safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures
indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 23 00 - 9
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap
and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12
hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction
pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design
temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's
written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 232300
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 1
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Sealants and gaskets.
5. Hangers and supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated
in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of
gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and
attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes.
4. Elevation of top of ducts.
5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
6. Fittings.
7. Reinforcement and spacing.
8. Seam and joint construction.
9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 2
10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.
12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Sheet metal thicknesses.
2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.
3. Reinforcement details and spacing.
4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building
components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Perimeter moldings.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"
and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC
System Construction and Insulation."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure
class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure
class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and
fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,
"Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
a. Lindab Inc.
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. SEMCO Incorporated.
d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class,
applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class,
applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal
seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical
Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 4
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180)
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less;
3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall
be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested
according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or
aluminum sheets.
C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O.
6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at
250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting
spigots.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 5
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with
threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger
Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts
designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct
materials.
G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system.
Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction
loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch
connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to
building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure
elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view,
cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal
thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 6
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with
requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply
with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct
Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part
tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding
stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds
to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and
supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT
A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a
minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.
B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of 12 feet
(3.7 m)]in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings. Locate
access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from bottom of duct.
C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.4 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal
Class B.
6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal
Class A.
7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal
Class B.
10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal
Class B.
11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 7
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers
and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs
more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger
Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610
mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet
metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and
inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.7 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required
for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner
as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories" for access panels and doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent
collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC
system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into
building.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 8
D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return
plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash
systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter
sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from
within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum
device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging
integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet.
Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable
material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse
coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present.
Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface
deposits and debris.
3.8 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC."
3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
B. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, and Heat Pumps
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 9
3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6
C. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg (750 Pa.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
D. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 24.
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 24
3. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods: Comply with NFPA 96.
a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet, No. 3 finish.
b. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.
c. Welded seams and joints.
d. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg (750 Pa).
e. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.
f. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.
E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 10
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
F. Intermediate Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
G. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure
4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure
4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4,
"Vane Support in Elbows."
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows
with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 31 13 - 11
1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments
for 90-degree elbow.
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four
segments for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
segments for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Welded.
H. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are
permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 1
SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Manual volume dampers.
3. Control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Smoke dampers.
6. Flange connectors.
7. Turning vanes.
8. Duct-mounted access doors.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Flexible ducts.
11. Duct accessory hardware.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to
other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include
dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct
systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control damper installations.
d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access
doors.
e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B,
"Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal
materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180).
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet
metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less;
3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
10. Ruskin Company.
11. SEMCO Incorporated.
12. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm (10 m/s).
D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg (0.25 kPa).
E. Frame: .063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, with sealed edges.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch (5 mm)
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 3
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings.
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage (1.0-mm) minimum.
b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum.
6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
7. Screen Material: Aluminum.
8. Screen Type: Bird
9. 90-degree stops.
2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped, galvanized steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 4
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
7. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
8. M&I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd.
9. McGill AirFlow LLC.
10. METALAIRE, Inc.
11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.
12. Nailor Industries Inc.
13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
14. Ruskin Company.
15. Vent Products Company, Inc.
16. Young Regulator Company.
B. Frames:
1. Angle shaped.
2. Galvanized steel channels, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
3. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches (200 mm).
2. Parallel blade design.
3. Galvanized steel.
4. 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.
6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel
and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
E. Bearings:
1. Oil-impregnated bronze
2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.5 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 5
5. McGill AirFlow LLC.
6. METALAIRE, Inc.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
9. PHL, Inc.
10. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
11. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
12. Ruskin Company.
13. Vent Products Company, Inc.
14. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg (1-kPa) static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm (20-m/s)
velocity.
D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-)
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve
requirements.
G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C)) rated, fusible links.
2.6 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and
components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.7 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 6
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. SEMCO Incorporated.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and
fibrous-glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with
acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for
duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: Double wall.
F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger
dimensions.
2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. McGill AirFlow LLC.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
9. Ventfabrics, Inc.
10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access
Doors - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure
class.
c. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 7
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles.
C. Pressure Relief Access Door:
1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class.
3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts.
4. Factory set at 5-inch wg (2500 Pa)
5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.
6. Hinge: Continuous piano.
7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Flame Gard, Inc.
3. 3M.
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428-inch (1.1-mm) stainless steel.
D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000
deg F (1093 deg C).
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.
2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) wide attached to 2
strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-
mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 8
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic
rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm) in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg C).
G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and
with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees
of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement at start
and stop.
2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire;
fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket.
Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation
thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards,"
for fibrous-glass ducts.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 9
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft and control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to
exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from
larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of
same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories
and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4. At drain pans and seals.
5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment.
6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access
doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access
doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and
inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.
8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.
9. Control devices requiring inspection.
10. Elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to
indicate the purpose of access door.
L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct.
Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 33 00 - 10
O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of
flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands
Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at
centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement during start and stop of fans.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.
3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-
response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 233300
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 34 23 - 1
SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
2. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
3. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.
4. In-line centrifugal fans.
5. Propeller fans.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for
equipment mounting.
4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
1. Breidert Air Products.
2. Broan-NuTone LLC.
3. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 34 23 - 2
4. Carnes Company.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. JencoFan.
7. Loren Cook Company.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with
venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain
and snow drains and grease collector.
2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt Drives:
1. Resiliently mounted to housing.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
E. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing,
factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set
to close when fan stops.
5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to
close when fan stops.
F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 18 inches (450 mm).
3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation.
4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.
6. Burglar Bars: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)thick steel bars welded in place to form 6-inch (150-mm) squares.
7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.
8. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Breidert Air Products.
2. Broan-NuTone LLC.
3. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc.
4. Carnes Company.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. JencoFan.
7. Loren Cook Company.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 34 23 - 3
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt Drives:
1. Resiliently mounted to housing.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
E. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing,
factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
5. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; factory set
to close when fan stops.
6. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to
close when fan stops.
2.3 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Breidert Air Products.
2. Broan-NuTone LLC.
3. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc.
4. Carnes Company.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. JencoFan.
7. Loren Cook Company.
B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall
be removable for service.
D. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-
in.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.
2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.
3. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate.
4. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer.
5. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel springs, and
fusible link.
6. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille.
7. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
8. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
2.4 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 34 23 - 4
1. Breidert Air Products.
2. Carnes Company.
3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
4. JencoFan.
5. Loren Cook Company.
B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support
bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of
fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out service door.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts
within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.
2. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
3. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
4. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch (13- by 25-mm) mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide
guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
5. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and
connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for
Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and
efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic
Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Division 07 Section "Roof
Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 34 23 - 5
B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit
stops having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible
connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and
electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in
motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free
rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and
install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm,
and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 34 23 - 6
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 233423
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 36 00 - 1
SECTION 233600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fan-powered air terminal units.
2. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
2. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"
and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 36 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PARALLEL FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Titus.
2. METALAIRE, Inc.
3. Nailor Industries Inc.
4. Price Industries.
5. Krueger.
6. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.
B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in parallel arrangement inside unit casing with control
components inside a protective metal shroud.
C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel or 0.032-inch aluminum.
1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL 181 erosion
requirements, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed
index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
2. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with
airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
5. Fan: Forward-curved centrifugal, located at plenum air inlet.
6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow-sensing ring and peripheral gasket and self-lubricating
bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static
pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally closed.
E. Velocity Sensors: Multipoint array with velocity sensors in cold- and hot-deck air inlets and air outlets.
F. Motor:
1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
2. Type: Electronically commutated motor.
3. Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators.
4. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
5. Motor Speed: Single speed.
6. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Horsepower: 1/3 – 3/4.
b. Volts: 460.
c. Phase: Poly.
d. Hz: 60.
G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Material: 2 inches pleated cotton-polyester media having 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 36 00 - 3
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum,
mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and secondary manual,
reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with
stainless-steel hardware.
1. Location: Plenum air inlet.
2. Stage(s): 2.
3. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.
4. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air temperature to
not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.)
5. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.
6. Airflow switch for proof of airflow.
7. Fan interlock contacts.
8. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A).
9. Mercury contactors.
10. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).
I. Factory-Mounted and -Wired Controls: Electrical components mounted in control box with removable
cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.
1. Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic control units
with terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.
2. Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip. Terminal lugs to match quantities, sizes,
and materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box that is sized
according to NFPA 70.
3. Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fuse type.
J. Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and mounted on side
of unit.
K. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based controller with integral
airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls
specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following
features:
1. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.
2. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
3. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
4. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation
and Control for HVAC."
2.2 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Titus.
2. Krueger.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. Nailor Industries Inc.
5. Price Industries.
6. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.
B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective
metal shroud.
C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel or 0.032-inch aluminum
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 36 00 - 4
1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL 181 erosion
requirements, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed
index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with
airtight gasket.
5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
D. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume
regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F, shall be
impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and shall be factory
tested for leaks.
E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static
pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally closed.
F. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based thermostat with integral
airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls
specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following
features:
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open.
2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and maximum air volumes;
shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while
compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch wg; and shall have a multipoint
velocity sensor at air inlet.
3. Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with temperature set-point display in Fahrenheit and
Celsius.
2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
C. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts
designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
D. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with
aluminum casings.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set
airflows, coil capacity, and ARI certification seal.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 36 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems."
B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.
C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers
and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers
are being attached.
C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
C. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Division 23
Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set
airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 36 00 - 6
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve
proper performance.
3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
4. Verify that control connections are complete.
5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
END OF SECTION 233600
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 37 13 - 1
SECTION 233713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.
2. Louver face diffusers.
3. Linear bar diffusers.
4. Linear slot diffusers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or
not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data
including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,
model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
b. Carnes.
c. Krueger.
d. METALAIRE, Inc.
e. Nailor Industries Inc.
f. Price Industries.
g. Titus.
h. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
5. Face Size: [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] [20 by 20 inches (500 by 500 mm)] [12 by 12 inches
(300 by 300 mm)]
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 37 13 - 2
6. Face Style: Four cone.
7. Mounting: T-bar.
8. Pattern: Fixed.
9. Dampers: None
10. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.
B. Louver Face Diffuser
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
b. Carnes.
c. METALAIRE, Inc.
d. Nailor Industries Inc.
e. Price Industries.
f. Titus.
2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, white
5. Face Size: See drawings
6. Mounting: T-bar
7. Pattern: Four-way core style.
8. Dampers: None
9. Accessories:
a. Square to round neck adaptor.
b. Adjustable pattern vanes.
c. Throw reducing vanes.
d. Equalizing grid.
e. Plaster ring.
f. Safety chain.
g. Wire guard.
h. Sectorizing baffles.
i. Operating rod extension.
2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Adjustable Bar Register:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
b. Carnes.
c. Krueger.
d. METALAIRE, Inc.
e. Nailor Industries Inc.
f. Price Industries.
g. Titus.
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch (13 mm) apart.
5. Core Construction: Removable.
6. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 1/2 inch (13 mm) apart. See plans.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 37 13 - 3
7. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
9. Damper Type: None.
10. Accessories:
a. Front-blade gang operator.
b. Filter.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of
Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air
volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as
much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where
architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final
location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 41 00 - 1
SECTION 234100
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal panel filters.
2. Flat panel filters.
3. Pleated panel filters.
4. Nonsupported bag filters.
5. Rigid cell box filters.
6. V-bank cell filters.
7. Self-supported pocket filters.
8. Front- and rear-access filter frames.
9. Side-service housings.
10. Filter gages.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For air filters. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality"; Section 5
- "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and
rating air-filter units.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 41 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLAT PANEL FILTERS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, flat, nonpleated, panel-type, disposable air filters with
holding frames.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AAF International.
b. Camfil Farr.
c. Flanders-Precisionaire.
d. Purafil, Inc.
B. Filter Unit Class: UL 900, Class 2.
C. Media: Interlaced glass or synthetic fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive.
1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
3. Media shall be coated with an antimicrobial agent.
4. Metal Retainer: Upstream side and downstream side.
D. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard with perforated metal retainer sealed or bonded to the media.
E. Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners; suitable for bolting together into
built-up filter banks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to
substrate.
B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
C. Install filter gage for each filter bank.
D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters
used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.
E. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Install filter gages on filter
banks with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Mount filter gages on
outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages.
F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 41 00 - 3
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.
C. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling and air-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
END OF SECTION 234100
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 62 00 - 1
SECTION 236200
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled, refrigerant compressor and condenser units.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For compressor and condenser units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Provide literature that indicates dimension, capacities, rating, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration
Systems."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6, "Heating,
Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of compressor and condenser units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period. The manufacturer shall provide 12 month parts only warranty. Defective parts will be
repaired or replaced during the warranty period at no charge. The warranty period shall commence at
start up, or 6 months after shipment, whichever occurs first.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS, AIR COOLED, 6 TO 120 TONS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Trane; American Standard Inc.
2. Daikin Applied
3. YORK International Corporation.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 62 00 - 2
B. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors, condenser
coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. Unit performance and electrical characteristics shall
be per mechanical schedules.
C. Compressors:
1. Each unit shall have multiple, heavy-duty Copeland scroll compressors.
2. Each compressor shall be complete with gauge ports, crankcase heater, sight-glass, anti-slug
protection, motor overload protection and a 5 minute time anti-cycling time delay.
3. Compressors shall be isolated with resilient rubber isolators to decrease noise transmission.
D. Refrigerant: R-410A.
E. Condenser Coil: The condensing section shall be open on the sides and bottom to provide access and to
allow airflow through the coils. Condenser coils shall be multi-row and fabricated from cast aluminum
micro-channel coils. Each condenser coil shall be factory leak tested with high-pressure air under water,
then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen or refrigerant. Coils are to
be recessed so that the cabinet provides built in hail protection.
F. Condenser Fan:
1. Condenser fans shall be direct drive, propeller type designed for low tip speed, vertical air
discharge, and include service guards. Fan blades shall be constructed of steel and riveted to a
steel center hub. Condenser fan motors shall be heavy-duty, inherently protected, three-phase,
non-reversing type with permanently lubricated ball bearing and integral rain shield.
2. Units shall have at least one head pressure sensing condenser fan controlled to maintain positive
head pressure. An ambient thermostat shall prevent the refrigeration system from operating below
45º F ambient.
G. Operating and safety controls include the following:
1. Manual-reset, high-pressure cutout switches.
2. Automatic-reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
3. Low-oil-pressure cutout switch.
4. Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.
5. Three-leg, compressor-overload protection.
6. Control transformer.
7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
8. Timer to prevent excessive compressor cycling.
H. Accessories:
1. Hot-gas bypass kit: Hot gas bypass capped T shall be factory installed on the discharge line of
refrigerant circuits.
I. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls and
with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives.
Additional features include the following:
1. Exterior surfaces shall be constructed of pre-painted galvanized steel for aesthetics and long term
durability. Paint finish to include a base primer with a high quality, polyester resin topcoat of a
neutral beige color. Finished surface to withstand a minimum 750-hour salt spray test in
accordance with ASTM B117 standard for salt spray resistance.
2. The unit base frame shall be constructed of 13 gauge pre-painted galvanized steel.
3. Lifting brackets shall be provided on the unit base with lifting holes to accept cable or chain hooks.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design
of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings," Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-
Conditioning."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 62 00 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances.
B. Install compressor and condenser units on concrete base. Concrete materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement
of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.
C. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so it does not interfere
with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
D. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled compressor and condenser units; maintain required access to unit.
Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in Division 23
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair
leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
operation and unit operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
5. Verify proper airflow over coils.
C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.
END OF SECTION 236200
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 73 13 - 1
SECTION 237313
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Constant-air-volume, multizone air-handling units.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.
1. Unit dimensions and weight.
2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
3. Fans:
a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
c. Fan construction and accessories.
d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Filter media data, performance characteristics, filter assembly, and filter frames.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for
equipment mounting.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 73 13 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units
and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430,
"Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"
and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 -
"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Trane; American Standard Inc.
2. Daikin Applied
3. YORK International Corporation.
2.2 UNIT CASINGS
A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All panels,
access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket. Shipped
loose gasketing is not allowed
B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double wall
assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13.
a. The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
b. The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
c. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
d. Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.
C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5 inches of
positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the panel midpoint.
D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of positive
static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of cabinet area at
1.24 kPa static pressure).
E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice
joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on-site labor and meet
indoor air quality standards.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 73 13 - 3
F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano-
type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing outward for unit sections under
negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shall have a secondary latch to relieve
pressure and prevent injury upon access.
G. A 6-inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer for structural
rigidity and condensate trapping. The base rail shall be constructed with 10-gauge nominal for unit sizes
040 - 090. The following calculation shall determine the required height of the baserail to allow for
adequate drainage. Use the largest pressure to determine base rail height. [(Negative)(Positive) static
pressure (in)] (2) + 4” = required baserail height. Should the unit baserail not be factory supplied at this
height, the contractor is required to supply a concrete housekeeping pad to make up the difference.
H. Construct drain pans from stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to drain connection.
Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall be a minimum of 3’’ above
the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping. Drain connections that protrude from the base rail are
not acceptable. There must be a full 2’’ thickness of insulation under drain pan.
2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION
A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-
drive type housed forward curved fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule.
Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced
by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall be
provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near
access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field. Fan and
motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through
hinged access door.
B. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base that can be
slid out the side of the unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through
hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type
isolators inside cabinetry.
C. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The bearings shall
be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy duty pillow block, self-
aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.
D. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively coated with
lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
E. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed.
Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum of 2 belts shall be
provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F.
for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calculated based on fan brake horsepower.
F. Internal Vibration Isolation: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard vibration isolation
mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 2 inches.
G. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment." Fan motors shall be provided and installed by the unit manufacturer.
1. Enclosure Type: Open Drip Proof.
2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and
connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 73 13 - 4
5. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on unit.
6. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual
equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
7. Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National Electrical
Code requirements.
8. Air handler manufacturer shall provide, mount and wire ABB variable speed drive with electrical
characteristics such as indicated on project schedule and shown on manufacturer's data sheets.
2.4 COIL SECTION
A. General Requirements for Coil Section:
1. Comply with ARI 410.
2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-
place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).
3. Provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across coils.
4. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.
2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION
A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both
sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.
B. Disposable Panel Filters:
1. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
2. Thickness: 2 inches.
3. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 13.
4. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.
5. Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and
with pull and retaining handles.
C. Filter Gage: 2-inch-diameter, minimum, magnehelic filter gauge shall be installed to measure the pressure
drop across the filter.
2.6 DAMPERS
A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for
Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm face velocity through
damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential.
B. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for
HVAC."
C. Electronic Damper Operators:
1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-
V dc, feedback signal.
3. Operator Motors:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 73 13 - 5
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC."
b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-
position action.
c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and
sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings
designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or
feedback potentiometer.
4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x
lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf .
5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque
of 150 in. x lbf.
6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm:
Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm:
Increase running torque by 2.0.
7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear release on
nonspring-return actuators.
D. Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Opposed-blade, galvanized-steel dampers with steel operating rods rotating
in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame and with operating rods
connected with a common linkage. Provide blade gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten
blades to operating rod.
E. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel-blade, galvanized-steel dampers mechanically
fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and
interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.
F. Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately downstream of mixing section.
G. Combination Filter and Mixing Section:
1. Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch-thick, pleated, flat, permanent or throwaway filters.
2. Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly shall mix air to prevent stratification, located immediately
downstream of mixing box.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound
Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation
speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans
for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
C. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to 450 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 73 13 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using restrained spring isolators.
Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation
devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 2 inches.
2. Install galvanized steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric pad.
3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
4. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural
concrete floor.
5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters
used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside
of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with
separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
E. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
F. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
G. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
H. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." Install
shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.
I. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23
Section "Air Duct Accessories."
END OF SECTION 237313
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 81 26 - 1
SECTION 238126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes split-system mini-split air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and
compressor-condenser components.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for
Refrigeration Systems."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air
Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 -
"Construction and System Start-up."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
b. For Parts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. For Labor: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 81 26 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Trane; American Standard Inc.
2. Daikin Applied
3. YORK International Corporation.
4. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.; HVAC Advanced Products Division.
2.2 WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS (3/4 TONS TO 2 TONS)
A. Cabinet:
1. The indoor unit shall have a white, “flat screen” finish.
2. The drain and refrigerant piping shall be accessible from six (6) positions for flexible installation
(right side, right back, and right bottom; and left side, left back, and left bottom.
3. The cabinet shall be supplied with a mounting plate to be installed onto a wall for securely
mounting the cabinet.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Comply with ARI 210/240.
1. The evaporator coil shall be a nonferrous, aluminum fin on copper tube heat exchanger.
2. All tube joints shall be brazed with silver alloy or phoscopper.
3. All coils will be factory pressure tested.
4. A condensate pan shall be provided under the coil with a drain connection.
C. Fan:
1. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly consisting of a direct-driven fan by a single motor.
2. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and operate on a motor with permanent
lubricated bearings.
3. An auto-swing louver for adjustable air flow (vertically) is standard via the wireless remote control
furnished with each system.
4. The indoor fan shall offer a choice of five speeds, plus quiet and auto settings.
D. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
E. Air Filtration Section: The return air filter provided will be a mildew proof, removable and washable filter.
Optional photo catalytic, air purifying filters are available.
F. Control:
1. The unit shall have a backlit, wireless remote infra-red controller capable to operate the system. It
shall have Cooling Operation, Dry Operation and Fan Only Operation.
2. The controller shall consist of an On/Off Power switch, Mode Selector, Fan Setting, Swing Louver,
On/Off Timer Setting, Temperature Adjustment, °C or °F Temperature Display, and Powerful
Operation.
a. On/Off switch powers the system on or off.
b. Mode selector shall operate the system in cool, fan or dry operation
c. Fan setting shall provide five fan speeds, plus quiet and auto settings.
d. Swing louver shall adjust the airflow (horizontal and vertical) blades. On/Off timer is used for
automatically switching the unit on or off.
e. Temperature adjustment allows for the increase or decrease of the desired temperature.
f. Powerful operation allows quick cool down in the desired space to achieve maximum
desired temperature in the shortest allowable time period.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 81 26 - 3
3. The remote control shall perform Fault Diagnostic functions which may be system related, indoor
unit or outdoor unit related depending on the fault code.
4. Temperature range on the remote control shall be 64°F to 90°F in cooling mode.
5. The indoor unit microprocessor has the capability to receive and process commands via return air
temperature and indoor coil temperature sensors enabled by commands from the remote control.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (3/4 TON TO 2 TONS)
A. General: The outdoor unit shall be specifically matched to the corresponding indoor unit size. The
outdoor unit shall be complete factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and
refrigerant controls.
B. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: The outdoor unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall
be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.
2. Compressor:
a. The compressor shall be a Daikin swing inverter-driven compressor.
b. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and four-way reversing valve.
c. The compressor shall have an internal thermal overload.
d. The outdoor unit can operate with a maximum vertical height difference of 66 feet and
overall maximum length of 98 feet without any oil traps or additional components.
3. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
a. The fan shall be a direct drive, propeller type fan.
b. The motor shall be inverter driven, permanently lubricated type bearings, inherent.
c. The fan shall be capable of operating in “silent operation” which lowers the outdoor fan
speed in cool mode.
d. A fan guard is provided on the outdoor unit to prevent contact with fan operation.
e. Airflow shall be horizontal discharge.
4. Coil
a. The outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with corrugated fin tube.
b. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type E1.
c. Refrigerant flow from the condenser will be controlled via a metering device.
5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized,
and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to
building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on mounting per the manufacturer’s
guidelines.
D. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
23 81 26 - 4
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION 238126
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 00 - 1
DIVISIONS 260000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
SECTION TITLE
260010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
262200 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263213 ENGINE GENERATORS
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
264313 TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE
ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 1
SECTION 260010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Basic Requirements: The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make ready for use
complete electrical systems as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
C. Provide and Install: The word "provide" where used on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall mean
"furnish, install, mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". The word "install" where
used on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall mean "mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready
for operation". Perform work required by, and in accordance with, the Contract Documents.
D. Installation: Provide and place in satisfactory condition, ready for proper operation, raceways, wires, cables,
and other material needed for all complete electrical systems required by the Contract Documents.
Additional raceways and wiring shall be provided to complete the installation of the specific equipment
provided. Include auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems. Provide
electrical systems and accessories to comply with the NEC, state and local codes and ordinances. It is the
intent of these Specifications that the electrical systems be suitable in every way for the use intended.
Material and work which is incidental to the work of this Contract shall be provided at no additional cost to
the Contract.
E. Field Connections: Provide field connections to remote equipment and control panels provided under other
Divisions of these Specifications. Provide raceway, wire, and interconnections between equipment,
transmitters, local indicators, and receivers. Provide 120V and low voltage surge protection equipment in
accordance with Section 264313 at equipment as required. Install field connections to "packaged"
equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General: Provide labor, materials, permits, inspections and re-inspection fees, tools, equipment,
transportation, insurance, temporary protection, temporary power and lighting, supervision and incidental
items essential for proper installation and operation of the Electrical systems indicated in the Contract
Documents. Provide materials not specifically mentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are
essential for proper installation and operation of the Electrical systems indicated in the contract documents.
B. Notices: Give notices, file Plans, pay fees, and obtain permits and approvals from authorities having
jurisdiction. Include all fees in the Bid Price.
1.03 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. General: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact locations of Raceway runs,
outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc. The locations of equipment, appliances, fixtures, Raceways,
outlets, boxes and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be
determined and coordinated in the field. The right is reserved to change, without additional cost, the
location of any outlet within the same room or general area before it is permanently installed. Obtain all
information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of interference with other work, proceed as
directed by the Architect.
B. Discrepancies: Notify the Architect of any discrepancies found during construction of the project. The
Architect will provide written instructions as to how to proceed with that portion of work. If a conflict exists
between the Contract Documents and an applicable code or standard, the most stringent requirement shall
apply.
C. Wiring: Each three-phase circuit shall be run in a separate Raceway unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings. Unless otherwise accepted by the Architect, Raceway shall not be installed exposed. Where
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 2
circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings, supports, and boxes shall be provided for a
complete raceway installation.
D. Layout: Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.
Connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance with the accepted shop and
manufacturer's setting drawings.
E. Coordination: Coordinate final equipment locations with drawings or other disciplines. Layout before
installation so that all trades may install equipment in available space. Provide coordination as required for
installation in a neat and workmanlike manner.
1.04 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND HANDLING
A. Coordination: Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final
location. If necessary, ship the equipment in sections of specific sizes to permit the passing through the
necessary areas within the structure.
B. Handling: Equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to be tilted for ease of
passage through restricted areas during transportation, the manufacturer shall be required to brace the
equipment suitably, to insure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.
1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Production: The Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings to maintain and
submit record "As-Built Documents". Label each sheet of the Record Document set with “Project Record
Documents” with company name of the installing contractor in stamped or printed letters. One set shall be
maintained at the site and at all times be accurate, clear, and complete. These drawings shall be available
at all times to the Architect's field representatives.
B. Recording: Record information concurrent with construction progress. Make entries within 24 hours upon
receipt of information. The "As-Built" drawings shall accurately reflect installed electrical work specified or
shown on the Contract Documents.
C. Completion: At the completion of the Work, transfer changes with a colored pencil onto the second set and
submit to the Architect. The "As-Built" drawings shall be made available to the Architect to make the
substantial completion punch list.
D. Final: Upon Contractor’s completion of the Engineer’s final punch list, transfer all “As-Built” conditions and
all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible set of drawings and CAD files. Submit drawings and
CAD disks for review and acceptance. The Contractor shall provide updated disks which include final As-
Built conditions.
1.06 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used:
A/C Air Conditioning
AC Alternating Current
ABV CLG Above Ceiling
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
AF Ampere Frame
AFF Above Finished Floor
AFG Above Finished Grade
AHU Air Handler Unit
AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity
AL Aluminum
AMP Ampere
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASA American Standards Association
AT Ampere Trip
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch
AUX Auxiliary
AWG American Wire Gauge
BC Bare Copper
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 3
BIL Basic Impulse Level
BMS Building Management System
BRKR or BKR Breaker
CAB Cabinet
C Conduit or Raceway
CB Circuit Breaker
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
CKT Circuit
CLEC Clock Equipment Cabinet
CLG Ceiling
CO Conduit or Raceway Only
COAX Coaxial Cable
COND Conductor
CONN Connection
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRT Cathode Ray Terminal (Video display terminal)
CT Current Transformer
CU Copper
CW Cold Water
DC Direct Current
DDC Direct Digital Control
DEG Degree
DISC Disconnect
DO Draw Out
DN Down
DPST Double Pole Single Throw
EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing
EO Electrically Operated
EOL End of Line Resistor
EWC Electric Water Cooler
FAAP Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel
FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel
FCU Fan Coil Unit
FLA Full Load Amperes
FM Factory Mutual
GF Ground Fault
GFCI Ground Fault Circuits Interrupter
GND Ground
HOA Hand-Off-Automatic
HORIZ Horizontal
HP Horsepower
IC Intercom
ICU Intensive Care Unit
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
IMC Intermediate Metallic Raceway
IN Inches
IT Instantaneous Trip
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
JB Junction Box
KCMIL Thousand Circular Mills
KV Kilovolt
KVA Kilo-Volt-Amps
KW Kilowatts
LBS Pounds
LED Light Emitting Diode
LT Light
LTD Long Time Delay
LTT Long Time Trip
LTG Lighting
MAX Maximum
MCB Main Circuit Breaker
MCC Motor Control Center
MCP Motor Circuit Protector
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 4
MIC Microphone
MIN Minimum
MLO Main Lugs Only
MTD Mounted
MTG Mounting
MUX Multiplex (Transponder) Panel
MVA Mega Volt Amps
N Neutral
NC Normally Closed
NEC National Electrical Code
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIC Not in Contract
NF Non Fused
NL Non Linear
NO Number or Normally Open
# Number
Phase0/
OL Overload
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
P Pole
PB Pullbox
PIV Post Indicator Valve
PNL Panel
PR Pair
PWR Power
PF Power Factor
PRI Primary
PT Potential Transformer
PVC Polyvinylchloride
REF Refrigerator
RGC or GRC Rigid Galvanized Raceway
RMS Root-Mean-Square
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RECPT Receptacle
SCA Short Circuit Amps
SD Smoke Detector
SEC Secondary
S/N Solid Neutral
SPKR Speaker
SPST Single Pole Single Throw
SST Solid State Trip
ST Short Time Trip
STD Short Time Delay
SW Switch
SWGR Switchgear
SWBD Switchboard
TEL Telephone
TTB Telephone Terminal Board
TTC Telephone Terminal Cabinet
TVEC Television Equipment Cabinet
TYP Typical
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UON Unless Otherwise Noted
V Volt
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
VSD Variable Speed Drive
W Wire
WP Weatherproof
XFMR Transformer
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 5
1.07 CODES, FEES, AND STANDARDS
A. Application: The codes, standards and practices listed herein generally apply to the entire project and
specification sections. Other codes, standards or practices that are more specific will be referenced within
a particular specification.
B. Requirements: All materials and types of construction covered in the specifications will be required to meet
or exceed applicable standards of manufacturer, testing, performance, and installation according to the
requirements of UL, ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and NEC referenced documents where indicated and the
manufacturer's recommended practices. Requirements indicated on the contract documents that exceed
but are not contrary to governing codes shall be followed.
C. Compliance and Certification: The installation shall comply with the governing state and local codes or
ordinances. The completed electrical installation shall be inspected and certified by applicable agencies
that it is in compliance with codes.
D. Labels: Materials and equipment shall be new and free of defects, and shall be U.L. listed, bear the U.L.
label or be labeled or listed with an approved, nationally recognized Electrical Testing Agency. Where no
labeling or listing service is available or desired for certain types of equipment, test data shall be submitted
to validate that equipment meets or exceeds available standards.
E. Applicability: The codes and standards and practices listed herein, and their respective dates are furnished
as the minimum latest requirements.
1. State of Texas.
2. Dallas County.
3. Grand Prairie.
F. Utility Company: Oncor, Comply with latest utility company regulations.
G. Building Code (with applicable state and local amendments):
1. 2015 International Building Code (IBC) w/ City of Grand Prairie Amendments
2. 2015 International Fire Code (IFC)
3. 2015 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
H. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards
NFPA-70 (2017) National Electrical Code
NFPA-72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
1.08 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK
A. Supervision: Provide one field superintendent who has had a minimum of four (4) years previous successful
experience on projects of comparable sizes, type and complexity. The Superintendent shall be present at
all times when work is being performed. At least one member of the Electrical Contracting Firm shall hold a
State Master Certificate of Competency.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. General: Compare drawings and specifications with those of other trades and report any discrepancies
between them to the Architect. Obtain from the Architect written instructions to make the necessary
changes in any of the affected work. Work shall be installed in cooperation with other Trades installing
interrelated work. Before installation, Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a
manner approved by the Architect.
B. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work connects to or is affected by work of others,
and comply with all requirements affecting this Division. Work required under other divisions, specifications
or drawings to be performed by this Division shall be coordinated with the Contractor and such work
performed at no additional cost to Owner including but not limited to electrical work required for:
1. Door hardware
2. Mechanical Division of the Specifications
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 6
3. Landscape Architect drawings
4. Kitchen equipment
5. Interior design drawings
6. Millwork design drawings and shop drawings
C. Obtain set of Contract Documents from Owner’s Authorized Representative or Contractor for all areas of
work noted above and include all electrical work in bid whether included in Division 26 Contract Documents
or not.
D. Secure approved shop drawings from all required disciplines and verify final electrical characteristics before
roughing power feeds to any equipment. When electrical data on approved shop drawings differs from that
shown or called for in Construction Documents, make adjustments to the wiring, disconnects, and branch
circuit protection to match that required for the equipment installed.
E. Damage from interference caused by inadequate coordination shall be corrected at no additional cost to the
Owner.
F. Adjustments: Locations of raceway and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work with
interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact routing and location of systems prior to
fabrication or installation.
G. Priorities: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For example,
plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have
the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed.
H. Modifications: Offsets and changes of direction in raceway systems shall be made to maintain proper
headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. Provide elbows, boxes, etc.,
as required to allow offsets and changes to suit job conditions.
I. Replacement: Work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of other
system components provided under this Contract requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Raceway
shall be arranged in a manner to clear the openings of swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling
tiles.
J. Layout: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs and locations of
raceway and equipment, and not necessarily showing required offsets, details and accessories and
equipment to be connected. Work shall be accurately laid out with other Trades to avoid conflicts and to
obtain a neat and workmanlike installation, which will afford maximum accessibility for operation,
maintenance and headroom.
K. Contract Conflicts: Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Trade provides items such
as starters, disconnects, flow switches, etc. such conflicts shall be coordinated between the divisions
involved. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all work shall be provided complete as one bid
price.
L. Drawing Conflicts: Where drawing details, plans or specification requirements are in conflict and where
sizes of the same item run are shown to be different within the contract documents, the most stringent
requirement shall be included in the Contract. Systems and equipment called for in the specification or as
shown on the drawings shall be provided as if it was required by both the drawings and specifications. Prior
to ordering or installation of any portion of work, which appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought
to Architect's attention for direction as to what is to be provided.
M. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate the exact required location of floor outlets, floor ducts,
floor stub-ups, etc. with Owner’s Authorized Representative and Designer (and receive their approval) prior
to rough-in. Locations indicated in Contract Documents are only approximate locations.
N. The Contract Documents describe specific sizes of switches, breakers, fuses, Raceways, conductors, motor
starters and other items of wiring equipment. These sizes are based on specific items of power consuming
equipment (heaters, lights, motors for fans, compressors, pumps, etc.). Coordinate the requirements of
each load with each load’s respective circuitry shown and with each load’s requirements as noted on its
nameplate data and manufacturer’s published electrical criteria. Adjust circuit breaker, fuse, Raceway, and
conductor sizes to meet the actual requirements of the equipment being provided and installed and change
from single point to multiple points of connection (or vice versa) to meet equipment requirements. Changes
shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 7
O. Working Clearances: Minimum working clearances about electrical equipment shall be as referenced in the
applicable edition NEC Article 110, and shall include equipment installed in ceiling spaces.
1.10 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
A. Refer to the following sections for Product Options and Substitutions:
1. Section 01 6200 – Product Options: Product options and substitutions – Substitutions Permitted.
2. Section 01 6213 – Product Substitution Procedures: Substitution Procedures during bidding and
after bidding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed as acceptable each shall
be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design selection but each must meet all specification
requirements. Where a manufacturer's model number is listed, this model shall set the standard of quality
and performance required. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to
Engineer's review and acceptance. Where manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall
be submitted for acceptance. No substitutions are permitted.
B. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or government
standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate that the product complies with the
referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer, Contractor shall submit supporting test data to
substantiate compliance.
C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturer's, materials, and
equipment described in the Contract Documents.
D. Space Requirements: Equipment or optional equipment shall conform to established space requirements
within the project. Equipment which does not meet space requirements, shall be replaced at no additional
expense to the Contract. Modifications of related systems shall be made at no additional expense to the
Contract. Submit modifications to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance.
2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. General: Shop drawings shall be submitted for every item listed within the Submittals section each
individual specification section. One copy shall be submitted to the engineer prior to ordering equipment.
Refer to Basis of approval paragraph.
B. Responsibility: It is the Contractors responsibility to provide material in accordance with the plans and
specifications. Material not provided in accordance with the plans and specifications shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractors expense.
C. Official Record: The shop drawing submittal shall become the official record of the materials to be installed.
If materials are installed which do not correspond to the record submittal they shall be removed from the
project without any additional cost or delays in construction completion.
D. Information: The shop drawing record submittal shall include the following information to the extent
applicable to the particular item;
1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.
2. Standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other
organizations, including the type, size, or other designation.
3. Dimensioned plan, sections, and elevations showing means for mounting, raceway connections, and
grounding, and showing layout of components.
4. Materials and finish specifications, including paints.
5. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.
6. Internal wiring diagram indicating connections to components and the terminals for external
connections.
7. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, operation, and maintenance.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 8
8. Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts.
9. Provide 1/2” = 1’-0” enlarged electrical room layout drawings for all electrical rooms. All equipment
shall be indicated at actual size of equipment being provided. All dimensions and required working
clearances shall be shown.
E. Preparation: Prior to submittal, shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and contract requirements.
Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop
drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list
discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be
returned to Contractor unreviewed.
F. Basis of Review: Approval is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and
general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Contractor is responsible for
quantities, dimensions, fabrication processes, and construction techniques.
G. Responsibility: The responsibility that dimensions are confirmed and correlated with proper coordination of
other trades shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The responsibility and the necessity of
providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings which may not be
indicated on the shop drawings shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible for any delays in job progress occurring directly or indirectly from late submissions or re-
submissions of shop drawings, product data, or samples.
H. Ordering Equipment: No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineer has officially
received the shop drawings record submittal and has formally released the Contractor for submittal
requirements.
I. Brochure Requirements: Submit Technical Information Brochures at the start of construction or no later
than 30 days after Award of the Contract. Each brochure shall consist of an adequately sized, hardcover,
3-ring binder for 8-1/2" X 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on end of brochure.
When one binder is not enough to adequately catalog all data, an additional binder shall be submitted.
J. Brochure Contents: First sheet in the brochure shall be a photocopy of the Electrical Index pages in these
specifications. Second sheet shall be a list of Project Addresses for this project. Third sheet shall list
Project Information. Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specification
reference number and typed index for each section in the Electrical Schedule. Technical Information
consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be inserted in the brochure in proper order on
all items specified and shown on drawings. At the end of the brochure, provide and insert a copy of the
specifications for this Division and all addenda applicable to this Division.
K. Contractor's Review: Review the brochures before submitting to the Engineer. No request for payment
shall be considered until the brochure has been reviewed, stamped and submitted for review.
L. Cost: Submit cost breakdown on work in the Technical Information Brochures. The cost of material and
labor for each item shall be indicated. The cost of fittings and incidentals are not required.
M. Title Drawings: Title drawings to include identification of project and names of Architect-Engineer, Engineer,
Contractors, and/or supplier, data, number sequentially and indicate in general;
1. Fabrication and Erection dimensions.
2. Arrangements and sectional views.
3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with other work.
4. Kinds of materials and finishes.
5. Descriptive names of equipment.
6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract.
7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2-1/2 inches, near title block (for Engineer's stamp
imprint).
8. In order to facilitate review of shop drawings, they shall be noted, indicating by cross-reference the
contract drawings, notes, and specification paragraph numbers where items occur in the contract
documents.
9. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.
N. Technical Data: Submit technical data verifying that the item submitted complies with the requirements of
the specifications. Technical data shall include manufacturer's name and model number, dimensions,
weights, electrical characteristics, and clearances required. Indicate optional equipment and changes from
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 9
the standard item as called for in the specifications. Provide drawings, or diagrams, dimensioned and in
correct scale, covering equipment, showing arrangement of components and overall coordination.
O. Same Manufacturer: In general, relays, contactors, starters, motor control centers, switchboards,
panelboards, dry type transformers, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, manual motor starter switches,
etc., shall be supplied and manufactured by the same manufacturer. This requirement shall apply to same
type of electrical components specified in other Divisions.
2.03 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Each item of equipment or material shall be manufactured by a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturer of the type and size of equipment, shall be suitable for the environment in which it is to be
installed, shall be approved for its purpose, environment, and application, and shall bear the UL label.
B. Installation Requirements: Each item of equipment or material shall be installed in accordance with
instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, however, the methods shall not be less stringent
than specified herein.
C. Required Accessories: Provide all devices and materials, such as expansion bolts, foundation bolts,
screws, channels, angles, and other attaching means, required to fasten enclosures, raceways, and other
electrical equipment and materials to be mounted on structures which are existing or new.
D. Protection: Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protected against
mechanical injury or damage by the elements. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If
apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost or time extension to the
Contract. If apparatus has been subject to possible injury, it shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried out and put
through tests as directed by the Manufacturer and Engineer, or shall be replaced, if directed by the
Engineer, at no additional cost to the Contract.
2.04 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. General: Electrical items shall be identified as specified in the Contract Documents. Such identification
shall be in addition to the manufacturer's nameplates and shall serve to identify the item's function and the
equipment or system, which it serves or controls. Refer to Identification Section of the specifications for
additional information.
2.05 CONCRETE PADS
A. General: Provide reinforced concrete pads for floor mounted electrical equipment. Unless otherwise noted,
pads shall be nominal four (4) inches high and shall exceed dimensions of equipment being set on them,
including future sections, by six (6) inches on all sides, except when equipment is flush against a wall, then
the side or sides against the wall shall be flush with the equipment. Chamfer top edges 1/2". Trowel
surfaces smooth. Reinforce pads with #5 reinforcing bars at 24" centers each way, unless specifically
detailed on drawings.
2.06 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
A. General: Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. shall have a factory-applied finish or shall
be painted as accepted by Engineer. Raceways and fittings, where allowed to be installed surface
mounted, shall be painted to match the finish on which it was installed. Paint shall be in accordance with
other applicable sections of these specifications.
2.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Core Drilling: The Contractor shall be responsible for core drilling as required for work under this section,
but in no case shall the Contractor cut into or weld onto any structural element of the project without the
written approval of the Architect.
B. Cutting and Patching: Cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided as specified in the
contract documents. Cutting and patching shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Upon
completion, the patched area shall match adjacent surfaces.
C. Openings and Sleeves: Locate openings required for work performed under this section. Provide sleeves,
guards or other accepted methods to allow passage of items installed under this section.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 10
D. Roof Penetration: Provide roofer with pitch pans, fittings, etc., required for electrical items which penetrate
the roof. Roof penetrations are to be waterproofed in such a manner that roofing guarantees are fully in
force. Roof penetrations shall be coordinated with other Trades to ensure that roof warranty is not
invalidated.
2.08 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS
A. Sleeves: Provide sleeves for Raceways penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate necessary slots for
electrical work and form before concrete is poured. Watertight sleeves shall be line seal type WS. Fire
rated partition sleeves shall be mild steel. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC or galvanized rigid steel
unless specifically noted otherwise. Size shall be one standard diameter larger than pipe being installed or
of a larger diameter to below 1/4" minimum clearance.
B. Forms: Provide boxed out forms for Raceway penetrations only where allowed by the Architect. Fill opening
after Raceway installation, with equivalent material.
2.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Owner’s Representative, to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and
Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems and equipment provided. The Contractor shall make all
arrangements, via the Architect, as to whom the instructions are to be given in the operation of the systems
and the period of time in which they are to be given. The Architect shall be completely satisfied that the
Owner’s Representative has been thoroughly and completely instructed in the proper operation of all
systems and equipment before final payment is made. If the Architect determines that complete and
thorough instructions have not been given by the Contractor to the Owner's Representative, then the
Contractor shall be directed by the Architect to provide whatever instructions are necessary until the intent
of this paragraph of the Specification has been complied with.
B. Submittals: Submit to the Architect for approval five (5) typed sets, bound neatly in loose-leaf binders, of
instructions for the installation, operation, care and maintenance of equipment and systems, including
instructions for the ordering and stocking of spare parts for equipment installed under this contract. The
lists shall include part number and suggested suppliers. Each set shall also include an itemized list of
component parts that should be kept on hand and where such parts can be purchased.
C. Information Requirements: Information shall indicate possible problems with equipment and suggested
corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for each type of equipment. Each section shall be clearly
divided from the other sections. A sub index for each section shall also be provided.
D. Instructions: The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by the Architect and include but
not limited to the following:
1. Introduction:
a. Explanation of Manual and its use.
b. Summary description of the Electrical Systems.
c. Purpose of systems.
2. System:
a. Detailed description of all systems.
b. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other exhibits.
3. Operations:
a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all phases of operation for all
portions of the systems, including start up, shutdown and balancing. Include posted
instruction charts.
4. Maintenance:
a. Parts list and part numbers.
b. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's recommendations for preventive
maintenance.
c. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components.
d. Instructions for testing each type of part.
e. Recommended list of on-hand spare parts.
f. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire systems.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 11
g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes.
5. Manufacturer's Literature:
a. Complete listing for all parts.
b. Names, addresses and telephone numbers.
c. Care and operation.
d. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins, technical data, certified
performance charts and other literature with the model actually furnished to be clearly and
conspicuously identified.
e. Internal wiring diagrams and Engineering data sheets for all items and/or equipment furnished
under each Contract.
f. Guarantee and warranty data.
2.10 SERVICE AND METERING
A. Company: The utility company serving this project is Oncor which will be referred to as the Utility Company
herein.
B. Service: Make arrangements with the power company for obtaining a complete service. Pay charges and
provide labor and material for the service. Service shall be obtained at 120/208 volts from the Utility
Company. Provide underground cables and Raceways for incoming services from the utility's pad mounted
transformer to distribution equipment. Provide Utility Company approved meter socket and empty 1-1/2”
Raceway from transformer secondary bushings to meter location.
C. Fees: Contact the Utility Company to determine if any fees, charges or costs will be due the Company, as
required for temporary power, permanent power, installations, hook-ups, etc. This fee, charge or cost shall
be included in the bid price.
D. Payment: Pay for required licenses, fees and inspections. Include costs in the proposed construction cost
submission. These costs shall include but not be limited to applicable taxes, permits, necessary notices,
certificates and costs required to obtain same.
E. Codes: Install a complete system in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and
the latest regulations of governing local, State, County and other applicable codes, including the Utility
Company requirements.
F. Provide transformer pad per Utility Company requirements.
2.11 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. Capacity: Provide capacity from new temporary service. Make arrangements with the Owner for temporary
service and pay all related expenses. Temporary light and power shall be provided constantly during the
project dependent upon Owner's safety requirements.
B. Capacity: Make arrangements with the Owner for existing temporary service and pay all related expenses.
Temporary light and power shall be provided constantly during the project dependent upon Owner's safety
requirements.
C. Lighting: Temporary light shall be based on one 200 watt lamp covering each 1,000 square foot of floor
area in the building. Each room 100 square foot and over shall have a minimum of one 100-watt lamp with
guards. Provide power for motors up to 3/4 horsepower only. Provisions are to be made for electric
welders, if required.
D. Outlets: Provide outlets located at convenient points so that extension cords of not over fifty (50) feet will
reach work requiring artificial light or power.
E. Other Connections: Contractors of other trades shall furnish their own cords and sockets, as may be
required for their work and shall also pay for cost of temporary wiring of construction offices and shanties
used by them.
F. New Fixtures: Permanently installed lighting fixtures may be used for temporary lighting at the Contractor's
option with the provision that cool white lamps for fluorescent, clear lamps for incandescent and marked
temporary for other types shall be installed. At job completion, lamps shall be replaced with permanent
lamps specified.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 12
G. Wiring: Temporary electrical work shall be furnished and installed in conformity with the National Electrical
Code and in accordance with the requirements of the local ordinances and shall be maintained in a
workmanlike manner throughout their entire construction period and shall be removed after installation of
the permanent electrical systems. Extension cords shall be GFCI protected or shall be fed from GFCI
circuit breakers.
H. Payment: The Contractor will pay for the cost of energy consumed by all trades. Any temporary wiring of a
special nature for light and power required other than mentioned above shall be paid for by the Contractor
using same.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike and timely
manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of the requirements of the Contract
Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods and craftsmanship needed to produce a quality level of
workmanship. Personnel who install materials and equipment shall be qualified by training and experience
to perform their assigned tasks.
B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-quality appearance and
function, conforming to applicable standards of building system construction, and exhibiting a high degree
of quality and proficiency which is judged by the Architect as equivalent or better than that ordinarily
produced by qualified industry tradesmen.
C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of material and equipment
who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or unqualified to perform the assigned tasks.
Material and equipment installations not in compliance with the Contract Documents, or installed with
substandard workmanship and not acceptable to the Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified
craftsmen, at no change in the contract price.
3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP
A. Protection and Restoration: Suitably protect equipment provided under this Division during construction.
Restore damaged surfaces and items to "like new" condition before a request for substantial completion
inspection.
B. Handling: Materials shall be properly protected and Raceway openings shall be temporarily closed by the
Contractor to prevent obstruction and damage. Post notice prohibiting the use of systems provided under
this Contract, prior to completion of work and acceptance of systems by the Owner's representative. The
Contractor shall take precautions to protect his materials from damage and theft.
C. Safeguards: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards for the prevention of
accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials, equipment or systems provided under this
contract.
D. Cleanup: Keep the job site free from debris and rubbish. Remove debris and rubbish from the site and
leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis.
3.03 SYSTEMS GUARANTEE
A. General: Provide a one-year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner for any
defective workmanship or material, which has been provided under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for
a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the System. The guarantee shall include
lamps, for ninety days after date of Substantial Completion of the System. Explain the provisions of
guarantee to the Owner at the "Demonstration of Completed System".
3.04 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. General: Work shall be completed, and forms and other information shall be submitted for acceptance one
week prior to the request for final observation of the installation.
3.05 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 13
A. Comply with special requirements imposed at site by Owner. This may include badging of employees,
prohibition of smoking, special working hours, or special working conditions.
END OF SECTION
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 00 10 - 14
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION MEMO
Note to Contractor: Do not submit this form at the time Technical Information Brochure is submitted. Submit five
copies of information listed below for checking at least one week before scheduled completion of the building. After
information has been accepted and inserted in each brochure, give the Owner a Demonstration of the Completed
Electrical Systems and have the Owner sign five copies of this form. Provide one signed copy for each brochure.
After this has been done, a written request for a final inspection of the System shall be made.
Re: ___________________________________________________________________________
(Name of Project)
___________________________________________________________________________
(Division Number and Name)
This memo is for the information of all concerned that the Owner has been given a Demonstration of the Completed
Electrical Systems on the work covered under this Division. This conference consisted of the system operation, a
tour on which all major items of equipment were pointed out, and the following items were given to the Owner;
(a) Owner's copy of Technical Information Brochure containing approved submittal sheets on all items, including the
following; (To be inserted in the Technical Information Brochure after the correct tab).
(1) Maintenance Information published by manufacturer on equipment items.
(2) Printed Warranties by manufacturers on equipment items.
(3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor.
(4) Check-out Memo on equipment by manufacturer's representative.
(5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items.
(6) Explanation of the one-year guarantee on the system.
(b) "As-Built" conditions as described in the record drawing specifications.
(c) A demonstration of the System in Operation and of the maintenance procedures which shall be required.
__________________________________________________________________________
(Name of General Contractor)
By: __________________________________________________________________________
(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)
__________________________________________________________________________
(Name of SubContractor)
By: __________________________________________________________________________
(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)
Brochure, Instruction, Prints, Demonstration & Instruction in Operation Received:
____________________________________________________________
(Name of Owner)
By: ____________________________________________________________
(Authorized Signature, Title, Date)
cc: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Sub Contractor and General Contractor
(List names as stated in cc: above)
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the
following:
1.Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. Alpha Wire.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Encore Wire Corporation.
5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
6. Southwire Incorporated.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 19 - 2
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class
for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway.
G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-
mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 19 - 3
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
I. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
J. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-
resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and
larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 19 - 4
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice
11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations after remedial action.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features
specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1. Test wells.
2. Ground rods
3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals:
1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells and grounding
connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B.
a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within
specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.
b. Include recommended testing intervals.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 2
nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
1.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. General: Provide a grounding electrode system, as described in NEC 250, as specified herein and as
indicated on plans.
B. Ground Field / Ground Rods: The ground field shall consist of three 20 ft long vertically driven ground rods
arranged in a triangular pattern spaced 20 feet apart. Additional ground rods shall be added as necessary
to achieve the desired resistance.
C. Main Metallic Water Pipe: The building’s main metallic underground water piping shall be utilized as a
grounding electrode, provided the metal pipe is installed in direct contact with the earth for a minimum of
10 feet. Bond the main metallic water service within 5 ft. of the entrance of the water pipe into the building.
D. Building Steel: The building steel shall be utilized as a grounding electrode, provided the steel is in direct
contact with the earth or is otherwise effectively grounded.
E. Rebar: In concrete buildings, provide bond to rebar in concrete.
F. Resistance: Grounding electrode resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. Overall resistance of the entire
grounding electrode system shall not exceed 5 ohms. Provide additional grounding electrodes as required
to meet this value.
1.7 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: A main grounding electrode conductor, bare copper, sized per NEC,
shall be run in PVC conduit from main service equipment to the grounding electrodes. This conductor shall
also be bonded to the following:
1. Telecommunications service ground within 20’ of the electrical service.
2. Gas and other interior metal piping – refer to NEC.
1.8 SEPARATELY DERIVED GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Description: Provide a separately derived grounding system where indicated herein and as required by
the National Electrical Code. Bond neutral and ground busses together.
B. Services: Provide a separately derived grounding system for all building electrical services and step-down
transformers.
1.9 BONDING AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Description of System: In general, all electrical equipment (metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards,
etc.) shall be bonded together with a green insulated copper system grounding conductor in accordance
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 3
with specific rules of Article 250 of the NEC Equipment grounding conductors through the raceway system
shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from panel
grounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor
run throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. Grounding
conductor shall be included in total conduit fill when determining conduit sizes, even though not included or
shown on drawings.
C. Light Poles: All exterior light poles shall have their enclosures grounded directly to a separate driven
ground at the light pole in addition to the building ground connection, via the circuit equipment ground
conductor.
D. Bushings: Provide insulated grounding bushings on all metallic feeder conduits terminated within
panelboards, switchboards or enclosed overcurrent devices. Provide insulated grounding bushings on all
branch circuit conduits where concentric knockouts are used.
E. Connection to Other Systems: Provide all required grounding and bonding connections as specified herein
and as required by the National Electrical Code.
F. The existing grounding electrode system to be added to using methods allowed by the National Electrical
Code in order to achieve measured ground resistances listed in Part 3. D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable
Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches
wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;
1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inchesin cross section, with 9/32-inch
(7.14-mm) holes space 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL
891 for use in switchboards, 600V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000V.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used
and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two
bolts.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 4
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials
being joined and installation conditions.
D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals,
and long barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bar bus.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No.
6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at
least 24 inches below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with
isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of
green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of
doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.
E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by
NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 5
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical
devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct
electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70,
provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.
1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG
minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each
service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.
2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on
a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.
3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
D. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or
required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,
impact, or damage.
B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when
interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning
protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use
bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise
indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each
other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the
service grounding electrode conductor.
D. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground
rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.
E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where
routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is
required, use a bolted clamp.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 6
F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp
connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange.
Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of
fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans,
blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct
connections to achieve continuity.
H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at
intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
3.5 LABELING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction
signs. The label or its text shall be green.
B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding
electrode conductor where exposed.
1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the
facility manager."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical
connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is
specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Make tests
at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and
without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and
other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of
tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 26 - 7
include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe
measures taken to improve test results.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly
and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 29 - 1
SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and
its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and
connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or
imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 29 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied
according to MFMA-4.
5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types
and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs
shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors
or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and
bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports
to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,
steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 29 - 3
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and
plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and
systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC,
and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified
design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and
smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for
fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 29 - 4
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by
openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be
adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design
load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical
items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise
indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners
on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers
and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use
for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and
other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal
supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support
and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than
supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement
requirements are specified in Division 03 Section.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 29 - 5
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of
field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
4. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
2. Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface
pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving
communications systems.
3. Division 28 Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways,
innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment
details.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common
supports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company
5. O-Z/Gedney
6. Picoma Industries
7. Republic Conduit
8. Robroy Industries
9. Southwire Company
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation
11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation
12. Wheatland Tube Company
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.
2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: compression.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping
sleeves protecting threaded joints.
H. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in
conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from
corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
3. Arnco Corporation
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.
6. Condux International, Inc.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 3
7. Electri-Flex Company
8. Kraloy
9. Lamson & Sessions: Carlon Electrical Products
10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
11. RACO; a Hubbell Company
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
E. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
F. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively,
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Adalet
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds
3. EGS/Appleton Electric
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman
7. Hubbell Incorporated
8. Kraloy
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
10. Mono-Systems, Inc.
11. O-Z/Gedney
12. RACO; Hubbell
13. Robroy Industries
14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company
15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation
17. Wiremold/Legrand
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in
wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 4
F. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: sheet metal.
2. Type: Semi-adjustable.
3. Shape: Rectangular.
4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular.
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet
boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the
maximum allowable weight.
I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.
1. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
K. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with
gasketed cover.
L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
M. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
N. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
O. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with
flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
P. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,
finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 5
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined
in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate,
bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.
1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or “TELECOM”.
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure,
fixed installation in enclosure wall.
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers
of polymer concrete.
1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or “TELECOM”.
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure,
fixed installation in enclosure wall.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in
institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 6
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid teel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of
conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and
fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of
coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings
or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70
limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install
horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring
conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install
conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. A. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where
at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to
reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each
specific location.
5. Change from GRC to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC before rising above floor.
J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 7
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an
enclosure.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's
written instructions.
L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect
conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or
cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on
1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding
bushings on service conduits.
N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand
tight plus 1/4 turn more.
O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the
locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide
to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than
200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground
raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
R. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed
sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover
plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.
S. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are
between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the
following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
T. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
U. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change
may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the
following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of
straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 8
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to
manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install
conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
V. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit
for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated,
give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise
indicated.
X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install
box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection
between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.
Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical
channel.
Z. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or
mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Consolidate boxes where possible.
BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as
specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit
run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature
changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum
supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make
final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified
in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-up at poles and equipment and at building entrances
through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of
elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 33 - 9
from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on
terminations at equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits buy a
minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.
7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting
conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch
sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other
enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.
E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of
enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and
seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 44 - 1
SECTION 260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-
resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating
items.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet;
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-
fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 44 - 2
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger
than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product
by one of the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. CALPICO, Inc.
c. Metraflex Company (The).
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Proco Products, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab
or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product
by one of the following:
a. Presealed Systems.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or
floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 44 - 3
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade
indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that
are not fire rated.
2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in
place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and
Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate
for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between
sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while
curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable
unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install
sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of
walls. Deburr after cutting.
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished
floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 44 - 4
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into
building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material
and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position
waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 1
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label
printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other
Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and
29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where
devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for
each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on a white field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for
each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-
resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches
wide.
2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate
underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to
acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS
CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
C. Tag:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 3
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the
utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Thickness: 4 mils.
3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft..
4. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi.
2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured
for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS
MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
3. Arc Flash: Provide permanent warning labels on all electrical switchboards, switchgear, electrical
panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers, to warn personnel of potential electric
arc flash hazards per NEC 110.16. The Owner shall determine the potential for arc flash hazard
level in accordance with NFPA 70E and OSHA.
2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and
1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter
height shall be 3/8 inch.
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or
equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and
UV-resistant seal for label.
2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates
1. Provide engraving phenolic plastic laminate, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with 1/16
inch thick lines with square standard pica lettering and wording as specified herein.
a. Black face with white core plies (letter color) for normal systems
b. Red with white letters for fire alarm
2. Punch for mechanical fastening, except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
3. Material thickness shall be 1/16 inch. Titles shall be 1/2 inch high and all other lettering shall be 1/4
inch high.
4. Provide beveled edge in order to eliminate sharp corners.
5. Provide self-tapping stainless steel round head screws. Provide contact type permanent adhesive
where screws cannot or shall not penetrate the substrate. Adhesive nameplate shall be
permanently installed.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 4
2.9 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws
with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.11 ELECTRICAL COVER PLATES
A. Electrical outlet cover plates shall be circuit breaker identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identifications products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the
location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in
straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type.
H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line
warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of
multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 5
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch-wide
black stripes on 10-inchcenters over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is
12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-high black
letters on 20-inchcenters. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in
contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the
building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of all
systems with colors indicated in the wiring system legend. For all power circuits, indicate the panel &
circuit number and system voltage on the box cover.
C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes,
manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for
ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities
having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum
distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to
avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-
film-type labels.
E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.
F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal
connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points.
Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 6
G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to
live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated.
Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metal-backed,
butyrate warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where
instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background
with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is
consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to
disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,
terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication,
signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label;
where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing
from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate
mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
2. Equipment to be labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard
manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine
label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer,
feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
f. Enclosed switches.
g. Enclosed Controllers.
h. Push-button stations.
i. Power transfer equipment.
j. Contactors.
k. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
l. Power-generating units.
m. Light switch cover plate.
n. Receptacle cover plate.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 05 53 - 7
END OF SECTION 260553
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 1
SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Time switches.
2. Photoelectric switches.
3. Indoor occupancy sensors.
4. Lighting contactors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and
manual light switches.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.
1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. Invensys Controls.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
7. Lutron Electronics, Inc.
B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
2. Contact Configuration: SPST.
3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.
4. Basic Program:
a. Eight on-off set points for all relays in controller on a 24-hour and astronomic schedule and
an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays and a contact
input for photocell operation.
5. Digital Program:
a. Each relay is individually programmable via digital 24-hour and astronomic timeclock. 7
daily schedules, up to 500 events total for system and holiday schedules that override the
weekly operation on selected dates.
b. Contact input for signal from BMS or photocell programmable to any function.
c. After-hours mode of operation set to Flash-warn select relays at a programmable time,
followed by shutting off all interior lighting at that select time unless a button press is made
on the local controls overriding the after-hours mode. After a programmable time delay (up
to 3 hours per IECC), system will flash-warn lights left on again until end of after-hours
mode.
6. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on
selected channels.
7. Astronomic Time: Selected channels.
8. Automatic daylight savings time changeover with administrator-level programmable adjustment as
to the beginning and end of daylight savings time without need for firmware upgrades or new parts.
9. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
5. Lutron Electronics, Inc.
6. PLC Multipoint.
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, complying
with UL 773.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 3
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within
that range.
3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.
2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
9. RAB Lighting.
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
12. Watt Stopper.
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a
separate power pack. Wireless sensors with minimum 10-year battery life.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn
them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range
of 1 to 15 minutes.
3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is
powered from the power pack. For wireless type sensors, RF signal transmitted to wall switches,
dimmers, or relays operating the connected load.
4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at
120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 100-mA, Class 2 power source, as
defined by NFPA 70.
5. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Wireless sensors to
be mounted directly to hard ceiling via drywall screws or metal tie for acoustic ceilings.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door or
on rear of sensor.
6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of
sensor.
7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting
level is present.
9. Relay output: Provide where required for signaling of HVAC controller or security sensor.
10. Vacancy only mode: Provide appropriate controls to ensure sensor will not turn lights on when
someone enters room, but will turn lights off when they leave in areas designated as vacancy only
or where required by law or local ordinance (i.e. California Title 24).
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 4
C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human
body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when
mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high
ceiling.
D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected
ultrasonic energy.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in
either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft.
when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000
sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq.
ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-
foot-high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.
E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic
detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions
is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human
body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and
weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate
speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000
sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
9. RAB Lighting.
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
12. Watt Stopper.
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a
single gang switchbox.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 5
2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.
3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-
W incandescent.
C. Wall-Switch Sensor:
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a
minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.
2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.
3. Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off."
4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; dual-technology type.
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The
switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the
sensor.
6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space
and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3. Eaton Corporation.
4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total Lighting
Control.
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
6. Lutron Electronics, Co., Inc.
B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination-type lighting contactors with fusible
switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic
distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of
installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates
ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 6
suppression systems, and partition assemblies. Install per manufacturer’s instructions and reference
warnings and installation guidelines for best practices.
B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do
not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne
vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Division Wiring Method: Comply with 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors
according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and
outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests
and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 09 23 - 7
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 6months from date of Substantial Completion, provide
on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to one visit to
Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time
delay to suit Owner's operations. Set vacancy or occupancy mode per owner’s preference.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
END OF SECTION 260923
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 22 00 - 1
SECTION 262200
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up
to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and
components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems."
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 22 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.
2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp.
3. Controlled Power Company.
4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.
6. General Electric Company.
7. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc.
8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.
9. Micron Industries Corp.
10. Myers Power Products, Inc.
11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
12. Sola/Hevi-Duty.
13. Square D; Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
E. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 22 00 - 3
G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full
capacity.
I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below
normal full capacity.
J. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C
rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
K. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
L. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for
nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to
designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
M. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic
shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
N. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate. Nameplates are specified in Division 26
Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written
instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 22 00 - 4
a. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
b. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
c. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined
as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3
percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.
B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus
5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
END OF SECTION 262200
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 1
SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage
suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'
technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device
included in panelboards.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test reports that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 2
C. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that
allows adjustments.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories
from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards
including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated
maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating
(250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 3
operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during
the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, unusual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates
walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping,
encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for
attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with
enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6. Finishes:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 4
a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and
other components.
7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. Provide multiple
copies to maintenance.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors;
bonded to box.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite
end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same
end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more
main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required
for future installation of devices.
H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available
at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on
circuit breakers.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 5
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on
circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical
release for removal.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent
units.
E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same
short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.
F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with
ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available
fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-
breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-
adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable
electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 6
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than
NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-
mA trip).
6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-
mA trip).
7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole
configuration.
8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting
loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with functions
and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26
Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated
voltage.
g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in off
position.
h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard.
Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
B. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be
ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on
grade.
G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
H. Comply with NECA 1.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 24 16 - 7
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs
complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations.
Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories
are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate
complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 262416
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 1
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Wall-box motion sensors.
3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4. Solid-state fan speed controls.
5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
6. Communications outlets.
7. Cord and plug sets.
8. Pendant cord-connector devices.
9. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
2. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
3. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
4. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
5. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
6. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label
warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 2
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from
a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates
from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers'
names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and
UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,
UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 3
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
c. Hubbell; GF5352A.
d. Leviton; 6898
2.4 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-
20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand,
matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.
2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment
being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-
insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible
frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.
C. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to
adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not
greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2.7 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V.
b. Hubbell; WS1277.
c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID.
d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000.
e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 4
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree
field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..
B. Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V.
b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID.
3. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 180-
degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..
C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP.
b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW.
c. Pass & Seymour; WA1001.
d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree
field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft..
D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.
b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW.
c. Watt Stopper (The); DT-200.
3. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V,
adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of
1200 sq. ft..
E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP.
b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW.
c. Pass & Seymour; HS1001.
d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 150-degree
field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft..
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 5
F. Exterior Occupancy Sensors:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Leviton; PS200-10.
b. Watt Stopper (The); EW-100-120.
3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, weatherproof, adjustable time delay up to 15
minutes, 180-degree field of view, and 110-foot detection range. Minimum switch rating: 1000-W
incandescent, 500-VA fluorescent.
2.8 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3560-6.
b. Leviton; 40649.
3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1
complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.
B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3562.
b. Leviton; 40595.
3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying
with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.
2.9 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled
for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast
aluminum with lockable cover.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 6
2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: , die-cast aluminum with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for
UTP cable.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials
over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against
outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint,
and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the
joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or
nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300,
without pigtails.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that
they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible
moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 27 26 - 7
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor
tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG
pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting
screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes
when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers'
device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with
grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or
engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or
tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker,
poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct
circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 28 16 - 1
SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMEMTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nonfusible switches.
2. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 28 16 - 2
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower
rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for
copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply
with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250,
Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary
blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 28 16 - 3
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
END OF SECTION 262816
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 1
SECTION 263213
ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following
features:
1. Diesel engine.
2. Unit-mounted cooling system.
3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring.
4. Outdoor enclosure.
B. See Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate
automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator and accessory indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the
following:
1. Thermal damage curve for generator.
2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components
specified.
2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate
requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration
isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail
fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
Include base weights.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.
2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to
those tested on prototype unit.
3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet
performance criteria for sensitive loads.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 2
4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with
specified requirements.
5. Report of sound generation.
6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.
7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include
part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.
2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each.
3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of
business to Project site.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of
engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service
center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a
nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-
site testing specified in Part 3.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a
single manufacturer.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F. Comply with ASME B15.1.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 3
G. Comply with NFPA 37.
H. Comply with NFPA 70.
I. Comply with NFPA 99.
J. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
K. Comply with UL 2200.
L. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
M. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise
level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine
exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental
conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations for remote radiators.
These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by
skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to
check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance
as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and
supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Caterpillar; Engine Div.
2. Kohler Co.; Generator Division.
3. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
4. Detroit Diesel.
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation;
and have lifting attachments.
1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate
location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.
C. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated.
2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.
3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and
model and serial number of component.
D. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:
1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet
specified performance.
a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract
Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.
2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full
load.
3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band
within three seconds.
4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full
load.
5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated
load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no
hunting or surging of speed.
6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase
or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five
seconds.
7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not
exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined
according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 5
8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals,
system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10
seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.
9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear
load.
a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.
10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
2.3 ENGINE
A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.
B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.
D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while
passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall
be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no
disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.
E. Engine Fuel System:
1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting
and load conditions.
2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to
source.
F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with
NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set
mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with
anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110
percent load condition.
3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop
coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.
4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine
manufacturer.
5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of
aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-collapsible
under vacuum.
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment
connections.
I. Provide appropriate rain cap for exhaust to suit specific application.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 6
J. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust
piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete
shall be 72 dBA or less.
K. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked
filter" indicator.
L. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient
temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel
without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project
Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include
required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation.
Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless
of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.
7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-
A minimum continuous rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply
with UL 1236 and include the following features.
a. Coordinate subparagraph below with Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches." Retain if
battery charger is not specified to be integral with transfer switch.
b. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has
lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall
then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate
in that mode until battery is discharged again.
c. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in
ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high
temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
d. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage
variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
e. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.
f. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low
battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and
loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that
provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.
g. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Comply with NFPA 30.
B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features
include the following:
1. Tank level indicator.
2. Capacity: Fuel for 24 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output.
3. Vandal-resistant fill cap.
4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 7
2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and
monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic
transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to
the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown.
When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut
down generator set and initiate alarms.
B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to
the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown.
When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut
down generator set and initiate alarms.
C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine
gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set.
Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.
D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine
gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted control and monitoring panel.
E. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, engine gages,
instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and other indicated components
shall be grouped in a combination control and power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel shall
be isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features shall include the following:
1. Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6.
Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply
with UL 891.
2. Switchboard Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Division 26 Section "Switchboards."
3. Switchgear Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Switchgear."
4. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.
F. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:
1. AC voltmeter.
2. AC ammeter.
3. AC frequency meter.
4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7. Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
10. Start-stop switch.
11. Overspeed shutdown device.
12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
13. Coolant low-level shutdown device.
14. Fuel tank derangement alarm.
15. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
16. Generator overload.
G. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring
required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator,
unless otherwise indicated.
H. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm
and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of indications to remote data
terminals.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 8
I. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below without differentiating
between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will
reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.
1. Engine high-temperature shutdown.
2. Lube-oil, low pressure shutdown.
3. Overspeed shutdown.
4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
5. Engine high-temperature pre-alarm.
6. Lube-oil, low-pressure pre-alarm.
7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level.
8. Low coolant level.
9. Coolant low-temperature alarm.
10. Control switch not in auto position.
11. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
12. Battery low-voltage alarm.
J. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall
identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing
switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm
is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and
faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
K. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push
button shall be protected from accidental operation.
2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with
NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating.
3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices.
4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.
B. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of
generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of
alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a
shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from
load circuits. Protector shall perform the following functions:
1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110
percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other
generator-set malfunction alarms.
2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load
current for up to 10 seconds.
3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit,
protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts
down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to
avoid overshoot.
2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 9
B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with
generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if
required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to
125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.
F. Enclosure: Drip-proof.
G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.
J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.
K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels
shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be
removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.
B. Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered walk-in enclosure with the following features:
1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building erected on
concrete foundation.
2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads.
3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.
4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when engine is not
running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.
5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation while
excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.
7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination with
space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-
generator-set components.
8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within
required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 4 hours with ambient temperature at top
of range specified in system service conditions.
1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent
entry of rain and snow.
2. Gravity Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce
enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 10
D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate
controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.
1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available.
2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable.
E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.
2.9 MOTORS
A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26 Sections.
2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or
multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for
uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Material: Standard neoprene.
2. Durometer Rating: 50.
3. Number of Layers: Two.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant
pretreatment and compatible primer.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or
equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system
components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and
power factor. Include the following tests:
1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on
tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
2. Full load run.
3. Maximum power.
4. Voltage regulation.
5. Transient and steady-state governing.
6. Single-step load pickup.
7. Safety shutdown.
8. Provide 14 days’ advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner’s
representative.
9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections
before packaged engine-generator installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and
with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for
periodic maintenance.
C. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on
4-inch-high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.
D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints for cooling water piping between engine-
generator set and heat exchanger. Piping materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
E. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at
wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff
valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints.
Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23
Section "Hydronic Piping."
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be
factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow
service and maintenance.
C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and heat exchanger with flexible connectors.
D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems are
specified in Division 23.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 12
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.5 FACTORY TESTING
A. General: Perform factory tests prior to shipment. Include the following:
1. Demonstrate proper operation of all safety devices.
2. Conduct load tests utilizing combination resistive and reactive load banks at generator
rated power factor as follows:
Load Hours
Half 1
Three Quarter 1
Full 4
3. At the end of two hours at full load, the engine-generator shall be block loaded from no
load to full load for a total of two times, and the voltage dip shall be recorded by a strip
chart recorder.
4. Record current, voltage, frequency, water temperature, lube oil pressure, and lube oil
temperature every 15 minutes.
5. Perform factory testing in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Submit request
and test verification to the Engineer. All travel related expenses (air fare, mileage,
lodging, meals, etc.) shall be paid for by the Contractor/Manufacturer and included in the
bid.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in
writing.
C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those
specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 13
2. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging
and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both
conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load
test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
3. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging
conditions.
4. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each
element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust,
and fluid leaks.
5. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg.
Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated
load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.
6. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.
7. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage
and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that
performance is as specified.
8. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at
100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.
9. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation,
including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property
line, and compare measured levels with required values.
E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and
adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for
examination on request.
G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.
I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements
are met.
L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each
tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
M. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,
perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access
panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Infrared scan shall be
conducted when unit is under load.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of
Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 32 13 - 14
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 263213
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 1
SECTION 263600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances,
conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch
specified.
1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power
sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and
bypass/isolation switch.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions, including
software, where applicable.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency
maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a
nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 2
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-
site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with NFPA 99.
H. Comply with NFPA 110.
I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases or wall structure. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 and with Section 3.1.B.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Contactor Transfer Switches:
a. Caterpillar; Engine Div.
b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.
c. GE Zenith Controls.
d. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.
e. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
f. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer,
including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at
installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit
combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 3
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an
operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand
capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed
voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-
operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between
active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-
breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic
transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.
G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Powered terminals: Provide (2) normally closed, low voltage powered outputs to control shunt trip
breakers.
I. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.
1. Float type rated 10 A.
2. Ammeter to display charging current.
3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.
J. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for
communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall
have communication capability matched with remote device.
K. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-
code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and
cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of
feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
L. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized.
Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical
operator during manual operation.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator
during manual operation.
D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in
advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 4
E. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control
panel.
F. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and characteristics:
1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation.
2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power sources not
exceeding 100 ms.
3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors confirming both
sources are present and acceptable.
a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator.
b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2 sources
are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent
maximum voltage difference.
4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.
G. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources
are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal
and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only
if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are
within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.
H. INSTRUMENTATION
1. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
a. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting type
with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected
metering and relay devices.
b. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; single secondary
winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with
connected metering and relay devices.
2. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3
kVA.
3. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to
ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of main and tie circuit
breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.
4. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire
systems and with the following features:
a. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances
as indicated:
b. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
c. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
e. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
h. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
i. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values
unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
j. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60
minutes.
k. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.
5. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.
I. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 5
1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on
each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout
voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent
and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine
start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.
3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall
be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup
frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95
percent.
4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for
10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of
emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergency-
source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source
Available."
8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each
switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will
remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light
indicates override status.
10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open;
rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.
11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-
generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.
12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for
five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer
of load to normal source.
13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and
transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine
after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30
days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day
exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features
include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load
transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper
operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with
specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wall mounted switch: Design each fastener to support the load per Division 26 “Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems”. Switch shall be mounted to wall with fire rated backing fastened to the building
structure.”
B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4
inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or
unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and
communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway
sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Provide a low voltage twisted pair wire from ATS to main shunt trip breaker in panel “LB” from the normally
closed power terminal. Upon the initiation of the start signal for the generator and before transfer, the
powered terminal shall change to normally open to shunt the main breaker for Panel “LB”. After start of
the generator, the powered terminal shall return to normally closed.
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in
writing.
C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance
tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with
manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 7
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers,
covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each
switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency
source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations.
f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500
microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay,
retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.
6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery
from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance
tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure
recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers,
covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each
switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency
source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations.
f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500
microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay,
retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.
5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery
from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 36 00 - 8
E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component
indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,
perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11
months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that
describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 263600
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 43 13 - 1
SECTION 264313
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS) or Surge Protection Devices (SPD) for
low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Must have ten day prior approval to bid on project. Request for submittal must be in writing and attached
with independent documentation of the following items.
B. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer which show unit
dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection notes, wire size and wiring diagram.
C. Equipment Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual with installation notes, start-up
and operating instructions for the specified system. Installation instructions shall clearly state whether the
system requires an external overcurrent device to maintain the system’s UL 1449 listing. SPD requiring
external overcurrent devices are not acceptable.
D. VPR (clamping voltage) rating under UL 1449 3rd edition 6kV x 3000A testing will be a maximum of the
following:
1. 120Vsystem 600V (L-N)
2. 277Vsystem 1200V (L-N)
1.4 STANDARDS
A. Underwriters Laboratories 1449 - (UL 1449 3rd edition or current safety standard for surge protection
devices – 2009)
B. NEC article 285. National Electrical Code 2008.
C. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Inc.) C62.41.1, C62.41.2 – 2002, IEEE C62.45 –
2002 and IEEE C62.33 & C62.35.
D. All manufacturers must comply with above listed standards and any additions current revisions of industry
standards. All products that do not comply with current industry standards will not be accepted.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 43 13 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Placing into Service: Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panelboards, control
terminals, or data terminals to their sources until the surge protective devices are installed and connected.
B. Protection modes: The SPD shall provide Line to Neutral (L-N) (Wye), Line to Ground (L-G) (Wye or
Delta), Line to Line (L-L) (Delta) and Neutral to Ground (N-G) (Wye) protection.
C. Service Conditions: Rate surge protective devices for continuous operation under the following conditions,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115 percent of nominal system
operating voltage per UL 1449 3rd.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F.
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, non-condensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6000 m) above sea level.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than ten (10) years from date of
installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of TVSS modules during the warranty period.
Those firms responding to this specification shall provide proof that they have been regularly engaged in
the design, manufacturing and testing of TVSS for not less than five (5) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. ABB USA.
2. AC Data Solutions.
3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
4. Atlantic Scientific.
5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.
6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products.
7. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
8. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
9. Intermatic, Inc.
10. LEA International.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 43 13 - 3
11. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.
13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power.
14. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
15. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.
17. PQ Protection/Power Logics.
B. Required surge current ratings per phase::
1. Non-modular.
2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
3. Comply with UL 1449.
4. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
6. Integral disconnect switch.
7. Redundant suppression circuits.
8. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
9. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
10. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240 kA per mode/480 kA per phase.
D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V, 3-phase,
4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V and 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V and 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V and 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
2.2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one
of the following:
1. ABB USA.
2. AC Data Solutions.
3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
4. Atlantic Scientific.
5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.
6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products.
7. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
8. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
9. Intermatic, Inc.
10. LEA International.
11. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.
13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power.
14. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
15. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 43 13 - 4
17. PQ Protection/Power Logics.
B. Surge Protection Devices:
1. Non-modular.
2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
3. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
5. Integral disconnect switch.
6. Redundant suppression circuits.
7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.
D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2:
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V, 3-phase,
4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V and 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V and 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V and 400 V for 208Y/120 V.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.
B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance
ground.
B. Install TVSS devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor
and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide multiple, 60-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for TVSS unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
26 43 13 - 5
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge
Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
2. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance
with requirements.
3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until TVSS devices are installed
and connected.
B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS installed.
Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is
over.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain
TVSS devices.
END OF SECTION 264313
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 00 00 - 1
DIVISIONS 270000 AND 280000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 27 TECHNOLOGY AND DIVISION 28 FIRE ALARM
SECTION TITLE
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
270526 GROUND AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270527 RACEWAYS FOR SOUND VIDEO COMMUNICTIONS SYSTEMS
270528 RACEWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY
270529 COMBINED LOW VOLTAGE POWER FLOOR BOXES
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS
280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281000 SECURITY SYSTEMS
282000 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISON SYSTEM
283111 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 1
SECTION 27 0010
DIVISION 27 AND 28 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Basic Requirements: The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this section.
B. Provisions: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make
ready for use a complete Division 12 system as specified herein and shown on the
drawings.
C. Provide and Install: The word, "provide" where used on the Drawings or in this section
shall mean, "Furnish, install, mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for
operation". The word "install" where used on the Drawings or in this Division shall mean,
"Mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". The Contractor shall
perform all work required by, and in accordance with, the Contract Documents.
D. Installation: Provide and place in satisfactory condition, ready for proper operation, all
conduits, wires, cables, and other material needed for the complete Division 27 and 28
systems required by the Contract Documents. Additional conduits and wiring shall be
provided wherever necessary to complete the installation of the specific equipment
provided. Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating
systems. Provide all Division 27 and 28 systems and any necessary accessories per
NEC, NFPA, ANSI, BICSI, EIA/TIA, state and local codes and ordinances. It is the intent
of these Specifications that the Division 27 and 28 systems shall be suitable in every way
for the service required. All material and work, which may be reasonably implied as
being incidental to the work of this Contract, shall be provided at no additional cost to the
Contract.
E. Specified equipment. The Division 27 and 28 systems and equipment specified in the
contract documents represent the current state of technology, but the systems and
equipment implemented as part of the installation of each system must use the latest
hardware and software models, releases and configurations practical and must meet the
latest security requirements as specified by the governing body for that system. For the
Division 27 and 28 technology systems the contractor shall provide a break-out pricing for
the electronics equipment. This allowance shall be used to obtain the most current
generation of the specified electronics equipment prior to ordering this equipment.
F. IP Network Switches and Routers. It is the intent of these specifications to integrate the
electronics infrastructure to be used for the different Division 27 and 28 technology
systems, which will be more easily accomplished when all of the IP network switches and
routers in the project are of the same manufacturing brand. The contractor shall
coordinate with the subcontractors for the different Division 27 and 28 technology
systems so one manufacturing brand for this equipment is provided.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 2
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General: The work provided under this specifications section shall include all labor,
materials, permits, inspections and re-inspection fees, tools, equipment, transportation,
insurance, temporary protection, temporary lighting, supervision and incidental items
essential for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically mentioned or
indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper installation and
operation of all Division 27 and 28 systems as indicated in the contract documents.
B. Minimum Requirements: The contract documents describe the minimum requirements
that must be met for an acceptable installation.
C. Notices: Give all notices, file all Plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvals from
authorities having jurisdiction. Include all fees in the Bid Price.
1.3 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. General: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact locations
of conduit runs, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc. The locations of equipment,
appliances, fixtures, conduits, outlets, boxes and similar devices shown on the Drawings
are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as accepted by the Engineer during
construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of Division 27 and
28 systems work and in case of interference with other work, proceed as directed by the
Engineer and provide all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an
acceptable manner.
B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies found during construction
of the project and do not proceed with that portion of the project, until a written definitive
statement is received providing clear direction. If a conflict exists between the contract
documents and any applicable code or standard, the most stringent requirement shall be
included for this project. The Engineer shall make the decision regarding questionable
areas of conflict.
C. Wiring: Each Division 27 and 28 system wires shall be run in a separate conduit unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, conduit
shall not be installed exposed unless specifically directed to be exposed. Where conduits
are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a
complete raceway installation.
D. Surface Supports: Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be
supported by spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment.
E. Layout: Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other
installation details. Provide all labor and materials necessary to install and place in
satisfactory operation all power, control, lighting, and other communication systems
shown. All connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance with
the accepted shop and manufacturer's setting drawings.
F. Coordination: Coordinate final equipment locations with governing Architectural and
Structural drawings. Layout before installation so that all trades may install equipment in
spaces available. Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat and
workmanlike manner.
G. Existing Conditions: The Contractor shall check site and existing conditions thoroughly
before bidding, and advise Engineer of discrepancies prior to bid.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 3
H. Final: The systems upon completion, shall be complete in every respect-clean, operating
and properly adjusted and in perfect operating condition.
1.4 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND HANDLING
A. Coordination: Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must
pass to reach its final location. If necessary, the equipment shall be required to be
shipped in sections of specific sizes to permit the passing through the necessary areas
within the structure.
B. Handling: All equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to be
tilted for ease of passage through restricted areas during transportation, the manufacturer
shall be required to brace the equipment suitably, to insure that the tilting does not impair
the functional integrity of the equipment.
1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Production: During the course of this project the contractor shall maintain record "as-built
drawings". One set shall be maintained at the site and at all times and it shall be
accurate, clear, and complete, showing the actual location of all equipment as installed.
The "As-Built" drawings shall show all Division 27 and 28 Systems work installed
complete to the present stage of progress. These drawings shall be available for review
by the Architect/Engineer's field representatives at all times.
B. Completion: At the completion of the Work, transfer onto the second set of drawings all
changes marked in colored pencil and submit to the Architect/Engineers to make the final
punch list of the work completed under this Contract.
C. Final: Upon Contractor's completion of the Engineer's final punch list, transfer all "As-
Built" conditions and all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible set of drawings.
Submit full size drawings and one (1) set of CAD disks for review and acceptance.
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used:
ABV CLG Above Ceiling
ADA American Disabilities Act
AFF Above Finished Floor
AFG Above Finished Grade
AL Aluminum
AMP Ampere
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASA American Standards Association
AWG American Wire Gauge
BC Bare Copper
CAB Cabinet
C Conduit
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
CLG Ceiling
COAX Coaxial Cable
COND Conductor
CONN Connection
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSTC Communications System Terminal Cabinet
CU Copper
DC Direct Current
DEG Degree
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 4
DCTC Door Control Terminal Cabinet
DO Draw Out
DN Down
EMT Communication Metallic Tubing
GND Ground
HORIZ Horizontal
IC Intercom
IEEE Institute of Communication and Electronic Engineers
IMC Intermediate Metallic Conduit
IN Inches
JB Junction Box
KVA Kilo-Volt-Amps
KW Kilowatts
LBS Pounds
LED Light Emitting Diode
MAX Maximum
MIC Microphone
MIN Minimum
MTD Mounted
MTG Mounting
MUX Multiplexor
N Neutral
NEC National Communication Code
NECA National Communication Contractors Association
NEMA National Communication Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIC Not in Contract
NL Non Linear
NO Number
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
P Pole
PB Pullbox
PNL Panel
PR Pair
PWR Power
PROJ Projector
PVC Polyvinylchloride
RECPT Receptacle
RSTC Radio/Sound Terminal Cabinet
S/N Solid Neutral
SPKR Speaker
SW Switch
TEL Telephone
TEF Telecommunications Entrance Facility
TER Telecommunications Equipment Room
TR Telecommunications Room
TTB Telephone Terminal Board
TTC Telephone Terminal Cabinet
TVEC Television Equipment Cabinet
TYP Typical
V Volt
W Wire
WP Weatherproof
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 5
1.7 CODES, FEES, AND STANDARDS
A. Application: The codes, standards and practices listed herein generally apply to the
entire project and all specification sections. Other codes, standards or practices that are
more specific will be referenced within a particular specification.
B. Requirements: All articles, products, materials, fixtures, forms or types of construction
covered in the specifications will be required to meet or exceed all applicable standards
of manufacturer, testing, performance, capabilities, procedures and installation according
to the requirements of ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, NEC, BICSI and EIA/TIA referenced
documents where indicated and the manufacturer's recommended practices.
Requirements indicated on the contract documents which exceed but are not contrary to
governing codes shall be followed.
C. Compliance and Certification: The installation shall comply with the governing state and
local codes or ordinances. The completed communication installation shall be inspected
and certified by all applicable agencies that it is in compliance with all codes.
D. Applicability: The codes and standards and practices listed herein, and their respective
dates are furnished as the minimum latest requirements.
1. State of Texas
2. Dallas County
3. Grand Prairie
E. Building Code: (with applicable state and local amendments):
1. 2015 International Building Code (IBC) w/ City of Grand Prairie Amendments
2. 2015 International Fire Code (IFC)
3. 2015 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
F. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards
NFPA-70 (2017) National Electric Code
NFPA-101 Life Safety Code
1.8 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK
A. Supervision: For each Division 27 and 28 System provide one field superintendent who
has had a minimum of four (4) years previous successful experience on projects of
comparable sizes and complexity. The Superintendent shall be present at all times when
work is being performed. At least one member of each Division 27 and 28 system
contracting firm shall hold a State Certificate of Competency. Other supervision
requirements that are more specific will be referenced within a particular specification.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. General: Compare drawings and specifications with those of other trades and report any
discrepancies between them to the Architect. Obtain from the Architect written
instructions to make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shall be
installed in cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation,
all Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by
the Architect/Engineer.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 6
B. Adjustments: Locations of conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the
work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact routing and
location of all systems prior to fabrication or installation.
C. Priorities: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For
example, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose elevations
cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be
changed.
D. Modifications: Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit systems shall be made as
required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated
on the drawings. Provide elbows, boxes, etc., as required to allow offsets and changes
to suit job conditions.
E. Replacement: All work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to
other parts) of all other system components provided under this Contract requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance. All conduit shall be arranged in a manner to clear
the openings of swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling tiles.
F. Layout: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs
and locations of conduit and equipment, and not necessarily showing all required offsets,
details and accessories and equipment to be connected. All work shall be accurately laid
out with other Trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat and workmanlike installation
which will afford maximum accessibility for operation, maintenance and headroom.
G. Contract Conflicts: Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Trade
provides items such as enclosures, racks, raceways, boards, connecting hardware, door
hardware, supports, etc. such conflicts shall be coordinated between the divisions
involved. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all work shall be provided
complete as one bid price.
H. Drawing Conflicts: Where drawing details, plans or specification requirements are in
conflict and where sizes of the same item run are shown to be different within the
contract documents, the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contract.
Systems and equipment called for in the specification or as shown on the drawings shall
be provided under the Contract of each trade as if it was required by both the drawings
and specifications. Prior to ordering or installation of any portion of work which appears to
be in conflict, such work shall be brought to Architect's attention for direction as to what is
to be provided.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate efforts of all trades and shall furnish (in writing, with
copies to the Architect and Owner) any information necessary to permit the Work of all
trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
J. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall prepare a complete set of construction
coordination drawings (“Coordination Drawings”) indicating the equipment actually
purchased and the exact routing and elevations for all lines such as piping, busway,
conduit, ductwork , etc., including conduit embedded in concrete and openings, sleeves,
etc., required in the structure, walls, partitions, etc. The Coordination Drawings shall be
submitted complete for review to the Architect, Engineer and Owner. The Coordination
Drawing preparation and completion shall comply with the requirements of the Schedule.
Prior to commencing the Work, the Subcontractor shall obtain from the Architect or
Engineer a set of AutoCAD compatible format Architectural and Engineering Drawings on
compact disks, to be used to produce the Coordination Drawings. The Subcontractor
shall give to the Architect and Engineer a written release acceptable to the Architect and
Engineer signed by a corporate officer of the Subcontractor, prior to receipt of the
compact disks. The sheet metal Drawings, prepared on electronic media (CADD) at a
scale not less than 1/4” = 1’-0”, shall serve as the base Drawings to which all other
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 7
Subcontractors will overlay and add their Work. The Division 23 Mechanical
Subcontractor shall be designated as the lead contractor in the development of the
composite layering process and shall be responsible for electronically restacking the
various trade layers into the final composite (CADD) Drawings. Each trade shall draw
their Work on separate layers represented by individual colors. Each Coordination
Drawing shall be completed and signed off by the other Subcontractors and the
Contractor prior to the installation of the Work in the area covered by the specific
Coordination Drawing. The Subcontractors Work shall be installed in accordance with
the Shop Drawings and the Coordination Drawings and shall include the required
maintenance access space and the code clearance space. If the Contractor allows one
trade to install their Work before coordinating with the Work of other trades, the
Contractor shall make necessary changes to correct the condition without extra cost to
the Owner. The Coordination Drawings indicating piping, conduit, busway and
equipment support points and loads exceeding 1,000 lb. imposed on the building
structure shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. The elevation,
location, support points, static, dynamic and expansion forces and loads imposed on the
structure at support and anchor points and the size of all lines shall be indicated. All
beam penetrations, slab penetrations and sleeves shall be indicated, sized and
coordinated with all other Work. All required code clearance space and required
maintenance access space shall be indicated and coordinated with all other work. All
Work routed underground or embedded in concrete shall be indicated by dimension to
column and building lines and shall be coordinated. This requirement for Coordination
Drawings shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor or Subcontractor to
make any unauthorized changes to the Drawings. All space allocations shown on the
Drawings shall be maintained, such as ceiling height. Prior to final acceptance of the
Work, the Contractor shall give the Drawing files in the latest version of AutoCAD or
compatible format on CD-RW Recordable Rewrite Compact Discs, containing the
Contractor’s coordination documentation, to the Owner.
1.10 QUALITY
A. General: The Contractor is expected to base his bid on materials and equipment
complying fully with the drawings and specification. In the event he bases his bid on
materials or equipment which do not conform, he shall be responsible for providing
materials and equipment which fully conform at no change in his contract price. In any
case, where a specific specification for any item that is required is not shown, the
Contractor shall provide only the best quality equipment or material consistent with the
quality of other specified equipment and material. The items of equipment shall be
provided in the quantity as shown by the drawings or in the quantity as specified herein.
B. General: The use of acceptable equipment does not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the alternate equipment. The Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, shall
remove and replace with the specified equipment any equipment or system that shows
evidence of improper operation, function, or size.
C. Responsibility: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply a working overall
system. All equipment and material as well as labor must be provided whether or not
specifically mentioned in the specification or shown by the drawings.
1.11 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor selected for each Division 27 and 28 system must be certified by the
manufacturer of the products, adhere to the engineering, installation and testing
procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution
channels in provisioning the Project.
B. Contractor, as a minimum, must carry a current State issued limited energy license.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 8
C. Additional requirements as indicated on each individual specifications section.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS ALTERNATES AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturer,
materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents.
B. Prototype or design selection: A product or group of products from an identified
manufacturer that was used as the basis of systems layouts and installation details.
Prototype products are those scheduled on the drawings or in the specifications, or those
which are referenced in the contract documents as being prototypes, basis of design or
design selection.
C. Alternates: Specified products or manufacturers that will be in compliance with the
performance and quality provisions of the specifications and may be proposed for use by
the contractor. Alternates will also be a different model number from those identified on
the documents. Acceptable alternates are as listed on the documents. Alternates must be
justified on the basis of need, cost or both as long as there is no identified reduction in
quality and that all design parameters are met.
D. Substitutions: Products of unnamed manufacturers. Substitutions will not be acceptable.
E. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed as
acceptable alternates each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design
selection. Where a manufacturer's model number is listed, this model shall set the
standard of quality and performance required. Where no brand name is specified, the
source and quality shall be subject to Engineer's review and acceptance. Where three or
more manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall be submitted for
acceptance.
F. Contractor’s proposed alternates: All equipment components must meet or exceed those
specified. Should a Contractor wish to submit an alternate product or a product set
stated in the construction documents as 'acceptable', it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to provide an item-for-item CROSS REFERENCE for all specified products.
Furthermore, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all related specifications and
product data sheets, for the proposed alternate equipment components. The Contractor
shall provide to the Engineer a written statement confirming that the proposed alternate
product or product set meets or exceeds the base level of performance and warranty as
established within the Contract Documents. If the alternate product or product set is
accepted by the Engineer, then all deviations from the basis of design must then be
indicated in writing and the manufacturer's specifications and/or catalog information must
be submitted to the Engineer. If a manufacturer has discontinued any listed items, the
Owner shall reserve the right to accept or reject the current replacement product. The
Owner shall be the final authority for approving acceptable, "equal" or alternate
equipment components, and reserves the right to reject proposed substitutions without
cause.
G. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or
government standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate
that the product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer,
Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.
H. The contract documents are based on prototypical design where identified vendors and
products are used to prepare the system layout and to identify all utility connections.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 9
These drawings, even when dimensioned, are schematic in nature and are subject to
field coordination to reflect actual conditions, final equipment shop drawings—which may
vary from the document which were furnished at the time of design—and the contractor’s
means and methods as well as coordination between trades.
I. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the final installation of all
equipment and systems. Where alternate manufacturers are incorporated into the work,
any architectural or engineering design required to incorporate that work shall be the
responsibility of the contractor, as is any cost resulting from changes in layout, increased
sizes or lengths of run of services or for any additional utilities that maybe required by the
use of alternates.
J. Any changes in the project required to support alternates shall be fully identified and
submitted as an adjunct to the shop drawing for the alternate product. In addition, such
changes shall be reflected in the coordination drawings and shall be approved by all
affected trades.
K. Space Requirements: Alternate equipment where permitted and accepted, must conform
to established space requirements within the project. Accepted alternate equipment,
which does not meet space requirements, shall be replaced at no additional expense to
the Contract. All modifications of related systems as a result of alternates shall be made
at no additional expense to the Contract. Submit all modifications to the
Architect/Engineer for acceptance.
2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. General: Shop drawings shall be submitted for equipment and material as listed in the
individual sections. One copy shall be submitted to the engineer prior to ordering
equipment.
B. Electronic Equipment submittals: All electronic equipment for DIVISION 27 and 28
systems shall be submitted for approval no sooner than 12 months before the date set for
substantial completion of the project.
C. Responsibility: It is the Contractors responsibility to provide all material in accordance
with the plans and specifications. Material not provided in accordance with the plans and
specifications will be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. The
responsibility that all dimensions are confirmed and correlated with proper coordination of
all other trades shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The responsibility
and the necessity of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications
and Drawings which may not be indicated on the shop drawings shall be included as part
of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress
occurring directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of shop drawings,
product data, or samples.
D. Official Record: The shop drawing submittal shall become the official record of the
materials to be installed. If materials are installed which do not correspond to the record
submittal they shall be removed from the project without any additional cost to the Owner
or delays in construction completion.
E. Information: The shop drawing record submittal shall include the following information to
the extent applicable to the particular item:
1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.
2. Standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEMA, NFPA,
OSHA, UL, BICSI, EIA/TIA or other organizations, including the type, size, or
other designation.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 10
3. Dimensioned plan, sections, and elevations showing means for mounting,
conduit connections, and grounding, and showing layout of components.
4. Materials and finish specifications, including paints.
5. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.
6. Internal wiring diagram indicating all connections to components and the
terminals for external connections.
7. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, operation, and
maintenance.
8. Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts.
F. Preparation: Prior to submittal, all shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and
contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be
accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity
to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all discrepancies with the
Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned
to Contractor un-reviewed.
G. Basis of Review: The Engineer's review shall be for compliance with the Specifications
and Drawings.
H. Ordering Equipment: No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the
Engineer's has officially received the shop drawings record submittal and has formally
released the Contractor for submittal requirements.
I. Contractor's Review: Review the submittal before submitting to the Engineer. No request
for payment shall be considered until the submittal has been reviewed, stamped and
submitted for review.
J. Drawings: Drawings to include identification of project and names of Architect-Engineer,
Engineer, Contractors, and/or supplier, data, number sequentially and indicate in general;
1. Fabrication and Erection dimensions
2. Arrangements and sectional views.
3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with
other work.
4. Kinds of materials and finishes
5. Descriptive names of equipment.
6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract
7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2-1/2 inches, near title block (for
Engineer's stamp imprint).
8. In order to facilitate review of shop drawings, they shall be noted, indicating by
cross reference the contract drawings, notes, and specification paragraph
numbers where items occur in the contract documents.
9. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.
2.3 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Each item of equipment or material shall be manufactured by a company
regularly engaged in the manufacturer of the type and size of equipment, shall be
suitable for the environment in which it is to be installed, shall be approved for its
purpose, environment, and application, and shall bear the UL label.
B. Installation Requirements: Each item of equipment or material shall be installed in
accordance with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, however, the
methods shall not be less stringent than specified herein.
C. Required Accessories: Provide all devices and materials, such as expansion bolts,
foundation bolts, screws, channels, angles, and other attaching means, required to fasten
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 11
enclosures, conduits, and other communication equipment and materials to be mounted
on structures which are existing or new.
D. Protection: Division 27 and 28 Systems equipment shall at all times during construction
be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by the elements.
Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If apparatus has been damaged,
such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost or time extension to the Contract. If
apparatus has been subject to possible injury, it shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried out
and put through tests as directed by the Manufacturer and Engineer, or shall be replaced,
if directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Contract.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. General: All Division 27 and 28 Systems items shall be identified as specified in the
Contract Documents. Such identification shall be in addition to the manufacturer's
nameplates and shall serve to identify the item's function and the equipment or system
which it serves or controls. Refer to Identification Section of the specifications for
additional information.
2.5 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
A. General: Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. shall have a factory
applied finish or shall be painted as accepted by Engineer. All conduits and fittings,
where allowed to be installed surface mounted, shall be painted to match the finish on
which it was installed. Paint shall be in accordance with other applicable sections of
these specifications. Refer to additional specifications note herein, regarding conduit,
boxes, etc.
2.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Core Drilling: The Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling as required for work
under this section, but in no case shall the Contractor cut into or weld onto any structural
element of the project without the written approval of the Architect.
B. Cutting and Patching: All cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided as
specified in the contract documents. All cutting and patching shall be performed in a neat
and workmanlike manner.
C. Openings and Sleeves: Locate all openings required for work performed under this
section. Provide sleeves, guards or other accepted methods to allow passage of items
installed under this section.
D. Roof Penetration: Provide roofer with all pitch pans, fittings, etc., required for Division 27
and 28 Systems items which penetrate the roof. Roof penetrations are to be
waterproofed in such a manner that roofing guarantees are fully in force.
2.7 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS
A. Sleeves: Provide all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate
all necessary slots for communication work and form before concrete is poured. Water-
tight sleeves shall be line seal type WS. Fire rated partition sleeves shall be mild steel.
Size shall be one standard diameter larger than pipe being installed or of a larger
diameter to allow 1/4" minimum clearance.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 12
B. Sleeves penetrating rated walls or floors shall require the contractor to provide a UL listed
penetration assembly meeting the hourly rating of the penetrated wall or floor. Contractor
shall submit UL assembly for approval by the Engineer on all such penetrations.
C. Forms: Provide boxed out forms for conduit penetrations only where allowed by the
Architect. Fill opening after conduit installation, with equivalent material.
2.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Representative of the Owner, to the complete
satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems and
equipment provided. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, via the Architect, as to
whom the instructions are to be given in the operation of the systems and the period of
time in which they are to be given. The Architect shall be completely satisfied that the
Representative of the Owner has been thoroughly and completely instructed in the proper
operation of all systems and equipment before final payment is made. If the Engineer
determines that complete and thorough instructions have not been given by the
Contractor to the Owner's Representative, then the Contractor shall be directed by the
Engineer to provide whatever instructions are necessary until the intent of this paragraph
of the Specification has been complied with.
B. Submittals: Submit to the Architect for approval five (5) typed sets, bound neatly in
loose-leaf binders, of all instructions for the installation, operation, care and maintenance
of all equipment and systems, including instructions for the ordering and stocking of
spare parts for all equipment installed under this contract. The lists shall include part
number and suggested suppliers. Each set shall also include an itemized list of
component parts that should be kept on hand and where such parts can be purchased.
C. Information Requirements: Information shall indicate possible problems with equipment
and suggested corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for each type of
equipment. Each section shall be clearly divided from the other sections. A sub index for
each section shall also be provided.
D. Instructions: The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by the
Engineer and include but not limited to the following:
1. Introduction:
a. Explanation of Manual and its use
b. Purpose of systems
2. System:
a. Detailed description of all systems
b. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other exhibits.
3. Operations:
a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all phases of
operation for all portions of the systems, including start up, shutdown and
balancing. Include all posted instruction charts.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 13
4. Maintenance:
a. Parts list and part numbers
b. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's
recommendations for preventive maintenance.
c. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components.
d. Instructions for testing each type of part
e. Recommended list of on-hand spare parts
f. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire systems.
g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes.
5. Manufacturer's Literature:
a. Complete listing for all parts.
b. Names, addresses and telephone numbers
c. Care and operation
d. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins, technical
data, certified performance charts and other literature with the model
actually furnished to be clearly and conspicuously identified.
e. Internal wiring diagrams and Engineering data sheets for all items and/or
equipment furnished under each Contract.
f. Guarantee and warranty data.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be performed in a neat,
workmanlike and timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of
the requirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods and
craftsmanship needed to produce a quality level of workmanship. Personnel who install
materials and equipment shall be qualified by training and experience to perform their
assigned tasks.
B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-quality
appearance and function, conforming to applicable standards of building system
construction, and exhibiting a high degree of quality and proficiency which is judged by
the Architect as equivalent as or better than that ordinarily produced by qualified industry
tradesmen.
C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of
material and equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or
unqualified to perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations not in
compliance with the Contract Documents, or installed with substandard workmanship and
not acceptable to the Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified craftsmen,
at no change in the contract price.
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP
A. Protection and Restoration: Suitably protect all equipment provided under this Division
during construction. Restore all damaged surfaces and items to "like new" condition
before a request for substantial completion inspection.
B. Handling: All materials shall be properly protected and all conduit openings shall be
temporarily closed by the Contractor to prevent obstruction and damage. Post notice
prohibiting the use of all systems provided under this Contract, prior to completion of
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 14
work and acceptance of all systems by the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall
take precautions to protect his materials from damage and theft.
C. Safeguards: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards for
the prevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials,
equipment or systems provided under this contract.
D. Cleanup: Keep the job site free from all debris and rubbish. Remove all debris and
rubbish from the site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis.
3.3 SYSTEMS GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
A. General: As dictated on each particular Division 27 and 28 system specification. The
guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner for any defective workmanship or
material, which has been provided under this Contract at no cost to the Owner. Explain
the provisions of guarantee and warranty to the Owner at the "Demonstration of
Completed System".
3.4 ENGINEERS FINAL OBSERVATION
A. Scheduling: Before requesting a final inspection, all systems shall be inspected by the
equipment manufacturer's representative. When the system and all equipment is in place
and is operating properly, the manufacturer's representative shall complete the check-out
memo and have all equipment ready for final inspection. Final as-built drawings and
brochures shall be provided to the Engineer one week prior to final inspection.
3.5 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION FOR OWNER
A. Provide on-site training sessions and instruction to the Owner's designated
representatives in the setup, operation and use of all systems and associated equipment.
1. All instruction and training is to be given after completion of the installation and
testing.
2. Arrange instruction and training sessions at Owner's convenience. Provide a
minimum of (3) three, 4 hour sessions for Owner designated staff.
3. Provide operating and users guides to the Owner's representatives at training
session.
4. Vendor shall provide video taping of all sessions and provide to owner the
original DVD disc plus 1 VHS tape and (2) DVD copies of each session.
3.6 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. As dictated on each individual specifications section.
END OF SECTION 27 0010
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 00 10 - 15
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION MEMO
Note to Contractor: Do not submit this form at the time Technical Information Brochure is submitted.
Submit five copies of information listed below for checking at least one week before scheduled completion
of the building. After information has been accepted and inserted in each brochure, give the Owner a
Demonstration of the Completed Div. 27 System and have the Owner sign five copies of this form.
Provide one signed copy for each brochure. After this has been done, a written request for a final
inspection of the System shall be made.
Re: ________________________________________________________________________
(Name of Project)
_________________________________________________________________________
(Division Number and Name)
This memo is for the information of all concerned that the Owner has been given a Demonstration of the
Completed Div. 27 System on the work covered under this Division. This conference consisted of the
system operation, a tour on which all major items of equipment were pointed out, and the following items
were given to the Owner;
(a) Owner's copy of Technical Information Brochure containing approved submittal sheets on all items,
including the following; (To be inserted in the Technical Information Brochure after the correct tab).
(1) Maintenance Information published by manufacturer on equipment items.
(2) Printed Warranties by manufacturers on equipment items.
(3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor.
(4) Check-out Memo on equipment by manufacturer's representative.
(5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items.
(6) Explanation of the one-year guarantee on the system.
(b) "As-Built" conditions as described in the record drawing specifications.
(c) A demonstration of the System in Operation and of the maintenance procedures which shall be
required.
_________________________________________________________________________
(Name of General Contractor)
By: _________________________________________________________________________
(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)
_________________________________________________________________________
(Name of Subcontractor)
By: _________________________________________________________________________
(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)
Brochure, Instruction, Prints, and Demonstration & Instruction in Operation Received:
__________________________________________________________
(Name of Owner)
By: _____________________________________________________
(Authorized Signature, Title, Date)
cc: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Sub Contractor and General Contractor
(List names as stated in cc: above)
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 05 26 - 1
SECTION 27 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified
of this section.
B. General: For grounding electrode system and equipment grounding system for
Telecommunications refer to specification section 260526. In all cases the applicable
electrical codes for grounding and bonding for telecommunications shall be met.
C. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
270528 RACEWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
D. General. For a bonding diagram for telecommunications refer to T Drawings.
E. General. The bonding approach required herein is intended to work in concert with the
cabling topology as specified in Specification section 271000 and installed in accordance
with specification section 270528.
F. Reference Standards:
1. J - STD - 607-A
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A
4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A
5. NEMA
6. UL 1863 Communication Circuit Accessories
7. UL-50 & UL-514
8. NFPA 70 (2008) – NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE
9. IEEE Std. 1100-1992, Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment.
10. BICSI TDMM, (Eleventh Edition or latest) Telecommunications Distribution
Method Manual.
11. UL 1449
12. NFPA 780
G. Related sections:
1. 260526 Grounding
2. 264313 Transient Voltage Surge suppressors
3. 271000 Cable Plant – Structured Cabling System
4. 270528 Pathways and Spaces for Structured Cabling System
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 26 - 2
H.Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) The TMGB serves as the
dedicated extension of the building grounding electrode system for the
telecommunications infrastructure. The TMGB shall be located and provided as shown on
the electrical drawings. The TMGB must have minimum dimensions of 6.3 mm (0.25 in)
thick by 100 mm (4 in) wide, and be variable in length. The TMGB must also be listed by
a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).
I.Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB). The TGBs are the grounding connection
points for telecommunications systems and equipments in the area served by that
telecommunications room or equipment room. The TGBs shall be located and provided
as shown on the electrical drawings. The TGBs must have minimum dimensions of 6.3
mm (0.25 in) thick by 50 mm (2 in) wide, and be variable in length. The TMGB must also
be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).
J.Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BC). The Bonding Conductor for
telecommunications shall bond the TMGB to the service equipment (power) ground, the
building steel structure and all metallic raceways and hardware within the
telecommunications rooms.
K.The BC shall be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum of
3/0 AWG. The BC may be insulated. However, If the BC is insulated, the insulation shall
meet the fire ratings of its pathway and shall be listed for the space in which it is intended
to be placed, such as CM, CMR or CMP. The sizing of the BC is not intended to account
for the reduction or control of electromagnetic interference.
BC LENGTH LINEAR M (FT)BC SIZE (AWG)
Less than 4 (13)6
4 – 6 (14 – 20)4
6 – 8 (21 – 26)3
8 – 10 (27 – 33)2
10 – 13 (34 – 41)1
13 – 16 (42 – 52)1/0
16 – 20 (53 – 66)2/0
Greater than 20 (66)3/0
L.The BC for Telecommunications is not intended to serve as the only conductor providing
a ground fault current return path. The intended function of the Bonding Conductor for
Telecommunications is to equalize potential differences between telecommunications
systems.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BONDING MATERIALS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
A. General: As specified on specifications section 260526 and as shown on T drawings.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 26 - 3
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
A. General: Specification section 260526 applies to work of this section. Installation
requirements specified herein takes precedence over specification section 260526.
B. The BC shall be installed and protected from physical and mechanical damage.
C. The BC shall be continuous and routed in the shortest possible straight line path.
D. The BC shall be installed without splices. Where splices are necessary, the number of
splices should be a minimum and they shall be accessible and located within
telecommunications spaces. Joined segments of a BC shall be connected using
exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All joints
shall be adequately supported and protected from damage.
E. Connections of the BC to the TGB or TMGB shall utilize exothermic weld connections,
listed compression two hole lugs or other irreversible compression type connector.
F. The TGB or TMGB shall be as close to the electrical power panel as is practicable and
shall be installed to maintain clearances required by applicable electrical codes. That
electrical power panel bus or the panel enclosure shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB.
G. The TGBs and TMGB shall be insulated from their support. A minimum of 50 mm (2
inches) separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the
busbar.
H. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for the
intended purpose.
I. The primary protector grounding conductor shall be connected to the TMGB or TGB. A
minimum of 300 mm (1 FT) separation shall be maintained between this insulated
conductor and any dc power cables, switchboard cable, or high frequency cables, even
when placed in rigid metal conduit or EMT.
J. When the outside plant cables in the Telecommunications Entrance Facility room
incorporate a cable shield isolation gap, the cable shield on the building side of the gap
shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB.
K. Where backbone cables incorporate a shield or metallic member, this shield or metallic
member shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB.
L. Telecommunications primary protectors for the interbuilding backbone cables shall be
bonded to the TMGB or TGB.
M. Short metallic pathways (e.g. wall and floor sleeves) are not required to be bonded.
END OF SECTION 27 0526
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 1
SECTION 27 05 27
RACEWAYS FOR SOUND VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS (SVC) SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
section.
Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems, does not apply to work of
this Section. Specifications described herein take precedence over any other section with
regards to raceways for the SOUND VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS (SVC) SYSTEMS.
B. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
C. Standards (Current Editions)
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569A “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces”.
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard”, CSA T529.
3. ANSI/NECA/ BICSI 568-2001 “Installing Commercial building
Telecommunications Cabling”.
4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606A “Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”.
5. ANSI/NFPA 70 (2008) National Electrical Code, CSA C22.1.
6. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (Eleventh
Edition or latest).
7. BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM).
8. County Codes and Regulations.
9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
10. FCC -Federal Communications Commission.
11. ADA Requirements.
12. Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA).
13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
14. Florida Statutes and Administrative Rules
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Furnish and install complete with all accessories an EIA/TIA 569A Pathways and
Spaces infrastructure for supporting of SOUND VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS (SVC)
SYSTEMS and housing of SOUND VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS (SVC) equipment. The
goal of the project is to provide a reliable architecture of the building that shall serve as a
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 2
support for transport of Sound and Video cabling, copper and fiber optics, throughout the
building from designated demarcation points to places located at various wall, floor, raised
floor, ceiling, column, room and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and
described herein.
B. General: For conduits the system shall utilize only metallic conduits as shown on the
drawings. Conduits shall be provided and located as shown on the drawings. Conduits
shall terminate in rooms, floor, walls, closets or metallic boxes using approved fasteners
and termination hardware and bushing and shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges.
C. General: All conduits shall be identified at all locations.
D. General: Provide all supports, hangers and inserts required to mount conduit, pull boxes
and other equipment provided under this Division.
E. Support: All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building. Supports
and hangers shall be of a type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. Wire shall not be
used as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or fastened to ceiling
suspension wires or to ceiling channels. Do not install any devices supported by ceiling
tiles or raised floor tiles.
F. Installation: The Contractor shall layout and provide his work in advance of the laying of
floors or walls, and shall provide all sleeves that may be required for openings through
floors, walls, etc. Where plans call for conduit to be run exposed, provide all inserts and
clamps for the supporting of conduit.
G. Work Included: Placement and terminations of all raceways between these designated
demarcation points and locations designated on the plans shall be considered part of the
contract.
1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A.General: The Contractor directly responsible for this work shall be a " Raceways for
Sound And Video Systems " who is, and who has been, regularly engaged in the
providing and installation of commercial and industrial raceways of this type and size for
at least the immediate past five years. Any subcontractor who will assist the contractor in
performance of this work, shall have the same training and expertise.
B.Experience: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The
Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful
installation and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and
equipment.
1.4 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING
A. General: Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall
be governed by provisions of this specification.
1.5 MATERIALS
A. Quality Assurance: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of
conduit systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 3
B. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on
the drawings. Install with aluminum fittings only, when specified.
C. PVC Conduit: PVC conduit shall not be used for Sound Video Systems.
D. Flexible metal conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall not be used unless specifically called
for on the drawings. Install with metal fittings only, when specified.
E. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards as
they apply to the different raceway types specified herein;
1. ANSI:
a. ANSI C80.1: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC).
b. ANSI C80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
2. UL:
a. UL 1: Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. UL 6: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC).
c. UL 514: Fittings for Metal Conduit.
d. UL 797: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
e. UL 886: Fittings for Hazardous Locations.
f. UL 1242: Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
3. NEMA:
a. NEMA TC2: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC).
b. NEMA TC3: Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNMC).
c. NEMA RN1: Plastic Coated Metal Conduit.
4. Federal Specifications:
a. WW-C-581: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC).
b. WW-C-563: Electrical Metallic Conduit (EMT).
c. WW-C-566: Flexible Steel Conduit.
d. WW-C-581E: Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC).
e. WC-582A Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fittings; surface
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Products: Submit manufacturer's product data, including technical information on each
type of raceway system;
1. Conduits
2. Conduit fittings
3. Metallic boxes
4. Insulating and grounding bushings for conduit
5. Galvanizing and protective coatings for conduit
B. Compliance: Product data shall show compliance with this section of the specifications,
including U.L. label, manufacturer and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 4
1.7 LOCATIONS
A. Materials Above Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed above grade
where specifically noted herein;
1. Electrical metallic tubing (thin wall)
2. Intermediate metallic conduit
3. Galvanized rigid steel conduit
B. Materials Below Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed below grade where
specifically noted herein;
1. Rigid galvanized conduit (heavy wall).
C. Materials on Roofs: The following conduit types are to be installed on roofs where
specifically noted herein;
1. Rigid steel conduit (PVC) coated
2. Rigid steel conduit
1.8 CONDUIT
A. General: Provide a complete and continuous system of raceways where indicated on the
drawings to maintain a protected path for wires and cables to distribute Structured
Cabling System throughout the project, utilizing U.L. listed and labeled materials.
B. Accessories: Provide conduit accessories of types, sizes, and materials, as specified
herein complying with manufacturers published product information, which match and
mate conduit and tubing.
C. Interior Minimum Size: Interior Minimum Size: Minimum conduit size for Sound Video
System shall be one (3/4) inch unless otherwise noted on drawings.
D. Site Underground Conduit: Unless otherwise noted, minimum underground raceways
shall be one (3/4) inch conduit.
E. System Conduit: Provide end bushings on all conduits.
F. Pull Strings: Provide pull strings in all conduits. Pull strings shall be nylon and shall be
impervious to moisture. Pull strings installed in one (3/4) inch and smaller conduits shall
have a tensile strength of not less than thirty (30) lbs. Pull strings installed in conduits
larger than one (1) inch shall have a tensile strength not less than two hundred (200) lbs.
1.9 BONDING AND GROUNDING
A. General: Bonding and Grounding shall be in compliance with EIA/TIA-607-A.
B. General: Refer to spec section 27 05 26 for additional requirements.
1.10 FOUR HOUR WALL FIRESTOP WALL PENETRATIONS
A. Classification and use: The fire stop device for use in through-penetration fire stop
systems shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 5
UL1479 (ASTM E 814) and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark. The
device shall be classified for use in one-, two-, three-, and four-hour rated gypsum,
concrete and block walls and provide a maximum L rating of six cfm. The devices shall
also been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL2043 and determined to be
suitable for use in air handling spaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
A. Fittings: Provide steel set screw fittings for conduit size ¾” and 1". Steel set screw or
malleable iron (diecast) set screw fittings are permitted on conduit sizes 1-1/4" and larger.
Steel fittings shall be fitted with non removable insulated throats, and male threaded ends
provided with a locknut.
B. Locknuts: Provide locknuts for securing conduit to enclosures with sharp edges for
digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening.
2.2 BUSHINGS
A. Bushings: Bushings shall be provided on all terminations, all system conduits, mounted
on the ends of all EMT connectors.
B. Construction: Bushings shall have a flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth insides
to prevent damage to cable insulation.
C. Insulating Ring: Mold a phenolic insulating ring into sizes 1-1/4 inches and larger.
2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT
A. Conduit: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hi-torque threads. One end of the conduit
shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color-coded plastic thread
protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in 10 foot lengths.
B. Fittings: Fittings shall be cut groove steel. Cast fittings are not acceptable.
C. All Rigid galvanized conduits below grade shall be painted with asphalt corrosive
protective coating.
2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
A. Type: Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be high frequency electro-welded into tube
form to produce a high ductile conduit that can be easily bent with standard tools
approved for IMC.
B. General: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hi-torque threads. One end of the conduit
shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color-coded plastic thread
protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in ten (10) foot lengths.
C. Finish: The electro-galvanized zinc finish shall be corrosion resistant and shall not crack
or flake. A chromate conversion coating shall be applied over the entire tube as an
additional corrosive preventative. The interior shall be protected and lubricated with
special silicone hard finish enamel.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 6
2.5 MALLEABLE IRON EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Type: Conduit expansion fittings shall be malleable iron (hot dipped galvanized inside
and outside).
B. Fittings: These fittings shall have a four (4) inch expansion chamber to allow
approximately two (2) inch movement parallel to conduit run in either direction from
normal.
C. Internal Bonding: Fittings shall have factory-installed packing and internal tinned copper
braid packing to serve as a bonding jumper.
D. External Bonding: Unless the fitting used is listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use
"without external bonding jumpers", an external copper bonding jumper shall be installed
with each metal expansion fitting. One end of the fitting shall be clamped on each conduit
entering fitting.
2.6 WIREWAYS
A. General: Wireway shall be sized as shown on drawings, NEMA 1, lay-in type. Wireway
sides and bottom shall contain no knock-outs unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
The Contractor shall punch holes required. The cover shall be hinge type with quarter
turn fasteners to hold cover shut. Covers and bodies shall be 16 gauge steel. Wireway
shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Company, Square "D" or Steel City.
2.7 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hangers: Hangers shall be made of durable materials suitable for the application
involved. Where excessive corrosive conditions are encountered, hanger assemblies
shall be protected after fabrication by galvanizing, or approved suitable preservative
methods.
B. Materials: Insert anchors shall be installed on concrete or brick construction, with hex
head machine screws. Recessed head screws shall be used in wood construction. An
electric or hand drill shall be used for drilling holes for all inserts in concrete or similar
construction. Installed inserts, brick, shall be near center of brick, not near edge or in joint.
Drilled and tapped, and round head machine screws shall be used where steel members
occur. All screws, bolts, washers, etc., used for supporting conduit or outlets shall be
fabricated from rust-resisting metal, or accepted substitution. Gunpowder or lead set
anchors are not permitted.
C. Exterior: Supporting devices for exterior use shall be 3/16 stainless steel unless
otherwise noted on drawings.
2.8 UNDERGROUND DUCT LINES
A. Description: Underground duct lines shall be of individual conduits.
B. Conduits: The joints of the conduits shall be staggered by rows so as to provide a duct
line having the maximum strength. During construction partially complete duct lines shall
be protected from the entrance of debris, such as mud, sand and dirt by means of
suitable conduit plugs. As the duct line is completed, a testing mandrel not less than 13
inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the size of the stiff bristles shall be drawn
through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; conduit plug shall
then be immediately installed.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 7
C. Conduit: Use and installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code
requirements for the installation of metallic rigid conduit.
D. Trench: Trenches for duct banks shall be completely dry before setting conduits. Well
pointing as required shall be provided if necessary to keep trench dry.
E. Excavation: Backfilling shall be in layers not more than eight (8) inches deep, and shall
be thoroughly tamped. The first layer shall be earth or sand, free from particles that
would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The succeeding layers shall be excavated material
having stones no larger than would pass through a four (4) inch ring. The backfill shall be
level with adjacent surface, except that in sodded or paved areas, a space equal to the
thickness of the sod or paving shall be left.
F. Finish: The surface disturbed during the installation of duct shall be restored to its original
elevation and condition if not refinished in connection with site work.
G. Plugging: All unused conduit openings shall be plugged or capped with a suitable device
designed for the purpose; caulking compound shall not be used for plugging conduit
openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INDOOR CONDUITS BELOW GRADE AND ABOVE GRADE
A. Conduits shall utilize long radius sweeps at all 90 degree transitions. The inside radius of
a bend in conduit shall be at least six (6) times the internal diameter. When the conduit
size is greater than two (2) inches, the inside radius shall be at least ten (10) times the
internal diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic cable, the inside radius of a bend shall
always be at least ten (10) times the internal diameter of the conduit
B. For indoor above grade installation no section of conduit shall be longer than one hundred
(200) ft or contain more than two (2) 90 degree bends between pull points or pull boxes
are required. For indoor underground installation no section of conduit shall be longer
than six hundred (600) ft or contain more than two 90 degree bends between pull points
or pull boxes are required.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF BOXES
A. Tags: During installation of pull strings all pull strings shall be marked with vinyl tags
indicating where the opposite end may be found.
3.3 BLANK PLATES
A. Plates: Unless otherwise noted all outlet boxes shall receive blank plates matching the
finish of plates on electrical devices in the same room.
3.4 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Support: All raceways shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be
properly supported and in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. Supporting
conduit and boxes with wire is not acceptable. Exposed raceways where allowed, shall
be supported with clamp fasteners with toggle bolt on hollow walls, and with no lead
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 8
expansion shields on masonry. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place with at
least one support per eight foot section. Support within one foot of changes in direction.
All required hangers, supports and fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at no
more than one foot from the end of each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. The
use of perforated iron for supporting conduits shall not be permitted. The required
strength of the supporting equipment and size and type of anchors shall be based on the
combined weight of conduit, hanger and cables. Horizontal and vertical conduit runs may
be supported by one-hole malleable straps, clamp-backs, or other accepted devices with
suitable bolts, expansion shields (where needed) or beam-clamps for mounting to building
structure or special brackets.
B. Hanger Installation: Where two (2) or more conduits one (1) inch or larger run parallel,
trapeze hangers may be used consisting of concrete inserts, threaded solid rods,
washers, nuts and galvanized "L" angle iron, or Unistrut cross members. These conduits
shall be individually fastened to the cross member of every other trapeze hanger with
galvanized cast one hole straps, clamp backs, bolted with proper size cadmium machine
bolts, washers and nuts. If adjustable trapeze hangers are used to support groups of
parallel conduits, U-bolt type clamps shall be used at the end of a conduit run and at each
elbow. J-bolts, or approved clamps, shall be installed on each third intermediate trapeze
hanger to fasten each conduit.
C. Sealant: Provide a closed cell silicone foam sealant rated to provide a rating equal to the
wall, ceiling, or floor assembly rating. Provide seals for the exterior of conduit
penetrations consisting of a cast-in-place sleeve with a compressible rubber gasket
between the conduit and the sleeve. Provide seals for the interior of the conduit
penetrations consisting of gland type sealing bushing or closed cell silicone foam.
Provide duct seal inside an appropriate seal-off fitting to seal the interior of the conduit
system from water seepage or hazardous gases.
D. Routing: Conduits shall be run parallel to building walls wherever possible, exposed or
concealed as specified, and shall be grouped in workmanlike fashion. Crisscrossing of
conduits shall be minimized.
E. Location: All raceways shall be run concealed from view. It is the intent that all raceways
shall be run concealed unless specifically noted.
F. Protection: All raceway runs, whether terminated in boxes or not, shall be capped during
the course of construction until wires are pulled in and covers are in place. No conductors
shall be pulled into raceways until the raceway system is clean and complete.
G. Coordination: All raceways shall be kept clear of mechanical equipment and plumbing
fixtures to facilitate future repair or replacement of said fixtures without disturbing wiring.
Except where it is necessary for control purposes, all raceways shall be kept away from
items producing heat.
H. Masonry Installation: All raceway runs in masonry shall be installed at the same time as
the masonry so that no face cutting is required, except to accommodate boxes.
I. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawing of proposed conduit installation.
3.5 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Locknuts: Rigid steel box connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings.
Turn down on threads to solidly connect raceway to box or enclosure.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 27 - 9
B. Bushings: Grounded insulated bushings shall be used on all rigid steel conduits
terminating in panels, wire gutters, or cabinets. Bushing shall be impact resistant plastic
molded in an irregular shape at the top to provide smooth insulating surface at top and
inner edge. Material in these bushings must not melt or support flame.
3.6 INTERMEDIATE METALLIC TUBING
A. Location: Install Intermediate Metallic Tubing inside buildings, above the ground floor
embedded in the concrete slab where shown on the drawings.
3.7 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
A. Location: Install Electrical Metallic Tubing (thin wall) inside buildings, above the ground
floor where not subject to mechanical injury where shown on the drawings.
B. Handling: All cut ends shall be reamed to remove rough edges.
3.8 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Installation: Provide expansion fittings in each conduit run wherever it crosses an
expansion joint. Install the fitting on one side of the joint with its sliding sleeve end flush
with joint, and with a length of bonding jumper in expansion equal to at least three times
the normal width of joints.
B. Location: Provide expansion fittings in each conduit run which is mechanically attached to
separate structures to relieve strain caused by shift on one structure in relation to the
other.
C. Length: Provide expansion fittings in straight conduit runs above ground which are more
than one hundred (100) feet long.
3.9 AVOIDING EMI and INTEFERENCE
A. To avoid low voltage signal Interference for Sound and Video conduit containing cabling,
all conduits shall provide clearances as shown on the drawings. To avoid EMI
interference for Sound and Video conduit containing cabling, all conduits shall provide
clearances of at least four (4) feet (1.2 meters) from motors or transformers; one (1) foot
(0.3 meter) from conduit and cables used for electrical-power distribution; and five (5)
inches (12 centimeters) from fluorescent lighting. Raceways shall cross perpendicular to
fluorescent lighting and electrical-power cables and conduits. The Contractor shall not
place any raceway alongside power lines.
END OF SECTION 27 0527
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 1
SECTION 27 05 28
RACEWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
section.
Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems, does not apply to work of
this Section. Specifications described herein take precedence over any other section with
regards to raceways for the Structure Cabling System.
B. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
260529 COMBINED LOW VOLTAGE/POWER FLOOR BOXES
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
C. Standards (Current Editions)
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569A “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces”.
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard”, CSA T529.
3. ANSI/NECA/ BICSI 568-2001 “Installing Commercial building
Telecommunications Cabling”.
4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A “Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”.
5. ANSI/NFPA 70 (2008) National Electrical Code, CSA C22.1.
6. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (Eleventh
Edition or latest).
7. BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM).
8. County Codes and Regulations.
9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
10. FCC -Federal Communications Commission.
11. ADA Requirements.
12. Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA).
13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
14. Florida Statutes and Administrative Rules
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Furnish and install complete with all accessories an EIA/TIA 569A Pathways and
Spaces infrastructure for supporting of Structured Cabling System (SCS) and housing of
voice/data equipment. The goal of the project is to provide a reliable architecture of the
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 2
building that shall serve as a support for transport of data and voice telephony cabling,
copper and fiber optics, throughout the building from designated demarcation points to
places located at various wall, floor, raised floor, ceiling, column, room and other locations
as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein. The cabling that shall be
supported includes, but is not limited to:
1. Copper: UTP 4PR CAT (3,5,5e, 6 and 6A) plenum and non-plenum, Multipair
CAT (3, 5 and 5e) plenum and non-plenum, Multipair telephone general purpose
plenum and Non-plenum, RJ45 Patch Panels and Jacks, 110 Punch down
blocks, Wire management devices.
2. Fiber Optic: Air blown Fiber cables, Conventional fiber optic cables, Fiber
distribution and Termination Cabinets.
3. Other: Hybrid Cables, Composite cables, Floor Racks and cabinets, Wall
mounted racks and cabinets.
The equipment that shall be housed, provided by the Owner, include but are not limited to:
1. Voice Telephony: PBX, VoIP switches and Call Manager.
2. Data: Hub, Switch, Router, Modem, Repeater, Transceiver, DSU/CSU.
3. Other: Multiplexer, multipurpose switch, UPS.
B. General: For pathways the system shall utilize a combination of PVC Conduit, Metallic
conduit, Metallic cable and/or basket tray for vertical and horizontal cabling support.
Pathways shall be provided and located as shown on the drawings. Pathways shall
terminate in rooms, floor, walls or closets using approved fasteners and termination
hardware and bushing and shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges.
C. General: All Pathways shall be identified at all locations.
D. All installers should anticipate that all products and installation procedures shall comply
with the ANSI/NECA/ BICSI 568-2001 “Installing Commercial building
Telecommunications Cabling” requirements at a minimum.
E. General: Provide all supports, hangers and inserts required to mount conduit, pull boxes,
trays and other equipment provided under this Division.
F. Support: All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building. Supports
and hangers shall be of a type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. Wire shall not be
used as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or fastened to ceiling
suspension wires or to ceiling channels. Do not install any devices supported by ceiling
tiles or raised floor tiles.
G. Installation: The Contractor shall layout and provide his work in advance of the laying of
floors or walls, and shall provide all sleeves that may be required for openings through
floors, walls, etc. Where plans call for conduit to be run exposed, provide all inserts and
clamps for the supporting of conduit.
H. Work Included: Placement and terminations of all raceways between these designated
demarcation points and locations designated on the plans shall be considered part of the
contract.
1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. General: The contractor selected for the Project must be BICSI certified installer in good
standing and certified by the manufacturer for the products, adhere to the engineering,
installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 3
and distribution channels in provisioning the Project.
B. General: The Contractor directly responsible for this work shall be a " Pathways and
Spaces for Structured Cabling System Contractor (PS-SCS) " who is, and who has been,
regularly engaged in the providing and installation of commercial and industrial pathways
and spaces for telecommunications wiring systems of this type and size for at least the
immediate past five years. Any sub contractor who will assist the PS-SCS contractor in
performance of this work, shall have the same training and certification as the PS-SCS
contractor.
C. Certification: The contractor's Project Manager shall possess a current and in good
standing BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certificate. All
shop drawings submitted by the contractor shall bear the RCDD's seal.
D. Experience: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The
Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful
installation and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and
equipment.
1.4 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING
A. General: Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall
be governed by provisions of this specification.
1.5 MATERIALS
A. Quality Assurance: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of
conduit systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA.
B. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on
the drawings. Install with aluminum fittings only, when specified.
C. PVC Conduit: PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on the
drawings. Install with PVC fittings only, when specified.
D. Flexible metal conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall not be used unless specifically called
for on the drawings. Install with metal fittings only, when specified.
E. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards as
they apply to the different raceway types specified herein;
1. ANSI:
a. ANSI C80.1: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC).
b. ANSI C80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
2. UL:
a. UL 1: Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. UL 6: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC).
c. UL 514: Fittings for Metal Conduit.
d. UL 651: Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC).
e. UL 797: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 4
f. UL 886: Fittings for Hazardous Locations.
g. UL 1242: Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
3. NEMA:
a. NEMA TC2: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC).
b. NEMA TC3: Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNMC).
c. NEMA TC8: Utility Duct Type EB-35.
d. NEMA RN1: Plastic Coated Metal Conduit.
e. NEMA VE-1: Ladder Cable Tray.
f. NEMA VE-2: Cable Tray installations guidelines.
4. Federal Specifications:
a. WW-C-581: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC).
b. WW-C-563: Electrical Metallic Conduit (EMT).
c. WW-C-566: Flexible Steel Conduit.
d. WW-C-581E: Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC).
e. WC-1094A: Nonmetallic Rigid Conduit (PVC).
f. WC-582A Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fittings; surface
5. ASTM:
a. ASTM-F-512: Utility duct type EB-35.
b. ASTM-A525 & ASTM-386: Tray manufacturers
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Products: Submit manufacturer's product data, including technical information on each
type of raceway system;
1. Conduits
2. Conduit fittings
3. Plastic (PVC) solvent
4. Insulating and grounding bushings for conduit
5. Galvanizing and protective coatings for conduit
6. Cable tray: materials, finish and dimensions
7. Cable tray accessories and supports, load and deflection data
8. Cable tray layout and installation details
9. Cable Runway: materials, finish and dimensions
10. Cable Runway accessories and supports, load and deflection data
11. Cable Runway layout and installation details
12. Free wire cable supports: J-hooks and all other specified cable fasteners.
13. Plywood backboards
B. Compliance: Product data shall show compliance with this section of the specifications,
including U.L. label, manufacturer and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1.7 LOCATIONS
A. Materials Above Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed above grade
where specifically noted herein;
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 5
1. Electrical metallic tubing (thin wall)
2. Intermediate metallic conduit
3. Galvanized rigid steel conduit
4. Flexible metal conduit
5. Heavy wall Schedule 40 PVC
6. Extra heavy wall Schedule 80 PVC
B. Materials Below Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed below grade where
specifically noted herein;
1. Rigid galvanized conduit (heavy wall)
2. PVC encased in concrete.
3. Heavy wall Schedule 40 PVC
4. Extra heavy wall Schedule 80 PVC
C. Materials on Roofs: The following conduit types are to be installed on roofs where
specifically noted herein;
1. Rigid steel conduit (PVC) coated
2. Rigid steel conduit
1.8 CONDUIT
A. General: Provide a complete and continuous system of raceways where indicated on the
drawings to maintain a protected path for wires and cables to distribute Structured
Cabling System throughout the project, utilizing U.L. listed and labeled materials.
B. Accessories: Provide conduit accessories of types, sizes, and materials, as specified
herein complying with manufacturers published product information, which match and
mate conduit and tubing.
C. Interior Minimum Size: Interior Minimum Size: Minimum conduit size for Structured
Cabling System (SCS) shall be one (1) inch unless otherwise noted on drawings.
D. Site Underground Conduit: Unless otherwise noted, minimum underground raceways
shall be one (1) inch conduit.
E. System Conduit: Provide end bushings on all conduits.
F. Pull Strings: Provide pull strings in all conduits. Pull strings shall be nylon and shall be
impervious to moisture. Pull strings installed in one (1) inch and smaller conduits shall
have a tensile strength of not less than thirty (30) lbs. Pull strings installed in conduits
larger than one (1) inch shall have a tensile strength not less than two hundred (200) lbs.
1.9 CABLE TRAY
A. Description: Provide a system of manufactured, factory assembled, cable and/or basket
tray, where indicated on the drawings, to provide a convenient method of routing,
organizing, and separating cables of different systems, and running in close proximity of
one another where specified herein. Unless otherwise noted, the system shall be a
continuous system bonded together to make a continuous grounding path. Where system
is discontinuous, provide a #10 bonding conductor between the pieces of the system, and
bond as previously indicated. Cable tray shall include all supporting devices and
equipment, as listed on drawings and as specified herein with all necessary fittings, and
hardware (e.g. dividers, splice plates, bolts, nuts, washers, clips, covers, etc.) from a
single manufacturer, required for a complete tray installation system.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 6
B. Classification: Cable trays are classified into three categories: Standard cable tray, Basket
type cable tray and Runway type cable tray. Standard cable trays are classified into two
sub-categories: Ladder Type and Spine Type.
C. General: Above lay-in ceilings and below raised floor areas, Basket type cable tray shall
be installed as shown on the drawings. Runway cable tray is to be installed in the
telecommunication rooms as indicated on the drawings.
1.10 PLYWOOD BOARDS IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS
A. Plywood Backboards shall be provided in all Telecommunications rooms on walls
mounted at 6” or 12” A.F.F. as shown on the drawings Rooms shall have all walls
covered except the areas adjacent to the door light switch space, unless otherwise shown
on the drawings.
1.11 BONDING AND GROUNDING
A. General: Bonding and Grounding shall be in compliance with EIA/TIA-607-A.
B. General: Refer to spec section 27 05 26 for additional requirements.
C. General: Refer to drawings for grounding details.
1.12 FOUR HOUR WALL FIRESTOP WALL PENETRATIONS
A. Classification and use: The fire stop device for use in through-penetration fire stop
systems shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to
UL1479 (ASTM E 814) and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark. The
device shall be classified for use in one-, two-, three-, and four-hour rated gypsum,
concrete and block walls and provide a maximum L rating of six cfm. The devices shall
also been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL2043 and determined to be
suitable for use in air handling spaces.
1.13 RAISED FLOOR GROMMET IN MTR ROOM AND SERVER ROOM
A. Raised floor grommet with brush closure to block airflow, protect cables and allow easy
installation or removal of cables shall be provided at all openings in the raised floor tiles
within the MTR and Server room
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
A. Fittings: Provide steel set screw fittings for conduit size 1". Steel set screw or malleable
iron (diecast) set screw fittings are permitted on conduit sizes 1-1/4" and larger. Steel
fittings shall be fitted with non removable insulated throats, and male threaded ends
provided with a locknut.
B. Locknuts: Provide locknuts for securing conduit to enclosures with sharp edges for
digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 7
2.2 BUSHINGS
A. Bushings: Bushings shall be provided on all terminations, all system conduits, mounted
on the ends of all EMT connectors.
B. Construction: Bushings shall have a flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth insides
to prevent damage to cable insulation.
C. Insulating Ring: Mold a phenolic insulating ring into sizes 1-1/4 inches and larger.
2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT
A. Conduit: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hi-torque threads. One end of the conduit
shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color-coded plastic thread
protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in 10 foot lengths.
B. Fittings: Fittings shall be cut groove steel. Cast fittings are not acceptable.
2.4 HEAVY WALL PVC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40)
A. Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 degrees C. UL rated, PVC conduit shall be composed of High
Impact PVC (polyvinyl chloride C-2000 Compound), and shall conform to industry
standards, and be UL listed in accordance with Article 347 of National Electrical Code for
underground and exposed use. Materials must have tensile strength of 55 PSI, at 70
degrees F., flexural strength of 11,000 psi, and compression strength of 8600 psi.
Manufacturer shall have five years extruding PVC experience.
2.5 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
A. Type: Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be high frequency electro-welded into tube
form to produce a high ductile conduit that can be easily bent with standard tools
approved for IMC.
B. General: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hi-torque threads. One end of the conduit
shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color-coded plastic thread
protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in ten (10) foot lengths.
C. Finish: The electro-galvanized zinc finish shall be corrosion resistant and shall not crack
or flake. A chromate conversion coating shall be applied over the entire tube as an
additional corrosive preventative. The interior shall be protected and lubricated with a
special silicone hard finish enamel.
2.6 MALLEABLE IRON EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Type: Conduit expansion fittings shall be malleable iron (hot dipped galvanized inside
and outside).
B. Fittings: These fittings shall have a four (4) inch expansion chamber to allow
approximately two (2) inch movement parallel to conduit run in either direction from
normal.
C. Internal Bonding: Fittings shall have factory-installed packing and internal tinned copper
braid packing to serve as a bonding jumper.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 8
D. External Bonding: Unless the fitting used is listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use
"without external bonding jumpers", an external copper bonding jumper shall be installed
with each metal expansion fitting. One end of the fitting shall be clamped on each conduit
entering fitting.
2.7 WIREWAYS
A. General: Wire way shall be sized as shown on drawings, NEMA 1, lay-in type. Wire way
sides and bottom shall contain no knock-outs unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
The Contractor shall punch holes required. The cover shall be hinge type with quarter
turn fasteners to hold cover shut. Covers and bodies shall be 16 gauge steel. Wire way
shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Company, Square "D" or Steel City.
2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hangers: Hangers shall be made of durable materials suitable for the application
involved. Where excessive corrosive conditions are encountered, hanger assemblies
shall be protected after fabrication by galvanizing, or approved suitable preservative
methods.
B. Materials: Insert anchors shall be installed on concrete or brick construction, with hex
head machine screws. Recessed head screws shall be used in wood construction. An
electric or hand drill shall be used for drilling holes for all inserts in concrete or similar
construction. Installed inserts, brick, shall be near center of brick, not near edge or in joint.
Drilled and tapped, and round head machine screws shall be used where steel members
occur. All screws, bolts, washers, etc., used for supporting conduit or outlets shall be
fabricated from rust-resisting metal, or accepted substitution. Gunpowder or lead set
anchors are not permitted.
C. Exterior: Supporting devices for exterior use shall be 3/16 stainless steel unless
otherwise noted on drawings.
2.9 CABLE TRAY AND FITTINGS
A. General Description: Basket type cable tray system is to be constructed of welded steel
wire mesh with continuous safety edge wire lip. Provide mesh system permitting for
continuous ventilation of cables and maximum heat dissipation.
B. Materials: Carbon Steel: Cable management system to be manufactured from high
strength minimum 6 gauge steel wires. Wire to be welded and bent prior to surface
treatment.
C. Finishes: Electro-plated zinc Galvanizing: Electrodeposited zinc coating applied to an
average thickness of 0.7 mils to 0.8 mils.
D. Hot Dip Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanizing in molten zinc bath providing an average coating
thickness of 2.4 mils to 3.2 mils.
E. Equipment Gray: Powder painted surface treatment using ASA 61 Gray Polyester coating
or as shown on the drawings.
F. Cable tray dimensions: as shown on the drawings.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 9
G. Fittings: Cable tray fittings to be field manufactured from straight sections through use of
hardware and instructions recommended by Manufacturer. Provide drop-off, 90° kits and
tees as required using manufacturer fabricated products and installation guidelines.
H. Installation: Cable tray system to be installed using splice connectors, and support
components as recommended by the Manufacturer.
I. Loading Cable tray system to be installed and supported per NEMA VE-2 and
Manufacturer’s suggested span load criteria.
J. The cable tray system shall be UL listed and classified as a continuous bonded tray
system providing a continuous grounding path. Cable tray system is required to be tested
for grounding adequacy per NFPA 70B, Chapter 18 with a maximum allowable resistance
of 1 ohm.
K. Approved Manufacturers: Wiremold, Cablofil, Snake Tray, B-line or Chatsworth
2.10 RUNWAY CABLE TRAY AND FITTINGS
A. Materials: ASIM A36 steel bar.
B. Finish & Size: Equipment Gray: Baked Powder painted surface treatment using Polyester
coating.
C. Cable management tray width: as shown on the drawings.
D. Fittings: Cable management fittings and hardware recommended by Manufacturer.
Provide drop-off, 90° and tees as required for the equipment served and support of the
cable.
E. Installation: Cable management system to be installed using support components as
recommended by the Manufacturer.
F. Loading: Cable management system to be installed and supported per Manufacturer’s
suggested span load criteria.
G. Approved Manufacturers: B-line, GS Metals, Chatsworth, B-Line.
2.11 UNDERGROUND TELECOMMUNICATIONS DUCT LINES
A. Description: Underground duct lines shall be of individual conduits. Conduits shall be
encased in concrete where indicated on the plan drawings and ductbank sections. The
conduit shall be of plastic, PVC Schedule 40, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
The conduit used shall not be smaller than four (4) inches in diameter, inside, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings. The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank
shall be reinforced as shown and rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum
concrete thickness of two (2) inches. Conduit shall be separated by a minimum concrete
thickness of two (2) inches.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 10
B. General: The concrete work shall conform to Section on "Concrete". The top of the
concrete envelope shall be not less than eighteen (18) inches below grade. Concrete
shall be installed in a continuous pour to eliminate joints in the duct run. Duct lines shall
have a continuous slope downward toward manholes and away from buildings with a pitch
of not less than three (3) inches in one hundred (100) feet. Changes in direction of runs
exceeding a total of ten (10) degrees either vertical or horizontal shall be accomplished by
long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of twenty five (25) feet, except
that manufactured bends may be made up on one or more curved or straightened
sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of
forty eight (48) inches.
C. Conduits: Conduits shall terminate in end-bells where duct lines enter manholes. Provide
four (4) to six (6) inch reducers as required. Separators shall be of pre-cast concrete,
high impact polystyrene, steel or any combination of these. The joints of the conduits
shall be staggered by rows so as to provide a duct line having the maximum strength.
During construction partially complete duct lines shall be protected from the entrance of
debris, such as mud, sand and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As the duct line is
completed, a testing mandrel not less than 13 inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch less
than the size of the stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all
particles of earth, sand or gravel; conduit plug shall then be immediately installed.
D. Conduit: Plastic conduit, fittings and joints shall not have been stored in the sun or
weather, in any excessively heated space, or unevenly supported during storage. Use
and installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code requirements for
the installation of non-metallic rigid conduit. Plastic conduit shall be protected against the
direct rays of the sun prior to installation. Conduit shall be Carlon Type EB, Queen City
Plastics, or accepted substitution. Conduit shall be U.L. listed and conform to NEMA
Standard TC6-1972.
E. Trench: Trenches for duct banks shall be completely dry before setting conduits or
pouring concrete. Well pointing as required shall be provided if necessary to keep trench
dry.
F. Excavation: Backfilling shall be in layers not more than eight (8) inches deep, and shall
be thoroughly tamped. The first layer shall be earth or sand, free from particles that
would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The succeeding layers shall be excavated material
having stones no larger than would pass through a four (4) inch ring. The backfill shall be
level with adjacent surface, except that in sodded or paved areas, a space equal to the
thickness of the sod or paving shall be left.
G. Finish: The surface disturbed during the installation of duct shall be restored to its original
elevation and condition if not refinished in connection with site work.
H. Plugging: All unused conduit openings shall be plugged or capped with a suitable device
designed for the purpose; caulking compound shall not be used for plugging conduit
openings.
2.12 PLYWOOD BOARDS IN TELECOMMUNICATIOSN ROOMS
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 11
A. Plywood Backboard: Backboards shall be installed in each TR and the MTR on walls to a
height of 8' AFF. Rooms shall have walls covered as shown on the drawings. Plywood
shall be ¾” AC Grade with the best side out. All imperfections and voids shall be filled,
sealed and sanded prior to being primed and painted with two (2) coats of UL Classified,
fire retardant intumescent paint on the front, back and all four sides of the plywood. Fire
retardant coating shall be tested to UL723, “Test for surface burning characteristics of
building materials.” Color to be grey, white or blue. Coordinate color selection with the
owner/Architect. Backboards shall be clearly labeled with the name of the Backboard
Manufacturer, UL Classification of the Fire Retardant Coating, NFPA 255 Coating Flame
Spread Index Class and the APA Grade of the plywood.
B. Design Selection: Series Pathways & Spaces, Inc. ReadySpec Series. Or equal, field
fabricated backboards to all of the specifications listed above for “plywood backboards”.
All voids shall be filled and sanded smooth, prior to applying 1 coat of primer, and two
coats of UL Classified Fire Retardant paint. The contractor shall provide proof that ¾” AC
Grade Plywood and UL Classified paint was used in making the backboards.
Furthermore, the contractor shall provide verification that all backboards were primed,
and painted on all sides (front, back and all sides) with two coats of the required paint.
Proof of compliance shall be submitted upon project completion as part of the closeout
documentation.
C. Terminal Board Conduits: Conduits at Terminal board locations shall be neatly racked on
a Kindorf Type rack secured to wall above and below terminal boards.
2.13 FOUR HOUR WALL FIRESTOP PENETRATIONS
A. Manufacturer: The fire stop device specified herein shall be the flame stopper thru-wall
fitting as manufactured by the Wiremold Company. Fire stop devices of other
manufacturers may be considered equal if, in the opinion and the written approval of the
engineer, they meet all the performance standards specified herein.
B. Materials:
Box: The fire stop device box shall be constructed of 16 gage g90 steel.
Intumescent block: The fire stop device intumescent block shall be constructed of a
graphite base material with expansion starting at 375 f and an unrestrained expansion
between 6 to 12 times. The intumescent block shall be held securely by the box in order
to prevent tampering and damage during installation.
Adjustable doors: the fire stop device shall have doors which can be adjusted to prevent
materials from penetrating the device if the device is empty or completely full. The doors
shall be constructed of 16 gage g90 steel with no. 10-32 screws use to adjust opening
size.
C. Sizes: the fire stop device shall be available for two (2) inch and four (4) inch trade size
emt conduit.
D. Finish: the fire stop device shall be available in safety yellow or orange powder coat,
custom colors and an unpainted galvanized finish.
2.14 RAISED FLOOR GROMMET IN MTR ROOM AND SERVER ROOM
A. Raised floor grommet with brush closure to block airflow, protect cables and allow easy
installation or removal of cables. Design selection: CPI KOLDLOK series.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INDOOR CONDUITS BELOW GRADE AND ABOVE GRADE
A. Conduits shall utilize long radius sweeps at all 90 degree transitions. The inside radius of
a bend in conduit shall be at least six (6) times the internal diameter. When the conduit
size is greater than two (2) inches, the inside radius shall be at least ten (10) times the
internal diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic cable, the inside radius of a bend shall
always be at least ten (10) times the internal diameter of the conduit
B. For indoor installation no section of conduit shall be longer than one hundred (100) ft or
contain more than two (2) 90 degree bends between pull points or pull boxes are
required. For outdoor installation no section of conduit shall be longer than six hundred
(600) ft or contain more than two 90 degree bends between pull points or pull boxes are
required.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF BOXES
A. Tags: During installation of pull strings all pull strings shall be marked with vinyl tags
indicating where the opposite end may be found.
3.3 BLANK PLATES
A. Plates: Unless otherwise noted all outlet boxes shall receive blank plates matching the
finish of plates on electrical devices in the same room.
3.4 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Support: All raceways shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be
properly supported and in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. Supporting
conduit and boxes with wire is not acceptable. Exposed raceways where allowed, shall
be supported with clamp fasteners with toggle bolt on hollow walls, and with no lead
expansion shields on masonry. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place with at
least one support per eight foot section. Support within one foot of changes in direction.
All required hangers, supports and fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at no
more than one foot from the end of each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. The
use of perforated iron for supporting conduits shall not be permitted. The required
strength of the supporting equipment and size and type of anchors shall be based on the
combined weight of conduit, hanger and cables. Horizontal and vertical conduit runs may
be supported by one-hole malleable straps, clamp-backs, or other accepted devices with
suitable bolts, expansion shields (where needed) or beam-clamps for mounting to building
structure or special brackets.
B. Hanger Installation: Where two (2) or more conduits one (1) inch or larger run parallel,
trapeze hangers may be used consisting of concrete inserts, threaded solid rods,
washers, nuts and galvanized "L" angle iron, or Unistrut cross members. These conduits
shall be individually fastened to the cross member of every other trapeze hanger with
galvanized cast one hole straps, clamp backs, bolted with proper size cadmium machine
bolts, washers and nuts. If adjustable trapeze hangers are used to support groups of
parallel conduits, U-bolt type clamps shall be used at the end of a conduit run and at each
elbow. J-bolts, or approved clamps, shall be installed on each third intermediate trapeze
hanger to fasten each conduit.
C. Sealant: Provide a closed cell silicone foam sealant rated to provide a rating equal to the
wall, ceiling, or floor assembly rating. Provide seals for the exterior of conduit
penetrations consisting of a cast-in-place sleeve with a compressible rubber gasket
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 13
between the conduit and the sleeve. Provide seals for the interior of the conduit
penetrations consisting of gland type sealing bushing or closed cell silicone foam.
Provide duct seal inside an appropriate seal-off fitting to seal the interior of the conduit
system from water seepage or hazardous gases.
D. Routing: Conduits shall be run parallel to building walls wherever possible, exposed or
concealed as specified, and shall be grouped in workmanlike fashion. Crisscrossing of
conduits shall be minimized.
E. Location: All raceways in TR’s shall be run concealed from view. Surface mounted
devices and equipment shall be specifically noted on the contract drawings. It is the intent
that all raceways shall be run concealed unless specifically noted.
F. Protection: All raceway runs, whether terminated in boxes or not, shall be capped during
the course of construction until wires are pulled in and covers are in place. No conductors
shall be pulled into raceways until the raceway system is clean and complete.
G. Coordination: All raceways shall be kept clear of mechanical equipment and plumbing
fixtures to facilitate future repair or replacement of said fixtures without disturbing wiring.
Except where it is necessary for control purposes, all raceways shall be kept away from
items producing heat.
H. Masonry Installation: All raceway runs in masonry shall be installed at the same time as
the masonry so that no face cutting is required, except to accommodate boxes.
3.5 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Inspection: Examine area for clearances, to allow proper installation of the tray according
to the routing indicated on the drawings. Check existing building steel and other
supporting structures to establish the type of tray hangers to be used and at the proper
spans. Consult the field engineer for questionable areas or conflicts.
B. Installation Criteria: Install cable tray in accordance with manufacturer's data, written
instructions, NEC, NEMA and as specified herein. Cable tray accessories and installation
techniques not included in the cable tray manufacturer’s data are not allowed
C. Support: Cable tray support shall be by means of welded angle brackets to structural
components, brackets shall be as manufactured by the Cable tray manufacturer.
D. Grounding: All cable trays and conduits shall be grounded in accordance with the
National Electric Code, and/or as shown on drawings.
E. Coordination: Wherever possible, install horizontal cable trays above water and steam
piping. Coordinate installation of tray with other trades for clearances, to avoid conflicts. A
minimum of 300 mm (12 in) access headroom shall be provided and maintained above
the cable tray system or cable runway. A minimum of 150 mm (6 in) access headroom
shall be provided and maintained at one side (two sides if center hung support method
specified) of the cable tray system or cable runway. Care shall be taken to ensure that
other building components (e.g., air conditioning ducts, pipes, structural elements) do not
restrict access. The cable tray must be installed with at least 75mm (3 in) of clear vertical
space above the ceiling tiles and support channels (T-bars) to ensure accessibility. When
crossing other building components with the cable tray or runway the above specified
clearances shall be maintained.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 14
F. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawing of proposed cable tray installation to Division 15
for coordination.
3.6 SITE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. General: All underground raceways (with exception of raceways installed under floor
slab) shall be installed in accordance with Section 300-5 of the NEC except that the
minimum cover for any conduit or duct bank shall be two (2) feet, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Stubs: Spare conduit stubs shall be capped and marked in the field and accurately
dimensioned on the as-built drawings.
C. Separation: All conduit run underground, or stubbed above floor shall be separated with
plastic interlocking spacers manufactured specifically for this purpose, or shall be
strapped to Kindorf channel supported by conduit driven into ground or tied to steel.
3.7 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Locknuts: Rigid steel box connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings.
Turn down on threads to solidly connect raceway to box or enclosure.
B. Bushings: Grounded insulated bushings shall be used on all rigid steel conduits
terminating in panels, wire gutters, or cabinets. Bushing shall be impact resistant plastic
molded in an irregular shape at the top to provide smooth insulating surface at top and
inner edge. Material in these bushings must not melt or support flame.
3.8 PVC CONDUIT
A. Floor Penetrations Exposed: Where PVC penetrates a floor in an exposed location from
underground or in slab. The elbow may be PVC and extended not more than eighteen
(18) inches, without transitioning to metal conduit.
B. Location: No PVC shall be allowed anywhere except underground or in slab, with the
exception that PVC conduit may be used in non-fire rated poured block walls and poured
in place columns.
C. Floor Penetrations in Block: PVC may also be used for penetrations of floor into concrete
block or hollow walls up to first outlet box provided outlet box is at a maximum height of
48 inches above finished floor.
D. Joints: PVC joints shall be solvent welded. Threads shall not be permitted on PVC
conduit, except for rigid steel to PVC couplings. Installation of PVC conduit shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Restrict Support: PVC conduit shall not be used to support fixture or equipment.
F. Bends: Field bends shall be made with an approved hotbox. Heating with flame and
hand held dryers are prohibited.
3.9 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 15
A. Location: Install Electrical Metallic Tubing (thin wall) inside buildings, above the ground
floor where not subject to mechanical injury.
B. Handling: All cut ends shall be reamed to remove rough edges.
3.10 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Installation: Provide expansion fittings in each conduit run wherever it crosses an
expansion joint. Install the fitting on one side of the joint with its sliding sleeve end flush
with joint, and with a length of bonding jumper in expansion equal to at least three times
the normal width of joints.
B. Location: Provide expansion fittings in each conduit run which is mechanically attached to
separate structures to relieve strain caused by shift on one structure in relation to the
other.
C. Length: Provide expansion fittings in straight conduit runs above ground which are more
than one hundred (100) feet long.
3.11 FOUR HOUR WALL FIRESTOP PENETRATIONS
A. Installation: Prior to and during installation, refer to the system layout or approval
drawings containing all elements of the system. Installer shall comply with complete
system instruction sheets.
B. The fire stop device shall be installed in accordance with the UL Fire Resistance
Directory, as well as any applicable codes and standards for general building, electrical
and fire stopping installation practices.
3.12 AVOIDING EMI
A. To avoid EMI for Telecommunications cabling and/or conduit containing cabling, all
raceways shall provide clearances of at least four (4) feet (1.2 meters) from motors or
transformers; one (1) foot (0.3 meter) from conduit and cables used for electrical-power
distribution; and five (5) inches (12 centimeters) from fluorescent lighting. Raceways shall
cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical-power cables and conduits.
The Contractor shall not place any raceway alongside power lines.
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM (eleventh edition or latest) and TIA-569-B recommendations
for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI
sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
C. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
1. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
2. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
3. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
D. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
1. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
2. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 28 - 16
3. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
E. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power
lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:
1. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
2. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
3. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
END OF SECTION 27 0528
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 05 29 - 1
SECTION 27 0529
COMBINED LOW VOLTAGE / POWER FLOOR BOXES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified
of this section.
B. Reference Standards:
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A
4. J-STD-607-A
5. NEMA
6. UL 1863 Communication Circuit Accessories
7. UL-50 & UL-514
8. NEC
C. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
270528 RACEWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
260533 OUTLET BOXES
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. General: This specification covers a box system used for bringing power and low-voltage
devices to one location in an on grade or above grade concrete floor or under the raised
floor or poke-thru. The system shall consist of an in-the-floor box or poke-thru, mounting
brackets, dividers and power devices, trim ring, modular inserts and device faceplates for
a complete installation in accordance with the drawings. The system shall provide all
plates and bezels to mount Structured Cabling System devices. Poke-thru devices
provide flush device outlets that will not obstruct the floor area. The boxes shall be of
such form and dimensions as to be adapted to the specific use and location, type of
device or fixtures to be used, and number and size of conductors and cables, size and
number of conduits connecting thereto.
B. General: Provide floor outlet boxes and poke-thru as shown on the plans. Installation
shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and shall be complete with
service fittings as indicated. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 29 - 2
C. General: The raised floor box provides the interface between power and communication
cabling beneath a raised floor, and the workstation where both power and communication
device outlets are required. The box provides recessed device outlets that will not
obstruct the floor area. The box shall be provided in the prewired version that interfaces
with a power flexible wiring system. Only power devices are prewired.
D. Telecommunications Connections: Category 6 modular jack inserts are to be used in
conjunction with telecommunication mounting housings (i.e., faceplate, mounting bezel or
communication bracket). Category 6 modular jack inserts are designed to meet TIA/EIA
connecting hardware requirements as shown on the drawings and as specified in
specification section 17120.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of box
systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Submit manufacture’s data showing full range of specified products. Indicate
selected submittal items, including accessories, finishes and options.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for approval showing the complete layout of products
that make up the complete floor box and faceplate system. Electrical and communication
device locations on the drawings are diagrammatic. Location and type of outlets shall be
coordinated with appropriate trades involved. Final outlet locations shall be done with the
approval of the architect.
C. Samples: Submit samples of boxes complete with dividers, mounting brackets, trim
rings, face plates, labeling, inserts, and accessories.
D. Substitutions: Systems of other manufacturers may be considered. Written request for
approval must be submitted to the Construction Manager at least ten days prior to bid
date. Each request shall include the name of the materials, product data, samples and a
complete description of the proposed substitute.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES
A. General. Provide cast iron boxes for slab on grade applications, and steel boxes for slab
above grade applications. Outlets in slab on grade shall conform to Federal
Specifications No. WC-526b, Type 1, with threaded conduit hubs
B. Construction: All assemblies shall be designed and installed to maintain grounding
continuity, fireproofing and watertight integrity. Connections to boxes in slabs on grade
shall be made tight or sealed to prevent entrance of moisture.
C. Accessories: Box trim, service fittings and flanges, receptacle brackets, communications
brackets, and other accessories shall be as required to provide a complete installation.
D. Special Consideration: Flush caps removed to provide service fittings shall be turned
over to the Owner.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 29 - 3
E. This floor box shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to
Standard UL514A and/or UL514C and Canadian Standard C22.2, No. 18-92 and bear
the U.S. and Canadian UL Listing Mark. This floor box shall also conform to the
standards set in the National Electrical Code, Section 300-21. This floor box shall also
have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. and Canadian safety standards
for scrub water exclusion when used on tile, terrazzo, wood, and carpet covered floors.
F. The raised floor box is designed for indoor, dry location applications only, and shall have
been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., to their standard UL514A
and bear the Listing Mark.
G. Basis of design. The in-floor box described shall be Walker RFB4 manufactured by The
Wiremold Company. The raised floor box described shall be Walker AF4 manufactured
by the Wiremold Company. Floor boxes of other manufacturers may be considered, if
equal in functionality and quality, by written approval of the specifying engineer and shall
meet all the performance standards specified herein. Refer to “T” drawings for more
details on floor boxes selection and configurations. Refer to Electrical Drawings for
flexible power distribution system.
2.2 POKE THRU OUTLETS
A. Poke-thru device shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
to Standard UL514A and/or UL514C and Canadian Standard C22.2, No. 18-98 and bear
the U.S. and Canadian UL Listing Mark. This poke-thru device shall also have been
tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and Classified for fire resistance and bear the
U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark. Devices shall be classified for use in 1-, 1 1/2-
, or 2-hour rated, unprotected reinforced concrete floors and 1-, 1 1/2-, or 2-hour rated
floors employing unprotected steel floor units and concrete toppings (D900 Series
Designs) or concrete floors with suspended ceilings (fire resistive designs with
suspended ceilings should have provisions for accessibility in the ceiling below the poke-
thru fittings. This device shall also conform to the standards set in the National Electric
Code, Section 300-21. These devices meet all UL scrub water requirements, but are not
suitable for wet or damp locations, or other areas subject to saturation with water or other
liquids such as commercial kitchens. This poke-thru device shall also have been
evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. and Canadian safety standards for scrub
water exclusion when used on tile, terrazzo, wood, and carpet covered floors. Suitable for
use in air handling spaces in accordance with Sec 300-22 (C) of the National Electrical
Code.
B. Basis of design. The Poke-Thru described shall be Walker RC series manufactured by
The Wiremold Company. A Poke-thru of other manufacturers may be considered, if
equal in functionality and quality, by written approval of the specifying engineer and shall
meet all the performance standards specified herein. Refer to “T” drawings for more
details on poke-thus selection and configurations. Refer to Electrical drawings and
specifications for power distribution system.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 29 - 4
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES
A. Adjustment: Where floor or fill depth is 3 inches or more, adjustable boxes with
maximum vertical and angular adjustment for after concrete pour shall be used. After
pour is complete, boxes shall be set and readjusted to provide a smooth surface
conforming to the elevation and slope of the surrounding finished floor. The box shall
contain four locations to accommodate leveling for pre-concrete pour adjustment and
shall provide four leveling screws for the pre-pour adjustment.
B. Installation procedures and practices shall be in strict accordance with applicable codes
and standards. Prior to and during installation, refer to system layout drawing containing
elements of the systems. Installer shall comply with manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
C. Electrical Security: The boxes shall be electrically continuous and connected to electrical
outlets, boxes, and cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Installation drawings shall be furnished showing the appropriate power layouts where the
raised floor box and flexible wiring system is to be used. The installation must be
represented on the layout drawing in the form of a legend. The legend shall contain a
catalog number and a description describing the components use. Installer shall comply
with detailed manufacturer’s installation instruction sheets that accompany the raised
floor box.
3.2 POKE THRU INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be completed by pushing unit down into the cored hole. Prior to and
during installation, refer to system layout and/or approval drawings. Installer shall comply
with detailed manufacturer’s instruction sheet included with each device. The unit shall
contain a retainer for securing the device in the slab, as well as the necessary
intumescent material to seal the cored-hole under fire conditions.
B. Unit shall permit all wiring to be completed at floor level. The RC7, RC9, and RC9AMD
units shall mount in a 3" [76mm] cored-hole with an actual diameter of 3 1/16" [78mm].
The RC3 and RC4 units shall mount in a 4” [102mm] cored-hole with an actual diameter
of 4 1/16” [103mm]. Use is defined by the UL Fire Resistance Directory as a minimum
spacing of “2 ft. [610mm] on center and not more than one device per each 65 sq. ft.
[6m2] of floor area in each span.”
C. The maximum copper cross sectional area for the RC7 power compartment only is
.01536 sq. in. [9.91mm2]. The maximum copper cross sectional area for each
communication compartment only is .0040 sq. in [2.58mm2]. The RC7 Series contains
two communication compartments.
D. The maximum copper cross sectional area for the RC9 power compartment only is
.01536 sq. in. [9.91mm2]. The maximum copper cross sectional area for each
communication compartment only is .0040 sq. in [2.58mm2]. The RC9 Series contains
two communication compartments.
E. The maximum copper cross sectional area for the RC9AMD for each communication
compartment only is .0080 sq. in [5.16mm2]. The RC9AMD Series contains two
communication compartments.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 05 29 - 5
F. The maximum copper cross sectional area for the RC3 power compartment only is
.01536 sq. in. [9.91mm2]. The maximum copper cross sectional area for each
communication compartment only is .0080 sq. in [5.16mm2]. The RC3 Series contains
two communication compartments.
G. The maximum copper cross sectional area for the RC4 power compartment only is
.03072 sq. in. [19.82mm2]. The maximum copper cross sectional area for each
communication compartment only is .0080 sq. in [5.16mm2]. The RC4 Series contains
two communication compartments.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Communications Cabling Contractor’s quality control manager shall be a certified by
the Building Industry Consulting Service International as a Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD). The quality control manager shall be onsite during
performance of the work and he or she shall have installation responsibility for
communications cabling.
B. Completeness: Work shall include installing box, device mounting bracket, devices,
device plates, labels and blank plates for a complete in-the-floor system as indicated on
the drawings.
C. All equipment shall be warranted for one year from the date of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 27 0529
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 1
SECTION 27 10 00
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
section.
B. General: Telecommunications Drawings apply to work of this section. The overall and
detailed SCS design shown on the drawings, selected materials, device locations,
installation details, mounting details, cabling routing and supporting and all technical
specifications if provided on the drawings apply to work of this section.
C. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
270526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270527 RACEWAYS AND WIRING FOR AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
270528 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270529 COMBINED LOW VOLTAGE POWER FLOOR BOXES
280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
D. General: Installation practices for Structure Cabling System as describe herein take
precedence over any other section in the construction documents set.
E. Standards:
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C
”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard”
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 A
“Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces”
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2001 “ Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling”
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A “Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”, CSA T528.
J-STD-607-A “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthting) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications”.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 ”Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode
Fiber Cable Plant”
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A ”Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode
Fiber Cable Plant”
IEC/TR3 61000-5-2 - Ed. 1.0 and amendments. “Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) - Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines - Section 2: Earthing and
cabling”
ANSI/NFPA 70 (2008) “National Electrical Code”, CSA C22.1.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 2
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (Eleventh Edition
or latest)
BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM)
County Codes and Regulations.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
FCC -Federal Communications Commission
ADA Requirements
Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 2008)
Texas Statutes and Administrative Rules
Manufacturers Product Cabling Catalogs
Manufacturers Training Manuals (Design and Installation).
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Furnish, install, test and certify complete with all accessories an ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-C CAT6 Structured Cabling System (SCS) with a minimum 25 year performance
warranty for the entire system from the manufacturers and a minimum of 3 years warranty
for materials and labor from the cabling contractor. The goal of the project is to provide an
enhanced SCS that shall serve as a vehicle for the transport of voice telephony, data,
audio, video and security, throughout the building and from building to building from
designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desk, workstation and other
locations as indicated and if indicated on the contract drawings and described herein.
B. Support analog and digital signal applications on a common cabling platform. The
applications that shall be supported include, but are not limited to:
Data Processing - EIA-232-D, EIA-422A, EIA-423-A, RS-485, StarLAN, Fiber Distributed
Data Interface (FDDI), Ethernet 10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3i), 10BASE-F (IEEE 802.3j),
Token Ring 4/16Mbps (IEEE 802.5), and TP-PMD. In addition, these links/channels shall
be capable of supporting high-end applications such as 100 BASE-T (IEEE 802.3u),
1000BASE-T (IEEE 802.3ab), Gigabit ATM, Gigabit Token Ring and 1000BASE-TX
(ANSI/TIA/EIA-854) and 10 Gigabit Ethernet over fiber optics cable.
Voice Applications – Analog, Digital and VoIP
Video – Broadband and base band Analog Video, Digital Video, Video Conferencing.
C. General: The system shall utilize a network of unshielded twisted pair cables (UTP) and
fiber optic cables (FO) for horizontal cabling, Backbone cabling and patch cords. Cables
and terminations shall be provided and located as shown and in the quantities indicated
on the drawings. FO Cables shall terminate on rack or wall mounted Fiber Distribution
Centers (FDC's) as indicated on the drawings. UTP cables shall terminate on rack
mounted modular patch panels and work area outlets located as shown on the drawings.
D. Labeling: All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations according to the
TIA/EIA 606-A, labeling and numbering as shown on the drawings or as provided by the
owner. All cables shall be terminated in an alpha-numeric sequence at all termination
locations.
E. It is the contractor’s responsibility to stay under the 90 meter (295 ft) length limitation for
Horizontal Cabling with the exception of UTP cables to outlets for Wireless Access Points
for which the distance limitation is 80 meters (262 FT). All cabling shall run in cable tray
as long as possible while keeping the cable runs as short as possible. All Horizontal cable
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 3
shall be placed without diagonal runs. (i.e. parallel to walls and ceiling grid) unless
otherwise specifically indicated on the drawings.
F. Warranty: The SCS shall be required to be under the manufacturers warranty program for
a complete channel configuration including cable, jacks, patch cords and patch panels
and include cabling specifically approved for the channel configuration with the
manufacturer’s components. Manufactures shall provide the warranty worst-case
performance data for the installed cabling system, and the performance data indicated in
the warranty documents/certificate.
A twenty five (25) year warranty available for the category 6 structured cabling system
shall be provided for an end-to-end channel model installation which covers applications
assurance, cable, connecting hardware and the labor cost for the repair or replacement
thereof.
Additional features of the warranty shall include:
1. That the SCS installed system complies with the margin claimed by the
manufacturers over the category 6 channel specifications on all transmission
parameters across the entire frequency range of 1-250 MHz as shown on the
manufacturers catalogs and literature.
G. All terminations shall comply with, and be 100% tested to the ANSITIA/EIA 568-C
Category 6 requirements at a minimum. It should be anticipated by all installers that all
horizontal cable supporting data applications must meet at a minimum the Category 6
performance requirements for 100 meters as listed by the TIA standards for the channel.
H. Patch Cords: The patch cords shall be 100% factory tested for compliance to the
Category 6 standard.
I. The installed SCS shall meet or exceed the performance specifications as listed by the
selected manufacturers shown on the drawings and the performance specifications as
listed herein. The Contractor shall follow the Manufacturer’s recommended installation
procedures.
J. Data Services: Wiring utilized for data communications shall originate at Owner provided
switches, hubs and concentrators in vertical free standing equipment racks, and/or
enclosed wall mounted vertical equipment racks located at individual Telecommunications
Rooms or Communications Enclosures (TR OR CE’S).
K. Work Included: Wiring, terminations and patch cords between these designated
demarcation points and outlet locations designated on the plans shall be considered part
of the contract. Outlets (jacks) shall be furnished, wired and installed by the SCS
contractor.
L. Work Included: Contractor shall provide and install all connecting hardware and
accessories required for termination of all copper pairs and all fiber optic strands in the
project.
M. Work included. Installation, Termination and identification of wiring between station
outlets, Telecommunications Rooms (TR), Communications Enclosures (CE),
Telecommunications Entrance Facility Room (EF) and the Equipment Room (ER/MDF),
including owner directed cross connects for voice and patching for data, shall be
considered part of the contractors work.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 4
1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. General: The contractor selected for the Project must be certified by the manufacturers of
the products, adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the
authorized manufacturers components and distribution channels in provisioning the
Project.
B. General: The Contractor directly responsible for this work shall be a "Structured Cabling
System Contractor" who is, and who has been, regularly engaged in the providing and
installation of commercial and industrial telecommunications wiring systems of this type
and size for at least the immediate past five years. Any sub-Contractor who will assist the
SCS contractor in performance of this work, shall have the same training and certification
as the SCS contractor.
C. Certification: The contractor's Project Manager shall possess a current BICSI Registered
Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD®) certificate. All shop drawings submitted
by the contractor shall bear the RCDD's stamp.
D. The Contractor shall have a (BICSI) RCDD on Staff. Contract RCDD’s shall not be
acceptable.
E. The Installer team leader assigned for the project shall be BICSI registered Level II
installer or proven and qualified equal.
F. Experience: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The
Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful
installation and testing of Category 6 metallic premise distribution systems and have
personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment. The Owner
or engineer may elect to request submittal of additional financial, operational and
administrative information of the contractor to demonstrate the required experience.
G. The Contractor shall possess a State of Texas Low Voltage License.
H. The Contractor shall maintain a permanent office within 50 miles of the project site.
I. The system contractor shall take full responsibility for the complete system, except that
electrical contractor installs conduit. The supervision of that work shall be by the SCS
contractor and shall have the sole source responsibility for the entire system. The SCS
contractor shall make all wire terminations and install all devices.
J. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the contractor’s bid indicating the
following:
1. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names
and telephone numbers for each.
2. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the integrity of the installed
distributive information local area network system.
3. A technical resume of experience for the contractor’s engineer/RCDD and on-site
foreman who will be assigned to the project.
4. Similar documentation for any subcontractor who will assist in the performance of
this work.
5. Location of office from which installation and warranty work will be performed.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 5
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall include manufacturer’s cut sheets for all proposed equipment.
Cut sheets shall bear the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for each type of
product being provided. Mark each copy of the data sheets for the specific product being
provided with an identifying mark, arrow, or highlighting. The followings items shall be
submitted:
1. All wire and cable.
2. All connectors and required tooling.
3. All termination system components for each cable type.
4. All ER, TR and CE’s equipment frame types and connecting hardware.
5. All cable suspension j-hooks, cable fasteners, CAT6 cable suspension
components.
6. All grounding and surge suppression system components for the systems portion
of the project.
B. Installation/layout drawings shall be provided for the entire SCS, including but not limited
to ER, TR and CE’s rooms layouts and elevations of racks, Backbone routes and outlet
assemblies, showing component’s model numbers, complete part quantities & numbers,
configurations, and the interrelationship and position of all components. Drawings shall be
a minimum of 24” X 36” in size.
C. Sketch in AUTOCAD, VISIO or hand written showing methods of support for pathways,
terminal boards, racks, ladder racks and cables in ER, TR, CE and throughout the
building that are proposed by the contractor with a deviation from the specifications or that
are not identified on the specifications.
1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Cable routing and Installation practices shall be in accordance with
ANSI/TIA/EIA standards, BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
(TDMM) (Eleventh Edition or latest), Customer-Owned, Outside Plant Manual (CO-OSP)
and BICSI’s Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM).
B. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the
requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) articles 700 and 800. All
cabling shall bare the CMR (RISER) markings for ducted "air return" applications and for
cable run in conduit above grade. Cable shall be indoor/outdoor Riser rated type for
cable run in conduit below grade. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify
with local and State code enforcement officers where plenum and non-plenum cables are
required. All cable shall bare the appropriate markings for the environment in which they
are installed.
C. Cable bundles: In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas if duct, cable trays or conduits
are not shown on the contract drawings, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 40 or
less, horizontal wiring with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable
ties shall be Velcro type. The cable bundling shall be supported via "CLIC" fasteners in
TR OR CE’s and non-plenum areas and Category 6 compliant J-hooks in ceiling spaces.
Conventional Bridal rings shall not be allowed for cable support. The contractor shall
adhere to the manufacturers' requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all
cables.
D. J-hooks: Where J-hooks are required by the drawings provide a minimum of two hangers
at any corners or 90 degree turns. Attachment shall be to the building structure and
framework randomly supported at 3, 4 or maximum of five (5) foot intervals. Ceiling
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 6
suspension wire or independent tie wire shall not be allowed in any space for cable
support. Where cable is run above the ceiling in areas without walls, all thread rod shall
be used (minimum 1/4", however sized to support the intended weight) with the
appropriate CAT 6 hanger for cross-room support. Support rods shall be level and plumb
after cable installation. The J-hooks shall feature a wide base loop with smooth curves to
eliminate snag potential and cable deformation. Listings: J-hooks shall be in accordance
with NEC, ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 requirements for structured cabling systems. All
cable supports shall be U.L. listed.
E. CLIC fasteners: Horizontal cables shall be suspended by "CLIC" fasteners with cable
inserts in TR or CE’s on the plywood area where ladder tray or rack management is not
available per the design documents. Listings: "CLIC" fasteners shall be in accordance
with NEC, ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 requirements for structured cabling systems.
Above the plywood area J-hooks or D-rings should be used.
F. Velcro Tywraps: Horizontal cables shall be fastened by Velcro tywraps in addition to the
J-hooks or other approved supports. Fire retardant Velcro tywraps shall be used in Riser
environments. Non CAT6 compliant tie-wraps are not acceptable
G. Protection: Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls,
existing or created by this contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of
the contractor. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in
such a manner, which is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having
jurisdiction over this work. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage
between locations as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of this contractor's
work. Any openings created by or for this contractor and left unused shall also be sealed
as part of this work. Penetration rating shall equal structure rating.
H. Damage: The contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work
disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting and ceiling tile
replacement shall be included as part of this contract.
I. Avoiding EMI: To avoid EMI, all pathways shall provide clearances of at least 4 feet (1.2
meters) from motors or transformers; 1 foot (0.3 meter) from conduit and cables used for
electrical-power distribution; and 5 inches (12 centimeters) from fluorescent lighting.
Pathways shall cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical-power cables and
conduits. The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines,
or share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus
1.6 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING
A. General: Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall
be governed by the provisions of this specification.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS AND ALTERNATES
A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed as
acceptable alternate, each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design
selection but each must meet all specification requirements. Where a manufacturer's
model number is listed, this model shall set the standard of quality and performance
required. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to
Engineer's review and acceptance. Where manufacturers are listed, one of the listed
manufacturers shall be submitted for acceptance. No substitutions are permitted.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 7
B. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or
government standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate
that the product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer,
Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.
C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturers,
materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLETS
A. General: Communications outlets that contain copper services shall be equipped with 8-
position modular jacks (RJ45 type) utilizing T568A wiring. All outlet cabling shall terminate
on appropriate termination blocks at their associated TR, CE, EF, or ER. Outlet jack
module arrangement and quantities are shown on the drawings. Provide color-coded icon
labels at each outlet and at all patch panels.
B. General: Communications outlets that contain fiber optic services shall be equipped with
SC Duplex type connectors for Multimode or Single-mode. All horizontal fiber optic
cabling shall terminate in an appropriate Fiber Distribution Centers (FDC) at their
associated TR, EF, CE, or ER. Outlet arrangement and quantities are shown on the
drawings. Provide color-coded icon labels at each outlet and at all FDC’s. Outlets shall be
able to accommodate up to four simplex (or two duplex) connector adapters each. The
outlet/connector box shall have the ability to secure the optical fiber cable and provide for
a minimum of 1.18 inch (30 mm) bend radius. A minimum of 3.28 ft (1 m) of fiber optical
cable or buffered optical fibers shall be accessible for termination purposes.
A communications outlet shall be capable of housing copper and fiber optic cabling
services.
C. Wall outlets: single gang wall plates. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module
locations
D. Floor outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall consist of single gang 4 module
plates inside the floor box. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations.
E. Modular furniture outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall consist of modular
furniture faceplate capable of housing up to (3) 8-position modular connectors. Provide
blank module inserts for all unused module locations.
F. Raceway outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall consist of single gang plates
suited for the selected raceway. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module
locations.
G. Power Pole Outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall snap directly into the standard
cutouts in most major power poles including Wiremold. Include any spacers or adapters
to ensure a proper fit. Coordinate adapter with power pole provided prior to ordering.
Provide a blank device plate for each spare or unused jack.
H. House wall phone shall consist of SE630 type wall plates with CAT 6 cable to each,
terminating in CAT6 8-position modular jack.
I. 8-position modular jacks: CAT 6 jacks shall meet or exceed the following electrical and
mechanical specifications:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 8
Electrical Specifications:
1. Insulation resistance: 500 M minimum.
2. Dielectric withstand voltage 1,000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum, contact-to-contact
and 1,500 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum from any contact to exposed conductive
surface.
3. Contact resistance: 20 M maximum.
4. Current rating: 1.5 A at 68F (20C) per IEC publication 512-3, Test 5b
5. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer
6. UL verified for EIA/TIA electrical performance
7. Comply with FCC Part 68
Mechanical Performance:
1. Plug Insertion Life: 750 insertions
2. Contact Force: 3.5 oz (99.2 g) minimum using FCC-Approved modular plug.
3. Plug Retention Force: 30 lb (133 N) minimum between modular plug and jack.
4. Temperature Range: -40 to 150F (-40 to 66C)
J. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
K. Approved Manufacturers: ADC, ORTRONICS, PANDUIT, HUBBELL, and BELDEN.
L. Multimode fiber optic connector: 50/125 µm SC type connector field installable for Laser
Optimized Multimode Fiber (LOMMF) 50/125 µm. Connector shall be compliant with
industry standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and the applicable TIA/EIA Fiber Optic
Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) document, TIA/EIA 604 series. The
connector shall have a ceramic ferrule. Multimode connectors shall be black with an aqua
boot. Connectors shall meet or exceed the following transmission and mechanical
specifications:
1. The maximum insertion loss shall be 0.75 dB (maximum) when installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure and tested in
accordance with FOTP-171.
2. Connector reflectance shall be less than or equal to -26 dB when installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure.
3. Connectors shall sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles without violating
specifications.
M. Multimode fiber optic adapter: Multimode SC adapter shall be of a one piece construction.
It shall allow for the termination of two SC connectors in a duplex adapter in accordance
with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Multimode Adapters shall be aqua for Laser Optimized Multimode
Fiber (LOMMF) 50/125 µm fiber.
N. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
O. Approved Manufacturers: CORNING CABLE SYSTEMS, ADC, ORTRONICS, PANDUIT,
HUBBELL and BELDEN.
P. Single-mode fiber optic connector: Single-mode SC type connector, field installable.
Connector shall be compliant with industry standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3. The
connector shall comply with the applicable TIA/EIA Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability
Standard (FOCIS) document, TIA/EIA 604 series. The connector shall have a ceramic
ferrule. Single-mode connectors shall be blue in color. Connectors shall meet or exceed
the following transmission and mechanical specifications:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 9
1. Maximum insertion loss shall be 0.75 dB per each mated connector pair when
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure and
tested in accordance with FOTP-171.
2. Connector reflectance shall be less than or equal to -40 dB (UPC) when installed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure.
3. Connectors shall sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles without violating
specifications.
4. Connectors shall meet the following performance criteria:
Test Procedure Maximum Attenuation Change (dB)
Cable Retention FOTP-6 0.2 dB
Durability FOTP-21 0.2 dB
Impact FOTP-2 0.2 dB
Thermal Shock FOTP-3 0.2 dB
Humidity FOTP-5 0.2 dB
5. Connectors for video transmission applications shall be Angled Physical Contact
(APC) and shall have a reflectance less than or equal to -65 dB. The connector
and boot color shall be green. The connector shall be pre-terminated on a factory
installed pigtail for fusion-splicing field termination.
Q. Single-mode fiber optic adapter: Single-mode SC adapter shall be of a one piece
construction. It shall allow for the termination of two SC connectors in a duplex adapter in
accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Single-mode adapters shall be blue in color. Single-
mode adapters for APC connectors shall be green in color.
R. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
S. Approved Manufacturers: CORNING CABLE SYSTEMS, ADC, ORTRONICS,
PANDUIT, HUBBELL, and BELDEN.
T. Outlet Labeling: Each jack on all outlets shall be identified with permanent machine
generated labels, meeting the EIA/TIA 606A requirements, matching the numbering plan
indicated on the drawings. All labeling must be permanent. All labeling shall be a
minimum 12 pt. in size. All labeling systems shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval prior to fabrication.
U. Performance marking: Connecting hardware should be marked to designate transmission
performance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency. The markings,
if any, shall be visible during installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of:
“Cat 6” for category 6 components
Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by
listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code
requirements.
V. Connecting Hardware Performance: All CAT 6 connecting hardware, E.G. RJ45 jacks,
RJ45 ports in patch panels, shall be utilized in a channel configuration meeting or
exceeding the following specifications at 250 MHz:
1. NEXT (dB) at 250 MHz - 46.0 dB or exceed
2. Insertion Loss (dB) at 250 MHz - 0.32 dB or less
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 10
3. FEXT (dB) at 250 MHz - 35.1 dB or exceed
4. Return Loss (dB) at 250 MHz – 16.0 dB or exceed
2.2 CATEGORY 6 DATA AND VOICE HORIZONTAL CABLE
A. General: UTP CAT 6 cables for voice/data shall be extended between the outlet location
and its associated TR, CE, EF, or ER. The cable shall consist of 4 pair 23 AWG for CAT6,
solid copper conductors, certified to the Category 6 standards. Verified by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for EIA/TIA electrical performance and comply
with FCC Part 68. Cables shall be terminated on each of the Category 6 8-position
modular jacks provided at each outlet. Only virgin materials shall be used.
Cable selection for voice /data outlets shall be based upon meeting an end to end
channel performance for one drop within each floor or wall outlet (faceplate). Cable
selection for voice /data outlets shall be based upon meeting an end to end permanent
link performance for the remainder drops within each wall or floor outlet (faceplate). Cable
selection for voice phone outlets shall be based upon meeting an end to end permanent
link performance for the drop within each outlet (faceplate).
B. Jacket: Cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a plenum cable where
applicable. All cables shall bear the CMP label and the mark of the NRTL. Cable pairs
shall be insulated with FEP. Plenum-rated cables shall use 100% FEP for the insulation
except where it is proven that the cable constructed with alternate materials meets or
exceeds the electrical performance of FEP. All cables shall bear the UL markings.
C. Horizontal Cable drops from TR, CE, EF, or ER to specified outlets locations are to be
without splices.
D. Properties: Electrical Characteristics for CAT6 horizontal UTP cable tested on 100 m
length shall meet or exceed the following specifications:
Frequency 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 200 Mhz 250 Mhz
Insertion Loss 6.0 19.8 29.0 32.8 DB
NEXT 56.3 44.3 39.8 38.3 DB
PSNEXT 57.3 42.3 37.8 36.3 DB
ELFEXT 47.8 27.8 21.8 19.8 DB
PSELFEXT 44.8 24.8 18.8 16.8 DB
Return Loss 25.0 20.1 18.0 17.3 DB
Delay 545 538 N/A 536 nSec
Delay Skew 45 45 45 45 nSec
E. Performance marking: 100 UTP cabling runs should be marked to designate
transmission performance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency at
both ends after installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of:
“Cat 6” for category 6 cable
Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by
listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code
requirements.
F. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
G. Approved Manufacturers: ADC, BERK-TEK, General Cable, BELDEN, and Mohawk.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 11
2.3 CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANELS
A. General: Equipment racks and cabinets shall be equipped with 19" rack mounted, Cat6 8-
position modular jacks (RJ-45 type), non-keyed, patch panels for termination of all copper
horizontal cables.
B. Work Area Outlet patch panels shall be fully loaded with jacks to meet the Category 6
standard and shall be modular-to-110, wired for T568A pin outs for the cables serving the
Work Area Outlets. Patch panels shall be provided in 24 or 48 port configurations as
shown on the drawings. Punch down (4) pair per jack port.
C. Analog Voice Backbone termination in ER. 110 rack mounted wiring blocks shall be used
for distribution of the voice backbone pairs to the TR’s, EF, and CE’s. Terminate the
copper backbone cables, (n) 4 pair as shown on the drawings, to these 110 wiring blocks.
The layout is shown on the Drawings and shall be coordinated with the engineer. The
contractor shall provide and install computer generated and printed color-coded labeling
for each cable position.
D. Analog Voice Backbone termination in TR, EF, and CE’s. RJ45 Patch panels rack
mounted shall be used for distribution of the voice backbone pairs. Terminate the copper
backbone cables, (n) 4 pair as shown on the drawings, to these patch panels. Terminate
only one pair per RJ45 port. The layout is shown on the Drawings and shall be
coordinated with the engineer. The contractor shall provide and install computer
generated and printed color-coded labeling for each pair position.
E. Wireless Access Point termination: All Wireless Access Point (WAP) UTP cables shall be
terminated in the ER, TR, EF, or CE on specially designated locations at the end of the
patch panel.
F. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
G. Approved Manufacturers: ADC, ORTRONICS, PANDUIT, HUBBELL, and BELDEN.
H. Identification: Designation strips for each port shall be provided on the patch panel. All
cables shall be terminated in numerical sequence and each position labeled as to outlet
number and jack position as is noted for the outlets.
I. Category 6 Modular Patch Cords and Work-area Cords:
1. Work Stations Cords: Provide two Category 6 Modular Work-area Cord for each
wall and floor outlet (faceplate) in the project to be used at the WORK AREA
locations. Work-area cords shall be provided in length as follows with 8-position
modular connectors on both ends: 100% 10’. Color selection desired is Blue.
2. ER, EF, TR, and CE Patch Cords: Provide two Category 6 Modular Patch Cord
for the rack patching, for each wall and floor outlet (faceplate) in the project.
Patch cords shall be provided in length as dictated by the field conditions in each
TR, CE, on desired is Blue.
3. All patch cords for line items 1 and 2 above shall be round, and consist of 24
AWG copper, stranded conductors insulated with high density polyethylene and
jacketed with flame retardant PVC. Cords shall be a component part of the
proposed CAT 6 channel solution and have been tested as such.
4. Data Wireless Access Points (WAP) Cords: Provide one Category 6 Modular
Cord for each WAP outlet in the project. WAP cords shall be provided with 8-
position modular connectors on both ends with CAT 6 solid-conductor cable for
cords more than 3 mts and up to 12 mts in length. For 3 m long cords or less
provide Cat6 stranded cable cords. Actual cords length shall be in accordance
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 12
with RF site survey made by the WAP electronics vendor. Provide one Category 6
Modular Patch Cord for the rack patching, for each WAP in the project plus 25%
spares. Patch cords shall be provided in lengths as required by the patch panel
arrangements with RJ-45 modular connectors on both ends. Color selection
desired is Red.
J. Analog Voice patch cords:
1. Analog Voice Patch Cords: Provide fifty (50) 110-RJ45 Patch Cord for the rack
patching. Patch cords shall be provided in length as follows with RJ-45 modular
connector on one end and 110 connector on the other end. 50% 3 ft, 50% 10 ft.
2.4 Category 6 Permanent Link and Channel systems.
A. Permanent Link (PL) and Channel (CH) Performance: All CAT 6 products shall be utilized
meeting or exceeding the performance specifications at 10 Mhz, 100 Mhz, 200 Mhz and
250 Mhz for the two link types: Channel for Data drops, Permanent Link for VOICE drops.
Channel specifications:
Frequency 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 200 Mhz 250 Mhz
Insertion Loss 6.3 21.3 31.5 35.6 DB
NEXT 56.6 39.9 34.8 33.1 DB
PSNEXT 54.0 37.1 31.9 30.2 DB
ELFEXT 43.3 23.3 17.2 15.3 DB
PSELFEXT 40.3 20.3 14.2 12.3 DB
Return Loss 19.0 12.0 9.0 8.0 DB
Delay 555 N/A N/A N/A nSec
Delay Skew 50 N/A N/A N/A nSec
Permanent Link specifications:
Frequency 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 200 Mhz 250 Mhz
Insertion Loss 5.5 18.6 27.4 31.1 DB
NEXT 57.8 41.8 36.9 35.3 DB
PSNEXT 55.5 39.3 34.3 32.7 DB
ELFEXT 44.2 24.2 18.2 16.2 DB
PSELFEXT 41.2 21.2 15.2 13.2 DB
Return Loss 21.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 DB
Delay 498 N/A N/A N/A nSec
Delay Skew 44 N/A N/A N/A nSec
B. Approved end to end channel systems: ADC, ORTRONICS/BERKTEK,
PANDUIT/GENERAL CABLE, HUBBELL/MOHAWK, and BELDEN.
2.5 CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Section 17110 “pathways and spaces for structured cabling system” applies to work of
this section.
B. Velcro tywraps: Horizontal cables shall be fastened by Velcro tywraps in addition to the J-
hooks or other approved supports. Fire retardant Velcro tywraps shall be used in Riser
environments.
C. Cable Runway: Cable runway for Telecommunications Rooms shall have a minimum
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 13
width of 12” or as indicated on the drawings. Cable runway radius drops shall be provided
to protect horizontal cable when mounted/dropped to/from cable runway.
Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
Approved Manufacturers: B-LINE, WIREMOLD, and CHATSWORTH
2.6 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING
A. General: Copper backbone (Riser/tie) cabling shall be provided between ER and TR, CE,
or EF as designated on the contract drawings. All voice cable place underground in
conduit shall be solid twisted pair, multi-conductor, indoor/outdoor CAT5 or CAT5e Riser
rated.
B. Voice feed cable: From the EF to the ER. Multi-pair cables shall be provided and
terminated from the EF to the ER and be terminated on rack mounted 110 wiring blocks.
C. The multi-pair copper cables shall meet the following specifications:
1. Gauge: 24 AWG
2. DC Resistance: 27.3/1000 ft (8.96/100m), maximum
3. Mutual Capacitance (at 1khz)
4. Impedance: 100(25 pair)
5. Buried/Underground Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]):
at 1.0 MHz: 6.4 (25 pair), maximum
6. Aerial Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]):
at 1.0 MHz: 6.7 (25 pair), maximum
D. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
E. Approved Manufacturers: BERK-TEK, General Cable, ADC, BELDEN, and Mohawk.
F. Miscellaneous Cabling.
Provide one indoor/outdoor riser rated Cat 6 cable, in conduit, from the demark point in
the EF room to the junction box provided in each elevator control room.
2.7 SITE COPPER CABLE PROTECTION UNITS
A. General: All entrance site copper circuits if shown on the drawings shall be provided with
protection with an entrance cable protector chassis. Protector shall be connected with a
#6 AWG copper bonding conductor between the protector ground lug and the EF ground
point.
B. Modules: Each protector chassis shall be provided with plug-in protector modules for
each pair terminated on the chassis.
C. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
D. Approved Manufacturers: AVAYA, CIRCA, or PORTA SYSTEMS.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 14
2.8 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. General: Multimode and/or single-mode fiber optic cable shall be provided between ER
and TR, CE, EF if designated on the contract drawings. Cables placed below grade shall
be certified by the manufacturer for that environment. Cables installed in vertical risers
between floors shall be listed riser type cable.
Laser Optimized Multimode Fiber (50/125 µm): The multimode fiber shall meet TIA-
492AAAC, "Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser-Optimized, 50-µm Core Diameter/125-
µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers." The cabled
optical fiber shall support laser-based 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) operation in the
10GBASE-S (850 nm) operating window for up to 300 m. The cabled optical fiber shall
support laser-based Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) operation in the 1000BASE-SX (850 nm
operating window) at 1000 m. Fiber shall meet the following specifications:
1. Core diameter shall be 50.0 ± 2.5 µm.
2. Cladding diameter shall be 125.0 ± 2.0 µm.
3. Cladding non-circularity shall be ≤ 1.0%.
4. Core-clad concentricity shall be ≤ 1.5 µm.
5. Coating diameter shall be 245 ± 5 µm.
6. Refractive index profile shall be graded.
7. Numerical aperture of the fiber shall be 0.200 ± 0.015.
8. Maximum cabled fiber attenuation shall be 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.5 dB/km at
1300 nm for all cable types.
9. Minimum cabled effective modal bandwidth (EMB) shall be 2000 MHz•km at 850
nm in accordance with FOTP-220 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet. The optical fiber shall
have a minimum OFL bandwidth of 1500/500 MHz•km at 850/1300 nm mber of
fibers: 6, 8, 12, 24, or as shown on the drawings.
B. Fiber Optic Cable:
1. Indoor/Outdoor Tight Buffered Cable: Cable shall be available as a riser rated
cable, armored, with up to 48, 900 ± 50 µm tight-buffered fibers. Cables shall
conform to the applicable performance requirements of the Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA) Standard for Fiber Optic Premises Distribution
Cable (ICEA S-104-696). For riser cables, the cable shall be listed OFNR/FT-4.
The fiber coating, low-friction slip layer and PVC buffer shall be removable with
commercially available stripping tools for termination or splicing. The individual
fibers shall be color-coded for identification. The optical fiber color coding shall be
in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.” The cable
jacket shall be flame retardant and shall contain carbon black to provide
ultraviolet light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus. The outer
jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or ETL file number, date of
manufacture, fiber count, fiber type, flame ratings, listing symbol, sequential
length markings every two feet for cables marked in feet or every 1 meter for
cables marked in meters, and a telecommunications handset symbol. The
marking shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket. The storage temperature
range for the cable on the original shipping reel shall be -40 °C to +70 °C. The
installation temperature range for the cable shall be 0 °C to +60 °C for plenum
cables and -10 °C to +60 °C for riser cables. The operating temperature range for
the cable shall be 40 °C to +70 °C. Cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9001
registered.
2. Indoor Tight Buffered Cable: Cable shall be riser, Armored, with up to 48, 900 ±
50 µm tight-buffered fibers. Cables shall conform to the applicable performance
requirements of ICEA S-83-596. For riser cables, the cable shall be listed
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 15
OFNR/FT-4. The individual fibers shall be color-coded for identification. The
optical fiber color coding shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical
Fiber Cable Color Coding. The cable jacket color shall be aqua for 50/125 um
laser optimized fiber. The cable jacket color shall be yellow for cables containing
all single mode fiber. The outer jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's
name or ETL file number, date of manufacture, fiber count, fiber type, flame
rating, listing symbol, and sequential length markings every two feet. The marking
shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket. Cable shall have a storage
temperature range of -40° to 70°C on the original shipping reel, installation
temperature range of 0° to 60°C, and an operating temperature range of 0° to
70°C. Cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered.
C. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
D. Approved Manufacturers: CORNING CABLE SYSTEMS, ADC, BELDEN, or BERK-TEK.
2.9 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. General: Each TR, the ER and EF shall be equipped with 19" EIA rack(s), floor mounted,
to house owner-provided equipment and contractor provided termination bays for the
multiple cable types. Floor mounted racks shall be mounted on an isolation pad and utilize
non-conductive washers to secure the rack to the floor. Floor mounted open racks shall
be secured from the top rail to the backboard in the room with a length of cable runway to
prevent movement. Wall racks shall be securely fastened to the wall studs with at least
1/4" hardware. All racks shall be bonded to the ground bar using a standard ground lug
and #6 jacketed green cable.
B. General: Each CE shall be equipped with 19" EIA enclosed cabinet, wall mounted, to
house owner-provided equipment and contractor provided termination bays for the
multiple cable types. Wall mounted cabinets shall be mounted on plywood backboard d.
All Cabinets racks shall be bonded to the ground bar using a standard ground lug and #6
jacketed green cable.
C. Rack Accessories: Each equipment rack and cabinet shall be provided with accessories
as shown on the drawings.
D. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
E. Approved Manufacturers: CHATSWORTH or B-LINE.
F. Plywood backboards shall be installed in each ER, TR, EF and CE as shown on the
drawings on walls mounted 6” A.F.F. Plywood shall be 8’ tall and minimum ¾” AC grade
with the best (A) side out. All imperfections shall be sealed and sanded prior to painting
with 2 coats of fire-retardant paint. (Color to be Black, Grey or white) Coordinate color
selection with the Owner/Architect.
2.10 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION
A. Rack Mounted Panels: Fiber optic cabling shall be terminated in fiber distribution centers
(FDC) where indicated on the contract drawings and described herein. FDC's shall be
provided in quantities and configurations as shown on the drawings complete with fully
loaded SC Duplex style adapter plates unless otherwise indicated. All FDC's shall be
provided with rack mounting hardware allowing the unit to be placed in a standard EIA 19"
rack.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 16
B. General: Provide protector caps in all unused adapter plates in the FDC. FDC shall
include strain relief points where fiber optic cable strength members shall be securely
attached.
C. Labels: Labeling for fiber cabling shall be by ER, TR, EF or CE number, plus the color
suffix designating which fiber is terminated. Die cut acetate labels or Kroy labels shall be
considered acceptable the purpose. Labels shall also be provided at any exposed cable
location 20' on center and at all TR and CE locations. Identification shall include to and
from information.
D. Design Selection: Refer to “T” drawings for product configuration and selection.
E. Approved Manufacturers: CORNING, ADC, ORTRONICS, PANDUIT, HUBBELL, and
BELDEN.
F. Accessories: Provide (2) two duplex fiber optic patch cords with connectors matching the
Multimode fiber cable and equipment connections on each end respectively at each TR,
EF and CE. Provide (2) two duplex fiber optic patch cords for each TR, EF, and CE in the
project at the ER location. All patch cords shall be 9.84 ft (3 m) in length. Patch cord
connectors shall have a maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB per mated pair as tested by the
manufacturer.
2.11 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR
A. As described on 2.1 section above.
2.12 UNSPECIFIED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. Any item of equipment or material not specifically addressed on the contract drawings or
in this document and required to provide a complete and functional SCS installation shall
be provided in a level of quality consistent with other specified items.
2.13 GROUNDING SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS
A. Section 17450 “Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications” applies to work of this
section.
B. Communications bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA
as well as ANSI J-STD-607-A grounding and bonding standards. Backbone and entrance
cables shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 (2008) and local
requirements and practices.
2.14 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. The Project Documents have been developed, in conjunction with the Owner, to establish
a benchmark level of performance and reliability. The basis of design for the SCS system
is the ADC solution. Acceptable alternate product manufacturers are PANDUIT/General
Cable, ORTRONICS/BERK-TEK, HUBBELL/MOHAWK, and BELDEN. Deviations from
the basis of design (including deviations for manufacturers stated herein as "acceptable"
alternates) must be in accordance with the substitution requirements of Section 270010.
Use of an alternate product, whether or not it is stated as "acceptable" herein, does not
relieve the Contractor of their responsibility to comply fully with the entirety of the Project
Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 17
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Components of the premise distribution system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike
manner consistent with the best telephone and data practices.
B. Wiring color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughout
the building.
C. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform.
D. T568A wiring codes as shown on the drawings shall standardize all twisted pair wiring.
E. Physical integrity of cables shall pass not only electronic testing but visual inspection as
well by the Owner and/or the Engineer.
3.2 CAT 6 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Category 6 UTP cables shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA guidelines for
Category 6. Cable installation and terminations that do not comply shall be replaced by
the contractor.
1. The maximum pulling tension shall not exceed 25 pounds to avoid stretching the
conductors. The contractor shall use a 25 lb breakaway swivel attached between
the pull rope and the UTP CAT6 cable to ensure that no more than 25 lb of
tension is exerted on the pulled cable.
2. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall not be less than 4x the outside
diameter of the cable.
3. The cable shall be installed without kinks or twists and the application of cable
ties shall not deform the cable bundle.
4. Strip back only as much cable jacket as is required to terminate the cable and the
amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of the termination shall not exceed 0.5
in.
3.3 SERVICE SLACK
A. All CAT6 cable runs shall not contain service slack prior to the termination point at the
workstation side. Service slack at the TR and EF shall consist of a 10 foot slack section
all station cables located and placed neatly in the cable ladder above the equipment rack
in an extended large diameter loops or in a loose figure 8 configuration. Service slack at
the CE shall consist of a 3 foot slack section all station cables located and placed neatly
inside the cabinet in an extended large diameter loops or in a loose figure 8 configuration.
3.4 SUPPORT AND ROUTING OF CABLES
A. Horizontal cables used in this system are to be installed within ceiling spaces. Cables
shall be routed through these spaces on approved cable support systems. Tie cables
shall be extended between TR’S utilizing conduit runs as shown on the drawing.
B. Use of ceiling tiles, grid or hanger wires for support of SCS cables shall be prohibited.
C. The SCS system contractor shall install a complete set of supporting J-hooks and other
supporting hardware for this system as part of the SCS contract. All supporting hardware
shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to installation. Hardware shall also be
utilized by other systems work. Comply with basic layout indicated on drawing details for
cable placement.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 18
3.5 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATIONS
A. Conduit sleeves shall be provided as a means of routing cables between various
communications rooms and multi floor buildings. Openings in sleeves and conduits used
for the SCS system cables and those which remain (empty) spare shall be sealed with a
U.L. approved fireproof, removable safing material.
B. Sleeves which pass vertically from floor to floor shall be sealed in a similar manner using
an approved re-enterable system. Penetration rating shall equal structure rating.
C. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of SCS wiring
shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of
cables.
3.6 CROSS CONNECTS/PATCHING
A. All copper Cross-connects shall be performed by the SCS contractor.
B. All copper RJ45 / RJ45 Patching within Telecomm Rooms shall be performed by the SCS
contractor.
3.7 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Fiber Optic Cables shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA 568B guidelines.
Cable installation and terminations that do not comply shall be replaced by the contractor.
1. The bend radius for intra-building 2 and 4-fiber horizontal optical fiber cable shall
not be less than 25 mm (1 in) under no-load conditions. When under a maximum
tensile load of 222 N (50lbf), the bend radius shall not be less than 50 mm (2 in).
2. The bend radius for intra-building optical fiber backbone shall not be less than
that recommended by the manufacturer. If no recommendation is known, then the
applied bend radius shall not be less than 10 times the cable outside diameter
under no-load conditions and no less than 15 times the cable outside diameter
when the cable is under tensile load.
3. The bend radius for inter-building optical fiber backbone shall not be less than
that recommended by the manufacturer. If no recommendation is known, then the
applied bend radius shall not be less than 10 times the cable outside diameter
under no-load conditions and no less than 20 times the cable outside diameter
when the cable is under tensile load up to the rating of the cable, usually 2670 N
(600lbf).
3.8 STRUCTURED CABLE SYSTEM PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION.
A. General: Contractor shall protect all Structured Cabling System materials from damage
during construction.
B. Racks and connecting hardware protection. Racks shall be covered with fabric or plastic
after mounting to prevent dust, debris and other foreign materials having contact with
SCS devices.
C. Cables: Contractor shall protect at all times all fiber optic and copper cables from damage
during installation. All cables shall maintain the physical integrity as manufactured for
testing and delivery to the owner. All damaged cables shall be replaced at no additional
cost to the owner.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 19
3.9 TRAINING
A. The contractor shall provide one 4 hour training session to familiarize the owner with the
locations of all ER, TR, EF, OR CE’s, conduit/raceways routes, cable and jack labeling
and numbering systems, data and voice connections. The RCDD shall be present for and
participate in not less than 2 hrs of user training.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 20
3.10 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. As-built documentation shall be provided as part of the contract. As-built drawings shall
be a complete set of floor plans with all outlets shown and numbered as installed. The
original project floor plan disks shall be obtained from the Owner. All cable routings (trunk
lines) and elevations of each EF, ER, TR, or CE indicating outlet, tie, and riser cable
terminations shall be required. All addendum information or project revisions resulting in
drawing changes that occur during the construction period shall be documented and
included in the as-built material. All required as-built documentation is mandatory and
shall be required prior to project closeout. A set of prints with all changes shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review. Upon completion of the Engineer's review, the
Contractor shall provide updated disks and a reproducible mylar set of drawings, which
include final As-built conditions and the Engineer's review comments, if any.
B. Contractor shall provide Excel software spreadsheet that defines the telecommunications
outlet number, location, number of voice, data and special jacks. This database shall also
provide the outlet patch panel connection to the riser/inter-floor cable, equipment, and
telephone company demarcation circuit pairs as part of the as-built documentation.
C. The project’s RCDD shall affix his/her stamp to the contractor’s as-built drawings,
indicating that he/she has reviewed and approved the drawings as being complete,
accurate, and representative of the system as actually installed.
3.11 TESTING OF COPPER CABLING.
A. General: Horizontal and backbone cabling shall be verified in accordance with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 clause 11, Cabling Transmission Performance and Test
Requirements.
B. General: The SCS Contractor shall set the wiring tester for a channel configuration for
each jack provided with patch cords which includes the patch cord, patch panel, UTP
Cable, work-area jack and work-area cord and for a Permanent Link for jacks provided
without patch cords.
C. General: In the event the Engineer elects to be present during the tests, provide
notification to the engineer two weeks prior to testing.
D. General: The Project’s RCDD shall sign off on all copper and fiber optic cable test results,
indicating that he/she was in responsible charge of all cable testing procedures and that
all cables were tested in compliance with the contract documents and met or exceeded
the requirements stated herein.
E. General: The Owner may elect to conduct third party independent testing and certification
for all or part of the copper and fiber optic cabling. The contractor will be notified 4 weeks
or earlier prior to testing. The contractor will be notified of those links and channels failing
the third party testing for corrective action, which may include replacement at no
additional expense to the Owner.
F. Testing Equipment: Tester shall be as manufactured by Agilent, Fluke, IDEAL, or
Wavetek. Tester shall be 100% Level III compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B specifications
for testing of the CAT 6 cabling. No tester will be approved with out meeting these
requirements.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 21
G. Each Channel jack in each outlet shall be tested at a minimum to the CATEGORY 6
compliance in a channel configuration to verify the integrity of all conductors and the
correctness of the termination sequence. Testing shall be performed between work-area
cord at the outlets and the patch cord at the equipment rack. Prior to testing UTP runs,
the tester shall be calibrated per manufacturer guidelines. The correct cable NVP shall be
entered into tester to assure proper length and attenuation readings. During Channel
testing the patch cords and the work-area cords shall be the same as those provided by
the contractor per this specification. Each Channel test shall include one patch cord and
one work-area cord, with no cord used twice.
H. Each Permanent Link jack in each outlet shall be tested at a minimum to the CATEGORY
6 compliance in a Permanent Link configuration to verify the integrity of all conductors and
the correctness of the termination sequence. Testing shall be performed between work-
area jack at the outlet and the jack at the patch panel. Prior to testing UTP runs, the tester
shall be calibrated per manufacturer guidelines. The correct cable NVP shall be entered
into tester to assure proper length and attenuation readings. During Permanent Link
testing contractor shall use test adapters and test plugs recommended by the
manufacturer of the connectivity hardware. Generic cords/plugs shall not be used.
I. Documentation of cable testing shall be required. The SCS contractor shall provide the
results of all CATEGORY 6 cable tests in electronic format. Provide text files on CD.
Provide a separate text file for each building in the project. Each test page shall be
separated by standard page break (one test per page). The test results shall include: 250
MHz sweep tests, continuity, polarity checks, wire map, Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT,
FEXT, PSFEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, ACR, Return Loss, Delay Skew, and the installed
length for CATEGORY 6 cables. Cables not complying with the EIA/TIA 568B.1
CATEGORY 6 tests shall be identified to the engineer for corrective action which may
include replacement at no additional expense to the Owner.
J. Any Fail, Fail*, Pass* or WARNING test result yields a Fail for the channel or permanent
link under test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the result for each individual
test parameter must be Pass. All test results shall come from a tester with the
permanently enabled marginal reporting feature.
K. Test results shall show and comply with the margin claimed by the manufacturers over
category 6 channel permanent link specifications on all transmission parameters across
the entire frequency range of 1-250 MHz as shown on the manufacturer’s catalogs and
literature.
L. General: Cat5 /Cat5e Copper Riser cabling for ANALOG VOICE shall be tested for length,
continuity, polarity checks, and wire map. The SCS Contractor shall provide the results of
all Copper Riser cable tests in electronic format (CD).
M. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and
have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests.
N. CAT 6 patch cords testing: 100% of the CAT6 patch cords furnished for this project shall
be tested and shown to comply with the CAT6 cord requirements of TIA/EIA-568B.2.1,
including wire map, NEXT, and return loss. Compliance must be proven by testing cords
alone, not by inserting cords into a channel. Cord performance may be measured on-site
using either the TIA’s method detailed in annex J or using a cord-test adapter to a
handheld LAN cable tester. Alternatively, cord compliance may be proven by actual test
reports supplied by the cord manufacturer.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 22
3.12 TESTING OF FIBER OPTIC CABLING
A. General: Horizontal and backbone cabling shall be verified in accordance with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and the addendum for fiber optic testing.
B. General: In the event the Engineer elects to be present during the tests, provide
notification to the engineer two (2) weeks prior to testing.
C. End to End Attenuation Test: The Contractor shall perform end-to-end attenuation testing
for each multimode fiber at 850 nm and 1300 nm from one direction for each terminated
fiber span in accordance with EIA/TIA-526-14A (OFSTP 14) and single-mode fibers at
1310 nm and 1550 nm from one direction for each terminated fiber span in accordance
with TIA/EIA-526-7 (OFSTP 7). A one jumper reference shall be used for all testing. For
spans greater than 90 meters, each tested span must test to a value less than or equal to
the value determined by calculating a link loss budget. For horizontal spans less than or
equal to 90 meters, each tested span must be < 2.0 dB. When calculating the link loss
budget for spans greater then 90 meters use the values listed below.
D. OTDR Test: Inspect each terminated multimode fiber span for continuity and anomalies
with an OTDR at 850/1300 nm from one direction in accordance with the OTDR operating
manual for systems greater than 100 meters. Inspect each terminated single-mode fiber
span for continuity and anomalies with an OTDR at 1310/1550 nm from one direction in
accordance with OTDR operating manual for systems greater than 100 meters. A launch
cable that is a minimum of 300 m (multimode) and 100 m (single-mode) shall be utilized
during OTDR testing to ensure accurate results.
E. Testing Equipment: Test Equipment shall be as manufactured by Corning, EXFO, Fluke,
Agilent, or Microtest.
F. The Test Report shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of this section and
shall consist of the following:
1. Calculated Loss Budget for each optical fiber link (see table above)
2. End to End Attenuation Loss Data for each optical fiber link
3. Individual Splice Loss Data (if applicable)
Link Type Loss (dB)Wavelength (nm)Length (m)
Backbone,
Multimode
≤(3.5/km + 0.75/conn pr + 0.3/splice)850 ≤2000
≤(1.5/km + 0.75/conn pr+ 0.3/splice)1300 ≤2000
Backbone,
Single-mode
≤(1.0/km + 0.75/conn pr + 0.3/splice)1310 ≤3000
≤(1.0/km + 0.75/conn pr+ 0.3/splice)1550 ≤3000
Centralized,
Multimode
≤3.3 850 or 1300 ≤ 300
Horizontal,
Multimode
≤2.0 850 or 1300 ≤90
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
27 10 00 - 23
4. OTDR Traces
G. For each test reference: wavelength, fiber type, fiber manufacturer and cable model
number, cable manufacturers’ attenuation specifications, measurement direction
(to/from), test equipment model and serial numbers (with date of last calibration), date of
each test, and a reference setup.
H. OTDR trace(s) shall be submitted with request for substantial completion.
3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. General: The project shall be considered complete and ready to be turned over to the
Owner after the completion of the following items:
1. Submission and Approval of all copper and fiber optic certified test reports.
2. Submission of all written warranties.
3. Delivery of final documentation.
END OF SECTION 27 1000
A/R = AS REQUIRED
APD = AS PER DRAWING
DEVICE MANUFACTURER MODEL QTY
LOUDSPEAKERS & AMPLIFIERS
Loudspeaker - Left/Right Fulcrum DX1577 2
Loudspeaker - Center Fulcrum CCX1226 1
Loudspeaker - Subwoofer Fulcrum US221-2 2
Loudspeaker - Front Fill Fulcrum RX599 4
Rigging - Left/Right Custom By Contractor 2
Rigging - Center Custom By Contractor 1
Rigging - Front Fills Custom By Contractor 4
Amplifier QSC CXD8.8Qn 4
Amplifier QSC CXD4.2Qn 1
HOUSE MIX & PORTABLE I/O
Digital Mixing Console Yamaha QL5 1
Console Light Littlelite LA1L 2
Digital Stage Box Yamaha Rio1608-D2 2
Portable Equipment Rack Gator G-Tour 2U 2
PLAYBACK / RECORDING
Media Player Denon DN-300Z 1
Playback Computer Apple MacMini Allow $1000 1
Computer Rack Mount Assembly Sonnet Rack Mac 1
Playback Software Figure53 Qlab Pro (latest version) 1
Audio Interface Focusrite Clarett 8 Pre 1
Power Conditioner Furman P-8 Pro C 1
Computer Monitor Dell U2415 1
Portable Equipment Rack Gator APD 1
BOOTH EQUIPMENT RACK - ZB
DSP QSC Core 510i 1
DSP I/O Card - Mic In QSC CIML4 5
DSP I/O Card - Mic Out QSC COL4 1
DSP I/O Card - AES Out QSC CAES4 1
DSP I/O Card - Dante QSC CDN64 1
Touch Panel QSC TSC-80w-G2 1
Digital Stage Box Yamaha Rio1608-D1 1
PoE Managed Switch Cisco Catalyst 3650 (Port count A/R) 3
Computer Dell Allow $800 1
Computer Interface Middle Atlantic RM-KB-LCD17 1
Relay (Projection Screen Control) Custom By Contractor 2
UPS Middle Atlantic UPS-2200R 1
Equipment Rack Middle Atlantic APD
ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEMS
RF Transmitter Listen Technologies LT-800-xxx 1
SECTION 274100
APPENDIX B - MAJOR EQUIPMENT LIST
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS
MAIN THEATER
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 1 17008.00
Transmitter Rack Mount Listen Technologies LA-326 1
RF Antenna Kit Listen Technologies LA-122 1
RF Receiver Listen Technologies LR-400-xxx 14
Headphones Listen Technologies LA-165 14
Neck Induction Loop Listen Technologies LA-166 4
Spare Batteries Rechargable AA Listen Technologies LA-362 14
Battery Charger Case 16 Units Listen Technologies LA-325-xx 3
ADA Compliance Signage Listen Technologies LA-304 1
PORTABLE STAGE MANAGER RACK
Power Furman PL8 1
Audio Monitor Fostex RM-3 1
Touch Panel QSC APD 1
Page Microphone Shure 514B 1
Custom Page Panel Assembly Custom APD 1
Intercom 2ch Remote Station ClearCom RM-702 1
Portable Equipment Rack Gator APD 1
INTERCOM
Intercom 2ch Power Supply ClearCom PS-702 1
Remote Belt Pack Single Channel ClearCom RS-701 16
Handset ClearCom HS-6 3
Headset-Single Muff 4pin F-XLR ClearCom CC-300-X4 20
Microphone Cables on Reel Whirlwind JHA-LCR-20F-50 1
LIVE ROOM MICROPHONE
Microphone Mid-Side Shure VP88 1
Mounting Assembly Custom By Contractor 1
WIRELESS MICROPHONE
Wireless Receiver Shure ULX-D4Q 1
Wireless Transmitter Handheld Shure ULXD2/B58 4
Wireless Transmitter Bodypack Shure ULXD1 4
Labalier Microphone Countryman B3 (coordinate color w/ owner) 4
Antenna Active Directional Shure UA874-USTV 2
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION
PTZ Camera Sony SRG300SE 1
IR Camera IKE ICD-49 1
IR Illuminator AXS T90B IR-LED Illuminator 1
SDI Router Blackmagic Smart Video Hub 12x12 Clean Switch 1
Video Converter Blackmagic Mini Converter Analog to SDI 1
Video Encoder Visionary Solutions Duet Encoder 4
Video Stream Encoder AJA Helo 1
Video Converter Blackmagic Mini Converter SDI to HDMI 2
Media Player Apple Apple TV 1
Blu-ray Player Denon DN-500BD 1
PROJECTION SYSTEM
Laser Projector Epson Pro L1505 (w/ lens) 1
Video Decoder Blackmagic Duet Decoder 1
Motorized Projection Screen Draper Paragon V XT1000V 1
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 2 17008.00
DEVICE MANUFACTURER MODEL QTY
LOUDSPEAKERS & AMPLIFIERS
Loudspeaker - 10" QSC E110 8
Loudspeaker - 18" QSC E18SW 2
Rigging Custom By Contractor 8
Amplifier QSC CXD8.8Qn 2
Amplifier QSC CXD4.2Qn 1
HOUSE MIX
Digital Mixing Console Yamaha QL1 1
Console Light Littlelite LA1L 1
PLAYBACK / RECORDING
Media Player Denon DN-300Z 1
Playback Computer Apple MacMini Allow $1000 1
Computer Rack Mount Assembly Sonnet Rack Mac 1
Playback Software Figure53 Qlab Pro (latest version) 1
Audio Interface Focusrite Clarett 8 Pre 1
Power Conditioner Furman P-8 Pro C 1
Computer Monitor Dell U2415 1
Portable Equipment Rack Gator APD 1
BOOTH EQUIPMENT RACK - ZE
I/O Expander QSC I/O 8 Flex 1
Touch Panel QSC TSC-80w-G2 1
Digital Stage Box Yamaha Rio1608-D1 1
PoE Managed Switch Cisco Catalyst 3650 (Port count A/R) 3
UPS Middle Atlantic UPS-2200R 1
Equipment Rack Middle Atlantic APD
ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEMS
RF Transmitter Listen Technologies LT-800-xxx 1
Transmitter Rack Mount Listen Technologies LA-326 1
RF Antenna Kit Listen Technologies LA-122 1
RF Receiver Listen Technologies LR-400-xxx 6
Headphones Listen Technologies LA-165 6
Neck Induction Loop Listen Technologies LA-166 3
Spare Batteries Rechargable AA Listen Technologies LA-362 6
ADA Compliance Signage Listen Technologies LA-304 1
PORTABLE STAGE MANAGER RACK
Power Furman PL8 1
Audio Monitor Fostex RM-3 1
Touch Panel QSC APD 1
Page Microphone Shure 514B 1
Custom Page Panel Assembly Custom APD 1
Intercom 2ch Remote Station ClearCom RM-702 1
Portable Equipment Rack Gator APD 1
INTERCOM
Intercom 2ch Power Supply ClearCom PS-702 1
Remote Belt Pack Single Channel ClearCom RS-701 16
Handset ClearCom HS-6 3
Headset-Single Muff 4pin F-XLR ClearCom CC-300-X4 20
BLACK BOX
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 3 17008.00
Microphone Cables on Reel Whirlwind JHA-LCR-20F-50 1
LIVE ROOM MICROPHONE
Microphone Mid-Side Shure VP88 1
Mounting Assembly Custom By Contractor 1
WIRELESS MICROPHONE
Wireless Receiver Shure ULX-D4Q 1
Wireless Transmitter Handheld Shure ULXD2/B58 4
Wireless Transmitter Bodypack Shure ULXD1 4
Labalier Microphone Countryman B3 (coordinate color w/ owner) 4
Antenna Active Directional Shure UA874-USTV 2
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION
PTZ Camera Sony SRG300SE 1
IR Camera IKE ICD-49 1
IR Illuminator AXS T90B IR-LED Illuminator 1
SDI Router Blackmagic Smart Video Hub 12x12 Clean Switch 1
Video Converter Blackmagic Mini Converter Analog to SDI 1
Video Encoder Visionary Solutions Duet Encoder 4
Video Stream Encoder AJA Helo 1
Video Converter Blackmagic Mini Converter SDI to HDMI 2
Media Player Apple Apple TV 1
Blu-ray Player Denon DN-500BD 1
PORTABLE PROJECTION SYSTEM
Laser Projector Epson Pro L1505 (w/ lens) 1
Video Decoder Blackmagic Duet Decoder 1
Projection Screen Draper FocalPoint TecVision MS1000X ALR 1
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 4 17008.00
DEVICE MANUFACTURER MODEL QTY
ROOM CONTROL
Touch Panel QSC TSC-80w-G2 2
WIRELESS MICROPHONE
Wireless Receiver Shure ULX-D4Q 1
Wireless Transmitter Handheld Shure ULXD2/B58 4
Wireless Transmitter Bodypack Shure ULXD1 4
Labalier Microphone Countryman B3 (coordinate color w/ owner) 4
Antenna Active Directional Shure UA874-USTV 2
ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEMS
RF Transmitter Listen Technologies LT-800-xxx 1
Transmitter Rack Mount Listen Technologies LA-326 1
RF Antenna Kit Listen Technologies LA-122 1
RF Receiver Listen Technologies LR-400-xxx 5
Headphones Listen Technologies LA-165 5
Neck Induction Loop Listen Technologies LA-166 3
Spare Batteries Rechargable AA Listen Technologies LA-362 5
ADA Compliance Signage Listen Technologies LA-304 1
PROJECTION SYSTEM
Laser Projector Epson Pro L1300 (w/ lens) 1
Video Decoder Blackmagic Duet Decoder 1
Projection Screen Da-Lite Wireline Advantage 29238G 1
MULTIPURPOSE
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 5 17008.00
DEVICE MANUFACTURER MODEL QTY
LOUDSPEAKERS
Loudspeaker Type 1 QSC AC-C6T APD
Loudspeaker Type 2 QSC AD-P6T APD
Loudspeaker Type 3 JBL Control 47HC APD
Loudspeaker Type 4 (Termination BQ) QSC AC-S4T APD
LOBBY WIRELESS MICROPHONE
Wireless Receiver Shure ULX-D4Q 1
Wireless Transmitter Handheld Shure ULXD2/B58 4
Wireless Transmitter Bodypack Shure ULXD1 4
Labalier Microphone Countryman B3 (coordinate color w/ owner) 4
Antenna Active Directional Shure UA874-USTV 2
LOBBY PROJECTION SYSTEM
Laser Projector Epson Pro L1505 (w/ lens) 1
Video Decoder Blackmagic Duet Decoder 1
DISPLAYS
Display - Lobby LG 55SH7DB 3
Display Mount - Lobby Custom By Contractor 3
Signage Player - Lobby Spinetix HMP350 3
Display - VIP Lounge LG 65SE3KD-B 1
Display Mount - VIP Lounge Chief LSTU 1
Stream Decoder - VIP Lounge Visionary Solutions STB-H140 1
Display - Studio Classroom LG 65SE3KD-B 1
Display Mount - Studio Classroom Chief LSTU 1
Stream Decoder - Studio Classroom Visionary Solutions STB-H140 1
Display - Dressing Rooms LG 43SE3KD-B 4
Display Mount - Dressing Rooms Chief LSTU 4
Stream Decoder - Dressing Rooms Visionary Solutions STB-H140 4
Display - Offices LG 43SE3KD-B 3
Display Mount - Offices Chief LSTU 3
Stream Decoder - Offices Visionary Solutions STB-H140 3
Display - Green Room LG 65SE3KD-B 1
Display Mount - Green Room Chief LSTU 1
Stream Decoder - Green Room Visionary Solutions STB-H140 1
CONTROL
Touch Panel QSC TSC-80w-G2 APD
Volume Control AtteroTech CP1 APD
STANDS / CABLES / ACCESSORIES
Microphone Cables on Reel Whirlwind JHA-LCR-20F-50 1
Microphone Cables on Reel Whirlwind JHA-LCR-30F-30 1
Microphone Cables on Reel Whirlwind JHA-LCR-50F-20 1
Mircophone Dynamic Cardioid Shure SM57-LC 10
Mircophone Dynamic Cardioid Vocal Shure SM58-LC 12
Microphone Stand 17-25" & Boom 18-30" K&M 25900-577-55 8
Microphone Stand 35-63" & Boom 18-30" K&M 25090-577-55 12
Microphone Stand 35-63" Atlas MS-12CE 6
Microphone Stand 35-63" Heavy Duty Atlas MS20E 4
TERMINATIONS
FACILITY WIDE
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 6 17008.00
Terminations Custom By Contractor APD
DEVICE MANUFACTURER MODEL QTY
LOUDSPEAKERS
Outdoor Loudspeaker SoundTube SM52-EZ-WX 3
END OF SECTION
ADD ALT #2
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 7 17008.00
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 27 41 00 1
2
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS 3
4
PART 1 GENERAL 5
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 7
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work specified in this 8
Section. 9
B. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly 10
execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other 11
Sections. 12
1.2 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION 13
A. The following terms are defined for this specification section: 14
1. “Owner” or “End User” is City of Coppell. 15
2. “Architect” is the Architect for the project: Corgan. 16
3. “Systems” are the audio and video systems. 17
4. “Designer” or “Systems Designer” is the designer of the audio and video systems: 18
Jaffe Holden Acoustics, Inc. 19
5. “Electrical Engineer” is the designer of the Electrical Pathway & Wiring Systems: 20
TLC-Engineering. 21
6. “General Contractor” is the General Contractor or Construction Manager 22
responsible for the construction of the project. 23
7. “Contractor” or “Systems Contractor” is the specialty contractor working under the 24
General Contractor, responsible for the installation of the audio and video systems. 25
B. This specification covers all Systems as described below for the project. The objective is 26
to provide professional systems, installed, acceptance tested, and ready for use. 27
C. The written specification and the large format AV drawings shall be collectively referred 28
to herein as the Contract documents. System features which are mentioned in one part 29
may not be shown in the others. In case of conflict between the written specification and 30
the drawings, Contractor must seek clarification from the Systems Designer. In the event 31
that the Contractor fails to obtain such clarification, the interpretation of the Systems 32
Designer will prevail. 33
1.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY 34
A. Specification drawings are detailed only to the extent necessary to show design intent 35
and signal flow. It is understood and agreed by the Contractor that the work herein 36
described shall be complete in every detail to supply a complete working system. 37
B. Equipment not mentioned herein nor shown on drawings but necessary to meet this 38
requirement shall be provided without claim for additional payment. 39
1.4 SUMMARY DESCRIPTION 40
A. Appendix A contains the Summary Systems Description. 41
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 2 17008.0000
B. Specific products to meet the system requirements described in Appendix A will be called 1
out in the contract documents. 2
1.5 SCOPE OF WORK 3
A. Furnish all materials, labor and any engineering services to provide complete and 4
professionally installed Systems in working order as described herein. Labor furnished 5
shall be specialized and experienced in Systems installation. 6
B. Furnish all back boxes and enclosures. 7
C. Deliver to the job site all back boxes which are to be installed by others. 8
D. Furnish and install all wire and cable. 9
E. Contractor to provide initial DSP and control system programming prior to acceptance 10
testing, one full set of programming changes and adjustments, prior to handover to the 11
Owner, and one additional set of changes and adjustments during the initial warranty 12
period, as part of the base scope of work. 13
F. Furnish any additional items, not specifically mentioned herein, to meet system 14
requirements as specified, without claim for additional payment. Such items may include, 15
but are not limited to hardware, transformers, signal format converters, line/distribution 16
amplifiers and other devices for proper installation, interface, isolation or gain structure. 17
G. Furnish shop drawings and receive approval, prior to fabrication and installation. 18
H. Perform initial adjustments and verification tests. Submit verification test report. 19
I. Participate in acceptance tests and perform final adjustments. 20
J. Provide training sessions, as specified in section 3.15, to the Owner. 21
K. Provide any manufacturer required commissioning and/or training and properly 22
schedule with the manufacturer for their staff to attend. Coordinate schedule and training 23
syllabus with owner and consultant. 24
L. Provide system documentation including copies of all relevant drawings and equipment 25
manuals. 26
M. Provide maintenance services for the specified period from the date of acceptance. 27
N. Guarantee all equipment and components for the specified period from the date of 28
acceptance. 29
O. Requirements and materials that apply to the work of others related to the Systems are 30
listed to define and establish Systems requirements. 31
P. Work scope does not include the AC power system except as specifically called out in 32
these specifications or in the drawings. 33
Q. Coordination with the Electrical Contractor is required to assure correct Systems 34
conduit routing, Systems backbox locations, and clean power circuit locations as specified 35
in Division 26 - Electrical. 36
R. See Work Scope Summary Table at the end of Part One (Paragraph 1.12). 37
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 3 17008.0000
1.6 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Pre-Bid Submittals 2
1. All Contractors submitting bids for the Systems specified herein must be qualified by 3
the Systems Designer. 4
2. Not later than ten (10) days prior to the bid date, Contractor shall submit to the 5
Systems Designer for approval, brochures containing a statement of the Contractor's 6
qualifications. At minimum, this submittal shall include the following: 7
a. A list of Systems of comparable size and scope to that described herein, 8
completed by the Contractor in the last five (5) years. Indicate the project 9
name and address, year of completion, and the name and phone number of a 10
person to contact who is a representative of the Owner or User. 11
b. A personal resume of formal education and experience, and a copy of the 12
current CTS-I certificate of the staff member who would act as Leader for the 13
Project. A personal resume of formal education and experience, and a copy of 14
the current CTS-D certificate of the staff member who would act as Project 15
Engineer. 16
c. A description of the Contractor's capabilities and facilities for rack assembly, 17
shop fabrication, repair, and servicing of Systems 18
d. A description of the Contractor's capabilities and facilities for generating CAD 19
(or other high quality graphics) documentation for the Shop Drawings and As-20
Built Drawings 21
3. The following Contractors have submitted the required qualifications and have been 22
approved to bid: 23
a. Hairel Enterprises Contact: Robert Slaughter 24
3708 Hilltop Dr Phone: 936-539-1135 25
Conroe, TX 77303 Email: rslaughter@hesound.com 26
b. LD Systems Contact: Tony Kelly 27
407 Garden Oaks Blvd Phone: 713-695-9400 28
Houston, TX 77018 Email: tkelly@ldsystems.com 29
c. Professional Audio Designs Contact: Kim Leonard 30
11707-B West Dearbourn Ave. Phone: 414-476-1011 31
Wauwatosa. WI 53226 Email: kim@proaudiodesigns.com 32
B. Bid Submittals: 33
1. Contractors shall examine all drawings and read all divisions of this specification in 34
order to avoid omissions and duplications and to ensure a complete job. No 35
allowances shall be made for failure to read and understand these documents. 36
Discrepancies between drawings and specifications or obvious omissions shall be 37
referred to the Systems Designer for clarification before the bid date. Where 38
discrepancies occur and pre-bid instructions have not been obtained, the contractor 39
agrees to abide by the Systems Designer's decision. 40
2. Bid proposals shall include all work and all equipment as specified, as well as any 41
other equipment and materials to be used in assembling the system. 42
3. Requests for clarification of specification intent shall be made, in writing, not later 43
than ten (10) days prior to bid date. 44
4. No portion of the work herein may be assigned or sub-contracted to others unless 45
the following requirements have been satisfied: 46
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 4 17008.0000
a. The names of any proposed sub-contractors shall have been disclosed in the 1
bid proposal. 2
b. A statement of qualifications for each sub-contractor shall have been included 3
with the bid proposal. 4
c. All terms of this contract, including bidding and qualification requirements, 5
shall apply to the sub-contractor. 6
5. The bid submittals shall include the following: 7
a. The total Contract price 8
b. The total price for any Add-Alternates (See Paragraph 2.02.D) 9
c. An itemized list of all equipment and materials to be used in assembling the 10
system 11
d. Unit pricing for all items on the specified equipment list 12
e. Lot pricing for miscellaneous items not on the specified equipment list 13
f. A breakdown of the number of staff hours allotted for: 14
1) Preparation of submittals, shop drawings, and system documentation 15
2) On site coordination meetings and supervision 16
3) In shop engineering, fabrication, and assembly 17
4) On site fabrication, assembly, and installation 18
5) On site verification and acceptance testing 19
C. Shop Drawing Submittals: 20
1. Within thirty (30) days after contract award, submit a Work Scope plan that lists all 21
actions required to complete the work in this section. The Work Scope plan must 22
include a complete schedule of all activities, particularly activities that require 23
coordination with other trades, Architect, Owner, and Systems Designer, and must 24
reference all relevant documents related to each activity. Critical path must be 25
identified, and all key moments relating to procurement and installation must be 26
identified. All points of coordination must be vetted with the other affected parties 27
prior to submittal to the Owner for review. 28
2. Within sixty (60) days after contract award, submit digital PDF files of detailed shop 29
drawings to the Architect for approval. All shop drawings shall be marked with the 30
related drawing number when submitted. Do not begin installation or fabrication 31
without the approval of the Architect and Systems Designer. 32
3. Review of shop drawings shall not constitute final approval of system function. Said 33
review does not in any way relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of 34
furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract documents. 35
4. Failure of the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for evaluation shall 36
not entitle the Contractor to an extension of contract time, and no claim for 37
extension by reason of such default will be allowed. 38
5. Systems Designer will review submittals twice only without additional cost being 39
charged to the project. If a submittal or portion of a submittal is rejected after two 40
attempts, the Contractor is liable for additional cost for further reviews. 41
6. At minimum, the Shop Drawings shall include electronically bound copies of the 42
following: 43
a. Table of Contents 44
b. Itemized list of all equipment and materials to be used in assembling the 45
system 46
c. Catalog cut sheets or data sheets for each listed item. 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 5 17008.0000
1) Product data sheets must not be web page captures of specifications, 1
unless there is no other recourse. 2
2) Product data sheets with multiple options or part numbers must clearly 3
be marked with the selection to be used for this project. All options 4
must be called out. Anything the Contractor is not supplying that is 5
shown on the sheet must be called out as an exclusion. 6
d. One-line signal flow diagrams for all systems showing point to point wiring 7
interconnection of all equipment with wire run numbers and patch bay 8
designations. Show all transformers, switches, relays, control circuits, and 9
modifications to equipment. Show all equipment items which are required for 10
realization of the functions described herein. 11
e. A complete list of all wire run numbers along with the termination location of 12
each end of each wire run 13
f. Detailed 3-wire schematic diagrams for any custom circuitry 14
g. Detailed 3-wire schematic diagrams for typical connections between audio 15
lines, patch bays, and rack mounted equipment 16
h. Drawings of all items which are to be custom fabricated or modified. 17
Drawings shall be of scale suitable for use in fabrication. They shall show 18
materials, finishes and panel/control markings. Submit samples of 19
lettering/label size and typeface to be employed on custom plates, panels and 20
other equipment. 21
i. Full size drawings illustrating the physical layout and labeling of patch bays 22
j. Mechanical drawings of all assemblies, major sub-assemblies, racks, and 23
enclosures 24
k. Mechanical drawings showing proposed mounting details of all loudspeakers 25
and associated rigging, and interface with adjacent architecture 26
l. All mounting systems not provided as a complete package from a single 27
manufacturer must be engineered, approved, and have drawings stamped by a 28
professional rigging engineer or licensed structural engineer, as approved by 29
the General Contractor. The engineer shall verify that the design meets or 30
exceeds design criteria for this particular use case. Each mounting system 31
solution must be separately engineered, verified, and stamped. 32
m. Provide a detailed written plan for EDID and HDCP management for all 33
video signals and interconnections between video devices. 34
n. Provide an IP Address table and addressing protocol in coordination with 35
Owner’s IT department. 36
o. Provide a mockup of all system graphical user interface screens and all source 37
code/configuration files required for proper system operation. 38
7. For the ease of drawing review, the following guidelines must be adhered to: 39
a. Plot styles should be utilized so that color is only used for emphasis of specific 40
line types. 41
b. The paper size for all shop drawings must match that of all other construction 42
drawings. All drawings must be legible at ½ size. 43
c. Drawings should be in black and white but if color is used the drawings must 44
still be legible with all design information easily seen, when printed black and 45
white. 46
d. CAD drawings should be delivered as PDF prints. Provide DWG files upon 47
request. 48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 6 17008.0000
e. All revisions of drawings in drawing packages must include a revision number 1
and date, with all changed drawings clearly indicated, with changes clouded 2
and tagged with the revision number. Drawings that have not changed from 3
previous releases should not be marked as revised. Already revised drawings 4
should have revision clouds and tags removed from the previous revision so 5
that current revisions are clear to see. 6
8. Document release must be simultaneous unless a tiered release is authorized by the 7
Systems Designer. If utilizing a tiered document release system, each release must be 8
a full release of documents within each tier, within the context of the entirety of this 9
scope of work. The required order for tiered review is: 10
a. Equipment and Panel Locations, and Conduit Riser (provided as indicated in 11
the Work Scope Table in this section) 12
b. Complete project equipment list and Product data sheets 13
c. Single-line drawings, Panel details, Rack elevations, and Patchbay layouts 14
1) Patchbay layouts must conform to the guidelines for Patchbay layouts 15
included in this specification and on large format drawings. 16
2) Panel drawings must indicate each panel and its engraving individually (if 17
two ‘AA’ panels exist, for instance, they must have individual panel 18
drawings showing the connector numbering and other engraving 19
specific to that panel at that location) 20
3) All custom rack panels must have a panel drawing as part of this 21
submittal. 22
d. Rigging and Mounting Details 23
e. Control system and DSP system GUI mockup, functional control narrative, 24
initial DSP programming, other software configuration files, HDCP/EDID 25
plan and IP addressing plan. 26
9. All drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD, Revit, or in a similar and compatible 27
computer drafting/graphics program. All submittal drawings must be engineered 28
and drafted to represent actual fabrication and installation drawings and details. All 29
details that are graphically unclear must be properly noted to clarify intent. Copies of 30
the Contract Drawings are not acceptable as submittal drawings and will be rejected. 31
10. The use of electronic files generated by anyone other than the Systems Contractor 32
(e.g., architectural backgrounds, Systems Designer’s drawings, etc.) will not release 33
the Contractor of the responsibility to supply Shop Drawings that represent a 34
completely engineered, coordinated, and functional solution. The Contractor has the 35
final responsibility to provide systems that meet or exceed all requirements of the 36
contract documents. 37
D. Substitutions: 38
1. Substitutions may be permitted subsequent to Contract award, but only with the 39
express written permission of the Systems Designer. The proposed substitutes must 40
be equivalent to the specified products in quality, performance, construction, 41
function and conformance to system objectives. 42
2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to prove, to the satisfaction of the Systems 43
Designer, that the proposed substitution is equal to the specified product, as 44
demonstrated by submission of the following: 45
a. List of advantages to the Owner 46
b. Cost savings 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 7 17008.0000
c. Printed specifications or laboratory test data 1
d. Previous field experience 2
3. The Contractor shall list the unit price of each item proposed for substitution and 3
indicate which specified items are to be deleted. 4
4. If the Systems Designer determines that the proposed product is not equal to the 5
specified project, the Contractor shall supply the product specified in the Contract 6
documents. 7
5. Where substitute materials or methods are approved, the Contractor shall make all 8
adjustments to contingent work necessary to accommodate the substituted 9
equipment, without claim for additional payment. 10
6. In the event that one or more of the products specified herein is unavailable, the 11
Contractor shall make recommendations to the Systems Designer as to what 12
substitutions are available to meet the intent of the specification. 13
7. The Systems Designer reserves the right to substitute new products which become 14
available subsequent to the issuance of the Contract Documents, provided that: 15
a. The Contractor has not yet purchased the originally specified equipment. 16
b. The substitute equipment shall not materially increase the Contractor's costs. 17
8. Selected items of the systems are subject to rapid technology changes. Items that 18
have a high likelihood of needing re-evaluation prior to installation are highlighted in 19
the equipment list. The Contractor shall not purchase these items without 30 days 20
prior notice to the Systems Designer. 21
E. Samples: 22
1. Submit samples of substitute equipment to the Systems Designer as required to 23
prove equivalency to items specified. 24
2. Submit samples of custom work, finishes or other materials as required by the 25
Architect or Systems Designer to verify appearance and quality. All panels within 26
direct view of the public may require a custom finish. Provide the Architect with a 27
list of any panels that meet this criteria so that they may specify custom finishes. A 28
sample of every type of finish specified other than standard finish as detailed in this 29
specification must be provided to the Architect for approval. 30
3. Costs for shipping samples shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 31
4. Submitted samples will not be returned. 32
F. Progress Reports must be submitted to the Owner every two weeks. The progress report 33
will include: 34
1. Work Scope Plan updates and any schedule changes 35
2. Overall Project Status 36
3. Work Completed by percentage complete 37
4. Work planned for the next two week period 38
a. Call out any coordination requirements for each item. 39
5. Procurement report 40
a. Percentage by dollar value of equipment that has been procured to date 41
b. Procurement problems or concerns to be addressed by others 42
6. RFI/Submittal List 43
a. List outstanding RFI’s and Submittals, showing the assigned document 44
number and the date it was submitted. 45
b. Highlight in Yellow any items that are overdue but are not affecting schedule 46
or project quality. 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 8 17008.0000
c. Highlight in red any items that are overdue AND are affecting schedule 1
and/or project quality. 2
G. Written Guarantee (See Paragraph 1.9) 3
H. Verification Test Report (See Paragraph 3.13) 4
I. System Documentation and Operation Manuals (See Paragraph 3.15) 5
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS 6
A. Keep the job adequately staffed at all times. Unless illness, loss of personnel or other 7
circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor intervene, keep the same individual in 8
charge throughout. 9
B. Cooperate with all appropriate parties in order to achieve well-coordinated progress with 10
the overall construction completion schedule and satisfactory final results. 11
C. Watch for conflicts with work of other contractors on the job and execute, without 12
claim for extra payment, moderate moves or changes as are necessary to accommodate 13
other equipment or to preserve acoustic performance, symmetry, and pleasing appearance. 14
D. Immediately report to the Architect and Systems Designer any design or installation 15
irregularities, particularly architectural elements that interfere with the intended coverage 16
angles of loudspeakers, or proper open sightlines to projection surfaces or displays so that 17
appropriate action may be taken. 18
E. Do all cutting, patching and painting for proper and finished installation of the system 19
and repair any damage done as a result of such installation. Clean up and dispose of trash 20
from all Systems work areas. 21
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22
A. Parts listed shall be complete, type numbers accurate and equipment furnished shall 23
conform to manufacturer's specifications. 24
B. All materials shall be new and shall conform to applicable provisions of Underwriters 25
Laboratories and the American Standards Association. 26
C. Procure and pay for all permits, licenses and inspections and observe any requirements 27
stipulated therein. 28
D. Comply with federal, state and local labor regulations and applicable union regulations. 29
E. Installation shall conform to latest federal, state and local electrical and safety codes or 30
those of other authorities having jurisdiction. Where conflicts exist, the most stringent 31
code or regulation shall apply. 32
F. If additional work by the Systems Designer is required as a direct result of deviations 33
from approved drawings and specifications during construction, the General Contractor 34
and/or Systems Contractor will be liable for those additional costs that the Owner may 35
incur. 36
G. Government Standards: The Systems Contractor is to comply with all government 37
regulations, standards, and laws that apply to the installation and use of the AV 38
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 9 17008.0000
equipment and/or other scope of work specified in this section. The following agencies 1
have laws and rules that apply. 2
1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): FCC rules are located in Title 47 of 3
the Code of Federal Regulations. The following is a partial list of the FCC 4
regulations that apply to equipment specified in this section of work: 5
a. Part 15: Radio frequency devices 6
b. Part 22: Public mobile services. 7
c. Part 24: Personal communications services. 8
d. Part 25: Satellite communications. 9
e. Part 27: Wireless communications service. 10
f. Part 51: Interconnection. 11
g. Part 74: Experimental radio, special broadcast, and other program distribution 12
services. 13
h. Part 95: Personal radio services. 14
2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – Follow all applicable 15
standards for health and safety particularly sound pressure level exposure. 16
3. ANSI Standards: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards cover 17
safety, fabrication, assembly, installation, rigging, equipment handling, and testing. 18
4. Contributing Organizations – The Organizations listed below have published 19
standards used to establish the technical references to be followed under this scope 20
of work. 21
a. Acoustical Society of America (ASA) (ASC S1) 22
b. Alliance for Telecommunications Industry (ATIS) (ASC T1) 23
c. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) (ASC A1264) 24
d. Audio Engineering Society (AES) (ASC S4) 25
e. Electronics Industry Alliance (EIA) (CEMA) 26
f. Entertainment Services and Technology Association (ESTA) (ASC E1) 27
g. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) (ASC C136) (802.1) 28
1) IEEE 802.1AS: This standard specifies the protocol and procedures 29
used to ensure that the synchronization requirements are met for time 30
sensitive applications, such as audio and video, across Bridged and 31
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks consisting of LAN media where 32
the transmission delays are fixed and symmetrical. 33
2) IEEE 802.1QAT: This standard specifies protocols, procedures and 34
managed objects, usable by existing higher layer mechanisms, that allow 35
network resources to be reserved for specific traffic streams traversing a 36
bridged local area network. It identifies traffic streams to a level 37
sufficient for bridges to determine the required resources and provides a 38
mechanism for dynamic maintenance of those resources. 39
3) IEEE 802.1QAV: This standard allows bridges to provide guarantees 40
for time-sensitive (i.e. bounded latency and delivery variation), loss-41
sensitive real-time audio video (AV) data transmission (AV traffic). It 42
specifies per priority ingress metering, priority regeneration, and timing-43
aware queue draining algorithms. This standard uses the timing derived 44
from IEEE 802.1AS. Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tag encoded 45
priority values are allocated, in aggregate, to segregate frames among 46
controlled and non-controlled queues, allowing simultaneous support of 47
both AV traffic and other bridged traffic over and between wired and 48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 10 17008.0000
wireless Local Area Networks (LANs). Bridges are increasingly used to 1
interconnect devices that support audio and video streaming application. 2
This standard will specify enhancements to bridge relay function to 3
provide performance guarantees to allow for time-sensitive traffic in a 4
local area network and harmonize delay jitter and packet loss for wired 5
(e.g., IEEE 802.3 - "Standard for Information Technology - 6
Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems - 7
Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific Requirements Part 3: 8
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) 9
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications"), wireless (e.g., IEEE 10
Std 802.11 - "Standard for Information Technology - 11
Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local 12
and Metropolitan networks - Specific requirements - Part 11: Wireless 13
LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) 14
specifications"), and mixed wired/wireless L2 networks. Most if not all 15
entertainment media going forward is in digital form. Audio and video 16
streaming and interactive applications over bridged LANs need to be 17
enhanced to have comparable real-time performance of legacy out-of-18
band analog media distribution. There is significant vendor and end-user 19
interest and market opportunity to consolidate layer 2 solution for both 20
computer networking (e.g. internet access) and audio video services (e.g. 21
home consumer electronics, professional A/V applications, etc) in 22
mixed wired and wireless environments. The use of such consolidated 23
network will realize operational and equipment cost benefits. This 24
standard defines a set of enhancements to the Virtual Bridged LAN 25
(802.1Q - "Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - 26
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks").This will enable end-to-end 27
quality of service guarantee agreement for audio and video streaming 28
negotiated over SRP protocol to be realized in a bridged LAN, while 29
interoperating with existing 802.1D - "Standard for Local and 30
Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges" 31
and Q bridges. There is currently no interoperability among bridges that 32
support Audio and Video streaming, nor generally accepted means of 33
achieving such service guarantees in a bridged LAN. 34
4) IEEE 802.3 – 2008: A revision of base standard incorporating the 35
802.3an/ap/aq/as amendments, two corrigenda and errata. Link 36
aggregation was moved to 802.1AX. 37
5) IEEE 802.3AZ: Energy Efficient Ethernet is scheduled for release in 38
September 2010. 39
6) IEEE 802.3bd: Defines a MAC Control Frame to support 802.1Qbb 40
Priority-based Flow Control. 41
h. International Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Formerly IPCEA 42
i. International Standards Organization (ISO) 43
j. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) (ASC C119) 44
k. National Fire Protection Associations (NFPA) 45
l. National Safety Council (NSC) (ASC A10) 46
m. Photographic and Imaging Manufacturer’s Association (PIMA) 47
n. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) 48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 11 17008.0000
o. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) 1
p. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) (ASC C101) (CE) 2
q. NTSC 3
r. National Association of Broadcasters (NAB) – System technical standards for 4
video and RF compliance are listed in the most recent edition of the NAB 5
Handbook 6
5. Safety Standards – Contractor will adhere to the following Safety Standards for all 7
work identified in Division 27 41 00 and as part of the General and Supplementary 8
sections of the Division-1 Specifications. 9
a. ANSI A14.2-2000: Safety Requirements for Portable Metal Ladders 10
b. ANSI A14.7-2000: Safety Requirements for Mobile Ladder Stands and Mobile 11
Work Platforms. 12
c. ANSI C2-2002: National Electrical Safety Code 13
d. ANSI Z136.1-2000: Safe Use of Lasers and laser systems 14
e. ANSI Z136.2-1997: Safe Use of Optical Fiber 15
f. ANSI Z359.1-1992 (R1999): Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest 16
Systems, Subsystems, and Components. 17
g. ANSI/PIMA IT7.101-1999: Recommended Practice for the Safe Handling 18
and Operating of Audiovisual Equipment. 19
h. IEEE 142-1991: Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 20
i. UL 514A: Scrub Water exclusion from AV Floor Boxes 21
j. UL 1419-1995: Standard for Safety for Professional Video and Audio 22
Equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 23
k. UL 1492-1994: Standard for Safety for Audio-Video Products and Accessories 24
l. UL 1651-1997: Standard for Safety for single and multiple Optical Fiber Cable 25
m. UL 1667-1996: Audiovisual Systems Safety Standard for Tall AV Institutional 26
Carts for use with Audio, Video, etc. 27
n. ANSI E1.1-1999: Construction and Use of Wire Rope Ladders to prevent 28
most injuries 29
o. ANSI A10.8-2001: Safety Requirements for Scaffolding 30
p. ANSI A10.42-2000: Rigging Qualifications and Responsibilities 31
6. Applicable Performance Standards – Execute all Division work in accordance with 32
the following standards: 33
a. ANSI S4.48-1992 (R1998): Recommended Practice for the Application of 34
Connectors, Part 1, XLR-Type polarity, and gender 35
b. ANSI S4.55-1997: Recommended Practice for conservation of the Polarity of 36
Audio Signals 37
c. ANSI S4.56-1997: Recommended Practice for the subjective evaluation of 38
Loudspeakers 39
d. ANSI S12.2-1995 (R1999): Criteria for Evaluating Room Noise 40
e. ANSI T1.217-1991 (R1998): Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 41
Management –Primary Rate Physical Layer 42
f. ANSI T1.522-2000: Quality of Service (QOS) for Business Multimedia 43
Conferencing. Specifies classes of Service for conferencing on IP Networks 44
g. AES15: ANSI S4.49: AES Recommended practice for Sound Reinforcement 45
Systems –Communications Interface PA-422. 46
h. AES-R1-1997 AES project report for professional audio: Specifications for 47
audio on high capacity media 48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 12 17008.0000
i. AES14-1992 (r1998) AES standard for professional audio equipment -- 1
Application of connectors, part 1, XLR-type polarity and gender 2
j. AES24-1-1999, (Revision of AES24-1-1995) AES standard for sound system 3
control - Application protocol for controlling and monitoring audio devices 4
via digital data networks 5
k. AES26-2001 (Revision of AES26-1995) AES recommended practice for 6
professional audio -- Conservation of the polarity of audio signals 7
l. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-1993: Standard for the Telecommunications 8
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 9
m. ANSI/TIA/EIA 607-1994: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding 10
Requirements for Telecommunications 11
n. IEEE 149-1979 (R1990): Test Procedure for Antennas 12
o. IEEE 1100-1999: Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment 13
p. NEMA 250-2001: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 14
q. SMPTE 292M: SMPTE 292M defines the base 1.485Gbps HD-SDI. Note: 15
This standard can handle all HD formats except 1920*1080 @ 50P and 60P. 16
r. SMPTE 372M: Uncompressed Dual-Link HD-SDI for 50P & 60P 17
s. SMPTE 424M: 2.97 Gbps HD-SDI for 50P & 60P 18
t. TIA/EIA-568-B: Digital audio over Cat5 audio cable 19
u. UL 1047-1999: Isolated Power Systems Equipment 20
v. UL 1581-1998: Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible 21
Cords 22
w. UL 1682-1998: Standard for Safety for Plugs, Receptacles, and Cable 23
Connectors, of the Pin and Sleeve Type up to 800 Amperes and up to 600 24
volts ac or dc. 25
x. UL 467-1998: Grounding and Bonding Equipment 26
y. UL 813-1999: Commercial Audio Equipment and accessories for use in 27
commercial enterprises… this standard was originally listed for public review 28
in the October 13, 1995 issue of Standards Action. It is being resubmitted 29
owing to substantive changes in the text. 30
z. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 31
aa. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for 32
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 33
bb. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding 34
Requirements for Telecommunications 35
cc. ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB-72: Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines 36
dd. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed 37
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant 38
ee. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed 39
Single mode Fiber Cable Plant 40
ff. ANSI/IEEE C-2 National Electrical Safety Code how to install cabling in 41
accordance with the most recent edition of BICSI® publications: 42
gg. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 43
hh. BICSI Cabling Installation Manual 44
1.9 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE 45
A. All systems and components shall be guaranteed free of defects in materials and 46
workmanship for a period of one (1) year (or to the length of the Manufacturer’s warranty 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 13 17008.0000
if longer) from the date of acceptance and shall be repaired or replaced within forty-eight 1
(48) hours following report of such defects by the owner. 2
B. The Contractor shall be available on call and on eight (8) hour notice during the first 3
month following acceptance of the system, to assist the Owner’s representatives in any 4
problems which may arise during the initial period of operation. If corrective measures 5
on-site are required they will be performed within 12 hours of the determination of a need 6
for a site visit. 7
C. If, during the Guarantee period, any component is out of service for more than seven 8
(7) days due to unavailability of parts or service, Contractor shall supply and install an 9
identical new component. If an identical component is not available, Contractor will 10
substitute equivalent equipment, with the approval of the Owner. 11
D. During the course of the Guarantee period, the Systems Contractor will provide the 12
Owner with a 24 hour service phone number for emergency calls. A service engineer will 13
respond to all emergency calls within one (1) hour. The personnel answering this call must 14
be fully qualified to troubleshoot problems and propose solutions. A qualifying emergency 15
event is defined as an event that may cause severe hardship or cause the systems to be 16
inoperable or unusable for a scheduled class or event. 17
E. During the course of the Guarantee period, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 18
three (3) service visits to the site for inspection and adjustment of equipment. Contractor 19
shall submit proposed schedule for these visits and shall notify Owner and Systems 20
Designer in writing at least one month in advance of each visit. 21
F. During the course of the guarantee period, the Systems Contractor will supply the 22
Owner with any published updates of manufacturer provided operating programs for any 23
and all software-controlled equipment that are issued to correct “bugs”. During the 24
Guarantee period, the Owner will rely on the Systems Contractor to determine when to 25
update the software, unless it is needed to correct a situation that renders the systems 26
unstable, non-functional, or otherwise affects operations. 27
G. Repeated device failures, defined as the failure of a device or a single type of device 28
three or more times over three contiguous months, will be considered as a failure of a 29
manufactured system and all items of this type shall be replaced at no charge to the 30
Owner. 31
H. At least one representative of the Systems Contractor, well versed in the installation and 32
the operation of the systems, shall be on site in support of the Owner for the first 33
significant public event in each space (as determined by the Owner) where the system will 34
be used. The Contractor representative(s) for this event shall also be competent in show 35
operations. 36
I. Contractor is to coordinate ongoing remote access to AV Systems Networks for support 37
and troubleshooting. Owner to provide the access at their discretion. 38
1.10 INSURANCE 39
A. All equipment and materials shall be fully insured against loss or damage up until 40
acceptance of the system by the Owner or until Owner relieves the Contractor in writing 41
of this responsibility, whichever is earlier, regardless of the location of the equipment. All 42
equipment is deemed to be under the control of the Systems Contractor until acceptance 43
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 14 17008.0000
of the system by the Owner or until Owner relieves the Contractor in writing of this 1
responsibility, whichever is earlier. 2
1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS 3
A. Visit the site prior to making a bid. No subsequent allowance will be made due to 4
failure to thus observe and verify conditions which may affect the work. Report to the 5
Architect and Systems Designer any discrepancies among this specification and existing 6
conditions and similarly report obvious omissions. 7
8
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 15 17008.0000
1.12 WORK SCOPE SUMMARY TABLE 1
2
ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED AND
INSTALLED
General
Contractor
Electrical
Contractor
Systems
Contractor
Provide Install Provide Install Provide Install
Main Power Service Panel Boards
and Circuit Breakers
x x
· Main Power Service Conduit
and Conductors
x x
· Main Power Service
Terminations
x
Audio & Video Technical Power
(AVTP) Transformers
x x
· Transformer Conduit and
Conductors
x x
· Transformer Terminations x
AVTP Isolated Ground Conduit
and Conductors
x x
· Isolated Ground
Terminations
x◊
AVTP Distribution Panelboards and
Circuit Breakers
x x
· Distribution Panelboard
Conduit and Conductors
x x
· Distribution Panelboard
Terminations
x
AVTP Standard Load Centers and
Circuit Breakers
x x
· Standard Load Center
Conduit and Conductors
x x
· Standard Load Center
Terminations
x
AVTP Company Switches for
Portable Equipment
x x
· Company Switch Conduit
and Conductors
x x
· Company Switch
Terminations
x
AVTP Outlet Devices for Branch
Circuits delivered to Systems
Equipment Racks and Devices
x x
· Equipment Rack Back
Boxes and Wall Plates
x x
· Outlet Device Back Boxes x x
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 16 17008.0000
· Outlet Device Wall Plates x x
· Branch Circuit Conduit and
Conductors
x x
· Branch Circuit Termination x
Systems Equipment Racks and
Devices
x x
· Metallic Conduit between
Systems Devices and Racks
x x◊
· Insulation Bushings between
Metallic Conduit Racks
x x◊
· Systems Equipment Rack
Cabling
x x
· Systems Equipment Rack
Terminations
x
Systems Device Back Boxes and
Floor Boxes
x◊ x
· Systems Device Metallic
Conduit
x x◊
· Systems Device Cabling x x
· Systems Device Termination x
Empty Conduit (for temporary use) x x
· Systems Cable Trays x x
· Systems Cable Sleeves x x
· Systems Pull Boxes x x
Conduit Riser Diagram Submittal x
◊ Installation criteria to be provided by Systems Contractor
1
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 17 17008.0000
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 1
2.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT 2
A. Whenever any equipment is specified by manufacturer and model number, it is for 3
purposes of establishing a standard of quality, performance, construction and function. 4
B. All materials and equipment shall be new and of the latest design or model offered for 5
sale by the manufacturer. 6
C. Equipment models provided shall operate at the required AC line voltage and frequency. 7
D. Contractor shall provide quantities as indicated in the equipment list, detail drawings, 8
location drawings, schedule of terminations, and as required for a complete installation. 9
E. Audio & Video Wire and Cable 10
1. All wire numbers listed in the drawings are Belden unless otherwise noted. 11
2. THHN wire is not an allowable substitute for twisted pair stranded loudspeaker 12
wiring. 13
3. Approved manufacturers: Belden, Canare, Gepco, West Penn, Whirlwind 14
4. Where conflict exists with any codes or ordinances, such codes and ordinances shall 15
take precedence. 16
5. Where conflict exists with electrical specifications, the higher standard or more 17
stringent requirement shall apply. 18
F. Wiring Devices 19
1. Duplex Receptacles: per electrical drawings 20
2. AV Technical power plates for receptacles must be labeled with the panel number 21
and breaker number for the circuit(s) they are connected to (to be provided and 22
installed by DIV. 26) 23
G. AV System Plates and Panels: 24
1. Specifications – Rack Mount Panels 25
Material: 11 gauge steel or 1/8" Aluminum, minimum thickness 26
Finish: Black or to match adjacent equipment 27
Size: 19" wide, standard EIA mounting hole spacing, height as specified 28
2. Specifications – Back Box Enclosures 29
Material: Code grade steel 30
Finish: Black or galvanized 31
Size: As specified 32
3. Specifications – Plug Box and Termination Panels 33
Material: 11 gauge steel or 1/8" Aluminum, minimum thickness 34
Finish: Black (unless instructed otherwise by Architect) 35
Size: As specified 36
4. Approved Manufacturers: Steel City, Raco, Hoffman, Whirlwind, Pro Co, 37
Wireworks 38
H. Audio Transformers 39
1. All transformers shall be selected for proper interface and loading in the circuits as 40
required by as-built conditions and per manufacturer's recommendations. 41
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 18 17008.0000
2.2 MAJOR EQUIPMENT 1
A. Equipment provided shall be that specified herein or approved substitute (see Paragraph 2
1.6.B). 3
B. Detailed performance specifications shall be those published by the manufacturer 4
effective on the date of this document for all equipment listed. 5
C. See spreadsheet of major equipment in Appendix B. 6
2.3 DETAIL DRAWINGS 7
A. The drawings herein may detail custom built equipment and system details. 8
B. Furnish all materials and labor to provide complete and finished work even though not 9
specifically shown on the drawings. 10
C. Detail drawings are located in large format AV drawings. 11
12
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 19 17008.0000
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 AUDIO SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2
A. Requirements herein refer to materials and work which are related to or part of the 3
Systems. Where conflict exists with other specifications concerning such work or 4
materials, this specification takes precedence unless otherwise approved in writing by the 5
Owner. 6
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS 7
A. Locate all apparatus requiring adjustments, cleaning or similar attention so that it will be 8
accessible for such attention. Equipment racks shall be positioned to permit full access for 9
operation and service. 10
B. Furnish and install brackets, braces and supports. All mounting hardware shall be 11
included. 12
C. All bolts and fasteners must be Grade 5 or better. 13
D. All bolted attachments to have lock washers or other self-locking fasteners. 14
E. Provide all required mounting brackets and framing, hardware and components, safety 15
systems and rigging systems using the following minimum design factors (given as ratio 16
of working load limit (WWL) : rated breaking load): 17
1. 5:1 – Minimum design factor for all mounting components regardless of mounting 18
condition. 19
2. 5:1-8:1 – Minimum design factor for manufacturer provided mounts & assemblies 20
where engineered stamped documentation and destructive testing data is provided by 21
manufacturer. 22
3. 10:1 – For all hardware and connecting assemblies between manufacturer rated 23
assemblies when equipment is hung above the general public. This includes but is 24
not limited to wire rope, bolts, shackles, turnbuckles, beam clamps, supplemental 25
steel provided by Systems contractor and other connecting hardware. 26
4. Design factor calculations to be provided with all equipment mounting details. 27
5. Systems Contractor shall coordinate required additional blocking, supplemental steel 28
or channel strut supports with Main Contractor & specific trade contractors. 29
6. All mounting systems not provided as a complete package from a single 30
manufacturer must be engineered, approved, and have drawings stamped by a 31
professional rigging engineer or licensed structural engineer, as approved by the 32
Main Contractor. The engineer shall verify that the design meets or exceeds design 33
criteria for this particular use case. Each mounting system solution must be 34
separately engineered, verified, and stamped. 35
F. All supporting structures and enclosures supplied by the Contractor not having a standard 36
factory paint finish shall be painted. Paint specifications will be supplied by the 37
Architect or indicated herein. 38
G. Provide custom color or finish for any equipment or materials supplied which are 39
exposed to public view. Color and finish of all such equipment or materials shall be 40
approved in writing by the Architect. This does not exclude equipment or materials where 41
standard colors and finishes may be specified herein. 42
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 20 17008.0000
H. Finish of blank panels and custom assembly panels shall match adjacent equipment 1
panels. Verify all panel colors with Architect. All color choices should be clearly indicated 2
on panel drawing submittals, and on the panel schedule. 3
I. Switches, connectors, jacks, receptacles, outlets, cables and cable terminations shall be 4
logically and permanently marked. Custom panel nomenclature shall be engraved, etched 5
or screened. Markings for these items are detailed in the drawings to ensure consistency 6
and clarity. Verify any changes in working type size and/or placement with the Systems 7
Designer prior to marking. 8
J. Protect equipment and related wiring where construction conditions may cause damage 9
or environmental conditions exceed manufacturer’s specifications. 10
K. The standard reference for the layout and construction of the system shall be: 11
1. Giddings, Philip. Audio Systems Design and Installation. 12
3.3 CONDUIT 13
A. Review and coordinate Systems conduit installation with the electrical contractor to 14
ensure proper operation of the Systems. 15
B. All wiring shall be in conduit unless authorized by the Architect, approved by the 16
Systems Designer, and permitted by code. Exceptions are short runs at rack terminations 17
where there is no means of connecting conduit to the equipment. 18
C. Where installed exposed, conduits shall be parallel with or at right angles to walls or 19
ceilings and shall be supported from walls or ceilings by means of approved galvanized 20
iron clamps or hangers. Conduit connections to equipment racks shall be insulated. 21
D. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch. All conduit shall be sized for maximum 40% 22
fill or less if required by code. 23
24
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 21 17008.0000
1
3.4 CONDUIT SEPARATION 2
A. Systems wiring is divided into wiring groups according to their nominal voltage levels 3
(refer to Schedule of Terminations): 4
5
Wiring Type
Group A Microphones and other sensitive wiring (0 mV to 100 mV)
Group B Line level wiring (100 mV to 10 V)
Group C Loudspeaker and control wiring (10 V to 70 V)
Group D Telephone, video, control and digital circuits
Group E Fiber optic cable
Group F Spare Conduit
Note: These wiring groups must never be intermixed within a given conduit run or junction
box.
B. Minimum conduit separation between conduits carrying wiring of different groups is: 6
7
Group A Group B Group C Group D Group E
Group A adjacent 6" 12" 12" adjacent
Group B - adjacent 12" 6" adjacent
Group C - - adjacent 6" adjacent
Group D - - - adjacent adjacent
Group E - - - - adjacent
Group F 12” 12” 12” 12” adjacent
Note: Ninety degree crossings in close proximity are acceptable. Separations must be
maintained until within six feet of box or gutter entry.
C. Minimum conduit separation between conduits carrying Systems wiring and other 8
electrical service conduit is: 9
10
Group
A
Group
B
Group C Group
D
Group E Group
F
Dimmer
controlled lighting
24" 12" 6" 12" adjacent 24”
SCR controlled
services
24" 12" 6" 12" adjacent 24”
220/440V circuits 6" 6" adjacent adjacent adjacent 24”
All other services 6" 6" adjacent adjacent adjacent 24”
Note: Heavy current demands in or long parallel runs with the above
services
may dictate greater separations to avoid interference in the Systems.
Separations must be maintained until within six feet of box or gutter entry.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 22 17008.0000
D. Contractor must have written authorization from the Systems Designer for any conduit 1
installation which does not conform to these requirements. The conduit separations above 2
are based on the use of EMT conduit for all AV and other signals. Separations where 3
Rigid conduit is utilized for AV systems and/or other adjacent systems may be halved. 4
Separations where PVC conduit is utilized for AV systems and/or other adjacent systems 5
must be doubled. The Contractor must request information on separation adjustments for 6
each instance where a different type of conduit than what is listed above is used. 7
3.5 ELECTRICAL POWER 8
A. Review and coordinate electrical power system installation including grounding with the 9
electrical contractor to ensure proper operation of the Systems. 10
B. Verify that all AC power circuits designated for Systems equipment are wired with 11
correct polarity and isolated ground. Report in writing any discrepancies found to the 12
Architect for corrective action. 13
C. Provide distribution of electrical power within the equipment racks with a minimum of 14
one spare AC receptacle for each four in use per branch circuit. 15
3.6 STEEL SUPPORTS 16
A. Fabricate and install any supports so that the installation does not weaken or overload 17
the building structure. Do not impose the weight of equipment or fixtures on supports 18
provided for other trades or systems. No drilling or cutting of concrete beams, joists, or 19
structural steel, nor welding to structural steel, will be permitted except as authorized, in 20
writing, by the Architect. 21
3.7 BOXES 22
A. With the exception of portable equipment, all boxes, conduits, cabinets, equipment and 23
related wiring shall be held in place and the mounting shall be plumb and square. 24
B. All boxes shall be securely mounted to building structure. All boxes shall be installed so 25
that wiring contained in them is accessible. Install blanking devices or threaded plugs in all 26
unused holes. 27
C. Wiring groups and circuits shall be isolated as indicated herein. Common pull or 28
junction boxes are not permitted except as authorized, in writing, by the Systems Designer. 29
D. Clean all box interiors before installing plates, panels or covers. 30
3.8 WIRING METHODS AND PRACTICES 31
A. Provide installation of all Systems wire and cable, ensuring proper: 32
1. Pulling Tensions 33
2. Quantities 34
3. Types 35
4. Lengths 36
5. Routing 37
6. Wire Group Separation 38
7. Identification 39
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 23 17008.0000
B. The interconnection of equipment in a rack shall use the same wire by type as specified 1
for runs external to racks unless otherwise indicated on AV single line drawings. All 2
wiring within racks shall be direct between devices without splices. 3
C. Interconnection wire between amplifiers and loudspeaker transition panels will be type 4
LSXFR (refer to wire types on AV0.01). 5
D. Connector polarity shall be maintained except for terminations at equipment 6
manufactured to other standards. In the event that manufactured equipment can be 7
ordered with, or internally set to, various standards, the equipment shall be configured as 8
follows: 9
1. Polarity for XLR style connector shall be: pin 2-high, pin 3-low, and pin 1-shield. 10
2. Polarity for TRS style connector shall be: tip-high, ring-low, and sleeve-shield. 11
E. Spare wire runs of each group and type shall be pulled to each termination location. 12
The number of spares shall be ten percent of those in actual use or one, whichever is 13
greater. 14
F. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations of specified equipment. 15
G. Do not pull wire or cable through any box fitting or enclosure where change of raceway 16
alignment or direction occurs without written approval from the Systems Designer; do not 17
bend conductors to less than recommended radius. Employ temporary guides, sheaves, 18
and rollers to protect cables from excess tension, abrasion or damaging bending during 19
installation. 20
H. Provide wire pulling lubricants and pulling tensions in accordance with the wire and 21
cable manufacturer's recommendations. 22
I. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with self-23
laminating adhesive labels fully covered with clear heat shrink tubing, and a chart kept of 24
each wire's function. This applies to wire within a rack assembly as well as wire running in 25
conduit. 26
J. Wire ends should be wrapped with heat shrink tubing. Each shield or drain wire should 27
be covered with heat shrink to avoid unintentional connections. 28
K. Use Wago or Entrelec DIN rail mounted terminal blocks for all terminal block wiring 29
connections. Do not exceed one wire per terminal connection point. Do not cut strands 30
from conductors to fit lugs or terminals. Spare terminal blocks, equivalent to 10% of 31
those in actual use, shall be provided. 32
L. Form, in an orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wire ways and 33
wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie using wraps of 34
appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to six (6) inches and provide circuit 35
and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 36
M. Provide service loops, minimum 6’, at each termination so that plates, panels, patch 37
bays, and equipment can be dismounted and placed on an adjacent horizontal work surface 38
allowing for safe service and inspection without disconnection. 39
3.9 GROUNDING 40
A. Audio system wiring shall conform to the following procedures: 41
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 24 17008.0000
1. Audio equipment AC ground pins shall connect to AC isolated ground. 1
2. Audio equipment chassis shall connect to AC isolated ground or rack frames. 2
3. Audio rack frames shall connect to AC isolated ground bus in panelboard by means 3
of #2 gauge (minimum) conductor. 4
4. Audio shields between AC powered pieces of equipment, where signal shield is tied 5
to chassis ground, shall be connected to ground at one end only. Capacitively 6
terminate as required. 7
5. Audio signal paths between AC powered pieces of equipment shall be connected 8
using balanced lines and/or transformer isolation as required. No unbalanced signal 9
paths may be connected to the patch bay. 10
6. Isolate all Systems wiring from racks, back boxes and conduit. 11
7. Isolate all Systems racks from conduit and other conductive surfaces. Use insulated 12
bushings for conduit connections and a dielectric plinth between racks and 13
conductive flooring materials. 14
8. AC isolated ground system shall be isolated from all other facility grounds except at 15
the single point of connection. 16
9. All metallic conduit, boxes and enclosures shall be grounded in accordance with the 17
current National Electrical Code. 18
B. Metallic enclosures containing active equipment shall be grounded with due regard for 19
the minimization of electrical noise. This may include the provision of grounding 20
conductors separate from the AC ground. 21
3.10 EQUIPMENT RACKS 22
A. The equipment racks shall be considered as custom assemblies and shall be assembled, 23
wired and tested in the Contractor's shop. Assembly of racks on-site will not be permitted, 24
without written approval from the Systems Designer (except for shielded microphone and 25
line wiring which must connect directly to the patch bays). 26
B. Placement of equipment in equipment racks, as shown in the drawings, is for maximum 27
operator convenience. Verify any changes in placement of the equipment with the 28
Systems Designer before assembly. 29
C. Racks shall be installed plumb and square without twists in the frames or variations in 30
level between adjacent racks. 31
D. All wire, cable, terminal blocks, rack mounted equipment, and active slots of card frame 32
systems shall be clearly and logically labeled as to their function, circuit, or system. 33
Labeling on manufactured equipment shall be by engraved plastic laminate or by thermal 34
printer on adhesive tape, with white lettering on black background or dark background 35
that is similar to panel finish. 36
E. Provide stiffeners to custom panels to prevent panel deformation during normal 37
plugging or switching operations. 38
F. All wires and cables used in assembling custom panels and equipment racks shall be 39
formed into harnesses which are tied and supported in accordance with accepted 40
engineering practice. 41
G. Harnessed cables shall be combed straight, wrapped every six (6) to ten (10) inches, and 42
attached to the structure as necessary. Each cable that breaks out from a harness for 43
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 25 17008.0000
termination shall be provided with an ample service loop so that panels, patch bays, and 1
equipment can be dismounted and placed on an adjacent horizontal work surface allowing 2
for safe service and inspection without disconnecting. 3
H. Harnessed cables shall be formed in either a vertical or a horizontal relationship to 4
equipment, controls, components or terminations. 5
I. Cable shields shall be connected to the isolated ground system with due regard for 6
ground loops. (See Giddings reference book, Chapter 10) 7
J. All system components and related wiring shall be located with due regard for the 8
minimization of induced electro-magnetic and electrostatic noise, for the minimization of 9
wiring length, for proper ventilation, and to provide reasonable safety and convenience for 10
the operator. 11
K. All rack mounted equipment, with front panel controls, shall be provided with security 12
covers to avoid tampering with preset levels. If specific security covers are not included in 13
the equipment list, the Contractor will provide the manufacturer's security cover for each 14
specified device or a suitable alternate. 15
L. Every device shall be installed with regard for proper polarity. Absolute polarity shall be 16
maintained through the entire Systems signal chain. 17
M. Any permanently mounted electronic device must be balanced. Contractor will provide 18
balancing transformers for unbalanced equipment connections where necessary. 19
3.11 VERIFICATION TESTS 20
A. Test each point to point wire segment individually, and test any linkage of multiple point 21
to point cables that form an end to end link. 22
B. Confirm that each individual wire and cable run (whether in a rack or in conduit) is 23
identified with a unique number. These numbers are affixed to both ends of each cable 24
and are clearly visible. Provide a complete list of these numbers along with the 25
termination location of each end of the wire run. 26
C. Verify all circuits and extensions for correct connection, continuity and polarity. 27
Absolute polarity must be maintained between all points in the system. 28
D. Identify installed length of all copper and fiber cabling. 29
E. Confirm that all system outputs are free of spurious signals including oscillations and 30
radio frequency signals. A wide band oscilloscope shall be used to verify this condition. 31
F. Confirm that the system is free of audible clicks, pops, and other noises when any 32
operating control is activated, with or without input signal. 33
G. For all microphone lines, tie lines, return lines and effect loudspeaker lines, confirm: 34
1. Proper circuits appearing at each termination location 35
2. Proper circuits appearing at each jack bay position 36
3. Continuity of all conductors 37
4. Proper polarity is maintained 38
5. Absence of shorts between conductors within each circuit 39
6. Absence of shorts between circuit conductors and conduit 40
7. Perform a sweep test to 0.5MHz 41
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 26 17008.0000
H. For RF Coaxial cabling confirm: 1
1. Receptacles output does not exceed +15dBmv (50-400MHz - +6 dBmv minimum, 2
above 400MHz - +3dBmv minimum) 3
2. For each modulated video output, tap to meet +9dBmv (+/- 3dBmv) 4
3. Verify that all TV channels are visible and free of any interference or signal 5
distortion 6
4. Frequency sweep test from 5MHz to 1000MHz. 7
I. For all other Coaxial cabling confirm: 8
1. Verify that the installed cable meets, at a minimum, the requirements set forth in 9
SMPTE ST 2081 for 6G-SDI single-link and 12G-SDI dual-link. 10
2. Verify that TDR impedance is 75 +/-3 ohms 11
3. Frequency sweep test from 5MHz to 6GHz. 12
J. For Category Cabling: 13
1. Use Category 6A cable pair tester to verify compliance with TIA/EIA standards 14
referenced above (including all current addendums) 15
2. Test each cable using the permanent link procedure for opens, shorts, reversals, 16
cross twists and mis-wiring. Check NEXT, ELFEXT, Delay Skew, Return Loss, and 17
Alien Crosstalk. 18
3. Report all mis-wiring or failures found and report retests as needed. 19
4. If any conductors report open or short, replace the entire wire and re-test. 20
K. For Fiber cabling: 21
1. Using appropriate test devices and proper factory terminated jumpers, measure all 22
fiber optic line attenuations, end to end, as required by TIA/EIA-526-14A. 23
2. Optical budget may not exceed the cable performance by length plus splice and 24
connector losses (0.03 dB for each fusion splice, 0.3dB for each mechanical splice, 25
and/or 0.4 dB for each connector). 26
3. Overall attenuation must meet TIA/EIA-568B standards. Perform attenuation tests 27
at 850nm and 1300nm. 28
L. Confirm that loudspeakers and mountings are free of buzzes and rattles when the 29
loudspeaker is swept with sine wave tones over its rated bandwidth at one-half (1/2) its 30
maximum rated power. 31
M. For all permanently mounted loudspeaker terminations, provide impedance 32
measurement of each pair of loudspeaker lines with all loudspeakers connected and all 33
amplifiers disconnected. These measurements shall be documented as editable tabular 34
data listing impedance for each 1/3 octave band from 20 Hz to 20 kHz and shall be 35
accurate to the nearest tenth of an Ohm. 36
N. For all intercom terminations, confirm proper operation by initiating and receiving audio 37
communication and call light. For single lines connected to a matrix, test each line with 38
each channel in the matrix. Verify that all channels are quiet and without spurious noise. 39
O. For all electronic devices mounted in racks and connected to patch bays, confirm: 40
1. Every input and output is balanced. 41
2. Proper polarity is maintained throughout the entire audio path. 42
3. Tip connection of each TRS jack is connected to the positive terminal of each 43
corresponding input or output. 44
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 27 17008.0000
P. For all devices requiring IP addressing: 1
1. IP addressing scheme must make use of subnets such that all devices, regardless on 2
which network (Audio, Video, Control, or House) they reside, have a unique IP 3
address to eliminate the possibility of duplicate IP addresses if networks are 4
inadvertently cross-patched. 5
2. All devices must have static IP addresses. 6
3. Create a spreadsheet of all devices and their IP addresses, Subnet Masks, MAC 7
Addresses, and other pertinent IP configuration information. 8
4. Coordinate all IP addressing schemes with the Owner. 9
Q. If the Audio, Video, and Control network switches are dedicated to these systems and the 10
systems do not rely on Owner furnished and configured network switches: 11
1. Configure network switches to operate properly and provide the proper network 12
configurations to support the network devices and protocols used by those devices. 13
2. Configure, as needed, VLANS, IGMP, QOS, and other protocols requiring 14
configuration to provide a fully functioning and robust network system. 15
3. With all networks configured and operating, and all network devices configured and 16
operating, confirm that the networks are behaving as expected and as required. 17
R. Confirm that there are no shorts between the Neutral and Isolated Ground conductors, 18
and between the isolated ground conductor and building ground for each AV Technical 19
Power circuit. Confirm there are no Bootleg Grounds or Neutral-Ground Reversals on 20
each AV Technical Power circuit. 21
S. The Contractor is responsible for the programming and configuration of all DSP 22
systems and control systems necessary as specified in this project specification and AV 23
large format drawings. 24
1. Programming and configuration must be complete and ready prior to System 25
Designer’s arrival for verification of functionality and acceptance testing. 26
2. Programming for the DSP systems must contain control pages to support normal 27
operations, and to support Acceptance Testing and System Tuning operations, as 28
described in this specification and the large format AV drawings. 29
3. Programming for the Control Systems must include all master controller code and 30
touch panel code and graphics, working together to provide the function as 31
described in this specification and the large format AV drawings. 32
T. Test all Audio, Video, and Control system controls, including but not limited to mixing 33
consoles, switchers, routers, touch panels, paging stations, volume controls, and source 34
selectors for proper operation. 35
U. Test proper operation of any portable controls at each designated control location (Stage 36
Manager’s rack, for example). 37
3.12 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 38
A. Make all adjustments and modifications so that the system is operational and fully 39
functional including but not limited to: 40
1. Update all device software and firmware to the latest manufacturer’s recommended 41
release that allows for proper operation with ALL OTHER DEVICES in the 42
systems. 43
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 28 17008.0000
2. Make all adjustments and modifications for system gain structure per 1
recommendations of major component manufacturers. 2
3. Properly configure all EDID and HDCP settings to allow for proper function of all 3
video systems. 4
4. Install all programming for digital mixing consoles, DSP, Control and any other 5
software based devices in the systems, and verify that audio and video signal passes 6
as designed through these systems. Verify that control systems function as specified. 7
Contractor to provide initial DSP and control system programming prior to 8
acceptance testing, one full set of programming changes and adjustments, prior to 9
handover to the Owner, and one additional set of changes and adjustments during 10
the initial warranty period, as part of the base scope of work. 11
5. Properly balance all 70 Volt loudspeaker zones to be consistent from zone to zone 12
using amplifier settings and loudspeaker taps to adjust for differing loudspeakers or 13
installation height. All 70 Volt loudspeakers within a given zone must not have a 14
broadband SPL variation of greater than +/- 2dB. 15
6. Properly adjust delay and equalization for all loudspeaker systems using SIM, 16
SMAART or other similar dual FFT type measurement devices. All testing and 17
adjustment shall be in accordance with all manufacturer recommendations and 18
industry standard practice. Contact the Systems Designer for further system delay 19
and equalization requirements. 20
7. Capture traces showing magnitude and phase response for each loudspeaker or 21
loudspeaker cluster before and after equalization and delay adjustments. 22
8. Capture traces showing magnitude and phase response for the systems operating as a 23
whole from 3 locations in each major seating area. One of these areas should be the 24
House Mix Position, if applicable. 25
9. Equalization and timing of the loudspeaker systems shall be further adjusted as 26
required by the Systems Designer and Owner during Acceptance Testing. 27
3.13 VERIFICATION TEST REPORT 28
A. Submit written report detailing the results of Initial Adjustments and Verification Tests. 29
Report to include, at minimum, the following: 30
1. Copies of all relevant drawings, charts, test instrument data, and photographs. 31
a. PDF copies of all available manufacturers’ operation and service literature for 32
each major system component. 33
b. Copy of all programming files including, but not limited to, Audio DSP 34
programming and Graphic User Interface (GUI) files, Control system Touch 35
Panel GUI files and control system control programming files including un-36
compiled source codes. 37
c. All other documentation and results of testing and initial settings as referenced 38
in 3.11, and 3.12 above. 39
d. Written certification that the installation conforms to the requirements stated 40
herein, is complete in all respects, and is ready for inspection, Acceptance 41
Testing, and tuning. 42
2. Prepare and submit an InfoComm standard Commissioning Checklist for each 43
system in this specification. 44
3. Prepare and submit a training syllabus for Owner training (see section 3.15). 45
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 29 17008.0000
B. This report shall be completed and submitted to the Systems Designer for review a 1
minimum of five (5) days prior to Acceptance Testing and final tuning. 2
3.14 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 3
A. Acceptance Testing shall be performed by the Systems Designer and Contractor during 4
a period designated by the Architect. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of two (2) 5
technicians or one technician per Systems Designer commissioning team, for the 6
acceptance testing period, and one or more engineers fully capable of programming DSP 7
and Control systems, and making any other engineering adjustments to equipment in the 8
systems. Contact Systems Designer for number of commissioning teams that will be 9
deployed. For Bid purposes assume there will be 1 commissioning team(s).p 10
B. The minimum time required for Acceptance Testing is 5 working days, including 2 days 11
of dedicated quiet time. Coordinate this time period so that free access, work lighting, and 12
electrical power are available on the site. 13
C. Ensure that Systems areas are in a clean and orderly condition ready for acceptance 14
testing. 15
D. Provide test equipment (meeting the following minimum specifications) on site, at all 16
times during Acceptance Testing. Prior to Acceptance Testing, provide the Systems 17
Designer with a listing of the specific equipment to be made available (**). 18
1. Oscilloscope: 10MHz Bandwidth, Sensitivity – 1mV/cm 19
2. Digital Multi-meter: 1% Accuracy 20
3. Function Generator: 1MHz Bandwidth, Distortion < 1% 21
4. Real Time Analyzer: 1/3 Octave with microphone 22
5. SMAART Analysis package with V.8 software and a minimum of two matching test 23
microphones (Earthworks M30 or better) 24
6. Pink Noise Source: 20 Hz – 20 kHz Bandwidth 25
7. Impedance Sweep Meter: 20 Hz – 20 kHz Range, 1 Ohm – 50 kOhm 26
8. Polarity Checker: Mic, line, or loudspeaker level 27
9. Video Test Signal Generator(s): must provide all signals, resolutions, and output 28
formats as needed to fully test the systems. 29
30
** Note: Systems Designers may choose to supply some of their own test 31
equipment. Confirm specific requirements prior to commissioning. 32
E. Be prepared to verify the performance of any portion of the system by demonstration, 33
listening tests and instrumented measurements. 34
F. Be prepared to facilitate the visual inspection of system components and wiring, 35
including removal of termination panels for inspection of wiring termination and wire 36
management practices. 37
G. Be prepared to demonstrate all software and control systems. 38
H. Be prepared to go through the commissioning checklist and verify all items as complete. 39
I. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and 40
which are deemed necessary by the Systems Designer as a result of the Acceptance Tests. 41
This may include realigning of loudspeaker systems, changes in system gain structures, 42
grounding, filtering or interfaces. 43
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 30 17008.0000
J. Final acceptance will be contingent upon issuance by the Systems Designer of a letter of 1
acceptance stating that the work has been completed and is in accordance with the 2
contract documents. 3
K. Contractor will bear any costs incurred for additional Systems Designer's time and 4
expenses due to failure to have the system functioning in accordance with specification 5
requirements at the times scheduled for Systems Designer's Acceptance Testing. 6
3.15 USER TRAINING 7
A. Contractor will provide in-depth training in operation and regular maintenance of all 8
systems and on all equipment included in the scope of work contained in this specification 9
and the AV large format drawings. 10
B. Training to include (but is not limited to): 11
1. Detailed operation of mixing consoles, video switchers and routers, computer 12
control systems and other essential system elements as relevant to their installation in 13
this project. 14
2. Maintenance and repair of system equipment, including replacement procedures for 15
user-replaceable parts. 16
3. Review of Operation and Maintenance Manual (See 3.16) 17
C. Contractor will provide a minimum of 2 training sessions of four hours each. 18
D. The first session shall take place in the presence of the Systems Designer and shall occur 19
directly after the completion of Acceptance Testing. If the Systems Designer, Owner, 20
and/or Architect judge any work to be deficient and/or not substantially complete at the 21
time scheduled for training, the training will be postponed until the Systems Designer, 22
Owner, and Architect judge the entire AV system conforms to this specification and the 23
AV large format drawings. 24
E. Contractor will bear any costs incurred for additional Systems Designer's time and 25
expenses due to failure to have the system functioning in accordance with specification 26
requirements at the times scheduled for User Training. 27
3.16 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION 28
A. Within thirty (30) days of the Acceptance Testing, prepare and submit a CD-ROM of 29
the preliminary Operation and Maintenance manual for approval by the Systems Designer. 30
Manual to include, at minimum, the following documents in PDF format: 31
1. Table of contents 32
2. Written Guarantee and service policy 33
3. Basic power on/off and operational procedure 34
4. Copies of all shop drawings which have been updated to include any changes made 35
during the installation process 36
5. All available manufacturers’ operation and service literature for each major system 37
component 38
6. One line signal flow diagram with all cable runs and patch points identified by alpha-39
numeric character 40
7. Copy of the Verification Test report 41
8. Copy of conduit riser diagram 42
9. Copy of the final tuning settings as provided by the Systems Designer 43
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 27 41 00 - 31 17008.0000
10. Copy of the IP Addressing table 1
11. Copy of all uncompiled source codes and configuration files which have been 2
updated to include any changes made during the installation process. 3
B. Systems Designer will review the above system documentation. Upon approval, 4
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner: 5
1. Five (5) copies of the final Operation and Maintenance manual on CD-ROM or 6
DVD. 7
2. Two (2) hard copies of the final Operation and Maintenance manual printed and 8
neatly bound 9
C. Provide framed or laminated copy of the as-built signal flow diagram for each theater to 10
be mounted in each control room. This diagram shall have all cable runs and patch points 11
identified by alpha-numeric character. 12
13
14
APPENDICIES TO FOLLOW 15
16
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 1
SECTION 28 0513
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. General: Telecommunications Drawings apply to work of this section. The overall and
detailed design shown on the drawings, selected materials, device locations, installation
details, mounting details, cabling routing and supporting and all technical specifications if
provided on the drawings apply to work of this section.
C. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
270526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270527 RACEWAYS AND WIRING FOR AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
270529 COMBINED LOW VOLTAGE POWER FLOOR BOXES
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Coaxial cabling.
2. RS-232 cabling.
3. RS-485 cabling.
4. Low-voltage control cabling.
5. Control-circuit conductors.
6. Identification products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 (2008) for circuits and equipment operating at less
than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between
the studs of a wall cavity).
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 2
F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:
a. Nominal OD.
b. Minimum bending radius.
c. Maximum pulling tension.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in operation and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Allowable pulling tension of cable.
2. Cable connectors and terminations recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70 (2008), by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are
not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COAXIAL CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers:
1. Belden.
2. CommScope, Inc.
B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable
manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable
and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB
maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.
C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70 (2008), Type CATV.
1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 3
2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent
aluminum braid.
4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.
5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40
to plus 85 deg C.
D. RG-6/U: NFPA 70 (2008), Type CATV or CM.
1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE
insulation.
2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum
braid.
3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.
4. Suitable for indoor installations.
E. NFPA and UL Compliance: Coaxial cables shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA
70 (2008) "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and
Radio Distribution" Articles.
2.2 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE
A. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
2.3 RS-232 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70 (2008), Type CM.
1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. Polypropylene insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield
coverage.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned
copper drain wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
2.4 RS-485 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70 (2008), Type CMG.
1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70 (2008), Type CMG.
1. 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29)] and [No. 18 AWG, stranded
(19x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 4
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
2.6 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in
raceway.
B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in
raceway, power-limited cable, complying with UL 83, concealed in building finishes.
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF,
complying with UL 83.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers:
1. Brady Corporation.
2. HellermannTyton.
3. PANDUIT CORP.
B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall
test the frequency response or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a
voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing
the results.
C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING METHOD
A. Install wiring in metal raceways and wireways. Conceal raceway except in unfinished
spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data
transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.
B. Install wiring in raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and in interior hollow
gypsum board partitions where cable may be used. Conceal raceways and wiring except
in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control
and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.
C. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 5
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use
lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited
conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with
or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are
terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to
terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all
connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks,
or plug connectors.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
C. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch
panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding
30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks,
frames, and terminals.
5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in
BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice
cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if
damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable
pull tensions.
D. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:
1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X.
Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out
moisture.
2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36
inches.
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above
ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts,
or other potentially damaging items.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 6
3.3 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.
B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems" for
connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for connecting,
terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Access Control" for connecting,
terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for connecting,
terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
E. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring
and Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
F. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for
connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM (Eleventh Edition or latest), "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. For communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM
(Eleventh Edition or latest), "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 05 13 - 7
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
2. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Master
Antenna Television System."
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 28 0513
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 1
SECTION 28 10 00
SECURITY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work shall include furnishing all labor, materials, enclosures, wiring, equipment,
and documentation required to provide a completely operational and working Security
System. Any materials or equipment necessary for the proper operation of this
system, whether or not specified or described herein, shall be deemed part of this
system and shall be provided by the contractor without any additional cost to the
client.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General Terms and Conditions of the Contract Documents
1. Division 8 – Door Hardware
2. Division 26 – Electrical
3. Division 27– System
B. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional
requirements, which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
270526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270528 RACEWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY
271000 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
282000 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM
C.The Division 26 electrical contractor shall provide conduit infrastructure to support this
system. The security contractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to
ensure the proper location and placement of this equipment. Conduit shall be
provided from the device the nearest communications room on each floor as shown on
the drawings. Within the communication rooms all conduit necessary to route cabling
from a rough-in location, to and between equipment racks or panels, shall be provided
under this scope of work.
D. The security contractor shall coordinate with the door hardware contractor on the
placement of all electronic door hardware. The door hardware contractor shall provide
and install all electronic door locks and door position switches for this project. The
security contractor shall connect all DPS's and shall provide and install the low voltage
power supplies associated with electric mortise locks, electric strikes, and magnetic
locks. Power supplies associated with delayed egress locks and electric latch locks
shall be provided by the door hardware contractor. All wire and cable and the
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 2
termination of connections shall be accomplished under the security contractor’s
scope of work.
Where interface of door hardware is required with the fire alarm system the security
contractor shall coordinate with the fire alarm contractor to ensure all necessary
connections are made.
E. Network components, wiring, and fiber optic cabling shall conform to all owner
established requirements, standards, and practices.
1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor selected for this project must be a direct manufacturer authorized
representative of the product they propose to provide. All technicians assigned to
install and configure this system shall be factory trained and certified for the proper
installation of this equipment. The contractor must have a minimum of (3) qualified
and factory trained technicians to support this specified system. This company must
be of established reputation and experience, regularly engaged in the supply and
support of such systems for a period of at least five consecutive years under the
current company name. This company shall have a fully staffed office of sales and
technical support representatives within a 2-hour travel time to this project.
B. The contractor, as a minimum, must carry a current state issued limited energy
license.
1.4 SPECIFIED SYSTEM
A. The following Access Control manufacturer has been used for the basis for this design
and is the City’s standard:
1.S2 Security NetBox – Extreme V4.9.11 (or most current at time of purchase)
a.NetBox Video Management Module: Milestone XProtect license S2-VMS-B-
MS for first (4) cameras plus license S2-VMS—C-MS for each additional
camera shown on this project.
b.NetBox Identity Management Module: License S2-IDC-16 to support up to
10K ID Badges.
c.DMP XR-500 Intrusion Alarm Integration Module: S2-DMP
B.The following alternate access control manufacturers will be acceptable if comparable
components are provided.
Lenel - OnGuard
AMAG - Symmetry
Johnson Controls – Pegasys
4. Siemens – SiPass
D. The use of these systems does not release the contractor from the submittal requirements
defined herein. All submittals must conform with applicable sections of this specification.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 3
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The security systems primary purposes shall be to provide access control and alarm
monitoring capabilities for the project. The system shall provide the ability to regulate
and control access through specific areas of the facility and shall fully integrate with
other security components such as closed circuit television and digital video
recording.
Alarm monitoring and administrative workstations shall have the ability to connect
with, monitor, and control field hardware such as intelligent system control panels.
Administrative tasks such as defining access levels, control groups, and time zones,
shall be available from any client workstation in the security network. Access to this
information shall be controlled through user login privileges and secure
communication protocols. All database information shall be accessible in real-time by
the networked workstations.
B The main alarm monitoring window on the computer workstation shall have the ability
to sort pending and new alarms based on any of the following attributes: priority,
date/time, alarm description, intelligent system controller, card reader, or cardholder.
The system must allow unique emergency instructions to be specified for each type of
alarm.
A real-time graphical map representing the layout of this building shall indicate if an
electronically controlled door is in a secure or unsecured mode. Control modules will
be required to lock, or unlock, any electronically controlled door or vehicle gate at this
facility. An automatic cardholder call-up feature shall allow for the quick search and
display of images in the database. A System’s Operator journal shall be available to
log important daily events. A trace function shall be available for System Operator’s to
locate and track activity on a specific cardholder or at a specific biometric reader. All
system hardware must be controllable using a mouse to click on the associated
system icon.
1.6 RESPONSE TO SPECIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall submit a point-by-point statement of compliance with all relevant
sections, as defined herein.
B. The statement of compliance shall consist of a list of all numbered paragraphs within
these sections.
1. Where the proposed system complies fully with the numbered paragraphs as
written, such shall be indicated by placing the word "comply" opposite the
paragraph number.
2. Where the proposed system does not comply with the paragraph as written, but
the Contractor feels it will accomplish the intent of the paragraph in a manner
different from that described, a full description of the intent perceived by the
Contractor shall be provided as well as a full description of how the proposal will
meet this intent.
3. Where a full description is not provided it shall be assumed that the proposed
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 4
system does not comply with the paragraph in question.
C. Any submission that does not include a point-by-point statement of compliance as
described herein, shall be subject to disqualification from consideration as non-
compliant.
D. Documentation in support of substitute equipment shall qualify all parameters with
tangible values in the response notations or on the manufactures original data sheets
and shall not include vague statements such as “limitless” or “virtually limitless”.
Submissions documents using this type of statement shall be considered non-
compliant.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitution of products proposed to be equal to those specified herein will be
considered only when the following requirements have been met:
1. A complete list of such substituted products with drawings and product data
sheets.
2. Substitute equipment must be a standard part of that systems current product
line and should meet or exceed the capabilities of the equipment specified
herein. Beta, Specials, or “One Time” products will not be acceptable. If
proposed substitutions do not meet or exceed the performance levels specified
herein, the limitations of this equipment must be highlighted and brought to the
attention of the consulting engineers. Failure to notify the engineers of these
limitations, whether intentionally or by oversight, may result in rejection of those
components at any time. Should this occur the contractor will be required to
replace the rejected equipment with re-approved components that meet or
exceed the requirements as specified, herein. This will be done at no additional
cost to the client.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 20 business days of receiving contract approval and notice to proceed, the
following items shall be submitted to the consulting engineers for review and approval.
Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following items:
1. Product numbers, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment.
2. All wire and cable type and size.
3. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all devices.
4. Single-line drawings representing the entire system.
5. Termination details.
6. Course outlines for each of the end user training programs. The course outlines
shall include the course duration, pre-requisites, and a brief description of the
subject matter.
7. Proposed method of wire marking, panel labeling, zone identification, and
terminal strip numbering.
8. Project milestone schedule.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 5
1.9 REFERENCES
A. Design and operation of the system shall conform to the following referenced codes,
regulations, and standards as applicable:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. Electronic Industry Association ANSI/EIA/TIA
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
4. Underwriters Laboratories UL 294, UL 639, and UL 1037, UL 1076
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
6. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CRF Part 15 and 90
7. Applicable Federal, State, and Local Laws, Regulations, and Codes
1.10 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations are used in this document:
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AWG American Wire Gauge
BPS Bits per Second
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
CPU Central Processing Unit
CPS Characters per Second
DAT Digital Audio Tape
DPS Door Position Switch
FCC Federal Communications Commission
GUI Graphical User Interface
ID Identification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/O Input /Output
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
ODBC Open Database Connectivity
PIN Personal Identification Number
PTZ Pan/Tilt/Zoom
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks
REX Request to Exit
SCS Security Control System
SDRAM Synchronized Dynamic Random Access Memory
TSP Twisted Shielded Pair
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
1.11 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 6
A. The following terms are defined for the purposes of this specification:
Access Group: A logical group of card readers (terminals) which may be connected
to one or more sub-controllers and which represent a collection of
readers for which a particular cardholder may have access privileges.
Access Mode: The mode of operation in which the security control system shall only
annunciate tamper and trouble conditions at a monitored point. Alarm
conditions shall not be annunciated in this mode. Also referred to as
alarm shunting.
Acknowledge: The action taken by a security control system operator to indicate that
he/she is aware of a specific alarm or tamper state.
Action Messages: A set of instructions automatically provided to the operator when
an alarm condition is generated.
Advisory: A message provided by the security control system to the operator to
inform him/her of a condition as reported by the security control
system.
Alarm Condition: A change of state as sensed by the security control system
indicating that the security control system has detected a condition
which its sensors were designed to detect.
Cardholder: A person who has been issued a valid access card.
Card Reader: A device usually located at access points, designed to decode the
information contained on or within a card key credential for the
purposes of making an access decision or for identity verification.
Clear: The action taken by a security control system operator to respond to
an alarm condition or advisory so that other alarms may be serviced
or so that other actions may be taken.
Download: To send computer data from the File Server to a controller for the
purposes of making access decision without the intervention of the
File Server.
Facility Code: A coded number, in addition to the individual card number, stored
within each card key that uniquely identifies the facility at which the
card is valid. This feature prevents cards from one facility from being
used at another facility that has a similar access control system.
File Server Primary host computer in the networked security system which
maintains the access control system database.
Line Supervision: The monitoring of an electrical circuit via electrical and software
systems to verify the electrical integrity of the supervised circuit.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 7
Off-line: A condition in which a controller(s) is not in communication with the
File Server. In the off-line mode, the controller continues to make
access decisions and process alarms according to the information
stored at its local database.
Password: A combination of numbers or letters unique to security control system
operator which defines commands and data fields he/she may view,
edit, or command.
Reset: A command or feedback signal that indicates that a monitored point
has returned to its normal state after having transferred to the alarm
or trouble state.
Secure Mode: The normal state of an alarm input point from which it will be
monitored for change of state to either an alarm or trouble condition.
Secured Area: A physical location within the facility to which access is controlled by
one or more card readers.
Tamper: A condition within the circuitry of a monitored point which indicates
the electrical integrity of that sensing circuit has been compromised.
Time Interval: A time stamp of one start time and one stop time within a time period.
Time Period: A user programmable period of time made up of days of the week
and hours in the day.
Trouble: A condition within the circuitry of a monitored point which indicates
that an equipment malfunction, single break, single fault or a wire-to-
wire short exists.
User Definable: An attribute of a security control system function that may be easily
tailored by the System Administrator.
Workstation: A personal computer connected to the main security control system
File Server via a local area network connection for the purpose of
programming the system and responding to alarms.
PART 2 - SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
2.1 BASIC SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. The System shall be implemented through network appliance architecture with a
three-tiered modular hardware hierarchy and embedded three-tiered software
architecture. The System shall integrate in the browser interface the access control,
alarm monitoring, camera and video monitoring, intercom, and temperature
monitoring applications. The system shall also maintain a database of system activity,
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 8
personnel access control information, and system user passwords and user role
permissions.
B. The network appliance shall be capable of running on an existing TCP/IP network
and shall be accessible, configurable, and manageable from any network connected
PC with a browser. Browser access for configuration and administration of the system
shall be possible from a PC on the same subnet, through routers and gateways from
other subnets, and from the Internet. Control and management of the system shall
therefore be geographically independent.
IP video cameras, video storage subsystems, VoIP intercoms, and other network
connected storage systems shall be usable by the system via TCP/IP
communications over the network.
Security of the data communicated over the network to and from the browser,
network controller, and nodes is protected by encryption (SSL 128-bit) and
authentication (SHA-1).
C. At the top of the hardware tiers is the Network Controller. Embedded on the network
controller are an operating system, a web server, security application software, and
the database of personnel and system activity.
The middle hardware tier is the Network Node. The network node shall make and
manage access control decisions with data provided by the network controller, and it
shall manage the communication between the network controller and application
blades connected to the system’s inputs, outputs, and readers.
The bottom hardware tier is the Application Blades. Four unique application blades
shall be available.
An Access Blade shall support two readers, four supervised inputs, and four relay
outputs.
An Alarm Input Blade shall support eight supervised inputs.
A Relay Output Blade shall support eight relay outputs.
A Temperature Blade shall support eight analog temperature sensor inputs.
This modular design makes it possible, even during network downtime, for the
system to continue to manage access control, and store system activity logs. When
network connectivity is reestablished the system activity logs are automatically
reintegrated.
Each NetDoor MicroNode shall function as a node and as an access control blade. In
addition each MicroNode shall support one temperature input.
No separate PC client or PC server hardware shall be required.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 9
D. The database tier shall use PostgreSQL. PostgreSQL is a full featured, high
performance database management system that supports ODBC. This shall provide
a small footprint, low administration, and high reliability relational database that is
embedded without requiring the use of a separate PC server.
The web server tier shall be based on GoAhead’s embedded web server. This shall
provide a graphically rich security management application through a standard web
browser.
The security application software tier contains the business logic. This application
shall also be embedded on the network device and requires no additional memory or
processing power.
This three tiered embedded software design runs within an embedded Linux
operating system and shall require no client side software other than a web browser.
Only a browser shall be required for a base system.
2.2 SYSTEM CERTIFICATIONS
A. All components shall be UL listed and approved.
2.3 SECURITY SOFTWARE
A.The System shall consist of a network device with a three tiered embedded software
architecture.
B. The database tier uses PostgreSQL. PostgreSQL is a full featured, high performance
database management system that supports ODBC. This shall provide a small
footprint, low administration, and high reliability relational database without requiring
the use of a separate server.
C. The web server tier shall be based on GoAhead’s embedded web server. This shall
provide a graphically rich security management application through a standard web
browser.
D. The security application software tier contains the business logic. This application shall
also be embedded on the network device and requires no additional memory or
processing power.
This three tiered embedded software design runs within an embedded Linux
operating system and shall require no client side software other than a web browser.
2.4 COMPUTER SYSTEM HARDWARE
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 10
A. The computer architecture for the new system will consist of (1) dedicated host
network file server, and (2) client monitoring workstations. The contractor will be
responsible for the purchase, setup, installation, and configuration of all necessary
hardware and software components for these systems.
1. Computers will be located as follows:
a. TBD
B. The Security Control System includes a comprehensive and integral group of pre-
planned hardware and software components that derive their data from a single
industry standard relational database.
C. The Network File Server shall be a supplier certified industry standard computer in a
rack mount configuration. It must meet all requirements established by the access
control manufacturer and shall have a recommended minimum system capacity as
follows:
Intel Xeon 5650 Processor, 2.66GHz Turbo HT CPU 12MB Cache and
1066MHz FSB
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 Operating System Server Software
4GB DDR2 400MHz Single Ranked DIMM Memory
(2) 146GB 15K RPM Ultra SCSI Hard Drive
Perc4e SCSI Controller (RAID-1)
24x CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive
36/72GB DAT72 Tape Drive & Backup Software
Dual 1GB Gigabit NIC
Rack Mounting Rails
Basis of Design: Dell PowerEdge R710
3yr Next Business Day Support
D. All system workstations shall be a supplier certified industry standard computer in a
tower configuration. It must meet all requirements established by the access control
manufacturer and shall have a recommended minimum system capacity as follows:
Intel Quad Core Xeon Processor E5630, 2.53GHz CPU
Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 Operating System
4GB 133MHz ECC DDR3 Memory
250GB SATA 3.0Gb/s Hard Drive
(2) 512MB Graphic Card with Quad 4DP/ 2DVI Video Output
48x CD-R/RW Drive & 16x DVD-R/RW Drive
Sound Card & Speakers
Gigabit Network Interface Card
Basis of Design: Dell Precision 390
E. All workstations shall include a wireless mouse and wireless keyboard for data entry.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 11
F. All computer workstations shall include a Hi-Resolution color LCD Monitor with
speaker system. This monitor shall have a resolution of 1600 x 1200, with a 1000:1
contrast ratio, and a 170 degree viewing angle. The LCD monitor shall support both
analog and digital video input. The monitor case shall be black in color. The LCD
computer monitor shall be a Dell 23" Professional Series P2311H with sound-bar
speaker or an approved equal.
G. All computers shall receive UPS power supplies with an integrated surge protector.
Minimum runtimes in the event of total power loss shall not be less than 15 minutes.
The UPS for these systems shall be and APC Smart-UPS 1400 or an approved equal.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 12
2.5 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. The Security Control System software operator screens shall utilize all standard
Windows GUI style functions such as drop-down menus, radio buttons, check boxes,
list boxes, etc. The Security Control System shall provide context sensitive help screen
windows to insure the user’s ability to receive on-line informational text pertinent to the
task being performed. Access to these help screens shall be controlled with a
dedicated function key or via the mouse and pull-down menus.
2.6 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. The contractor shall provide and install a new integrated security management system
that shall provide a simple and easy-to-use graphical user interface. The system shall
provide local operational control of all access points and alarm sensors.
B. The system shall meet UL-294.
C. The SMS shall seamlessly integrate the functions of access control, alarms
monitoring, digital video imaging, badge design & creation, and visitor management.
2.7 OPERATOR PROFILE LEVELS
A. Access to the Security operating system shall be protected by a system specific
software key and require a valid operator name and password. Access shall also be
governed by an access level scheme which shall precisely define an operator’s level of
access to each menu item and determine whether a menu item is able to be viewed
only, or allow editing. The Security Control System shall provide a first level of access
protection but shall also provide an additional level of protection designed to
accommodate a protection scheme to define access to the systems configuration
software.
1. At a minimum the following information shall be stored for each user:
a. User Information
b. Login Information
c. Privileges
2. 8 HISTORICAL LOG
A. This screen shall also be frozen and printed to provide a hard copy evidence of any
abuse observed by the operator. For high security access points, the system shall be
configured to not grant access until the operator has verified the stored and live
images are the same person, with the door release being controlled by the system
operator.
2.9 SYSTEM STATUS
A. It shall be possible to query the status of any of the system’s access control doors,
input points, output points and alarm conditions. This status shall display the current
state of the device in question at the time of query. The alarm status report shall
include the following:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 13
1. Alarm Name
2. Current Alarm Status
3. Time of Creation
4. Trigger Point that caused the Alarm
2.10 USER DATABASE SOFTWARE
A. The Security Control System shall provide an industry standard database
management system that provides an integrated Cardholder screen design
application. The Cardholder database screen designer (DSD) shall allow the designer
to create, edit, and delete database tables and data entry as required. In addition, the
system administrator shall use the DSD to specify data entry screen validations and
enable a card record history audit trail. The DSD shall allow for the set up of a unique
database structure to the customer’s exact specifications.
B. The following capabilities shall be provided:
1. A sample default database and screen design to help with initial start-up.
2. All captions and controls will be available for dynamic viewing and rearranging.
3. Up to five pages shall be available for the placement of fields.
4. Ability to drag-and-drop the data fields within each page.
5. Alignment options shall be available to quickly line up all fields in any
arrangement.
2.11 ADMINISTRATION SECURITY
A. A password protection function shall allow the system administrator to assign access
privileges, and permit access to modules within the system. The password protection
shall be linked with user status to permit or deny access to various system functions
and levels. The Cardholder Database Screen shall have password security levels as
follows:
1. Ability to restrict operator viewing levels on each Cardholder database field.
2. Ability to allow displaying and editing of operator viewing on each Cardholder
database field.
B. The Security Control System shall provide a password protection scheme to prevent
unauthorized individuals from entering the configuration application. Additionally, a
second level of password authorization shall be provided to restrict what each
individual may edit or display once inside this application.
2.12 DATABASE VALIDATION
A. The Security Control System shall utilize field validation methods for the manipulation
and definition of data within each database field:
B. The Security Control System shall have the ability to pre-define database field formats
or “masks” for ease of data entry. The following field masks shall be required at a
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 14
minimum:
1. __________ Employee Name
2. ########## Encoded Card Number
3. ########## PIN Number
4. ########## Employee Number
5. __/__/____ Date of Birth
6. ###-###-#### Phone Number
7. __/__/____ Card Activation Date
8. __/__/____ Card Expiration Date
2.13 CARDHOLDER CONFIGURATIONS
A. The system shall provide the ability to encode contactless smart cards with access
control information. The system shall support encoding of iClass, Mifare, and DESfire
smart card protocols.
B. The system shall be capable of capturing fingerprint biometrics and storing them on a
contactless smart card, which will then be read and used to verify the cardholder
during an access control transaction.
C. Any proposed fingerprint solution shall support the enrollment and use of at least two
fingerprints, which shall allow the cardholder to present either finger to gain entry.
D. On a timed or manual basis the system shall be configurable to allow entry using the
smart card only, smart card plus fingerprint or smart card plus two fingerprints, thereby
raising or lowering the level of security as required.
E. The system shall allow the assignment of a fingerprint for normal entry and a different
fingerprint for duress entry. The cardholder shall have the ability to trigger a silent
duress alarm by presenting the duress fingerprint. This provides the cardholder with a
safe way to indicate a duress condition, without alerting anyone locally that the alarm
has been triggered.
F. An option to store the fingerprint acceptance threshold in the smart card or at the
reader shall be provided. By storing the threshold in the smart card, overall site
security is not compromised by a poor quality fingerprint, which would normally require
a low acceptance threshold to be set at the reader.
G. A magnetic stripe card encoder shall be included. This shall allow magnetic stripe
cards to be encoded by the user on site. The existing cards shall have the access
control data added onto either track 1 or track 2 of such cards.
H. The security system shall support a data encryption utility. In utilizing encryption
technologies, data communication shall be protected between workgroups, local area
network computers, domain clients and servers, branch sites which may be physically
remote, extranets, roving clients, and remote administration of computers.
2.14 NETWORK ARCHITECTURE
A. The major components of the System shall be a Network Controller and Network
Nodes. Both are solid-state (fixed storage with no spinning hard drives or fans) and
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 15
connect to a common LAN or WAN and use TCP/IP communications. VoIP
intercoms, IP video cameras, digital video storage subsystems, and data storage
systems shall also be network connectable and the System shall communicate with
them using TCP/IP over the network.
B. The system shall have resident on the network controller a Linux-based database
(PostgreSQL) and a web server. The database shall be ODBC compliant, and the
web server shall provide a graphically rich user application through a standard web
browser.
C. The system shall be configurable to function and be administered on one subnet,
across subnets and gateways, or from any remote site via the internet.
2.15 HARDWARE HIERARCHY
A. The System shall be built with a three-tiered hardware hierarchy.
B. At the top tier is the network controller, which shall contain the database engine, web
server, application software, and configuration data. It is at this level that System
Users, through a browser interface, shall interact with the System, set configurations,
monitor activities, run reports, and manage alarms.
C. At the second tier is the network node, an intelligent device with native TCP/IP
support, which shall make and manage access control decisions.
D. At the third tier are the application extension blades. Each of these blades shall
connect to and manage a set of inputs, outputs, readers, cameras, or temperature
monitoring points.
E. The network device shall run on existing building TCP/IP networks and shall be
configurable for access from separate subnets, through gateways and routers, and
from the internet.
2.16 MODULAR 3-TIERED HARDWARE TECHNOLOGY
A. The system is implemented in a 3-tiered network appliance architecture designed to
easily scale up or down to fit any facility’s security system needs. At the heart of this
native IP device architecture is an embedded Network Controller based upon Intel’s
IXP425 Network Processor.
B. Each solid-state Network Controller shall support up to 32 Network Nodes. All system
functions operate on the nodes and, therefore, reliability is independent of network
connectivity.
C. Each disk-based NetBox Enterprise shall support up to 128 Network Nodes. Each
disk-based NetBox Enterprise Ultra shall support up to 256 Network Nodes. All
system functions operate on the nodes and, therefore, reliability is independent of
network connectivity.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 16
D. Each Network Node can support up to seven Application Extension Blades,
depending upon the enclosure design. Application blades provide supervised inputs,
relay outputs, reader connections and temperature monitoring points.
E. Additional Nodes and additional Application blades may be added to a system at any
time making it easily scalable.
F. Each NetDoor MicroNode shall function as a node and as an access control blade. In
addition each MicroNode shall support one temperature input.
G. All Nodes and Application Blades shall be solid state for reliability and long life.
2.17 DESIGN ELEMENTS
A. Scalability: The system shall be scalable to support the growth of security system
needs. Additional nodes can be added to a blade server network controller (NetBox)
up to a maximum of 32 nodes. Additional nodes can be added to a 1U rack server
network controller (NetBox Enterprise) up to a maximum of 64 nodes or MicroNodes,
and up to 256 nodes or MicroNodes for the 2U rack server controller (NetBox
Enterprise Ultra). Each of the nodes can carry an additional seven application blades.
It shall not be necessary to reconfigure existing system resources when adding
additional nodes, application blades and devices.
B. Integration of Subsystems: All subsystems within the system, access control, video
monitoring, digital video recording, alarm management, temperature monitoring, and
management of personnel security data shall be integrated into one application
interface for management, monitoring, and administration. In addition the personnel
security database shall integrate by means of an API to existing personnel databases
for purposes of auto-populating.
C. Browser-based User Experience: The system shall be capable of being monitored,
administered, and configured through a browser on any computer connected to the
network. The web server on-board the network controller shall provide a rich graphic
application for the management of the system.
D. User Licensing: Software licensing shall be based upon the number of readers and
cameras for one network controller board only. Software license upgrades shall be
available if system reader and camera capacity must be raised. The user license shall
be valid in perpetuity and shall include one year of software updates from the date of
shipment from the factory.
E. System Capacities: The system shall have up to the following capacities for each
blade server network controller with solid-state drive:
Nodes/MicroNodes 32
Access control readers: 448 maximum, 140 certified
Access cards: 60,000+
Card formats 32
Alarm input points: 500
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 17
Control point outputs: 500
Temperature monitor points: 500
IP, DVR, and NVR cameras: limited only by license
Online event history log: 4 to 10 million records (depending upon
configuration and transaction types)
Ethernet switch ports: 2
Time specifications 512
Time spec groups 64
Time specs per group 8
Threat Levels 8
Threat Level Groups 32
Holidays 30
Access levels per person 16
Cards per person 100
Report Groups 50
Camera Groups 50
Concurrent system users 10
2.18 ACCESS CONTROL
A. A major purpose of the system is to provide access control. The system shall be able
to make access control decisions, define a variety of access levels, time
specifications and threat levels, write system activity into a log file, maintain a
personnel enrollment database, receive signals from input devices such as door state
monitors, card readers and motion detectors, energize output devices such as door
locks and annunciators via output relays, and provide on-screen monitoring features.
2.19 THREAT LEVELS
A. The system shall include configurable and settable threat levels. A threat level or a
change in threat level shall be capable of effecting a change in the behavior of the
security system. The areas of security system behavior that threat levels can change
are portal unlock behavior, alarm event actions, and the function of access levels. A
system user shall be able to configure threat levels, define behavioral changes based
on the system threat level, and set the current threat level. Threat levels shall also be
changeable automatically in response to alarm events.
2.20 ALARM AND EVENT MONITORING
A. The system shall be capable of monitoring, prioritizing, and acknowledging alarms. It
shall be possible to associate specific actions with each alarm event. These actions
may include but are not limited to sending pages and emails, energizing outputs to
activate lights, locks, or alarms, changing the system threat level, switching to an
appropriate video monitor, displaying ID photos, and flashing device icons on a
graphic floor plan, positioning a PTZ camera, and recording video.
2.21 ROLL CALL REPORTING AND MUSTERING
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 18
A. To aid in evacuation management, it shall be possible to quickly create a region-by-
region roll call report. The roll call report shall contain an occupancy count and
occupant list for any region.
B. Any card reader can be used as a mustering station and multiple mustering stations
may be used.
2.22 LIVE IP CAMERA SURVEILLANCE
A. The system shall provide IP camera-based surveillance capability. The number of
supported cameras shall be limited only by license. The system’s video capabilities
shall include video monitor switching based on access activity. The system shall
provide monitoring, configuration, and administration of live IP video. Cameras can
be separately monitored or monitored in groups. The system shall also support the
capture of snapshots from any camera.
B. The system shall support IP video cameras from multiple manufacturers.
2.23 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS) INTEGRATION
A. The system shall support the integration of Digital Video Recorder systems and
Network Video Recorder systems. The system shall provide for the auto-discovery of
camera resources through the integration interface.
B. The VMS shall support automatic video recording of events. It shall also support both
live and recorded video viewing.
C. It shall be possible for the VMS to report camera on-line, camera off-line, video loss
detection, and motion detection events to the network controller.
D. The system shall support integrated camera telemetry functions in all camera
displays. It shall also support one-click access to historical video through a video
browser.
E. The system shall have a single user interface for DVR, NVR, and IP camera display.
F. All VMS and camera viewing, monitoring, and management shall be web-based and
available through a browser interface as an integrated part of monitoring and event
management.
G. The system shall be integrated with the following Video Management System (VMS)
H. Milestone XProtect Enterprise
2.24 GRAPHICAL MAP MANAGEMENT OF DEVICES
A. The system shall provide graphic floor plan capability including graphic display of
links to other floor plans, alarms, system resources such as portals, IP video
cameras, inputs, outputs, and temperature monitoring points. The Network
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 19
Administrator shall be able to graphically configure device icons onto the floor plan
images. JPEG and PNG images shall be supported.
B. The device images placed on the floor plan shall provide the following functions in
real time:
1. Portal icons shall indicate access activity and permit lock control.
2. Video camera icons shall permit the display of the camera view.
3. Temperature point icons shall display the current temperature and allow the
display of temperature graphs of temperature data from the last hour, day, week,
or month.
4. Links shall provide one-click access to other floor plans.
5. Inputs and outputs shall graphically indicate alarm and activation states.
6. Alarm icons shall graphically indicate that an alarm is active.
2.25 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A. The system shall provide for the performance of system administration tasks from
any network-connected computer with a browser. These administrative tasks shall
include but not be limited to monitoring all system activity including IP video,
generating reports, enrolling personnel and credentials, and configuring system
devices, and arming alarm panels.
2.26 PERSON MANAGEMENT
A. The system shall maintain person data relating to access control, system user
privileges, photo identification, system activity, and contact information. All person
data in the system shall be integrated onto one tabbed page for viewing, editing, and
deletion by system users. This data shall be kept on the network controller and shall
not require the use of separate storage devices.
B. All decisions regarding persons in the system shall be made based upon this data.
This includes access control decisions, system user privileges, and email or SMS
notification of system events.
2.27 OPEN DATABASE CONNECTIVITY COMPLIANCE
A. The system shall be Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant. The on-board
DBMS shall be PostgreSQL.
2.28 EMBEDDED OPERATING SYSTEM
A. The embedded operating system for the solid-state controller shall be Linux. The
operating system kernel shall be open-source. No operating system training or
certification shall be necessary.
B. The embedded operating system for the disk-based controller shall be FreeBSD
UNIX. The operating system kernel shall be open-source. No operating system
training or certification shall be necessary.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 20
2.29 NETWORK CONTROLLER BLADE
A. Network Controller Blade (Blade Server with Solid-State Drive)
B. Each Network Controller shall support up to thirty-two network nodes each composed
of a Node and up to seven application blades (Access, Input, Output, Temperature).
C. Each Controller may include an on-board Node or not. Pictured below is a
combination Controller/Node Blade.
D. The network controller shall be supplied with 12V DC at a minimum of 3 amps.
Internal battery backup shall supply sufficient power to provide for an orderly
shutdown of the system in case of loss of external power. External battery backup
shall be used to provide uninterrupted operation in the event of external power loss.
E. Communications between the node and network controller shall be encrypted (SSL
128-bit) and authenticated (SHA-1).
2.30 WORK CONTROLLER (Rack Server)
A. Each Rack Server Network Controller shall support up to 128 network nodes
(Enterprise), or 256 network nodes (Enterprise Ultra).
B. Rack Server Controllers shall not include an on-board Node.
C. Communications between the node and network controller shall be encrypted (SSL
128-bit) and authenticated (SHA-1).
2.31 NETWORK NODE
A. Each Node shall support up to seven application blades (Access, Input, Output,
Temperature), depending upon the enclosure type.
B. The Node shall be supplied with 12V DC at a minimum of 3 amps. The Node blade
shall supply all application blades in the node with power.
C. The Node shall support onboard data storage of up to 20,000 credentials for access
control decisions and up to 27,000 records of logged system events.
D. Communications between the node and network controller shall be encrypted (SSL
128-bit) and authenticated (SHA-1).
2.32 NETDOOR MICRONODE
A. Each NetDoor MicroNode shall function as a node and as an access control blade. In
addition each MicroNode shall support one temperature input.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 21
B. The NetDoor MicroNode may be supplied with 12VDC at 3 amps. Alternatively, it
shall also be possible to power the NetDoor by PoE (Power over Ethernet).
C. The NetDoor MicroNode shall support onboard data storage of up to 20,000
credentials for access control decisions and up to 27,000 records of logged system
events.
D. Communications between the node and network controller shall be encrypted (SSL
128-bit) and authenticated (SHA-1).
E. Reader connectors are 7-pin. Reader LED color control and reader beeper control
are supported for many reader brands.
F. Readers require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9536 (6 conductor) or equivalent
wiring and may be no more than 500 feet (152 meters) from the Access blade.
G. Supervised input connectors are 2-pin. The system shall support a wide variety of
input supervision types including normally-open circuit and normally-closed circuits,
and zero, one or two resistor configurations.
H. Inputs require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9462 or equivalent wiring and may
be no more than 2000 feet (610 meters) from the blade.
I. Relay output connectors are 3-pin. Both normally-open circuit and normally-closed
circuit output devices are supported. The relay outputs shall support any output
devices that operate on the following maximum electrical ratings: 30 Volts DC or AC,
2.5 Amps inductive or 5.0 Amps non-inductive.
J. Outputs require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9462 or equivalent wiring and
may be no more than 2000 feet (610 meters) from the blade.
K. Temperature leads require category 3 cable for distances of up to 500 feet (152
meters). For distances of up to 1000 feet (305 meters), temperature leads require
category 5 cable.
L. The MicroNode shall be supplied with 12V DC at a minimum of 3 amps or it shall be
supplied by Power over Ethernet (PoE).
M. The MicroNode shall support onboard data storage of up to 20,000 credentials for
access control decisions and up to 27,000 records of logged system events.
N. Communications between the MicroNode and network controller shall be encrypted
(SSL 128-bit) and authenticated (SHA-1).
2.33 ACCESS CONTROL BLADES
A. Each Access Control Blade shall support up to two readers, four supervised inputs,
and four relay outputs.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 22
B. Reader connectors are 7-pin. Reader LED color control and reader beeper control
are supported for many reader brands.
C. Readers require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9536 (6 conductor) or equivalent
wiring and may be no more than 500 feet (152 meters) from the Access blade.
D. Supervised input connectors are 2-pin. The system shall support a wide variety of
input supervision types including normally-open circuit and normally-closed circuits,
and zero, one or two resistor configurations.
E. Inputs require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9462 or equivalent wiring and may
be no more than 2000 feet (610 meters) from the blade.
F. Relay output connectors are 3-pin. Both normally-open circuit and normally-closed
circuit output devices are supported. The relay outputs shall support any output
devices that operate on the following maximum electrical ratings: 30 Volts DC or AC,
2.5 Amps inductive or 5.0 Amps non-inductive.
G. Outputs require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9462 or equivalent wiring and
may be no more than 2000 feet (610 meters) from the blade.
H. The access control blade shall receive power via the ribbon cable bus directly from
the Node Blade. The access blade shall supply up to 400 milliamps of power to one
reader or 200 milliamps of power to each of two readers. Readers requiring more
power than this shall be equipped with separate external power supplies.
2.34 ALARM INPUT BLADE
A. Supervised input connectors are 2-pin. The system shall support a wide variety of
input supervision types including normally-open circuit and normally-closed circuits,
and zero, one or two resistor configurations.
B. Inputs require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9462 or equivalent wiring and may
be no more than 2000 feet (610 meters) from the blade.
C. The alarm input blade shall receive power via the ribbon cable bus directly from the
Node.
2.35 RELAY OUTPUT BLADE
A. Relay output connectors are 3-pin. Both normally-open circuit and normally-closed
circuit output devices are supported. The relay outputs shall support any output
devices that operate on the following maximum electrical ratings: 30 Volts DC or AC,
2.5 Amps inductive or 5.0 Amps non-inductive.
B. Outputs require twisted, shielded 22 AWG Belden #9462 or equivalent wiring and
may be no more than 2000 feet (610 meters) from the blade.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 23
C. The relay output blade shall receive power via the ribbon cable bus directly from the
Node.
2.36 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ENCLOSURE
A. Each solid-state system enclosure shall contain up to one Controller/Node Blade and
from two to seven application blades. The enclosures shall have a 4-pin cam lock
requiring a key, and a cabinet door tamper switch.
B. Each disk-based system enclosure shall contain one controller and shall be rack
mountable.
C. The system shall be powered by either 100-240V AC at 50-60 Hz, or by 12V DC at 3
amps. Power must come from a separate circuit with an isolated earth ground. If AC
power is supplied it must be connected to the internal power supply. If DC power is
supplied the internal power supply shall be bypassed. It shall be possible to backup
power supplied to the system with an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
D. The internal battery backup, if supplied, shall provide sufficient power for an orderly
shutdown of the system in case of loss of external power.
E. System enclosures can be wall mounted or rack mounted units as shown below.
2.37 DOOR CONTROL CONFIGURATION
A. The system shall support the assignment of door lock/unlock times and door held
open time. The Security Control System shall allow up to 300 seconds of time to be
programmed for each door’s unlock and door held open time. These functions shall
be accomplished through the Security Control System software and no special
hardware shall be required.
B. Each door within the Security Control System shall have the ability of being
automatically unlocked based on the time of day. Any access control doors in the
system shall have the ability to generate an alarm condition in the event the door
being forced or held open.
C. The Security Control System shall support the shunting of the door status switch
when a request to exit device is enabled. The system shall support the shunting of
the door status switch via software through a predefined criteria.
D. Each electrically locked door shall be reviewed for compliance with life safety
requirements. Doors required by code to be fail-safe shall be interfaced with the fire
alarm system to release upon alarm activation. Doors not required by code to be fail-
safe shall remain locked to prevent unauthorized access during alarm conditions, fail-
secure.
2.38 ADA SUPPORT – ALTERNATE SHUNT
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 24
A. The system shall provide the ability to control a door for cardholders requiring
assistance or an alternate shunt time. The system shall provide the ability to tag a
card indicating the person requires additional shunt time. When the person presents
their card at a door, and the person is authorized for that door, the system shall
unlock the door as normal and shall activate a second output control relay, which may
be used to control a door-opening device. The shunt time for the door shall be
extended beyond the normal shunt time allowing the person requiring the alternate
shunt to pass through the door without generating an alarm.
2.39 PHOTO IDENTIFICATION BADGING APPLICATION
A. The system shall incorporate video imaging as a fully integrated function to customize
access control cards by printing an identity badge directly onto the card. The badge
design and image capture capabilities shall combine with the latest technology card
printers to allow the production of an ID badge pass for each card holder at the time of
registration.
B. For each cardholder both a facial image and a signature shall be able to be captured,
or imported, and stored as part of the card record. These images shall be captured
from a standard CCTV camera connected to the computer via a Video Card
supporting DirectX 8 (or later) or MCI format, or imported if available as a bit map or
JPEG file. The system shall use data compression techniques to ensure efficient use
of the available hard disk space to maximize the number of images that can be stored
on the hard disk.
C. A comprehensive integrated badge design facility shall also be provided, allowing an
unrestricted number of custom badge layouts to be defined then saved with a suitable
description as a reference. This shall make full use of the card record details such as
name, card number, inactive date as well as allowing personal data to be included in
the badge design. Company logos shall be imported as bit maps or JPEG images to
provide a personalized corporate appearance to the card.
D. All elements incorporated into the design shall be able to be rotated.
E. Each badge design shall contain either a single sided design or a double-sided design.
Each side of the card shall also be designated as being blank, or magnetic stripe side,
or smart chip side, to ensure the designer is aware of the available space where
printing may be incorporated for each card combination. The badge designer function
shall be capable of supporting portrait, landscape, standard and custom-sized card
designs.
F. When creating a new card record a badge preview screen shall also be included that
displays the specific card’s details on the selected badge design to allow confirmation
prior to requesting the badge to be printed.
G. Each new cardholder record shall have the option to be flagged for future printing.
Cards flagged in this manner shall be easily recalled at a later stage and processed
for output to the printer in a single action. Selecting multiple cards for bulk printing
shall also allow each card to be printed either with its specific badge design, as
defined within each card’s record, or alternatively printed with a selected common
badge design. Encoding of magnetic stripe cards shall also be included as part of the
bulk printing process.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 25
H. The SMS shall support any manufacturer’s ID badge printer with a Microsoft Windows
2000 or Windows XP (depending on the workstation configuration) compatible printer
driver.
I. The SMS shall provide the option to encode a magstripe card during the print cycle
shall also be incorporated. Applications that require on-site encoding can combine
both actions in a single process.
J. Each badge design shall include a default printer, validity period, and access rights.
2.40 BADGING HARDWARE COMPONENTS
A. The system shall consist of a series of tightly integrated sub components that have
been thoroughly tested by the vendor. Each badging station shall be a standard
computer workstation meeting all performance requirements indicated under this
section of the specifications. Any integral components specifically necessary for video
badging shall also be provided. The workstation shall contain all hardware and
software necessary to support the following features:
1. Database Management
2. Image Capture
3. Portrait Verification
4. Badge Production
2.41 IMAGE CAPTURING DEVICE
A. The image capture unit shall be used to capture portrait images of ID applicants. The
Input Unit shall include one of the following camera options:
1. USB based digital megapixel camera
2. Adjustable height tripod.
3. Photo ID backdrop
2.42 BADGE PRINTER
A. The total badge production rate shall be based on the output device required for the
printing task. System performance when operating in Client/Server mode will be based
on the system workload and network performance. The system shall include an option
for an intelligent printer with adequate memory and processing power to accept text
and image data. Once the ID information has been transferred to the printer the
system shall be available for other operations.
B. The card printer shall be a desktop full color printer capable of printing directly to HDP
film which shall then be fused flush to the card media.
C. The card printer shall be driven by a CPU and shall be provided with 16MB of Image
memory. The unit shall provide high-speed operations while providing secure, tamper-
resistant ID cards. The photo identification printer shall be a HID/Fargo HDP-5000
printer with dual (2) sided printing module or an approved equal.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 26
D. Provide (50) blank test cards, HDP5000 cleaning tool kit, (1) roll HDP5000 film, and
(1) spare HDP500 YMCKK full color ribbon with two resin black panels.
2.43 MULTI-CLASS SE CARD READERS W/ PROXIMITY ANTENNA ACTIVATED
A. The smart card reader for this facility shall be a low profile design in a weatherized
polycarbonate housing suitable for mounting in either an indoor or outdoor
environment. The reader shall be constructed of a polycarbonate material sealed to a
NEMA rating of 4X IP65. The reader shall contain an integral magnet for use with an
external magnetic reed switch to provide tamper protection when connected to an
external alarm. The reader shall be UL/C 294 listed and shall conform to FCC and
ISO standards. The reader shall operate at a frequency of 13.56MHz and all RF data
transmitted between this device and the smart card shall be encrypted for additional
protection using a secure algorithm. The reader shall provide an audiovisual
indication to signify access granted or access denied. This operation shall be
displayed by a high intensity LED light bar which shall change from red, amber, or
green based on the status of the operation. The smart card reader shall mount on an
industry standard single gang electrical junction box.
The mullion mount smart card reader shall be aHID iClass SE RP-10 or an approved
equal. The standard style smart card reader shall be a HID iClass SE RP-40 or an
approved equal. The combined smart card reader with keypad shall be a HID iClass
SE RK-40 or an approved equal.
B. Ensure optional proximity antenna feature is activated in all card readers provided for
this project.
2.44 CONTACTLESS SMART ACCESS CARD
A. The smart cards shall be of the type receptive to a 13.56MHz reader. Body shielding
or variable environmental conditions shall have no adverse effect on their operation.
The card shall meet ISO 7810 specifications for length, width, thickness, flatness, card
construction and durability, and shall be in a form suitable for direct two-sided dye-
sublimation or thermal transfer printing on the specified badge printer. The card shall
support read/write capability, with a minimum of 2 Kbits [256 bytes] of EEPROM
memory or 16 Kbits [2048 bytes] of EEPROM memory. The 2 Kbit card shall have a
minimum of 2 Application Areas, and the 16Kbit shall have either (specify) 2 or 16
Application Areas to support future applications. Data retention shall be 10 years,
nominal. Wiegand card data up to 144 bits in length shall be factory programmed in
Application Area 1 for use with access control systems. The card Unique 64-bit, fixed
card serial number, used for anti-collision and key diversification. The card shall be
capable of accepting a slot punch on one end, allowing it to be hung from a strap/clip
in a vertical orientation. The contactless smart access card shall be a HID Multi-Class
card combining Proximity & iClass technology into a single credential. The smart
access card for this project shall be an HID 2010 card or an approved equal.
1. Provide an initial order of 500 iClass smart cards.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 27
2.45 LOCKING TECHNOLOGY – PROVIDED BY DIVISION 8
A. The security contractor shall coordinate with the door hardware contractor on the
placement of electronic locking hardware required for this project. The door contractor
will provide and install all electric locking hardware with the associated power supplies
for electric latch and delayed egress lock doors. The security contractor shall provide
all necessary wire and cable, and the low voltage power supplies for electric mortise
locks, magnetic locks, shear locks, and electric strikes doors. The security contractor
shall also be responsible for terminating all connections and interface this equipment
with the integrated security system.
2.46 MAGNETIC DOOR POSITION SWITCH - DPS
A. The standard recessed door position switch shall be UTC/ GE Security 1078 series or
approved equal. The contact and the magnet shall be hermetically sealed in a one
piece, molded, flame retardant ABS plastic housing for maximum strength and
durability. The contact and magnet shall snap-lock into a predrilled 3/4” or 1”
diameter hole. Color of the housing shall be off white, gray, or mahogany, and shall
be provided in the appropriate color to match the door and doorframe. The magnet
shall be made of Alnico V.
B. The standard roll-up door position switch shall be UTC/ GE Security 2200 series or
approved equal.
C. All double doors shall receive (1) magnetic door position switch on each door leaf and
shall report as one alarm point.
2.47 TAMPER SWITCH
A. All security and CCTV enclosures shall include a tamper switch for direct supervision
of the cabinet door. Any opening of these doors shall initiate an alarm condition to the
security monitoring system. All tamper contacts shall be a reed actuated self adjusting
plunger style switch. If a tamper contact is provided by the manufacturer with the
enclosure this device may be used. The tamper switch for this project shall be a GE
Security/ Sentrol 3027 series switch or an approved equal.
2.48 NETWORK ELECTRONICS
A. All network electronics shall be provided outside of this contract. Security contractor
shall coordinate connections and IP address requirements with IT equipment provider.
2.49 POWER SUPPLY – DOOR LOCKING HARDWARE
A. The low voltage power supply shall convert a 115 VAC 60 Hz input to a continuously
supplied current of 12 or 24 VDC. The power supply shall be UL listed, NFPA
compliant, and class 2 rated. The power supply shall be housed in NEMA 1 hinged
cover enclosures where mounted indoors and in fully weatherproof NEMA 4
enclosures when located in an outdoor environmental conditions. All enclosures shall
be key lockable, keyed alike, and shall include a tamper switch for monitoring of the
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 28
door. All cabinet opening shall initiate an alarm condition to the security monitoring
system. The low voltage power supplies for low voltage door hardware shall be
Altronix model AL400ULACM or an approved equal.
B. Power supplies for Von Duprin Delayed Egress locks and Electric Latch locks shall be
provided by the door hardware contractor. This required device has been specified
under Division 8.
2.50 POWER SUPPLY – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The low voltage power supply shall convert a 115 VAC 60 Hz input to a continuously
supplied current of 12 or 24 VDC. The power supply shall be UL listed, NFPA
compliant, and class 2 rated. The power supply shall be housed in NEMA 1 hinged
cover enclosures where mounted indoors and in fully weatherproof NEMA 4
enclosures when located outdoors or in an exposed or covered area. All enclosure
doors shall be key lockable, keyed alike, and shall include a tamper switch for
monitoring by the security system. Any cabinet opening shall initiate an alarm
condition to the security monitoring system. The low voltage power supplies for the
security system shall be Altronix model AL400ULX or an approved equal.
2.51 SURGE PROTECTION
A. All security components, located outside the building structure, shall be provided with
surge suppression and lighting protection modules. Provide UL listed multi-stage
protection on all low voltage and signal transmission lines. All 120 VAC surge
suppression devices shall be EDCO HSP121BT-1RU or an approved equal. For low
voltage connections provide FAS-1 surge suppressors manufactured by EDCO or an
approved equal. For RS-485 or RS-422 connections provide PC642C-008LC with
base PCB1B manufactured by EDCO or an approved equal. For CAT-6 connections
provide CAT6-5POE line protectors manufactured by EDCO or an approved equal.
2.52 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY - UPS
A. All security panels and low voltage power supplies shall receive a 6-hour battery
backup unit with additional battery support time available within the same cabinet.
These devices shall be maintained utilizing trickle charge power pack to sustain
optimal performance.
B. All computer workstations shall receive UPS power supplies with integrated surge
protection. Minimum runtimes in the event of total power loss shall not be less than 10
minutes. The UPS for these locations shall be an APC Smart-UPS 1400 or an
approved equal.
C. All equipment racks shall receive UPS power supplies with integrated surge
protection. Minimum runtimes in the event of total power loss shall not be less than 10
minutes. The UPS for these systems shall be an APC Smart-UPS model
SU2200RMXL3U with network management card AP9617.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 29
D. Power all equipment from 120 VAC circuit dedicated for security use. Coordinate the
marking of all dedicated panel circuit breakers labels with the wording “Security
Equipment - Do Not Operate”, or equivalent.
E. All plug-in transformers shall be located at the security control panels. Secure all low-
voltage plug-in transformers to outlet with screw or strap. Clearly label all
transformers to identify purpose and use.
2.53 WIRE & CABLE
A. All proposed wire and cable shall meet or exceed the recommendations established by
the equipment manufacturers, and shall comply with all state and local codes.
B. Visually inspect all wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect
cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps.
C. Provide grommets and strain relief materials where necessary to avoid abrasion and
excess tension on wire and cable.
D. All penetrations through fire rated barriers shall be provided with appropriate fire
stopping materials in accordance with NFPA requirements and local fire authority
having jurisdiction.
E. Installation of Category 6 cable shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA guidelines.
1. The maximum pulling tension shall not exceed 25 pounds to avoid stretching the
conductors.
2. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall not be less than 4x the outside
diameter of the cable.
3. The cable shall be installed without kinks or twists and the application of cable
ties shall not deform the cable bundle.
4. Strip back only as much cable jacket as is required to terminate the cable and
the amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of the termination shall not exceed
0.5 in.
F. Fiber cables shall terminate on Fiber Distribution Centers in the vertical rack. All
cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations. All cable shall be
terminated in an alphanumeric sequence at all termination locations. All terminations
shall comply with, and be tested to EIA/TIA 568, TSB-36 and TSB-40 standards for
Category 6 installations and EIA/TIA standards for fiber optic cable.
G. Cables of similar signal level shall be bundled together and kept physically separate
from power cords, plug strips or other circuits with different potential. Exposed wire
bundles or individual cables shall be neatly secured with Velcro cable straps. Lacing
of cables shall not be permitted.
H. All new wire and cable shall meet or exceed the recommendations established by the
equipment manufacturers, and shall comply with all state and local codes.
I. Visually inspect all wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 30
cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps.
J. Provide grommets and strain relief materials where necessary to avoid abrasion and
excess tension on wire and cable.
K. All penetrations through fire rated barriers shall be provided with appropriate fire
stopping materials in accordance with NFPA requirements and local fire authority
having jurisdiction.
L. No electrical tape shall be allowed on any wire terminations or connections.
M. Manufacturers:
1. Anixter, Inc.
2. Belden Inc.; Electronics Division.
3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans Company.
4. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
5. Mohawk/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
6. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
N. PVC-Jacketed, RS-232 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned
copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, and individual aluminum foil-polyester
tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; PVC jacket. Pairs are cabled on
common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.
1. NFPA 70, Type CM.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 Vertical Tray.
O. Plenum-Type, RS-232 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned
copper conductors, plastic insulation, and individual aluminum foil-polyester tape
shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; plastic jacket. Pairs are cabled on
common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
P. RS-485 communications require 2 twisted pairs, with a distance limitation of 4000 feet
(1220 m).
Q. PVC-Jacketed, RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30)
tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70,
Type CMG.
R. Plenum-Type, RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned
copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and
fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 31
S. Multi-conductor, PVC Readers and Wiegand Keypads Cables: No. 22 AWG, paired
and twisted multiple conductors, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, semi-rigid
PVC insulation, overall aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with 100 percent shield
coverage, plus tinned copper braid shield with 65 percent shield coverage, and PVC
jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMG.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 Vertical Tray.
3. For TIA/EIA-RS-232 applications.
T. Paired PVC Readers and Wiegand Keypads Cables: Paired, 3 pairs, twisted,
No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation,
individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded
tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CM.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 Vertical Tray.
U. Paired PVC Readers and Wiegand Keypads Cable: Paired, 3 pairs, twisted,
No. 20 AWG, stranded (7x28) tinned copper conductors, polyethylene (polyolefin)
insulation, individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs each with
No. 22 AWG, stranded (19x34) tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage,
and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CM.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 Vertical Tray.
V. Plenum-Type, Paired, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cable: Paired, 3 pairs,
No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation, with
individual aluminum foil-polypropylene tape shielded pairs, each with No. 22 AWG,
stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and fluorinated-
ethylene-propylene jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
W. Plenum-Type, Multi-conductor, Readers and Wiegand Keypads Cable: 6 conductors,
No. 20 AWG, stranded (7x28) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-
propylene insulation, overall aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with 100 percent
shield coverage plus tinned copper braid shield with 85 percent shield coverage, and
fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
X. Paired Lock Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper
conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMG.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 Vertical Tray.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 32
Y. Plenum-Type, Paired Lock Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29)
tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
Z. Paired Lock Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper
conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMG.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 Vertical Tray.
AA. Plenum-Type, Paired Lock Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30)
tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and
plastic jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
BB. Paired Input Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper
conductors, polypropylene insulation, overall aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with
No. 22 AWG, a stranded (7x30) tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage,
and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMR.
2. Flame Resistance: UL 1666 Riser Flame Test.
CC. Plenum-Type, Paired Input Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30)
tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, aluminum foil-
polyester tape shield (foil side out), with No. 22 AWG drain wire, 100 percent shield
coverage, and plastic jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
DD. Paired AC Transformer Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (7x26) tinned
copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMG.
EE. Plenum-Type, Paired AC Transformer Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded
(19x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation,
unshielded, and plastic jacket.
1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.
FF. Elevator Travel Cable: Steel center core, with shielded, twisted pairs, No. 20 AWG
conductor size.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 33
1. Provided by elevator contractor, coordinate cabling needs to ensure all
necessary provisions have been included in the travel cable bundle for security.
GG. LAN Cabling: Comply with Division 27
1. NFPA 262.
2.54 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks, and terminals shall be clearly
identified by pre-printed labels or tags. The permanent markings shall clearly indicate
the function, source, and destination of all cabling, wire, and terminals. All cables
shall be labeled at both ends of the cable with the same and unique identifier label.
B. Cable and equipment identifiers shall follow a standard labeling system like TIA/EIA-
606. The identification system chosen by the CI shall be submitted for approval to the
A&E.
C. The only approved types of labels for the security system are:
1. Non-laminated thermal transfer labels, printed with a high quality thermal transfer
printer.
2. Laminated thermal transfer labels printed with a high quality thermal transfer
printer.
3. Thermal transfer polyolefin tape printed with a high quality thermal transfer
printer.
4. Self-laminated dot-matrix labels, printed with a high quality dot matrix printer.
5. Non-laminated dot-matrix labels, printed with a high quality dot matrix printer.
6. Preprinted labels from marker books.
D. Any type of write-on labels, hand writing on cable jackets or directly on equipment,
labels made with masking tape or any other type of tape not listed in previous
paragraph are not acceptable and shall be corrected with approved labeling methods
at no additional cost to the owner of the project.
E. All camera power supplies patch panels shall include a work sheet attached to the
interior of the equipment cabinet in plastic envelops. This work sheet shall include
the location, type of device, and part number of all devices connected to the boards
inside the equipment. All names used to identify devices in these worksheets shall
match all names and identifiers used in the software or the user interface of the
system. A second copy of this worksheet shall be delivered as part of the as-built
information.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 34
A. Upon project commencement, the Contractor shall provide qualified technical
personnel on-site. Personnel shall be present on each consecutive working day until
the system is fully functional and ready to begin the testing phase of this project.
B. During the installation process the contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of as-
built shop drawings, which shall always be available for review by the client and/or
consulting engineers. This set of documents should be clearly annotated with as-built
data as the work is performed. These documents will be reviewed as part of the
approval process when evaluating payment request applications. At a minimum, the
drawings should contain the following information:
1. Quantity and location of all equipment installed.
2. Cable and wire runs along with the designations tags assigned to each.
3. Wiring diagrams that indicate terminal strip layout, identification, and
terminations.
C. The contractors Project Manager shall maintain continuous coordination with the
consulting engineers. The engineers shall be kept informed of the progress and all
conflicts that arise during the course of this project. Prior to the start of construction
the contractor shall submit a complete plan and schedule for proposed operations.
This schedule should include information relevant to number of employees assigned to
the project, work hours, etc.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the clients IT Department for all connections to
their network. Appropriate cable shall be installed from the CPU to card readers, door
contacts, request-to-exit devices, and electric locks at each door and vehicle gate. All
communications cables shall be kept away from power circuits. The Contractor shall
execute adequate testing of the system to insure proper equipment operation. The
Contractor shall provide adequate training of the system users to insure adequate
understanding to prevent operating errors.
3.2 PROGRAMMING AND SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. The contractor shall provide initial programming and configuration of the security
management system. Programming shall include defining hardware, doors, monitor
points, clearance codes, time codes, door groups, alarm groups, operating
sequences, camera call-ups, and the like. Input of all program data shall be by
Contractor. Contractor shall consult with the Engineer and Owner to determine
operating parameters. The contractor shall provide programming documents to assist
the Owner with establishing the necessary Access Levels for this security system. This
shall include information to help the owner under stand time zones for automatic
locking or unlocking of doors, access hours for staff, and restricted areas of operation.
B. The contractor shall develop and input system graphics, such as maps and standby
screens. Owner shall provide floor plan drawings as the basis for the creation of maps.
Development of maps shall include the creation of icons for all doors, monitor points,
and tamper circuits. Owner shall provide floor plan drawings, in the form of AutoCAD
DWG or DXF files, as the basis for the creation of maps.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 35
C. The contractor shall assistance to the Owner with inputting cardholder data for each
access card. This shall include configuring the necessary fields that shall require user
data, and training of the individual(s) assigned to enter this information into the access
control system.
D. Contractor shall maintain hard copy worksheets which fully document the system
program and configuration. Worksheets shall be kept up to date on a daily basis by
Contractor until final Acceptance by Owner. Worksheets shall be subject to inspection
and approval by Owner. Provide final copies to Owner prior to Project Close-out.
E. Contractor shall maintain a complete up-to-date tape backup of system configuration
and cardholder data during setup of this system. This tape backup shall be maintained
throughout the programming period until final acceptance is complete.
3.3 DISTRIBUTION WIRING FOR THE SECURITY SYSTEM
A. The provision and installation of all supporting conduit infrastructure and cabling, as
required to support the equipment specified herein, shall fully conform to all
requirements, standards, and practices identified under associated specification
sections 270010, 271000, 270528, 270526.
B. Should a conflict arise between a requirement identified herein and the above
referenced specification sections, the most stringent shall apply. All conflicts
encountered during the course of this installation must be brought to the attention of
the construction manager, architect, and engineer for resolution prior to proceeding
with this work.
C. Provide all wire and cable required to install systems as indicated on the drawings.
Wire and cable shall be sized to provide minimum voltage drop and minimum
resistance to the devices being supplied. All cables shall be specifically designed for
their intended use (direct burial, outside plant, plenum, etc.). Wire and cable size and
type shall comply with all equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. All cabling
shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances, and standards.
3.4 WARRANTEE
A. During the first year of service the contractor shall ensure that manufacturer certified
repair and maintenance personnel are available for Emergency Service calls twenty-
four (24) hour a day, three hundred sixty five (365) days a year. The maximum on-site
response time for emergency services shall not exceed four (4) hours.
B. Emergency Service shall be defined as the loss or failure of any critical component
necessary to maintain the overall integrity of building security. Service of this nature
shall be provided to the client as indicated under the Guarantee section.
C. Normal Service shall be defined as minor repairs or adjustments to components of the
system. Service of this nature shall be provided to the client during normal business
hours of operation. Service calls requested by the client shall be addressed by the
contractor prior to close of business, on the following business day.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 36
3.5 GUARANTEE
A. All systems, equipment, and materials provided under this scope of work shall be
guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of not less than one (1) year. This
guarantee shall cover the cost for all warranty service including, labor, materials,
programming, and shipping charges. Coverage shall also include telephone support
for designated security personnel, and all software updates made available by the
system manufacturer. During the first year of service the contractor shall also provide
two (2) inspection visits for the purpose of preventive maintenance.
3.6 EXTENDED SERVICE
A. The bid price shall include an option to purchase extended service coverage. This
proposal shall provide for the purchase option of 1, 3, 5, or 10 year coverage.
Coverage shall include provisions for Labor, Materials, Programming, and General
System Maintenance.
3.7 SPARE PARTS
A. Prior to completion of this project the contractor shall submit a list of recommended
spare parts for this system. These recommendations shall be based upon the
contractors and manufacturers experience with this equipment’s performance history,
and critical impact the device has in overall system operations.
B. All cost estimates submitted for additional equipment shall remain at the same rate
provided in the original contract documents.
3.8 CONTRACTOR TESTING
A. The contractor shall activate all alarms and other output devices that are in the system
to test for proper operation, including supervisory and trouble circuit tests.
B. After installation and prior to termination, all wiring and cabling shall be checked and
tested to ensure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors or shields.
A volt ohm meter shall be utilized for this test. Signal strength greater that 20
megohms shall be required to successfully complete the test.
C. All Category 6 cable shall be tested to ensure conformance with EIA/TIA 586B
requirements. Test results shall include 100MHz sweep tests, continuity, polarity,
attenuation, return loss, delay, skew, and the installed length of the category 5e cable.
Testing equipment shall be manufactured by Agilient, Fluke, or Wavetek. The tester
used shall be 100% Level III compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA 586B specification
standards for testing of CAT 6 cabling.
D. The contractor shall develop a report that indicates a complete listing of all equipment
and alarm monitoring points in this facility. This list shall be used as a guide during
testing to ensure that all components are inspected. The personnel conducting these
tests shall indicate the following information on this form:
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 37
1.Name of person conducting test
2.Date of test
3.Time of test
4.Results of test
Upon successful completion of tests, the log file(s) generated by this activity shall be
printed and submitted along with the testing documents, to the client and consulting
engineer for review.
3.9 PREPARATION FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All components shall be inspected to ensure they have been properly installed,
securely attached, and remain clean and unmarred.
B. All equipment shall be properly adjusted, clearly labeled, and fully operational.
C. All broken, damaged, or modified items such as walls, doorframes, ceiling tiles, etc.,
shall be replaced or properly repaired to the satisfaction of the client.
D. All extra or spare materials shall be delivered and stored on the premises as directed.
E. Test report of all system components shall be completed and available for inspection
as indicated herein.
F. Four (4) sets of Individual factory issued Equipment Manuals containing all technical
information on each piece of equipment. Advertising brochures or information
instructions shall not be used in lieu of technical manuals and information. Documents
shall be placed in appropriately sized 3-ring binders, properly labeled for content
enclosed.
G. Four (4) sets of Individual factory issued Operation Manuals containing all technical
information on the system. Advertising brochures or information instructions shall not
be used in lieu of technical manuals and information. Documents shall be placed in
appropriately sized 3-ring binders, properly labeled for content enclosed.
H. Four (4) complete sets of As-Built drawings.
I. Statement of Guarantee including date of termination, and the name/telephone
number of person to be called in the event of equipment failure.
3.10 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION
A. Before the system is turned over to the owner, the manufacturer shall provide 5 days,
40 minimum hours of system operations training on-site using the new equipment.
B. Provide 2 days, 16 minimum hours, of technical training in system setup,
maintenance, troubleshooting, and service of this system.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 38
C. Training shall be conducted during normal business hours of the client, at a date and
time of mutual convenience to the Client and Contractor.
D. Contractor shall provide complete operator training on the Security Management
System for two types of users:
1. System Operator
2. System Administration
E. A dedicated representative employed full-time for this purpose by the system
manufacturer, shall conduct all training. At a minimum user training shall include but
shall not be limited to the following.
Operators:
1. System set-up and cardholder database configuration
2. Access control features
3. Alarm monitoring features
4. Report generation and searches
5. Card management
6. Disk backup procedures
7. Routine maintenance and adjustment procedures
Administrators:
1. Overview of security management system hardware and software.
2. Intelligent Controller installation and repair.
3. Card reader installation and repair.
4. Installation and repair of detection devices: contact switches, REX detectors,
motion detectors, and other such devices.
5. Isolating hardware/software problems.
6. Diagnosis of communications related problems.
7. Routine maintenance and repair.
F. Contractor shall provide written training outline and agenda for each training session
prior to scheduling.
3.11 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
A. General: The Contractor shall follow all as built and close out information requirements
indicated in Specification 270010.
B. Additional requirements for As-built documents shall include:
1. Approved As-built drawings shall be a complete set of floor plans drawings, riser
diagrams, and wiring details indicating the layout and interconnection of the system.
All cable routings and elevation of each outlet, tie, and riser cable terminations shall be
required.
2. The content of the As-Built information shall be no less than the content provided
during the shop drawings, and shall be modified as per changes that occur during the
construction. All required as-built documentation is mandatory and shall be required
prior to project closeout.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 10 00 - 39
C. A complete set of prints with all changes shall be submitted to the Engineer’s for
review. Upon completion of the Engineer’s review, the Contractor shall provide (2)
digital backups of all files and databases. This information must include final As-Built
conditions and the Engineer’s review comments if any.
3.12 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. After testing reports, as-built drawings, and required manuals have been submitted for
review, the Contractor shall coordinate a date for Final Acceptance Testing.
A. Testing and acceptance of this system will take place in the presence of the
Consulting Engineer and the Clients designated personnel.
B. Acceptance of the system shall require a demonstration of all system components to
evaluate their performance and reliability. Prior to this test, the system must have
been online for a period of sixty (60) days with an uptime of no less than 99%. Should
a major equipment failure occur, the Contractor shall replace the defective component
and continue the testing period. Any items discovered during final inspection which
require the contractors attention, shall be promptly addressed. These items will then
be re-inspected by the Consulting Engineer for approval.
C. Upon the completion of acceptable Final Acceptance Testing the Contractor shall
submit all finalized project documentation and associated electronic media. Upon
approval from the Consulting Engineers and the Client, the Owner will issue a Letter of
Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of such completion. This notice will
serve as Client acceptance of this system.
END OF SECTION 28 10 00
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 1
SECTION 28 20 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work shall include furnishing all labor, materials, enclosures, wiring, equipment, and
documentation required to provide a completely operational and working Closed Circuit
Television System. Any materials or equipment necessary for the proper operation of this
system, whether or not specified or described herein, shall be deemed part of this system and
shall be provided by the contractor without any additional cost to the client.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. General Terms and Conditions of the Contract Documents
1. Division 26 – Electrical
2. Division 27– System
B. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additional requirements,
which are supplemented by this section.
SECTION TITLE
260548 VIBRATION CONTROLS
270010 SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS
270526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
270528 RACEWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY
271000 STRUCTURED CALBING SYSTEM
281000 SECURITY SYSTEMS
C. The Division 26 electrical contractor shall provide conduit infrastructure to support the CCTV
system. The CCTV contractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure the
proper location and placement of this equipment. Conduit shall be provided from the CCTV
device, to a location of accessible space. The CCTV contractor shall provide all necessary j-
hooks to route their wire and cable from this location to the nearest cable tray or
communications room. Where available, the CCTV contractor can utilize cable tray
infrastructure provided by other to route their cabling throughout this facility. Within the
communication rooms all conduit necessary to route cabling from a rough-in location, to and
between equipment racks or panels, shall be provided under this scope of work.
D. Network components, wiring, and fiber optic cabling shall conform to all owner requirements,
standards, and practices.
1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor selected for this project must be a direct manufacturer authorized representative
of the product they propose to provide. All technicians assigned to install and configure this
system shall be factory trained and certified for the proper installation of this equipment. The
contractor must have a minimum of 3 qualified and factory trained technicians to support this
system. This company must be of established reputation and experience, regularly engaged in
the supply and support of such systems for a period of at least five consecutive years under the
current company name. This company shall have a fully staffed office of sales and technical
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 2
support representatives within a 2-hour travel time to this project.
B. The contractor, as a minimum, must carry a current state issued limited energy license.
1.4 SPECIFIED SYSTEM
A. The following CCTV manufacturer has been used as the basis for this design:
1. IDIS Cameras
a. Milestone - Network Video Recording SoftwareSolution
1.Recording system is an existing system
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. The CCTV System shall be fully integrated with other security components such as access
control, alarm monitoring, and intercom communications. All cameras shall be continuously
recorded through digital video recorders.
B. The system shall be fully integrated with the access control application to allow events to be
directly linked to the surveillance recording:
C. All cameras shall be connected and controlled through an graphical user interface on a pc
workstationexisting system. This monitoring shall allow viewing individual cameras, camera
group, tour sequences, or the playback of previously recorded events.
1.6 RESPONSE TO SPECIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall submit a point-by-point statement of compliance with all relevant sections
defined herein.
B. The statement of compliance shall consist of a list of all numbered paragraphs within these
sections.
Where the proposed system complies fully with the numbered paragraphs as written, such shall
be indicated by placing the word "comply" opposite the paragraph number.
Where the proposed system does not comply with the paragraph as written, but the Contractor
feels it will accomplish the intent of the paragraph in a manner different from that described, a
full description of the intent perceived by the Contractor shall be provided as well as a full
description of how the proposal will meet its perceived intent.
Where a full description is not provided, it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not
comply with the paragraph in question.
C. Any submission that does not include a point-by-point statement of compliance as described
herein, shall be subject to disqualification from consideration as non-compliant.
D. Documentation in support of substitute equipment shall qualify all parameters with tangible
values in the response notations or on the manufactures original data sheets and shall not
include vague statements such as “limitless” or “virtually limitless”. Submissions documents
using this type of statement shall be considered non-compliant.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions of products proposed to be equal to those specified herein will be considered only
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 3
when the following requirements have been met:
1. A complete list of such substituted products including drawings and data product sheets.
2. Substitute equipment must be a standard part of that system’s current product line and
should meet or exceed the capabilities of the equipment specified herein. Beta, Specials,
or “One Time” products will not be acceptable. If proposed substitutions do not meet or
exceed the performance levels specified herein, the limitations of this equipment must be
highlighted and brought to the attention of the consulting engineers. Failure to notify the
engineers of these limitations, whether intentionally or by oversight, may result in
rejection of those components at any time. Should this occur, the contractor will be
required to replace the rejected equipment with pre-approved components that meet or
exceed the requirements specified. This will be done at no additional cost to the client.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 20 business days of receiving contract approval and notice to proceed, the following
items shall be submitted to the consulting engineers for review and approval. Submittals shall
include, but not be limited to:
1. Product numbers, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment.
2. All wire and cable type and size.
3. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all devices.
4. Single-line drawings representing the entire system.
5. Termination details.
6. Course outlines for each of the end user training programs. The course outlines shall
include the course duration, pre-requisites, and a brief description of the subject matter.
7. Proposed method of wire marking, panel labeling, zone identification, and terminal strip
numbering.
8. Project milestone schedule.
9. Template for weekly progress report.
1.9 REFERENCES
A. Design and operation of the system shall conform to the following referenced codes,
regulations, and standards as applicable:
National Electrical Code (NEC)
Electronic Industry Association ANSI/EIA/TIA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Underwriters Laboratories UL 294, UL 639, and UL 1037, UL 1076
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CRF Part 15 and 90
Applicable Federal, State, and Local Laws, Regulations, and Codes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NETWORK CCTV VIDEO RECORDING & CONTROL SOFTWARE
A. IP Network based Digital Video Surveillance System (“System”) shall allow the display of live,
record and playback of digital video streams from multiple video surveillance IP cameras,
simultaneously, on the System’s operator console and/or on other display and control platforms
including clients, virtual matrix display, PDA and Cell phone.
B. The system shall run as a Windows Service without the user interface or as a Windows
Application with the user interface. The system shall have the option to use Active Directory
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 4
services to authenticate remote users. The system shall support DNS entries. The system shall
communicate and receive video image streams from IP addressable Cameras using IP
protocol.
C. The system shall support IP cameras and encoders using MJPEG, MPEG4, Wavelet and H264
compression simultaneously. The system shall support traditional analog cameras via video
server adapters using IP protocol. The system shall control PTZ cameras using IP protocol.
D. The system shall have the ability to view, record, playback and archive video from cameras
located at remote locations over the IP network (multi-location recordings). The system shall
allow the access to view/playback multiple cameras from other workstation on the network. The
system shall simultaneously record, playback and display live video and audio (Triplex). The
system shall be scalable to support any number of cameras with multiple consoles.
The system shall support cameras running at the background – hidden from the console
operator.
The system shall provide the capability to record audio with the associated camera, when audio
recording is necessary and the camera has audio feature supported by the software. The
system shall allow time synchronized multiple cameras view/playback with motion detection
information.
E. The system shall have automatic (maintenance free) daily archiving capabilities of recorded
video with automatic archive recycling. The system shall allow automatic off-premises video
archiving on off-premises storage servers. The system shall be able to perform multiple
archiving per day.
F. The system shall provide 24 hours scheduler to activate and deactivate the following features
on a per camera basis:
1. Bring cameras on/off line
2. Sound audible alarm on motion detection in camera’s field of view
3. Send e-mail/text pager/SMS notification on motion detection events with/without video
image attachment.
4. Start/stop and change patrolling sequence for PTZ cameras.
G. The system shall provide the operator with presets position per PTZ camera and the ability to
quickly cause the camera to move to a preset location upon operator demand. The system shall
have the ability to provide PTZ camera patrolling feature between preset positions. Shall be
able to program unlimited number of patrolling sequences, each with unlimited number of
presets list selected from 50 possible presets. The system shall have the ability to move a PTZ
camera to any of the preset positions upon detecting motion at another camera.
The system shall be able to control PTZ movement speed during patrolling for selected
supported PTZ cameras. The system shall be able to control the patrolling sequences using a
24/7 scheduler. Shall be able to resume patrolling an operator manual control times out without
moving the PTZ.
The system shall have the option not to record while moving between presets and shall stay in
a preset position if motion was detected in the camera field of view at that preset position, and
shall continue patrolling once motion stopped.
The system shall have the ability to move a PTZ camera to any of the preset positions upon
detecting software command from 3rd. party software (access control). Shall have the ability to
cause the PTZ camera to go to any of the preset positions on input contact closure/open (such
as door sensor, alarm panel input etc.). Shall support closure and open of remote relay output
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 5
at the IP cameras and /or video server adapters. Shall be able to detect close/open relay input
from the camera’s location and trigger alarm/event on the System. Shall have the ability to
detect door contacts or PIR motion detector input and cause a PTZ camera to move and zoom
into the door and record the activity, to increase protection of sensitive areas.
H. The system shall have the ability to adjust image resolution to megapixel up to 2,048 x 1,536
lines. The system shall have the ability to adjust the compression level of the video image data
size, to save on storage size, when needed. The system shall have the ability to record and
store images at rates between 1 frame per hour to 30 frames per second for on a per camera
basis. Shall have the option to speed-up the recording FPS on motion detection or on event
detected.
I. The system shall have the ability to store the recorded images on the System’s local hard drive
or on a Network Attached Storage (NAS), or on attached storage (USB, Firewire, and SCSI) if
so required.
The CCTV recording software shall be Milestone.
2.2 MAIN CONSOLE / OPERATOR STATION
A. The system shall include an operator station/console for local video surveillance management.
The system shall support at least 2 display screen per operator console, one for live view of all
cameras, simultaneously (monitoring screen), and the other display for playback, search, video
clips productions, evidence printout and more (viewer screen). Playback and searching shall
not interfere or eliminate the continuous and simultaneous view of the live streaming videos.
B. The system shall allow the operator to zoom, pan and tilt any PTZ camera by using the
System’s mouse or USB joystick.
C. The system shall have Viewer application with the ability to show multiple selected cameras at
the same time with full synchronization between the images.
Playback viewer screen shall provide the operator with ability to skip forward and backward the
video on a frame-by-frame basis, event-by-event basis and provide 3 levels of fast-forward /
backward playback.
Playback viewer screen shall provide the operator with graphical motion level bar for quick
identification of motion events and the ability to access the event by mouse click and drag in to
graph area, on a per camera basis. (Search by activity)
Playback Viewer screen shall provide the operator with search tools to find video sequence by
entering date and time of event. (Search by date/time)
Playback Viewer screen shall provide the operator with search tools to find video according to
motion at certain area of the image (Smart Search). Operator shall be able to define area of
interest in 32x32 grid, define motion sensitivity and frequency.
D. The system shall provide the following general alarm and notification via sound, system
message and e-mail/pager: General System alarms, low video storage space, camera
disconnect.
E. The system shall have export tool of recorded video and audio using the system database
format with date and time stamp. The system shall have the ability to encrypt the database
exported file with user key of minimum 64 bits. The system shall have the ability to compress
the database exported file. The system shall have export tool of recorded video into JPEG or
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 6
AVI formats and the ability to e-mail and store these files. The system shall create AVI for
selection of multiple cameras. The system shall allow AVI File to contain Video and Audio.
The system shall have printer tool to allow the operator to print video image and add operator
name and comments as well as print a system timestamp of the event.
2.3 REMOTE ACCESS VIA WEB SERVER USING INTERNET EXPLORER
A. The system shall provide web server service to allow authorized users to view live video,
playback of recorded video and search the archive to view video using their Internet Explorer
web browser from any PC on the Intranet or Internet, if authorized.
Web browser functionality shall include:
Provide username and password for access control into the System
Define remote user profile and user rights in relation to viewing certain cameras and the
use of PTZ and Output relays.
Navigate to cameras and rooms using and integrated premises map.
View any MJPEG camera on the System, with live video.
Control all 25 PTZ Presets per camera for fast and accurate remote positioning control
Access any recorded video of the current day and the archive for past days, search by
time/date or activity/alarm and playback the video as a stream, frame by frame or jump to
motion detected sequences.
Provide thumbnail images for each new event for easy search.
Create an AVI file video and audio clips of desire sequences with time stamp for local
storage and the ability to e-mail it.
Allow printout of still image with operator comments and timestamp.
Provide a view of live video from 4 cameras, simultaneously.
2.4 REMOTE ACCESS VIA CLIENT SOFTWARE
A. The system shall include Image server service to allow authorized users to view live video,
playback of recorded video and search the archive to view video using installed client software
based on .net technology. The client shall be downloading from the recording server.
Remote client access software shall include viewer/playback clients able to:
Provide username and password for access control into the System
Define remote user profile and user rights in relation to viewing certain cameras and the
use of any function within the client. Define user profile and views as an individual user or
as shared features between multiple users.
Each camera window can be defined as a live/playback camera, map, fixed image, hotspot
and incoming video alarm window.
Select cameras using “drag and drop” from the camera list. Select cameras using
integrated premises map.
Cameras recorded on multiple recorders throughout the network can be viewed on the
same screen.
Create unlimited number of views and screen grids, arranged into groups.
Use clickable maps to call different camera views.
Full PTZ control includes sending the camera to any of the 25 presets. Control PTZ
camera with Point and Click. Control selected supported PTZ camera with USB Joystick.
Synchronized playback of cameras with forward and backward commands, fast forward,
fast backward, forward playback, reveres playback, playback speed control and frame-by-
frame commands. Find recording using Go-To time and date. Find recording using Alarm /
Event list. Find recording using “Smart Search”. Automatic archive search for activity in a
designated area of the image.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 7
Preview clip of any alarm/event sequence of a pop up window.
Export an AVI file to the client desktop.
Print still picture from any camera with operator comments.
Change screen grid and cameras locations selected from pull down menu on the fly.
Arrange grid and cameras location in logical hierarchy of Groups and Views. Set up
camera layout on the grid using drag and drop from the available cameras list.
Able to import alarm list for specific camera and view alarm preview clip
Supports audio feed with the video
2.5 REMOTE ACCESS VIA PDA
Remote PDA access shall include unlimited PDA Client licenses with the ability to:
Monitor and control live fixed and PTZ cameras.
Full PTZ control includes sending the camera to any of the 25 presets.
Select camera, time and date for video playback.
Control playback mode, frame by frame, direction and speed.
View live and playback cameras at full screen mode
2.6 CCTV RECORDING SERVER & STORAGE HARDWARE
A.The computer architecture for the CCTV system will consist of an integrated host network file
servers and video storage server combined in a single rack mountable unitis existing. The
contractor will be responsible for the purchase, setup, installation, and configuration of all
necessary hardware and software components required to support the added cameras
B.of this systemBasis of Design: Milestone Network Management. See Paragraph B below for
calculations to be used for storage estimates.
C. Video Storage Configurations:
The network video appliance shall include a SAS storage drive with Raid 6 redundancy sized
for 14-days real-time video recording of megapixel cameras. It must meet or exceed all
requirements referenced below:
The following design requirements have been used to determine the minimum storage
calculations for this project. See riser diagrams on project design drawings for additional
information:
1920 x 1080 recorded resolution; H.264 recording format; 30 FPS (frames per second); 50%
motion; 12 hour activity per day; level-10 high quality minimum compression; 14-days storage
retention; +20% spare storage capacity overhead.
The contractor shall work closely with the Owner and Consulting Engineer during setup &
programming to optimize the final settings. It's anticipated that night time recording will be set
for motion activation only. Hours per day may vary by site so all contractors shall use the
above referenced criteria for all storage calculations.
C. Video Appliance - Platform:
The video appliance platform shall be a combined server and scalable, shared storage
platform, eliminating the need for commodity IT servers and storage, and specifically designed
for physical security requirements.
The video appliance shall leverage video surveillance optimization technology that supports
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 8
write-intensive, non-sequential, large block recording to the built-in disk drives without
fragmenting the recorded video.
The video optimization will eliminate the risk of storage performance degradation and eventual
failure with continued use that can impact commodity storage.
The video appliance shall eliminate the need for commodity servers, by providing the server
component as part of the video appliance device.
The video appliance shall leverage physical security oriented technology that eliminates
commodity servers on a minimum of a one server for one appliance basis for standard video
recording.
The video appliance shall also have the option to eliminate commodity servers on a minimum of
two servers for one appliance for standard recording of one VMS, standard local viewing or
recording of another VMS, simultaneously.
The Video Management System (VMS) shall provide a simple, automated setup process from
power up through to activation of the preloaded VMS software USB media kit without requiring
access to the Intranet, CDs or DVDs.
D. Video Appliance - Technology:
The video appliance platform shall provide a physical security-oriented graphical user interface
(GUI), a set of management & information screens, to provide ongoing management of the
video appliance storage component.
Upon completion of the basic setup process, the system should be in a standard Windows
environment (initial purchase choice of Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003 or Windows
2008), ready for insertion of a USB media kit containing the selected VMS application.
Be equipped with a security-oriented operational interface, based on familiar physical security
terminology, instead of requiring extensive IT storage knowledge, support and retraining.
Leverage video optimization technology that supports write-intensive, non-sequential, large
block recording to the video storage platform’s storage capacity without fragmenting the
recorded video over long periods of use.
Provide an advanced, physical security-proven, and shared underlying IP-SAN (IP Storage
Area Network) technology to support modular growth and support of multiple NVR servers or
other IP connected physical security devices simultaneously, rather than less capable and less
expandable direct attached storage (DAS) or network attached storage (NAS) systems
commonly used for general IT.
Allow modular recording capacity growth without halting the video surveillance system, by
supporting the plugging in of one to three storage modules that are immediately available to the
system.
Eliminate the risk of lost video through advanced RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disk)
protection.
Eliminate the risk of halted recording and playback, by leveraging hot-swap disk drives.
Offload Windows Operating System (OS) and Video Management System (VMS) overhead and
storage requirements onto a pair of redundant, mirrored SATA-II disk drives.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 9
E. Video Appliance Platform - Server Component:
The video appliance platform server component shall feature at a minimum:
Fault resilient 1U configurations for dual VMS application environments with:
(2) Intel Quad Core Xeon CPUs.
DDR2 ECC SDRAM System Memory with 1333/1066/800 MHz system bus
Hot-Swap SATA-II Hard Drives configured for RAID-5 protection
(2) 1GbE Ports
ATI ES1000 graphics card w/ 2650x1600 resolution with one DVI/VGA port
Preloaded Windows OS (Server 2008 R2) Standard Edition w/ (5 CAL) OS Upgrade for.
Preloaded video-optimized, virtualized storage OS.
Preloaded On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc. (OnSSI) NetDVMS / Siemens Siveillance
Fusion
Preloaded VMS USB media kit.
300W AC power supply, 100-240V, 50-60Hz, 5 Amp.
Protective, locking front bezel
Rack mount kit for 1RU
Basis of Design:
F. Video Appliance Platform - Storage Component:
The video appliance platform storage component shall feature at a minimum:
Fault resilient 2U configurations for dual VMS application environments with:
Hot-Swap SATA-II Hard Drives configured for RAID-6 protection
(1) 1GbE Port
Preloaded Windows OS (Server 2008 R2) Standard Edition
Preloaded video-optimized virtualized storage OS.
300W AC power supply, 100-240V, 50-60Hz, 5 Amp.
Protective, locking front bezel
Rack mount kit for 2RU
Basis of Design:
G. Administration & Management:
Web Based Access: The video appliance platform shall provide web-based browser access
(such as by Microsoft Internet Explorer) for administration and management.
The video appliance platform shall support unattended operation for at least multiple weeks to
months, and shall also:
1. Not require frequent monitoring or adjustment for normal operations.
2. Be able to perform without shutting down for regular system maintenance.
3. Be able to operate unattended without operator supervision.
4. Be able to operate without requiring shutdown or significantly degraded performance for
disk defragmentation processes and maintenance.
5. Be able to maintain recording performance in 24x7x365 environments, without system
throughput and recording/playback performance degradation.
6. Provide automated alerting and event notification of system issues via email and
messaging to designated personnel, and via SMTP interfaces with management
frameworks in environments so equipped.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 10
The video appliance platform shall provide user-settable automated alerting for advanced
users.
Automated alerting shall be supported via the graphical user interface, which can receive
system and user-determined alerting.
Email/pager alerting shall be provided.
Alerting through the SNMP protocol to management frameworks for environments so equipped
is provided.
At a minimum, alerts shall be issued by the video appliance platform for:
1. System failures.
2. Component failures.
3. Failing conditions.
4. Threshold maximums.
Pre-set conditions, including available space, performance, unexpected loss of video feeds
from the cameras or NVR’s, and factors impacting overall video retention.
The video appliance platform shall provide visual reporting for routine metrics including capacity
utilization, CPU utilization, storage volume configurations, disk groups, etc., that the security
operator can use to easily understand storage system status and operating health.
H. Video Recording Standards:
The video appliance platform shall support seamlessly various common standards, as
supported by attached IP and megapixel cameras, as well as DVRs, NVRs, and servers.
These may include H.264, CIF, 2CIF, QCIF, 4CIF and 8CIF compression and standard
graphics file formats including JPEG, MPEG, MPEG-1,-2,-4 & BMP in multiple real time/time
lapse formats.
CCTV still, motion, full motion, time lapse, pan/tilt/zoom day/night/infrared digital and analog
camera feeds with multiple FPS and resolution rates shall also be supported.
I. Environmental Requirements & Certifications:
The video appliance platform shall operate within standard environmental conditions common
for physical security systems, including security operations centers, command centers, wiring
closets, and similar environments.
Operating temperature range shall be 10 to 35°C (50 to 104°F).
Operating humidity range shall be 8% to 90% non-condensing.
Standard equipment certifications shall be applicable to the video appliance platform, including
RoHS compliant 5/6, UL (USA), EN 6095/IEC 60950 Compliant, CB Report, CCC Certification.
J. Warranty and Support:
All video appliance platforms and components shall be supported through a comprehensive
three year manufacturer’s hardware warranty, and with one year of included software updates,
including major, minor and maintenance releases for the appliance.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 11
VMS systems are covered separately by their manufacturer’s warranty.
Coverage shall include telephone, web and email access to technical support, with web
reporting and online incident tracking.
Coverage shall include next business day spares replacement. Available upgrades shall
include extended coverage, same day advanced spare replacement, and onsite assistance
options.
2.7 INTERIOR / EXTERIOR VANDAL RESISTANT FIXED MEGAPIXEL MINI-DOME HD IP
CAMERA
A. The camera shall include microSD memory card slot for local storage during loss of network
communications. The internal recording memory will allow the buffering of up to 60MB of pre &
post alarm recordings.
B. The camera shall support Day/ Night operations through an automatically removable infrared-
cut filter. The camera shall support the following minimum illuminations: 3.3 - 10mm lens:
(Color): 0.3 lux, F1.3, (B/W): 0.0 lux, (IR LED on). The camera shall have a shutter speed of
1/30 s to 1/8000s. The camera lens shall provide the following Field of View (FoV): 99.8°~52.2°.
The camera shall utilize 1/2.8” Progressive Scan CMOS image sensor with DC Auto Iris with a
maximum resolution of 1920 x 1080 (2MP).
C. The camera shall support the following video streaming formats: Multi-stream H.264, Motion
JPEG, and controllable frame rate and bandwidth VBR/ MBR H.264. The camera shall support
real-time frame rate of video at 30fps (Frames per Second) in all format resolutions.
D. The camera shall support the following image settings: Compression, color, brightness,
sharpness, contrast, white balance, exposure control, exposure zones, wide dynamic range –
Dynamic Contrast, fine tuning of behavior at low light, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, including
Corridor Format, mirroring of images, text and image overlay, privacy mask. The camera shall
include intelligent video motion detection, active tampering alarm, and audio detection.
E. The camera shall support Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af Class 3. The camera shall
have the following connectors: RJ-45 10/100 BASE-T 1 port.
F. The camera shall support the following security protocols: Password protection, IP address
filtering, digest authentication, user access log, IEEE 802.1X network access control, HTTPS
SSL encryption.
G. The camera shall support the following network protocols: DirectIP Protocol Mode,
RTP/RTSP/TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SNTP, uPNP, SMTP, mDNS.
H. The camera shall have a clear polycarbonate transparent dome lens cover with a tamper-
resistant plastic casing.
The camera shall support an operating temperature range of 14°F to 122°F (-10°C to 50°C)
with 0% - 90% relative humidity (non-condensing).
The camera shall include smoked polycarbonate transparent dome cover.
I. The Standard Interior fixed megapixel dome network camera with auto day/ night low-light
capabilities and HDTV 1080p video format support shall be the IDIS DC-D2233R, or an
approved equal.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 12
2.8 EXTERIOR VANDAL RESISTANT FIXED 2 MEGAPIXEL BULLET HD IP CAMERA
A. The camera shall be equipped with a minimum of 128 MB Flash memory and 128MB RAM
memory. Depending on the current settings, this memory will allow the buffering of up to 60MB
of pre & post alarm recordings. The camera shall include microSD/ SDHC memory card slot for
local storage during loss of network communications.
B. The camera shall support Day/ Night operations through an automatically removable infrared-
cut filter. The camera shall support the following minimum illuminations: 3.3 - 10mm lens:
(Color): 0.01 lux, F1.3, (B/W): 0.0 lux (IR LED ON). The camera shall have a shutter speed of
1/30s to 1/10000s. The camera lens shall provide the following Field of View (FoV): 94°~50°.
The camera shall utilize 1/3” Progressive scan CMOS image sensor with P-iris, Varifocal,
capabilities with a maximum resolution of 1920 x 1080.
C. The camera shall support the following video streaming formats: Multi-stream H.264, Motion
JPEG, and controllable frame rate and bandwidth VBR/ CBR H.264. The camera shall support
real-time frame rate of video at 30fps (Frames per Second) in all format resolutions.
D. The camera shall support the following image settings: Compression, color, brightness,
sharpness, contrast, white balance, exposure control, exposure zones, backlight compensation,
wide dynamic range, fine tuning of behavior at low light, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, mirroring
of images, text and image overlay, privacy mask. The camera shall include intelligent video
motion detection, active tampering alarm, and audio detection.
E. The camera shall support Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af Class 3. The camera shall
have the following connector: RJ-45 10/100/1000BASE-T PoE. The camera shall have a built
in microphone for two-way audio streaming and shall include external microphones jacks using
3.5mm line level mic input/ output. The camera shall support the following audio formats:
G.711 u-Law (8 kHz); G.726 (16 kHz).
F. The camera shall support the following security protocols: Password protection, IP address
filtering, digest authentication, user access log, IEEE 802.1X network access control, HTTPS,
SSL encryption.
G. The camera shall support the following network protocols: Direct Protocol, RTP/RTSP/TCP,
HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SNTP, uPNP, SMTP, mDNS, FEN.
H. The camera shall have a vandal-resistant housing that is IP66 and NEMA 4X-rated casing
(polyester polycarbonate blend).
The camera shall support an operating temperature range of -40°F to 131°F (-40°C to 55°C)
with 0% - 90% relative humidity (non-condensing).
The camera shall include smoked polycarbonate transparent dome cover, mounting bracket,
cable shield, weather shield, 16ft (5 m.) length of network cable with pre-mounted gasket.
I. The Exterior Vandal Resistant fixed megapixel network camera with auto day/ night low-light
capabilities and HDTV 1080p video format support shall be the IDIS DC-T3233HRX or an
approved equal.
2.9 FIBER OPTIC VIDEO TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS
A. The module shall support the transmission of 10 or 100 Mbps over a single-mode or multimode
fiber. The module shall support the Ethernet data interface and be IEEE 802.3 compliant. The
unit provides Auto Network Detection for MDI/MDI-X cabling, making plug and play easy. The
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 13
unit can be set to auto-negotiate data rates or be set to either rate by a user selected dip switch
and can be set for half duplex or full duplex transmission. The module shall require no in-field
electrical or optical adjustments or in-line attenuators to ease installation. The module shall
provide power, fiber link and Auto-Negotiate status indicating LED’s for monitoring proper
system operation. The modules shall provide automatic re-settable solid-state current limiters
and independent voltage regulators on each module to reduce the chance of a single point
failure of the system. The module shall be hot swappable in a rack mount system to reduce
complete system shut down during maintenance or repair. The module shall have an MTBF of
>100,000 hours and operate in an environment of –40˚ C to +74˚ C and relative humidity
between 0% to 95% (non-condensing). The module shall be UL and ULC listed. The circuit
board shall be UL 94 flame rated and meet all PCI standards. All PC boards shall be
designated with part number, PC board number and show appropriate revision number.
Housing shall be of all metal construction. All LED indicators and both electrical and mechanical
connections shall be identified with silk-screened labels. The module shall have a lifetime
warranty to reduce system life cycle cost in an event of a module failure. Where required
provide a fiber optic card cage with power supply and rack mount kit for this system. The
Ethernet data transceiver system shall be IFS D7100E series components or an approved
equal.
1. Transmitter IFS D7120WDMA or an approved equal.
2. Receiver IFS D7120WDMB or an approved equal.
2.11 NETWORK ELECTRONICS
A. All network electronics shall be manufactured by Cisco or an approved equal. Reference the
drawings for any additional part numbers and the location for the placement of this equipment.
All network electronics shall be provided under this scope of work.
The active network switch for the CCTV & Security systems shall a Cisco Catalyst model WS-
C3750G-24PS-S with IEEE 802.3af, PoE, 4 SFP-based Gigabit Ethernet ports and 24 -
10/100/1000 network ports an approved equal.
2.12 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Equipment Racks:
1. General: Provide equipment racks to house headend equipment as indicated on the
drawings. All racks shall be bonded to the UPS ground system using a standard ground
lug and #6 jacketed green cable.
2. Racks shall be steel construction and conform to EIA standard 19” wide and 32” deep
equipment mounting with 1.75” center spacing.
3. Equipment racks shall include but shall not be limited to:
a. Lockable doors
b. Power strips & surge protection.
c. Ground bar connection kit
d. Vertical cable organizers
4. See plans for air-conditioned enclosures to mount electronics. Multiple units may be
required at some locations.
2.13 CCTV CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
A. The rack mountable CCTV power supplies shall be UL listed, 115 VAC 50/60, 24 VAC output
through 16 individually fused outputs at 7amp supply current with surge protection. Total
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 14
output current rating shall be equally divided among the fused outputs to support the CCTV
system. The power supply shall be housed in a modular 2RU 19-inch EIA standard rack mount
enclosure. The enclosure shall include a sliding rear section for easy access and a removable
faceplate. Each rack mount power supply shall include spare fuses, an AC power LED
indicator, internal On/Off switch, and the appropriate rack mounting hardware. All CCTV low
voltage power supplies for this project shall be Altronix R2416UL.
B. The wall mounted CCTV power supplies shall be UL rated, 115 VAC input, 24 VAC output
through 8 or 16 fused outputs. Total output current rating shall be equally divided among the
fused outputs to support the CCTV system. Power supply shall be housed in NEMA 1 hinged
cover enclosures where mounted indoors and in fully weatherproof NEMA 4 enclosures when
located outdoors or in an exposed or covered area. All enclosure doors shall be key lockable,
keyed alike, and shall include a tamper switch for monitoring by the security system. Each
power supply shall include spare fuses, an AC power LED indicator and appropriate mounting
hardware. All low voltage power supplies shall be Altronix ALTV-2416ULX or an approved
equal.
2.14 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY - UPS
A. All wall mounted low voltage power supplies shall receive a 2-hour battery backup unit with
additional battery support space available within the same cabinet. These devices shall be
maintained utilizing trickle charge power pack to sustain optimal performance.
B. All headend hardware mounted in equipment racks shall receive UPS power supplies with
integrated surge protection. Minimum runtimes in the event of total power loss shall not be less
than 10 minutes. The UPS for these systems shall be APC Smart-UPS SU2200RMXL3U with
network management card AP9617 or an approved equal.
C. All computer workstations shall receive UPS power supplies with an integrated surge protector.
Minimum runtimes in the event of total power loss shall not be less than 15 minutes. The UPS
for these systems shall be APC Smart-UPS 1400 or an approved equal.
2.15 SURGE PROTECTION
A. All CCTV components shall be provided with surge and lightning protection. Provide UL listed
multi-stage protection on all low voltage and signal transmission lines. All 120 VAC surge
suppression devices shall be EDCO HSP121BT-1RU or an approved equal. For low voltage
connections provide FAS-1 surge suppressors manufactured by EDCO or an approved equal.
For coax connections provide CX-06-BNCY line protectors manufactured by EDCO or an
approved equal. For Cat-6 connections provide CAT6-5POE line protectors manufactured by
EDCO or an approved equal.
2.16 WIRE & CABLE
A. All proposed wire and cable shall meet or exceed the recommendations established by the
equipment manufacturers, and shall comply with all state and local codes.
B. Visually inspect all wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends at
all times with acceptable end caps.
C. Provide grommets and strain relief materials where necessary to avoid abrasion and excess
tension on wire and cable.
D. All penetrations through fire rated barriers shall be provided with appropriate fire stopping
materials in accordance with NFPA requirements and local fire authority having jurisdiction.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 15
E. All coaxial cabling used on this project shall feature a DC resistance rating of less than 15ohm
per 1000 feet. All coaxial cable shall have a solid copper center conductor and 95% pure
copper braided shield. All video cable connectors and terminations shall be 3-way crimp-on
type and shall including connector cables for 24 VAC input and video/data coax output. Twist
on style connectors will not be acceptable for any terminations on this project.
F. Installation of Category 6 cable shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA guidelines.
1. The maximum pulling tension shall not exceed 25 pounds to avoid stretching the
conductors.
2. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall not be less than 4x the outside diameter
of the cable.
3. The cable shall be installed without kinks or twists and the application of cable ties shall
not deform the cable bundle.
4. Strip back only as much cable jacket as is required to terminate the cable and the amount
of untwisting in a pair as a result of the termination shall not exceed 0.5 in.
G. Cables of similar signal level shall be bundled together and kept physically separate from
power cords, plug strips or other circuits with different potential. Reference specification
271000 for additional structured cabling requirements, all cabling for the CCTV system must
fully conform to this section. Exposed wire bundles or individual cables shall be neatly secured
with self-clinching nylon "TY-Raps" (Thomas & Betts or equal). Lacing of cables shall not be
permitted.
2.17 NETWORK CABLING
A. All network Category 6 cabling required to support the CCTV system between the
communication room and camera shall be provided by the Structured Cabling Contractor. The
security contractor shall be responsible for providing all certified patch cords between the
camera and this jack. Additionally, under this scope of work, within the communication rooms
and between hardware in the equipment racks, the contractor shall provide & install this
cabling. For exterior pole mounted cameras the contractor shall provide and install all network
cabling between the Ethernet fiber modules and the cameras.
2.18 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks, and terminals shall be clearly identified by pre-
printed labels or tags. Direct ink markings on the cable shall not be acceptable. The
permanent markings shall clearly indicate the function, source, and destination of all cabling,
wire, and terminals. Schematic legends shall be placed inside all terminal cabinets to assist
with identification.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Upon project commencement, the Contractor shall provide qualified technical personnel on-site.
Personnel shall be present on each consecutive working day until the system is fully functional
and ready to begin the testing phase of this project.
B. During the installation process the contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of as-built shop
drawings, which shall always be available for review by the client and/or consulting engineers.
This set of documents should be clearly annotated with as-built data as the work is performed.
These documents will be reviewed as part of the approval process when evaluating payment
request applications. At a minimum, the drawings should contain the following information:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 16
1. Quantity and location of all equipment installed.
2. Cable and wire runs along with the designations tags assigned to each.
3. Wiring diagrams that indicate terminal strip layout, identification, and terminations.
C. The contractors Project Manager shall maintain continuous coordination with the consulting
engineers. The engineers shall be kept informed of the progress and all conflicts that arise
during the course of this project. Prior to the start of construction the contractor shall submit a
complete plan and schedule for proposed operations. This schedule should include information
relevant to number of employees assigned to the project, work hours, etc.
3.2 DISTRIBUTION WIRING FOR THE CCTV SYSTEM
A. The provision and installation of all supporting conduit infrastructure and cabling, as required to
support the equipment specified herein, shall fully conform to all requirements, standards, and
practices identified under associated specification sections 270010, 271000, 270528, 270526.
B. Should a conflict arise between a requirement identified herein and the above referenced
specification sections the most stringent requirement shall apply. All conflicts encountered
during the course of this installation must be brought to the attention of the construction
manager, architect, and engineer for resolution prior to proceeding with this work.
C. The CCTV system shall utilize a network of fiber optic, coax, and data cabling. Cables and
terminations of runs shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Fiber optic cables shall
terminate on Fiber Distribution Centers in the vertical rack. All cable shall be terminated in an
alphanumeric sequence at all termination locations. All terminations shall comply with, and
shall be tested to EIA/TIA standards for Category 6 installations and EIA/TIA standards for fiber
optic cable. All coaxial cabling used on this project shall feature a DC resistance rating of less
than 15ohm per 1000 feet. All coaxial cable shall have a solid copper center conductor and
95% pure copper braided shield. All video cable connectors and terminations shall be 3-way
crimp-on type and shall including connector cables for 24 VAC input and video/data coax
output. Twist on style connectors will not be acceptable for any terminations on this project.
Reference specification 271000 for additional structured cabling requirements, all cabling for
the CCTV system must fully conform to this section.
D. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as
outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) article 760. All cabling shall have CMP and/or
appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed.
Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by
this contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Sealing
material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner that is
acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Creation
of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations as shown on the
drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor’s work. Any openings created by or for
this contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work.
E. The contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a
result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary.
F. The wiring in this project will in some places be installed above ceilings, under ground, in
conduit under raised floors or any combination of the above. All cabling used throughout this
project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in National Electric Code (NEC) article
760. All cabling shall have CMP and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they
are installed.
G. Video Cable:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 17
1. Integrity: A time domain reflectometer (TDR) shall be used to verify the integrity of all
installed video cables and connectors. See requirements as listed under contractor
testing
2. System Labeling: All system cameras, housing, cables, power supplies, video adapters,
and monitors shall be labeled with numbers corresponding to camera numbers shown on
the contract drawings.
3. Weatherproofing of Exterior Connections: All video connectors exposed to the exterior
atmosphere (exterior outlet boxes, camera housings, etc., shall be filled with an inert
silicon 'grease' equal to Dow Corning DC #5 compound before mating with opposite
connector half. The connection shall then be completely covered with heat shrink tubing.
All connectors, whether located indoors or outdoors, shall be crimp on type.
4. Cleaning and Finishes:
a. Cleaning: Upon completion all exterior equipment surfaces shall be cleaned of
fingerprints, paint splatters, and other foreign substances.
b. Repair: Any exposed surface that has been scratched or damaged shall be
restored to like-new condition.
c. Debris: All wire trimmings, mortar, and foreign debris shall be removed from
equipment areas.
5. Wire Dress and Routing:
a. All system wiring shall be neatly routed.
b. Cables of similar signal level shall be bundled together and kept physically
separate from power cords, plug strips, audio cabling, or other circuits with different
potential. Exposed wire bundles or individual cables shall be neatly secured with
self-clinching nylon "TY-Raps" (Thomas & Betts or equal). Lacing of cables shall
not be permitted.
c. Tooling used to provide connectors shall be specifically designed for the connector
being used.
H. Support of Cables:
1. Video cables used in this system are to be installed within ceiling spaces, underground,
under raised flooring or in conduit where indicated. Cables shall be routed through these
spaces at right angles to electrical power circuits and supported only from the structure.
Cables shall be supported at intervals of not more than 48" on center.
2. Use of ceiling tiles, grid or hanger wires for support of cables shall be prohibited.
3. The system contractor shall install a complete set of supporting category 6 hooks, and
fasteners and other supporting hardware for cable run under raised floors for this system
as part of the contract. All supporting hardware shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval prior to installation.
I. Grounding & System Conductors:
1. A #6 AWG stranded copper wire cable shall be extended between the ground bar located
at the racks and the UPS ground point. This ground conductor shall be utilized for
equipment, termination, equipment rack, and computer equipment grounding.
2. All power circuits, line, and low voltage shall include an equipment conductor or equal to
the phase neutral conductors.
J. Workmanship:
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 18
1. Components of the distribution system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner
consistent with all best practices.
2. Wiring color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughout
the building.
3. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform.
3.3 WARRANTEE
A. During the first year of service the contractor shall ensure that manufacturer certified repair and
maintenance personnel are available for Emergency Service calls twenty-four (24) hour a day,
three hundred sixty five (365) days a year. The maximum on-site response time for emergency
services shall not exceed four (4) hours.
B. Emergency Service shall be defined as the loss or failure of any critical component necessary
to maintain the overall integrity of building security. Service of this nature shall be provided to
the client as indicated under the Guarantee section.
C. Normal Service shall be defined as minor repairs or adjustments to components of the system.
Service of this nature shall be provided to the client during normal business hours of operation.
Service calls requested by the client shall be addressed by the contractor prior to close of
business, on the following business day.
3.4 GUARANTEE
A. All systems, equipment, and materials provided under this scope of work shall be guaranteed
by the Contractor for a period of not less than three (3) years. This guarantee shall cover the
cost for all warranty service including, labor, materials, programming, and shipping charges.
Coverage shall also include telephone support for designated security personnel, and all
software updates made available by the system manufacturer. During the first year of service
the contractor shall also provide two (2) inspection visits for the purpose of preventive
maintenance.
3.5 EXTENDED SERVICE
A. Prior to final acceptance testing, and within thirty 30-days of project completion, the contractor
shall submit to the client an option to purchase extended service coverage. This proposal shall
provide for the purchase option of 1, 3, or 5, year coverage. Coverage shall include provisions
for Labor, Materials, Programming, and General System Maintenance.
3.6 SPARE PARTS
A. Prior to completion of this project the contractor shall submit a list of recommended spare parts
for this system. These recommendations shall be based upon the contractors and
manufacturers experience with this equipment’s performance history and critical impact the
device has in overall system operations.
B. All cost estimates submitted for additional equipment shall remain at the same rate provided in
the original contract documents.
3.7 CONTRACTOR TESTING
A. Each strand in fiber optic cables shall be tested for correctness of termination and overall
transmission loss using an approved fiber optic transmission loss test instrument (OTDR).
System loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1300 nanometers of the completed
installation.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 19
1. A certification report shall be provided listing the OTDR results and both the calculated
and measure loss for each fiber optic circuit. The report shall be submitted with the test
results as called for above.
B. All testing of CCTV cabling shall be provided in conformance with the requirements established
under associated specification 271000.
C. Camera presets and integration with the security system shall be tested and verified. All alarm
events shall activate the associated camera(s) and provide the predetermined view of the
specified area.
D. The contractor shall develop a report that indicates a complete listing of all equipment and
alarm monitoring points in this facility. This list shall be used as a guide during testing to
ensure that all components are inspected. The personnel conducting these tests shall indicate
the following information on this form:
1. Name of person conducting test
2. Date of test
3. Time of test
4. Results of test
Upon successful completion of tests, the log file(s) generated by this activity shall be printed
and submitted along with the testing documents, to the client and consulting engineer for
review.
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 20
3.8 PREPARATION FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All components shall be inspected to ensure they have been properly installed, securely
attached, and remain clean and unmarred.
B. All equipment shall be properly adjusted, clearly labeled, and fully operational.
C. All broken, damaged, or modified items such as walls, door frames, ceiling tiles, etc., shall be
replaced or properly repaired to the satisfaction of the client.
D. All extra or spare materials shall be delivered and stored on the premises as directed.
E. Test report of all system components shall be completed and available for inspection as
indicated herein.
F. Four (4) sets of Individual factory issued Equipment Manuals containing all technical
information on each piece of equipment. Advertising brochures or information instructions shall
not be used in lieu of technical manuals and information. Documents shall be placed in
appropriately sized 3-ring binders, properly labeled for content enclosed.
G. Four (4) sets of Individual factory issued Operation Manuals containing all technical information
on the system. Advertising brochures or information instructions shall not be used in lieu of
technical manuals and information. Documents shall be placed in appropriately sized 3-ring
binders, properly labeled for content enclosed.
H. Four (4) complete sets of As-Built drawings.
I. Statement of Guarantee including date of termination, and the name/telephone number of
person to be called in the event of equipment failure.
3.9 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION
A. Before the system is turned over to the owner, the manufacturer shall provide 5 days, 40
minimum hours of system operations training on-site using the new equipment.
B. Provide 2 days, 16 minimum hours, of technical training in system setup, maintenance,
troubleshooting, and service of this system.
C. Training shall be conducted during normal business hours of the client, at a date and time of
mutual convenience to the Client and Contractor.
D. A dedicated representative employed full-time for this purpose by the system manufacturer,
shall conduct all training. Representatives of a local dealer operation shall not be considered
acceptable
3.10 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
A. As-built documents shall be provided as part of this contract. As-built drawings shall be a
complete set of AutoCAD Release 2008 floor plans drawings, riser diagrams, and wiring details
indicating the layout and interconnection of the system. The original project floor plan disk shall
be obtained from the consulting engineer. All cable routings and elevation of each outlet, tie,
and riser cable terminations shall be required. All addendum information or project revision
resulting in drawing changes that occur during the construction period shall be documented and
included in the as-built material. All required as-built documentation is mandatory and shall be
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 20 00 - 21
required prior to project closeout. A complete set of prints with all changes shall be submitted
to the Engineer’s for review. Upon completion of the Engineer’s review, the Contractor shall
provide an updated CD-ROM disk containing the electronic drawing files and (4) reproducible
set of Mylar drawings. This information must include final As-Built conditions and the
Engineer’s review comments if any.
3.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. After testing reports, as-built drawings, and required manuals have been submitted for review,
the Contractor shall coordinate a date for Final Acceptance Testing.
B. Testing and acceptance of this system will take place in the presence of the Consulting
Engineer and the Clients designated personnel.
C. Acceptance of the system shall require a demonstration of all system components to evaluate
their performance and reliability. Prior to this test, the system must have been online for a
period of sixty (60) days with an uptime of no less than 99%. Should a major equipment failure
occur, the Contractor shall replace the defective component and continue with the test. Any
items discovered during final inspection which require the contractors attention, shall be
promptly addressed. These items will then be re-inspected by the Consulting Engineer for
approval.
D. Upon the completion of acceptable Final Acceptance Testing the Contractor shall submit all
finalized project documentation and associated electronic media. Upon approval from the
Consulting Engineers and the Client, the Owner will issue a Letter of Completion to the
Contractor indicating the date of such completion. This notice will serve as Client acceptance
of this system.
END OF SECTION 28 2000
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction - Change Order 01
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 1
SECTION 28 3111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The fire alarm system shall be an extension/expansion of the existing fire alarm system
provided under the Stage 1 scope of work. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Heat detectors.
5. Notification appliances.
6. Firefighters' two-way telephone communication service.
7. Magnetic door holders.
8. Remote annunciator.
9. Addressable interface device.
10. Control relays.
11. Connection to kitchen hood fire extinguishing equipment panels.
12. Connection to pre-action fire sprinkler system control panels at the Multiform Hall, deluge
panels at the Multiform under-floor seating area and pre-action panel at the Multiform Hall
Cassette.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Non-coded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors
and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General Submittal Requirements:
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 2
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to
Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
3. Include battery-size calculations.
4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that
each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity
possible when air-handling system is operating.
5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector
housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter
in NFPA 72.
2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
3. Record copy of site-specific software.
4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of
the same name and include the following:
a. Frequency of testing of installed components.
b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.
c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.
5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 3
7. Copy of NFPA 25.
G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data
files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm
Level IV technician.
C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from
single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as,
an extension of existing system.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.
F. Warranty: The contractor shall provide warranty service at no additional cost to the owner for a
period of 3 years from the date of substantial completion of the installation. A copy of the
manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided with the closeout documentation and included with
the operation and installation manuals.
1.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Comply with UL 864.
B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for three
years.
C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow
Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 4
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.
2. Fire Alarm Strobes: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1
unit.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no
fewer than 1 unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match the
existing fire alarm system provided under Stage 1 of the work. The fire alarm manufacturer is
expected to be provided by one of the following:
1. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct smoke detectors.
5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
7. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.
8. Fire-extinguishing system operation.
9. Fire standpipe system.
B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.
8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system
panel.
9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
10. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
11. Activate emergency lighting control.
12. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
13. Record events in the system memory.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 5
14. Record events by the system printer.
15. Refer to the fire alarm system matrix for sequence of operations upon fire alarm system
activation.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
6. Break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate
at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with
electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.
a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and
printer.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for
adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit].
b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity
range of the device.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the
programming and control menu.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 6
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 line(s) of 80 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style E.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 7.
d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.
D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control
unit.
2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control
unit and detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E. Elevator Recall:
1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall.
a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.
b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.
c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.
2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to
move the cars to the alternate recall floor.
3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room
shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay
to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.
F. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in
smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated
changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and
sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted
values on system printer.
H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,
and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 7
I. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant
microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided.
1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different
announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use
of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by
an NRTL.
a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at
same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.
b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.
c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."
d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by
NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance
circuits of fire-alarm control unit.
2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the
status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.
3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units,
on primary equipment failure.
J. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify
zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and
time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print
system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands
initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system
and a historical log of events.
K. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, and supervisory signals shall be
powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-
supply module rating.
L. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
M. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass
cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under
normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 8
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with
integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to
permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-
powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.
4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on
status.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.
a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit
for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall
be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.
c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 9
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with
the supplied detector.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.6 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a
rate of rise that exceeds [15 deg F] <Insert temperature> per minute unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 190 deg F.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal
circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
B. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
a. Selectable and defaulted to 110 cd unless otherwise noted.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 10
3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, shall be selected by the architect to be either red
or white.
C. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:
1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.
3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.
4. Mounting: surface mounted and bidirectional.
5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker
location.
2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with
matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.
4. Rating: 120-V ac.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm
control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights
shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and
test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address
for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator
recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter is existing; provided under the Stage 1 scope of work.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 11
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive all Stage 2 alarms, supervisory, or trouble signals
from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset
number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall
be transmitted. If service on line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall
initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the
remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report
telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines,
transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.
5. Low battery.
6. Abnormal test signal.
7. Communication bus failure.
E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
2.12 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Printer is existing; provided under the Stage 1 scope of work.
2.13 DEVICE GUARDS
A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector,
gong, or other device requiring protection.
1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.
2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 12
B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not
more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"
Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.
2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"
Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.
3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.
4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high
ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72.
5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 5 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting
fixture.
7. Elevator Equipment Room: Provide one smoke detector within 18” of each fire protection
sprinkler head.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct.
E. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
rating and location.
F. Remote Test Switch, Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector, duct type
smoke detector, and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily
visible from normal viewing position. Location of remote test switch/status and alarm indicator
shall be as determined by the Architect.
G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install speakers and voice intelligible horns on flush-mounted
back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6
inches below the ceiling.
I. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
J. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above
the finished floor.
K. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in
smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect
hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this
Section before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 13
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter
smoke-control system panel.
2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
3. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
6. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
7. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.
8. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
9. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-
reversal condition.
10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
11. Fire sprinkler deluge control panels.
12. Proscenium fire curtain control panel.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground
wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction and Engineer.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Contractor shall engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, as indicated below.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire
Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit 17008.0000
28 31 11 - 14
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm
Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform re-acceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added
or replaced devices and appliances.
E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Provide service contract cost proposal to Owner for Owner’s
option to purchase annual maintenance service contract by manufacturer’s factory-authorized
representative to perform NFPA 72 tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly,
and semi-annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Contractor shall engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. Provide a minimum
of two four-hour training sessions at a day and time to be scheduled by the Owner upon
completion of construction.
END OF SECTION 28 3111
18 September 2018 31 23 03 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 31 23 03 1
BUILDING PAD PREPARATION 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B. Section excludes – see other sections for: 13
14
15
16
17
18
1.2 REFERENCES 19
A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
B. Texas Department of Transportation: TxDOT - 2004 Standard Specifications for Construction 37
of Highways, Streets and Bridges. 38
39
18 September 2018 31 23 03 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1
A. Building pad preparation shall be as described in the Project Geotechnical Report, utilizing the 2
following method(s): 3
4
a. Excavate existing soils to provide depth of engineered fill material shown. 5
b. Remove existing fill materials encountered at base of required excavation (treat as 6
uncontrolled fill). Do not leave existing fill materials beneath required excavation 7
area. Bottom of excavation shall expose suitable firm native soil. 8
c. Place engineered fill in thin lifts and compact 9
1. Reconditioning of Existing Soil 10
d. Excavation existing soil to required depth and stockpile on site. 11
e. Recondition excavated materials for use as engineered fill only if it is free of 12
boulders, concrete, organics, debris, and other unsuitable materials. 13
f. Add moisture to soil, replace in thin lifts and compact 14
B. Recommendations and specifications of the Project Geotechnical Report are based on soil 15
borings taken at discreet locations. No representation is made or implied regarding continuity 16
of conditions between borings. Additional soil borings may be made at Contractor’s expense 17
and option to verify subsoil conditions. 18
2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19
A. Qualifications 20
21
22
23
24
25
B. Pre-construction Conference 26
27
28
29
30
2.3 PROJECT AND SITE CONDITIONS 31
A. Existing conditions: Contractor is responsible for locating and protecting existing underground 32
utilities and building foundations. 33
B. Contractor shall inspect the site for conditions that may adversely affect installation of required 34
building pads and report to the Architect before commencing work. 35
C. Contractor shall be thoroughly familiar with the Project Geotechnical Report. 36
37
18 September 2018 31 23 03 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1
A. Coordinate installation of building pads with excavation, installation and removal of utilities 2
and other site-related activities. 3
3.2 SUBMITTALS 4
A. Product data 5
6
7
B. Samples 8
9
C. Testing and Inspection reports 10
11
12
PART 4 - PRODUCTS 13
4.1 FILL MATERIALS 14
A. Fill material used in building pad, within the perimeter of the building, shall be non-expansive 15
material (select fill or flexible base material) and shall comply with additional requirements 16
(soil content, moisture content, plasticity, and other characteristics as described in the Project 17
Geotechnical Report. 18
4.2 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 19
A. Vapor Retarder 20
21
22
23
a. Acceptable Products: 24
1) Griffolyn Type-65 by Reef Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 750250, 25
Houston, TX 77275, 713.943.0070. 26
2) 10 Mil Stego Wrap by Stego Industries, 28012 Paseo Reposo, San 27
Jaun Capistrano, CA. 92675, 877.464.7834. 28
3) 10 Mil VAPOR-MAT by W.R. Meadows, P.O. Box 338, Hampshire, 29
IL. 60140-0338, 847.214.2100 30
31
32
33
a. Acceptable Products: 34
1) Griffolyn Type-85 by Reef Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 750250, 35
Houston, TX 77275, 713.943.0070. 36
2) 15 Mil Stego Wrap by Stego Industries, 28012 Paseo Reposo, San 37
Jaun Capistrano, CA. 92675, 877.464.7834. 38
3) 15 Mil VAPOR-MAT by W.R. Meadows, P.O. Box 338, Hampshire, 39
IL. 60140-0338, 847.214.2100 40
18 September 2018 31 23 03 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
a. Acceptable Products: 4
1) Premoulded membrane Vapor Seal with Plasmatic Core by W.R. 5
Meadows, P.O. Box 338, Hampshire, IL. 60140-0338, 847.214.2100 6
7
8
9
PART 5 - EXECUTION 10
5.1 EXAMINATION 11
A. Verify and identify required lines, levels, contours and benchmark elevations. 12
B. Locate and identify underground utilities. 13
C. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions. 14
D. Verify that excavations are in proper condition before placing fill material. 15
5.2 PREPARATION 16
A. Protection: 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
B. Surface Preparation: 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
5.3 EARTHWORK 34
A. Excavation 35
36
a. Remove existing fill materials encountered at base of required excavation (treat as 37
uncontrolled fill). 38
b. Remove existing fill materials in building excavation area. 39
c. Remove any undesirable material (organic material, wet, soft, or loose soils). 40
18 September 2018 31 23 03 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
d. Bottom of excavation shall expose suitable firm native soil 1
B. Stockpiling 2
3
a. Do not pile soil within the drip line of trees to remain. 4
b. Locate and retain stockpile away from the edges of excavations. 5
c. Protect stockpile from erosion. 6
d. Dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not suitable for reuse off site 7
premises. 8
C. Excavation stability 9
10
a. Maintain sides and slopes of excavation in safe condition. 11
12
D. Proof Rolling 13
14
15
16
17
18
E. Backfilling 19
20
a. Remove ice, snow or standing water 21
b. Remove debris and trash 22
c. Verify proper subgrade elevation(s) 23
d. Scarify and re-compact soft spots and loose surface materials 24
e. Remove rocks, boulders and loose soil 25
f. Scarify to depth of 6 inches and recompact as described in Project Geotechnical 26
Report. 27
28
a. Backfill in thin lifts, moisturize and compact material as required by the 29
Geotechnical Report. 30
b. Do not attempt to place backfill during rain, snow, or sleet. 31
c. Do not place fill material on frozen ground. 32
F. Moisture control and protection 33
34
35
36
37
a. Use asphalt seal coat where recommended by the Geotechnical Report 38
39
40
a. Maintain and repair existing pavement 41
b. Use asphalt seal coat 42
c. Install a protective layer of select fill material (12 to 18 inches thick). 43
5.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER 44
18 September 2018 31 23 03 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
A. General 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B. Sealing 8
9
10
11
5.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 12
A. Inspection Services: an independent testing agency shall perform the following inspection 13
services: 14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Laboratory Testing 20
21
22
a. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D698, D3017, D2922 or 23
D4318 24
b. Perform one density test for each 3,000 square feet of surface area, or at least 2 25
tests per unit of work. 26
c. Perform additional tests until required density and moisture content are achieved. 27
28
29
END OF SECTION 30
01 May 2018 31 31 16 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 31 31 16
2
3 SOIL TREATMENT
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Treatment of building subgrade for termites.
11
12 1.2 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Product Data: Submit product data and application instructions for termite treatment
15 chemicals.
16 1. Contractor shall maintain material data safety sheets on project site for duration of
17 subsoil treatment in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances.
18
19 B. Certificates:
20 1. Submit evidence that applicator of termite control chemicals is licensed by the Structural
21 Pest Control Board of Texas.
22 2. Submit certificate of complete liability and property damage insurance from applicator
23 with minimum limit of $1,000,000.
24 3. Submit minimum three references for pest control performed by applicator within
25 previous three years.
26
27 1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS
28
29 A. Notify Architect immediately of existing job conditions that affect application of pest control
30 materials required under this Section, or conditions that affect or alter scope of work of this
31 Section, including unforeseen conditions.
32
33 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
35 A. Applicator of pest control chemicals shall be licensed by the Structural Pest Control Board of
36 Texas to handle proposed chemicals, and shall have minimum five years commercial
37 experience applying termite treatment chemicals.
38
39 B. Contractor and applicator shall both attend Pre-Construction Conference. At that time, tour
40 of existing site will be conducted, and sequencing of application will be discussed.
41
42 1.5 WARRANTY
43
44 A. Upon completion of Work, and as condition for final acceptance of Work, provide to Owner
45 with written guarantee stating following and jointly signed by both applicator and Contractor:
46 1. Soil treatment was made with not less than specified concentration rates, with materials
47 and methods specified.
48 2. Effectiveness of treatment is guaranteed for period of one year from date of application
49 to prevent infestation of subterranean termites.
50 3. Contractor has right during warranty period to make period examination of property.
51 4. Owner will have right to renew warranty on annual basis.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 31 31 16 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2
3 PART 2 PRODUCTS
4
5 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
6
7 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
8
9 2.2 MATERIALS
10
11 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
12 one of the following:
13 1. Bayer Environmental Science
14 2. FMC Corporation
15 3. Syngenta Professional Products.
16
17 B. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of
18 authorities having jurisdiction in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes
19 with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil
20 treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application
21 at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each
22 specific use, according to the product’s EPA-Registered Label.
23
24 PART 3 EXECUTION
25
26 3.1 PREPARATION
27
28 A. Surface Preparation:
29 1. Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.
30 2. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs
31 and foundations.
32
33 3.2 APPLICATION
34
35 A. Application Rates: Apply chemicals in rates listed below unless instructions on product label
36 require greater rates or are restricted by governmental regulations.
37 1. Under slabs on grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the
38 following application rates:
39 a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet to soil in critical areas under
40 slabs, including entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of
41 interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electrical conduit penetrating slab,
42 around interior column footers and along expansion and control joints.
43 b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab
44 and attached slab areas where fill material is soil or unwashed gravel.
45 c. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under
46 slab and attached slab areas where fill material is washed gravel or other coarse non-
47 absorbent washed material.
48 d. Dig a trench 6 to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation wall to a depth of not
49 less than 12 inches with punched holes to top of footing at not more than 12 inches
50 o.c. and apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet of trench for each foot
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 31 31 16 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 of depth from grade to top of footing. Mix chemical solution with soil as it is being
2 replaced in trench.
3 2. At grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gallons per 10 linear feet, poured directly into
4 hollow spaces.
5
6 3.3 CLEANING
7
8 A. After completion of chemical application, remove debris and spillage.
9
10 3.4 ADJUSTING
11
12 A. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, re-apply soil treatment
13 with acceptable remedial techniques, and repair or replace damage caused by termite
14 infestation up to limit of $100,000/occurrence, with no aggregate limit on claims during
15 warranty period.
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
19
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018 31 63 29 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
SECTION 31 63 29 1
DRILLED PIERS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes 5
6
7
8
B. Products Installed, Not Furnished Under This Section 9
10
11
C. Basis for Bids 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
D. Unit Prices 21
22
a. Above bearing stratum. 23
b. Within bearing stratum. 24
25
26
27
28
29
1.2 REFERENCES (Latest Edition) 30
A. Specifications of the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors. 31
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 32
33
34
1.3 SUBMITTALS 35
A. Pier Log: for each pier record the following: 36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 31 63 29 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 12
A. Qualifications 13
14
a. Experience shall be relevant to anticipated subsurface materials, water conditions, 15
shaft sizes and special techniques required. 16
17
18
B. Drilled pier construction shall conform to requirements of ACI 336.1, except as modified by 19
requirements of this Section. 20
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 21
A. Store reinforcing cages off of ground and protect from contamination of dirt, grease and 22
corrosion. 23
B. Deliver concrete to site in timely manner and in sufficient quantities to allow concreting of each 24
pier as monolithic unit. 25
C. Coordinate delivery of concrete to allow placement to begin within 8 hours of completion of 26
drilling. 27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 28
2.1 MATERIALS - Refer to related sections for materials installed, not furnished under this section. 29
2.2 FABRICATION 30
A. Prior to drilling pier holes, fabricate reinforcing cages in stock lengths suitable for cutting to 31
required lengths. Bend reinforcing as detailed. 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 31 63 29 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
1
2
3
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 6
A. Prior to beginning installation, review the subsoil investigation report for site provided by 7
Owner; become thoroughly familiar with anticipated subsoil conditions. 8
B. Examine site for obstructions to drilling, such as power lines, utilities, material stockpiles, 9
boulders and uneven surfaces. Report anticipated problems to Architect in timely manner so as 10
not to delay schedule of Work. 11
3.2 PREPARATION 12
A. Have ready at site equipment anticipated to be necessary for successful installation of piers, 13
including power augers, core barrels, belling tools, tremies, hoppers, chutes, and casing, as 14
applicable. 15
B. Maintain in ready condition dowels, templates, and anchor bolts required for pier installation. 16
3.3 INSTALLATION 17
A. Drilling Straight Shaft Pier Holes 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
B. De-watering Pier Holes 27
28
29
30
31
C. Casing Pier Holes 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
18 September 2018 31 63 29 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
D. Placing Reinforcing Cages, Dowels and Anchor Bolts 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
E. Placing and Consolidating Concrete 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
a. Shaft diameter 18 inches or less: 10 feet max free fall 20
b. Shaft diameter 20 to 30 inches: 30 feet max free fall 21
c. Shaft diameter 32 inches or larger: 60 feet max free fall 22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
F. Tolerances 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 41
A. Testing Laboratory and Inspection Services 42
43
a. Determine location of required bearing stratum, measure depth from ground 44
surface. 45
b. Measure overlap of casing into the bearing stratum. 46
18 September 2018 31 63 29 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Construction
c. Measure depth of penetration into stratum. 1
d. Measure shaft diameter. 2
e. Measure casing diameter where casing required. 3
f. Inspect condition of base prior to concreting. 4
5
a. Check bar sizes and quantity. 6
b. Check tying and splicing of cages. 7
c. Monitor placement and securement techniques. 8
9
a. Monitor time interval between drilling and placement. 10
b. Inspect placement techniques and conditions. 11
c. Inspect concrete quality at tops of shafts. 12
13
14
15
B. Adjusting 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
C. Clean-up 32
33
34
END OF SECTION 35
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 14 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 32 13 14 1
2
CONCRETE PAVING FOR LANDSCAPE 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. This Section includes labor, materials, equipment, and appliances necessary to install 9
exterior concrete pavement over prepared subgrades, which includes the following: 10
1. Concrete Subbase 11
2. Concrete Footings. 12
3. Any other non-vehicular Flatwork as shown on plans. 13
14
1.2 SUBMITTALS 15
16
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including expansion joint material. 17
18
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. 19
20
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21
22
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who 23
complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 24
25
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless 26
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 27
28
C. Mock-Up: The landscape architect will approve the following to use as a benchmark 29
throughout the remainder of the project: 30
1. 1 - 4’x4’ square of natural gray concrete with Medium broom finish. 31
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 33
34
2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 35
36
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. 37
38
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and 39
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacturer 40
bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 41
42
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS 43
44
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, 45
and source throughout the Project: 46
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 14 - 2 17008.0000
48
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. 49
Provide aggregates from a single source. 50
51
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 52
53
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 54
55
56
E. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, of type suitable for application, certified by 57
manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 58
percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 59
60
F. Asphaltic fiber expansion joint material only. No wood expansion joints will be allowed. 61
62
2.3 CURING MATERIALS 63
64
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth. 65
66
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene 67
sheet. 68
69
C. Water: Potable. 70
71
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for 72
application to fresh concrete. 73
74
E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 75
dissipating. 76
77
F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, 78
Class B. 79
80
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS 81
82
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic 83
fiber. 84
85
2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES 86
A. Compressive Strength 28 Days, 4000 psi. 87
B. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 88
C. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch. 89
D. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent. 90
91
92
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 14 - 3 17008.0000
2.6 CONCRETE MIXING 93
94
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete 95
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and 96
used in the Work. 97
98
PART 3 - EXECUTION 99
100
3.1 EXAMINATION 101
102
A. Plate compact prepared base surface below concrete pavements to identify soft pockets 103
and areas of excess yielding. 104
105
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION 106
107
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement 108
to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of 109
work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. 110
111
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from 112
concrete without damage. 113
114
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 115
116
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and 117
supporting reinforcement. 118
119
3.4 JOINTS 120
121
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line 122
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right 123
angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 124
125
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and 126
at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless 127
pavement terminates at isolation joints. 128
129
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of performed joint-filler strips abutting concrete 130
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where 131
indicated. 132
133
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into 134
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints per the drawing details. 135
136
E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 137
1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool 138
marks on concrete surfaces. 139
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 14 - 4 17008.0000
140
F. Within 12 hours of finishing. 141
142
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 143
144
A. Moisten base to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. 145
146
B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing 147
concrete. 148
149
C. A boom truck may be required to access areas that are to be protected and areas that are 150
difficult to reach. 151
152
D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not 153
push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 154
155
E. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. 156
157
F. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and 158
uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do 159
not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading 160
surface treatments. 161
162
3.6 FLATWORK 163
164
A. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared 165
and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with 166
power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. 167
Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface 168
immediately to uniform granular texture. 169
170
B. Finishing: 171
1. Trowel Finish: Provide smooth surface before applying the salt particles. Hard trowel to 172
densify surface. Do not over-trowel or start troweling late. 173
a. Hand Trowel: Use steel trowel. 174
b. Machine Trowel: Use steel trowel blades. Use steel-reinforced plastic trowel 175
blades such as Poly-Pro from Wagman Metal Products, Inc. 176
(www.wagmanmetal.com). 177
178
2. Abraded Surface: 179
a. Method: Sand Blast Finish, apply where indicated on plans. Perform sand blasting 180
at least 72 hours after placement of concrete. Coordinate with formwork 181
construction, concrete placement schedule, and formwork removal to ensure that 182
surfaces to be blast finished are blasted at the same age for uniform results. 183
1) Abrasive blast corners and edges carefully, using back-up boards, to 184
maintain uniform corner to edge lines. 185
2) Sand blast finish: generally expose coarse aggregate; 3/16” to ¼” reveal. 186
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 14 - 5 17008.0000
3) Perform sand blast finishing in as continuous as operation as possible, 187
utilizing the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each 188
surface or area of work. Maintain patterns of variances in depths of cuts as 189
indicated. 190
191
3. Heavy to Fine textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-192
finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-193
line texture. 194
195
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING 196
197
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 198
temperatures. 199
200
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. 201
202
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or 203
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before 204
and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions 205
after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 206
207
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from 208
concrete surface. 209
210
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, 211
curing compound or a combination of these methods. 212
213
3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES 214
215
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 216
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 217
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 218
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 219
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 220
5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 221
6. Expansion Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 222
223
3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 224
225
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does 226
not comply with requirements in this Section. 227
228
B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after 229
placement. 230
231
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 14 - 6 17008.0000
C. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. 232
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial 233
Completion inspections. 234
235
END OF SECTION 236
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 73 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 32 13 73 1
2
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. This Section includes the following: 9
1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 10
11
B. Related Sections include the following: 12
1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement. 13
14
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 15
16
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 17
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 18
19
1.3 SUBMITTALS 20
21
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 22
23
B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product 24
manufacturer. 25
26
C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the 27
following: 28
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for 29
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 30
31
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 32
33
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 34
35
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single 36
manufacturer. 37
38
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 39
40
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels 41
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, 42
curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 43
44
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent 45
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or 46
other causes. 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 73 - 2 17008.0000
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 48
49
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 50
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by 51
joint-sealant manufacturer. 52
2. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. 53
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for 54
applications indicated. 55
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed 56
from joint substrates. 57
58
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 59
60
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 61
62
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in 63
other Part 2 articles. 64
65
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 66
67
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are 68
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and 69
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field 70
experience. 71
72
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 73
74
2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS 75
76
A. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, 77
nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS. 78
1. Available Products: 79
a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. 80
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. 81
82
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS 83
84
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with 85
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications 86
indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 87
88
89
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 73 - 3 17008.0000
PART 3 - EXECUTION 90
91
3.1 EXAMINATION 92
93
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance 94
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions 95
affecting joint-sealant performance. 96
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 97
98
3.2 PREPARATION 99
100
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to 101
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 102
103
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 104
105
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for 106
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 107
108
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of 109
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 110
111
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at 112
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative 113
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 114
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 115
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 116
3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application 117
and replace them with dry materials. 118
119
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same 120
time backings are installed: 121
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 122
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 123
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that 124
allow optimum sealant movement capability. 125
4. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before 126
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to 127
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and 128
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 129
5. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 130
6. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and 131
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 132
133
E. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written 134
instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 135
136
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 13 73 - 4 17008.0000
F. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations 137
indicated. 138
139
3.4 CLEANING 140
141
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by 142
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of 143
products in which joints occur. 144
145
3.5 PROTECTION 146
147
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating 148
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so 149
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite 150
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or 151
deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with 152
repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 153
154
END OF SECTION 155
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 14 50 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 32 14 50 1
2
DECORATIVE STONE 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. Section includes labor, materials, equipment, and appliances necessary to install cobble beds and/or 9
paths in accordance with Contract Documents. Work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, 10
installation of filter fabric (geotextile) layer, edge restraint, and cobble over prepared subgrade. 11
12
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCES 13
14
A. Related Documents: 15
1. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions 16
and Division I specifications, apply to work of this section. Coordinate work of this Section 17
with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to 18
maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 19
2. Related Specification Section 20
a. 31 20 00 – Earth Moving (subgrade preparation) 21
22
B. References: 23
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24
a. C 136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 25
b. D 4354, Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics and Rolled Erosion Control Products 26
(RECPs) for Testing 27
c. D 4873, Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls 28
and Samples. 29
2. National Engineering Handbook, Part 642 30
a. National Standard Material Specification 592 – Class I Geotextile 31
32
1.3 SUBMITTALS 33
34
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data complete with application and installation 35
instructions for all materials and products in this Section. 36
B. Samples: 37
1. A five (5) lb. sample of each cobble of size and color specified in drawings, with sieve analysis 38
as detailed in this specification. 39
2. A 2 ft. x 2 ft. piece of filter fabric (geotextile). 40
3. Steel edge restraint, as detailed in Drawings and elsewhere in this specification. 41
42
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE 43
44
A. Materials and products shall be delivered and stockpiled at a job site location agreed upon by the 45
Owner’s Representative and the General Contractor. 46
47
48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 14 50 - 2 17008.0000
B. Store materials and products per manufacturer’s recommendations. Protective wrappings, ties, 49
and/or packaging shall remain in place until ready for use. 50
51
1.5 MOCK-UPS 52
53
A. At a location selected by Owner’s Representative, install 4 ft. x 10 ft. mock-up of each crushed 54
stone, filter fabric, edge restraint, and prepared subgrade. 55
56
1.6 OBSERVATION OF THE WORK 57
58
A. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be 59
observed at various stages in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be 60
afforded sufficient time to schedule visits to the site. Failure of the Owner’s Representative to make 61
field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this 62
specification. 63
64
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 65
66
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on 67
project site when crushed granite gravel installation is in progress. 68
69
B. Installer: A firm with a minimum three (3) years of experience in the local region with successful 70
installation of similar work on a similar scale. 71
72
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 73
74
2.1 MATERIALS 75
76
A. Crushed Rock: 77
1. Cobble must be uniform in color and in texture. Color shall be “Colorado Salt and Pepper”, 78
4-6” size or approved equal. 79
2. Gravel must be uniform in color and in texture. Color shall be “Silvermist” 1-2” size or 80
approved equal. 81
82
B. Steel Edge Restraint: 83
1. Edging and stakes to be finished by manufacturer in Wrought Iron Black enamel paint. 84
2. Edging size per plan(s) and detail(s). 85
3. Edging fabricated in 10' 0" or 16' 0" sections with anchor stake loops stamped in face of 86
section 32" on center. 87
4. Use 15" tapered steel anchoring stakes (3/16" thick) provided by manufacturer. 88
89
C. Weed Barrier: Woven soil separator/weed barrier to be installed on the path system shall be Pro 5 90
Weed barrier, or approved equal, as through San Jacinto Environmental Supply, 2221 A West 34th 91
Street, Houston, TX 77018, 713-957-0909. 92
93
94
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 14 50 - 3 17008.0000
PART 3 - EXECUTION 95
96
3.1 EXAMINATION 97
98
A. With Owner’s Representative present, examine areas prepared to receive crushed gravel for 99
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with 100
installation only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 101
102
3.2 PREPARATION 103
104
A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft 105
spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, 106
and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. 107
108
3.3 INSTALLATION 109
110
A. Set string lines for alignment of geotextiles if needed. Install geotextiles in accordance with the lines 111
and grades as shown on the plans. Roll the geotextile onto the prepared existing subgrade and pull 112
taut to remove wrinkles. Any defects, rips, holes, flaws, or damage to the material may be cause for 113
rejection. 114
115
B. Place geotextile in one sheet to the greatest extent possible. Where necessary, overlap geotextile 116
panels 8 in. on all exposed edges, ± 2 in. Free edge of the geotextile should extend 4 in. or more 117
beyond the base course and into a location that facilitates drainage. 118
119
C. Cut the geotextile to fit around utility castings, and when contouring for other penetrations and/or 120
gradual curvatures. Geotextile shall be kept free of excessive tension, stress, folds, wrinkles or 121
creases. Secure per manufacturer’s recommendations. 122
123
D. Exposure of geotextiles to the elements between laydown and cover shall be kept to a minimum. 124
125
E. Install steel edge restraints as shown in the drawings and per manufacturer’s recommendations. 126
127
F. Install cobble and gravel in accordance to the detailed drawings. 128
129
3.4 MAINTENANCE 130
131
A. Remove debris by mechanically blowing or hand raking as needed. 132
133
3.5 REPAIRS 134
135
A. Remove and replace damaged decorative stones as needed and comply with this section. 136
137
END OF SECTION 138
01 May 2018 32 17 13 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 32 17 13
2
3 PARKING BUMPERS
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes: Precast concrete parking bumpers and adhesive,
11 1. 100% Recycled material parking bumpers and anchors.
12
13 1.2 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature completely describing precast concrete parking
16 bumpers and adhesive. [
17
18 B. Sustainability Submittals:
19 1. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages of weight of
20 postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for
21 each product having recycled content.
22
23
24 PART 2 PRODUCTS
25
26 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
27
28 A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
29
30 2.2 MATERIALS
31
32 A. Precast Concrete Parking Bumpers:
33 1. Type: 8-1/2" wide x 6" high x 72" long, semicircular in cross section; reinforced with two
34 3/8" diameter bars
35 2. Exposed Surface: Factory cast finish.
36 3. Concrete Compressive Strength: 4,500 psi at 28 days.
37 4. Acceptable Product: Model No. 215, Stripe-A-Zone, Inc.
38
39 B. Adhesive for Concrete: Epoxy as recommended by bumper manufacturer complying with
40 Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation (SDHPT), 1982 Standard
41 Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 575 Epoxy Adhesive.
42
43
44 PART 3 EXECUTION
45
46 3.1 PREPARATION
47
48 A. Clean surfaces to receive bumpers.
49
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 32 17 13 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 B. Buff, grind, sandblast or use other acceptable methods to clean concrete surfaces free of dirt,
2 curing compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose, unsound pavement and other material which
3 would adversely affect bond of adhesive.
4
5 3.2 INSTALLATION
6
7 A. Install parking bumpers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
8
9 B. Concrete Areas:
10 1. Attach parking bumpers on concrete paved surfaces with two 5" diameter spots of epoxy
11 adhesive for each parking bumper.
12 2. Apply wet epoxy so that 100 percent of bonding areas are in contact with bumpers and of
13 sufficient thickness over entire diameter of each adhesive spot.
14
15 C. Asphalt Pavement: Install galvanized steel dowels.
16
17 3.3 CLEANING
18
19 A. Clean excess adhesive off parking bumpers and paved surfaces.
20
21
22 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 32 17 23 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 32 17 23
2
3 PAVEMENT MARKING
4
5
6 PART 1 GENERAL7
8
9 1.1 SUMMARY
10
11 A. Section Includes:
12 1. Pavement striping and handicap symbols.
13
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions
17 including guidelines and templates as required.
18
19 B. Samples: Submit test samples when requested.
20
21 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. Regulatory Requirements: Handicap parking space marking shall comply with State of Texas
24 and City of Coppell requirements.
25
26 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
27
28 A. Apply marking when surfaces are thoroughly dry and when air temperature is above 40
29 degrees F.
30
31
32 PART 2 PRODUCTS
33
34 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
35
36 A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
37 1. Devoe.
38 2. Sherwin-Williams.
39
40 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
41
42 2.2 MATERIALS
43
44 A. Latex Paint:
45 1. Colors: White, yellow, red, and blue as required.
46 2. Acceptable Products - Sherwin Williams:
47 a. White or Yellow: Set Fast Latex Traffic Marking Paint or Acrylic Water Borne Traffic
48 Marking Paint.
49 b. Red or Blue: Metalatex Semi-Gloss Coatings.
50 3. Acceptable Products - Devoe:
51 a. White or Yellow: #416XX Traffic-Line Water Based Traffic Marking Paint.
52 b. Red or Blue: #83XX Mirrolac W.B.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 32 17 23 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 B. Paint Primer: As recommended by paint manufacturer.
3
4
5 PART 3 EXECUTION
6
7 3.1 EXAMINATION
8
9 A. Ensure new concrete and asphaltic concrete paving has cured for 30 days minimum prior to
10 application of pavement marking.
11
12 3.2 PREPARATION
13
14 A. Clean surface of scale, dirt, mud, sand, gravel, oil, grease and other foreign material.
15
16 B. On portland cement concrete, apply primer for striping as recommended by paint
17 manufacturer to act as barrier coat with curing compound.
18
19 C. Layout lines and symbols in advance of marking application. Space control points at intervals
20 to ensure accurate location of markings.
21
22 3.3 PAINT STRIPING APPLICATION
23
24 A. Lay out markings using guide lines, templates and forms as required. Use white paint to
25 match existing to distinguish parking spaces. Use red paint for fire lanes.
26
27 B. Apply 4" wide strips at manufacturer's recommended rate.
28
29 C. Stencil "FIRE LANE - NO PARKING" in 4" high white block letters on red background 6"
30 high and of appropriate length for lettering background at intervals not closer than 25 ft. and
31 not farther apart than 50 ft. on curbs and pavement throughout length of Fire Lane.
32
33 D. Stencil "HANDICAPPED PARKING SPACE" on curb in 4" high white block letters on
34 blue colored background 6" high and of appropriate length for lettering background and
35 provide wheelchair logo in parking stall.
36
37 E. Place suitable warning signs near work site to alert approaching traffic from all directions to
38 prevent damage to newly painted surfaces.
39
40 3.4 PROTECTION
41
42 A. Protect pavement markings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 35 19 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 32 35 19 1
2
INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. Section Includes: 9
1. Integrally colored finishes for site-cast concrete. 10
2. If this Section conflicts with Related Sections: 11
a. This Section takes precedence for matters that affect concrete appearance. 12
b. Related Sections take precedence for matters that do not affect concrete 13
appearance. 14
c. In case of conflicts, notify Landscape Architect for clarification. 15
16
B. Related Sections 17
1. Related Site Cast Concrete Sections: 18
a. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving": Basic requirements for concrete and 19
coordination of sample submittal. 20
b. Division 32 Section "Concrete Joint Sealants": Colored sealants for joints. 21
22
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 23
24
A. ACI 301 – Structural Concrete. 25
26
B. ACI 303.1 – Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete. 27
28
C. ACI 305.1 – Hot Weather Concreting. 29
30
D. ACI 306.1 – Cold Weather Concreting. 31
32
E. ACI 308R – Curing Concrete. 33
34
F. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 35
36
G. ASTM C309 – Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 37
38
H. ASTM C979 – Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 39
40
1.3 SUBMITTALS 41
42
A. Product Data: 43
1. Color additives. 44
2. Curing products. 45
3. Proprietary cleaning agents. 46
4. Surface retarders. 47
48
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 35 19 - 2 17008.0000
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate extent of each color of integrally colored concrete, finishes, and 49
materials used to produce sandblast finish. 50
51
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit color additive manufacturer's color chart. 52
53
D. Samples for Verification: Submit sample chip of specified concrete colors indicating Davis 54
color name. 55
56
E. Qualification Data: For Installer. 57
58
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 59
60
A. Perform work in accordance with: ACI 301, ACI 303.1, ACI 305.1, ACI 306.1, ACI 318. 61
62
B. Obtain each material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in 63
workmanship throughout Project. 64
65
C. Installer Qualifications: Concrete work shall be by firm with 5 years’ experience with work 66
of similar scope and quality. 67
68
D. Field Samples: Submit three samples 24 by 24 inches indicating concrete color range and 69
texture. 70
71
E. Integrally Colored Concrete Mock-Up: 72
1. Provide full-scale mock-up under Division 01 Section Quality Control. Construct at 73
least one month before start of other concrete work to allow concrete to cure before 74
observation. 75
2. At location acceptable to Landscape Architect, demonstrate methods used for 76
construction, including forming and finishing conditions required for Project using 77
materials, workmanship, joint treatments, and curing methods to be used throughout 78
Project. 79
3. Accepted mock-up provides visual standard for work of Section. 80
4. Mock-up may remain as part of Work. Remove mock-up when no longer required 81
for comparison with finished work. 82
83
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 84
85
A. Color Additive: Deliver, store, and handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 86
87
B. Concrete: Schedule delivery to provide consistent mix times from time color additive is 88
placed in mixture until placement of integrally colored concrete. 89
90
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 91
92
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS 93
94
A. Cements: 95
1. Types and Colors: As specified in section 32 13 14 concrete paving. 96
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 35 19 - 3 17008.0000
97
B. Fine Aggregate: 98
1. Types and Colors: As specified in section 32 13 14 concrete paving. 99
100
C. Coarse Aggregate: 101
1. Types and Colors: As specified in section 32 13 14 concrete paving. 102
103
D. Water: Clean and potable. 104
105
E. Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. 106
107
2.2 COLOR ADDITIVES 108
109
A. Manufacturer: Davis Colors, or approved equal. 110
1. Contact Information: 111
a. Phone: 800-356-4848 or 323-269-7311. 112
b. E-mail: info@daviscolors.com. 113
c. Web Site: www.daviscolors.com. 114
115
B. Type: 116
1. Concentrated pigments specially processed for mixing into concrete and complying 117
with ASTM C979. 118
2. Color additives containing carbon black are acceptable. 119
120
C. Color Additive Delivery: 121
1. Automated Dispensing: Meter and dispense colors using computer-controlled 122
automated color weighing and dispensing system. Use Davis Colors Chameleon 123
liquid metering system and Hydrotint liquid color additives. 124
2. Manual Dispensing: Use Davis Colors Mix-Ready powdered color additives in pre-125
measured disintegrating bags. 126
127
2.3 CONCRETE FLATWORK 128
129
A. Surface Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; for application to fresh 130
concrete. 131
132
B. Curing Compound for Flatwork: Davis Colors W-1000 Clear Cure & Seal; complying with 133
ASTM C309 and designed for use on integrally colored concrete, or approved equal. 134
135
C. Moist Curing Blankets: McTech Group (www.mctechgroup.com) UltraCure SUN 136
disposable curing blankets designed for use on colored or decorative concrete and to keep 137
surface of concrete moist for seven days, or approved equal. 138
139
2.4 ACCESSORIES 140
141
A. Reinforcing Bar Supports: Use corrosion-resistant types at locations contacting exposed 142
surfaces 143
144
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 35 19 - 4 17008.0000
B. Joint Sealants: 145
1. Provide type specified in Section 32 13 73 “Joint Sealants”. 146
2. Color: Color selected by Landscape architect from manufacturer's full range to 147
match integrally colored concrete. 148
149
C. Cleaning Agents: Use products known to be compatible with integrally colored concrete. 150
151
2.5 MIXES 152
153
A. Slump: 4 inches. If greater slump is required, use water-reducing or super-plasticizing 154
admixture; do not add water. 155
156
B. Color Additives: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix until color 157
additives are uniformly dispersed throughout mixture and disintegrating bags, if used, have 158
disintegrated. 159
160
C. Do not retemper mix or add water in field. 161
162
2.6 CONCRETE COLORS 163
164
A. Concrete Colors: 165
a. Davis Colors, Mesquite 677. 166
167
B. Concrete Colors: Provide color additives that, along with specified concrete materials, 168
result in concrete to match existing concrete landscape architects sample. 169
170
C. Concrete Colors: 171
1. Provide colors to be selected by landscape architect. Allow for up to one color for 172
Project. 173
2. Provide colors from color additive manufacturer's standard color line. 174
175
PART 3 - EXECUTION 176
177
3.1 EXAMINATION 178
179
A. Do not place integrally colored concrete where standing water is present. 180
181
3.2 INSTALLATON 182
183
A. Comply with color admixture manufacturer’s recommendations unless otherwise specified 184
in this Section. 185
186
3.3 FLATWORK 187
188
A. Finishing: 189
1. Trowel Finish: Provide smooth surface before applying the salt particles. Hard 190
trowel to densify surface. Do not over-trowel or start troweling late. 191
a. Hand Trowel: Use steel trowel. 192
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 35 19 - 5 17008.0000
b. Machine Trowel: Use steel trowel blades. Use steel-reinforced plastic trowel 193
blades such as Poly-Pro from Wagman Metal Products, Inc. 194
(www.wagmanmetal.com). 195
2. Abraded Surface: 196
a. Method: Sand Blast Finish, apply where indicated on plans. Perform sand 197
blasting at least 72 hours after placement of concrete. Coordinate with 198
formwork construction, concrete placement schedule, and formwork removal to 199
ensure that surfaces to be blast finished are blasted at the same age for uniform 200
results. 201
1) Abrasive blast corners and edges carefully, using back-up boards, to 202
maintain uniform corner to edge lines. 203
2) Medium Sand blast finish: generally expose coarse aggregate; 3/16” to 204
¼” reveal. 205
3) Perform sand blast finishing in as continuous as operation as possible, 206
utilizing the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each 207
surface or area of work. Maintain patterns of variances in depths of cuts 208
as indicated. 209
B. Curing 210
1. Apply AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth and ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or 211
white burlap-polyethylene sheet in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 212
Apply curing at consistent time for each pour. 213
2. Maintain concrete between 65° and 85°F during curing. 214
215
3.4 APPEARANCE TOLERANCES 216
217
A. Appearance: Minor variations in appearance of integrally colored concrete that are similar 218
to natural variations in color and appearance of uncolored concrete are acceptable. 219
220
3.5 CLEANING 221
222
A. Efflorescence: Remove efflorescence as soon as practical after it appears and as part of 223
final cleaning. 224
225
B. Maintain control of concrete chips, dust, and debris in each area of the work. Clean up and 226
remove such material at the completion of each day of operation. Prevent migration of 227
airborne materials by use of tarpaulins, wind breaks, and similar containing devices. 228
229
C. Use least aggressive cleaning techniques possible 230
231
D. If proprietary cleaning agents are used, pre-wet surface, test cleaning agent on small, 232
inconspicuous area, and check effects prior to proceeding. Thoroughly rinse surface 233
afterwards with clean water. Follow cleaner manufacturer's instructions. 234
235
E. Do not use muriatic or hydrochloric acid on integrally colored concrete. 236
237
END OF SECTION 238
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 84 00 - 1 17008.0000
1
SECTION 32 84 00 2
3
PLANTING IRRIGATION 4
5
PART 1 - GENERAL 6
7
1.1 SUMMARY 8
9
A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers, specialties, controls, and wiring for 10
automatic control irrigation system. 11
12
B. The irrigation system shall comply with Ordinance #1886 “Plumbing Ordinance” 13
Section 614 regulating Irrigation Systems. 14
15
1.2 DEFINITIONS 16
17
A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain 18
valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. 19
20
B. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution 21
piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system 22
pressure. 23
24
1.3 SUBMITTALS 25
26
A. Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models 27
for the following: 28
1. System valves. 29
2. Specialty valves. 30
3. Control-valve boxes. 31
4. Sprinklers. 32
5. Irrigation specialties. 33
34
B. Operation and maintenance data. 35
36
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37
38
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 39
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 40
and marked for intended use. 41
42
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 43
44
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 45
A. As indicated on the drawings. 46
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 84 00 - 2 17008.0000
47
2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS 48
49
A. PVC Pipe: Main Line: Class 200 PVC pipe. 50
51
B. PVC Pipe: Lateral Lines: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Class 200. 52
1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466. 53
54
2.3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES 55
56
A. PVC Ball Valves: MSS SP-122, nonunion type, with full-port ball, socket or threaded 57
detachable end connectors, and pressure rating not less than 150 psig. 58
59
2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES 60
61
A. Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm 62
type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 63
1. Manufacturer as indicated on the drawings. 64
65
B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned pea gravel 3/8-1/2 inch. 66
67
2.5 SPRINKLERS 68
69
A. Description: Plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform 70
coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure. 71
1. Manufacturer as indicated on the drawings. 72
73
2.6 AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM 74
75
A. Manufacturer as indicated on the drawings and notes. 76
77
PART 3 - EXECUTION 78
79
3.1 EARTHWORK 80
81
A. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks and paving per the drawings. 82
B. 83
Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 84
1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches. 85
2. Lateral Piping: 12 inches. 86
3. Sleeves: 18 inches. 87
88
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS 89
90
A. Irrigation Water Meter to Backflow Prevention Assembly: Type K copper piping and 91
fittings per the drawings. 92
93
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 84 00 - 3 17008.0000
B. Underground Irrigation Main Piping: Class 200 PVC pipe and socket fittings; and 94
solvent-cemented joints per the drawings. 95
96
C. Lateral Piping: Class 200 PVC pipe and socket fittings per the drawings and details. 97
98
D. Sleeves: Class 200 PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 99
100
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS 101
102
A. Control Valves: Per the drawings. 103
104
3.4 INSTALLATION 105
106
A. Install piping free of sags and bends. 107
108
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. 109
110
C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 111
112
D. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components. 113
114
E. Lay piping on solid base, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 115
116
F. Irrigation system shut-off valve shall be placed within 5.0’ of the water meter and located 117
on private property. 118
119
G. Control Valves: Install in control-valve box. 120
121
H. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is 122
completed. 123
124
I. Locate sprinkler heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from paved surfaces. 125
126
J. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases per the drawing. 127
128
K. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches below or 129
beside piping. 130
131
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 132
133
A. Backflow prevention device shall be tested by a certified tester. 134
135
B. Backflow test report shall be submitted to the Town within thirty (30) days of the date of 136
the permit and prior to the irrigation system final inspection: 137
138
C. A certificate of calibration for the gauges used in the test. 139
1. A registration form for the certified tester. 140
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 84 00 - 4 17008.0000
2. A copy of the tester’s certificate/license. 141
3. NOTE: The gauges must be shown to the building inspector for verification of 142
calibration. 143
144
D. A final inspection shall be requested by the irrigator and include: 145
1. Activation of related zones to verify that water does NOT spray directly on the 146
public sidewalk, on the street, nor on the adjacent property. 147
2. Verification that copper water line was used between meter and backflow prevention 148
assembly. 149
3. Verification that no public property is damaged due to the installation of the 150
irrigation system. 151
4. Verification that backflow device test cocks are properly plugged with non-ferrous 152
screws. 153
5. Verification of 12” air space clearance & 6” of gravel below DCA. 154
6. Verification that no part of the irrigation system is located in the easement or alley 155
right of way. 156
157
E. Remove and replace units and re-inspect as specified above. 158
159
F. All trenches shall be compacted and refilled/leveled as required throughout the 160
maintenance period. 161
162
G. All work areas shall be kept clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris in any 163
area accessible to students and staff. 164
165
3.6 ADJUSTING 166
167
A. Adjust settings of controllers. 168
169
B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required 170
for each sprinkler circuit. 171
172
C. Adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish 173
grade. 174
175
176
END OF SECTION 177
178
179
180
181
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 92 00 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 32 92 00 1
2
TURF AND GRASSES 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. Section Includes: 9
1. Sod. 10
2. Seed Mixes 11
12
1.2 DEFINITIONS 13
14
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. 15
16
B. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified 17
to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. 18
19
C. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top 20
surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. 21
22
D. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of 23
organic matter and soil organisms. 24
25
1.3 SUBMITTALS 26
27
A. Certification of sod source. 28
29
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30
31
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time 32
supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. 33
34
B. Topsoil Analysis: Contractor shall furnish soil analysis from stockpiled existing topsoil 35
to be re-used on site. Test shall be performed by a qualified soil-testing laboratory, such 36
as the Texas A&M Extension service. 37
1. Test Type: Report suitability of topsoil for Sports Field Turf. State recommended 38
quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be 39
added to produce satisfactory topsoil. 40
41
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 42
43
A. Initial Lawn Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of 44
landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after 45
each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less 46
than the following periods: 47
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 92 00 - 2 17008.0000
1. Sodded Lawns: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion. 48
49
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 50
51
2.1 SOD 52
53
A. Sod per the planting schedule. 54
55
2.2 SEED 56
57
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed 58
Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. 59
60
B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species, as follows: 61
1. Drainfield Mix: www.seedsource.com Item #:2861 62
2. Wetland Fringe Mix: www.seedsource.com Item #:1807 63
3. Cereal Rye: www.seedsource.com Item #:8050 64
65
2.3 TOPSOIL 66
67
A. Topsoil: On site soil, stripped prior to mass grading, or imported meeting criteria herein. 68
1. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous 69
materials harmful to plant growth. If stripped topsoil is insufficient in quantity or 70
quality, the contractor shall import, at no additional expense, sufficient soils to bring 71
the site grades to the required elevations. 72
73
2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS 74
75
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; 76
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch 77
sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m. Living Earth compost or approved 78
equal. 79
80
2.5 FERTILIZER 81
82
A. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-83
insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 84
1. Composition: As determined by the Soil Test report required in 1.4.b. 85
86
PART 3 - EXECUTION 87
88
3.1 LAWN PREPARATION 89
90
A. Newly Graded Topsoil: Finish grade by removing stones larger than 1 inch in any 91
dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of 92
them off Owner's property. Till in compost at manufacturer recommended rates. 93
94
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 92 00 - 3 17008.0000
B. Sod Areas with imported topsoil: Apply fertilizer in recommended rates from the Soil 95
Test, then till into 3” of existing soil to create prepared turf areas for Sod. 96
97
C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, 98
uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll 99
and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading 100
to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. 101
102
D. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow 103
surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 104
105
E. Before planting, restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 106
107
3.2 SOD AND SEED INSTALLATION 108
109
A. Sod: Roll sod over the areas identified on the plans with staggered joints. Use a manual 110
roller drum following first watering. Use fine sand to fill joints and re-roll after the first week 111
of watering. Any settling in areas of trenches, or other areas will not be accepted until a 112
smooth, evenly draining slope is obtained. 113
B. Seeding: Contractor shall spread ½” compost over the area to be seeded, then rake in the 114
seed of this specification at the following rates: 115
1. Drainfield Mix: 30 lbs per acre. 116
2. Wetland Fringe Mix: 20 lbs per acre. 117
3. Cereal Rye: 200lbs per acre. 118
119
3.3 LAWN MAINTENANCE 120
121
A. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, 122
replanting, and other operations. Roll, re-grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-123
mulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. Provide materials and installation the same 124
as those used in the original installation. 125
126
B. Mow Bermuda Sod for maintenance. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to 127
cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass 128
height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent 129
mowings. 130
131
3.4 SATISFACTORY TURF 132
133
A. Satisfactory Sod: Fully rooted, evenly colored sod without visible sod joints that has 134
been mowed at least twice. 135
136
B. Un-mown Seeded Areas: A fully rooted stand of mixed vegetation with 80 percent cover 137
over any 10 square feet and bare spots not exceeding 8 by 8 inches. 138
139
140
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 92 00 - 4 17008.0000
A. Use specified materials to reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and 141
continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 142
143
END OF SECTION 144
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 93 00 - 1 17008.0000
SECTION 32 93 00 1
2
PLANTS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.1 SUMMARY 7
8
A. Section Includes: 9
1. Trees. 10
2. Shrubs. 11
3. Groundcovers. 12
4. Mulches. 13
5. Soil Amendments. 14
15
1.2 DEFINITIONS 16
17
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. 18
19
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. 20
21
C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified 22
to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. 23
24
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top 25
surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. 26
27
E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of 28
organic matter and soil organisms. 29
30
1.3 SUBMITTALS 31
32
A. Product Data: 33
1. Compost: Testing report from source with 1 quart plastic sample bag. 34
2. Shredded Bark Mulch: Source material with 1 quart plastic sample bag. 35
36
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37
38
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time 39
supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. 40
41
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying 42
with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." 43
44
45
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 93 00 - 2 17008.0000
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 46
47
A. Do not prune trees before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun 48
scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or 49
bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide 50
protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants 51
during delivery and handling. 52
53
B. Handle planting stock by root ball, taking care not to damage root ball. 54
55
C. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install 56
immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants 57
and trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 58
59
1.6 WARRANTY 60
61
A. Special Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace 62
plantings that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 63
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 64
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of 65
adequate maintenance, neglect, abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond 66
Contractor's control. 67
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. 68
2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: 69
a. Trees and Plants: One year. 70
71
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 72
73
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape 74
Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area 75
is planted and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but 76
for not less than maintenance period below. 77
1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Plants: Three months from date of planting 78
completion. 79
80
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 81
82
2.1 TREE AND PLANT MATERIAL 83
84
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with 85
healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, 86
fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects 87
such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 88
89
B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root 90
ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible 91
before planting. 92
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 93 00 - 3 17008.0000
93
C. Provide container-grown trees. 94
95
D. Plant sizes indicated on Drawings are sizes after pruning. 96
97
2.2 TOPSOIL 98
99
A. Topsoil: 100
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled 101
surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay 102
lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. If existing soil is not 103
suitable for use, the contractor shall import, at his own cost, sufficient topsoil to 104
bring planting bed and turf areas to specified elevations. 105
106
2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS 107
108
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; 109
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; 110
soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m. Living Earth compost or approved equal. 111
112
2.4 MULCHES 113
114
A. Organic Mulch: Ground or finely shredded cedar bark or approved equal. 115
116
2.5 PLANTING SOIL MIX 117
118
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix existing salvaged topsoil with the following soil amendments in 119
the following quantities: 120
1. Install per plans and details. 121
122
PART 3 - EXECUTION 123
124
3.1 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT 125
126
A. Per 2.6A. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, 127
and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 128
129
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, 130
uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish 131
grades. 132
133
C. TREES AND PLANTS 134
135
1. Excavation of Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. 136
Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in 137
drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or 138
smoothed during excavation. 139
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction 32 93 00 - 4 17008.0000
2. Excavate per the drawing details. Auger excavation is prohibited. 140
3. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to 141
ANSI Z60.1. 142
4. Stock with Root Balls: Set trees and plants plumb and in center of pit or trench with 143
top of root ball 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 144
5. Container Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root 145
ball or plant. Loosen or carefully remove circling or girdling roots. 146
6. Organic Mulching: Apply organic mulch per plans and details. Do not place mulch 147
within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 148
149
3.2 TREE PRUNING 150
151
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. 152
153
3.3 PLANTING BED MULCHING 154
155
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated. Provide bark 156
mulch ring around trees in lawn areas. 157
158
3.4 PLANT MAINTENANCE 159
160
A. Tree and Plant Maintenance: Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, 161
weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, and resetting to proper grades or vertical 162
position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to 163
keep and plants free of insects and disease. 164
165
B. Ground Cover and Plant Maintenance: Maintain and establish plantings by watering, 166
weeding, fertilizing, mulching, and other operations as required to establish healthy, 167
viable plantings. 168
169
C. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other 170
contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and 171
maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. 172
173
174
END OF SECTION 175
01 May 2018 33 46 00 - 1 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 SECTION 33 46 00
2
3 SUBDRAINAGE
4
5
6 PART 1 - GENERAL
7
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9
10 A. Section Includes:
11 1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.
12 2. Drainage panels.
13 3. Geotextile filter fabrics.
14
15 1.2 REFERENCES
16 A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
17 1. AASHTO M 252: Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe
18 2. AASHTO M 288: Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications
19 3. AASHTO M 294: Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm Diameter
20 B. ASTM International
21 1. ASTM D 2321: Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
22 Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
23 2. ASTM D 2729: Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and
24 Fittings
25 3. ASTM D 3212: Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
26 Flexible Elastomeric Seals
27 4. ASTM D 4491: Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
28 5. ASTM F 405: Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings
29 6. ASTM F 667: Specification for Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and
30 Fittings
31
32 1.3 SUBMITTALS
33
34 A. Product Data:
35 1. Drainage panels, including rated capacities.
36 2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
37
38
39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
40
41 2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
42
43 A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings:
44 1. NPS 6 and Smaller: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for
45 coupled joints.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 33 46 00 - 2 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 2. NPS 8 and Larger: ASTM F 667; AASHTO M 252, Type CP; or AASHTO M 294,
2 Type CP; corrugated; for coupled joints.
3 3. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.
4
5 B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose
6 joints.
7
8 2.2 DRAINAGE PANELS
9
10 A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite
11 subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing
12 with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with a
13 polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-
14 sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft..
15 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
16 of the following:
17 a. American Wick Drain.
18 b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc..
19 c. Grace, W. R. & Co..
20 d. TenCate Geosynthetics.
21
22 2.3 SOIL MATERIALS
23
24 A. Soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
25
26 2.4 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
27
28 A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range
29 from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.
30
31 B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.
32 1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2.
33 2. Styles: Flat and sock.
34
35
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION
37
38 3.1 EXAMINATION
39
40 A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be
41 installed.
42
43 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
44
45 3.2 EARTHWORK
46
47 A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 33 46 00 - 3 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 3.3 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
3
4 A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete
5 footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions
6 indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide.
7
8 B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
9
10 C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter
11 fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
12
13 D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
14 sections with adhesive or tape.
15
16 E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation
17 subdrainage.
18
19 F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe
20 to perform tests.
21
22 G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away
23 from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.
24
25 H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter
26 fabric.
27
28 I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping
29 edges at least 4 inches.
30
31 J. Install drainage panels on foundation walls as follows:
32 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials.
33 2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at base of footing. Install as indicated in Part 3 "Piping
34 Installation" Article.
35 3. Separate 4 inches of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches of core. Wrap
36 fabric around end of remaining core.
37 4. Attach panels to wall beginning at subdrainage pipe. Place and secure molded-sheet
38 drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall.
39
40 K. Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth
41 layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish
42 elevations and slope away from building.
43
44 3.4 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
45
46 A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but
47 before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 33 46 00 - 4 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required
2 slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
3
4 B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
5
6 C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter
7 fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
8
9 D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
10 sections with adhesive or tape.
11
12 E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab
13 subdrainage.
14
15 F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe
16 to perform tests.
17
18 G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of
19 bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile
20 filter fabric.
21
22 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
23
24 A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated,
25 with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material.
26 Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written
27 instructions and other requirements indicated.
28 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 24 inches
29 unless otherwise indicated.
30 2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping level.
31 3. Lay perforated pipe with perforations up.
32 4. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing
33 upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
34
35 B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and
36 fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
37
38 C. Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.
39
40 3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
41
42 A. Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose
43 banded, coupled, or push-on joints.
44
45 B. Join perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose bell-
46 and-spigot, push-on joints.
47
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 33 46 00 - 5 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1 C. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with
2 special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit
3 materials and dimensions of both pipes.
4
5 3.7 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION
6
7 A. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 33 Section "Storm
8 Utility Drainage Piping."
9
10 B. Install horizontal backwater valves in header piping downstream from perforated
11 subdrainage piping.
12
13 C.Install horizontal backwater valves in piping with manholes or pits where indicated.
14
15 3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
16
17 A. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility
18 Drainage Piping."
19
20 B. Cleanouts for Foundation Subdrainage:
21 1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run
22 and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in
23 piping.
24 2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch
25 fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-
26 place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of cleanout flush with
27 grade.
28 3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron pipe and fittings for piping branch
29 fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-
30 place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above
31 grade.
32 4. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
33 Place Concrete."
34
35 C. Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage:
36 1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at
37 beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts
38 open in direction of flow in piping.
39 2. Use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser
40 extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab.
41
42 3.9 CONNECTIONS
43
44 A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility
45 Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
46
47 B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm
48 drainage system.
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction
01 May 2018 33 46 00 - 6 17008.0000
Issue for Permit
1
2 C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation subdrainage to stormwater sump
3 pumps. Comply with requirements for sump pumps specified in Division 22 Section
4 "Sump Pumps."
5
6 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
7
8 A. Tests and Inspections:
9 1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to
10 ensure free flow before backfilling.
11 2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are
12 satisfactory.
13
14 B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
15
16 3.11 CLEANING
17
18 A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as
19 work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is
20 completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work
21 stops.
22
23
24 END OF SECTION
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
01 May 2018
Issue for Permit
18 September 2018
Issue for Construction